Tender No.

N-19535
TRANSCO 400kV OHL Works for Haffar, ICAD 4
Supply Division – Contracts & ICAD 5 (SASN Retirement)

TENDER NO. N-19535

400kV OHL Works for Haffar, ICAD 4 & ICAD 5

(SASN Retirement)

(April 24)
REV.02

Section IV of VI – Technical Specifications [Page 1 of 7]

 Tender No. N-19535
TRANSCO 400kV OHL Works for Haffar, ICAD 4
Supply Division – Contracts & ICAD 5 (SASN Retirement)

Tender No. N-19535

400KV OHL WORKS FOR HAFFAR, ICAD 4 & ICAD 5

(SASN RETIREMENT)

CONTENTS

VOLUME 1 OF 4

Section I. Invitation to Tender

Section II. Form of AGREEMENT

Section III. Conditions of AGREEMENT and Annexes

VOLUME 2 OF 4

Section IV/1. Technical Specification (Softcopy Only)

Section IV/2 Technical Data Sheets (Softcopy Only)

Section IV/3 Test Procedures and Annexes (Softcopy Only)

Section IV/4 Installation and Energising Procedures (Softcopy Only)

VOLUME 3 OF 4

Section V. Bills of Quantities / Pricing Schedule

VOLUME 4 OF 4

Section VI Drawings and Attachments (Project Specific Drawings & Attachments)

Section VI Drawings and Attachments (Technical Specification Standard Drawings)

Section VI Drawings and Attachments (As Built Drawing)

Section IV of VI – Technical Specifications [Page 2 of 7]

 Tender No. N-19535
TRANSCO 400kV OHL Works for Haffar, ICAD 4
Supply Division – Contracts & ICAD 5 (SASN Retirement)

SECTION IV OF VI TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Section IV of VI – Technical Specifications [Page 3 of 7]

 Tender No. N-19535
TRANSCO 400kV OHL Works for Haffar, ICAD 4
Supply Division – Contracts & ICAD 5 (SASN Retirement)

SECTION IV/1 of VI

Technical Specifications

TITLE No. of Pages

01. General
S-TR-GEN-CDF (Civil Design Fundamental) (Rev.0-2019) 19
S-TR-GEN-EDF (El Design Fundamental) (Rev.0-2023) 10
S-TR-GEN-GDF (Gen Conditions) (Rev.0-2010) 20
S-TR-GEN-ID (Component Marking) (Rev 3-2009)_AN 40
S-TR-GEN-PSTS Project Schedule Technical Specifications (June
39
2023) with Apendix A
S-TR-GEN-SFL (System Characteristics) (Rev.0-2013) 5
S-TR-GEN-SQA - ANNEX-01-1 (Rev.0-2009) 1
S-TR-GEN-SQA (Safety & Quality) (Rev.4-2009)-TR SR&L
23
Accommodation
S-TR-GEN-STC (Spec Tech Requ's) (Rev.0-2021) 11
Cabinet decision No 13 of 2009-Gen stds Labour Accommodation
26
- English
Transco SSR Summary - Guidance for Contractors v3-010809 8
TR-Project Quality Plan (Rev.0-2007) 8
04. Overhead Transmission Line
S-TR-OHL-AIR (Rev.0-2014) 6
S-TR-OHL-CON (Rev.0-2023) 10
S-TR-OHL-GEN (Rev.0-2009) 10
S-TR-OHL-HW (Rev.0-2018) 11
S-TR-OHL-INS (Rev.0-2018) 10
S-TR-OHL-OPGW (Rev.0-2018) 12
S-TR-OHL-SURV (Rev.0-2018) 6
S-TR-OHL-TOWER (Rev.0-2011) 32
11. Earthing and Corrosion
S-TR-CORR (Rev.0-2021) 18
S-TR-EARTH-GROUND (Rev.0-2009) 22
14. Civil
S-TR-CIVIL-CONCRETE (Rev.0-2018) 16
S-TR-CIVIL-FENCE (Rev.0-2009) 5
S-TR-CIVIL-GEN (Rev.0-2009) 9
S-TR-CIVIL-OHL (Rev.0-2018) 33
S-TR-CIVIL-SITE (Rev.0-2014) 8
S-TR-CIVIL-SOIL (Rev.0-2014) 8
S-TR-CIVIL-SURF (Rev.0-2009) 8
S-TR-CIVIL-WORK (Rev.0-2015) 24

Section IV of VI – Technical Specifications [Page 4 of 7]

 Tender No. N-19535
TRANSCO 400kV OHL Works for Haffar, ICAD 4
Supply Division – Contracts & ICAD 5 (SASN Retirement)

SECTION IV/2 of VI

Technical Data Sheets

TITLE No. of Pages

D-OHL-T-220 (Rev.0-2009) 2
D-OHL-T-400 (Rev.0-2009) 2
D-OHL-CON-T-400 ACSR-AW Cardinal (Rev 0-2015) 2
D-OHL-CON-T-400-220-132-ACSR Dove (Rev.0-2015) 2
D-OHL-CON-T-400-ACSS-AW Dove 14EHSA (Rev.0-2023) 2
D-OHL-INS-220-COMP - Dove Conductor (Rev.0-2009) -40mm
3
per kV
D-OHL-INS-400-COMP - Dove Conductor (Rev.0-2023) -40mm
3
per kV
D-OHL-INS-400-COMP - Dove Conductor (Rev.0-2023) -45mm
3
per kV
D-OHL-INS-400-Post -COMP - Dove Conductor (Rev.0-2023)-
3
45mm per kV
D-TR-OHL-INS-400-COMP-SUSP for all (Rev.1-2023) - 45mm
3
per kV
D-TR-OHL-INS-400-COMP-TENS-380KN -Cardinal (Rev.1-
3
2023) - 45mm per kV
D-TR-OHL-OPGW (Rev.0-2017) 6
D-TR-OHL-POL (Rev.0-2014) 3

Section IV of VI – Technical Specifications [Page 5 of 7]

 Tender No. N-19535
TRANSCO 400kV OHL Works for Haffar, ICAD 4
Supply Division – Contracts & ICAD 5 (SASN Retirement)

SECTION IV/3 of VI

Test Procedures and Annexes

TITLE No. of Pages

SAT-TR-COM (REV. 0-2009) 3
SAT-TR-OHTL (REV. 0-2009) 3
SAT-TR-OHTL (REV. 0-2009) 3

Section IV of VI – Technical Specifications [Page 6 of 7]

 Tender No. N-19535
TRANSCO 400kV OHL Works for Haffar, ICAD 4
Supply Division – Contracts & ICAD 5 (SASN Retirement)

SECTION IV/4 of VI

Installation and Energising Procedures

TITLE No. of Pages

General
Chapter D_Section 01_Commissioning Check List-General _rev 5 8
Chapter D_Section 02_Commissioning Check List-InC-Doc_rev1.1 3
ChapterD_General_rev2.1 1
Overhead Lines
ChapterA_Section 012_Cover_Commissioning CheckList-OHL
1
System Rev1.1
ChapterA_Section 12_Commissioning CheckList-OHL System
2
Rev1.1
0_COMMISSIONING CHECK LIST-rev1.1 1
01_AMMENDMENTS-0817 2
02_Commissioning CheckList-Table of Contents-rev 1.1 2
03_Executive Summary-rev 1.1 1
04_Record of CheckLists-rev 1.1 2
ChapterA_Commissioning Checklist (Electrical) Rev 2_10-05-
1
2022

Section IV of VI – Technical Specifications [Page 7 of 7]

 Cabinet Decree No. 138 of 2023 Concerning

The Weights and Dimensions of Heavy Vehicles

&

Administrative Penalties for Violations

The Cabinet:

❖ Having cognizance of the Constitution.

❖ Federal Law No. 1 of 1972 On the Jurisdictions of the

Ministries and the Powers of the Ministers, as amended.

❖ Federal Law No. 21 of 1995 On Road and Traffic, as

amended,

❖ Federal Law No. 14 of 2016 On Administrative Violations

and Penalties in the Federal Government,

❖ Federal Law No. 12 of 2023 concerning the Weights and

Dimensions of Heavy Vehicles,

❖ Acting upon the proposal of the Minister of Energy and

Infrastructure and Cabinet’s approval.

Decided:
Article (1)

Definitions

In the application of the provisions of this decree, the following

words and expressions shall have the meanings assigned
thereto unless the context requires otherwise:

State The United Arab Emirates.

1
Ministry The Ministry of Energy and
Infrastructure.

Minister The Minister of Energy and

Infrastructure.

Competent Authority The federal or local

authorities having the
competence to issue vehicle
licences, to manage the road
network and its component
bridges and tunnels, or
manage the traffic.

Heavy Vehicle Any means of road transport

intended for the transport of
goods with an unladen
weight exceeding 2.5 tons
(two and a half tons),
excluding means of transport
intended to run on railways.

Load Goods, commodities, or loads

of different descriptions and
types.

Truck head Motorized mechanical

machine designed to tow a
trailer or a semi-trailer.

Semi-trailer A trailer without a front axle

and is attached such that a
large part of its weight and of
the weight of its load is
carried by the tractor or

2
 mechanical vehicle.

Trailer A vehicle designed to be

attached to a motor vehicle
or a tractor.

Tractor A self-propelled vehicle

designed to tow or drive
trailers, tools, or machines.

Heavy Vehicles Vertical distance from the

Overall Height road surface to the highest
point of the heavy vehicle.

Heavy Vehicle Overall The horizontal distance

Width measured perpendicular to
the longitudinal axis of the
heavy vehicle between the
most protruding parts on both
sides excluding mirrors,
direction indicators, and
corner lights but including
any installations designed to
increase its carrying capacity.

Single Axle An axle that is separate from

other axles or having a
distance of not less than two
metres (2.0) between it and
other axles in the axle group.

Tandem Axle A group of interconnected

axles, each of which has a
distance of not less than one
metre and not more than two
metres (2.0).

3
Weighing Station A fixed or mobile station
equipped with the tools and
equipment necessary to
monitor the compliance of
heavy vehicles with the
weights specified hereunder.

Single Trip Journey carried out by the

heavy vehicle within the
geographical zone overseen
by the Ministry or by the
Competent Authority, within
a period not exceeding
twenty-four (24) hours.

Article (2)

Weights and Dimensions Tables

(1) The maximum gross and axle weights of heavy vehicles

specified in Table (1) and Table (2) of Appendix (1) of
this decree, may not be exceeded.

(2) The maximum dimensions of heavy vehicles specified in

Table (3) of Appendix (1) attached to this decree, may
not be exceeded.

Article (3)

Controls for loads that are not easily divisible

(1) As an exception to the provisions of Article (2) of this

decree, a heavy vehicle may exceed the maximum
weights and dimensions in cases of loads that are not
easily divisible in order to conform with the weights and

4
 dimensions specified in Appendix (1) of this decree
under a transportation permit issued by the Ministry, or
by the Competent Authority, according to the
following controls:

(a) Absence of practical alternatives for transporting

the load.

(b) Absence of impact on infrastructure or road user

safety.

(c) Specification of the appropriate permit period to

complete the transport operation.

(d) Any other controls defined by the Ministry or by

the Competent Authority.

(2) The application for the transportation permit for the

load, referred to in Clause (1) hereof, shall be
submitted to the Ministry, or to the Competent
Authority together with the documents supporting the
veracity of the information contained in the
application.

(3) The Minister, or the Head of Competent Authority, shall

specify the requirements and procedures for the
issuance of the load transportation permit, referred to
in Paragraph (a) of Clause (1) hereof, on roads falling
within their respective scope of authority and
responsibility.

5
 Article (4)

Violations and Penalties

(1) Without prejudice to any administrative penalties

stipulated in any another legislation, the Minister, the
Head of the Competent Authority, or those authorized
by either of them may impose the administrative fines
for violations specified in Appendix (2) of this decree on
the violating heavy vehicles .
(2) Neither the Ministry nor the Competent Authority may
impose more than one fine for the same violation if it is
committed during a single trip, even if the said violation
is detected more than once.
(3) In case of committing a violating the maximum gross
weight specified in Table (1) of Appendix (1) attached
to this decree and violating the maximum axle weight
specified in Table (2) of the said Appendix during the
same trip, the fine with the highest value shall be
imposed.
(4) In case of a repeat violation of any of the violations
specified in Clauses (1) to (6) of Appendix (2) of this
decree within one month, or where the value of the
fines that are have not been paid for the committed
violations exceeds Dhs. 45,000 (Forty-Five Thousand
Dirhams), the Competent Authority may impound the
heavy vehicle, or prevent it from using the roads for a
period not exceeding thirty (30) days. The Competent
Authority may set aside the impounding penalty
against the owner of the heavy vehicle in return for the
payment of a fine not exceeding Dhs. 200 (Two
Hundred Dirhams) for each imposed impounding day,
contingent on the payment of the unpaid fines against
the committed violations.

6
 Article (5)

Grievance

Concerned and interested parties may appeal to the Minister,

to the Head of Competent Authority or to those authorised by
them, against any decision or action taken against them
within fifteen (15) days from the date of being notified of the
said decision or action, provided that such grievance is made
in writing, is reasoned and is accompanied with all the
supporting documents. The grievance shall be decided upon
within thirty (30) days of its submission date and in accordance
with the applicable procedures of the Ministry or the
Competent Authority.
Article (6)

Collection of Fines

The Competent Authority shall collect the administrative fines

resulting from violating the provisions of this decree using the
means stipulated in the legislation in force. The amount of the
collected fines shall be assigned to the authority that
manages the road network and its components.

Article (7)

Executive Decisions

The Minister, or the Head of Competent Authority, shall issue

the resolutions required to implement the provisions of this
decree.

7
 Article (8)

Repeals

Any provision that is contrary to or in conflict with the provisions

of this decree is hereby repealed.

Article (9)

Publication of the Decree and Its Entry into Force

This decree shall be published in the Official Gazette and

come into force on 01/02/2024.

The original signed by:

His Highness Sheikh Mohammed Bin Rashid Al Maktoum

The Prime Minister

_____________________________

Issued by us on:

16 Jamada Al Akhira 1445 A.H.

Corresponding to: 29 December 2023

8
 Appendix (1)

Tables of Gross, Axial Weights and Maximum Dimensions

Attached to the Cabinet Decree No. 138 of 2023

Table (1):

Maximum Permissible Gross Weights for Heavy Vehicles

Sr. Number of Vehicle Axles Maximum Gross Weight

1. Heavy vehicle with two axles 21 Tons

2. Heavy vehicle with three 34 Tons

axles

3. Heavy vehicle with four axles 45 Tons

4. Heavy vehicle with five axles 56 Tons

5. A heavy vehicle with six axles 65 Tons

or more

Table (2):

Maximum Permissible Gross Weights for an Axle or Group of

Axles in Heavy Vehicles

Sr. Type of the Axle Maximum Axle Weight

1. Single steerable axle 8 Tons

2. Single non-steerable axle 13 Tons

3. Double tandem axle 26 Tons

4. Triple tandem axel 33 Tons

9
5. Quadruple tandem axle 33 Tons

Table (3)

Maximum Dimensions of Heavy Vehicles

Sr. Type of Heavy Overall Overall Overall

Vehicle Length of Width of Height of
Heavy Heavy Heavy
Vehicle Vehicle Vehicle

1. Single Heavy 12.5 2.6 4.6

Vehicle
Metre Metre Metre
(Integrated)

2. Truck Head and 21 2.6 4.6 Metre

semi-trailer
Metre Metre

3. Truck Head, 28 2.6 4.6

Trailer and Semi-
Metre Metre Metre
trailer

4. Heavy Vehicle 23 2.6 4.75

carrying small
Metre Metre Metre
vehicles

10
 Appendix (2)

Violations and Fines attached to the Cabinet Decree No. 138

of 2023

Sr. Violation Administrative Fine

1. Heavy vehicle exceeding the Dhs. 400 (Four

maximum gross weight by less Hundred Dirhams)
than 10% of the weight during a for each ton or part
single trip. thereof.

2. Heavy vehicle exceeding the Dhs. 500 (Five

maximum gross weight by 10% to Hundred Dirhams)
20% of the weight during a single for each ton or part
trip. thereof.

3. Heavy vehicle exceeding the Dhs. 600 (Six

maximum gross weight by more Hundred Dirhams)
than 20% of the weight during a for each ton or part
single trip. thereof, limited to a
maximum of Dhs.
15,000 (Fifteen
Thousand Dirhams).

4. Axle weight exceeding the Dhs. 1,500 (One

maximum specified in Table (2) Thousand Five
of Appendix (1) attached to this Hundred Dirhams)
Decree. for each single axle,
or group of tandem
axes in a single trip.

5. Exceeding any of the maximum Dhs. 3,000 (Three

dimensions specified in Table (3) Thousand Dirhams)
of Appendix (1) attached to this in a single trip.

11
Sr. Violation Administrative Fine

Decree.

6. Intentional evasion of weight Dhs. 5,000 (Five

stations or monitoring sites. Thousand Dirhams.

7. Non-compliance with the Dhs. 5,000 (Five

controls of transportation permits Thousand Dirhams)
for loads that not easily divisible. in a single trip.

8. Submission of incorrect Dhs. 5,000 (Five

information on the application Thousand Dirhams)
for a transportation permits for
loads that not easily divisible.

9. Non-compliance with the Dhs. 2,500 (Two

instructions of the authorized Thousand five
person. hundred Dirhams)

12
 Cabinet Decision No. (13) of 2009
Approving the General Standards Manual for Group Labor Accommodation
and Related Services

The Cabinet,

- Upon consideration of the Constitution,

- And Federal Law No. (1) of 1972 concerning the Jurisdictions of Ministries and the
Powers of Ministers, as amended,
- And Federal Law No. (8) of 1980 Regulating Labor Relations, as amended,
- And Ministerial Council for Services Decision No. (214/4) of 2008,
- And based upon the proposal of the Minister of Labor and the approval of the Cabinet,

Has issued the following Decision:

Article one
The General Standards Manual for Group Labor Accommodation and Related Services,
attached hereto, shall be approved and applied to group labor accommodations with five
hundred or more laborers.

Article two
Effective 1/9/2009, the authorities concerned with granting group labor accommodation
licenses shall not grant licenses for this type of accommodation except in accordance with
this Decision.

Article three
within a maximum period of five years from 1/9/2009, any establishment operating in the
UAE and having a group labor accommodation for five hundred or more laborers shall
ensure that the conditions at the accommodation are in accordance with Article one
hereinabove.

English Translation provided courtesy of the . Please direct any queries or questions
regarding this Standard to the Ministry of Labour Offices and not the Health Authority Abu Dhabi.
Article four
The Minister of Labor shall issue the necessary decisions concerning the following:
- Laying down general criteria for group accommodation for less than five hundred
laborers;
- Implementing the provisions hereof, provided that the respective decisions issued by
the Minister of Labor shall include transitional provisions and the appropriate rules
for execution, incentives and administrative penalties.

Article five
The provisions of this Decision, including the decisions issued by the Minister of Labor under
Article four hereof, shall apply to all UAE zones including the free zones.

Article six
This Decision shall be published in the official gazette and shall come into effect on the date
that is issued subject to the dates set out in Articles two and three hereof.

Mohammad Bin Rashed al‐Maktoum

Prime Minister

Issued by Us in Abu Dhabi:

On: 20 Rabie al‐Awwal 1430 H, corresponding to 17/3/2009.

English Translation provided courtesy of the . Please direct any queries or questions
regarding this Standard to the Ministry of Labour Offices and not the Health Authority Abu Dhabi.
The General Standards Manual for Group Labor Accommodation and Related
Services in the United Arab Emirates
Approved by Cabinet Decision No. (13) of 2009

English Translation provided courtesy of the . Please direct any queries or questions
regarding this Standard to the Ministry of Labour Offices and not the Health Authority Abu Dhabi.
 Table of Contents

Subject Page
Introduction to Manual 7
1. Planning Standards 9
1.1. Site standards
1.2. Site coverage
2. Unit Design Requirements 10
2.1. General design requirements
2.2. Materials
2.3 Outdoor requirements
2.4. Ventilation and air conditioning
2.5. Lighting
2.6. Firefighting equipment and emergency exits
3. Residential Units Design 17
3.1. General requirements
3.2. Bedrooms
3.3. Sanitary facilities (bathrooms)
3.4. Kitchens
3.5. Mess hall
3.6. Services
3.7. Rest halls
3.8. Medical services
3.9. Laundry
3.10. Other services
4. Public Health Requirements 24
4.1. Waste disposal
4.2. Public health hazard control
5. Health and Safety Management 25
5.1. Accommodation management office
5.2. Health, safety and security
6. Utility Requirements 28
6.1. Water supply
6.2. Drinking water
6.3. Drinking water reservoirs
6.4. Water pumps
6.5. Cold water supply
6.6. Hot water supply
6.7. Firefighting water reservoirs
6.8. Firefighting water supply
6.9. Fire water pumps
6.10. Firefighting water system
6.11. Electricity supply

English Translation provided courtesy of the . Please direct any queries or questions
regarding this Standard to the Ministry of Labour Offices and not the Health Authority Abu Dhabi.
6.12. Gas supply
6.13. Sanitary drainage
6.14. Telecommunication services
7. Fire fighting Systems 39
7.1. Alarm systems
7.2. Public announcement and fire alarm system
8. Power Transformers 41
9. Transportation and Vehicle Safety Standards 42
10. Onsite rest period 44

English Translation provided courtesy of the . Please direct any queries or questions
regarding this Standard to the Ministry of Labour Offices and not the Health Authority Abu Dhabi.
Introduction
The requirements in this Manual are the basic standard for planning and building new labor
accommodation compounds, areas or cities and the related services. They are addressed to
consulting engineers and competent local authorities. Before issuing any work drawings and
detailed specifications for the housing compounds as part of the tendering process, the
design review process should be completed to ensure compliance with these specifications
before submitting the design to the concerned authority for approval.
For the purposes of these standards, the following definitions shall be adopted with regard
to labor accommodation:
1. Group accommodation, means any residential building or set of residential buildings
intended for labor accommodation and housing more than 500 persons;
2. Residential unit, means any building intended for labor accommodation and housing a
maximum of 1,000 persons;
3. Residential compound, means a site consisting of a number of residential units and
housing 1,000 – 5,000 persons, and surrounded by 2.2m high iron fencing;
4. Residential area/residential quarter, means a site consisting of a number of residential
compounds and housing a maximum of 35,000 persons;
5. Labor city, means a site consisting of a number of residential areas separated by main
roads and housing a maximum of 240,000 persons.

Note: The specifications and requirements of these standards shall apply to all residential
units and compounds. The specifications and requirements marked with an asterisk (*) are
additions that shall apply to residential compounds only.

English Translation provided courtesy of the . Please direct any queries or questions
regarding this Standard to the Ministry of Labour Offices and not the Health Authority Abu Dhabi.
1. Planning Standards

1.1. Site Standards

When choosing the sites intended for labor accommodation, the following standards should
be observed:
1. The site should be at a distance of at least 5km from family residences;
2. The site should be far from major tourist roads / arteries;
3. The site should be far from the existing investment compounds, whether of tourist or
commercial nature;
4. The site should be far from environmental pollution sources (clear of garbage and far
from animal farms) and from storm water and flood drainage systems as per the
standards approved by the competent local authorities;
5. The site should preferably be close to industrial areas or areas presenting job
opportunities with a buffer zone in between;
6. The site should preferably be close to an active road network with several entrances
and exits in different directions to facilitate entry and exit of buses particularly at
peak hours;
7. The site should be connected to a sanitary drainage and potable water system.

1.2. Site Coverage

1.2.1. Land construction percentage: The percentage covered by constructions over the
total land area where the constructions are set up.

The following table states the permitted percentages on the site:

Total constructions 60‐65%
Roads, pedestrian sidewalks, parking spaces, recreational spaces, yards, 35‐40%
planted areas and paved roads between the buildings

1.2.2. The maximum building height should be compliant with the standards approved by
the competent local authorities.

1.2.3. The space in between the residential units should be compliant with the building
conditions and specifications adopted by the local department and shall be not less
than 5m.

2. Unit Design Requirements

2.1. General Design Requirements

2.1.1. The general design requirements stated below are applicable to all the units designed
as part of the site development process. The additional requirements applicable to
the residential compounds have been detailed under these standards, so that all the
designs shall observe the municipal bylaws and the laws and standards of the
competent authority.

English Translation provided courtesy of the . Please direct any queries or questions
regarding this Standard to the Ministry of Labour Offices and not the Health Authority Abu Dhabi.
2.1.2. All the units should be designed according to the engineering standards and
specifications adopted by the competent local authorities.

2.1.3. The building should be compliant with all the sanitary and environmental conditions
and safety requirements to preserve the health and safety of its residents and
protect its internal and surrounding environment, such as the building materials, the
drinking water and sanitary drainage systems, the air conditioning systems, the
elevators, the emergency exits, the firefighting systems, internal air quality and the
common service utilities, according to the standards of the competent local
authorities and international specifications.

2.1.4. Periodical maintenance is required to ensure the fulfillment of all such requirements
throughout the occupation period thereof.

2.2. Materials
2.2.1. The units shall have concrete or cement blocks walls, and the flooring should be
made of concrete as well. The construction methods used for all buildings should be
complaint with the regulations, legislation and standards provided for under the laws
adopted by the competent local authorities.

2.2.2. All the building materials used should be environment‐friendly and public health‐
friendly. They shall not be flammable and should comply with the standards of the
Civil Defense Directorate.

2.2.3. The doors should be fireproof as per the standards of the Civil Defense Directorate.

2.2.4. In case of absence of regulations / legislations / competent local laws, the applicable
international standards shall govern.

2.3. Outdoor Requirements (*)

2.3.1. The area should be sufficient for safe movement within the facility.

2.3.2. The area should be sufficient for vehicle movement and parking, taking into
consideration the following:
‐ Control of site entrances and exits;
‐ Accessibility by emergency cars to all buildings;
‐ Food delivery, provision and storage;
‐ Garbage management (storage, collection and transportation);
‐ Bus stops and car parking;
‐ Fire prevention and alarm systems;
‐ Emergency exits and assembly points;
‐ Outdoor lighting.

English Translation provided courtesy of the . Please direct any queries or questions
regarding this Standard to the Ministry of Labour Offices and not the Health Authority Abu Dhabi.
 2.3.3. The safe passages of the facility should be indicated with instruction signs, and
waiting places should be provided at the bus stations and car stops for workers pick‐
up and assembly after drop‐ off.

2.4. Ventilation and Air Conditioning

2.4.1. All the rooms, kitchens, mess halls, corridors, offices and halls should be provided
with ventilation and central air conditioning systems as per the standards and
conditions adopted by the competent local authorities. In case there is no central air
conditioning system, the rooms should be supplied with individual air conditioning.
Condensation discharge pipes should be installed inside the vertical service poles for
water drainage.

2.4.2. The window area should take at least 10% of the room floor area, where 50% of the
windows should be openable.

2.4.3. A ventilation system should be installed in the bathrooms to discharge the air outside
the building and replace it with external air using the proper methods.

2.4.4. An aluminum window with curved sides for ventilation shall be fixed at the bottom
part of the door of every room or bathroom, to provide ventilation and create an air
current with the air coming from the adjacent area.

2.4.5. The internal air quality of the building should be preserved and external air should be
provided according to the averages stated in the following table:

Category of Liters/seconds/persons Category of Liters/seconds/persons

Occupation Occupation
Mess Halls 5.0 Laundry rooms 5
Kitchens 25 Bathrooms 25
Bedrooms 5.0 Toilets 25
Lobby and corridors 5.0 Security office 5
Offices 5.0 Prayer room 5
TV & entertainment 7.5 First aid room 5
rooms

2.4.6. Ventilation systems should be available in the bathrooms, storerooms, copy rooms,
computer rooms, kitchens, toilets, furnaces, changing/bathing rooms, swimming
pools and other areas that contain pollution sources. Pressure in these areas should
be lower than that in the adjacent internal areas and higher than that in the external
areas. The ventilation systems should directly lead outside the building and should be

English Translation provided courtesy of the . Please direct any queries or questions
regarding this Standard to the Ministry of Labour Offices and not the Health Authority Abu Dhabi.
 installed in a way to prevent the return of pollutants into the building, at a distance
of at least 25 feet from air inlets.

2.4.7. The air in the kitchens, bathrooms and toilets should be renewed at the minimum
averages stated in the following table:

Place Ventilation Average Ventilation Average

(liter/second/unit) (liter/second/m2)
Kitchens 3.5
Bathrooms 35/25
Toilets 35/25

2.4.8. A control system should be available to control the temperature, humidity and air
speed and provide a comfortable ambience, fulfill the requirements and reduce
microbes and pollutants in all air‐conditioned places.

2.4.9. The relative humidity average should vary between 30% and 60% in all air‐
conditioned areas.

2.5. Lighting
2.5.1. All lighting units fixed in occupied areas should provide minimum lighting levels as
stated hereunder (as per safety considerations).

Location Area / Activity Minimum / Average (Lux)

General Passages, corridors, lobby, 100
stairs, entrance, reception
etc…
Residential units Bedrooms 100
Kitchens 150
Cool storage 100
General work places 100
Entertainment places 150
Ablution places 100
Shops, storerooms, 100
warehouses
First aid room 300
Laundry Receiving, sorting, washing, 150
drying
Dry cleaning 150
Ironing, inspection, repair 200

2.5.2. All the bulbs used should be low consumption light bulbs. Light fittings installed into
false ceilings should be used.

English Translation provided courtesy of the . Please direct any queries or questions
regarding this Standard to the Ministry of Labour Offices and not the Health Authority Abu Dhabi.
2.5.3. The outdoor lighting should allow the pedestrians to distinguish the borders of the
sidewalks, direction changes, crossroads and any obstacles or potential risks.

2.5.4. The street alleys, changes in street gradation and any other potentially dangerous
locations should have more lighting than the passages.

2.5.5. The lighting poles/shafts should be placed in a way so as not to obstruct pedestrian
movement.

2.6. Firefighting Equipment and Emergency Exits

2.6.1. The firefighting equipment and emergency exits should comply with the civil defense
standards (NFPA 101).

2.6.2. The emergency roads and passages should be provided with chargeable lighting
devices to be operated in case of power outage.

3. Residential Units Design

The residential units should be designed, built and equipped to ensure that occupants have
an acceptable level of comfort and safety in a clean and healthy environment.

3.1. General Requirements

3.1.1. The accommodation management, security office, workers equipment room,
kitchens, cafeterias, prayer room, first aid room and any other services should be
located on the ground floor.

3.1.2. In case of extra space available, after providing all the aforementioned services, this
space should be used for constructing bedrooms for the workers on the ground floor.

3.1.3. The drawings submitted for licensing should indicate the general location, horizontal
projections, facades, sections, constructional and electric plans, civil defense,
sanitary drainage, thermal insulation, roads, all the details regarding workshops,
doors, windows and installations and all that is required as per the engineering
standards adopted by the competent local authority.

3.2. Bedrooms
3.2.1. Each worker shall have a space of not less than 3m2.

3.2.2. The number of workers allowed per bedroom shall be 8 to 10 workers while
observing the specified space area for each worker.

3.2.3. The bedroom ceiling should be not less than 7 feet high.

English Translation provided courtesy of the . Please direct any queries or questions
regarding this Standard to the Ministry of Labour Offices and not the Health Authority Abu Dhabi.
3.2.4. Each person should be provided with his own sleeping area even in the case of shifts.

3.2.5. Each person should be provided with a bed, side table and a 2m high closet with a
lock.

3.2.6. The space in between the beds should be not less than 36 inches from both sides and
from the upper and bottom sides. The bed height should be not less than 12 inches
from the ground. In case of bunk beds, the distance between the beds should be not
less than 48 inches from both sides and the rear side, provided that the distance
between the upper and the bottom bed shall be not less than 27 inches. Triple bunk
beds are not permitted.

3.2.7. The shoe racks should be placed at the entrance of every room for the workers to
place their shoes before going into the sleeping area.

3.2.8. No cooking stoves or washing machines may be used inside the bedrooms.

3.3. Sanitary Facilities (Bathrooms)

3.3.1. Access to the sanitary facilities should be easy without the need to pass through the
bedrooms. No private bathroom may be located at a distance of less than 100 feet
from any bedroom, mess hall or kitchen.

3.3.2. In the case of common bathrooms, one toilet should be available for every 8 people,
and any common bathroom should have at least 2 toilets.

3.3.3. One urinal should be provided for every 25 persons. If there is not enough water
pressure, the urinals should be supplied with enough water to be used after finishing.

3.3.4. One shower and one washbasin should be provided for every 8 people.

3.3.5. Cold and hot water should be provided.

3.3.6. The washbasins should have mixers to control the temperature of the water used.

3.3.7. The toilet and bathroom designs should include fixtures to hang clothes and towels
and place the soap as well as mirrors and cabinets. Clothes and towel hangers made
of solid materials such as stainless steel should be available in sufficient quantities for
the number of intended users.

3.3.8. The window area should take at least 10% of the bathroom floor area, where at least
50% of the windows should be opened to the outside.

English Translation provided courtesy of the . Please direct any queries or questions
regarding this Standard to the Ministry of Labour Offices and not the Health Authority Abu Dhabi.
3.3.9. No toilet, bathroom chemical substances or urinals may be placed in any room that is
used for other than toilet purposes.

3.3.10. Sufficient quantities of toilet paper should be available in the toilets.

3.3.11. The bathrooms and toilets should enjoy sanitary conditions and should be
cleaned at least once a day. Detergents should be used in the toilets.

3.4. Kitchens
3.4.1. Each residential unit should have a kitchen that is compliant with the public health
standards provided for by the concerned authority.

3.4.2. The kitchen should be managed by a licensed food service company or by a food staff
appointed by the accommodation facility management.

3.4.3. The kitchen should be provided with washable tables.

3.4.4. The kitchen should be equipped with a proper drainage system and a ventilation
outlet and/or a funnel, and the funnel should be at least 2m higher than the closest
building to the unit.

3.4.5. The gas cylinders should be placed outside the building and shaded from sunlight.

3.4.6. The kitchen should be equipped with pest control means.

3.4.7. The kitchen should be kept clean.

3.5. Mess Hall

3.5.1. The mess hall should be close to the kitchen and should be supplied with enough
tables and chairs in addition to a water cooler and washbasin (with cold and hot
water, liquid soap and tissues).

3.5.2. Each person should have an area of his own of at least 1.4m2 in the mess hall (and in
the TV and rest halls), which should accommodate at least one third of the total
number of residents in the unit.

3.5.3. A schedule specifying the meal times should be placed at the entrance of the mess
hall.

3.5.4. The mess hall should be kept clean at all times.

3.6. Services

English Translation provided courtesy of the . Please direct any queries or questions
regarding this Standard to the Ministry of Labour Offices and not the Health Authority Abu Dhabi.
3.7. Rest halls
3.7.1. The workers should have a rest hall with comfortable seats and a TV (within the mess
hall).

3.8. Medical Services

3.8.1. Each residential unit should have one first aid room to be supplied with enough
furniture, materials and a drug cabinet, as per Table 3 under Article 4 of Minister of
Labor Decision No. 32 of 1982 determining the preventive methods and measures for
protecting workers from the risks at work.

3.8.2. Each residential compound should have a medical clinic that is capable of providing
health services to all the residents and deal with the cases that require medical care
except for the cases requiring hospitalization. (*)

3.8.3. An isolation room for patients should be provided and equipped with all the
necessary furniture and equipment.

3.8.4. The clinic should be ready for operation 24/7 including the weekends, official
holidays and religious and national holidays. (*)

The clinic should have the following specifications:

- Easy access (it should be provided with an inclined staircase if necessary).
- A waiting area with sufficient space for patients.
- A number of rooms / offices with sufficient spaces for several uses:
• Consulting and treatment room;
• Convalescence room;
• Medical records room;
• Equipment, bandages and drugs room.
- An adequate number of employees (including an on‐duty physician and a nurse).
- Bathrooms and washbasins with hot and cold water for patients and visitors.
- An onsite ambulance for transporting patients to offsite hospitals.

3.9. Laundry
3.9.1. Laundry services may be outsourced.

3.9.2. If laundry services are not outsourced, the accommodation management should
carry out the following:
‐ Provide laundry services according to an announced schedule and appoint a person
to be in charge of these services;
‐ Provide the unit with communal laundry facilities;

3.9.3. The communal laundry facilities should be on the ground floor of the residential unit.

English Translation provided courtesy of the . Please direct any queries or questions
regarding this Standard to the Ministry of Labour Offices and not the Health Authority Abu Dhabi.
3.9.4. The communal laundry facilities should be designed according to the technical
specifications of the competent local authority.

3.9.5. The communal laundry facilities should be provided with all the required services
such as hot and cold water connections, ventilation and air conditioning, drainage
system and sufficient lighting.

3.10. Other Services

3.10.1. Courts should be provided for the workers who wish to exercise in their free
time. (*)

3.10.2. Each residential unit should have a barber salon and a grocery store to be
used only by the residents and not by the public. In case a grocery store
exists, it shall not be allowed to sell food that spoil fast or that needs to be
cooked before consumption. Food preparation and packaging is permitted
inside the grocery store.

3.10.3. The compound should be provided with an ATM to enable the workers to
withdraw and transfer money. (*)

3.10.4. Each residential unit shall have a prayer room.

4. Public Health Requirements

4.1 Waste Disposal

4.1.1. The waste disposal mechanism should observe the environmental and health
conditions established by the concerned authority.

4.1.2. Sealed and washable trash containers should be provided in sufficient quantities.

4.1.3. At least one trash container should be provided and placed on a wooden, metal or
concrete stand, and the trash container and the surrounding area shall be kept clean
at all times.

4.1.4. The containers should be emptied and cleaned daily.

4.1.5. The residential units should be cleaned daily.

4.2. Public Health Hazards

4.2.1. All the necessary and effective measures should be taken to prevent public health
hazards such as insects and rodents from existing or multiplying.

English Translation provided courtesy of the . Please direct any queries or questions
regarding this Standard to the Ministry of Labour Offices and not the Health Authority Abu Dhabi.
4.2.2. A company specialized in controlling public health hazards and licensed by the
competent local authority should be contracted to carry out extermination activities
as per an approved program. Records and reports of completed extermination works
should be kept.

5. Public Health Management

5.1. Accommodation Management Office

5.1.1. The accommodation manager shall manage all the facilities in a safe and effective
manner as per the standards and procedures in force, including the maintenance
activities.

5.1.2. The accommodation manager should keep a register of the residents in an updated
database.

5.1.3. The accommodation manager shall be responsible for:

‐ Appointing employees / workers inside the residential units;
‐ Providing proper training for the employees / workers;
‐ Providing all the services and requirements under these standards;
‐ Coordinating inspection of all units;
‐ Controlling and managing the planned occupation percentage against actual
occupation (population density);
‐ Issuing instructions and following up:
• Onsite maintenance;
• Food catering;
• Unit management;
- Ensuring observance of housing instructions by all the employees, contractors and
occupants;
- Managing the inspection activities and correctional actions;
- Managing the housing budget;
- Organizing and holding periodic training sessions on evacuation in case of emergency
and supervising the introductory training program.

5.2. Health, Safety and Security

5.2.1. Each occupant should, within one week from the commencement of his occupation
of a residential unit, join an awareness program that covers the following:
‐ Instructions of the unit management / residential compound;
‐ House rules;
‐ Proper use of services and facilities;
‐ Personal hygiene;
‐ Waste disposal;
‐ Preventing pollution;
‐ Pest control;

English Translation provided courtesy of the . Please direct any queries or questions
regarding this Standard to the Ministry of Labour Offices and not the Health Authority Abu Dhabi.
 ‐ Fire prevention and proper use of firefighting equipment;
‐ Responsibilities during emergency cases.

5.2.2. Copies of house rules signed by the accommodation manager should be printed and
placed in a visible manner on every floor, provided that the rules are in the language
understood by the residents of the units.

5.2.3. The house rules shall at least include the following points:
‐ Cleanliness;
‐ Clear prohibitions (smoking, cooking);
‐ Storage rule;
‐ Trash;
‐ Loud music;
‐ Tampering with the building equipment;
‐ Trash disposal;
‐ Water preservation;
‐ Visitors;
‐ Any other matter deemed necessary by the manager.

5.2.4. The employees, workers and visitors are not permitted to use tobacco products
whether for smoking or for other purposes inside the residential units, at 20 feet
from any entrance or at 20 feet from fresh air inlets. Using tobacco products is
permitted outdoors or in designated smoking places that are completely isolated
from non‐smoking areas by walls from ground to ceiling.

5.2.5. An electricity and water control option from outside the residential compound
should be available. (*)

5.2.6. The residential compound should be provided with surveillance cameras to monitor
every section in addition to the public announcement system. (*)

6. Utility Requirements

6.1. Water Supply

6.1.1. Observance of the technical and health conditions related to the water system
installations and reservoirs is necessary, where such installations and reservoirs
should be compliant with the specifications and standards of the competent
authorities.

6.1.2. The following should be available in the residential units: underground reservoirs and
adjacent water pumps to supply drinking water to the entire site as well as
underground reservoirs and water pumps to feed the fire extinguishing systems,
outdoor hoses, indoor hoses and fire hose reel cabinets in each residential unit.

English Translation provided courtesy of the . Please direct any queries or questions
regarding this Standard to the Ministry of Labour Offices and not the Health Authority Abu Dhabi.
6.1.3. The water systems should be installed, operated and maintained in a way to prevent
the growth of bacteria and other air carried microbes, as per the local laws and
regulations.

6.2. Drinking Water

6.2.1. The design and installation of the pipes, valves, fittings and pressure reducing valves
required for the distribution of hot and cold water should be compliant with the
regulations and standards of the concerned electricity and water authority.

6.2.2. The water supply average to the residential unit should be based on the total number
of workers that the unit can accommodate, at an average of 35 gallons for each
person per day, and based on 2.5 times the consumption average per hour at peak
times.

6.2.3. All the bathrooms, showers, washbasins and kitchens should be supplied with hot
and cold water.

6.2.4. The water systems should be designed and supplied with water conservation
methods.

6.2.5. The water service poles should be separated from the electric service poles.

6.3. Drinking Water Reservoirs

6.3.1. A water supply service should be available around the clock. The water is stored in a
central underground reservoir, which is simultaneously supplied with the required
compensatory quantities for the water consumed.

6.3.2. The reservoir shall be filled at least to the level of the maximum water consumption
of the residential unit.

6.3.3. A pipe shall be installed to discharge overflow water in the reservoir.

6.4. Water Pumps

6.4.1. Water should be distributed to all occupied buildings through an underground
pipeline system. The water is pumped by means of two electric pumps for drinking
water, each with a capacity equaling the total consumption average to ensure the
supply of sufficient quantities of hot and cold water at peak times in each building.

6.4.2. A reserve diesel‐driven pump for drinking water with a capacity equaling that of the
main pump should be installed to operate simultaneously with the two main electric
pumps. The reserve pump will operate automatically in case of interruption of the
electric generator that feeds the electric drinking water pumps.

English Translation provided courtesy of the . Please direct any queries or questions
regarding this Standard to the Ministry of Labour Offices and not the Health Authority Abu Dhabi.
6.4.3. Sufficient quantities of diesel fuel should be provided to operate the reserve pump at
full capacity and without interruption for 24 hours.

6.4.4. Each of the electric and diesel‐driven water pumps should have a reserve capacity of
135% compared to the normal pumping average of approximately 85% of the
generated capacity without overcharging the pump or the gear.

6.5. Cold Water Supply

6.5.1. Each residential unit should be supplied with cold water at an average of 35
liters/minute per person every 24 hours, taking into consideration the increase in
demand for drinking water at peak times especially in the early morning and evening.

6.5.2. The outdoor water reservoirs should be covered with sunshades to guarantee cold
water in the summer.

6.5.3. Water coolers should be available in each residential unit according to the number of
workers per unit and/or the number of persons expected to use the unit.

6.5.4. The units should have separate cold water feeders with valves.

6.6. Hot Water Supply

6.6.1. Each unit should be supplied with hot water at an average of 20 liters/person every
24 hours, taking into consideration the increase in demand at peak hours especially
in the early morning and evening.

6.6.2. Hot water storage of a capacity of 1000 liters should be provided for kitchen use and
600 liters for ablution.

Note: It is recommended to use solar water systems for power conservation; electric heaters
may also be used. Modern technology has allowed the installation of a double heating
system that operates on both solar / and electric energy, where the heater starts by heating
the solar plates during the daytime and is electrically operated at other times.

6.7. Firefighting Water Reservoirs

6.7.1. The total capacity of the firefighting water reservoir is calculated according to the
requirements of the water hose system, in addition to the requirements of the
automatic water sprinkles, as set out in the following schedule:

Water Hoses 2000 liter/minute x 240 minutes 480 m3

Sprinklers 3000 liter/minute x 120 minutes 360 m3
Total Capacity 840 m3

English Translation provided courtesy of the . Please direct any queries or questions
regarding this Standard to the Ministry of Labour Offices and not the Health Authority Abu Dhabi.
6.7.2. An underground firefighting water reservoir shall be built and supplied with a clean
water pump of a capacity up to 1000 liter/minute.

6.7.3. The concrete firefighting water reservoir shall be built as per the international water
storage standards. The reservoir shall be supplied with galvanized joints made of mild
steel to enable the installation of a withdrawal pump as well as an overflow water
pipe.

6.7.4. An overflow water connection, incoming water connection and withdrawal pump
connection should be installed.

6.7.5. An outflow prevention device should be installed on the withdrawal tube inside the
drain with the following dimensions of 1m x 2m x 1.5 m deep at the bottom of the
reservoir.

6.8. Firefighting Water Supply

6.8.1. Sufficient water quantities should be supplied for extinguishing fires and feeding the
water hoses outside the buildings, in addition to all the fire hoses and the winded fire
hoses inside the buildings.

6.8.2. The store and warehouse areas should be supplied with automatic sprinkler systems.
The quantity of water required by the sprinkler systems is based on the water hose
system demand.

6.8.3. The outdoor and indoor hose systems installed in all the buildings are supplied with
an average of 2000 liters/minute for a period of 4 hours (240 minutes). Sufficient
water quantities shall be provided for the winded 30m long fire hoses fixed inside the
buildings.

6.8.4. The fire‐extinguishing water overflow can be added to the sprinkler systems at an
average of 3000 liters/minute for a period of two hours (120 minutes). The engineer
should verify the sprinklers’ ultimate need for water before finishing his work on the
fire pump.

6.8.5. The fire pumps should have a reserve capacity of 135% of the flow compared to
approximately 85% of the generated capacity without overcharging the pump or the
gear.

6.9. Fire Water Pumps

6.9.1. The fire water pumps should be compliant with the civil defense standards.

6.9.2. Two double fire pumps shall be installed, one is diesel operated and the other
electricity‐operated, in addition to a reserve pump installed in the underground fire

English Translation provided courtesy of the . Please direct any queries or questions
regarding this Standard to the Ministry of Labour Offices and not the Health Authority Abu Dhabi.
 pump station, provided that these pumps have all the operation and control
accessories and devices as per the international fire prevention standards for fixed
pump installation.

6.10. The double pumps, reserve pump tubes, valves and backflow prevention valves are
installed near the firefighting water reservoir. A water flow detector with 2%
accuracy should be installed to test the flow process of the individual fire pumps.

6.11. Firefighting Water System

6.11.1. A main firefighting system shall be installed around the site to supply
firefighting water through an underground pipeline network. The firefighting
water pipes shall supply the outdoor and indoor hoses with the required
water amount in addition to the water supply required by the sprinkler
systems installed in the stores… when necessary.

6.11.2. The firefighting system should have sufficient diameter to allow the
transportation of water at the required average to the farthest point of the
pipeline system from both sides. These pipes should be installed by a
contractor specialized in fire prevention.

6.11.3. The firefighting pipeline system and isolation valve system should be installed
as per the international inspection, testing and maintenance standards for
firefighting pipes.

6.11.4. All the pipes, fittings and isolation valves shall be installed and tested based
on a pressure of 16 bars (1600 Pa).

6.11.5. The pipes and fittings shall be installed using a black steel tube with welded
fittings and fittings screwed on small pipes of less than 80mm diameter. All
the pipes shall be corrosion resistant. The hidden outdoor pipe shall be a 16
PVC pipe instead of a steel pipe.

6.11.6. All the section isolation valves, withdrawal pumps and distribution pumps
shall have opening/closing indicators. These indicators shall turn in clockwise
motion upon closing.

6.11.7. All the joints shall be fixed to the fire nozzles used by firefighters, and a
closing valve and a backflow prevention valve shall be fixed to the lower side
of the nozzles. These nozzles should be accessible from the ground floor by
the service passage to allow the easy connection of the pumps and use them
to support the pumping of the water towards the building on fire.

English Translation provided courtesy of the . Please direct any queries or questions
regarding this Standard to the Ministry of Labour Offices and not the Health Authority Abu Dhabi.
6.11.8. The hose valve shall be installed to the underground fire pipeline system, at a
maximum distance of 15m from the nozzle joints used by the firefighters.

6.12. Electricity Supply

6.12.1. All the electricity supply and wiring systems should be designed and installed
according to the requirements set out by the Electricity and Water Authority.

6.12.2. The submission and approval regulations of the Electricity and Water
Authority shall be strictly observed.

6.12.3. The power substations shall be installed and supplied with power, step‐down
transformers and a switchboard etc.

6.12.4. One electrical room shall be constructed on the ground floor per occupied
unit and shall be completely equipped with a switchboard and an engine
control device.

6.12.5. The devices and power distribution panels shall be distributed among the
floors, and separate isolating switches shall be installed for each light and
electric circuit across the area.

6.12.6. Separate electrical isolation devices shall be installed for the ventilation and
air conditioning systems. These devices shall be installed in the control rooms,
kitchens and other service areas.

6.12.7. Separate electrical isolation devices shall be installed for every heating device
installed inside the heaters.

6.12.8. The main air conditioning / cooling units shall be supplied with three‐phase
electric power systems that are disconnected individually in the relevant unit
location.

6.12.9. Electrical outlets shall be installed in the wall (5 AMP plug) as follows:
‐ In all bedrooms:
• A plug near every bed for personal use;
• In each room for electric appliances;
‐ Plugs shall be installed to the wall of each main corridor, with a 15m
distance in between the plugs, for the purpose of plugging in floor cleaning
devices.
‐ In all the occupied rooms such as the offices, warehouses, security offices,
control rooms, workshops, stores… to plug in cleaning devices, small electric
tools and electric appliances.

English Translation provided courtesy of the . Please direct any queries or questions
regarding this Standard to the Ministry of Labour Offices and not the Health Authority Abu Dhabi.
 ‐ In all communal areas to plug in the required number of washing machines,
refrigerators, in‐wall air conditioners, vending machines and water coolers.

6.13. Gas Supply

6.13.1. Gas supply shall be compliant with the civil defense requirements.

6.14. Sanitary Drainage

6.14.1. All the occupied residential units shall be supplied with a sanitary drainage
system that is compliant with the regulations of the local municipality and the
laws and standards of the competent authority.

6.15. Telecommunication Services

6.15.1. The landline phones and cable distribution cabinet shall be placed on the
ground floor of each residential unit to be used by the telecommunications
authority.

6.15.2. Public phones shall be installed near each residential unit, mess halls and
other common facilities. They shall be installed in weather‐tolerant booths
covered with sunshades. The telecommunications authority shall determine
the proper locations and number of public phones.

7. Firefighting Systems

All the fire prevention, detection and alarm systems, including the monitors, electric
installations and sprinkler systems, should be designed and installed as per the Civil Defense
standards.

7.1. Alarm Systems

7.1.1. Each floor of a residential unit, whose area is more than 1000 m2 should be divided
into fire sectors.

7.1.2. Each unit should be provided with a fully systematic alarm system controlled from
within the unit by means of a systematic fire alarm panel. The alarm panels shall be
installed in secure places such as the security office on the ground floor /or the
kitchen.

7.1.3. Each fire alarm panel should be connected to a printer that will print out a summary
of the incident that occurred. This printer shall be fixed on the front side of the panel,
in addition to a plasma screen to determine the devices that have been activated in
each area.

7.1.4. All the fire alarm panels shall be supplied with 24V reserve batteries, provided that
these batteries are continuously charged by means of an internal charge unit,

English Translation provided courtesy of the . Please direct any queries or questions
regarding this Standard to the Ministry of Labour Offices and not the Health Authority Abu Dhabi.
 allowing these batteries to operate the panel and the fire detectors in case of power
cut for a minimum period of 12 hours.

7.1.5. The fire monitors shall be installed on all the fire detectors so as to connect the
cables to each floor of the concerned unit. These monitors assist in instant alarm
reception in case the fire detector fails or its cable is cut off. They also replace any
defected area in the fire detector cable system.

7.1.6. The early detection systems shall be installed as per the international standards for
fire detection and alarm systems designed for buildings.

7.1.7. All the substations containing the pipes, the pump stations and other occupied
facilities shall be provided with an early fire detection system similar to the
aforementioned system.

7.1.8. The substation containing the pipes and the switchboard rooms in the residential
units shall have a firefighting system relying on the use of clean gas and that is
activated automatically by the early detection system.

7.1.9. The gas extinguishing system shall be installed as per the international standards on
gas extinguishing systems.

7.1.10. All the rooms where gas extinguishing systems are installed shall be insulated
in a way to ensure the preservation of the extinguishing gas in the secure area
at the proper concentration for at least 10 minutes.

7.1.11. In the case where sprinkler systems are installed in the building, separate
water connections should be installed for every set of control valves of the
sprinkler valves.

7.1.12. The main passages should be equipped with water spray nozzles.

7.2. Public Announcement and Fire Alarm System

7.2.1. A public announcement system should be installed in every residential unit.

7.2.2. The fire alarm system shall be activated manually by pressing the button/switch fixed
by the systematic fire alarm panel.

7.2.3. Alarm sirens shall be installed in all the occupied units, at a distance of 75m from
each other, with an intensity of 75dB across the unit.

7.2.4. The residential compound shall be equipped with a security system to monitor all the
sections of the unit and apply the public announcement system.

English Translation provided courtesy of the . Please direct any queries or questions
regarding this Standard to the Ministry of Labour Offices and not the Health Authority Abu Dhabi.
8. Power Transformers

8.1. The oil‐cooled power transformers shall be placed as per the standards of the
Electricity and Water Authority.

9. Transportation and Vehicle Safety Standards

9.1. The vehicles shall be subject to annual inspection by the competent local authority.

9.2. The vehicle should be surrounded by suitable lighting to help show its dimensions.

9.3. The name of the company employing the workers should be visibly placed on the
vehicle.

9.4. The maximum number of passengers allowed shall be clearly stated, where each
passenger shall have one seat.

9.5. Smoking inside the vehicle is prohibited as clearly stated by sticking a “No Smoking”
sign.

9.6. A “Frequent Stop” sign should be placed on the rear of the vehicle for warning.

9.7. A contact number should be clearly placed on the vehicle for remarks and
complaints.

9.8. The vehicle should be driven according to the speed signs on the road.

9.9. The vehicle should be air‐conditioned.

9.10. All the seats should have belts and handgrips.

9.11. The vehicles should have handgrips from the inside to make it easier for the
passengers to get off.

9.12. The vehicle should have a first aid kit with easy access thereto. The kit should be
placed in a visible place.

9.13. The vehicle should have two fire extinguishers of at least 5kg each, one placed in the
front and the other at the back of the vehicle.

9.14. The vehicle should have at least six hammers to break the window glass in case of
emergency.

English Translation provided courtesy of the . Please direct any queries or questions
regarding this Standard to the Ministry of Labour Offices and not the Health Authority Abu Dhabi.
9.15. Emergency windows should be placed in the front, middle and back of the vehicle.
The emergency exits should be indicated with signs.

9.16. The interior light should not disturb the driver.

9.17. The vehicle exit door should have a lighting system.

9.18. The tires should have an adaptive breaking system that allows the vehicle to stop in
slippery places.

9.19. The vehicle should have tubeless tires.

9.20. The vehicle should be at least semi‐automatic.

9.21. The passengers stop should be near their destination to avoid crossing the main
roads, unless pedestrian lanes are available.

9.22. During the weekends, transportation to and from the nearest public transportation
point should be provided, unless the transportation point is close to the residential
unit where the worker can reach it on foot (2km).

10. Onsite Rest Periods

• Shades should be available at the work sites for the workers who wish to take a rest
period or eat.
• Food and drinking water should be available onsite and should be preserved in
proper health conditions.
• Toilets should be available near the work site.
• Proper sanitary ware should be available within the workers’ rest areas.

English Translation provided courtesy of the . Please direct any queries or questions
regarding this Standard to the Ministry of Labour Offices and not the Health Authority Abu Dhabi.
 STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRIC WORKS

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
( SPECIFICATION )

CIVIL DESIGN FUNDAMENTALS

TRANSCO STANDARD : S-TR-GEN-CDF (CIVIL

DESIGN FUNDAMENTAL) (REV.0-2019)

S-TR-GEN-CDF (Civil Design Fundamental) (Rev.0-2019) Page 1 of 19

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Civil Design Fundamentals

CONTENTS

STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRIC WORKS ........................... 1

1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................... 3
2 STANDARDS CODES AND REFERENCES FOR CIVIL WORK .......................... 3
3 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................... 5
4 GENERAL DESIGN GUIDELINES ............................................................................. 6
4.1 Substations above 11 kV ................................................................................................... 6
4.2 Substations 11 kV and below .......................................................................................... 11
4.3 Transmission Lines.......................................................................................................... 11
4.4 Underground Cables ........................................................................................................ 12
5 DESIGN CRITERIA ..................................................................................................... 12
5.1 Stations ............................................................................................................................ 12
5.2 Transmission Lines.......................................................................................................... 13
5.3 Underground Cables ........................................................................................................ 14
6 LOAD AND DESIGN ASSUMPTIONS...................................................................... 15
6.1 General Assumptions ...................................................................................................... 15
6.2 Seismic Load ................................................................................................................... 16
6.3 Crane load ....................................................................................................................... 16
6.4 Wind Load ....................................................................................................................... 16
6.5 Load Combinations ......................................................................................................... 17
6.6 Increase in Soil Bearing Capacity/ Pile Capacity ............................................................ 17
6.7 Under-Ground Water Retaining Structures ..................................................................... 17
7 PARTICULAR SPACE REQUIREMENTS .............................................................. 18
8 ROADS AND PAVEMENTS ....................................................................................... 18
9 BOUNDARY WALLS & PERIMETER FENCING.................................................. 18

S-TR-GEN-CDF (Civil Design Fundamental) (Rev.0-2019) Page 2 of 19

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Civil Design Fundamentals

CIVIL WORKS FUNDAMENTALS

The general information given hereunder applies to all civil works in addition to the General
Design Fundamentals, and unless specified in greater detail in sections on special conditions or
specific installations.

1 INTRODUCTION
The civil works are governed by the conditions of the electromechanical part, and as far as they
are not supplemented by data, by the conditions or specifications stipulated hereafter. However,
any local laws and regulations shall prevail, such as the "Abu Dhabi International Building Code
(2013)”.
Detailed execution features of the civil work are described in the relevant sections of the
Specifications.
This document shall represent the basic specification and information for calculating the lump
sum price of the works concerned, but they should not be considered to be a complete
description in every respect. Tender drawings indicate the intended layout of the works, but are
not to be taken as a complete and dimensional reference.
The price offered shall be understood as the total sum for the complete civil and finishing works
to suit the requirements and the functions of the Works concerned. Design and choice of
construction materials shall consider and ensure the reduction of future maintenance works, and
therefore, all civil elements shall be designed to minimise maintenance and to result in a durable
construction with a minimum design life of 40 years.
The Bidder/Contractor shall prepare all necessary design and detail drawings in accordance with
the Project requirements. However, the following guidelines design criteria shall be strictly
followed and applied in view of the proposed equipment, and are having priority over the Tender
drawing details.

2 STANDARDS CODES AND REFERENCES FOR CIVIL WORK

Except where otherwise stipulated, all civil works materials, tests of works, investigations on
Site, installation and construction methods, and also manufacturing procedures shall comply as a
minimum with the following codes and standards:

S-TR-GEN-CDF (Civil Design Fundamental) (Rev.0-2019) Page 3 of 19

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Civil Design Fundamentals

EUROCODE CEN
European Committee for Standardisation
Central Secretariat
Rue de Stassart 36
B – 1050 Brussels
Belgium
UBC Uniform Building Code, 1997.
IBC International Building Code, 2009
DIN Deutsches Informationszentrum für Technische Regeln (DITR) in DIN
Deutsches Institut für Normung e.V.
Burggrafenstr. 4 – 10
10787 Berlin
Tel. +49 (0)30 2601-0 / Fax 2601-1260
ACI American Concrete Institute
P.O. Box 4754, Redford Station
Detroit, Michigan 28219, U.S.A.
ASTM American Society of Testing Materials
1916 Race Street, Philadelphia
Pennsylvania 19103, U.S.A.
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
101 Park Avenue, New York
N.Y. 10017, U.S.A.
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-conditioning Engineers Inc.
1791 Tullie Circle, N.E., Atlanta, GA 30329 USA
Phone: (404)636-8400, Fax: (404)321-5478
ASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials,
444 North Capitol Street, Suite 249,
Washington, D.C. 20001, USA,
Tel: +1 202 624-5800
NFPA National Fire Protection Agency
1 Batterymarch Park
P. O. Box 9101,
Quincy, Massachusetts, USA
Tel: +1 617 770-3000, Fax: +1 617 770-0700
BS British Standard
CIRIA Construction Industry Research and Information Association

S-TR-GEN-CDF (Civil Design Fundamental) (Rev.0-2019) Page 4 of 19

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Civil Design Fundamentals

Abu Dhabi Abu Dhabi International Building Code (2013)

Municipality
(ADIBC)

The Bidder/Contractor shall clearly identify in his offer which of the acceptable Standards shall
be applied during design and execution for each part of his works. Standards for one type of
materials shall be of the same grouping, i.e. only BS, DIN or ASTM. Only if the selected group
of Standards does not offer guidelines for specific parts of design or execution, alternative
standards may be proposed.
The Bidder/Contractor shall ensure that the design and execution of civil works adheres at least
to the minimum requirements based on BS.
Execution of concrete works shall normally either follow BS or DIN Standards. All concrete
works shall further be executed in line with the CIRIA publication “Guide to the construction of
reinforced concrete in the Arabian Peninsular”.
Structural Steel works shall normally be designed and executed according to EUROCODES 3
and 4.
Other Standards may only be applied after explicit approval through TRANSCO.
The Bidder/Contractor shall provide all required drawings for Town Planning Department, Civil
Defence, TRANSCO, Municipality and other Authorities, which are mandatory to obtain
required (building) permits.
In addition to the basic tendered design to be offered, the Bidder/Contractor may propose
alternative type(s) of building and structures to be applied within the Project.
It is the Bidder’s/Contractor’s obligation to carry out complete Geotechnical Investigations to
determine all relevant soil conditions and parameters required for a sound and durable structural
design, including the design bearing capacity of the ground to determine type and size of
foundations and to determine the chemical soil and groundwater aggressiveness.
Bidder/Contractor shall note that complete civil design of the Grid Station must be finished and
approved by TRANSCO/ Engineer within three (3) months after date of Letter of Award. All civil
design inputs (loading and layouts) for all electrical equipment, MEP equipment (HVAC, Fire
Fighting and Crane) must be approved before start of Civil Structural Design.

3 MATERIALS
All materials proposed and their colours selected to be used within the Project shall be subject to
TRANSCO’s approval and shall comply with the Technical Specification and the defined
Standards.
Application of materials shall be in line with this Specification, but Manufacturer’s specific
instructions for the use and application of his material shall be complied with.

S-TR-GEN-CDF (Civil Design Fundamental) (Rev.0-2019) Page 5 of 19

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Civil Design Fundamentals

All work shall be executed by skilled workers in a workmanlike manner. Prior to the start of
execution the Bidder/Contractor shall verify that all conditions are suitable for the timely and
effective carrying out of his work.
Specified or requested testing of material shall only be carried out by a licensed office or institute
or an approved laboratory, conforming to accepted standards in accordance with the technical
data and approved by TRANSCO. Selection of samples for testing shall be made by TRANSCO
at Site.
For site testing of fresh concrete, at least equipment equivalent to "Set B" of "Der Deutsche
Beton Verein e.V." shall be provided and used.
If no approved laboratory for the further testing of concrete materials is available, equipment
equivalent to that listed as "Set C” or “Set D" of "Der Deutsche Beton Verein e.V." shall be
provided in addition.

4 GENERAL DESIGN GUIDELINES

4.1 Substations above 11 kV

1. Substations shall normally be designed as concrete skeleton structures. Walls shall be
made of insulated block work or concrete panels of adequate insulation. The roof shall
normally be designed as flat concrete roof.
2. Foundations shall be designed according to the findings of the soil investigations and shall
consider the requirements of the buildings. In weak soils, pile foundations have to be
considered. Ground improvement, such as vibro compaction, vibro soil replacement, stone
columns, etc., may be proposed for TRANSCO’s approval. The Foundations shall be
capable of restricting settlements and other movements in service to acceptable limits of
the equipment’s to be housed or superstructure to be erected thereon.
3. Cable basements shall be considered under all 11 kV, 33 kV, 132 kV switchgear rooms
only. Cable Basement under other than switchgear rooms (i.e Capacitor Bank Rooms, Co2
Rooms etc) should not be provided. Preference shall be given to cable tunnel for 132 kV
switchgear rooms. The cable basement & cable sleeve penetrations shall be made 100%
watertight and fire protected by an approved method.
4. Provision and connection of easily accessible cable tunnels shall be considered for 220 kV
and 400 kV cable connections to the concerned switchgear.
5. Integrated Raised modular flooring shall at least be foreseen for Control-, Protection-,
LDC- & PLC-, Charger -, Telephone - & LV Station Supply Rooms.
6. The station design shall provide adequate provisions for one toilet and pantry facilities and
no office, as further detailed within the scope of works. Instead of an office, space and
furniture have to be accommodated in the Control room for use by maintenance personnel
to layout drawings and work out test and maintenance records.
7. A comprehensive HVAC System shall be provided for station.

S-TR-GEN-CDF (Civil Design Fundamental) (Rev.0-2019) Page 6 of 19

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Civil Design Fundamentals

8. Station ground level are to be defined according to local laws or to TRANSCO's/

instructions, and unless specified otherwise. The minimum Station level shall be 20 cm
above any adjacent (within 250 m) asphalt road.
9. Finish floor level (F.F.L) shall not be less than 50 cm above external ground (station) level.
10. In general, the underside of basement slabs should not be deeper than 2.0 m below final
ground (station) level, and should normally also be at least 30 cm above the highest ground
water level considering seasonal fluctuation.
11. Minimum free height (clearance) of basements is to be 2.0 m in traffic areas/escape routes
beneath any permanent lowest installation. The Maximum Cable Basement Headroom
shall be 2.5 meters underneath of Ground Floor Slab/ Beams.
12. An adequate number of doors/emergency exits to comply with means of egress
requirements and sufficient loading spaces have to be provided.
13. No provision to be made for daylight in any room of the substation, except for the outer
wall of the Control Room, in which 10% glass block to be provided as per relevant
specification. Fire rating of the glass blocks panels shall be in accordance with the local
regulations or NFPA, at least, however, 90 minutes.
OR:
No provision is to be made for daylight in any room of the substation plant, except that the
relay room outer wall shall be provided with 10% Aluminum double glazed non fire rated
window (but U-value as specified needs to be achieved) as per relevant specification.
14. Installation of double glazed windows shall be limited to pantry and one toilets.
15. All basements/cellars and cable trenches to be executed with at least 1% slope towards
drainage points or pump sumps, which shall be provided for each section or at least at both
ends of the trench or basement. The Drain Channels shall be Located flush to Peripheral
RC Basement walls and Base Slab to Slope towards peripheral drain channel.
16. Concrete roof slabs shall be cast horizontally, i.e. with 0 % slope. Then, it shall be covered
by screed with sufficient slopes (minimum 2 %). Proposals for diagonal roof slopes of (1%
towards rain water outlets) made by lean concrete may be provided. Diagonal slopes of 1%
are not required if a provision of gutter is adopted in the design.
17. The galvanized earthing grid riser shall be installed only to establish electrical connection
between the reinforcement and the earthing bars in switchgear halls. In other words, no
separate equipotential mesh embedded in concrete slab of switchgear hall; however the
rebars in switchgear hall concrete slab shall be connected to the earth grid. The
reinforcement shall be well in contact to ensure equipotential across the switchgear hall
concrete slabs; however GIS earthing connection shall be done as per GIS manufacturer
recommendation.
18. Normally a recessed/flush installation shall be foreseen for all cabinets and panels, e.g. for
indoor fire hose reels, breathing apparatus, fire extinguishers, annunciator/repeater panels,
CO2 lock off units, alarm/detection equipment, etc.

S-TR-GEN-CDF (Civil Design Fundamental) (Rev.0-2019) Page 7 of 19

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Civil Design Fundamentals

19. A minimum slope of 1% and Floor Drains/Pits shall be provided in all rooms /areas, where
surface water may occur, e.g. the H.V.A.C. Plant Room, Fire Pump Room, Battery Rooms,
trenches, toilet, and Insulator Washing Equipment Room, etc.
20. SWG/SVC-hall floors and the transformer/shunt reactor basements shall have rigid
foundations to minimise differential settlements. If separate basements are provided, the
Bidder/Contractor shall provide proof for the maximum settlements, and shall provide
sufficiently sized compensators in the Switchgear (GIS). Reference is made to the GIS
specification.
21. External block walls, roofs, aluminium or metal clad walls and roofs, as well as all doors
and windows of all building shall provide adequate thermal insulation and shall be
approved by TRANSCO. The thermal transmission coefficient U of walls, including all
windows and doors, shall be equal to or less than 1.2 W/(m2 *K).
22. Distances and room partitions shall be designed according to the specified fire protection
standards. The design layout shall follow the requirements of preventive measures as
outlined in the relevant sections.
23. Unless local regulation require differently, all fire rated doors shall be designed in
accordance with NFPA, and all reinforced concrete structure members (slabs, beams,
frames, columns, etc) shall be designed in accordance with DIN V 18230, DIN 4102, or
NFPA 220 type 1, table 3, and to withstand at least the below listed fire ratings:

Structure/concrete 120 min.

Structural Steel, Roof & Wall Sheeting 120 min.
External walls 120 min.
Internal fire barrier wall 120 min.
Glass blocks 90 min.
Fire rated steel doors
 Fire rating 90 min.
 Integrity/stability of insulation/core 20 min.
 Raised floor 30 min.

24. Transformer foundations shall be designed as a solid block foundation (not separate
beams/walls) and reinforced properly for all straining action including the effects during
casting and service life of the transformer.
25. Transformer bays/shunt reactor shall be designed and executed - in view of fire protection
and the required oil and water collection capacity - as follows:
 Double walls shall be used between transformer bays and building walls, whereby
both walls shall be designed as fire separation.

S-TR-GEN-CDF (Civil Design Fundamental) (Rev.0-2019) Page 8 of 19

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Civil Design Fundamentals

 Each transformer bay shall be enclosed by reinforced concrete cast in situ fire
protection walls on three sides. whereby these walls shall be designed as fire
separation (This Structural System Should be Confirmed by Transformer
Manufacturer).
 All walls shall be at least 0.5 m higher than the highest transformer part (e.g. top of
tank). Design of the Bays, the Fire Walls, the Oil Tanks and the Fire Fighting
equipment shall meet NFPA and local regulations.
 For 400KV & 220KV grid stations; transformer bays shall be separated from GIS
buildings, minimum separation distance shall be 3.0 to 4.0 meters and minimum
thickness of RC cast is situ fire wall shall be 400mm.
 For 132 KV Multi storeyed substation within city area, double walls (solid block
including plastering +75mm cavity with insulation +RC cast in situ fire wall) shall be
given between GIS hall & Power Transformer bay, without expansion joint thus
transformer bay shall be integral part of building. And side fire walls shall be
reinforced concrete cast in situ with minimum thickness of 300mm.
 The capacity of the oil collection area incorporated in the foundation has to be
designed according to the oil capacity of the transformer as well as the maximum
expected fire fighting water.
 If specified and approved, joint oil/water separator tanks may be provided for groups
of transformer foundations. Reference is made to below listed sample drawing,
which is provided in the Drawings Section.
Drawing No. Title
TRANSCO GEN 01 01 Typical Oil Separator

 If specified, transformer bays shall be covered by a light-weight roof construction

over the full bay ensuring shading, but not obstructing necessary ventilation and air
circulation. Costs for this construction must be clearly indicated in the BOQ/PTS.
26. Access to transformer bays shall be a chain link fence or a GI mesh Fence, doors and
frames shall hot dip galvanised after manufacture and welding, and shall be coated
(corrosion protected) as per the General Specifications Part :
 S-CORR - Corrosion Protection and Painting Color Codes

Alternatively, such gates and fences may be constructed utilising powder coated
aluminium sections and profiles.

27. Each substation has to be equipped with fire alarm and fire fighting systems, which meet
NFPA regulations.
28. Wherever the soil investigation indicate a highest groundwater table (Considering seasonal
Fluctuation) within (2.5) meter below the lowest slab level, all reinforced concrete
structures below ground level (e.g. basement slabs & wall, trenches, etc.) shall be designed

S-TR-GEN-CDF (Civil Design Fundamental) (Rev.0-2019) Page 9 of 19

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Civil Design Fundamentals

as water retaining structure in accordance with BS 8007 and BS 8110. For substations
within the City of Abu Dhabi, the ground water level shall generally be considered at the
finish ground level.
29. Cable trenches shall be designed and provided for the foreseen future extension of the
Station (including consideration of all HV, MV, LV, HVAC, F.F. and control cables).
30. All cable recesses and openings to be provided for foreseen future extension (including
HV, MV, LV and control cables) shall be made 100% watertight and fire protected by an
approved method.
31. Provisional recesses and openings in floors of Switchgear, Control and Relay Rooms and
prepared for the foreseen future extension of the Station shall be covered by heavy duty
chequered plates, fire protected and – if required – thermally insulated.
32. Foundation and floor slab reinforcement shall have projecting galvanised earthing flags to
enable connection to the earthing grid of the Station.
33. All substation metalwork including transformer tank, cable screens, feeder pillar, doors and
any internal structural steel work shall be securely bonded together so that a firm metallic
connection existing between each of them and the substation earthing terminal.
34. External earth points as per requirement for equipment and system earthing shall also be
arranged to keep earth resistance to less than two ohms.
35. A/C unit mounted on roof / top roof shall be surrounded by screen walls (i.e. clustra block,
GRP, aluminium sections).
36. External/internal stair to roof/top roof to be provided. Note that external staircases open to
sky leading to the roof shall be structural steel with Hot Dip Galvanization and epoxy
coating.
37. Roof Parapet shall be flushed with peripheral beams, rather than roof gutter. Therefore,
Rain Water Outlet & Roof Water Proofing system to be submitted for Owner/Engineer
approval.
38. Expansion joints shall be located as determined during the structural design and marked in
the relevant drawings as per in CIRIA and Concrete Society’s – “Guide to the construction
of reinforced concrete in the Arabian Peninsular”.
39. Combine the Rooms in the Substation Building for Similar Equipment for TRANSCO and
DISCO’s Facilities as follows:
a) Single Common Battery room for TRANSCO & DISCO
b) Common Control & Protection/ Relay room but Separate for TRANSCO & DISCO
c) Single Common DC Chargers & LVAC room for TRANSCO & DISCO.
40. In GIS halls, HVAC Ducts (Supply & Return) shall be below Corbel Level & the
Maximum Headroom between the Top of Corbel to underneath/ soffit of Roof Beam/ Slab
shall be 2.30 meters.

S-TR-GEN-CDF (Civil Design Fundamental) (Rev.0-2019) Page 10 of 19

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Civil Design Fundamentals

41. In GIS halls, all External Peripheral Columns shall be kept flush from inside to reduce the
Internal Equipment Clearance.
42. All front Opening Equipment Panels shall have maximum clearance of 0.2 meters with
Rear wall for effective ventilation. The maximum clearance between Panels in two or more
rows facing face to face shall be 2.4 meters including panels in open door condition.
43. Unnecessary space to be left unbuilt (no walls, no roof, no FD/FP, no HVAC etc.) in order
to reduce the overall Built Up Area.

4.2 Substations 11 kV and below

This section refers to additional, deviating specific civil works requirements related to the
construction of Substations of the voltage level 11 kV and below.
1. For the buildings, preference will be given to a standardised pre-fabricated scheme,
ensuring fast completion and maintaining the required high quality of works.
2. It may be noted that experience has proven that in the past in most cases, a bearing
capacity of 50 kN/m2 could in the past be assumed in Abu Dhabi, and 100 kN/m2 in Al
Ain.
3. For not air-conditioned stations, lattice steel doors ensuring adequate ventilation, shall be
provided. The minimum door opening shall be 3.0 m x 2.3 m.
4. For air-conditioned stations, doors for Switchgear rooms shall be double leaf, insulated
steel doors.
5. Thermal insulation of all walls, roofs, doors, glass blocks, etc. shall be adequately designed
and shall be approved by TRANSCO. The thermal transmission coefficient U of walls,
including all windows and doors, shall be equal to or less than 1.2 W/(m2 *K).
6. All cables, ducts and conduits entering the Station shall normally be routed horizontally
and below ground level, Adequate provision shall be made to seal the cable entries against
ingress of water and to prevent animals, etc. from entering.
7. A/C unit mounted on roof / top roof shall be surrounded by screen walls (i.e. clustra block,
GRP, aluminium sections).
8. External/internal stair to roof/top roof to be provided. Note that external staircases open to
sky leading to the roof shall be constructed of structural steel with Hot Dip Galvanization
and epoxy coating.

4.3 Transmission Lines

1. OHTL Tower foundations shall normally be designed as single-leg foundation, i.e. one
foundation per tower leg.
2. OHTL foundations shall reach at least (50-75) cm above the final ground level at the tower
location site.

S-TR-GEN-CDF (Civil Design Fundamental) (Rev.0-2019) Page 11 of 19

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Civil Design Fundamentals

3. If required, pile foundations shall be provided with permanent casings wherever the ground
down to the bearing strata is highly aggressive or cannot support the newly cast pile.
4. Whenever required for the execution of the works, construction access roads shall be
provided by the Bidder/Contractor.
5. Maintenance access roads may be ordered by TRANSCO, if required along sections of the
line.

4.4 Underground Cables

Civil works shall be carried out in line with the General Specifications Part and shall be subject
to approval by TRANSCO.

5 DESIGN CRITERIA
Following fundamental design criteria shall be strictly followed and applied in view of the
proposed equipment, and are having priority over the Tender drawing details and dimensions.

5.1 Stations
1. Design Criteria to be submitted shall include a description of the following:
 Soil investigations/ Geophysical Survey
 Codes and standards to be adopted in the design
 All Loading to be adopted for the various elements of the structure
 Method of Seismic & Wind Analysis.
 Load factors and load combinations
 Description of the design method and theories to be adopted.
 All checks for Structural Stability & Serviceability.
2. Architectural scheme design
3. Base calculation of the structural design and general arrangement drawings shall include
the principle framing and loading calculations, as well as the information concerning the
expected forces in the relevant elements of the structure.
4. Architectural detail drawings (for Stations only) covering the electrical equipment
requirements shall be co-ordinated with Mechanical, Electrical and Plumbing (MEP)
drawings and shall include the following:
 Plans, elevations and sections detailed enough to enable construction without
difficulties including Area Statement for Total Built Up Area.
 Stair case details
 Roofing and water proofing detail

S-TR-GEN-CDF (Civil Design Fundamental) (Rev.0-2019) Page 12 of 19

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Civil Design Fundamentals

 Doors and windows schedules

 Finishing schedules.
 All Builders works drawings shall be submitted for information only.
5. Structural detail drawings shall include the following:
 Detailed structural calculations for the analysis and the design of all members and the
full structure.
 General notes and typical detail drawings that are applicable the majority of works.
Reference shall be made to the below listed sample drawing, which is provided in the
Drawings Section.
Drawing No. Title
TRANSCO CIV 00 01 General Notes

 Load drawings, showing all dead, equipment and live loads, including line loads
from walls etc.
 Reinforcement details, bar bending schedules, following ACI/ BS simplified methods
for detailing, except where seismic/ductile connections are required. This detailing
should be elaborated and presented in more details.
 Concrete protection details
 Structural steel details of all members, their welds and other connections
 Coatings and corrosion protection details
 Detailed lists of steel structure members, plates, bolts (Connection & Anchor Bolts)
 Details of sheet metals and claddings for walls and roofs, etc.
 Details of walls, stairs and other members
 Formwork drawings/calculations shall be submitted for information.
The design procedure for the project shall be as described above, but not necessary limited to the
above and shall be approved by TRANSCO before proceeding.

5.2 Transmission Lines

1. Design criteria to be submitted shall include a description of the following:
 Soil investigations
 Codes and standards to be adopted in the design
 Loading to be adopted for the foundations based on the approved Tower design
 Load factors/load combinations for foundation and stub angle design
 Description of the design method and theories to be adopted

S-TR-GEN-CDF (Civil Design Fundamental) (Rev.0-2019) Page 13 of 19

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Civil Design Fundamentals

 Foundation tests to be applied and their details.

 Quality Assurance Plan for Structural Steel & connection Bolts.
2. Base calculation of the foundation design and general arrangement drawings shall include
the principle loading calculations resulting from the tower design, as well as the
information concerning the expected forces in the relevant foundation.
Foundation forces along the slope of the tower leg and in the global axes shall be provided
in a table format for all types of towers and their extensions.
3. Structural details shall include the following:
 Detailed structural calculations of all members of the foundation showing that the
ultimate earth bearing capacity is not exceeded by the maximum pressure due to
loads, acting on the tower, multiplied with the corresponding safety factor, and due
to the dead weight of the tower and foundation
 Prove that the uplift forces on the foundation do not exceed the weight of the fictive
anchor body in the soil, assumed to be in the shape of an inverted pyramid/cone
starting 25 cm above the toe of the pile. Alternative, methods of design can be
adopted subject to TRANSCO approval
 Calculations and drawings showing the bearing capacity and stresses at each critical
section of the concrete and the steel reinforcement
 Type of foundation selected for each tower location
 Reinforcement details, bar bending schedules
 Concrete protection details
 Structural steel details of stubs and cleats
 Detailed lists of steel structure members, plates, bolts, etc. for the stubs
 Coatings and corrosion protection details for the stubs.
 All checks for Structural Stability & Serviceability.
The design procedure for the project shall be as described above, but not necessary limited to the
above and shall be approved by TRANSCO before proceeding.

5.3 Underground Cables

1. Design criteria to be submitted shall include a description of the following:
 Soil investigations
 Codes and standards to be adopted in the design
 Loading to be adopted for structure
 Load factors and load combinations
 Description of the design method and theories to be adopted.

S-TR-GEN-CDF (Civil Design Fundamental) (Rev.0-2019) Page 14 of 19

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Civil Design Fundamentals

 Different Method Road Crossing i.e Duct Bank, NDRC/ HDD, Pipe Jacking/ Micro
Tunnelling etc.
2. Structural details shall include the following:
 Detailed structural calculations of all members and structures
 Type of foundation to be applied
 Reinforcement details, bar bending schedules, prepared in line with ACI/ BS
simplified methods for detailing, except where seismic/ductile connections are
required. These have to be elaborated and presented in more detail.
 Concrete protection details
 Structural steel details of all elements
 Detailed lists of structural steel elements, welds, plates, bolts, and other connections
 Coatings and corrosion protection details
 All checks for Structural Stability & Serviceability.
The design procedure for the project shall be as described above, but not necessary limited
to the above and shall be approved by TRANSCO before proceeding.

6 LOAD AND DESIGN ASSUMPTIONS

6.1 General Assumptions

Further to the data given in the Section on General Design Fundamentals, the minimum
requirements for loads to be applied for the static analysis of both sub-and superstructure works
shall be as follows, whereby equipment and installation loads always shall be considered
additionally:
- Live load for building roofs 1.5 2
kN/m
(A/C equipment and foundations to be considered additionally)
2
- Battery rooms, CO2 room 7.5 kN/m
2
- Control Rooms (SCMS, LVAC, Charger etc), corridors. 5.0 kN/m
(Excluding Loading for Cables along cable trays, Steel Structure
supporting Panels etc below raised flooring & self wt of raised
floor system)
2
- Switchgear Rooms, Capacitor Bank Room 10.0 kN/m
2
- Offices, stores 3.0 kN/m
2
- Pantry, staircases, etc. 3.0 kN/m

S-TR-GEN-CDF (Civil Design Fundamental) (Rev.0-2019) Page 15 of 19

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Civil Design Fundamentals

2
- Plant Rooms (Fire Pump) 7.5 kN/m
2
- HVAC and Condenser Yard 5.0 kN/m
2
- Minimum Additional dead load for suspended ceiling, pipes, 1.0 kN/m
AC system, etc
- Roads and pavements, gutters SLW 60, DIN 1072
- Water tanks, septic tanks, etc. in road areas SLW 60, DIN 1072
- The Allowable total settlement should not exceed 25.00 mm in any case.
The Permissible Differential Settlement between foundations in substations & within
structures shall not exceed 10 mm or as per OEM requirements.

6.2 Seismic Load

Static analysis shall be carried out for seismic loads calculated as static shear forces based on
seismic coefficient of 0.15 in accordance with Zone 2A of Uniform Building Code (latest
Version). The Seismic Importance Factor shall be considered as 1.0. All other parameters must
be determined in accordance with UBC/ IBC-2009 and highlighted in design criteria. Structural
analysis and design shall be started after approval of such parameters. Under Seismic Lump
Mass calculation, roof live load should be considered as 25% as per UBC-1997.
The buildings and structures shall meet the serviceability requirements of UBC.

6.3 Crane load

Vertical load will be considered for a maximum approach of crane hook towards the building
columns. An impact factor of 25% of wheel load shall be considered for design of crane girder.
Longitudinal surge forces parallel to the crane runaway girder shall be 5% of wheel load shared
equally on both sides.
Lateral surge force (perpendicular to crane runaway girder) shall be 10% of lifted weight +
trolley weight.

6.4 Wind Load

Wind loads shall be calculated in line with –BS-6399 Part-2. The maximum wind speed shall be
taken from the specification as defined under
 S-GEN-GDF - General Requirements: General Design Fundamentals

The site wind speed (Vs, as defined in BS-6399- Part2) shall be taken equal to the maximum
wind speed as mentioned above. Other parameters shall be considered in line with above
mentioned standard for calculation of Effective Wind Speed and Wind Pressure. The buildings
and structures governing wind load shall meet the serviceability requirements of BS.

S-TR-GEN-CDF (Civil Design Fundamental) (Rev.0-2019) Page 16 of 19

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Civil Design Fundamentals

6.5 Load Combinations

Following basic load combinations shall be considered in the analysis of framed structures for
buildings:
a) DL + LL + EL
b) DL+ LL+ EL+ CL.( Working condition)
c) DL+ 25%LL+ EL± SL.x/z+ CL. (50% lift capacity + self weight of crane) Any bay may have crane.
d) DL + EL ± SL x/z
e) DL+ 25%LL+ EL + WL.x/z + CL. (50% lift capacity + self weight of crane) Any bay may have crane.
f) DL ± WL.x/z
g) DL + EL ± WL.x/z

DL = Dead Load
LL = Live Load
EL = Equipment Load
SL.x/z = Seismic load in X or Z Hor. direction
SL.Ver = Seismic load in Vertical Direction
WL.x/z = Wind Load in X or Z Hor. Direction
CL = Crane Load
For the design of buildings with crane, the longitudinal frame shall suitably consider surge loads
in longitudinal direction, from crane.

In case buildings/ Structures are proposed without expansion joint or violating the requirements
as per CIRIA, then that structure shall be analyzed for temperature stress in combination with
load cases as mentioned above.

6.6 Increase in Soil Bearing Capacity/ Pile Capacity

For load combinations with wind and seismic loads, soil bearing capacity can be increased by
25% over the values mentioned in the Soil investigation report.
For load combinations with wind and seismic loads, pile capacity can be increased by 25% as per
pile design.

6.7 Under-Ground Water Retaining Structures

Water retaining structures below ground shall be analysed considering earth outside with ground
water up to the maximum assumed level, but no water inside. Additionally, a surcharge load of
2000 kg/m2 shall be considered for structures located very near to roads, or else a surcharge load
of 1000 kg/m2 shall be considered. In case the structure has compartments, the structure must be
analysed for the condition that water is present in one compartment only.

S-TR-GEN-CDF (Civil Design Fundamental) (Rev.0-2019) Page 17 of 19

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Civil Design Fundamentals

Earth pressure for under ground structures will be calculated using coefficient of active earth
pressure (Ka) or earth pressure at rest (K0) depending on boundary condition.
Reinforced concrete members shall be designed with a crack width not more than 0.2 mm in
accordance with BS 8007. In case underground water doesn’t exist, no need to design for crack
width.

7 PARTICULAR SPACE REQUIREMENTS

Dimension of Switchgear rooms, SVC Halls and control rooms shall be determined under full
consideration of the equipment requirements and listed in the relevant part of the Specification.
The minimum spacing between the back of HV and MY switchgear and the adjacent structure is
reduced to 1.0 m or the minimum that is required to undertake all installation, operation and
maintenance activities including transportation and replacement of the heaviest and largest part
of the equipment as per manufacturer instruction (Whichever is greater), instead of the
requirement as given in the Tender drawings.
Pipes, lighting installations, air conditioning ducts and glass block panels have to be located in a
way that sufficient (shadow-free) lighting is provided after completion of all installations.

8 ROADS AND PAVEMENTS

Roads within the substation limit shall be either concrete or asphalt roads or heavy duty
interlocking tiles of at least 6.60 m width with kerbstones on both sides. However, for 132kV
substations located within cities, internal and external roads should be constructed of interlock
tiles only. Walkways should not be provided to surrounding building, as they should be only
provided to main building entrance and 2.0m around personnel doors. Note that provision for
impact protection to building has to be made in locations where roads pass by and no walkways
exist as well. Road radii in relation to the outer curb shall not be less than 21.00 m. sufficient
slopes for surface water drainage of all paved areas shall be provided.
For paved areas, suitable passage and kerbstone shall be arranged with at least 1.00 m distance to
the nearest building.
The construction of an asphalt access road from the end of internal roads inside the station
boundary to the nearest external road and as detailed in the scope of works shall be included in
the scope of works, unless explicitly stated otherwise in the scope of work. Road widths here
shall be at least 7.5 m. The road section shall be as per Municipality/Town Planning approval,
with kerbstones, shoulders and/or 1.5 m wide walkways on both sides. The roads are to be
designed for loads of SLW 60 (DIN 1072).

9 BOUNDARY WALLS & PERIMETER FENCING

Where specified, Boundary Walls shall be arranged at the perimeter of the plot. The boundary
walls shall be at least of 2.75 m high from outside/ External road level, and made of pre-
fabricated concrete panels of approximately four (4) meter length painted from both sides. At the

S-TR-GEN-CDF (Civil Design Fundamental) (Rev.0-2019) Page 18 of 19

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Civil Design Fundamentals

top of the boundary wall, 100 mm height of spikes option shall be fixed of metal strip
encased/fixed on top the panel.
Boundary walls shall normally be arranged at a distance of not less than 1.5 m from the plot
limits unless specified differently in the scope of works. However, for 132kV Substations inside
cities, it is required to keep one side or many sides of the building flushes to plot boundary so as
to reduce the length of the pre-cast boundary wall.
On filled plots (or plots to be filled) the boundary wall shall keep a distance of at least 3 m from
the edge of fill, where it has reached the final fill level. Contractor has to submit slope stability
calculations for O/E approval.
Alternatively, TRANSCO may specify security fencing around the plot. Such fence shall be at
least 3.00 m high chain link or – if approved or specified within the scope of works - mesh fence,
with additional arms for four strands of barbed wire at the top. The bottom of the fence mesh
shall be encased in a ground beam.
For every plot, at least two entrance gates have to be arranged within the boundary wall or
security perimeter fence. Each gate shall be a double winged road gate of at least 6.0 m clear
opening, with a separate pedestrian gate of 1.2 m width each. Transportation requirements for the
equipment may require larger openings and have to be considered.
Boundary wall shall be provided with external type of light fitting.
For details, reference shall be made to the below listed drawing, provided in the Drawings
Section:
Drawing No. Title
TRANSCO CIV 01 01 Pre-Cast Boundary Wall Details

S-TR-GEN-CDF (Civil Design Fundamental) (Rev.0-2019) Page 19 of 19

 STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRIC WORKS

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
( SPECIFICATION )

ELECTRICAL DESIGN FUNDAMENTALS

TRANSCO STANDARD : S-TR-GEN-EDF (EL DESIGN

FUNDAMENTAL) (REV.0-2023)

S-TR-GEN-EDF (El Design Fundamental) (Rev.0-2023) Page 1 of 10

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Electrical Design Fundamentals

CONTENTS

1 ELECTRICAL INSULATION RATINGS ................................................................... 3

2 CLEARANCES IN AIR .................................................................................................. 5
2.1 Applicable Standards......................................................................................................... 5
2.2 Minimum Clearances of Air-Insulated Switchgear ........................................................... 5
2.3 Minimum Clearances of OHTL......................................................................................... 6
2.4 Clearances of deflected Bar Conductors or Live Parts (Outdoor) ..................................... 7
2.5 Minimum Height and Protective Barrier Clearances of Outdoor Installations (DIN
VDE 0101) ........................................................................................................................ 7
2.6 Live Conductor Crossings ................................................................................................. 8
2.7 Minimum Clearances of/to Underground Cables & Cables to other Services .................. 8
3 MOUNTING HEIGHT OF EQUIPMENT ................................................................... 9
4 INSTALLATION HEIGHTS ......................................................................................... 9
5 CREEPAGE DISTANCES ............................................................................................. 9
6 SUBSTATION AND DISTRIBUTION AUXILIARY SUPPLY
VOLTAGES ................................................................................................................... 10
7 LIGHTING SYSTEMS................................................................................................. 10
8 LDC INTERFACING ................................................................................................... 10

S-TR-GEN-EDF (El Design Fundamental) (Rev.0-2023) Page 2 of 10

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Electrical Design Fundamentals

ELECTRICAL DESIGN FUNDAMENTALS

The following shall form the basis for each Bidder/Contractor to optimise his Proposal with
regard to local facts, and to prevailing technical realities.
The information given hereunder applies to all works in addition to the General Conditions,
Special Technical Requirements, System Characteristics, and Civil Design Fundamentals, unless
specified to greater detail in sections on specific installations..

1. ELECTRICAL INSULATION RATINGS

The equipment offered must be suitable in all respects for operation within TRANSCO’s high
voltage, medium voltage and low voltage systems.
The characteristic design insulation ratings based on IEC 60071 and IEC 60694
recommendations being tabulated on the following page:

S-TR-GEN-EDF (El Design Fundamental) (Rev.0-2023) Page 3 of 10

 Highest Voltage Nominal / Number of Rated Rated Rated Rated Lightning Lightning Switching Switching Switching

Note:
for Equipment Operating phases and Freq. power power power impulse impulse impulse impulse impulse
(Um – IEC Voltage starpoint frequency frequency frequency voltage voltage voltage voltage voltage
60071) or Rated condition (Hz) withstand withstand withstand withstand withstand withstand withstand withstand
Voltage (Ur – voltage (1 voltage (1 voltage (1 (phase - (across (phase - (phase - (across
IEC 60694) min.) Phase min.) across min.) across phase and isolating earth and phase) isolating
to Phase, open switch isolating phase - distance) across open distance)
Phase to distance earth) switch)
Earth

420 kV 400 kV 3 - phase 50 525kV 650 kV 650 kV 1425 kV 1425 kV 1050 kV 1575 kV 900 kV
(+345 kV)
solid earth (+240 kV)

245 kV 220 kV 3 - phase 50 460 kV 460 kV 530 kV 1050 kV 1200 kV N.A. N.A. N.A.
solid earth

S-TR-GEN-EDF (El Design Fundamental) (Rev.0-2023)

145 kV 132 kV 3 - phase 50 275 kV 275 kV 315 kV 650 kV 750 kV N.A. N.A. N.A.
solid earth
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Electrical Design Fundamentals

(Power Transformers, Part 3: Insulation Levels, Dielectric Tests and External Clearances in Air).

All electrical equipment shall be entirely suitable for use under the prevailing site conditions.
For insulation levels of transformers reference shall be made to the respective Standard Technical Specification and IEC 60076-3

Page 4 of 10
 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Electrical Design Fundamentals

2. CLEARANCES IN AIR

2.1 Applicable Standards

DIN EN 60071 - Insulation Co-ordination for equipment in three-phase a.c.

systems above 1 kV
DIN VDE 0101 - Erection of power installations with rated voltages above 1 kV
DIN VDE 0105 - Operating of power installations
DIN VDE 0210 - Planning and design of overhead power lines with rated
voltages > 1 kV
DIN VDE 0211 - Planning and design of overhead power lines with rated
voltages < 1 kV
IEC 61936 - Power installations exceeding 1 kVac – Common Rules

2.2 Minimum Clearances of Air-Insulated Switchgear

In the arrangement of all HV and EHV equipment, the following clearances in air shall be
maintained as an absolute minimum under all possible combinations of effects of construction
tolerances, mechanical and electromechanical loads including conductor swings due to wind load
or electric currents, thermal expansion etc. under any normal operating condition and any short
circuit condition.
These clearances may be lower if it has been proven by tests on actual or similar configurations
that the standard impulse-withstand voltages are met, taking into account all relevant
environmental conditions:
IEC 60071-2:

Nominal/Operating Minimum Clearances (mm)

Voltage (kV)
Rod to Structure Conductor to Structure

400 2850 2700

220 2100 2000

132 1300 2400

S-TR-GEN-EDF (El Design Fundamental) (Rev.0-2023) Page 5 of 10

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Electrical Design Fundamentals

Nominal/Operating Minimum Clearances (mm)

Voltage (kV)
Conductor to Conductor parallel ** Rod to Conductor *

400 4600 5000

132 2900

* Rod-cond : rod-conductor structure (non-homogen electrical field, for example

lightning rods)
** Cond-cond : conductor-conductor structure (homogen electrical field between two
parallel running conductors)
These clearances do not apply within the same equipment item, if a type test has verified the
lightning and/or switching impulse voltage withstand levels as specified.
The above absolute minimum clearances must be increased to achieve personal safety and
screening distances, or where special hazards (e.g. of fire, moving machinery etc.) exist.

2.3 Minimum Clearances of OHTL

These clearances may be lower if it has been proven by tests on actual or similar configurations
that the standard impulse-withstand voltages are met, taking into account all relevant
environmental conditions:
EN 50341-1

Nominal/Operating Minimum Clearances (mm)

Voltage (kV) Phase to Earth/Phase

400 3050/3600
220 1700/

132 1270/1475

S-TR-GEN-EDF (El Design Fundamental) (Rev.0-2023) Page 6 of 10

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Electrical Design Fundamentals

2.4 Clearances of deflected Bar Conductors or Live Parts (Outdoor)

Nominal/ Minimum Safety Clearances (mm)

Operating
..to Walkways (for ..to public ..to Buildings, Roofs, Structures, ..over Pipeline
Voltage pedestrians), Roads/Highway Light Poles, etc. inside of
(kV) Residential Areas Surfaces Electrical
Installation/Reservation
Boundaries

0.4 3000 6000/10000 3000 8000

132 7500 9000/10000 5000 9000

220 8000 9000/10000 6000 9000

400 9000 11000/12000 7000 11000

Remarks: For OHTLs conductor clearances the maximum swing at maximum conductor sag of the
concerned OHTL conductor shall be considered (refer to DIN VDE 0210).

2.5 Minimum Height and Protective Barrier Clearances of Outdoor Installations

(DIN VDE 0101)

Nominal/ Minimum Horizontal Clearances between Live Parts (mm) and....

Operating
..solid panel wall ..wire mesh ..rail, chain, rope ..substation perimeter
Voltage with a min. height of with a min. height walls of min. 1800 mm
(kV) 1800 mm of 1100 mm height

0.4 100 200 400 1000

132 1200 1300 1500 2700

220 2100 2200 2400 3600

400 3400 3500 3700 4900

Important Note: 250 meters ahead of the points of which OHL crossing a public road; a
clear Sign Boards should be installed on the roadsides facing all traffic
directions (in a way not to be removed by public) defining the maximum
allowable vehicle height. Board shall be long lasting as OHL life and
according to the specifications of the drawing number (DWG TR CIV 15).

S-TR-GEN-EDF (El Design Fundamental) (Rev.0-2023) Page 7 of 10

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Electrical Design Fundamentals

2.6 Live Conductor Crossings

Where a live conductor crosses another live conductor, clearances shall be as under:

Nominal / Operating Min. Electrical Clearances (mm)

Voltage (kV)
11kV/33kV 132 kV 220 kV 400 kV Tele-Communication
Line

0.4 4500 4500 5000 5000 3500

132 4500 4500 5000 5000 4500
220 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000
400 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000

Remarks: For OHTLs conductor clearances the maximum swing at maximum conductor sag of the
concerned OHTL conductor shall be considered (refer to DIN VDE 0210).

2.7 Minimum Clearances of/to Underground Cables & Cables to other Services

Nominal / Horizontal Vertical Vertical/Horizontal

Operating Voltage Cable Centre Line to Cable Centre Ground Surface from Cables to
(kV) Line (cm) to other Services
Cable Bottom (cm) (cm)
Between circuits Between phases (SC)

110 (in trough)

132 100 20 >200*,>60**/>100
115 (direct buried)

220 150 45 110 (in trough) >200*,>60**/>100

400 180 60 110 (in trough) >200*, >60**/>100

Notes:
* distance from piles (horizontal)
** at cable crossings the space between the cable circuits shall be filled with CBS compound

Important Note:
Cable Crossing Clearances shall not influence transmission capacities (de-rating shall be
minimised) of the involved cables. Heat transfer calculations shall be submitted for approval to
prove that the proposed clearance shall not influence the crossed cables.

S-TR-GEN-EDF (El Design Fundamental) (Rev.0-2023) Page 8 of 10

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Electrical Design Fundamentals

3. MOUNTING HEIGHT OF EQUIPMENT

The top edge of the supporting structure of any insulator must be at least 2300 mm above
walkway floor level if no barrier is provided to restrict access.

4. INSTALLATION HEIGHTS
The installation heights of center line of wiring accessories and other items of equipment shall
generally be as follows:

Lighting switches 1.4 m AFFL

Socket outlets in general 0.4 m AFFL

Socket outlets in kitchen 0.45 m AFFL or 0.3 m above

working table top

Socket outlet for supply to fan coil units of A/C split units 0.3 m below ceiling level

MCB Distribution Boards 1.8 m AFFL

Telephone outlet jacks 0.45 m AFFL

Fire Alarm sounders 2.3 m AFFL

5. CREEPAGE DISTANCES
Due to the extreme climatic and pollution conditions, Specific Creepage Distances have to be
increased beyond those stipulated in IEC/TS 60815, and shall be as follows (based on the highest
rated phase to phase voltage, subjected to TRANSCO approval according to the installation
location environmental condition, and applicable to HV and MV installations):

Specific Creepage Distance

Installation
‘SCD’ (mm/KVph-ph)

Outdoor installations (Composite) 40

Outdoor installations (Porcelain) 50

Indoor, or fully encapsulated installations with protection

class IP 42 or better and including anti-condensation 36.4
heater

Interior of cable connection compartments with protection

class IP 5X and including anti-condensation devices 27.8
/dehumidifier

Manufacturer's design
Gas insulated encapsulated installations

S-TR-GEN-EDF (El Design Fundamental) (Rev.0-2023) Page 9 of 10

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Electrical Design Fundamentals

NOTES:
1- Specific Creepage Distance as defined in IEC 60815 (2008) based on line-to-line value of the
highest voltage for the equipment Even For line-to-earth insulation.
2- ‘Kd’ factor (based on insulator diameters) shall be taken into consideration during total
Creepage Distance calculations.

6. SUBSTATION AND DISTRIBUTION AUXILIARY SUPPLY VOLTAGES

The following Standards are applicable:

IEC 60364 - Earthing systems for power installations with rated voltages
above 1 kV

The substation and distribution auxiliary supply systems provide one or more of the following
voltages:

AC/DC Nominal/Operating Tolerance Starpoint Remarks

Voltage

AC 400/230 V  10% TN-S System (5 For substation power

wire) supply

DC 110 V  10% Floating potential For HV substation

with balanced operating and control
earthfault
supervision

DC 48 V  10% Positive earth For substation

communication

7. LIGHTING SYSTEMS
All light fittings shall be equipped with energy saving lamps.

8. LDC INTERFACING
The following Standard is applicable for the communication protocol (Control, Metering)
between the GTW of substation and LDC:

IEC 60870-5-101 - Telecontrol equipment and system,

Part 5: Transmission Protocols,
Section 101: Companion standard for basis telecontrol tasks

S-TR-GEN-EDF (El Design Fundamental) (Rev.0-2023) Page 10 of 10

 STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRIC WORKS

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
( SPECIFICATION )

GENERAL CONDITIONS

TRANSCO STANDARD : S-TR-GEN-GDF (REV.0-2010)

S-TR-GEN-GDF (Gen Conditions) (Rev.0-2010) Page 1 of 20

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
General Conditions

CONTENTS

1 GENERAL PROJECT LOCATION............................................................................. 4

2 ABU DHABI AND AL AIN AMBIENT CONDITIONS ............................................. 4
3 CULVERT/MICRO-TUNNEL OPERATING TEMPERATURE
CONDITIONS ................................................................................................................. 5
4 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................... 5
5 SERVICE EXPERIENCE .............................................................................................. 6
6 EXTENSION OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT............................................................... 6
7 CODES & STANDARDS ............................................................................................... 6
7.1 General .............................................................................................................................. 6
7.2 Applicable Standards......................................................................................................... 7
8 TESTS .............................................................................................................................. 8
8.1 General .............................................................................................................................. 8
8.2 Definition ........................................................................................................................ 11
8.2.1 Type Tests ....................................................................................................................... 11
8.2.2 Routine Tests................................................................................................................... 12
8.2.3 Sample Tests ................................................................................................................... 12
8.2.4 Special Tests.................................................................................................................... 12
8.2.5 Tests during Manufacture................................................................................................ 12
8.2.6 Inspection and Testing at Site ......................................................................................... 12
8.2.7 Test Equipment ............................................................................................................... 14
8.2.8 Test Reports..................................................................................................................... 14
8.3 Acceptance of Completed Work ..................................................................................... 14
8.4 Environmental Testing of Equipment ............................................................................. 15
8.5 Electromagnetic Capability ............................................................................................. 15
9 CORROSION PROTECTION .................................................................................... 15
10 MARKING AND PACKING OF EQUIPMENT ....................................................... 16
10.1 Marking ........................................................................................................................... 16
10.2 Packing ............................................................................................................................ 16
11 BIDDING DOCUMENTS ............................................................................................ 17
11.1 Information to be Supplied with the Bid ......................................................................... 17
11.2 Technical Data Sheets ..................................................................................................... 17
11.3 Technical Deviations....................................................................................................... 18
12 SPARE PARTS.............................................................................................................. 18
13 DOCUMENTATION .................................................................................................... 18
13.1 General ............................................................................................................................ 18
13.2 Document Control Procedure .......................................................................................... 19
13.3 Operating Manuals, Test Packs and As-Built.................................................................. 19
13.4 Records............................................................................................................................ 20
13.4.1 General ............................................................................................................................ 20

S-TR-GEN-GDF (Gen Conditions) (Rev.0-2010) Page 2 of 20

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
General Conditions

13.4.2 Documented Procedure ................................................................................................... 20

14 ENVIRONMENTAL RULES ...................................................................................... 20
15 POWER INSTALLATION RULES ............................................................................ 20

S-TR-GEN-GDF (Gen Conditions) (Rev.0-2010) Page 3 of 20

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
General Conditions

GENERAL CONDITIONS

The following shall form the basis for each Bidder/Contractor to optimise his Proposal with
regard to local facts, and to prevailing technical realities. The general information given
hereunder apply to all plants, equipment and materials, unless specified in more detail in sections
for special conditions or specific installations.

1 GENERAL PROJECT LOCATION

Location of Abu Dhabi City 24° 25’ 40” N, 54° 27’ 59” E
Location of Al Ain City 24° 13’ 13” N, 55° 45’ 32” E
Altitude above Sea Level ≤ 1000 m

2 ABU DHABI AND AL AIN AMBIENT CONDITIONS

Climatic conditions are extraordinary. In coastal areas the atmosphere is saliferous, humid and
highly corrosive due to a combination of airborne salt with extremely high humidity over long
periods.
Although rainfall is very small in average, sudden extremely heavy rainfalls can occur over a
short period.
Sand storms and dust storms are very frequent, reaching maximum wind velocities as stated
below.
The Bidder/Contractor shall use the following design data for all installations, unless specified in
the Sections for Special Technical Requirements, System Characteristics, Electrical and Civil
Design Fundamentals, or specified otherwise in the relevant Articles/Technical Data Sheets for
specific equipment:

Element Dimensions Abu Al Ain

Dhabi
Maximum ambient outdoor air temperature (shade): °C 49 50
Maximum daily average ambient shade temperature: °C 40 40
Maximum monthly average ambient shade °C 37 37
temperature:
Maximum annual average ambient shade temperature: °C 30 30
Minimum ambient temperature: °C 7 6
Storage temperature of equipment °C -10 to +70
Minimum barometric pressure (at sea level): Hecto Pascal 990 992

S-TR-GEN-GDF (Gen Conditions) (Rev.0-2010) Page 4 of 20

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
General Conditions

Maximum barometric pressure (at sea level): Hecto Pascal 1030 1030
Maximum ambient relative humidity: % 100 100
Minimum ambient relative humidity: % 1 1
Average annual rainfall: mm 85 85
Maximum annual rainfall: mm 255 165
Maximum daily (24 h) rainfall: mm 34 40
Maximum hourly rainfall: mm 80 50
Maximum seawater temperature: °C 36 -
Minimum seawater temperature: °C 20 -
Maximum ground temperature at 1 m depth: °C 40 41
Design Wind Speed: Km/h 160 160
Seismic load acceleration factor (horizontal) g 0.2 0.2
Seismic coefficient / importance factor (according to 0.075 / 1 0.075 / 1
Zone 1 of Uniform Building Code):
Solar Radiation: W/m2 973 876
Isokeraunic Level: 7 thunderstorms per
year

3 CULVERT/MICRO-TUNNEL OPERATING TEMPERATURES

Operating temperatures are:
• 50˚C for air intake temperature
• 60˚C during operation
• 40˚C during maintenance

4 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

The design of all plants and equipments shall conform to the latest state-of-art. Material used
shall be of high quality. While satisfying all functional requirements under any possible
combination of environmental conditions, the objective shall be to provide simplicity, reliability
and safety while ensuring high economy, low maintenance cost. Interchange ability of
equipment, easy inspection, cleaning and repair shall be ensured as far as possible. All required
precautions and provisions necessary to make the works safe, including safety of 3rd parties must
be considered.

S-TR-GEN-GDF (Gen Conditions) (Rev.0-2010) Page 5 of 20

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
General Conditions

The Bidder/Contractor must ensure that his installations will operate satisfactorily under all
climatic conditions as stated above, and especially the high solar radiation resulting in additional
heating of all installations exposed to direct sunlight has to be considered.

5 SERVICE EXPERIENCE
The Bidder/Contractor shall submit with his Bid statements and documentary evidence of service
experience of equipment, apparatus and materials offered. Unless the solicitation asks for
equipment or apparatus, which are of new technique, at least five years of satisfactory service
experience under similar climatic and environmental conditions are required for all apparatus and
equipment. For equipment, which does not satisfy the above conditions, explicit approval from
TRANSCO is required.

6 EXTENSION OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT

Where existing equipment is to be extended, the Bidder/Contractor shall inform himself fully
with regard to characteristics, design, layout, interfacing and appearance of the existing
installation, and shall ensure that his supplies and installations match the existing plant to the
maximum possible extent in every respect without resulting in excessive costs. Matching in
function is mandatory in any case, while matching in appearance shall be established as far as
possible and any differences are subject to approval by TRANSCO.

7 CODES & STANDARDS

7.1 General
The Bidder/Contractor shall maintain control the latest revision of the relevant Bidder/Contractor
Documents, Drawings, and all CONTRACT Technical Specifications including referenced
International Standards of Codes relevant to site work, Procedures and Work Instruction, at the
location where work is being carried out.
The Bidder/Contractor must take into account and has to follow in any case the following
national codes:
¾ The Electricity Transmission Code (The Abu Dhabi Transmission and Despatch Company)
¾ The Metering and Data Exchange Code (The Abu Dhabi Transmission and Despatch
Company)
¾ TRANSCO System Safety Rules
¾ TRANSCO HSE Rules
¾ Rules of the Environmental Agency in the Emirate of Abu Dhabi
¾ ISO 9001 (Quality System Certification)
¾ ISO 14001 (Environmental Management Systems Certification).

S-TR-GEN-GDF (Gen Conditions) (Rev.0-2010) Page 6 of 20

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
General Conditions

Other than the above, ISO and IEC standards as well as IEEE and BS recommendations shall in
all cases rule unless specifically other standards are required, or other requirements are made in
these specifications. In addition to the applicable ISO and IEC standards, the Bidder/Contractor
may propose for his design other international or national standards, as long as there is no
contradiction to ISO/IEC. The Bidder/Contractor in such case has to submit a full set of English
language issues of such standard, and must prove item by item, that the standard he wishes to use
results in equipment, which is certain to satisfy the respective requirements of ISO/IEC. The
Bidder/Contractor may apply the proposed standard only after approval by TRANSCO.
All equipment, apparatus and material shall be standardized as far as possible without infringing
the functional and safety requirements of the specification. The standardization shall permit
interchange ability of any corresponding parts, and the number of different equipment of the
same basic functions shall be minimized as far as feasible.

7.2 Applicable Standards

Generally, all equipment, apparatus and material shall conform to below listed standards valid at
the date of Bid submission. Conformance to other standards may specifically be required in the
tender specification sections on relevant equipment, otherwise are subject to approval by
TRANSCO.
The equipment offered shall be manufactured under quality assurance system conforming to the
latest ISO versions or its equivalent National Standard.
Definition of International Standards:
¾ ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
¾ ANSI - American National Standards Institute
¾ BS - British Standards
¾ DIN - German Industrial Standards
¾ EIA - Electronic Industries Association
¾ EN - European Standards
¾ ESI - Electricity Supply Industry
¾ HD - Harmonisation Document (CENELEC – European Committee for
Electromechanical Standardisation)
¾ IEEE - Institute of Electrical & Electronic Engineers
¾ IEC - International Electro-technical Commission
¾ ISO - International Standard Organisation
¾ ITU-T - International Telecommunication Union
Telecommunication Standardisation Sector of ITU

S-TR-GEN-GDF (Gen Conditions) (Rev.0-2010) Page 7 of 20

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
General Conditions

¾ ICEA - Insulated Cable Engineers Association

¾ SS - Swedish Standard
¾ VDE - German Association of Electrical, Electronic & Information Technologies
¾ UL - Underwriters’ Laboratory

8 TESTS

8.1 General
TRANSCO/Engineer reserve the right to visit Bidder/Contractor, SUB-Bidder/Contractor(S) or
VENDOR(S) works or any premises at any time during manufacture to verify conformance with
the requirements of the approved Specifications.

Witnessing of performance tests for major equipment shall be made by TRANSCO/ Engineer.
The list of equipments which require witnessing the tests and number of visits required for the
PROJECT shall be indicated by TRANSCO in the data sheet attached to this Specification. The
expenses for these visits including air tickets, transportation, lodging/boarding, etc. for
TRANSCO representatives shall be borne by TRANSCO.

If any retests need to be carried out due to non-conformity and these retests require a separate
visit then the expenses for retesting shall be borne by the Bidder/Contractor.

An engineer representing the Bidder/Contractor shall accompany TRANSCO/Engineer's

representatives on the above witnessed tests.

The material and equipment which generally are subject to witness and verify testing by
TRANSCO/Engineer shall include but shall not be limited to the following :

ELECTRICAL WORKS
• HV Switchgear

• Power transformers

• HV Cables and overhead lines

• Electricity Meters

• Low voltage system cables, panel boards including interlocking and lighting

• HVAC system including summer performance test

• D.C system

S-TR-GEN-GDF (Gen Conditions) (Rev.0-2010) Page 8 of 20

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
General Conditions

• Generator set (if applicable)

The exact requirement of material and equipment will be specified by TRANSCO in attached
data sheet.

For tests on any premises of the Bidder/Contractor, SUB-Bidder/Contractor(S) or VENDOR(S),

the Bidder/Contractor shall provide such assistance, labour, material, electricity, fuel stores,
apparatus and instruments as may be required and as may be reasonably demanded to carry out
such tests efficiently, at no extra cost to TRANSCO.

All test procedures, Quality Control Plan, Inspection and Test Plan, Quality Control Record,
Reference Standards or Documents, etc., shall be submitted by the Bidder/Contractor to
TRANSCO/Engineer sufficiently in advance so that the same are approved and available with
TRANSCO/ENIGNEER at least twenty-one (21) days before the start of any tests.

The Bidder/Contractor shall notify TRANSCO/Engineer or their representatives in writing

twenty one (21) days in advance of the date on which and the place where any plant, material or
equipment will be ready for testing. The Bidder/Contractor shall reconfirm the same at not less
than seven (7) days before the scheduled date. Should TRANSCO/Engineer or their
representatives opt not attend, the Bidder/Contractor may proceed with the tests (except for Hold
Points), and shall forward to TRANSCO/Engineer duly certified copies of the test certificates.

Should TRANSCO/Engineer or their representatives be of the opinion that the material,

equipment or workmanship inspected or tested do not comply with the Technical Specifications
or the best engineering practice, they shall notify in writing the Bidder/Contractor of their
objections.

The Bidder/Contractor shall rectify and remove the causes of such objections and the inspection
or test shall be repeated. Rejected or objected material, equipment or workmanship shall not
relieve the Bidder/Contractor from any obligation under the CONTRACT nor shall any
extension of CONTRACT completion time be allowed.

At the enquiry and purchase order stage, the SUB-Bidder/Contractor(S)/VENDOR(S) shall be

provided with the inspection requirements by the Bidder/Contractor as per Technical
Specifications, Schedule of Technical Data and Tender Drawings.

The quality control plan (QCP), once approved by TRANSCO/Engineer, will form the
contractual basis for quality control and shall be used as a guide to the monitoring of the
Bidder/Contractor, SUB-Bidder/Contractor(S), VENDOR(S) performance by
TRANSCO/Engineer and/or Third Party Inspection Agency (where applicable). The quality plan
must therefore be submitted to TRANSCO/Engineer and approved by them before any
manufacturing commences.

S-TR-GEN-GDF (Gen Conditions) (Rev.0-2010) Page 9 of 20

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
General Conditions

The Bidder/Contractor shall ensure that the SUB-Bidder/Contractor(S) and/or VENDOR(S)

shall, as a minimum, carry out all inspections detailed in the agreed quality plan and maintain
records for review by the Bidder/Contractor and TRANSCO/Engineer. For sub-supplied
equipment, material or services, the Bidder/Contractor shall ensure that controls are effective,
including, where necessary, monitoring at the SUB-VENDOR's works.

'Hold', 'Witness' and ‘Review’ points shall be indicated in the QCP, to indicate the intended
control / monitoring of the TRANSCO/Engineer, Bidder/Contractor, SUB-
Bidder/Contractor(S), and VENDOR(S).

Inspection Point definitions shall be as follows:

- H = Hold Point - A point in the pre-manufacture to post-manufacture stage where an

activity shall not proceed unless representative/s from the TRANSCO/Engineer,
CONRACTOR and/or his Sub-contractor/Vendor shall attend to accept the test procedure
relevant to that activity and to verify and confirm the result of test or activity.

- W = Witness Point - A point in the pre-manufacture to post-manufacture stage where an

activity shall not proceed unless:

™ Representative/s from the TRANSCO/Engineer, CONRACTOR and/or his Sub-

contractor/Vendor shall attend to accept the test procedure relevant to that activity and
to verify and confirm the result of test or activity or,

™ The representative waives off the witness activity and advises for the test to proceed
without his presence. (Witness involvement varies between 0 to 100%)

- R = Review Point - A point in the pre-manufacture to post-manufacture stage where

Documents and Procedures are reviewed and accepted by the TRANSCO/Engineer,
Bidder/Contractor, SUB-Bidder/Contractor(S), and VENDOR(S).

In addition to “Review”, "Witness" and "Hold" points, inspection surveillance may also be
employed by TRANSCO/Engineer as an alternative method of monitoring the
Bidder/Contractor/SUB-Bidder/Contractor(S)/VENDOR(S). This will take the form of an
audit of a section of the agreed quality control plan where physical documentary evidence will
be required for compliance with requirements.

Where witness and hold points have been assigned to be performed in the presence of
TRANSCO/Engineer, the Bidder/Contractor shall notify TRANSCO/Engineer by fax or any
other means giving at least twenty one (21) working days advance notice for the pending tests.
The Bidder/Contractor shall also confirm within seven working (7) days prior to witness testing
that operations are on schedule, or otherwise.

Notification must include :

S-TR-GEN-GDF (Gen Conditions) (Rev.0-2010) Page 10 of 20

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
General Conditions

- Purchase order number / Contract number.

- Items to be inspected.

- Operation(s) to be witnessed (including operation identification as given on the

Bidder/Contractor/SUB-Bidder/Contractor'S/VENDOR'S quality plan).

- Location of VENDOR'S works.

- Date inspection requested for.

- Document reference of approved Inspection and Test Plan (Quality Plan) and test procedure
that is relevant to the inspection or test of the item.

Whether or not inspection is performed by TRANSCO/Engineer or Third Party Inspection

Agency, the Bidder/Contractor shall in no way be absolved from the responsibility for the quality
of the goods supplied or from performing these inspections.

Tests shall be performed at independent institutes or at the Bidder’s/Contractor's premises if

approved by TRANSCO, and at site (if applicable), in the presence of TRANSCO.
The Bidder/Contractor shall provide all the equipment necessary for the tests and shall furnish
them for the tests free of charge.
TRANSCO is entitled hereby to specify in detail from which part of the total Scope the samples
(even upto100%) quantity for testing shall be taken.
The Bidder/Contractor shall furthermore forward copies of all original test lab readings to
TRANSCO, if so required.
Before assembly and calibration of equipment and accessories, site tests shall be performed on
all accessories and the complete installation. The same tests shall be repeated before issuance of
the Final Acceptance Certificate.

8.2 Definition

8.2.1 Type Tests

Type tests are performed before supply in accordance with the specified standards to
demonstrate satisfactory performance in service.
Type Tests not need to be repeated:
• once they have been performed successfully of the identical (each component) type
• unless alterations are made to the equipment design materials or in the production process,
which might affect the performance.

S-TR-GEN-GDF (Gen Conditions) (Rev.0-2010) Page 11 of 20

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
General Conditions

These tests shall be performed according to latest IEC Recommendations in an independent

testing laboratory accepted/approved by TRANSCO.
The testing laboratory for switchgear & OHTL equipment must be STL (Short Circuit Testing
Liaison) member and accepted/approved by TRANSCO.
TRANSCO approved test laboratories are listed in specification:
¾ S-TR-GEN-SQA - General Requirements – Safety and Quality

8.2.2 Routine Tests

All routine tests are performed on every completed equipment, in accordance with the relevant
latest IEC Standards and the results of the tests are to be documented in the test certificates,
which will be subject to TRANSCO approval. No shipment shall be released from the factory
prior to performed routine test.

8.2.3 Sample Tests

Sample tests are carried out on samples of the completed equipment or its components in
accordance with the specified standards. These tests are performed at least on one equipment and
its components from each manufacturing series and are limited to 10% of the total quantity.
TRANSCO is entitled to specify in detail, from which part of the total Scope, the samples for
testing shall to be taken.

8.2.4 Special Tests

Special tests are carried out (if applicable) on samples of the completed equipment or its
components in accordance with the specified standards. These tests are performed, at least, on
one of the equipment and its components from each manufacturing series.

8.2.5 Tests during Manufacture

Testing during manufacturing shall be performed in line with the applicable standards as further
detailed in these specifications, if applicable.

8.2.6 Inspection and Testing at Site

8.2.6.1 General
Details of Site Acceptance Tests are specified in Standard Technical Specification Part 21 (Site
Tests after Installation (SATs))

S-TR-GEN-GDF (Gen Conditions) (Rev.0-2010) Page 12 of 20

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
General Conditions

TRANSCO shall have the right to inspect at all times all tools, instruments, materials, staging,
equipment, templates, work technique, etc., used or to be used in the performance of the
WORKS.

TRANSCO shall have the right to condemn or reject tools, instruments, materials, staging,
equipment, templates, work technique, etc. if found not conforming to Specification or, if in
the opinion of TRANSCO that it is not in line with best engineering practice or, these may
lead into a non-conformance.

TRANSCO shall have the right to reject or condemn a completed assembly or sub-assembly if
items or components belonging to that assembly or sub-assembly are not inspected, tested or
witnessed by TRANSCO/Engineer, or by the Bidder/Contractor, as per the agreed Inspection
document e.g. ITP, QCP, Procedure, Method Statement, Standard or Code.

This right to reject or condemn a completed assembly or sub-assembly shall specifically apply
to situations where TRANSCO/Engineer is not afforded nor informed of a forthcoming
inspection or, TRANSCO/Engineer can not carry out inspection and testing, due to other
requirements specified in this Standard Specification.

Any defective work equipment or material not conforming to Specifications shall be rectified
by the Bidder/Contractor at no additional cost to TRANSCO.

No CONTRACT time extension shall be allowed for rectification or replacement of rejected work or
equipment.The inspection procedure for Material delivered to site shall be documented and approved
by TRANSCO/Engineer. Any damage to an item or to the protective coating due to
mishandling/transportation or manufacturing fault shall be assessed and reported in the Receive Cum
Damage Report. The Bidder/Contractor shall replace or rectify any defective or damaged item(s) as
advised by TRANSCO/Engineer. All costs for such replacement or rectification shall be borne by the
Bidder/Contractor.

8.2.6.2 Site Inspection and Testing

The Bidder/Contractor shall inform TRANSCO/Engineer at least twenty four (24) hours in
advance of all tests requiring witnessing so that TRANSCO/Engineer can be present for the test.
An Inspection and Test Request format and procedure agreed with TRANSCO/Engineer shall be
used for this purpose.

The CONRACTOR shall submit to TRANSCO/Engineer the Inspection and Test Plan (ITP) for
all items not less than six (6) weeks prior to the schedule of tests. The ITP shall be reviewed and
approved by TRANSCO/Engineer and witness, review, hold and other intervention points shall
be noted in the ITP for the Bidder/Contractor to incorporate.

Site testing shall be in accordance with the requirements given in the approved Inspection and
Test Plan, Method Statements, Procedures, Technical Specifications, Schedules of Technical
Data and/or Tender Drawings of respective disciplines.

S-TR-GEN-GDF (Gen Conditions) (Rev.0-2010) Page 13 of 20

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
General Conditions

All test procedures and method statements shall be submitted by the Bidder/Contractor
sufficiently in advance so that the same are approved by TRANSCO/Engineer and available with
them at least fifteen (15) days before start of any tests.

A full formal record of all site testing shall be kept by the Bidder/Contractor.

8.2.6.3 Pre-inspection Meetings

A Pre-inspection meeting shall be carried out by TRANSCO/Engineer and the Bidder/Contractor
prior to commencing particular WORKS. The meeting shall be carried out and the minutes of
meeting kept.

™ The main objective of the meeting is:

™ To plan proper coordination of all inspection and test relevant to the particular WORK.

™ To identify inspection and test personnel who shall be involved in that particular WORK.

™ To ensure that all documents e.g. ITP, method statements, procedures, codes and standards,
specification, drawings, etc. are available and in the Approved Status.

™ To ensure all Inspection and Testing Equipment required are available and properly
calibrated.

8.2.7 Test Equipment

Test Equipment shall meet requirements as specified in Standard Technical Specification, Part:

S-TR-GEN-SQA - Quality Assurance Requirements

The Bidder/Contractor shall provide the test equipment for the above-defined tests. The
Bidder/Contractor shall ensure that the test equipment is calibrated and suitable for these tests.
Calibration certificates shall be valid for at least six months.

8.2.8 Test Reports

The test reports under the scope of the above-defined tests shall be submitted to TRANSCO for
approval within one week after the completion of the tests.

8.3 Acceptance of Completed Work

Before demobilisation of manpower and equipment, a full report on outstanding and/or
incomplete and/or remedial work shall be submitted to TRANSCO for final inspection and
approval.

S-TR-GEN-GDF (Gen Conditions) (Rev.0-2010) Page 14 of 20

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
General Conditions

After the final inspections/tests at site and, if TRANSCO/Engineer are satisfied with the
outcome, they then may agree for the WORK(S) to be accepted. In this connection,
requirements of preliminary and functional tests, trial operations, initial operation, provisional
acceptance and final acceptance given in General Technical Requirements will also have to be
complied with by the Bidder/Contractor.

The Inspection Check Lists and Test Records shall be used as back up for Completion
Certificates for the WORK(S). The Completion Certificate shall be signed and dated by
representatives of the Bidder/Contractor and TRANSCO/Engineer.

8.4 Environmental Testing of Equipment

Environmental Testing of Equipment shall be carried out according to:

IEC 60068 - Environmental Testing

8.5 Electromagnetic Capability

Electromagnetic Testing of Equipment shall be carried out according to:

IEC 61000 - Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

9 CORROSION PROTECTION
The climate in the U.A.E. being very humid and corrosive, special attention is to be paid to the
use of excellent quality galvanising material and paint.
All ferrous parts shall be hot-dip galvanized or electro-galvanized and shall not be subjected to
finishing operation on their threads after Zinc coating. The average and minimum weight of Zinc
coating shall be 380 and 305 gm/m2 respectively for hot dip method. The minimum thickness of
Zinc coating by electro-deposit method shall be in accordance with BS 729 or equivalent.
Fixings smaller than M10 must be made of stainless steel, grade 1.4301 (V2A).
For more details of corrosion protection, reference shall be made to the Standard Technical
Specification Part:
¾ S-TR-CORR - Corrosion Protection

A detailed Corrosion Protection/Painting description shall be submitted along with the Bid.

S-TR-GEN-GDF (Gen Conditions) (Rev.0-2010) Page 15 of 20

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
General Conditions

10 MARKING AND PACKING OF EQUIPMENT

10.1 Marking
Each equipment, terminal strip, and each indicating and operating element shall be identified
with permanently attached plastic tags or labels of approved design. These tags/labels must be in
full match with those used in the drawings.
Each of the equipment must have its own rating plate with information according to the relevant
IEC. At least the following shall be available on the rating plate:
• TRANSCO
• PROJECT NAME
• Bidder/Contractor’S / SUB-Bidder/Contractor’S NAME
• PORT OF DESTINATION
• CONSIGNMENT SERIAL NO.
• GROSS WEIGHT
• NET WEIGHT
• SIZE OF BOX OR BUNDLE (LENGTH X WIDTH X HEIGHT)
• BRIEF INDICATION OF CONTENTS.

10.2 Packing
All equipment and material shall be packed in bundles/crates or seaworthy containers or packing
and no second hand timber shall be used.
All packing shall be suitable for transport from factories to the port of embarkation, sea/air
freight, rough handling at the port of destination and movement to and on the Site.
Before leaving the works, all equipment and fittings shall be painted or stamped in two places
with a distinguishing number or letter corresponding to those on an approved drawing and
material list. All markings shall be legible. Weatherproof tags where used, shall be durable,
securely attached and duplicated. The erection marks on galvanized material shall be stamped
before galvanizing and shall be clearly legible after galvanizing.
All equipment and material, together with the applicable instruction books, packing lists and
special site storage instructions, shall carefully be boxed, crated or otherwise adequately
protected for overseas shipment. All bright parts liable to rust shall receive an anti rusting coat
and shall be suitably protected. Flanges, studs and exposed machine surfaces shall be thoroughly
greased and protected before shipment. Any equipment susceptible to damage by water or high
humidity shall be encased in watertight and/or airtight, rugged containers and suitable desiccants
shall be placed inside each airtight container to ensure a low humidity atmosphere therein.
Special provisions shall be made regarding the prevailing severe local climatic conditions.

S-TR-GEN-GDF (Gen Conditions) (Rev.0-2010) Page 16 of 20

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
General Conditions

Shipping weights and dimensions of each box or package shall be determined in such a way as to
facilitate handling.
Further reference is made to the individual chapters of the Standard Technical Specification for
the equipment.

11 BIDDING DOCUMENTS

11.1 Information to be Supplied with the Bid

Technical descriptions, data sheets, catalogues and other material submitted with the quotation
must be sufficient to enable TRANSCO to thoroughly evaluate the proposal as to its compliance
with the requirements of this Specification.
Minimum Requirements:-
• Detailed summary of deviations from the Specification
• Completed data sheets
• Detailed cross sectional drawings with labelling showing all the components
• Quality system and handling procedure for material control
• Sales record of equipment proposed of the same design to be supplied under this Bid, if
awarded
• Brochures and catalogues containing outline dimensions, main electrical data and
installation details
• Listing of accessories included in the proposal
• Applicable design specifications
• Tests included
• Type test report of equipment proposed of the same design to be supplied under this Bid, if
awarded.

11.2 Technical Data Sheets

The Technical Data Sheets connected with the various specifications are provided in the
Standard Technical Specification, Part: Data Sheets.
The Bidder/Contractor shall be bound to adhere to the design data and criteria as stated in these
"Technical Data Sheets" or else- where in the Tender Documents.
Only the spaces in the column under "Tendered" must be filled in by the Bidder/Contractor,
without any omission. The breakdown and sequence of the pages contents must not be changed,
i.e. the Bidder/Contractor must in no case add something or change something within the
specified requirements or the "Required" columns. The values stated by the Bidder/Contractor
shall be guaranteed limit values, allowing for a margin on its "safe side".

S-TR-GEN-GDF (Gen Conditions) (Rev.0-2010) Page 17 of 20

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
General Conditions

The Technical Data Sheets must be filled-in by typing (handwritten data and/or information are
not acceptable). If a particular item is not applicable, the letters NA (Not Applicable) shall be
typed in the corresponding provided space. For any data not duly inserted in the data sheets, the
most unfavorable data stated in other submitted Bids will be used for evaluation purposes.
If there are deviations from or additions to the Technical Specification and the Technical Data
Sheets, these must be stated together with its explanations/justifications on separate sheets. All
those points in which the Specifications and/or Technical Data Sheets cannot be fulfilled shall be
stated and explained separately.
The Bidder/Contractor may offer better values than required, (e.g. for test voltage levels, ratings,
etc.).
In case expressions "or equivalent", "or similar" etc. are used for manufacturer's names, these are
assumed to come into force only after approval of TRANSCO.

11.3 Technical Deviations

Declared Technical Deviations shall be minimised and shall be considered during the Bidding
process.
Technical Deviations shall be submitted in a form as specified in Standard Technical Specification, Part:

01-General Requirements - Technical Deviations – SAMPLE-

>01 ANNEX 1<

Undeclared Technical Deviations shall not be accepted and shall not be considered during the
Bidding process.

12 SPARE PARTS
The following documents must be supplied within bids to TRANSCO:
• Complete list of specified spare parts (if any) and consumable materials
• Complete list of recommended spare parts.

13 DOCUMENTATION

13.1 General
Documentations shall meet requirements as specified in Standard Technical Specification, Part:

S-TR-GEN-SQA - Quality Assurance Requirements

S-TR-GEN-GDF (Gen Conditions) (Rev.0-2010) Page 18 of 20

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
General Conditions

The equipment supplied under this Contract shall be documented to the extent as to allow
TRANSCO, as well as the operator, to fully understand the product, its theory of operation, its
application, performance and maintenance.
Furthermore, it must enable TRANSCO to efficiently communicate with the manufacturer about
all aspects of operating, maintaining and servicing the switchgear.
The following documents must be submitted to TRANSCO:
• Bill of equipment showing complete re-ordering information for all replaceable parts
• Spare parts source, identification and price list
• Installation, operation and maintenance instructions.
Prior to shipment, copies of all routine test certificates/reports shall be made available to
TRANSCO. If, during testing, changes are made to the equipment, these deviations must be
corrected in the submitted drawings to reflect the final "as built" condition of the switchgear on
delivery.
These corrections must be completed immediately following the actual changes. The final set of
drawings/certified "as built" must be available prior to starting-up of the equipment.
All TRANSCO's data provided for this equipment shall show the equipment as specified and
ordered. Typical drawings are not acceptable unless they are revised to show only the equipment
being furnished. The format, standards, and quality and quantities of drawings shall be
manufacturer's standard, but shall be subject to TRANSCO's approval as per the requirements of
this Specification.
Language in all documents and drawings shall be in English; dimensions shall be in metric SI-
units.

13.2 Document Control Procedure

A written and project specific Document Control Procedure shall be prepared to the satisfaction
of TRANSCO/Engineer. The documented Procedure shall control the issue, distribution, change,
review, location, and/or withdrawal of all documentation, drawings, procedures, records,
submittals, correspondences, etc., that are related to the project.

13.3 Operating Manuals, Test Packs and As-Built

The Document Control Procedure shall also detail the preparation of Operating Manuals, Test
Packs and As-built Documentation Dossier. The Procedure shall clearly specify the personnel or
function responsible for the preparation and control of these Documents, including the format to
be followed. The preparation and format of the these documents shall be as per Contract
requirement

S-TR-GEN-GDF (Gen Conditions) (Rev.0-2010) Page 19 of 20

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
General Conditions

13.4 Records

13.4.1 General
Records are “Documents stating results achieved or providing evidence of activities performed”
as defined by ISO 9000:2000 (3.7.7) shall be properly controlled and maintained throughout the
duration of the project. It can be any written account of facts obtained from an observation or an
event, a test, an inspection, a chart, a completed form or any document which furnishes objective
evidence of activities performed and the results achieved.

13.4.2 Documented Procedure

A documented procedure shall be established by the Contractor and / or his sub-contractors to define the
controls required for the identification, storage, protection, retrieval, retention time, and disposition of
records.

14 ENVIRONMENTAL RULES
Rules of the Environmental Agency in the Emirate of Abu Dhabi shall be followed.

15 POWER INSTALLATION RULES

For more details of design and erection of electric power installations, reference shall be made
to:
¾ IEC 61936-1 - Power installations exceeding 1 kVac – Common Rules

S-TR-GEN-GDF (Gen Conditions) (Rev.0-2010) Page 20 of 20

 STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRIC WORKS

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

( SPECIFICATION )

COMPONENTS MARKING

TRANSCO STANDARD : S-TR-GEN-ID (COMPONENT MARKING) (REV. 2-2009)

S-TR-GEN-ID (Component Marking) (Rev 3-2009)_AN Page 1 of 40

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Components Marking

CONTENTS

STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRIC WORKS ........................... 1

1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................... 3
2 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS............................................................ 3
2.1 Color Codes, Identification and Naming........................................................................... 3
2.1.1 Single-Lines, etc................................................................................................................ 3
2.1.2 Electrical Equipment ......................................................................................................... 4
2.1.3 Pipe Works ........................................................................................................................ 5
2.1.4 Indicating Lamps............................................................................................................... 5
2.1.5 Switchgear ......................................................................................................................... 6
2.1.6 Switchgear Bays ................................................................................................................ 7
2.1.7 Power Transformers .......................................................................................................... 8
2.1.8 Shunt Reactors................................................................................................................... 8
2.1.9 Reactors ............................................................................................................................. 9
2.1.10 Bus Coupler....................................................................................................................... 9
2.1.11 Bus Sectionaliser ............................................................................................................. 10
2.1.12 Future/Spare GIS Feeders ............................................................................................... 10
2.1.13 Panel, Cubicles, and other Assemblies............................................................................ 10
2.1.14 Overhead Transmission Line Circuits Identification ...................................................... 13
2.1.15 Cabling and Wiring Terminals ........................................................................................ 14
2.1.16 Conductor/Core Identification by Colors and Numbers.................................................. 14
2.1.17 Primary Substation & Grid Station Naming.................................................................... 15
2.1.18 Identification Examples................................................................................................... 21
3 DRAWING SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS AND
NOMENCLATURES.................................................................................................... 22
4 DOCUMENTS, DRAWINGS AND CORRESPONDENCE
IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM (CSD).......................................................................... 22
5 COLOR STANDARD (RAL) ....................................................................................... 27
5.1 Definition ........................................................................................................................ 27
5.2 Description ...................................................................................................................... 27
5.3 Colors & Color Tables .................................................................................................... 27

S-TR-GEN-ID (Component Marking) (Rev 3-2009)_AN Page 2 of 40

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Components Marking

COMPONENTS MARKING

1 GENERAL
The following shall form the basis for each Bidder/Contractor to achieve uniform numbering and
identification of system components. The general information given hereunder applies to all
plant, equipment and material, unless specified to greater detail in sections on special conditions
or specific installations.

2 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS

2.1 Color Codes, Identification and Naming

2.1.1 Single-Lines, etc.

Details for voltage level designations for single-lines, etc. are specified in the following table:

Letter Designation
Code Nominal/Operating Voltage (kV)
Color RAL BS 381 C

B >420
C 400 Blue 5015 166
D 220 Yellow 1021 309
E 132 Red 3000 537
N <1 Black 9005
P
Q Facilities for measuring and metering
R Facilities for Protection
T Facilities for Transformers
U Facilities for Control, Signalling and
Auxiliary Equipment
W Facilities for Control Rooms
X Central Facilities, e.g. Process Computers,
Alarm Systems
Y Facilities for Telecommunication
Z Lifting Gears and appliances

S-TR-GEN-ID (Component Marking) (Rev 3-2009)_AN Page 3 of 40

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Component Marking

Exemption: Single-Lines diagrams displayed on SCMS screens at the substation level, the bay
designation numbers shall be without Latin letters (B01, C01, etc.), i.e. 01, 02, 03, etc. for all
voltage levels.

2.1.2 Electrical Equipment

Description RAL Color Notes
400 kV GIS including all ducts 7033 Cement grey
220 kV GIS including all ducts 7032 Pebble grey
132 kV GIS including all ducts 7032 Pebble grey
Transformers 7032 Pebble grey
Cable Trays 7032 Pebble grey
Control or Protection Panels 7032/7035 Pebble grey
Cranes 1018 Grey beige
Cubicles 7032 Pebble grey
Push-buttons (START/ON)* White
Push-buttons (EMERGENCY)* Red
Push-buttons (STOP/OFF)* Black
Push-buttons (ABNORMAL)* Yellow
Push-buttons (NORMAL)* Green
Push-buttons (MANDATORY)* Blue
Indicator Lights (EMERGENCY)* Red
Indicator Lights (ABNORMAL)* Yellow
Indicator Lights (NORMAL)* Green
Indicator Lights (MANDATORY)* Blue
Indicator Lights (NEUTRAL)* White
Fans (cooling air fans and filter casings) 9006 White aluminium
Fire Fighting Equipment 3000 Flame red
Ladder, Stairs, Handrails, etc. 5009 Azure blue
Mechanical Equipment 5018 Turquoise blue
Motors 7032 Pebble grey
Structural Steel and Auxiliary Steel Works 5009 Azure blue
Tanks 9006 White aluminium
Valves 9006 White aluminium
Vessels 9006 White aluminium
Lifting Gears and appliances 6010 Gras Green

Remarks: * according to IEC 60204-1

S-TR-GEN-ID (Component Marking) (Rev 3-2009)_AN Page 4 of 40

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Component Marking

2.1.3 Pipe Works

All pipework shall be painted in accordance with the following color code:

Subject Color

Compressed Air Blue

SF6 gas Yellow, with additional individual color band every 300 mm for
each separate gas zone.
Fire Water Signal Red
Diesel Fuel Oil Light Brown
Lubricating Oil Dark Brown

2.1.4 Indicating Lamps

Indicating lamp glasses shall, unless otherwise specified or approved conform to the following
standard color code:

Color Class of Indication Examples

Red Circuit breaker or contactor ON Energized or operative position

Green Circuit breaker of contactor OFF Un-energized or inoperative position
or permit to close signals
White Lamps normally alight Healthy or normal condition e.g.
voltage healthy, trip supply healthy,
equipment in normal service etc.
Also safe conditions i.e. busbar or
circuit dead in synchro schemes.
Amber Alarm indication on which action is Faulty or abnormal condition e.g.
necessary transformer over-temperature,
charger fail, circuit breaker tripped
due to fault etc.
Blue Indication of operation of other Circuit breaker closing springs
equipment and those which operate charged, tap changer in progress etc.
intermittently
Yellow Position of selector switch CB under "local" or "remote" control

S-TR-GEN-ID (Component Marking) (Rev 3-2009)_AN Page 5 of 40

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Component Marking

2.1.5 Switchgear
The following Identification Codes are applicable in TRANSCO`s T&D Systems.

Type of Equipment Identification Code

Circuit Breaker S* Q 0

Bus Section Isolator

Section: Bus Bar 1A – 1B S* Q 1 1 Q 1 2
Section: Bus Bar 2A – 2B S* Q 2 1 Q 2 2
Section: Bus Bar 1B – 1C S* Q 1 1 Q 1 2
Section: Bus Bar 2B – 2C S* Q 2 1 Q 2 2

Bus Coupler Isolator

Bus Bar 1 S* Q 1
Bus Bar 2 S* Q 2

Voltage Transformer Isolator

Bus Section 1A S* Q 6 1
Bus Section 2A S* Q 6 2
Bus Section 1B S* Q 6 3
Bus Section 2B S* Q 6 4
Bus Section 1C S* Q 6 5
Bus Section 2C S* Q 6 6
VT Feeder S* Q 6 9

Earth Switch
Line Feeder S* Q 8
Reactor Feeder S* Q 8 1

Maintenance Earth Switch

Normal (Double BB)
Maint’e Earth Switch1 (between BB isolator & CB) S* Q 5 1
Maint’e Earth Switch2 (between CB and Line S* Q 5 2
Isolator)
Maintenance Earth Switch 1 (33/22kV) S* Q 5 4
Maintenance Earth Switch 2 (33/22kV) S* Q 5 5
Normal (Single BB)
Maint’e Earth Switch S* Q 5
3-position between BB & Line Isolators
Maintenance Earth Switch 1 (toward S*Q1) S* Q 5 1 Q 5 7
Maintenance Earth Switch 2 (toward S*Q2) S* Q 5 2 Q 5 8
Maintenance Earth Switch 3 (toward S*Q9) S* Q 5 3 Q 5 9

Isolator
Line S* Q 9
Reactor S* Q 9 1

S-TR-GEN-ID (Component Marking) (Rev 3-2009)_AN Page 6 of 40

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Component Marking

Type of Equipment Identification Code

Busbar Earth Switch

Bus Section 1A S* Q 1 5
Bus Section 1B S* Q 1 6
Bus Section 1C S* Q 1 7
Bus Section 1D S* Q 1 8
Bus Section 2A S* Q 2 5
Bus Section 2B S* Q 2 6

Voltage Transformer
BB 1A & BB 1 T 1 5
BB 1B T 1 6
BB 1C T 1 7
BB 2A & BB 2 T 2 5
BB 2B T 2 6
BB 2C T 2 7
Feeder (Line) T 5

Remarks: * S = Standard in LDC SPIDER, only

Single line diagram presenting the above mentioned Equipment Coding is provided in the
Drawings Section is as follows:
Drawing No. Title
DWG TR GEN 02 01 Diagram Illustrating Principles for Naming of Switches

2.1.6 Switchgear Bays

Switchbays in Substations shall be unambiguously designated. The designation shall be preceded
by the prefix "=", indicating a higher-level designation, followed by an uppercase Latin letter
indicating the voltage level, and a two-digit serial Arabic number. The serial numbers shall
reflect the physical arrangement of the switch bays within the plant, and the first number
assigned shall take into account the possibility of maximum future extension of the plant while
sequence of numbers shall be maintained at the time. For instance, if the possibility exists in
future to extend the Switchgear by three bays on the side of the lowest bay number, this shall be
designated "04".
The switchgear bay serial numbering sequence shall be from left to right. (View from the Local
Control Cubicle (LCC) to the switchgear).

S-TR-GEN-ID (Component Marking) (Rev 3-2009)_AN Page 7 of 40

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Component Marking

2.1.7 Power Transformers

The following Identification Codes are applicable:
• 2-winding normal transformers Txyy.....
• 3-winding normal transformers Txyy.…
• Auto transformers Txyy.....
x reflects Winding Number of Transformer
yy reflects Transformer Nos.:
1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9 for 132/11 and/or 132/33 Transformers (same for 132/22)
10, 20, 30, 40, 50 for 400/132kV and/or 400/220kV Transformers
60, 70, 80, 90 for 220/132kV Transformers
• Auxiliary (Station) transformers TXyy.....
yy reflects Transformer Nos.:

Power Transformer Terminal and Tapping Markings shall be applied as specified in:
¾ IEC 60616 - Terminal and tapping marking for power transformers

2.1.8 Shunt Reactors

2.1.8.1 Shunt Reactors connected to OHTLs

• OHTL Reactor RCxx
xx reflects GIS Bay Number to which OHTL including the Reactor is connected

2.1.8.2 Shunt Reactors connected to Underground Cables

• Underground Cable Reactor RCxx
xx reflects GIS Bay Number to which Underground Cable including Reactor is connected

2.1.8.3 Shunt Reactors connected to Power Transformers

• Power Transformer Reactor RCxx
xx reflects the sequence of Power Transformer Number

2.1.8.4 Shunt Reactors connected to Bus Bars

• Bus Bar Reactor
… reflects ……

S-TR-GEN-ID (Component Marking) (Rev 3-2009)_AN Page 8 of 40

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Component Marking

2.1.9 Reactors

2.1.9.1 Reactors connected to Power Transformer Neutrals

• Power Transformer Neutral Reactors NERxx
xx reflects the sequence of Power Transformer Number

2.1.9.2 Reactor By-Pass Disconnector

• Power Transformer Neutral Reactors
By-Pass Disconnector QNERxx
xx reflects the sequence of Power Transformer Number
By pass isolator is Q7 (fixed for all circuits)
Isolator for NGR is Q6 (fixed for all circuits)

2.1.9.3 33kV Bay Transformer

• Feeder earth switch code Q5
• Bus bar 1 Isolator code Q1
• Voltage transformer switch code Q 61

2.1.9.4 33kV Bus Section

• Circuit breaker code Q0
• Bus bar 1 Isolator code Q1
• Feeder earth switch code Q 15 & Q 16

2.1.9.5 33kV Bay Reactor

• Bus bar 1 Isolator code Q1
• Feeder earth switch code Q5

2.1.9.6 33kV Capacitor Bank

• Circuit breaker code Q0
• Bus bar 1 Isolator code Q1
• Bus bar 2 Isolator code Q2
• Maintenance 1 earth switch code Q 51
• Maintenance 2 earth switch code Q 52

2.1.10 Bus Coupler

• Bus Coupler BC xx-yy
xx = Busbar xx
yy = Busbar yy

S-TR-GEN-ID (Component Marking) (Rev 3-2009)_AN Page 9 of 40

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Component Marking

2.1.11 Bus Sectionaliser

• Bus Sectionaliser BS xx-yy
xx = Busbar xx
yy = Busbar yy

2.1.11.1 Generators
2.1.11.1.1 Steam Turbine Generators
• Steam Turbine Generator 132kV Level ST20 to ST39
400kV Level ST60 to ST79
2.1.11.2 Gas Turbine Generators
• Gas Turbine Generator 132kV Level GT01 to GT19
400kV Level GT41 to GT59

2.1.12 Future/Spare GIS Feeders

The following naming criteria shall be considered:

SPARE……… for GIS bays with physical equipment such as Bus Isolator, CB, Line Isolators,
etc.
FUTURE……. for GIS bay spaces only without any physical equipment.

2.1.13 Panel, Cubicles, and other Assemblies

All panels, cubicles, and any assembly, which can not be disassembled without destroying its
function, shall be unambiguously designated. The Location shall be identified by the prefix "+",
followed by an uppercase Latin letter for the location type identification (e.g. for protection
cubicle, auxiliary supply cubicle, control cubicle etc.), and an Arabic serial number. The serial
numbers shall reflect as far as possible the physical arrangement of the equipment.
Items within panels and cubicles shall be identified by the prefix "-", followed by an uppercase
Arabic letter indicating the type of item, and an Arabic serial number, reflecting as far as
possible the items physical arrangement.
Labels or marks for items within panels and cubicles, bearing the equipment designation, shall be
attached with the surface on which the item is mounted, as well as with the item itself.
Panel Designation Samples are shown in the following part of the Standard Technical
Specification, Part 1:
¾ General Requirements - ANNEX 1 – Panel Designation Samples

For more Details, please refer also to the following part of the Standard Technical Specification,
Part 17:

S-TR-GEN-ID (Component Marking) (Rev 3-2009)_AN Page 10 of 40

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Component Marking

¾ S-TR-CUB - Cubicles & Enclosures

The following letter codes shall be used for the designation of equipment location as per DIN
40719, Part 2.
Table: 2 Designation of Equipment Locations

Letter Code Equipment

A Circuit-Breaker Accessories
B Multiply, Re-Position, Decouple
C Instrument Transformer Accessories
D Compressor Air, Hydraulic
J Automatic, Closed-Loop Control
L Simulating Network, Voltage Selection
M Measurement
N System Services
P Recorder
Q Metering
R Protection
S Synchronising
T Transformers
U Auxiliaries
V Main, Secondary Bus bars, etc.
W Display, Operation, Supervision
X Alarm System
Y Telecommunication

The following letter codes shall be used for the designation of kind of item (as per IEC 60750;
1983):

S-TR-GEN-ID (Component Marking) (Rev 3-2009)_AN Page 11 of 40

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Component Marking

Table: 3 Identification of Equipment

Letter Kind of item Examples

code

A Assemblies, subassemblies Amplifier using discrete components, magnetic

amplifier, laser, maser, printed circuit board
B Transducers, from non- Thermoelectric sensor, thermo cell, photoelectric
electrical to electrical quantity cell, dynamometer, crystal transducer,
or vice versa microphone, pick-up, loudspeaker, earphone,
synchro, resolver
C Capacitors
D Binary elements, delay Digital integrated circuits and devices, delay
devices, storage devices line, bistable element, monostable element, core
storage, register, recorder
E Miscellaneous Lighting device, heating device, device not
specified elsewhere in this table
F Protective devices Fuse, over-voltage discharge device, arrester
G Generators, power supplies Rotating generator, rotating frequency converter,
battery, oscillator, quartz-oscillator
H Signalling devices Optical indicator, acoustical indicator
K Relays, contactors
L Inductors, Reactors Induction coil, line trap, reactors (shunt and
series)
M Motors
N Analogue elements Operational amplifier, hybrid analogue/digital
device
P Measuring equipment, testing Indicating, recording and integrating measuring
equipment devices, signal generator, clock
Q Switching devices for power Circuit breaker, disconnector (isolator)
circuits
R Resistors Adjustable resistor, potentiometer, rheostat,

S-TR-GEN-ID (Component Marking) (Rev 3-2009)_AN Page 12 of 40

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Component Marking

shunt, thermistor
S Switching devices for control Control switch, push button, limit switch,
circuits, selectors selector switch, dial contact, connecting stage
T Transformers Voltage transformer, current transformer
U Modulators, changers (of Discriminator, demodulator, frequency changer,
electrical quantities) coder, inverter, converter
V Tubes, semiconductors Electronic tube, diode, transistor, thyristor
W Transmission paths, cables, Conductor, cable, busbar, waveguide, waveguide
busbars, waveguides, aerials directional coupler, dipole, parabolic aerial
X Terminals, plugs, sockets Connecting plug and socket, clip, test jack,
terminal board, soldering terminal strip, link,
cable sealing end and joint
Y Electrically operated Brake, clutch, pneumatic valve
mechanical device
Z Termination, bifurcator, hybrid
transformers, filters,
equalizers, limiters

Table: 4 Identification of Signals

Letter Code Kind of Signal

A Alarm
C Control
M Tele Measurement
S Status

2.1.14 Overhead Transmission Line Circuits Identification

OHTLs Circuits (circuit I, circuit II, circuit III or circuit VI) shall be named as follows:

Example: OHTL between Grid Station A (existing Grid Station) and Grid Station B (new)

S-TR-GEN-ID (Component Marking) (Rev 3-2009)_AN Page 13 of 40

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Component Marking

Lower number of switchgear (Grid Station A) bay to which the OHTL circuit is
connected shall be named circuit I and the OHTL connected to the higher
switchgear bay number shall be named circuit II (for example: Switchgear Bay No.
D06 shall be connected to OHTL circuit I and the next higher Bay Number (D12) of
the same Switchgear shall be connected to OHTL circuit II, a.s.o.).

2.1.15 Cabling and Wiring Terminals

All cabling and wiring terminals shall be clearly and unambiguously labelled or marked with
Arabic numbers or lowercase Latin letters, which shall be reflected in the drawings in the same
manner, preceded by the prefix ":" where necessary for clarity.
Terminal blocks shall be designated by the prefix "-" and the uppercase letter "X", and a serial
number. Labels with the terminal block designation shall be firmly attached with the terminal
block itself, or with the surface on which the terminal block is mounted.
All labels and marks shall be easily legible and un-removable by accidental action, as well as
durable under all operational conditions.

2.1.16 Conductor/Core Identification by Colors and Numbers

2.1.16.1 Power Cable Phase Marking

Phases shall, unless otherwise specified or approved conform to the following standard color
code:

Color Conductor Marking

Red Phase 1 – L1 (R,U,u)

Yellow Phase 2 – L2 (S,V,v)
Blue Phase 3 – L3 (T,W,w)
Black Neutral – N
Green and Yellow Protective Conductor

Wiring in Buildings shall follow BS 7671:2004 Requirements.

Color Conductor Marking

Brown Phase 1 – L1
Black Phase 2 – L2
Grey Phase 3 – L3

S-TR-GEN-ID (Component Marking) (Rev 3-2009)_AN Page 14 of 40

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Component Marking

Blue Neutral – N
Green and Yellow Protective Conductor

2.1.16.2 Control/CT&VT Cable Core Marking

Cable Type Number of Cores Core Color Core Identification

Control Multiple White Black Number

CT & VT 4 Red, Yellow, Blue & Black N/A

2.1.17 Primary Substation & Grid Station Naming

2.1.17.1 Abu Dhabi Island

Abu Dhabi Island

Name Acronym Name
EAST WEST

1 MARKET 1 MKT1 - W-01

2 MARKET MRKT - W-02

3 KHALIDIYA KLDY - W-09

4 AL JAZEIRA HOSPITAL JZRH - W-13

5 BATEEN BATN - W-16

6 BATEEN BUS STATION BSTN - W-17

7 MUSHRIF MSHF - W-24

8 NEW BATIN * BATN - W-39

9 ARABIAN GULF GLFA - W-47

10 EMBASSIES EMBS - W-59

11 ABU DHABI PS ADPS - -

12 ABU DHABI STATION ADST - -

13 CONFRENCE PALACE HOTEL CONH - -

14 MARINA MALL MRML - -

15 MADINAT ZAYED MDZD E-04 -

16 CAPITAL GARDEN CPGR E-08 -

S-TR-GEN-ID (Component Marking) (Rev 3-2009)_AN Page 15 of 40

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Component Marking

17 FIRDOUS FRDS E-09 -

18 ZAYED 2ND STREET ZYD2 E-11 -

19 PORT PORT E-14 -

20 TOURIST CLUB TCLB E-15 -

21 CLINIC SALAM CLNC E-16 -

22 AL SALM ALSM E-18 -

23 FALAH FLAH E-18(2) -

24 QURM QURM E-19 -

25 HIGHER TECHNOLOGY HTCO E-25 -

COLLEGES
26 BEACH (400, 220 & 132) BECH E-48 -

27 KALIPHA PARK (132/11) KHPK - -

28 DANET (132/22/11) DANT E-40 -

29 SOUQ SOUQ E-1 -

30 GREAN HEAD (132/11) GRHD W-41 -

31 KHLIFA B CITY (132/11) KHBB - -

2.1.17.2 REEM Island

Name Acronym Name

1 REEM Grid (400/132/22)

2 REEM A (132/22)
3 REEM B (132/22)
4 REEM C (132/22)

2.1.17.3 SOWAH Island

Name Acronym Name

1 SOWAH Substation (132/22) SOWA

S-TR-GEN-ID (Component Marking) (Rev 3-2009)_AN Page 16 of 40

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Component Marking

2.1.17.4 SAADIYAT Island

Name Acronym Name

1 SAADIYAT Grid (400/132/22) SDYT

2 SAADIYAT A (132/22) SDAA
3 SAADIYAT B (132/22) SDBB
4 SAADIAYT C (132/22) SDCC
5 SAADIYAT D (132/22) SDDD

2.1.17.5 YAS Island

Name Acronym Name

1 YAS ISLAND (132/22) YASI

2.1.17.6 RAHA Beach

Name Acronym Name

1 RAHA BEACH A (132/22) RBAA

2 RAHA BEACH B (132/22) RBBB

2.1.17.7 Industrial City Abu Dhabi

S-TR-GEN-ID (Component Marking) (Rev 3-2009)_AN Page 17 of 40

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Component Marking

Name Acronym Name

1 ICAD Grid (400/132/33) ICAD

2 ICAD A (220/33) ICAA
3 ICAD B (220/33) ICBB
4 ICAD C (220/33) ICCC
5 ICAD D (220/33) ICDD

2.1.17.8 Main Land

Name Acronym Name

1 AIRPORT AIRP
2 BANAIYAS BYPS
3 MAHAWI MHWG
4 MADINAT KHALEEFA MDKH
5 MUSSAFAH (132kV) MOS1
EMIRATES STEEL INDUSTRY
6 ESIM
MUSSAFAH (220kV)
7 TAWEELAH ASIA NEW TANE
EXTENSION
8 TAWEELAH A 132 TWPSA
9 TAWEELAH A1 POWER TWPSA1
10 TAWEELAH B 132 TWPSB
11 MUSSAFAH (400kV & 220kV) MOSG
12 SALT & CHLORINE SLTC
13 SHAHAMA EAST SHME
14 SAMHA SMHG
15 TAWEELAH TWPS
16 UMM AL NAR UNPS
17 WATHBA WATH
18 MUSSAFAH GIC GRID STATION MGIC

S-TR-GEN-ID (Component Marking) (Rev 3-2009)_AN Page 18 of 40

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Component Marking

19 CENTRAL GRID STATION CNTG

20 BAHYA GRID (400/132) BHYG
21 BAHIA 132 BHYG
22 SAS AL NAKHEL (New UNPS) SASN
23 BIN Al JESEREAN S18 JSRN
24 RUMAITH (ADCO) RMTH
25 DHABIYA (ADCO) DBYA

2.1.17.9 Abu Dhabi Emirate Western Region

Name Acronym Name

1 GAYATHY GTHY
2 LIWA WEST LWST
3 RUWAI RUWS
4 SHUWAIHT (400kV & 220kV & 132kV) SHPS
5 SILA SILA
6 TAKREER (ADNOC) ADNC
7 HYDROGEN Power Plant (400kV) HPAD

2.1.17.10 Abu Dhabi Emirate Central

Name Acronym Name

1 MIRFA MRFA
2 MIRFA Power Station MRPS
3 MADINAT ZAYED (WR) WMZD
4 BU HASA 220kV BHSA
5 BAB 220kV BAAB
6 ASAB ASAB
7 HAMEEM HMEM

S-TR-GEN-ID (Component Marking) (Rev 3-2009)_AN Page 19 of 40

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Component Marking

8 LIWA LIWA
9 ASAB Gas Development II ASGS
10 ASAB Gas Development III ONGS

2.1.17.11 GCC

Name Acronym Name

1 AL WASIT (OMAN) WAST

2 QIDFA (Fujairah) QDFA
3 DHAID (Sharjah) DHID
4 AL AWIR (Dubai) HSTA
5 SAJJA (Sharjah) SAJA
6 QIDFA (P. Station) (Fujairah) F1PS
7 DELMA DLMA
8 MAHDAH (Oman) MHDA
9 FILAYAH (Ras Al Khaimah) FILA
10 KHOR KHWAIR KHRK
11 TAWYEEN TWYN

2.1.17.12 Al Ain Area

Name Acronym Name

1 AL AIN P.S. AAPS

2 AL AIN SOUTH WEST ASWG
3 AL ERAAD ARDG
4 AL HAYER AHYG
5 AL KHAZNA KHZG
6 AL OHA AOHG

S-TR-GEN-ID (Component Marking) (Rev 3-2009)_AN Page 20 of 40

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Component Marking

7 AL WAGAN AWGG
8 CITY CENTER CTCC
9 DAHMA DHMG
10 MAZIYAD MZDG
11 RAMAH RMAG
12 SALAMAT SLMG
13 SANAIYA SNYG
14 SWEIHAN SWHG
15 ZAKHER ZAKG
16 AL AIN INDUSTRIAL CITY I AIAA
17 AL AIN INDUSTRIAL CITY II AIBB
18 AL AIN INDUSTRIAL CITY III AICC

Remarks:
* The Prefix ‘New’ is temporary where the Substation will be upgraded and have the original
Substation Name.
Extra writing between brackets following the Substation Name is not part of the Substation
Name, but explanatory.

2.1.18 Identification Examples

a) Designation of
K12 Protection Relay (-K12 stands for Identification of Item, Table 3)
in Protection Cubicle 1 (+R1 stands for Location of Item, Table 2)
for 220 kV Switchbay No. 3 (=D03 stands for Higher Level Designation, Table 1).

=D03 +R1 -K12

b) Designation of
F1 Fuse (-F1 stands for Identification of Item, Table 3)
for Alarm System (+X stands for Location of Item, Table 2)

S-TR-GEN-ID (Component Marking) (Rev 3-2009)_AN Page 21 of 40

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Component Marking

for 11 kV Switchbay No. 1 (=K01 stands for Higher Level Designation, Table 1).

=K01 +X -F1

c) Designation of
F1 MCB (-F1 stands for Identification of Item, Table 3)
for Transformer No. 2 Fan Motor (+T stands for Location of Item, Table 2)
for 132/11 kV (=E stands for Higher Level Designation, Table 1).

=E +T2 -F1

3 DRAWING SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS AND NOMENCLATURES

Drawing Symbols, Abbreviations and Nomenclatures shall meet requirements specified in IEC
60617 and IEC 61082.

4 DOCUMENTS, DRAWINGS AND CORRESPONDENCE IDENTIFICATION

SYSTEM (CSD)

Ordinal Section P

P O S T L Ordinal Section P

5 5 5 5 Project Number

Ordinal section P is a four digit number, which stands for TRANSCO’s NUMBER OF THE
PROJECT.
Accordingly all documents/drawings for the total PROJECT will have at the beginning of their
CSD-Code the number: 5555.

Ordinal Section O

S-TR-GEN-ID (Component Marking) (Rev 3-2009)_AN Page 22 of 40

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Component Marking

P O S T L Ordinal Section O

A A
Originator

Ordinal section O is a group of two letters (capitals) standing for the ORIGINATOR of the
particular document/drawing.
For a PROJECT the following symbols for the first letter (CSD position 5) for the Originator
could be used:

A OWNER
B
C
D
E

The second letter (CSD Position 6) can be related to the individual PARTS of the PROJECTS
and shall be applied as follows:

For Correspondence
A General Requirements
B Switchgear & Protection
C Transformers/Reactors/Resistors
D Metering Devices
E Substation Auxiliary Equipment
F Overhead Transmission & Distribution Lines
G Cables and Accessories
H SCMS-SCADA/RTU-FMS
I Communication
J Power Compensation
K Earthing/Lightning
L Fire Fighting
M Civil Works

S-TR-GEN-ID (Component Marking) (Rev 3-2009)_AN Page 23 of 40

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Component Marking

N Electromechanical Services
O Street Lighting
P Corrosion Protection and Painting Color Codes
Q Cubicles & Enclosures

Ordinal Section S

P O S T L Ordinal Section S

N N N N Subject

Ordinal section S is a four digit number (CSD-Code Number) and identifies the SUBJECT dealt
with in the relevant drawing.
Preference shall be given to the following numbers:
5100 Civil Construction Structures
7000 Substation General
7100 Switchgears
7200 D. C. and A. C. Systems
7300 Transformers, Reactors, Capacitors, Converters
7400 Generators, Motors, Drives
7500 Cables
7600 Transmission Lines
7700 Electrical Control Rooms
7800 Ancillary Systems
7900 Communication Systems

Refer as well to the underlined numbers in attachment

Ordinal Section T

P O S T L Ordinal Section T

S-TR-GEN-ID (Component Marking) (Rev 3-2009)_AN Page 24 of 40

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Component Marking

Type of Drawing

The letter (capital) forming ordinal section T defines the TYPE of document or drawing. These
letters to be used when establishing CSD-Code numbers are the following:
A Correspondence with TRANSCO / OWNER
B Correspondence with Bidders/Contractors of TRANSCO/Customer, etc.
C Correspondence with contracting parties (except A) concerning the implementation
of the PROJECT, e.g.: Banks, Insurance, CONSULTANT, Authorities
D Correspondence with others, without any contractual relationship as described under
C above
E Internal correspondence of CONSULTANT for matters of any kind, including notes
and file notes, travel reports and internal meeting reports, e.g.: within the Head
Office, with the Site Office(s)
F Contracts and orders of any kind
G Reports of any kind, e.g.: Project Reports, Studies, Expert's Opinion, Memoranda,
Work Reports, Progress Reports, Meeting Reports
H Technical Specifications of any kind
J Calculations, Graphs, Curves
L Test procedures, certificates, schedules
M Manuals, Plant/Process Descriptions, Operating Instructions
N Overall lay-out plans, Plot Plans, topographic maps
P Layout Arrangement and Installation Drawings of existing Plants and Installations,
e.g.: civil buildings, installations, mechanical and electrical equipment, switchyards,
Loading and Foundation Drawings, overhead lines, etc.
Q Arrangement Drawings, Layout Drawings, Loading Diagrams, Control Room
Proposals, Switchgear Lay-outs
R Principle and Schematic Diagrams: Single Line Diagrams, Flow Diagrams, P & I
Diagrams, Block Diagrams, Flow Balance Diagrams, Instrumentation and Control
Diagrams, Logic Diagrams, Functional Diagrams, Switching Diagrams (single phase)
S Design/Construction- and Detail Drawings: Dimensional Drawings, Workshop
Drawings, Civil Construction Drawings, Architectural Drawings, Erection Drawings,
Plans/Sections and Elevations, Fabrication Drawings, Isometrics
T Detail Connection and Installation Drawings, e.g.: Switching Drawings (3 phase),
Circuit Diagrams, Cable Layout (in Buildings), Wiring Diagrams, Sequence
diagrams, Interlocking diagrams
U Routing and profile drawings for overhead transmission lines, Cable routes, Profile

S-TR-GEN-ID (Component Marking) (Rev 3-2009)_AN Page 25 of 40

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Component Marking

drawings
V Civil Drawings general, Shuttering Drawings
W Reinforcement drawings, bar bending drawings/lists
X Computer Programmes, Time Schedules and Networks, Organization Diagrams
Y Cash Flow / Time Schedules, Capacities/Costs
Z General Information, Administration, Organigrams

Ordinal Section L

P O S T L Ordinal Section L

N N N A
Current Number
....Revision Index
For drawings, ordinal section L is a three digit number from 001 to 999 (current number) and the
revision index of the drawing from A to Z, I and O being excluded in order to avoid possible
misunderstandings or mistakes.
In order to achieve an independent numbering for the different lots and subjects, the
Bidder/Contractor shall elaborate a list of all subjects for which individual series of drawing
numbers shall be used e.g. each individual subject of this list shall start with the next current
number, such as e.g.:
001 - 100 for HV Switchgear
101 - 200 for MV Switchgear
201 - 300 for LV Switchgear
301 - 400 for Capacitor Bank
401 - 500 for Station Services
501 - 600 for Control, Protection and Metering
601 - 700 for Cables
701 - 800 for OHTL
801 - 900 for Transformer
etc.
For letters, documents, etc., i.e. for correspondence the four digits of the Ordinal Section L shall
be used as a current number of letters, documents, reports and telexes starting with the number
0001.

S-TR-GEN-ID (Component Marking) (Rev 3-2009)_AN Page 26 of 40

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Component Marking

The letter numbers shall be current numbers, starting at 0001, i.e. without considering different
Ordinal Sections "S" and "T" of the CSD-code.

5 COLOR STANDARD (RAL)

5.1 Definition
RAL is the abbreviation of Rationalisierungs Ausschuß für Lieferbedingungen und
Gütesicherung.
Which in fact designates the German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification e.V

5.2 Description
The RAL Design System has been developed for professional color design. It contains 1688
colors arranged in a systematic order. All the 7-digit color shades are defined as individual RAL
Colors. The difference between this and the RAL classic color collection is that the color codes
of the RAL Design System are not arranged arbitrarily. They indicate the technologically
measured values of Hue, Lightness and Chroma.

5.3 Colors & Color Tables

RAL 1000 RAL 1001

RAL 1002 RAL 1003

RAL 1004 RAL 1005

RAL 1006 RAL 1007

RAL 1011 RAL 1012

RAL 1013 RAL 1014

RAL 1015 RAL 1016

RAL 1017 RAL 1018

RAL 1019 RAL 1020

RAL 1021 RAL 1023

RAL 1024 RAL 1027

RAL 1028 RAL 1032

S-TR-GEN-ID (Component Marking) (Rev 3-2009)_AN Page 27 of 40

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Component Marking

RAL 1033 RAL 1034

RAL 2000 RAL 2001

RAL 2002 RAL 2003

RAL 2004 RAL 2008

RAL 2009 RAL 2010

RAL 2011 RAL 2012

RAL 3000 RAL 3001

RAL 3002 RAL 3003

RAL 3004 RAL 3005

RAL 3007 RAL 3009

RAL 3011 RAL 3012

RAL 3013 RAL 3014

RAL 3015 RAL 3016

RAL 3017 RAL 3018

RAL 3020 RAL 3022

RAL 3027 RAL 3031

RAL 4001 RAL 4002

RAL 4003 RAL 4004

RAL 4005 RAL 4006

RAL 4007 RAL 4008

RAL 4009 RAL 4010

RAL 5000 RAL 5001

RAL 5002 RAL 5003

S-TR-GEN-ID (Component Marking) (Rev 3-2009)_AN Page 28 of 40

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Component Marking

RAL 5004 RAL 5005

RAL 5007 RAL 5008

RAL 5009 RAL 5010

RAL 5011 RAL 5012

RAL 5013 RAL 5014

RAL 5015 RAL 5017

RAL 5018 RAL 5019

RAL 5020 RAL 5021

RAL 5022 RAL 5023

RAL 5024 RAL 6000

RAL 6001 RAL 6002

RAL 6003 RAL 6004

RAL 6005 RAL 6006

RAL 6007 RAL 6008

RAL 6009 RAL 6010

RAL 6011 RAL 6012

RAL 6013 RAL 6014

RAL 6015 RAL 6016

RAL 6017 RAL 6018

RAL 6019 RAL 6020

RAL 6021 RAL 6022

RAL 6024 RAL 6025

RAL 6026 RAL 6027

RAL 6028 RAL 6029

S-TR-GEN-ID (Component Marking) (Rev 3-2009)_AN Page 29 of 40

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Component Marking

RAL 6032 RAL 6033

RAL 6034 RAL 7000

RAL 7001 RAL 7002

RAL 7003 RAL 7004

RAL 7005 RAL 7006

RAL 7008 RAL 7009

RAL 7010 RAL 7011

RAL 7012 RAL 7013

RAL 7012 RAL 7016

RAL 7023 RAL 7024

RAL 7026 RAL 7030

RAL 7031 RAL 7032

RAL 7033 RAL 7034

RAL 7035 RAL 7036

RAL 7037 RAL 7038

RAL 7039 RAL 7040

RAL 7042 RAL 7043

RAL 7044 RAL 7045

RAL 7046 RAL 7047

RAL 8000 RAL 8001

RAL 8002 RAL 8003

RAL 8004 RAL 8007

RAL 8008 RAL 8011

RAL 8012 RAL 8023

S-TR-GEN-ID (Component Marking) (Rev 3-2009)_AN Page 30 of 40

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Component Marking

RAL 8024 RAL 8025

RAL 9002 RAL 9004

RAL 9005 RAL 9018

RAL 1000 Green Beige

RAL 1001 Beige
RAL 1002 Sand yellow
RAL 1003 Signal yellow
RAL 1004 Golden yellow
RAL 1005 Honey yellow
RAL 1006 Maize yellow
RAL 1007 Daffodil yellow
RAL 1011 Brown beige
RAL 1012 Lemon yellow
RAL 1013 Oyster white
RAL 1014 Ivory
RAL 1015 Light ivory
RAL 1016 Sulfur yellow
Saffron yellow
RAL 1017 Zinc yellow
RAL 1018 Grey beige
RAL 1019 Olive yellow
RAL 1020 Rape yellow
RAL 1021 Traffic yellow
RAL 1023 Ochre yellow
RAL 1024 Luminous yellow
RAL 1026 Curry
RAL 1027 Melon yellow
RAL 1028 Broom yellow
RAL 1032 Dahlia yellow
RAL 1033 Pastel yellow
RAL 1034 Pearl beige
RAL 1035 Pearl gold

S-TR-GEN-ID (Component Marking) (Rev 3-2009)_AN Page 31 of 40

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Component Marking

RAL 1036 Sun

RAL 1037

RAL 2000 Yellow Orange

RAL 2001 Red orange
RAL 2002 Vermilion
RAL 2003 Pastel orange
RAL 2004 Pure orange
RAL 2005 Luminous orange
RAL 2007 Luminous bright orange
RAL 2008 Bright red orange
RAL 2009 Traffic orange
RAL 2010 Signal orange
RAL 2011 Deep orange
RAL 2012 Salmon orange
RAL 2013 Pearl orange

RAL 3000 Flame Red

RAL 3001 Signal red
RAL 3002 Carmine red
RAL 3003 Ruby red
RAL 3004 Purple red
RAL 3005 Wine red
RAL 3007 Black red
RAL 3009 Oxide red
RAL 3011 Brown red
RAL 3012 Beige red
RAL 3013 Tomato red
RAL 3014 Antique pink
RAL 3015 Light pink
RAL 3016 Coral red
RAL 3017 Rose
RAL 3018 Strawberry red

S-TR-GEN-ID (Component Marking) (Rev 3-2009)_AN Page 32 of 40

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Component Marking

RAL 3020 Traffic red

RAL 3022 Salmon pink
RAL 3024 Luminous red
RAL 3026 Luminous bright red
RAL 3027 Raspberry red
RAL 3031 Orient red
RAL 3032 Pearl ruby red
RAL 3033 Pearl pink

RAL 4001 Red Lilac

RAL 4002 Red violet
RAL 4003 Heather violet
RAL 4004 Claret violet
RAL 4005 Blue lilac
RAL 4006 Traffic purple
RAL 4007 Purple violet
RAL 4008 Signal violet
RAL 4009 Pastel violet
RAL 4010 Telemagenta
RAL 4011 Pearl violet
RAL 4012 Pearl blackberry

RAL 5000 Violet Blue

RAL 5001 Green blue
RAL 5002 Ultramarine blue
RAL 5003 Sapphire blue
RAL 5004 Black blue
RAL 5005 Signal blue
RAL 5007 Brillant blue
RAL 5008 Grey blue
RAL 5009 Azure blue
RAL 5010 Gentian blue
RAL 5011 Steel blue

S-TR-GEN-ID (Component Marking) (Rev 3-2009)_AN Page 33 of 40

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Component Marking

RAL 5012 Light blue

RAL 5013 Cobalt blue
RAL 5014 Pigeon blue
RAL 5015 Sky blue
RAL 5016
RAL 5017 Traffic blue
RAL 5018 Turquoise blue
RAL 5019 Capri blue
RAL 5020 Ocean blue
RAL 5021 Water blue
RAL 5022 Night blue
RAL 5023 Distant blue
RAL 5024 Pastel blue
RAL 5025 Pearl gentian blue
RAL 5026 Pearl night blue

RAL 6000 Patina Green

RAL 6001 Emerald green
RAL 6002 Leaf green
RAL 6003 Olive green
RAL 6004 Blue green
RAL 6005 Moss green
RAL 6006 Grey olive
RAL 6007 Bottle green
RAL 6008 Brown green
RAL 6009 Fir green
RAL 6010 Grass green
RAL 6011 Reseda green
RAL 6012 Black green
RAL 6013 Reed green
RAL 6014 Yellow olive
RAL 6015 Black olive
RAL 6016 Turquoise green
RAL 6017 May green

S-TR-GEN-ID (Component Marking) (Rev 3-2009)_AN Page 34 of 40

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Component Marking

RAL 6018 Yellow green

RAL 6019 Pastel green
RAL 6020 Chrome green
RAL 6021 Pale green
RAL 6022 Olive drab
RAL 6024 Traffic green
RAL 6025 Fern green
RAL 6026 Opal green
RAL 6027 Light green
RAL 6028 Pine green
RAL 6029 Mint green
RAL 6032 Signal green
RAL 6033 Mint turquoise
RAL 6034 Pastel turquoise
RAL 6035 Pearl green
RAL 6036 Pearl opal green

RAL 7000 Squirrel Grey

RAL 7001 Silver grey
RAL 7002 Olive grey
RAL 7003 Moss grey
RAL 7004 Signal grey
RAL 7005 Mouse grey
RAL 7006 Beige grey
RAL 7008 Khaki grey
RAL 7009 Green grey
RAL 7010 Tarpaulin grey
RAL 7011 Iron grey
RAL 7012 Basalt grey
RAL 7013 Brown grey
RAL 7015 Slate grey
RAL 7016 Anthracite grey
RAL 7021 Black grey
RAL 7022 Umbra grey

S-TR-GEN-ID (Component Marking) (Rev 3-2009)_AN Page 35 of 40

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Component Marking

RAL 7023 Concrete grey

RAL 7024 Graphite grey
RAL 7026 Granite grey
RAL 7030 Stone grey
RAL 7031 Blue grey
RAL 7032 Pebble grey
RAL 7033 Cement grey
RAL 7034 Yellow grey
RAL 7035 Light grey
RAL 7036 Platinum grey
RAL 7037 Dusty grey
RAL 7038 Agate grey
RAL 7039 Quartz grey
RAL 7040 Window grey
RAL 7042 Traffic grey A

RAL 7043 Traffic grey B

RAL 7044 Silk grey
RAL 7045 Telegrey I
RAL 7046 Telegrey 2
RAL 7047 Telegrey 4
RAL 7048 Pearl mouse grey

RAL 8000 Green Brown

RAL 8001 Ochre brown
RAL 8002 Signal brown
RAL 8003 Clay brown
RAL 8004 Copper brown
RAL 8007 Fawn brown
RAL 8008 Olive brown
RAL 8011 Nut brown
RAL 8012 Red brown
RAL 8014 Sepia brown
RAL 8015 Chestnut brown

S-TR-GEN-ID (Component Marking) (Rev 3-2009)_AN Page 36 of 40

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Component Marking

RAL 8016 Mahogany brown

RAL 8017 Chocolate brown
RAL 8019 Grey brown
RAL 8022 Black brown
RAL 8023 Orange brown
RAL 8024 Beige brown
RAL 8025 Pale brown
RAL 8028 Terra brown
RAL 8029 Pearl copper

RAL 9001 Cream

RAL 9002 Grey white
RAL 9003 Signal white
RAL 9004 Signal black
RAL 9005 Jet black
RAL 9006 White aluminium
RAL 9007 Grey aluminium
RAL 9010 Pure white
RAL 9011 Graphite black
RAL 9016 Traffic white
RAL 9017 Traffic black
RAL 9018 Papyrus white
RAL 9022 Pearl light grey
RAL 9023 Pearl dark grey

Close this Window

S-TR-GEN-ID (Component Marking) (Rev 3-2009)_AN Page 37 of 40

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Component Marking

ATTACHMENT
Classification System of Documents (CSD) List of Subject Number for Drawings and
Documents

CSD Number SUBJECT

0000 SUPERORDINATED PROJECT MANAGEMENT

1000 CALCULATIONS
1100 Stability
1200 Load Flow
1300 Transmission Capacities

2000 PROGRAMMING, SOFTWARE

3000 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT (SUBSTATIONS)

3100 Gantry Cranes
3200 Lifts
3300 H.V.A.C. Systems
3400 Ventilation Systems
3500 Fire Fighting Systems

5000 CIVIL AND STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING

5100 Civil Construction Structures
5110 Finishing
5200 Switchgear Building with electrical Control Room
5300 SF6-Switchgear Building
5400 Transformer Foundations
5500 Miscellaneous Civil Works

7000 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

7100 Switchgears
7110 HV Switchgear
7120 MV Switchgear

S-TR-GEN-ID (Component Marking) (Rev 3-2009)_AN Page 38 of 40

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Component Marking

7130 LV Switchgear
7200 D. C. and A. C. Systems
7210 Battery Chargers
7220 Batteries
7300 Transformers, Reactors, Capacitors, Converters
7310 Theoretical Fundamentals, Design
7320 High Voltage and Medium Voltage Transformers
7330 Low Voltage Power transformers
7340 Transformer Accessories
7350 Reactors
7360 Capacitors
7370 Converters (Thyristor)
7400 Generators, Motors, Drives
7500 Cables
7510 HV Cables
7520 MV Cables
7530 LV Cables
7540 Cables for Instrumentation, Control and Telecommunication
7550 Cable Accessories
7560 Cable laying
7600 Transmission Lines
7610 Towers
7620 Foundations
7630 Sagging
7640 Insulators
7650 Conductors
7660 Accessories (Fittings, Clamps, etc.)
7700 Electrical Control Rooms
7710 Control Panels
7720 Synoptic Mosaic Panels

S-TR-GEN-ID (Component Marking) (Rev 3-2009)_AN Page 39 of 40

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Component Marking

7730 Local Control Centers

7740 Auxiliary Cubicles
7750 Marshalling racks
7800 Ancillary Systems
7810 Lighting and Small Power Installations
7820 Earthing Systems
7830 Lightning Systems
7900 Communication Systems
7910 Telephone Installations
7920 Power Line Carrier Systems/Installations
7930 Telex and Telecopy (FAX) Installations
7940 Wireless transmission Systems

8000 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL TECHNIQUE

8100 Process Peripheral Equipment
8200 Instrumentation and Closed-Loop Control Systems, Metering
8300 Alarm Annunciating, Open-Loop Control & Protection Systems
8400 Electronic Data Processing Installations, Hardware
8500 Operator Interface, Control Room Technique
8600 Data Transmission and Information Systems
8680 Telecontrol Installation
8690 Fault Indication, Status of Operation and Dispatch System

9000 PROTECTION SYSTEMS

9100 Protection System for Mechanical Installations
9200 Protection Systems for Electrical Installations
9300 Instrument Transformers (CT, VT)

S-TR-GEN-ID (Component Marking) (Rev 3-2009)_AN Page 40 of 40

 PROJECT SCHEDULE
REQUIREMENT

PLANNING & SCHEDULING TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

TRASNCO: Company General Use Page 1 of 28

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Planning & Scheduling Technical Specifications

Contents Amendment Record

This document has been issued and amended as follows:

Issue Revision Description Date Signed

2009 Rev 0 Original source document

2010 Rev 0.1 1st re-draft issued for comment 04/10/10 GM
2011 Rev 3 3-3-11 YO
2023 Rev4 2023 PMO

TRASNCO: Company General Use Page 2 of 28

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Planning & Scheduling Technical Specifications

TRANSCO STANDARD : S-TR-GEN-PSTS (PLANNING &

SCHEDULING TECH SPEC)

TRASNCO: Company General Use Page 3 of 28

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Planning & Scheduling Technical Specifications

CONTENTS

1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................... 5
2 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................... 5
3 SCOPE.............................................................................................................................. 5
4 ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES: ............................................................................ 5
5 THE CONTRACT PROGRAMME: ............................................................................. 6
5.1 INITIAL PROGRAMME (IP) ....................................................................................... 6
5.2 BASELINE PROGRAMME: ......................................................................................... 6
6 ENGINNERING DELIVERASBLES SCHEDULE: ................................................... 6
7 SOFTWARE FOR BASELINE PROGRAMME: ........................................................ 7
8 DEVELOPMENT OF BASE LINE PROGRAMME: PLANNING &
SCHEDULING REQUIREMENTS: ............................................................................. 7
9 PLANNING & SCHEDULING LEVELS ................................................................... 10
10 MANPOWER HISTOGRAM ...................................................................................... 12
11 PROGRESS ‘S’CURVES ............................................................................................. 12
12 CONTRACT AND INTERIM UPDATES .................................................................. 18
13 PROGRESS MEASUREMENT................................................................................... 18
14 PROGRESS REPORTING .......................................................................................... 19
15 COORDINATION PROCEDURE .............................................................................. 23
16 PROGRESS REVIEW MEETING ............................................................................. 23
17 TRANSCO REVIEW CYCLE ..................................................................................... 24
18 REVISION OF PLANNING & SCHEDULING DOCUMENTS ............................. 24
19 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................... 25
20 GLOSSARY ................................................................................................................... 27
21 APPENDIX A ................................................................................................................ 28

TRASNCO: Company General Use Page 4 of 28

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Planning & Scheduling Technical Specifications

PLANNING & SCHEDULING TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1 INTRODUCTION
The intent of this document is to set out the requirements of all parties who will participate in the
planning and scheduling of the contract. The contract schedule is regarded as the principal
control mechanism for the project and as such it is vital that all stakeholders fully understand
what is required of them from initial creation until project completion.

The contract schedule is neutral; it is there to serve the interests of all stakeholders and to help
deliver the project to all parties’ satisfaction within time, cost, and quality constraints. For it to
be of maximum value the information it contains must be as honest, realistic, and accurate as
possible. The requirements contained within this document are designed to ensure that the
schedule is produced and maintained in a manner that is both consistent and in line with
generally accepted good scheduling practice.

2 GENERAL
The principal rights and duties of the parties with respect to planning and scheduling are set forth
under any contract however, the following detailed requirements and procedures shall govern the
planning and scheduling activities under this contract.

3 SCOPE
The scope of this procedure includes the following:
• The development of schedules which represent the plan for execution of the services
consistent with TRANSCO requirement and reflecting the total scope.
• A monitoring and control system which continually compares actual performance with
planned performance and allows early review and corrective/preventive actions on
deviations.
• The default settings and modes of operation of the contract scheduling software package.
• The outline format and minimum content of progress and status reports.

These requirements are in addition to or expand upon the requirement set up elsewhere in the
contract documents.

4 ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES:

The consultant will be responsible for developing and maintaining all the requirement related to
the baseline programme and periodic updates as will be discussed hereunder.
The consultant will appoint a special planning engineer with the required skills to exercise all the
planning requirements mentioned in this specification document or elsewhere in the contract.
TRANSCO will reserve the right to check the competency of the planning engineer who will be

TRASNCO: Company General Use Page 5 of 28

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Planning & Scheduling Technical Specifications

required review and make sure that all TRANSCO’s requirements mentioned in this
specification document or elsewhere in the contract are satisfied.
The consultant shall delegate a single responsible to monitor and update the construction
activities in accordance with actual construction progress. This designated representative shall be
solely responsible to act on behalf of the Consultant/Contractor and to revise the schedules logic
in accordance with the terms of Contract Documents. The Consultant’s representative shall not
be replaced throughout the duration of the project without written consent by OWNER/Engineer.

In case of scheduled annual leave of the said representative, a proper replacement and
notification to OWNER shall be arranged by the Consultant in order not to disrupt work
continuity, which is under the responsibility of its representative.

5 THE CONTRACT PROGRAMME:

The contract programme shall be produced by the consultant as per the following schedule:

5.1 INITIAL PROGRAMME (IP)

Within 2 weeks of the contract award to the main contractor (EPC), Consultant shall prepare and
submit to the Owner a programme that will cover works to be done by the contractor in the first
3 months of the contract award and for information only.
However, the said program shall be maintained, and OWNER may ask for the update as required
until the approval of the baseline.

5.2 BASELINE PROGRAMME:

Within 28 days of the contract award, the consultant shall submit to the TRANSCO a detailed
Baseline programme. This plan of work shall be based on all contract documents and needs
approval from TRANSCO. This programme shall include the engineering, procurement,
construction, pre-commissioning and commissioning activities, demonstrating the sequence and
interdependence of the CONTRACTOR’S activities requisite to complete all contractual
obligations as well as all the corresponding contractual costs for the same.
This programme shall be used by the Consultant to schedule, coordinate and monitor the
activities of his personnel under this CONTRACT including all material supplies, equipment,
vendors and subcontractors.
The Consultant is required to develop Time and Cost integrated schedule for monitoring both
aspects of project.

6 ENGINNERING DELIVERASBLES SCHEDULE:

Within the 30-days period from Contract Award, the CONTRACTOR shall provide the list of
Engineering Deliverables for OWNER/Engineer review and approval. A deliverables schedule
shall be prepared for all Engineering disciplines and shall demonstrate interdependency from the
other deliverables. These deliverables shall be planned at the proper time and shall be directly
linked with the related activities in the procurement and construction activities and to provide

TRASNCO: Company General Use Page 6 of 28

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Planning & Scheduling Technical Specifications

optimum sequencing to ensure that they are available before start of construction work at Site.
Engineering progress measurement shall be developed and shall be submitted for
OWNER/Engineer review and approval and same shall be incorporated in the baseline
programme. Monthly updating of engineering deliverables with the status of each deliverables
shall form part of the Monthly report. Any changes from the approved engineering deliverables
shall be highlighted in the report.

7 SOFTWARE FOR BASELINE PROGRAMME:

The preferred system for all contracts is Oracle Primavera P6. Consultant/Contractor may
however, utilize alternative software given that the output file of this alternative software is
compatible with Oracle Primavera P6, meaning that the file could be imported to Primavera with
all the resources and costs loaded without any further adjustment efforts or structure /logic
disturbances.
This package will be used for the formulation, update, reviewing and reporting of schedules and
progress reports throughout the duration of the project, including the accommodation of any
changes in the scope of work.

Contractor may also utilise his in-house developed package(s) suitable for specific applications
(e.g. document control, procurement control, etc.). TRANSCO shall have the right to review and
to request amendment or amend all planning packages, applications such as, schedules,
procedures, to suit its requirements. Consultant/Contractor shall maintain a system which shall
be capable of tracking deliverables, assessing progress, maintaining Earned Value analysis
calculations, producing manpower histograms and ‘S’curves by discipline/Area, cash flow
distribution curves, payment requests and assets coding system, the system should be able to
identify problems areas and supporting the decision making process for corrective actions.

The systems shall be capable of producing normal and exception reports as may be required by
TRANSCO.

The CONTRACTOR would supply the licensed version (1 No. for OWNER HQ, 1 No. for
OWNER/ENGINEER Site team) of the latest Version of planning software to be used by
OWNER & ENGINEER.

8 DEVELOPMENT OF BASE LINE PROGRAMME: PLANNING &

SCHEDULING REQUIREMENTS:

The Baseline Programme is a detailed Programme that represents the entire lifecycle of the
projects under the PMC scope of work and must be in line with the Employer’s requirements and
delivery plan. Once the Baseline Programme is accepted by the Employer, it shall not be revised,
changed, or modified without the prior approval from Employer
In preparing the Baseline Programme, the PMC/Consultant shall meet the following criteria:

TRASNCO: Company General Use Page 7 of 28

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Planning & Scheduling Technical Specifications

8.1 The programme covers the entire scope(s) of the contract work. A programme file
in. XER format must be provided with a detailed WBS showing all
deliverables/scope
8.2 All activities shall be properly linked and the early/late start and finish dates along
with the total float and critical path(s) shall be clearly identified
8.3 The activity list shall indicate the following data as a minimum but not limited to
the Activity ID, Activity Description, Duration, Early Start, Early Finish, Late
Start, Late Finish and Total Float
8.4 When performing CPM scheduling, the critical activities must be filtered using
the “Longest Path” method. For ‘near critical path’, activities with a total float of
no more than 21 calendar days are used.
8.5 The Work Breakdown Structure, Activity codes, Resource dictionary, Project
Calendar, and the level to which work elements are detailed shall be provided by
or agreed with the employer. The work breakdown structure (WBS) of the
schedule to be in line with the Contract BOQ and to follow the approach of
operative sub systems & systems. Appropriate breakdown for lots, circuits and the
relevant work packages shall be provided to clearly reflect the major phases of the
Project. Typically, the WBS Level 1 will be as follows:
WBS Code WBS Name
N000X.1 1-Milestones
N000X.2 2-General
N000X.3 3-Engineering
N000X.4 4-Procurement
N000X.5 5-Construction
N000X.6 6-PAC
N000X.7 7-FAC
No changes can be made to the contract WBS without the agreement of TRANSCO.

8.6 Activity ID/Numbering must be unique for each activity

8.7 The programme should not contain any negative lags, open-ended activities, non-
contractual constraints, out of sequence activities and invalid relations (Start to
Finish relationship is inacceptable)
8.8 When the use of a constraint is necessary (mainly for contractual milestones),
constraint types “Start On”, “Finish On”, “Start On or After” and “Finish On or
Before” are used
8.9 The time unit must be in days. Date format must be DD-MM-YYYY

TRASNCO: Company General Use Page 8 of 28

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Planning & Scheduling Technical Specifications

8.10 Use of Notebook Topics / Text fields: Whilst every effort is to be made to work
according to the approved schedule it is acknowledged that there will inevitably
be exceptions when for whatever reason it is not possible to do this. An activity
level notebook topic – ‘progress comments’ is to be used to record any relevant
information which relates to the progression of works i.e. outstanding approvals,
requests for information. This topic is to be clearly and fully displayed on the hard
copy PDF schedule that is issued along with the soft copy schedule file during
every update period.
Similarly, alterations to logic must be recorded in an activity level notebook topic
– ‘logic changes’ Changes in activity logic within the working schedule must
always be explained and fully justified.

8.11 Planning & Scheduling Package Settings: The software required in the
development of baseline, revised schedule and progress updates is primavera P6.

8.12 Out of Sequence Progress: Contractor / consultant shall carry out the works
according to the agreed contract schedule. Every effort should be made to
maintain the agreed contract schedule but if out of sequence working is
undertaken, for whatever reason, a full description of the out of sequence working
and a suitable explanation is to be given. Full note must also be made on the
impact of out of sequence working has had on the agreed contract schedule.
Appropriate modifications to schedule logic must be made to return the schedule
to the original sequence; logic changes are to be fully recorded using the notebook
topic as outlined above.

8.13 The Baseline / Contract programme shall include:

• Every significant activity required for the completion of the works

• Key dates for all major activities
• Decisions and information required from the Employer, Project Manager
and Engineer
• Approvals, No Objection Certificates and Permits required from the
Authorities
• Submission and approval of all required submittals and approvals of the
same by Employer, Project Manager and Engineer
• All interfaces sequencing and co-ordination of activities with the works of
the Consultants
• Estimated duration of each activity and all precedence relationships
between activities so that the Consultant's intentions and sequence of work
are clearly defined

TRASNCO: Company General Use Page 9 of 28

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Planning & Scheduling Technical Specifications

• All Contractual milestones, key schedule dates and any external

constraints/interdependencies that may affect the completion of the project
shall be indicated. Negative lags shall not be used
• The PMC’s Baseline Programme must resource loaded with the required
resource/cost as requested by Employer
• A weighted progress measurement system and appropriate key
performance evaluation criteria will be provided by Employer and then
agreed with the Employer
• The PMC shall submit in addition to the aforementioned a narrative report
reflecting scheduling basis, methodology and assumptions, risks, key
layouts, and interfaces in addition to the following supporting information,
as a minimum, with the submission of its Baseline Programme

9 PLANNING & SCHEDULING LEVELS

9.1 Level Nomenclature: For the avoidance of any doubt, and to ensure that all parties
are referring to a common level of detail, a system of scheduling levels will be
established. The following criteria will be used when referring to the schedule at
any given level.
9.2
Table b - scheduling levels
Level ID Typical Primavera Description
Equivalent

Level 1 (executive summary) WBS summarised to level 2 The entire project summarised
to single activities
representing broad phases.
Key milestones also shown

Level 2 (management WBS summarised to level 3 High level summary of the

summary) project at phase then area
level. Key milestones also
shown
Level 3 (control) WBS summarised to level 4 Project summarised to work
package / discipline level.
Key milestones also shown

Level 4 (working) WBS summarised to level 5 Activity level – this is the

or greater fully detailed working
schedule

TRASNCO: Company General Use Page 10 of 28

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Planning & Scheduling Technical Specifications

Level 5 (detailed task) Not applicable Sub activity (task) level.

Detail not normally present
within a working schedule.
Tracked externally using
drawing register or similar
system

9.3 Level Content & Typical Use:

Schedule Level 1 – (executive summary)
This level is typically used for executive level reporting. It consists of a single
summary bar for each broad phase of the project. Collectively these will depict
the overall project timescale together with key contractual milestone dates. It is
used to provide a very high-level single page summary of a project. Typically, it
will be an A4 format document.
Schedule Level 2 - (management summary) – Project by Phase / Area
9.4 The Summary project schedule shall be rolled up from the level 3 control
schedule by appropriate grouping of activities and shall be structured to display
an acceptable level of detail. As a minimum this will consist of the activity bars
representing the broad phasing of the project broken down further by area. It will
also display all key contractual and phase milestones. This schedule will outline
the duration for the main activities covering each phase by area and the project
control milestones.

9.5 Schedule Level 3 – (control) Project by Phase / Area then work package
9.6 The level 3 schedule will cover the whole of the project and is the main source of
information for the monthly project report. As such it will contain all significant
milestones and cover all major elements of the project i.e., engineering,
procurement, installation, and commissioning. In instances where there are
multiple contractors / sub-contractors it will be a complete critical path method
schedule. This will then provide the framework by which individual contractors
can develop their own detailed level 4 working schedules within the sequencing
and timing constraints of the overall project.

9.7 Schedule Level 4 – (working) activity level detail schedule

9.8 This is the detailed working schedule which will consist of the most detailed
information. It will be a complete, closed CPM network which will have at least
one critical path and reflect the whole of the project scope within a given
discipline or phase. This schedule will typically form the basis for the short term

TRASNCO: Company General Use Page 11 of 28

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Planning & Scheduling Technical Specifications

look ahead layouts and reports used by discipline leads to control work and report
progress.

9.9 Schedule Level 5 – (task) Sub Activity Level

This level may be used to produce short term look ahead schedules (i.e. 1 or 2
weeks) or task lists for individuals or teams. It may represent the sub deliverables
(i.e., individual drawings within a submittal package) that will be created by a
given activity. This information may be stored within a drawing deliverable
register or database and the progress against individual drawings summarised to
produce a weighted PPC at the parent activity level.

9.10 All plans (Baseline, Recovery and Commissioning) would be submitted to

OWNER / ENGINEER for approval.
9.11 The CONTRACTOR shall provide detailed schedules, in line with the approved
baseline programme, as and when requested by OWNER / ENGINEER for any
part of the Work.
9.12
9.13 The CONTRACTOR has also to supply detailed schedule for production,
inspections & delivery of all major material / equipment.
9.14
9.15 Every schedule submitted need to be followed by a write up to explain the basic
assumption of the schedule (both baseline, recovery, and any detailed schedules).

10 MANPOWER HISTOGRAM
Forecast required manpower histograms by discipline and at overall project level shall be
produced throughout the project duration at every reporting period. Consultant/contractor shall
mobilize adequate manpower resources to ensure works are accomplished in accordance with the
baseline plan.

The histograms shall be produced to depict the scheduled manpower planned and shall be
compared with actual manpower deployed on a weekly basis for the entire project duration.

The histogram shall be developed for the entire duration of the contract.

11 PROGRESS ‘S’CURVES
Progress ‘S’ Curves shall be developed based on the Level 3 Control Schedule and the various
activities weight factors (as a minimum one overall progress ‘S’ Curve will be generated) these
curves shall be updated on monthly basis to display actual progress versus planned progress as

TRASNCO: Company General Use Page 12 of 28

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Planning & Scheduling Technical Specifications

well as projected trends for the remaining period through the project duration ‘S’ curve shall
show early and late profile. Updated ‘S’ Curves, together with updated manpower histograms to
be provided and shall be from the basis of progress reporting and monitoring with respect to the
contract schedule.

The Following S-curves to be submitted

1. Overall S-curve based on Cost (Planned cashflow as per the terms of

payment), and will be updated to show Earned value vs. Planned values.
2. Overall S-curve based on Progress weightage (Planned progress of works).
3. S-curve showing different phases of the Contract based on Cost and planned
physical progress of Works.
4. S-curve for major Subcontractors Work scope

11.1 The total budget at completion of the schedule must be equal to the total Contract
value. Every activity in the schedule must be loaded with the corresponding BOQ
item as a resource, with relevant budget units and budget cost, and in case of
Lump Sum items, the quantities to be estimated initially.

11.2 The loading of the cost to the different activities of the schedule must be done in
line with the invoicing clause of the Contract (Terms of Payment, refer to the
General Conditions of Contract). This will require the costs to be split into
payables.

11.3 The cost for each resource will be the net payment amount (i.e. excluding the
advance payment % or the retention monies.

11.4 Wherever the Contract BOQ item defines the Work at a higher level than the
activities in the schedule, the BOQ cost to be estimated for different activities of
the Works and loaded in the schedule. These cost break ups later will have to be
approved by OWNER/ENGINEER & accordingly the cost loaded schedules
would be readjusted to reflect the OWNER / ENGINEER approval. This is
applicable to all lump sum items, to the Electromechanical & Instrumentation
activities.

11.5 Activities/resources shall be codded with relevant codes in line with the assets
unified code in the appendix for POWER and Water Projects.

11.6 All activities in the schedule to be loaded with the required resources particularly
Manpower & Equipment required to execute the activity. Submission & approval
of the Histogram is a must. Feasibility / availability report of the required
resources for doing the Works to be submitted along with the schedule.

TRASNCO: Company General Use Page 13 of 28

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Planning & Scheduling Technical Specifications

11.7 Under the Engineering Design and approval WBS node, CONTRACTOR to
include a sufficient level of detail for the Engineering deliverable schedule, which
shall be planned at the proper time and shall be directly linked with the related
activities in the procurement and construction activities and to provide optimum
sequencing to ensure that they are available before start of construction work at
Site.

11.8 This schedule must clearly mention the details of sub contractor’s Scope of Work,
such information will need to be updated from time to time to reflect the latest
information.

11.9 All activities in the baseline programme shall have a limited duration less than 21
days except for the work packages for which the information at the time of
development of the baseline plan is not available as well as manufacturing and
shipment activities.

11.10 As it might be practically applicable, a detailed pre-commissioning and

commissioning schedules will have to be developed later prior to completion of
Construction activities of any sub system / system. the following is a minimum
requirement in developing the detailed schedule:
11.10.1 Completion Certificate – to be issued after the successful results of all erections
tests.
11.10.2 Ready for Energization/Commissioning Certificate – to be issued after the
successful completion of the pre-commissioning phase.
11.10.3 Ready for Start Up is the Certificate – to be issued after the commissioning tests.
11.10.4 Trial and initial operation and finally the PAC.
11.10.5 Handing Over plan shall also be part of this detailed schedule.
11.10.6 Various walk downs to establish the punch list items for different systems.
11.10.7 Cost weightage associated with different systems need to be agreed by both
parties before the development of schedule.

11.11 The base line schedule would also consider any external dependencies if any, and
also dependencies of different lots of the same package, if applicable.

11.12 Comprehensive lists of various tests to be carried out under different phases of
commissioning, as mentioned above, for all systems & sub systems would be
submitted for OWNER approval and would be based on various Contract
documents. This detailed schedule would be submitted for approval before the
start of any works for testing / pre commissioning / Commissioning Works.

TRASNCO: Company General Use Page 14 of 28

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Planning & Scheduling Technical Specifications

11.13 From the procurement schedule, a detailed report must be generated for all the
major equipment / material to provide sufficient follow up information. Which
will:

11.13.1 Divide all equipment/material into disciplines (Electrical / Mechanical / I&C /

Fire Fighting / etc…)
11.13.2 Provide description of the equipment/material with the estimated quantity.
11.13.3 Provide Name of Local Supplier, Fabricator, Material Submittal / Approval status
with reference.
11.13.4 Provide Purchase Order date / tentative planned P.O. date (to be delivered from
Schedule)
11.13.5 Provide a Brief Manufacturing / Procurement status.
11.13.6 In case the TPIA or any other inspection is required, tentative date of such
inspection along with due results of the inspection.
11.13.7 Approximate number of weeks for shipment.
11.13.8 Dates for Ex-Works/Shipping, ETA Abu Dhabi, ETA Site & finally the required
date at Site (Delivered from the installation schedule)
11.13.9 Provide the complete percentage ( % ) for accomplished during the production
phase
11.13.10 This report must be updated on Monthly basis and any major changes in the dates
of delivery must be highlighted on Monthly basis.
11.13.11 Progress measurement (physical progress) of procurement activities shall be
developed starting from placement of order up to delivery to site and shall be
agreed between both parties.
11.13.12 Cash flow base lines and updates for procurement package must be generated
from the Baseline schedule and the terms of payment

11.14 The baseline schedules must show all major milestones, such as:-

11.14.1 Approved “Contractual” Start and Finish dates, and Site handing over dates.
11.14.2 Any dates for specific requirements from the OWNER/ENGINEER must be
shown very clearly.
11.14.3 Completion of Engineering activities, completion of Manufacturing activities, and
of Erection activities.
11.14.4 Milestones to show the placement of order for critical items & the delivery of
Critical items must be incorporated in the schedule.
11.14.5 Approval of all QCP/ ITP for starting the production of all major materials /
equipment.

TRASNCO: Company General Use Page 15 of 28

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Planning & Scheduling Technical Specifications

11.14.6 Completion of all major systems or work packages.

11.15 Each activity in the network shall be assigned a resource to reflect the weightage
system, i.e the performance weight factor, which is based on agreed weightage
system, upon which Progress ‘S-curves’ will be generated and subsequently
monitored. The control schedule is explained in further detail under paragraph 7
below.
11.16 As a general policy, the use of constraints within the schedule is to be kept to an
absolute minimum. Only official contractual milestones may carry constraints,
and these are to be the least restrictive possible congruent with achieving the
objective of accurately modelling the required date. The following are the only
allowed cases for use of constraints:
• Only milestone type activities may carry a constraint, unless otherwise
justified by consultant/contractor
• Interface points to external schedules with external dates are to be clearly
identified.
• Every constraint used shall be documented and fully justified in the
schedule narrative.
• The use of constraints to suppress the float is expressly forbidden.
• The use of mandatory (hard) constraints is expressly forbidden unless the
use can be wholly justified.

The following table lists the available constraints and guidelines on usage

Table a – Activity constraint types

Type Abbreviation Class Comments
As late as possible ALAP Soft
Start no earlier than SNET Soft
Start no later than SNLT Soft Typical contractual
Start on S.ON Soft
Finish no earlier than FNET Soft
Finish no later than FNLT Soft Typical contractual
Finish on F.ON Soft
Mandatory start MS Hard Use prohibited
Mandatory finish MF Hard Use prohibited

11.17 As a general policy, the use of multiple calendars within the schedule is to be kept
to the minimum required to realistically model the nature of the activities being

TRASNCO: Company General Use Page 16 of 28

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Planning & Scheduling Technical Specifications

modelled, i.e. local working arrangements, typical trade working patterns. The
following conditions must be adhered to:
• All calendars are to be fully documented
• All calendars are to reflect as the working practice they are modelling
• Calendars must contain any local statutory holidays and / or contractually
specified non work periods
• The use of calendar nonworking periods to suppress float is expressly
forbidden.

11.18 All level 3 and 4 schedules are to be fully logic linked. All activities are to have
at least one predecessor activity and at least one successor activity, the only
exceptions being the project start milestone which will have no predecessor, and
the project finish milestone which will have no successor.
Logic links should be predominantly conventional finish – start (FS) type links.
Logic links of the start – start (SS) and finish – finish (FF) may also be used
where justified, as may the start – finish (SF) type link. The logic used must
reflect the sequencing as explained in the accompanying schedule narrative. The
use of unusual logic i.e. (SF) should also be covered within the narrative.
The use of lags between activities is to be kept to the minimum and cannot exceed
5% necessary to realistically model the intended relationship, and use of leads
(Negative lag) should be avoided. The following conditions must be adhered to:
• In every instance where a lag is used it must be justified in the
accompanying schedule narrative and recorded in the activity notebook /
text field.
• The use of lag as a substitute for an activity is expressly forbidden i.e. to
simulate approval periods or lead time. These must always be represented
as a discrete activity.
• The use of lag to suppress float is expressly forbidden.
• No critical task/path should contain any lag or lead

11.19 All level 3 and 4 schedules are to have a companion schedule narrative that
clearly explains the sequencing and underlying methodology that is depicted in
the schedule. The topics covered should include but are not limited to:
• Methodology and sequencing.
• Phasing and coding.
• Critical path and near critical paths.
• Explanation and justification of non-conventional logic where used.

TRASNCO: Company General Use Page 17 of 28

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Planning & Scheduling Technical Specifications

• Explanation and justification of lags and leads where used.

• Explanation and justification of constraints including reference to all
contractual key dates.
• Interfaces to external contractor schedules and the implications thereof.
• Productivity rates per each major Work sequence or for any specific
activities required by OWNER/ENGINEER.

12 CONTRACT AND INTERIM UPDATES

12.1 Contract Baseline
Once accepted by TRANSCO, the schedule shall be used to create a baseline. This will then
form the approved contract baseline and will be used as the basis for performance measurement
and all variance calculations. Once approved, the baseline may not be altered without the express
permission of TRANSCO. During every periodic update the approved contract baseline will be
used as a reference against which overall progress and performance will be measured.
12.2 Interim Updates (updates)
In addition to the contract baseline which will remain a fixed reference point, interim baselines
are to be used to determine periodic progress and performance trends. Prior to every periodic
update, an interim baseline shall be created, and this will be used as a reference to analyse
periodic performance.

13 PROGRESS MEASUREMENT
13.1 Responsibility
The reporting of progress shall be the responsibility of contractor. The Engineer/Consultant will
be responsible for review and approve the contractor’s submittal before reporting to TRANSCO.

13.2 Basis for Progress and Performance Measurement

All the progress data produced by consultant/contractor discipline engineers shall be reviewed by
consultant/contractor’s schedule controllers. Random spot checks shall be made to confirm the
validity of the progress figures being supplied and any discrepancies or miss-reporting shall be
immediately rectified to the satisfaction of TRANSCO. The percentage achieved shall be agreed
with TRANSCO on a regular basis, and all progress calculations shall be made systematically
using the progress criteria as specified in below:

13.2.1 Measuring physical percentage completes (PPC): of activities against the

predefined progress criteria (agreed by the project team).
13.2.2 Earned Value: which is based on the monetary Value of Work done up to the
reporting period (after applying TRANSCO terms of payment).

TRASNCO: Company General Use Page 18 of 28

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Planning & Scheduling Technical Specifications

The supporting documents, charts & photos relevant to the measurements of the actual field
progress are to be provided by consultant/contractor and shall be attached to the relevant monthly
Consultant / contractor shall progress the schedule monthly. Progress will be determined by the
following:

Once the schedule has been progressed a full analysis of variance will be carried out. The project
manager is responsible for notifying activity owners of any slippage and working with them to
implement the actions necessary to eliminate the slippage.

In addition, the cost wise analysis will be required in terms of comparison between Planned cash
flow to actual invoiced and a further comparison between value of work done at site and actual
invoiced.

14 PROGRESS REPORTING
Consultant/Contractor shall prepare and maintain a comprehensive set of controls for
documentation. These controls shall enable exception reports to be prepared speedily and to
support management reporting as required by TRANSCO from time to time. Details of various
reports to be submitted by consultant/contractor are given below:

14.1 Periodic Progress and Performance Reporting Requirements

Contractor / consultant shall produce progress and performance reports at the frequency
specified. As a minimum these reports will consist of:

14.2 Monthly Progress Reports (MPR)

st
On 1 day of each month Consultant/Contractor shall submit a monthly progress report on
progress performed till 25th of the previous month (cut-off date), as per TRANSCO agreed
format and contents utilizing the details as mentioned below. The report shall include and covers
detailed listing of work performed by consultant/contractor during the past month as well as a
summary of works completed till the cut-off date, charts and paragraphs and detailed listing of
work to be performed during the coming month. The MPR shall be submitted to TRANSCO
covered by the simplified monthly progress report as per the approved TRANSCO format, and
specified number of copies which shall include the following:

14.2.1 As part of the monthly progress report:

▪ Soft copy for the interim updated control schedule showing
planned/actual/forecast dates.
▪ Progress ‘S’Curves for each phase (Engineering, procurement, or construction)
by discipline/area/system etc. separately.
▪ Updated deliverables/control register indicating plans versus actual/forecast.
Completion dates along with progress status.
▪ Updated cash flow schedule.
▪ Detailed Earned Value calculations.
▪ Description for any Works deleted.

TRASNCO: Company General Use Page 19 of 28

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Planning & Scheduling Technical Specifications

▪ Description for any Works added.

▪ Description for any Change of sequence of various activities.
▪ Any change of quantities for various BOQ items due to progress of Design.
▪ Description for any new Subcontractor approved & their scope of Works.
▪ Description for any A report on the performance of different Subcontractors.

14.2.2 All planning documents shall be updated monthly and submitted to

OWNER/Engineer as part of the monthly progress report. Soft copy of the
Schedules to be submitted every month for all progress updates in either P6 or
XER format as approved by ENGINEER.

14.2.3 The CONTRACTOR will also have to submit the hard copies of progress updates
in pre-agreed formats. This submission will be done on monthly basis although
the updates would be done on weekly basis.
14.2.4 A comprehensive list of all changes i.e. revised logic, durations, added
/amended/deleted activities, resource assignment changes
14.2.5 Comprehensive variance analysis against approved Contract Baseline covering:
▪ Start and Finish dates variances
▪ Cost and cash flow Variances
▪ Earned value variance analysis

14.2.6 Comprehensive variance analysis as above against the previous update with
commentary on trends
14.3 Updating Procedure:
14.3.1 CONTRACTOR shall perform the updating of the schedule on a monthly basis,
based on both cost and physical progress of Works, by entering the activities’
actual start and finish dates and comparing against the approved baseline schedule
by showing in the bar chart the targets bars for assessment.
14.3.2 Time related updating would be done by putting the remaining duration of the
activity for the balance work with proper reasoning of the same.
14.3.3 Cost related updating would be done by updating each resource associated with
the activity based on the actual units done.
14.3.4 Physical progress for activities will be updated by entering actual % complete in
the weightage actual units for each activity.
14.3.5 The following week, the progress figures must be checked in detail (backed up by
supporting documents) by a team comprising of QA/QC, QS & Planning
Engineer both from the Consultant & the CONTRACTOR and then these
corrected progress figures would be reflected in the overall progress. These
progress figures to be signed by the RE & the CONTRACTOR’s Project Manager
for their agreement.

TRASNCO: Company General Use Page 20 of 28

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Planning & Scheduling Technical Specifications

14.3.6 All variations will be reflected in the schedule every 3 months or whenever the
need be and will be based on the proposal of the CONTRACTOR. Before
loading the Works covered under Variation into the schedule, the
CONTRACTOR must submit the same to OWNER/ENGINEER for progress
related comments. This submission will only be for the progress monitoring and
in no way give right to the CONTRACTOR for invoice these Works. Later, when
the processing & the approval of trend notice/variation are done, the budget
associated with this activity will be readjusted accordingly.

14.3.7 The updated schedule to be true reflection of the Site progress and the remaining
durations must reflect reality. The updated schedule must reflect the schedule
assumptions of the CONTRACTOR at the time of updating the schedule but not
the assumptions of few months ago.

14.3.8 The CONTRACTOR would advise OWNER/ENGINEER about all the out of
sequence progressing during the Week and the reasons for the same.

14.3.9 The CONTRACTOR need to submit every month the details of the resources
deployed on Site particularly manpower. The report must provide comparison of
the planned & actual productivity indices for major items; reasons for the
variations in productivity indices & the CONTRACTOR’s proposal to either
rectify the problem or to increase the resources based on the actual productivity
index.
14.3.10 An updated S-curve for the following must be submitted for the following- :

▪ Overall S-curve based on Cost and physical progress of Works.

▪ S-curve showing different phases of the Contract based on Cost and physical
progress of Works.
▪ S-curve for major Subcontractors Work scope
▪ S curves based on unit quantity for various major tasks like Concrete (M3),
Embankment formation (LM), Pipe laying (LM)

14.3.11 Updated histograms based on the actual Manpower & equipment on Site. These
Histograms to be submitted based on geographical areas of Site and various
disciplines.
14.3.12 3-months look ahead must be submitted derived from the latest baseline/revised
schedules from time to time.

14.3.13 From these 3 months look ahead, 1 month look ahead to be derived and must be
detailed enough by further breaking up the Works in order to monitor the Works
on daily basis and must be submitted along with the monthly report.

TRASNCO: Company General Use Page 21 of 28

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Planning & Scheduling Technical Specifications

14.3.14 In the event of delays, the CONTRACTOR shall describe actions proposed to
overcome the adverse conditions & to maintain the planned Construction
Programme.

14.3.15 The Monthly Progress Meetings will be held on and the discussions will be based
on the updated schedule. Different phases of the project & their impact on each
other along with the slippages in the major milestones will be discussed in these
progress meetings.

14.3.16 Critical path analysis (with zero or negative total float) must be discussed in the
Weekly Progress Meetings & remedial actions to be discussed in order to recover.

14.3.17 On a Monthly basis, a status report on various authority approvals will have to be
submitted by the CONTRACTOR. In case there are some delays due to this
reason, the CONTRACTOR to explain the various steps planned to bring back the
schedule.

14.3.18 On a monthly basis the contractor will be required to submit the following cost
updates:

▪ Value of work done up to date (as per terms of payment and including the
Advanced payment)
▪ Actual value invoiced up to cut-off date

14.3.19 A tabular report reflecting the Design status of submittals from time to time. The
detailed time schedules must also be submitted for various Works requested by
the ENGINEER in order to closely monitor the Progress of Works.

14.4 Weekly Progress Reports (Construction)

Contractor shall submit for the Consultant Only weekly progress report by Sunday every week
(Friday cut-off date) providing an area/system/discipline wise narrative description of activities
completed during the reporting week, areas of concern/recommended action plan and list of
activities planned for the subsequent week. The report will also include a list of delayed
activities with plan vs. forecast completion dates.

Weekly progress report shall also include, but not be limited to the following details;

a) Progress statistics (weekly & cumulative) along with reasons for backlog if any,
separately for each area/system/discipline/facility…etc and overall progress.
b) Activities awaiting TRANSCO action/approval.

TRASNCO: Company General Use Page 22 of 28

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Planning & Scheduling Technical Specifications

c) Updated S curve showing planned vs. actual progress (weekly & cumulative) at
the overall project level.
d) Procurement status report.
e) 3 weeks look – ahead program.

A deviation from the agreed schedule shall be identified and two (2) copies of this report shall be
submitted by the contractor to TRANSCO and consultant.
14.5 Daily Report (Construction)
Contractor shall prepare standard form for daily reports which shall be approved by TRANSCO.
It shall be the daily field log and the minimum information required shall be as follows:

a) A breakdown, by craft, of manpower and major equipment utilized by contractor

and his sub-contractors on site.
b) Construction highlights.
c) Any other problem which shall affect the progress of the works.

This log shall be prepared and maintained daily at site and a copy shall be delivered to
Consultant Residence Engineer next morning.

15 COORDINATION PROCEDURE
15.1 Communication
The English Language shall be used for all correspondence, reports, instruction, drawings,
specifications etc.

As far as possible, all written communication shall be SITE level directly between Consultant
and contractor. All efforts shall be made to keep the correspondence to the minimum. If for
expediency, telephonic conversation shall be used; this shall be confirmed in writing two (2)
working days, by both PARTIES.

Consultant shall prepare and issue the Minutes of all his meetings with TRANSCO & Contractor
and shall be responsible for obtaining approval of these minutes prior to release within two (2)
working days.

16 PROGRESS REVIEW MEETING

Progress review meetings shall be conducted on weekly/monthly basis. These meetings shall be
attended by TRANSCO, consultant, and contractor personnel, including consultant &
contractor’s project manager, planning engineer and other Engineers as may be required.

The end user (/TRANSCO) representative shall attend the progress review meeting as an
observer.

The minutes of meeting shall be prepared by the consultant and submitted to TRANSCO for
review and approval prior distribution to all attendees.

TRASNCO: Company General Use Page 23 of 28

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Planning & Scheduling Technical Specifications

17 TRANSCO REVIEW CYCLE

While developing the project planning and control documents package, consultant/contractor
shall consider 3 weeks duration for the review of drawings, documents, procedures,
specifications, and any technical submittals by TRANSCO.

18 REVISION OF PLANNING & SCHEDULING DOCUMENTS

The Schedules and all documents related to the planning dossier, once approved, shall not be
changed by consultant/contractor without prior approval by TRANSCO.

Contractor shall submit along with any variation proposal a detailed evaluation of schedule
impact, if any, due to change in scope/sequence of work. Justification for schedule impact should
be accompanied by a logic network clearly highlighting the impact of such changes on the
completion of intermediate milestones as well as the overall project completion, if any.

Contractor shall note that the submission of any revised program/extension time request and
subsequent approval of same by TRANSCO, during the contract period shall not relieve the
consultant/contractor from his contractual obligations. All such revisions shall only be treated as
a part of the control mechanism for effective monitoring so as to arrest/reduce progress slippage.

18.1 Revision of the Accepted Schedule (RP)

CONTRACTOR will revise the schedule as and when required in order to reflect the changed
scenario of the Works. Not limited to the following. The CONTRACTOR must revise the
schedule in the following instances within 7 working days to show how he intends to recover the
lost time.

a) When delay in completion of any activity or group of activities indicate a

slippage of the Contract completion date or a milestone date by 14 days or 10%
of the remaining duration of the Contract.

b) When programme does not represent the actual execution & progress of the
Works being performed on Site.

c) Where a change in the Work sequence is proposed or has been instituted by the
CONTRACTOR. Any such change should not, in any case, be made without the
OWNER/ENGINEER approval.

d) Where the issue of a variation order or other instructions would significantly

affect the programme and/or progress or Works.

e) In case the CONTRACTOR thinks that the balance Works cannot be finished in
the remaining time & there is a need for the CONTRACTOR to apply for
Extension of Time.

TRASNCO: Company General Use Page 24 of 28

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Planning & Scheduling Technical Specifications

f) In case the overall variance of the project increases by 10%.

Any/All revisions of the time schedule to be followed by the revision of cost loaded schedule.
Resources also must be adjusted to reflect the changed productivity levels for the major Works.
A comparison of old & new productivity levels must also be done with the reasons for the
change.

In case the CONTRACTOR reflects part or all of the requested extension of time in a revised
programme, before the ENGINEER has determined the CONTRACTOR’s proper time extension
entitlement, he shall do so at his own risk & responsibility and any Programme revised under
these circumstances shall only serve as a tool for monitoring the progress of the Works until such
time as the ENGINEER has determined the CONTRACTOR’s time extension entitlement.

The CONTRACTOR shall seek approval from OWNER/ENGINEER for the position of
Planning Manager/Engineer. In case OWNER/ENGINEER asks for a replacement of the
planning personnel, the CONTRACTOR would make sure that the replacement of this position
is done within 2 weeks from the formal notification of the ENGINEER.

18.2 Recovery Schedule

Contractor / consultant will produce a recovery schedule if overall progress falls, or is forecast
fall more than 10% behind the approved contract baseline schedule. The recovery schedule will
address the causes of delay and reflect a realistic and viable sequence that will eliminate the
delay.

19 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
TRANSCO reserves the right to add/delete/modify any or all the scheduling and reporting
requirements if deemed necessary to ensure effective control and monitoring. TRANSCO shall
discuss/explain all such changes/requirement and consultant/contractors shall always implement
the same until contract completion.

Consultant/contractor shall submit to TRANSCO electronic file(s) of the schedules and reports at
regular intervals for review & approval as applicable. Contractor / consultant shall comply with
all of the above and additionally:

• Submit the soft copy source file that was used to produce the PDF hard copy schedule
progress layout(s). This file is to be in Primavera. XER format or MSP .MPP format.
• All work packages are to be fully resource loaded to ensure that the project is logistically
viable and to facilitate the identification of potential resource deficiencies that could
result in schedule slippage

TRASNCO: Company General Use Page 25 of 28

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Planning & Scheduling Technical Specifications

• Resources are to be smoothed and levelled to reduce avoidable peaks and troughs of
resource demand.
• Regularly measure performance against plan
• Take pre-emptive action to avoid unnecessary delays and stay on schedule
• Produce Ad hoc reports as and when requested in addition to the regular status reports
• Produce look ahead early warning reports based on schedule trends and progress to date
• Carry out ‘what if’ analysis as requested in support of potential authorised changes and
any scenario that may impact the schedule
• TRANSCO review / acceptance periods will be clearly identified in the schedule and will
be 20 working days or as otherwise stated.
• Activities that have interfaces to external or other contractors must be clearly identified
• At level 4, no activity is to have duration greater than 20 working days except for
overarching type activities (i.e., project management) or long lead procurement items.
• The planning team of the CONTRACTOR will have to undergo Quality Audit as and
when required by the OWNER/ENGINEER and will be performed as per the agreed
procedure.

• Detailed procedure for updating & revising the baseline schedule, in line with the
detailed Contract specifications, shall be submitted for OWNER / ENGINEER approval.

• Contractors to follow “Contractor’s Guide to Schedule Management Configuration” See

attached appendix A.

TRASNCO: Company General Use Page 26 of 28

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Planning & Scheduling Technical Specifications

20 GLOSSARY
Work Break-Down Structure (WBS)
The work breakdown structure is a deliverable orientated, logical and hierarchical breakdown of
the products and services that will be delivered by the project. The top level represents the entire
project; each successive level breaks the project down into more detail.

Baseline
A complete, un-progressed copy of the approved contract schedule which is used as the
benchmark for performance measurement

Variance Analysis
The technique of determining the difference between planned and actual performance

Schedule Level (1 to 5)
This is the standard naming convention used to establish the typical scope and content of a
schedule at any given level.

Float (free and total)

The amount of time an activity may be delayed from its scheduled early start without delaying
the overall project is referred to as total float. An activity may also have free float which is the
time it may be delayed from its early start without delaying any other activity.

Critical Path
This is the longest, unbroken sequence of activities within in a schedule spanning from the
project start milestone to the project finish milestone. A critical path is typified by having zero
total float and is depicted in a schedule as solid red.

Critical Path Method (CPM)

The technique of determining activity dates by use of logical relationships between activities

Milestone
This is an activity type that has zero duration which is used to represent a significant event or
moment in time. Milestones are represented by a diamond symbol within a schedule.

Activity (Primavera)
This is the basic building block of a schedule and represents a discrete element of work.
Typically, several activities will be grouped and sequenced together within a work package
which will result in the creation of one or more deliverables.

TRASNCO: Company General Use Page 27 of 28

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Planning & Scheduling Technical Specifications

21 APPENDIX A

TRASNCO: Company General Use Page 28 of 28

Introduction to
Performance Measurement System

Contractor's Guide to Schedule Management

Configuration in P6

PMO, PPS & PD

Introduction
- TRANSCO is implementing a performance measurement system using EVM, CPM and
Baseline Compliance Analysis
- The purpose of this process is to improve the progress reporting and control
schedule slippage
- Implementation of PMS requires consultants and contractors to provide baseline and
updated schedules in specific manner
- Performance of consultant and contractors will be measured and verified from
Primavera schedules and Monthly Progress Reporting
- This will be a short workshop session to demonstrate consultants and contractors all
the considerations required to be implemented and configured in P6 prior to
creation of baseline and monthly updates

Agenda of Session
1. General P6 Settings
2. Resource loading Pre-requisites
3. Weightages and BOQ Cost loading requirements
4. Standard WBS Level 1
5. General Activity Codes
6. Specific Activity Codes
7. Project Codes
8. Schedule Update Requirement
9. Things to Avoid in P6
10.Communication Channel & Data Sharing
11.Change Control
12.Recovery/Mitigation Schedule
13.Revised Baseline
14.Upcoming Initiatives

1-General P6 Settings
1.1 Project Window Setting
Following setting to be kept in project window, for baseline and updated schedule

1.2 User Preference Setting

1.3 Earned Value Setting at Admin and WBS level

1.4 Activity Window General Setting

Note: Schedule Must contain PAC and FAC activities and link logically within the network
diagram. PAC and FAC to be kept as “task dependent” activities not as “milestones”

1.5 Project ID Nomenclature

Project IDs to be kept with given nomenclature.
- Baseline: 0-N-xxxxx-BL
- First Updated Schedule: 1-N-xxxxx-UP
- Second Updated Schedule: 2-N-xxxxx-UP
- Nth Updated Schedule: Nth-N- xxxxx -UP
- Recovery/Revised Schedule: 00-N-xxxxx-BL
- Second Revision Baseline: 000-N-xxxxx-BL
A copy of previous version of xer to be made before updating the current months progress
in P6. The process will go on until the project is completed.
2-Resource loading Pre-requisites
Given directions must be followed during resource loading process
- BOQ cost must loaded as material resource not as expense or non-labour resource
- Weightage must be loaded as labour resources not as non-labour resource and should be
without price per unit.
- Manpower and Equipment/Machinery to be loaded as non-labour, without price per unit
- For BOQ cost, budgeted unit should be put as cost of the item given in BOQ and price per
unit to be kept as 1 in P6 (refer to below attachment)
- “N-xxxxx-Cost” will always be the resource ID for material resource and “BOQ Cost” will be
the name of resource
- “N-xxxxx-WT%” will always be the resource ID for Labour resource and “Progress
Weightage” will be the name of resource
- Prefix of Resource IDs for Manpower and Equipment/Machinery will be the project id “N-
xxxxx” followed by any name user prefer to give. E.g., N-18787-Plumber
- Resource code to be created with given nomenclature “N-xxxxx” and assigned to all
resources of the project

Note: price/unit will only be given to material resource where BOQ cost will be loaded.
3-Weightage and BOQ Cost loading requirements
Weightage must be assigned as labour resource with given proportion at WBS level 1 based on the
type of projects. For contracts that are not awarded and baseline is not yet developed.

BOQ cost must be assigned as material resource in P6, and each main head should be summing up to
exact value given in BOQ. Activity codes must be assigned to capture the values. E.g., Foundation
cost in BOQ should match with Foundation cost assigned in P6.
4-Standard WBS Level 2
Level 1 of WBS should be as directed below regardless of type of project. Contractors can further
breakdown as per work requirement and their practices. If WBS level 1 name, is currently differing
from below given mentioned then they must be changed in baseline and the last update

- Milestones
- General
- Design/Engineering
- Procurement
- Construction & Testing
- Project Close-out (PAC & FAC)

5-General Activity Codes

General activity codes will remain same regardless of type of project, these codes must be created in
P6 with the following details, and they must be global. Activity Code should be “level 5 Performance
Weightage” and code values to be followed as given in below attachment.
6-Specific Project Activity Codes
- Specific activity codes will vary project to project.
- In addition to other activity codes, these activity codes must include summary level of BOQ
to validate the cost loading at each main head of the BOQ item.
- These activity codes may need to re-assign or re-create based on TRANSCO’s
comments/direction during baseline development phase or progress review stage
- Prefix of these activity codes should be “N-xxxxx”. E.g. N-19878-Cables

7-Project Codes
Following project codes must be assigned prior to submission of baseline or updated Xer.
- Level 5 Schedule (code value = Level 5 Schedule)
- Level 5 Project ID (code value = N-xxxxx)
- Level 5 BLUP (code value = Baseline, Update)

The code values are shown below in attachments as well. The name and the value of the code
should be similar to the attachment, only code description can vary if end user need to change
8-Schedule Update Requirements
During monthly progress updates in p6, end users need to consider following directions

- % Complete type should be “physical”

- End users to update physical % and remaining duration when updating the progress
- End user to make sure “Estimate to Complete” for cost and labour follows this calculation
ETC=Budget-Earned
- End user to make sure budgeted units/cost in updated schedule should not be different then
budget at completion cost/labour.
- Out of sequence task should not exceed 10% of the total project task
- Any logic change should not be made without change log and reasoning (change log to be
submitted along with Xer file before submitting the monthly progress report)
- Data date must be 20th of the month, unless otherwise advised by TRANSCO
- DCMA-14 points check should be met in each monthly update and baseline schedule. If
threshold limit of DCMA-14 points is different than recommendation of DCMA, then
approval should be taken during baseline development phase and same consistency to be
followed through project lifecycle.
- For example, DCMA recommends FS relation should be minimum 90% of the total, If, due to
nature of work, end user cannot exceed FS relation to more than 75% then approval should
be taken at baseline phase and same percent to be followed in monthly updates.
- Above criteria should be followed for other DCMA checks as well

9-Things to Avoid in P6
Following things to be avoided in P6

- Avoid giving following symbols in activity ids and names !,*@#$%^()’’;:/\|_””[]{}

- Only hyphen is accepted in activity Ids
- Avoid breaking activity name in 2 line by typing “Alt + Enter”
- Only spaces should be given in activity names

10-Communication and Data Sharing

- Contractor representatives are advised to direct all the Project Planning and Control
deliverables, be it Baseline Schedules or Recovery Schedules or Progress Reports with
Consultants while keeping key project stakeholders from TRANSCO in loop.
- Consultants are required to review the submittal and ensure that it is aligned with the
requirements and specifications.
- Any deliverable in “Rejection” or “Returned” status is not required to be forwarded to
TRANSCO. Only “AEN” or “AP” status deliverables will be reviewed by TRANSCO.
- All the Baseline, Recovery/Mitigation/Acceleration and Revised schedules are required to be
submitted with a P6 XER file (Version 19.12 or Later) as per the requirements already
explained along with PDF version.
- Same needs to be followed for Monthly Updated Schedules along with Monthly Progress
Reports.
11-Change Control
- Any change, revision or amendment required to be done in the Baseline Schedule needs to
be discussed with the respective Consultant and TRANSCO PM and Performance team.
- Once agreed, only then Baseline will be revised and Re-baselining will be done.
- Subsequently, all the Progress reporting and Schedule updates will be aligned with the
revised Baseline.
- Contractors to ensure that in case of any change in the monthly updated schedule in terms
of activities, logics, sequencing, etc; a change log is submitted along with the XER to simplify
the review process

12-Recovery/Mitigation Schedule
- If the reported progress variance exceeds beyond the threshold of -10% from the approved
baseline plan and is not recovered for two consecutive reporting cycles, then
Recovery/Mitigation schedule is required to be submitted by Contractor. However,
TRANSCO PM will take final decision for requirement of such schedule.
- Recovery/Mitigation schedule needs to be realistic and will align with the contractual
completion date of the project.
- Once the recovery/mitigation schedule is approved, then the reporting shall be done on this
schedule. Until then, approved Baseline shall be referred.

13-Revised Baseline
- If the reported progress variance and the forecast completion date of the project crosses the
threshold of recovery/mitigation despite efforts materialized by Contractor, then Contractor
will be advised to revise the schedule and provide the realistic expected completion date
considering all the events occurred and future probable events.
- If the float consumption of non-critical part of the schedule is not controlled then TRANSCO
may require detailed reasoning for float consumption and advice for re-baseline.
- Baseline revision will be done after seeking approval from Consultant and TRANSCO as a
result of time extension or management decision.
- While revising the baseline, the actual progress figures till that point will be considered as
planned and remaining effort shall be forecasted.
- Until the approval of Revised baseline, this schedule shall be used as a monitoring schedule
only.
- Once approved, all the reporting shall be done on the revised baseline including s-curves,
histograms, cash flows, etc.
14-Upcoming Initiatives
- For a robust and effective Project Planning & Control, few initiatives are in progress and will
soon be implemented across all TRANSCO Projects.
- Consultants and Contractors shall be notified regarding implementations in due course.
- Few of these initiatives include.

• Mandatory approval of Contractor Planning Engineers through Maximo

• Unified SMPR and Detailed monthly progress reporting template for both Power &
Water projects

• Project key milestones monthly reporting

• Superimposed WBS Level-1, Engineering deliverables, Procurement steps progress

measurement weightage

• A detailed and comprehensive PMS document will be shared

• Frequent joint site visits and progress audits

 STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRIC WORKS

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
( SPECIFICATION )

SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS

TRANSCO STANDARD : S-TR-GEN-SFL (SYSTEM

CHARACTERISTICS) (REV.0-2013)

S-TR-GEN-SFL (System Characteristics) (Rev.0-2013) Page 1 of 5

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
System Characteristics

CONTENTS

1 SYSTEM VOLTAGES ................................................................................................... 3

2 SYSTEM FREQUENCY ................................................................................................ 4
2.1 Normal Condition .............................................................................................................. 4
2.2 Transient Disturbed Condition .......................................................................................... 4
2.3 Disturbed Steady State Condition ..................................................................................... 4
3 SYSTEM FAULT LEVELS ........................................................................................... 4
4 METALLIC CABLE SHEATH FAULT LEVELS...................................................... 5
5 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINE ACCESSORIES FAULT
LEVELS ........................................................................................................................... 5

S-TR-GEN-SFL (System Characteristics) (Rev.0-2013) Page 2 of 5

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
System Characteristics

SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS
The following system characteristics and fault levels shall be taken into account for assessment
of the limit states of the electric network into which equipment under contract shall be operated.
The information given hereunder applies to all works in addition to the General Conditions,
Special Technical Requirements, Electrical and Civil Design Fundamentals, unless specified to
greater detail in sections on specific installations.
The design of all electrical equipment and installations shall allow it to operate without any
restriction under any possible combinations of limit states of the system.

1 SYSTEM VOLTAGES
The system voltages under steady state conditions are confined to the following limits, which
shall be used as planning criteria for network analysis as well as for dimensioning of equipment:

Nominal/Operating Max. Continuous Voltage Min. Continuous Voltage

Voltage (kV) ** (steady state) (steady state)

400 400 kV + 5% 400 kV – 5%

220 220 kV + 5% 220 kV – 5%

132 132 kV + 5% 132 kV – 5%

0.4 0,4 kV + 10% 0.4 kV – 10%

Remarks:

** U for Cables

After outage of any one equipment and without any adjustment or corrective measures, the
system voltage shall be within the limits of +/- 10% of the operating system voltage, and
voltages between +5% and +10% will be restored to the original voltage bandwidth within 15
minutes.

S-TR-GEN-SFL (System Characteristics) (Rev.0-2013) Page 3 of 5

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
System Characteristics

2 SYSTEM FREQUENCY
(Refer to: THE ABU DHABI TRANSMISSION AND DESPATCH COMPANY - The
Electricity Transmission Code, Page 53)

2.1 Normal Condition

Nominal system frequency : 50 Hz
Max. frequency : 50.1 Hz
Min. frequency : 49.9 Hz.

2.2 Transient Disturbed Condition

Max. frequency : 53 Hz
Min. frequency : 47 Hz.

2.3 Disturbed Steady State Condition

Max. frequency : 51.5 Hz
Min. frequency : 48.5 Hz

3 SYSTEM FAULT LEVELS

The rated design switchgear busbar fault levels shall be considered as follows:

Operating Voltage Short-Circuit Current Remarks

(kV)
SF6 AIR Current Time (sec.)
(kA)

400 63 1

220 40 1

132 40* 3

0.4 Distribution Board 50 3

All equipment connected to the switchgear busbars shall be designed to be capable of

withstanding the electromechanical and the thermal effects of short circuit currents up to the
maximum fault levels as specified above.

Remarks:

S-TR-GEN-SFL (System Characteristics) (Rev.0-2013) Page 4 of 5

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
System Characteristics

* Close to Power Stations short-circuit current can reach 50 kA!.

4 METALLIC CABLE SHEATH FAULT LEVELS

The rated cable sheath design fault levels and clearing times shall be considered as follows:
Nominal Voltage Clearing Time Current
(kV) (sec.) (kA)
400 0.5 63
220 0.5 40
132 0.5 40
0.4 1 50

5 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINE ACCESSORIES FAULT LEVELS

The rated OHL accessories design fault levels and clearing times shall be considered as follows:
Nominal Voltage Clearing Time Current
(kV) (sec.) (kA)
400 1 50
220 1 40
132 1 40

S-TR-GEN-SFL (System Characteristics) (Rev.0-2013) Page 5 of 5

 STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

SAFETY AND QUALITY

ANNEX-01-1

DWG TR GEN 01 01 - SIGN – 1 (ARROW-02)

DWG TR GEN 01 02 - SIGN – 2 (ARROW-01)

DWG TR GEN 01 03 - SIGN – 3 (ARROW)

DWG TR GEN 01 04 - SIGN – 4 (LIMIT WORKING AREA)

DWG TR GEN 01 05 - SIGN – 5 (WEAR HELMET)

DWG TR GEN 01 06 - SIGN – 6 (PROTECTIVE FOOTWEAR)

DWG TR GEN 01 07 - SIGN – 7 (NO ADMITTANCE)

DWG TR GEN 01 08 - SIGN – 8 (NO SMOKING)

DWG TR GEN 01 09 - SIGN – 9 (FIRST AID)

DWG TR GEN 01 10 - SIGN – 10 (FIRE ACTION)

DWG TR GEN 01 11 - SIGN – 11 (WEAR EAR PROTECTION)
DWG TR GEN 01 12 - SIGN – 12 (KEEP LOCKED)
DWG TR GEN 01 13 - SIGN – 13 (WEAR GLOVES)
DWG TR GEN 01 14 - SIGN – 14 (NO NAKED FLAMES)
DWG TR GEN 01 15 - SIGN – 15 (DO NOT TOUCH)
DWG TR GEN 01 16 - SIGN – 16 (BATTERY ROOM)
DWG TR GEN 01 17 - SIGN – 17 (CO2 WARNING)
DWG TR GEN 01 18 - SIGN – 18 (CO2)
DWG TR GEN 01 19 - SIGN – 19 (FF DRY POWDER-01)
DWG TR GEN 01 20 - SIGN – 20 (FF DRY POWDER)

S-TR-GEN-SQA - ANNEX-01-1 (Rev.0-2009) [ Page 1 of 1 ]

 STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRIC WORKS

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

( SPECIFICATION )

SAFETY AND QUALITY

TRANSCO STANDARD : S-TR-GEN-SQA (REV.4-2009)

S-TR-GEN-SQA (Safety & Quality) (Rev.4-2009)-TR SR&LAcomodation Page 1 of 23

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Safety and Quality

CONTENTS

1 SAFETY ........................................................................................................................... 4
1.1 Standards ........................................................................................................................... 4
1.2 General .............................................................................................................................. 5
1.3 Safety Measures ................................................................................................................ 5
1.3.1 General .............................................................................................................................. 5
1.4 Touch Protection ............................................................................................................... 7
1.4.1 Touch and Step Voltage .................................................................................................... 7
1.4.2 Earthing System ................................................................................................................ 7
1.4.3 Lightning Protection.......................................................................................................... 7
1.4.4 General Fire Precautions ................................................................................................... 8
1.4.5 Escape Passages ................................................................................................................ 8
1.4.6 Standards, Instructional Pamphlets and Safety Sign Boards............................................. 8
1.4.7 Temperatures ..................................................................................................................... 9
2 QUALITY ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS ............................................................. 9
2.1 General .............................................................................................................................. 9
2.2 Contractors Responsibilities............................................................................................ 10
2.3 Quality Assurance and Quality Control System.............................................................. 10
2.3.1 General ............................................................................................................................ 10
2.3.2 Bidder/Contractor Quality System .................................................................................. 10
2.3.3 Sub-Bidder/Contractor and/or Vendor Quality System................................................... 11
2.3.4 Quality System Processes................................................................................................ 11
2.3.5 Third Party Registration .................................................................................................. 11
2.3.6 Quality Documents to be submitted with Tender............................................................ 11
2.3.7 Quality Documents to be submitted after Tender Award................................................ 12
2.3.8 Quality Management during the CONTRACT ............................................................... 15
2.3.9 QA/QC and Verification Personnel................................................................................. 16
2.4 Quality Auditing.............................................................................................................. 17
2.4.1 General ............................................................................................................................ 17
2.4.2 Conduct of Audit/Audit Plan........................................................................................... 17
2.4.3 Audit Report.................................................................................................................... 18
2.4.4 Audit Schedule ................................................................................................................ 19
2.5 Third Party Inspection Agency (TPIA) ........................................................................... 19
2.6 Inspection Measuring and Test Equipment ..................................................................... 21
2.6.1 General ............................................................................................................................ 21
2.6.2 Calibration ....................................................................................................................... 21
3 HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT (HSE) PLAN ..................................... 22
4 SAFETY SIGNS ............................................................................................................ 22
5 MANUAL FOR GROUP LABOR ACCOMMONDATION..................................... 22
6 TESTING LABORATORIES ...................................................................................... 23
6.1 Accredited Independent Testing Laboratories (IEC 17025, IEC 17020, EN 45004)...... 23

S-TR-GEN-SQA (Safety & Quality) (Rev.4-2009)-TR SR&LAcomodation Page 2 of 23

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Safety and Quality

6.2 Short-Circuit Liaison Members (STL) ............................................................................ 23

S-TR-GEN-SQA (Safety & Quality) (Rev.4-2009)-TR SR&LAcomodation Page 3 of 23

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Safety and Quality

SAFETY AND QUALITY

The following shall form the basis for each Bidder/Bidder/Contractor to optimise his Proposal
with regard to local facts, and to prevailing quality and safety requirements. The general
information given hereunder applies to all plant, equipment and material, unless else specified, to
greater detail in sections on special conditions or specific installations.
Further, general reference shall be made to the Safety Rules of TRANSCO subsidiaries as under:
• TRANSCO HSE PROCEDURE MANUAL
• TRANSCO System Safety Rules Summary – Guidance for Contractors, Competent
Persons and HSE Officers
which shall be followed by all Bidders/Contractors during contract execution, and which will be
made available in its latest version.
TRANSCO System and Safety Rules Requirements shall meet requirements as described in:

01 TR-ANNEX 2 - TRANSCO System Safety Rules Summary

Guidance for Contractors, Competent Persons and
HSE Officers

xxxxxx are described in:

01 TR-ANNEX 3 -

1 SAFETY

1.1 Standards
The following Standards shall be applied:

AGC 1 - Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction

IEC 60446 - Basis and safety principles for man-machine interface, marking and
identification

IEC 60621 - Electrical installations for outdoor sites under heavy conditions
(Describes protective measures intended to ensure the safety of
persons from electrical shock in normal service and in case of fault).

IEC 60364 - Electrical installations in buildings

1
The Associated General Contractors of America

S-TR-GEN-SQA (Safety & Quality) (Rev.4-2009)-TR SR&LAcomodation Page 4 of 23

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Safety and Quality

IEC 60449 - Voltage bands for electrical installations of buildings

IEC 61557 - Electrical safety in low voltage distribution systems up to 1000Vac

and 1500Vdc

VDE 0681 - Operating, testing and safety-guarding devices for work on

electrically energised systems with rated voltages exceeding 1 kV.

NFPA 70A - Employee Electrical Safety

NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code

NFPA 170 - Fire Safety Symbols

DIN 40008 - Signs

DIN 4844 - Safety marking: concepts, principles and safety signs

BS 5345 - Earthing for safe working

BS 5655 - Safety rules for the construction and installation of electric lifts

1.2 General
All installations under the contract shall be designed and constructed in a way that no hazards
can happen to the operators, the public or the installation itself, under normal operating
conditions or any fault in the transmission / distribution systems.

1.3 Safety Measures

1.3.1 General
It is a prime objective of TRANSCO to obtain electrical installations that offer a maximum
degree of safety for the operators and bystanders under all normal operating and fault conditions.
In particular, it must be impossible to unwillingly, i.e. without the use of tools, touch live parts of
the Switchgear, or perform operations that lead to arcing faults.
i. For mechanical protection of all external parts, a minimum of Protection Class IP 4X for
Switchgear is required, i.e. totally enclosed and inaccessible for parts of particles of a size
larger than 1 mm in diameter during normal operation, but no protection against water. All
high voltage carrying parts must have a minimum class of protection of IP 65, i.e. totally
protected against contact with live parts, and dust-and water.
ii. Should internal arcing occur, the release of pressure into the atmosphere, (if any), shall be
in such a way that personnel standing at a position for operating the Switchgear, will not

S-TR-GEN-SQA (Safety & Quality) (Rev.4-2009)-TR SR&LAcomodation Page 5 of 23

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Safety and Quality

get injured. Furthermore, no part of the enclosure or any loose parts may fly off the
Switchgear in such an event, and no holes shall be created in the enclosure during arcing.
All earthing connections must remain operational during and after an arc fault.
iii. All interlocks, which prevent potentially dangerous mal-operations must be constructed
such that they cannot be bypassed easily, i.e. the operator must use tools, keys or force to
bypass them.
iv. The earthing switch must be able to be padlocked in the "EARTHED" position.
v. With the earthing switch in the "ON" position, it must be possible to safely exchange the
breaker element while the remaining Switchgear is live.
vi. Energy storing mechanism of breakers must be totally enclosed with the Switchgear in the
operating condition.
vii. The name or numbering of a Switchgear bay, which has been determined during the
design stage shall be permanent unchangeable marking.
viii. Switchgear bay markings shall be fixed in such a way that they are clearly readable from
each operation point.
ix. Switch position indicators shall be fixed in such a way that they are clearly readable from
each operation point.
x. Busbar markings shall be fixed in such a way that they are clearly readable from each
location of the busbar area.
xi. A provision to separate the earthing system for testing shall be considered in the design.
xii. The fixing points of mobile earthing and short-circuiting devices (IEC 61138) at
Switchgear bays, shall be arranged in such a way, that termination can be carried out
without danger to life. (For fenced Switchgear bays it should be possible to earth the
equipment before the Switchgear bay fence gate can be opened).
xiii. According to the substation size, properly dimensioned grounding and short-circuiting
devices to IEC 61138, shall be available in sufficient numbers. Additionally a voltage
tester shall be made available in accordance with IEC 61010, IEC 61243. The equipment
shall be kept neatly arranged at an easily accessible location.
xiv. A single-line diagram shall be fixed at a central location in the Switchgear hall and in the
control room.
xv. Lighting fixtures shall be designed in such a way that maintenance of the same can be
carried out without danger to life.
xvi. For security reasons, in cases of power supply outages, an emergency lighting with
appropriate power supply system is provided. The emergency lighting and power supply
system shall guarantee emergency lighting and power supply and safety lighting to mark
or illuminate the rescue ways. If the normal lighting system is restored, the emergency
lighting system shall automatically be switched off to the stand-by position.

S-TR-GEN-SQA (Safety & Quality) (Rev.4-2009)-TR SR&LAcomodation Page 6 of 23

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Safety and Quality

xvii. Portable emergency lighting with automatic switching ON possibilities, if the charging
voltage fails, has to be arranged additionally at suitable locations.
xviii. Heaters in panels, etc, shall have low surface temperatures.
xix. Portable CO2 and Dry Chemical Type (typically 2 litre) fire extinguisher of suitable sizes
shall be placed and fixed in the Switchgear hall, building entrances, etc. away from the
place, where fire is expected. These extinguishers shall be provided at selected places in
sufficient numbers. Furthermore containers with fire-extinguishing blankets as well as
first-aid devices shall be considered.
xx. Electric shock treatment chart duly framed in a conspicuous position in the Switchgear
room.
xxi. Danger notice in English/Arabic language shall be fixed on each door of the Switchgear
hall.

1.4 Touch Protection

Protection against direct contact with live parts is mandatory for all electrical installations.
Minimum degrees of enclosure protection are specified in the relevant sections of respective
equipment specifications. Protection against indirect touch is covered in the Section for
Electrical Design Fundamentals.

1.4.1 Touch and Step Voltage

Impermissible touch and step voltages shall be avoided at any place within the installations.
These shall be determined by calculation and further proven by measurement. Calculations shall
be approved by TRANSCO prior to execution of the relevant part of the civil works.

1.4.2 Earthing System

The design principles of the earthing systems are as follows:
The earthing systems of Substation and distribution station shall satisfy IEEE Std. 80-2000
Standard and shall be designed for the maximum design system fault current and time duration
of any voltage level in the installation.
In order to minimize the effect of seasonal variations of earth resistance and corrosion, all
grounding shall be designed for the worst conditions.

1.4.3 Lightning Protection

For lightning protection the following general features shall be provided and installed in
accordance with IEC 61024-1, 61312-3, 61663-1 and BS 6651 or equivalent standards.
Termination points shall be installed on the surface of all building roofs. No part of the roofs
shall be far away from the nearest horizontal protective conductor by more than 10 m.

S-TR-GEN-SQA (Safety & Quality) (Rev.4-2009)-TR SR&LAcomodation Page 7 of 23

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Safety and Quality

Salient points of structures shall be incorporated. All metallic projections such as air
conditioning cabins, vent pipes, railings, gutters, steel constructions, antenna, etc. on or above
the surfaces of the roofs shall be connected to the above mentioned network, or shall be used as
part of the protective system.

1.4.4 General Fire Precautions

The following points shall be considered especially for the whole building of indoor Switchgear.
i. Each building shall be sub-divided into various fire zones. The fire barrier (membrane)
either in vertical or horizontal, such as a wall, door or floor assembly shall be designed
and constructed with a fire resistance rating of minimum 1 hr and 2 hrs for basements to
limit the spread of fire and also to restrict the movement of smoke.
ii. Emergency exit doors shall not be lockable. If doors are lockable, panic locks shall be
foreseen.
iii. Escaping ways (rescue ways and emergency exits) shall be clearly marked to facilitate
their recognition.
iv. Arc-preventing measures for auxiliary cables and high-voltage cables (screen/metallic
sheath grounding/bonding) (refer to IEC 60621-3) shall be applied.

1.4.5 Escape Passages

The minimum free height (clearance) of escape routes shall not be less than 2.2 m after
completion of all installations.
Passages and ways leading to exits and emergency exits shall be clearly marked by suitable
symbols and signs both in English and Arabic. Lighted emergency exit signs shall meet NFPA
requirements and shall be of the maintained (always ON with battery back-up) type. Distances
and locations should be foreseen as per Civil Defence requirements. All building and room doors
for electrical installations must be equipped with escape facilities.

1.4.6 Standards, Instructional Pamphlets and Safety Sign Boards

At suitable locations in manned electrical installations areas, the following shall be displayed or
fixed as signboards (size 58 cm x 40 cm):
• Regulations ‘Operation of power installations
• Regulations ‘Measures to be taken in the case of fire in and near electrical installations
• In remote-controlled Switchgear a label shall be fixed at the corresponding location with
the following wording: ‘At this location switching operations is allowed only with prior
instruction or agreement by TRANSCO”

S-TR-GEN-SQA (Safety & Quality) (Rev.4-2009)-TR SR&LAcomodation Page 8 of 23

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Safety and Quality

• The instructional pamphlet: First aid for accidents due to electrical appliance’. Identical
notices shall be displayed or fixed at the Switchgear. On the notice, reference indications to
doctors and hospitals shall be shown
• Other signboards (samples attached in 01 TR-ANNEX 1) shall be fixed at suitable
locations.

1.4.7 Temperatures
In all installations, the surface temperatures of any accessible part, which is expected to be
touched in normal operation, must not exceed 70°C.
The design has to be based on the allowable temperature rise as specified in the relevant
standards taking into account the prevailing maximum ambient temperatures as stated in the
General Design Fundamentals.

2 QUALITY ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS

2.1 General
All Bidders/Contractors/Sub-contractors and manufacturers of equipment supplied under this
specification shall at the time of bidding and during the design/entire execution period of the
contract, be ISO 9001 or ISO 9000:2000 and ISO 14001 certified.
Furthermore, the Bidder/Bidder/Contractor shall exercise during the project all his internal
quality assurance procedures for which he has received the corresponding certification.
For all site works, the Bidder/Bidder/Contractor must establish in addition to his internal quality
assurance plan, a site quality assurance plan for approval by TRANSCO. The site quality
assurance plan shall cover the subjects of material receipt and testing, responsibilities during
construction and installation, supervision, countermeasures against faulty execution, testing after
installation as well as documentation of all the above.
Quality assurance plans shall meet requirements as specified in Standard Technical
Specification, TR-ANNEX 2:

HSE Samples - Samples

All documents of any nature shall be clearly identified by reference or drawing numbers, and
revisions marked accordingly. The Bidder/Bidder/Contractor shall keep and regularly update a
record of all drawings submitted for approval, indicating the present status.
Further details concerning quality assurance are given in the general and special conditions of
contract, and qualitative technical requirements are stated in the sections on respective
equipment.

S-TR-GEN-SQA (Safety & Quality) (Rev.4-2009)-TR SR&LAcomodation Page 9 of 23

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Safety and Quality

2.2 Contractors Responsibilities

All plant, materials and equipment to be supplied and all WORK(S) to be performed under
the CONTRACT shall be manufactured and executed in the manner set out in the
CONTRACT documents, and to the satisfaction of TRANSCO.

The acceptance, approval or rejection, of WORKS nor the absence of these, shall not be
construed as a liability on the part of TRANSCO. In any event that the WORKS in question
are found to be defective later on, the sole responsibility lies with the Bidder/Contractor to
remove, replace or repair the defect in accordance with TRANSCO instruction. The
inspection and testing performed by TRANSCO shall not release the Bidder/Contractor from
his obligation under the CONTRACT, nor provide grounds for any extension of
CONTRACT time.

The WORK(S) shall be executed by qualified, experienced and competent personnel who
shall undertake their work in a safe and proficient manner.

All materials, equipment and plant components shall be suitable for arid conditions and
tropicalised to resist deterioration due to the severe prevailing local conditions including
high day time temperatures, high humidity and salt laden winds. Such protection shall
include, but not be restricted to, extra coating of protective materials, robust and protective
packaging, etc.

2.3 Quality Assurance and Quality Control System

2.3.1 General
Bidder/Contractor shall be responsible to meet TRANSCO’s minimum requirements for the
Quality Assurance and Quality Control System. The Bidder/Contractor including his sub-
Bidder/Contractor and/or vendor shall ensure strict adherence to the following requirements in
the performance of WORK(S) under the CONTRACT.

2.3.2 Bidder/Contractor Quality System

The Bidder/Bidder/Contractor shall implement a Quality System appropriate to the project that
complies with ISO 9001:2000 or any other similar internationally recognized Quality
Management System Standard or Specification that is acceptable to TRANSCO.

The Bidder/Contractor shall remain ultimately responsible for the Quality of all material, plant
and equipment to be supplied, and all WORK(S) to be performed under the CONTRACT
including Sub-Bidder/Contractor’s and/or vendor’s.

S-TR-GEN-SQA (Safety & Quality) (Rev.4-2009)-TR SR&LAcomodation Page 10 of 23

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Safety and Quality

2.3.3 Sub-Bidder/Contractor and/or Vendor Quality System

If any part of the CONTRACT is Sub-Contracted, the Sub-Bidder/Contractor and/or vendor shall
also implement a Quality System that complies with ISO 9001:2000 or any other similar
internationally recognized Quality Management System Standard or Specification that is
acceptable to TRANSCO, as appropriate for the sub-contracted work.

2.3.4 Quality System Processes

The Processes to be considered shall include all work activities from Tendering and Contract
Award to Completion of the CONTRACT. Activities such as; Contract Management, design
and engineering, material procurement, planning and scheduling, construction, progress
measurement, reporting, ‘As Built’ documentation, etc, shall all have properly documented
Procedures as necessary and as advised by TRANSCO/Engineer.

2.3.5 Third Party Registration

It is preferred that Bidder/Contractor and/or his sub-Bidder/Contractor shall have Third Party
Registration of their Quality System. The registration shall be from any Accredited Certifying
Body (for example BSI, BV, DNV, Lloyds, ABC, TUV, Vincotte etc.) who are themselves
accredited by a National Accreditation Authority to assess Quality System.

Where a Bidder/Contractor and /or his sub-Bidder/Contractor do not have Third Party
Registration, they shall demonstrate that they have a Quality System that complies with ISO
9001:2000.

2.3.6 Quality Documents to be submitted with Tender

2.3.6.1 General
The required QA/QC Documents submitted along with the tender shall be used by TRANSCO to
evaluate the Bidder/Contractor’s capability to deliver a quality product or services that will
satisfy the CONTRACT requirements.

2.3.6.2 Minimum Documents with the Tender

As a minimum the following shall be submitted along with the Tender:

a) If the Bidder/Contractor has Third Party Registration, a valid copy of ISO 9001: 2000
Certificate.

b) If the Bidder/Contractor is not certified to ISO 9001:2000, the Bidder/Contractor shall

submit evidence that an acceptable internationally recognized Quality Management System

S-TR-GEN-SQA (Safety & Quality) (Rev.4-2009)-TR SR&LAcomodation Page 11 of 23

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Safety and Quality

Standard or Specification coherent with the CONTRACT scope of work is in operation.

This requirement can be fulfilled by submitting any of the following:

™ Copies of System and Compliance Audit report with satisfactory result prepared by
TRANSCO/Engineer from another similar contract or project.

™ A copy of Baseline Systems Audit Report on the Bidder/Contractor’s Quality System by

an accredited Certifying Body who carried out an Audit against ISO 9001:2000.

2.3.7 Quality Documents to be submitted after Tender Award

2.3.7.1 General
In the event of a successful tender or bid by the Bidder/Contractor, a project specific Project
Quality Plan (PQP) shall be prepared (refer to section 7.3) and submitted as per schedule set out
in CONTRACT documents, for TRANSCO/Engineer’s review and comments. The PQP shall
then be submitted to Head of QA/QC Department (or his nominated responsible person) in
TRANSCO for approval.

The approved PQP document shall form part of the CONTRACT. The PQP shall be the basis for
the whole Project Quality Management System implementation and shall be applied throughout
the full cycle of the CONTRACT.

All documents specified or listed in the PQP shall be collated or developed and submitted for
acceptance. Approval process shall follow the same approach as the PQP i.e. review by Engineer
and approval by TRANSCO. The same manner shall apply to sub-Bidder/Contractor’s quality
and work documents.

All documents, procedures, method statements, inspection and test plans, quality control plans,
etc that are listed in the approved Project Quality plan shall be prepared by the Bidder/Contractor
and approved by TRANSCO/Engineer. These documents are considered live documents and if
required, shall be subject to changes, revisions, amendments during the progress or cycle of
WORKS to meet requirements.

Additional documents, procedures, method statements, inspection and test plans, quality control
plans, etc that are not listed in the approved Project Quality plan but found to be required later on
during the execution of works shall be prepared by the Bidder/Contractor as advised by
TRANSCO/Engineer. The control and approval of which shall be in accordance with the normal
procedure.

Both Bidder/Contractor’s, Sub-Bidder/Contractor and/or Vendors quality document shall be

controlled and should follow a similar format as recommended in Appendix A – Project Quality
Plan Guidelines.

S-TR-GEN-SQA (Safety & Quality) (Rev.4-2009)-TR SR&LAcomodation Page 12 of 23

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Safety and Quality

The Bidder/Contractor shall be responsible for any discrepancies, errors or omissions in the
documents supplied by him, whether such documents have been approved or not.

2.3.7.2 Approval of Documents

The approval or rejection of Quality Documents (nor the absence of approval or rejection), shall
not be construed as a liability in the part of TRANSCO. No WORKS shall commence prior to
approval of these documents specified or listed therein unless explicitly permitted by TRANSCO
in writing. Both Bidder/Contractor’S and sub-Bidder/Contractor quality documents shall be
controlled and shall follow a format acceptable to TRANSCO.

The approval of revised document shall be as per original procedure and schedule as specified in
the CONTRACT or as advised TRANSCO/Engineer. The Bidder/Contractor shall take necessary
action to change as well all related document/s that are affected by the change / revision to any
document e.g. Project Quality Plan.

2.3.7.3 Project Quality Plan (PQP)

The Project Quality Plan shall consist of:

a) Index

b) Revision status, together with the control mechanism and a Distribution List. Distribution
shall be as per the CONTRACT but shall include the Head of QA/QC Department,
TRANSCO Projects Directorate.

c) Details of Bidder/Contractor’s procedures for preparing, reviewing, revising and re-

issuing the Projects Quality Plan during the CONTRACT shall be stated in the PQP.

d) Details on how the Bidder/Contractor’s corporate Quality System shall be applied and
implemented in the project, if applicable.

e) Detailed Scope of Work of the CONTRACT, together with a detailed description of all
Quality related aspects as applicable.

f) Identification of all main work activities and sub-activities to be controlled by the PQP.

g) Identification of activities that will be carried out by the sub-Bidder/Contractor/s.

Include details of sub-contractors Quality System and how it will be monitored and
controlled by the Bidder/Contractor.

h) Organizational structure specific to the CONTRACT identifying functions and job title of
all management and staff down to foreman level. Organizational structure shall establish
a detailed schedule of responsibilities for all key functions that will be utilized in the

S-TR-GEN-SQA (Safety & Quality) (Rev.4-2009)-TR SR&LAcomodation Page 13 of 23

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Safety and Quality

project as shown in the organizational chart including responsibilities of the Management

Representative.

i) Lists of applicable documents, Work Instructions, Inspection and Test Plans, and/or
Method Statements, etc. The lists shall be considered as Controlled Documents and shall
be subject to controls set in the Bidder/Contractor Document Control Procedure (see
section 7.0 Documentation).

As a minimum this shall include :

1. List of Corporate Quality Systems Manuals, Procedures, Work Procedures, Work

Instructions, Method Statements, etc., with current revision status and issue date that
shall be used on the CONTRACT without revision.

2. List of Corporate Quality Systems Procedures, Work Procedures, Work Instructions,

Method Statements, etc., with current revision status and issue date that require revision
before they can meet the CONTRACT requirements, if any. Denote who is responsible
for revising the documentation and the date when it will be completed.

3. List of CONTRACT specific Work Procedures, Work Instructions, Inspection and Test
Plans, Method Statements, etc., by Bidder/Contractor required to be developed for the
CONTRACT. Denote who is responsible for revising the documentation and the date
when it will be completed.

4. List of CONTRACT specific Work Procedures, Work Instructions, and Method

Statements etc., by Sub-Bidder/Contractor for assigned work activities, including those to
be developed or revised.

5. List of forms and formats with unique numbers that will be used in Bidder/Contractor’s
Quality Management System.

6. List of applicable Quality Control Plans (QCP) and / or Inspection and Test Plans (ITP)
to be used in the project. These shall include :

a. List of Corporate Quality Control Plans or Inspection and test Plans with current
revision status and issue date that shall be used on the CONTRACT without revision,
if any.

b. List of Corporate Quality Control Plans or Inspection and Test Plans with current
revision status and issue date that require revision before they meet the CONTRACT
requirements. Denote who is responsible for revising the documentation and the date
when it shall be completed, if any.

S-TR-GEN-SQA (Safety & Quality) (Rev.4-2009)-TR SR&LAcomodation Page 14 of 23

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Safety and Quality

c. List of CONTRACT specific Quality Control Plans or Inspection and Test Plans
required to be developed for the CONTRACT. Denote who is responsible for revising
the documentation and the date when is shall be completed.

d. List of CONTRACT specific Quality Control Plans or Inspection and Test Plans by
Sub-Bidder/Contractor for assigned work activities, including those to be developed
or revised.

j) Audit Execution Plan which shall include :

1. Audit plan and procedure on conduct of audits.

2. Internal Audit Schedule.
3. External Audit Schedule of Sub-Bidder/Contractor.

(Refer to section 9.0 Quality Assurance Auditing for details of Audit Execution Plan)

k) Where the services of a Third Party Certification is required by the CONTRACT, this
section of the Project Quality Plan shall :

1. Include details of the Third Party Certification Authority

2. Include details of the services that they will provide.

2.3.7.4 Presentations
The Bidder/Contractor shall make a presentation for clarifications of Document submissions or
proposals if requested by TRANSCO/Engineer. All necessary arrangements to ensure proper and
successful presentation shall be prepared by the Bidder/Contractor prior to the event.
Presentation activities shall form part of the scope of work of the Bidder/Contractor including its
sub-contractors and/or vendors.

2.3.8 Quality Management during the CONTRACT

2.3.8.1 General
General and specific quality matters shall be reported by the Bidder/Bidder/Contractor in the
CONTRACT Weekly/Fortnightly/Monthly reports. Example of these quality matters are
summary of test and inspection carried out on site, analysis of Non-conformance and corrective
actions, areas of concern or weakness identified in the Quality System, and others that will be
specified and requested by TRANSCO/Engineer.

S-TR-GEN-SQA (Safety & Quality) (Rev.4-2009)-TR SR&LAcomodation Page 15 of 23

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Safety and Quality

2.3.8.2 Management Representative

The Bidder/Contractor shall nominate a Senior Manager (Management Representative) who
shall have defined responsibility for the implemented Quality System, in accordance with Clause
5.5.2 of ISO 9001:2000 and as laid out in the PQP.

2.3.9 QA/QC and Verification Personnel

2.3.9.1 General
The Bidder/Contractor shall assign sufficient Quality Assurance / Inspection (Quality Control)
and Verification Personnel to the CONTRACT to ensure that the Quality Management System,
Quality Assurance and Quality Control are effectively established, implemented and maintained
throughout the CONTRACT.

Critical requirements that must be followed to ensure compliance to our System Safety Rules.
These include the following;
• The Authorised Person issuing a Safety Document to a Contractor’s Competent Person
must ensure that their competency is valid and permits them to undertake the work.
Check items such as, the Safety Document they can receive, which equipment they can
work on or which type of works they can do, the location they are limited to, the Method
Statement, etc.
• The Authorised Person must clearly identify some important general precautions that the
Competent Person must apply while executing the work.
• The Authorised Person must ensure that the same Competent Person is not receiving
more than one Safety Document. He/She has to make certain that the previous open
Safety Document, if any, has been cleared by the Competent Person before issue of the
new Safety Document. It is the responsibility of the Competent Person to clear the
existing open Safety Document prior to receiving another one. He must ensure that
he/she is not in possession of two Safety Documents simultaneously.
• Safety Documents are not transferable under any circumstance. Competent Persons must
fulfil their responsibility once they have received a Safety Document in their name. If the
Competent Person has to change for some reasons, then there must be a new Safety
Document for the intended works and then only after the previous one is cancelled.
• Competent Persons must only carry out works that is stated in the Safety Document.
They must read the Safety Document, understand it and clarify any aspect they are unsure
about with the Authorised Persons.

S-TR-GEN-SQA (Safety & Quality) (Rev.4-2009)-TR SR&LAcomodation Page 16 of 23

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Safety and Quality

• The Competent Person must be on site when ANY works under the Safety Document are
being carried out. If for any reason they must leave the site, keeping the Safety Document
open, they must inform the issuing Authorised Person.
• The Authorised Person is responsible for demarcation of the Safe working area.

2.3.9.2 QA Engineer
The Bidder/Contractor shall assign a QA Engineer at each construction site. There shall be
sufficient inspection personnel to cover all disciplines work and activities, all Sub-
Bidder/Contractor’s work and off site facilities. They shall be independent of the work being
performed and shall have no other duties or responsibilities, unless prior approval in writing is
granted by TRANSCO.

QA Engineers shall report to the QA Manager, corporate or projects and QC Inspector to the QA
Engineer. The duties and responsibilities of QA Engineers and QC Inspectors shall be
established and documented in the PQP.

2.3.9.3 Production Staff as QC

Where elements of Quality Control are part of the responsibilities of production staff and
workers, the Bidder/Contractor shall identify independent verification requirements and
document them in the PQP. Adequate resources shall be provided to these staff and workers and
their responsibilities shall be adequately documented in their job descriptions.

2.4 Quality Auditing

2.4.1 General
The Bidder/Contractor shall carry out Internal Audits of his Quality System and External Audits
of his Sub-Bidder/Contractor/s and/or vendors on a regular basis throughout the Project period.
Audits shall be carried out in accordance with a documented written Procedure duly reviewed
and approved by TRANSCO/Engineer.

2.4.2 Conduct of Audit/Audit Plan

An Audit Execution Plan shall be prepared in relation with the written Audit Procedure. The plan
shall be executed using the guidance of ISO 19011 series.

Qualifications of Bidder/Contractor’s External and Internal Auditors shall be established in the

Audit Plan and shall be acceptable to TRANSCO/Engineer. Auditors shall either be a

S-TR-GEN-SQA (Safety & Quality) (Rev.4-2009)-TR SR&LAcomodation Page 17 of 23

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Safety and Quality

™ certified Quality Management System Lead Auditor who has passed a Lead Auditor
course registered with IRCA

™ certified Internal Auditor who has passed an Internal Auditor course registered with
IRCA

The Audit Execution plan shall specify the procedure in the conduct of the audit and shall
include as a minimum:

1. Audit Objective

2. Scope of Audit

3. Audit Protocol identifying:

™ Opening Meeting Agenda

™ Type and Number of Documents to be reviewed

™ Audit Timetable

™ Auditing Method

™ Procedure in Raising of NCR

™ Type of NCR to be raised (Critical, Major, Minor, Observation)

™ End of Day Meeting (EOD)

™ Audit Closing Meeting

2.4.3 Audit Report

An audit report shall be prepared by the Bidder/Contractor to document the audit activities and
the result of the audit. The report as a minimum shall contain:

a) Front Cover with details of the Audit.

b) Narrative statements of findings and observations.
c) List Corrective Action Request (CAR) if any, stating clearly details of non-conformance
found, preventive actions to be taken to prevent recurrence and date of Completion of
Corrective action.
d) Log of CAR’s showing Follow up and Close out status.
e) Audit checklist used in the conduct of audit.

S-TR-GEN-SQA (Safety & Quality) (Rev.4-2009)-TR SR&LAcomodation Page 18 of 23

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Safety and Quality

2.4.4 Audit Schedule

An Audit Schedule shall be prepared and included in the Audit Plan. The Schedule shall extend
throughout the periods from project pre-mobilization till de-mobilization. Specific audit dates
shall be informed to TRANSCO/Engineer at least one week in advance.

TRANSCO/Engineer shall be included on the distribution list for all Bidder/Contractor’s Internal
and External Audit Notifications and shall be invited to participate in audits.
TRANSCO/Engineer reserves the right to choose whether to attend or not to attend the audit. If
TRANSCO/Engineer decides to attend the audit, it also reserves the right to join as an observer
or a member of the audit team.

2.5 Third Party Inspection Agency (TPIA)

TRANSCO may utilise at its own cost the services of a Third Party Inspection Agency (TPIA)
for any inspection and testing requirement of materials at Bidder/Contractor'S, SUB-
Bidder/Contractor'S, VENDOR'S or any manufacturer's premises/ factory/laboratory.

Materials/equipments subject to inspection by Third Party Inspection Agency shall be listed by

TRANSCO on the attached data sheet.

The Third Party Inspection Agency (TPIA) appointed by TRANSCO shall be entitled at all
reasonable times during manufacture to inspect, examine and witness tests on the
Bidder/Contractor's, SUB-Bidder/Contractor's or VENDOR's or any manufacturer's premises, of
the materials and workmanship of all plant to be supplied under the CONTRACT. If part of the
said plant is being manufactured on some other premises, then the Bidder/Contractor shall obtain
for TPIA or his representatives permission to inspect, examine and test as if the said plant is
being manufactured at the Bidder/Contractor's premises. Such inspection, examination or testing
shall be at no extra cost to TRANSCO and shall not release the Bidder/Contractor from any
obligations under the CONTRACT.

In case the inspection/test carried out by TRANSCO/Engineer/TPIA reveal a non-conformity/s

to the CONTRACT Specification and/or drawings or any deficiency in the material or
equipment, this shall be notified to the Bidder/Contractor. The Bidder/Contractor shall take
immediate action to rectify the same without delay or cost to TRANSCO.

Subsequent to material approval, placing of the order and commencement of production, the
Third Party Inspection Agency shall carry out inspection of the ordered materials/ equipment to
ensure conformity to the approved Specifications. The scope of the inspection shall include for
but not be limited to the following:

- Examine the manufacturer’s production procedures, compliance and compatibility with the
relevant approved Standards, technical specifications and technical schedules.

S-TR-GEN-SQA (Safety & Quality) (Rev.4-2009)-TR SR&LAcomodation Page 19 of 23

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Safety and Quality

- Inspect and ensure that production, Quality Control and Quality Assurance Procedures are
adopted and implemented correctly in accordance with the latest approved International
Standards in this field (ISO 9001, 9002 and 9003).

- Witness tests conducted by the manufacturer on representative samples to adequately reflect

a reasonable level of coverage of the whole order.

- Inspect and check quality of production, quantities, dimensions, dimensional tolerances,

thickness and type of corrosion protection system applied in the ordered
materials/equipment, visual inspection of meters to ensure absence of any defects,
satisfactory workmanship and finish, ensure that meters production is in accordance with the
approved Standards and Technical Specifications.

- Supervise Quality Control and Assurance checks/tests during manufacturing process.

- Review and approve production procedures and carry out approval tests as required in
accordance with the appropriate Standards.

- Check and verify test results of items related to the order.

- Review of all Mill Certificates and Material Test Reports.

- Witness of all mechanical acceptance tests carried out at the laboratories to ensure that the
samples conform to the requirements of the approved Specifications and applicable
Standards defined therein.

- Witness of routine tests, to be in accordance with approved Specifications.

- Continual review of the manufacturer's data book to ensure that it is being kept up to date and
that all relevant documentation is contained therein.

- Verify that all ordered materials have been produced by and originate from the manufacturers
premises.

- Inspect and approve marking, handling and packing of the order.

- Issue recommendation to release for shipment and endorse all shipping documents.

At the end of the complete inspection, the manufacturer Inspector shall issue a complete report
on the ordered materials/equipment confirming that the items are in accordance with the
approved Technical Specifications and Technical Schedules. The report shall also include all test
data and results performed at the manufacturer’s premises, shipment details and expected arrival
of the consignment at Abu Dhabi.

S-TR-GEN-SQA (Safety & Quality) (Rev.4-2009)-TR SR&LAcomodation Page 20 of 23

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Safety and Quality

In the case of non-conformity, a non-conformity report shall be issued to the Bidder/Contractor

and a faxed copy sent to TRANSCO/ENGINEER. These reports shall include but not be limited
to the following:

i) Non-conformity description.

ii) Recommendations for immediate action.

iii) Recommendations for further inspections.

The cost of any re-inspections due to the non-conformity will be borne by the Bidder/Contractor.

As and when any plant or equipment shall have passed the tests referred to in this Specification
which involves Third Party Inspection Agency, a certificate to that effect shall be furnished in
writing by the manufacturer/Bidder/Contractor/SUB-Bidder/Contractor/ VENDOR and TPIA.

2.6 Inspection Measuring and Test Equipment

2.6.1 General
The Bidder/Contractor shall supply all inspection, measuring and test equipment required for
inspection and testing. All equipment shall be robust and suitable for the working environment.
The equipment shall be calibrated at the start of the CONTRACT and re-calibrated as required
by the Manufacturer, CONTRACT specification(s), international codes and standard or, job
conditions.

The Bidder/Contractor shall provide, control, calibrate and maintain the inspection, measuring
and test equipment suitable to demonstrate the conformance of materials with the specified
requirements. Equipment shall be used in a manner which ensures that the measurement
uncertainty is known and consistent with the required measurement capability.

The Bidder/Contractor shall establish and maintain documented procedures to control calibrate
and maintain inspection, measuring and test equipment in accordance with the relevant clause of
ISO 9001:2000

2.6.2 Calibration
All calibration shall be carried out against certified equipment having known valid relationship
to internationally or nationally recognized standards. Records shall be available for review by
TRANSCO/Engineer and shall be kept and maintained by Bidder/Contractor at construction
site/work location. Instruction on the use and maintenance of the equipment shall be available at
the Work Site.

S-TR-GEN-SQA (Safety & Quality) (Rev.4-2009)-TR SR&LAcomodation Page 21 of 23

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Safety and Quality

Bidder/Contractor shall ensure proper and adequate equipment handling, preservation and
storage to maintain its accuracy and fitness.

Calibration interval of all inspection, measuring and testing equipment shall be specified by the
Bidder/Contractor in a documented procedure that is acceptable to TRANSCO/Engineer.

3 HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT (HSE) PLAN

HSE Plan shall meet requirements as described in:

01 TR-ANNEX 3 -

4 SAFETY SIGNS
The application of Safety Signs (enclosed in 01 TR-ANNEX 1) shall be as follows:

Sign Number Application Remarks

SIGNs-1 to 3 Any place at substations and/or switchyards,
like doors, fences, electrical apparatus, etc.
SIGN-4 At fenced areas where maintenance or other
works are in progress
SIGNs-5 to 10 At main entrance of substation and/or
switchyard areas or substation buildings.
SIGN-11 At each Diesel Generator or Fire Pump room
door
SIGN-12 At locations where pad locks have been used
SIGNs-13 and 14 In Battery rooms
SIGN-15 At exposed live parts in substation or
switchyard areas
SIGN-16 At Battery room door
SIGNs-17 and 18 At each access door to CO2 protected areas
SIGN-19 At CO2 portable equipment
SIGN-20 At Dry Powder portable equipment

5 MANUAL FOR GROUP LABOR ACCOMMONDATION

Group Labour Accommodation shall meet requirements as described in:

S-TR-GEN-SQA (Safety & Quality) (Rev.4-2009)-TR SR&LAcomodation Page 22 of 23

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Safety and Quality

01 TR-ANNEX 2 - Cabinet Decision N. (13) of 2009-09-09

Approving the General Standards Manual for Group
Labour Accommodation and Related Services

6 TESTING LABORATORIES

6.1 Accredited Independent Testing Laboratories (IEC 17025, IEC 17020, EN 45004)
The below listed Accredited Independent Testing Laboratories are accepted by TRANSCO:

Name Country
KEMA The Netherlands
EdF France
IPH Germany
PEHLA Germany
FGH Germany
CESI Italy
ASTA U.K.

6.2 Short-Circuit Liaison Members (STL)

The below listed Short-Circuit Liaison Members are accepted by TRANSCO:

Name Country
KEMA The Netherlands
PEHLA Germany
CESI Italy
ASTA U.K.

S-TR-GEN-SQA (Safety & Quality) (Rev.4-2009)-TR SR&LAcomodation Page 23 of 23

 STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRIC WORKS

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
( SPECIFICATION )

SPECIAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

TRANSCO STANDARD : S-TR-GEN-STC (SPEC TECH

REQU'S) (REV.0-2021)

S-TR-GEN-STC (Spec Tech Requ's) (Rev.0-2021) Page 1 of 11

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Special Technical Requirements

CONTENTS

1 EXTENSION OF EXISTING INSTALLATIONS....................................................... 3

2 FUTURE EXTENDABILITY ........................................................................................ 3
3 INDOOR TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS ................................................................ 3
3.1 Air-Conditioned Rooms .................................................................................................... 3
3.2 Ventilated Buildings or Rooms without Air-Conditioning ............................................... 4
4 SOIL CONDITIONS....................................................................................................... 4
5 LIGHTING SYSTEMS................................................................................................... 5
5.1 Illumination Lamp Types & Levels .................................................................................. 5
5.2 Light fixture specifications ................................................................................................ 7
5.2.1 Location: Relay and Telecommunication rooms, Control rooms and Offices .................. 7
5.2.2 Location: Storage Rooms, Kitchen, Corridors. ................................................................. 7
5.2.3 Location: HV/LV Switchgear rooms, Air-conditioning rooms, Battery Rooms, Cable shafts,
Cable basements, Workshops. ........................................................................................... 7
5.2.4 Location: Toilets, Stairs. ................................................................................................... 8
5.2.5 Location: Mirror light ........................................................................................................ 8
5.2.6 Location: HV Switchgear Hall .......................................................................................... 8
5.2.7 Location: Gate Areas ......................................................................................................... 8
5.2.8 Location: Boundary (Wall) ............................................................................................... 8
5.3 External Road Lighting ..................................................................................................... 8
6 EQUIPMENT SPACE REQUIREMENTS .................................................................. 9
7 PHASES ARRANGEMENT ........................................................................................ 10
8 SOFTWARE .................................................................................................................. 11

S-TR-GEN-STC (Spec Tech Requ's) (Rev.0-2021) Page 2 of 11

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Special Technical Requirements

SPECIAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

The following shall form the basis for each Bidder/Contractor to optimise his Proposal with
regard to local facts, and to prevailing technical realities.
The general information given hereunder applies to all works in addition to the General
Conditions, System Characteristics, Electrical and Civil Design Fundamentals, unless specified
to greater detail in sections on specific installations.

1 EXTENSION OF EXISTING INSTALLATIONS

Where existing installations are being extended under the Contract, the Bidder/Contractor has to
inform himself sufficiently in advance, and is responsible for designing his equipment in such
manner as to match and be compatible with the existing installation without impairment or
deterioration or operational limitation.

2 FUTURE EXTENDABILITY
In addition to the design of installations under contract, the Bidder/Contractor has to provide by
his layout for future extensions as indicated in the scope of supply or tender layout drawings.
Such future extensions shall be facilitated without having to reconstruct any existing installations
or civil works, e.g. cable channels, buildings etc.

3 INDOOR TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS

3.1 Air-Conditioned Rooms

Area / Space Summer DB Winter DB Air Room Noise Level Unit’s

Temperature Temperature Humidity from HVAC Capacity Split
o o
C C [% r. h.] dB(A) (%)

Offices, Social Rooms 23 ± 2 K 21 ± 2 K 50 ± 10 40 2 x 100

Control, Computer,
Telecom Rooms, SCMS
Electronic and Relay
Rooms and similar Rooms

Switchgear Rooms for 27 ± 2 K 21 ± 2 K n.a. 50 3 x 50

132kV, 220kV or 400kV
SWGs. Battery and
Charger/LVDC rooms,
LVAC Distribution, A/C
Plant Room and similar
Rooms

S-TR-GEN-STC (Spec Tech Requ's) (Rev.0-2021) Page 3 of 11

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Special Technical Requirements

CO2-Bottles Rooms, 30 ± 2 K 25 ± 2 K n. a. 60 3 x 50
Stores, Janitor Rooms,
Staircases, Corridors, Aux.
Transformer, Capacitors,
Reactor, Compensator and
Inverter Rooms,
Trenches/Shafts, Cable
Floor/Basement/Tunnel
and similar Rooms

Power Transformer Rooms < 65 < 45 n. a. 45 dB(A) outdoor, 3 x 50

measured in 10 m
(Ventilation
distance from unit
only)

3.2 Ventilated Buildings or Rooms without Air-Conditioning

Maximum temperature : 50°C (equal to max. outside ambient temperature)
Maximum annual average temperature : 40°C
Minimum temperature : 5°C (equal to min. outside ambient temperature)

4 SOIL CONDITIONS
The following conditions are to be used for tender purposes only, but have to be verified by
Bidders/Contractors individually at actual where relevant, depending on the installation location:
Soil thermal resistivity (g) : 120 cm0C/W
Seabed : 80 cm0C/W

Maximum ground temperature:

Abu Dhabi Area:
40°C at 100 cm depth
43°C at 50 cm depth
Al Ain Area:
40°C at 100 cm depth
44°C at 50 cm depth
Minimum ground temperature:
Abu Dhabi Area:
25°C at 50 cm depth

S-TR-GEN-STC (Spec Tech Requ's) (Rev.0-2021) Page 4 of 11

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Special Technical Requirements

Al Ain Area:
29°C at 50 cm depth
Earth resistivity:
 100 Ohm-m

5 LIGHTING SYSTEMS

5.1 Illumination Lamp Types & Levels

The following (see Table) minimum direct illuminated illumination levels (at working areas)
shall be maintained in extensions and in new installations. In indirect illuminated areas the
illumination level shall not be below 70% of the levels shown in the Table below:

S-TR-GEN-STC (Spec Tech Requ's) (Rev.0-2021) Page 5 of 11

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Special Technical Requirements

Location Lamp Type Lamp Life Protection Average

in Class llumination
(4000-5000K CCT) Burning hours Level (at ground
(IP) level) at Time
of
Commissioning
(LUX)

Relay and 44 500

Telecommunication
Rooms, Control and LED recessed 3900lm 50,000
Office Rooms/Louvers
Storage Rooms, Kitchen/ LED recessed 3900lm 50,000 44 200
Diffuser

Workshops, etc. LED Linear 6900lm 50,000 67 350

LV Switchgear Rooms LED Linear 6900lm 50,000 67 250

HV Switchgear Hall LED Highbay 17000lm 50,000 65 350

+
LED Linear 6900lm +
67
Air Conditioning Rooms LED Linear 6900lm 50,000 67 150

Toilets, LED 2800lm 44 150

50,000 54

Mirror Light LED 2013lm 50,000 44 150

Stair inside the Building LED Linear 6900lm 50,000 67 150

Transformer/Shunt LED Floodlight 50,000 66/67 150
Reactor Bays 20000lm
+ LED Linear 6900lm

Battery Room, Cable LED Linear 6900lm 50,000 67 200

Shafts

Cable Basements LED Linear 6900lm 50,000 67 100

Open-Cut/Shielded LED Linear 6900lm 50,000 67 30

Tunnels

Gate Areas / Building LED Floodlight 50,000 66 100

External Mounted Lighting 20000lm

S-TR-GEN-STC (Spec Tech Requ's) (Rev.0-2021) Page 6 of 11

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Special Technical Requirements

Boundary LED Floodlight/ 50,000 65 100

(Top/Wall
mounted) Bulkhead Wall
mounted
LED
Roads LED Street Light 50,000 66 40
Emergency/Exit LED 5W 20 15
Lighting
15,000
any location of the LED 15
Station Area
50,000 66

5.2 Light fixture specifications

5.2.1 Location: Relay and Telecommunication rooms, Control rooms and Offices

Recessed mounted, 600X600mm luminaire with 3900lm LED. Fixture shall sheet steel housing
with white color. Diffuser shall be UV-stabilized opal acrylic with luminaire efficiency greater
than 95lm/W. Protected to IP44 from below and IP20 from above. Complete with 4000k LED.
Fixture shall be CE or ENEC approved.

5.2.2 Location: Storage Rooms, Kitchen, Corridors.

Recessed mounted, 600X600mm luminaire with 3900lm LED. Fixture shall sheet steel housing
with white color. Diffuser shall be UV‐stabilized opal acrylic with luminaire efficiency greater
than 95lm/W. Protected to IP44 from below and IP20 from above. Complete with 4000k LED.
Fixture shall be CE or ENEC approved.

5.2.3 Location: HV/LV Switchgear rooms, Air-conditioning rooms, Battery Rooms,

Cable shafts, Cable basements, Workshops & Stairs.

Moisture‐proof diffuser luminaire LED. Body made of hardly flammable, glass fibre-reinforced
polyester (GRP). Non‐ageing polyurethane foam gasket (PU). LED optical system with ESD
protection, suspendable and clip‐fastenable mounted on white sheet steel reflector. Captive,
highly resistant, articulated catches made of polyamide (PA), or special steel catches (Inox).
Diffuser made of polycarbonate (PC) with internal longitudinal prisms or
polymethylmethacrylate (PMMA) with pearl structure or as clear version. With automatic
terminal. Completely halogen‐free luminaire. IFS / BRC approved. IP67 protection. Luminaire
shall ENEC or CE certified.

S-TR-GEN-STC (Spec Tech Requ's) (Rev.0-2021) Page 7 of 11

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Special Technical Requirements

5.2.4 Location: Toilets.

Recessed LED downlight. IP54 (IP20 from above). Aluminum body, painted white. Satinbrite
Reflector. Suitable for mounting in ceiling thicknesses of 1‐40mm in a Ø200mm cut‐out.
Complete with 4000K LED. Fixture shall CE or ENEC certified.

5.2.5 Location: Mirror light

Slim surface/Wall mounted LED luminaire. Electronic, fixed output control gear. IP44
protection. Body
shall be white painted galvanized sheet steel, white plastic end caps and frosted acrylic diffuser.
Complete with 4000K LED. Fixture shall CE or ENEC certified.

5.2.6 Location: HV Switchgear Hall

Luminaire shall be LED high-bay includes die-cast Aluminium housing in matt, white. Powder-
coated cooling ribs for optimum thermal management and minimal dust accumulation. Cover of
transparent polymethylmethacrylate (PM) and additional glass cover (safety glass) for
challenging industrial applications. Colour temperature 4000 K. Sealed, high-efficiency optical
lens system, Luminaire with symmetric wide light distribution (wide beam) square, UGR <25.
Luminaire wired with halogen-free leads. degree of protection. Fixture shall CE or ENEC
certified.

5.2.7 Location: Gate Areas / Building External Mounted Lighting

Compact, lightweight, general purpose LED area floodlight. Large body with symmetrical or
asymmetric highly efficient beam light distribution. IP66, IK08 protection. Body shall be
die‐cast Aluminum (EN AC‐46000), painted grey with 4mm thick toughened enclosure glass.
Reversible mounting stirrup. Complete with 4000K LED. Fixture shall CE or ENEC protected.

5.2.8 Location: Boundary (Wall)

Compact, lightweight, general purpose LED area floodlight. Small body with symmetrical or
asymmetric highly efficient beam light distribution. IP66, IK08 protection. Body shall be
die‐cast Aluminum (EN AC‐46000), painted grey with 4mm thick toughened enclosure glass.
Reversible mounting stirrup. Complete with 4000K LED. Fixture shall CE or ENEC protected.

5.3 External Road Lighting

LED road lighting Luminaire made of powder coated die‐cast aluminum having IP66
designation for the whole luminaire including lamp and gear tray giving a high degree of
protection. The luminaire should have either double IP66 or lamp and gear compartment should

S-TR-GEN-STC (Spec Tech Requ's) (Rev.0-2021) Page 8 of 11

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Special Technical Requirements

be separated by an aluminum/galvanized steel barrier The optical compartment shall be enclosed

in the die‐cast body of the luminaire with tempered flat glass diffuser. The luminaire should have
cut‐off light distribution to prevent glare and light pollution. Post top (Ø60/76mm, tilted
0°/5°/10°) or lateral (Ø34/42/49/60mm, tilted 0°/‐5°/‐10°/‐15°) mounting. The luminaire should
have a tool less maintenance for simple mounting. The luminaire should have CE or ENEC
certified. Equipped with Heat Management System (HMS) for operation in 50°C ambient
temperatures.

The lighting design shall consider a maximum power allowance of 10.75W/sqm for the total
indoor area (the corridors shall not be considered for this average value) in order to achieve the
objective of energy efficiency.
The entry of natural daylight into switchgear building rooms through any kind of windows shall
not be reduced by air-conditioning ducts or any other structures.

6 EQUIPMENT SPACE REQUIREMENTS

Switchgear/SVC halls and Relay/Control room dimensions shall consider that all doors,
including equipment doors can be opened freely.
Air conditioning ducts shall be located in such a way that shadow-free lighting is guaranteed.
The minimum space requirements considering the final extension stage shall be as follows:
HV Switchgears Hall
• Gantry crane hook lifting height shall allow easy exchange of the largest part of HV
Switchgear for maintenance or repair and for extension
• 400 kV, 220 kV & 132 kV GIS minimum spaces:
1. 2.0 m between front of Local Control Panel (LCC) facing the front of the GIS and
any GIS part
2. 2.5 m between Building Construction (walls, columns, etc.) facing the back of the
GIS and any GIS part (GIS Cable Feeder HV test adapter shall be considered)
3. 3.5 m between Building Construction (walls, columns, etc.) facing the end and
beginning of the GIS and any part of the last and first GIS bay (all known future GIS
extensions and GIS Busbar HV test adapter arrangement shall be considered).
Other Switchgear
• Between any wall and the first feeder(s) at the final extension stage, space of 1 time the
width of the largest feeder bay.
Control and Relay Rooms
• From top of the panels to the suspended ceiling or I-beams 1.0 m
• For panels facing each other 0.8 m additional passage, when both doors are completely
opened

S-TR-GEN-STC (Spec Tech Requ's) (Rev.0-2021) Page 9 of 11

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Special Technical Requirements

• For panels facing the wall, 0.8 m space at any point when the doors are completely opened
• For the final extension, less than 90 % of the total space for panels shall be utilised.
SVC Hall
• Min. 2.5 m space for easy access, maintenance and repair or replacement of any equipment
(e.g. thyristor modules, etc.).
Power Transformer/Neutral Reactor or Resistor Bays
• Min. 1.5 m space from any part of the walls to any part of the Transformer/Neutral
Reactor/Resistor shall be maintained.
Capacitor Bank / Stand-By Diesel Generator Rooms
• Lifting Device hook height shall allow easy exchange of the largest part of the Capacitor
Bank / Stand-By Diesel Generator Set for maintenance or repair and for extensions
• Space for one additional Capacitor Bank/Stand-By Diesel Generator Set for replacement
(emergency) of one existing Capacitor Bank/Stand-By Diesel Generator Set
• Min. 1.5 m space from any part of the walls, I-beans, HVAC ducts (excluding the depth of
local control and wall mounted pilot wire cubicle, etc.) to any part of the Capacitor Bank /
Stand-By Diesel Generator shall be maintained.
Battery Room
• Min. 1.5 m space from any part of the battery bank(s) for easy access, maintenance and
repair or replacement of any battery cell
• The highest battery rack shall be kept at a level to allow easy maintenance of any battery
cell. No more than three tires shall be considered.
Any Electrical Room/Hall
• Min. 1.0 m space from the highest point of each equipment to the underside of lowest
concrete/steel beam shall be maintained.
Free Standing Panels
• Min. 1.0m space in front and at back side of battery charger, LVac, LVdc, Protection,
Telecom, etc. Panels.

7 PHASES ARRANGEMENT
• Switchgear
View from LCC to the Switchgear: RYB from left to right.
• Transformers
Highest voltage bushings (view from the side of the Transformer where the highest voltage
bushings are located): UVW (RYB) from left to right.

S-TR-GEN-STC (Spec Tech Requ's) (Rev.0-2021) Page 10 of 11

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Special Technical Requirements

8 SOFTWARE
Prior to any computer programme calculation, the Bidder/Contractor shall agree with
OWNER/ENGINEER as to what type of software shall be applied.
If the finally agreed calculation software programme is already available with TRANSCO it
should be updated (if it is not the latest version) otherwise the applied software shall be supplied
to TRANSCO and a software training shall be included in the Contract price.

S-TR-GEN-STC (Spec Tech Requ's) (Rev.0-2021) Page 11 of 11

 Transco System Safety Rules
Summary

Guidance for Contractors’

Competent Persons
and HSE Officers

01 August 2009
Revision 3
TRANSCO HSEQ Department
 TRANSCO GUIDANCE SHEET
This sheet will give you all the information you need to pass the test and interview successfully first time.
Transco want candidates to pass first time, but candidates must be prepared. PLEASE READ IT
THOROUGHLY
How to successfully become a Transco recognized Competent Person or a HSE Officer
3rd Party Contractors (for Competent Person)
1. Obtain from Transco Engineering Services Notice of Intent with drawing and bring the documents to the
Transco HSEQ Office, on the Ground Floor. You will then receive a copy of this Guidance booklet.
2. Obtain a Competent Person Interview Request letter from your company, which must include: See other
page for complete template as required and completed. Note required attachments.
o Clearly identify the project number, location & nature of work, (eg. Near 132 kV UG Cable/Crossing
Water Pipeline/Under Overhead Line) include in your letter the candidate detailed resume (CV).
o Appropriate Specific Work Method Statement including your Risk Assessment for the work you
wish to undertake near Transco facilities (3rd Party Contractors Only). Items to be covered in a Work
method Statement are; Scope, Terminology, References, Roles & Responsibilities, Emergency
Procedures, Significant Risks & Control measures, The Safe Method, Resources & Key
interfaces.
3. The appointed candidate must have the following qualification:
o Relevant professional qualification in the work required, electrical engineer for electrical work etc.
o Relevant work experience.
o A good basic HSE awareness of the work to be supervised and the associated hazards including
emergency procedures
o First aid & fire fighting training and present relevant certificates.
o Good communication skills in English. Must be able to demonstrate conducting a Toolbox Talk.
o Safety Officer /HSE Engineers not accepted to be appointed as a Competent Person.
4. Return all the above to the Transco HSEQ Office completed correctly and a test & interview date will be
arranged. This will be arranged within approximately 3 weeks after the request letter and relevant documents
have been received, completed correctly. Only then will an appointment be made for the test & interview. An
incorrect completed request letter or documents will delay the test and interview appointment.
5. The appointed candidate shall read & understand the Transco Contractor System Safety Rules Summary
(HSE Officers this will be the HSE Project Plan) on his own before attending the written test & interview. If
they are unsure on any items, they must seek help and assistance from their company’s senior HSE person.
They should also fully understand their company Risk Assessments and Method Statements for the works.
6. Candidates must come prepared, have spent at least 3/5 days reading and understanding this booklet,
only those that successfully score 90% and above on the test will proceed to the interview stage.
7. The test questions are multiple choice, although some written answers will be required, but all the answers
are contained within this booklet, (see following pages) and your companies Risk Assessments and Method
Statements. For HSE Officers, the questions are basic HSE questions that all HSE Officers should know.
8. The candidate must turn up on the given date and at the required time. Failure to turn up at the required time
will result in the test & interview being cancelled and counted as one unsuccessful attempt.
9. The candidates will only have two opportunities to be successful.
For Transco Project Contractors (2nd Party Competent Person or HSE Officer)
1. Clearly identify in their request letter the project number, location & nature of work (within Transco Premises),
include CV and any other approved competency certificates.
2. Follow step 2 to 9 above.

CONTRACTORS VISITING HSEQ DEPARTMENT

Test/Interviews Every Sunday

Meeting with HSEQ Manager / HSE Engineer By formal appointment only

Submission of Requests for Test/Interview and/or any other related issues on the following working days and
working times:- (handled by HSEQ Assistant)

Sunday 07:00 to 15:00

Tuesday 07:00 to 10:00
Thursday 07:00 to 10:00
 (Company Letter Head)

Date:
Reference No:
Contact e-mail:
To: HSEQ Manager
Abu Dhabi Transmission & Despatch Company (TRANSCO)

Contract/Project No & Detail: ______________________________

Subject: Safety Authorization “Competent Person” Interview

Please arrange for below mentioned to be interviewed by Transco HSE Engineer for qualifying as a
Competent Person for works near/on Transco premises.

Name*: Job Title:

Education: Experience (years):
UAE Visa type: Experience (UAE):
Company/Sponsor Name:
Category of Work: ______ HV _____LV _____Civil ______Mechanical
First Aid Training*: Fire Fighting Training*:
Previous Competency Certificate (Transco / Others):
Brief Work Description (within Transco facilities):
(e.g: crossing or parallel to Transco water pipeline/ underground cable / Overhead line etc..)

We confirm that the Competent Person must never leave the work site during works commencing
under Transco System Safety Rules.

Regards,

Name & Signature

of the company Managing Director

Attachments:
- Candidate CV
- Reply Notice of Intent issued from Transco (first issue & latest renewal)
- Work Method Statement includes Risk Assessment
- Basic First Aid Training & Basic Fire Fighting Training Certificates copy
- Other Company Competency Certificates copy
- Passport copy with valid visa page or Labour card copy.

*Note: The appointed candidate shall read & understand the Transco System Safety Rules on his own
before attending the Written Exam & Interview. And present proof of achieving First Aid & Fire Fighting
Training.
 SUMMARY SYSTEM SAFETY RULES (Rev.3 010809)
PRINCIPLES
1. System Safety Rules are intended to protect persons from inherited system hazards
2. Only competent persons can undertake works in TRANSCO premises after receiving a Safety Document (SD)
3. Authorized Person (AP) assesses all risks & applies System Safety precautions before issuing the (SD).
4. Equipment must be clearly identified in (SD) (matching equipment label on site)
5. Operation of equipment is by direct communication, operation by prearranged signals or timing is not allowed.
6. Competent Person (CP) must be present on site all time during work, controlling all activities & persons.
7. Safety Document must be retained by the CP on site.

GENERAL DEFINITIONS
Hazards Sources of dangers to persons
Safe Free from Hazards
System Equipment interconnected in a network (Electrical, Water, Telecom Network)
System Hazards Hazards present (inherited) in a system (Electrical, mechanical, chemical, pressure)
System Safety Precautions to control system hazards, applied by an Authorized Person.
Example: Isolation, earthing, safety document, safe method of work, applying demarcation,
danger / caution notices, labeling, venting, draining, purging & release of stored energy, PPE
General Hazards Non system Hazards like excavation, lifting, scaffolding, ladders, hot works, tools, etc.
General Safety Precautions to control non system hazards, maintained by a Competent Person
Example: Shoring, barriers, training, supervision, approved procedures, safe method of work,
inspection of certificates tools &equipment, on site risk assessment, toolbox talks, PPE etc.
Release of Energy Means Venting, draining, purging, or braking, or spring release.
Key Safe Key A unique Key for locking the Key Safe at work location, given to CP by the AP
High Voltage (HV) A voltage exceeding 1000 volts.
PPE Personal protective equipment (helmet, safety shoes, gloves, coveralls, high-vis etc.)
Receipt Means that CP has agreed that he/she fully understands the work and is satisfied of applied
system safety precautions and accepts full responsibility to maintain the safety and supervise
the work.
Clearance Means a declaration by the CP that all persons, materials & tools are removed from work
area and it is cleaned and tidy
LDC Load Dispatch Center
Isolation Point The point at which equipment has been isolated to provide physical separation
Primary Earth Conductor that protects from accidental operation while working on HV equipment (min. 95
2
mm )
Additional Earth Conductor that protects from induced voltage while working on HV equipment. (Min. 25 mm2)
Toolbox Talks An onsite communication between the CP and his/her working party before the start of work
conducted each day early in the morning. Must include, work to be done, hazards, control
measures, Emergency procedures, working environment, any changes from previous day,
check PPE and tools.
Earthing Schedule A schedule indicating the additional earth requirements for each stage of the work necessary
to control induced voltages as circumstances change
Safety Clearance The distance from the nearest exposed HV conductor not earthed, or from an insulator
supporting an exposed HV conductor, which must be maintained at all times to avoid danger
to persons. 5.5m for 400kv, 4m for 220kv, 3m for 132kv, 1.5m for all HV conductors up to
33kv, (Note: HV insulators minimum safety clearance distance= 0.5m)

DEFINITION OF AUTHORITIES
Competent Person (CP) A person, having suitable & sufficient technical Knowledge & experience to recognize &
avoid danger, use safe method of works & use appropriate PPE, receives & clear SD.
Authorized Person (AP) A competent person who have been additionally authorized to Issue & cancel Safety
documents, he assess all work risks & apply system safety precaution before start of any
work.
Control Person A person who controls the transmission system (from LDC) & coordinates system safety
activities
SAFETY DOCUMENT PROCEDURE (CP, only one SD, one place, at one time for your discipline)

No Person Actions
1 Competent Apply before 2 - 7 days from work start, include detailed method statement for work to AP
2 Authorised Review application for work & Submit to (LDC – planning section) for approval
3 LDC Approve application & return to authorised
4 Authorised Asses all risks on site, Apply System Safety Precautions, obtain consent from a Control
Person in LDC & finally sign & issue the Safety Document to the Competent Person.
Read, understand and check SD, only then sign & receive SD, conduct toolbox talk, start
5 work & maintain general safety, follow and only do the work on the SD, follow method
Competent
statement, supervise 100% of time, NEVER PROCEED IF YOU ARE UNSURE OR IN
DOUDT, always contact AP for help, advice and clarification.
6 Competent Sign clearance after completion of work & removal of persons, tools from location.
7 Authorised Sign cancellation after inspecting the work area

TYPES OF SAFETY DOCUMENT (Only three in Transco)

Permit to Work For works requiring secure isolation followed by Earthing or Release of stored
energy. See an example of a filled PTW for work on a Transformer (overleaf)
Limited Access Permit Safety is achieved by applying limits to work and/or work area. See an example of
a filled LAP for crossing an OHL (overleaf)
Sanction for Test For works requiring injection of high voltage or current and which may require the
removal of primary earths. All PTW must be cancelled first.

SAFE WORK AREA (Prepared by the Authorized Person)

Red & white tape or chain

Lock Lock

 
 Earth
Earth


Isolation Point Isolation Point

All equipment outside Safe Work Area are considered LIVE !

The limits of Safe Work Area must be physically identified by Red & White tape or chain with Danger notices displayed at the
limits, facing into the Safe Work Area (inside). Work is not allowed on an established isolation point

SOME PICTURES AND A SCHEMATIC

SAFETY KEY DANGER NOTICE CAUTION NOTICE MINIMUM SAFETY CLEARANCE

DISTANCE
HV Insulator HV
conductor

5.5 meter


Safety-Key is locked inside Displayed facing Used to identify 400kv OHL safety clearance distance
key-safe by 1 Control-Key and into the Safe Work Area Points-of-Isolation measured from HV conductor
4 key-safe-keys

! Important: This summary is a simplified guide for understanding the basics of Transco’s System Safety Rules; it does not replace the
complete Transco System Safety Rules book for working on the system
VIOLATION OF SYSTEM SAFETY RULES

Common violations of Transco’s System Safety Rules (SSR) by Competent Persons include the following. Please
remember that this list is indicative only and not exhaustive.

• Competent Person receives safety document (LAP, PTW or SFT) and the work starts. While the works are in
progress, Competent Person is not available on site. This is a major violation. The competent must always be
present on site all the times supervising his working party for the period while the work is in progress.
• Competent Person receives more than one safety document. He may have finished his work; but as long the safety
document is not cleared by him and cancelled by the relevant AP, he/she cannot receive another safety document.
• Competent Person receives safety document for work that is not covered by his existing competency. This includes
both the project and nature of the work. It is responsibility of the CP not to apply for works that are not covered by
his competency.
• Competent Person take on work that is not compatible with the work, equipment and location mentioned in the
safety document. It has to be known that the CP is allowed to do only what is mentioned in the safety document. It
is for this purpose that CP is expected to read and understand the safety document before signing (or receiving) it.

PENALTIES

The above mentioned violations, though not exhaustive, are subject to penalty. Any competent person who is found to
have conducted these violations WILL have his COMPETENCY WITHDRAWN immediately and will not be considered
for competency again. There is zero tolerance to not complying; no matter how minor the violation may be.
This booklet is designed for TRANSCO Contractors & Contractors who
work near or on TRANSCO facilities.

This booklet is the property of TRANSCO, and cannot be used nor given
to outside party without prior authorisation.

First Appointment:

Company Name: _________________________________________________________

Name: __________________________________________________________________

Date: _______________________________Time________________________________

I agree to turn up on the correct date and time allocated for me and will come
prepared:-

Sign: ________________________________________

Second Appointment:

Company Name: _________________________________________________________

Name: __________________________________________________________________

Date: _______________________________Time________________________________

I agree to turn up on the correct date and time allocated for me and will come
prepared:-

Sign: ________________________________________

Abu Dhabi Transmission and Despatch Company (TRANSCO)

P.O.Box: 173, Abu Dhabi, UAE. Tel: (2) 6414000/ Fax: (2) 6426333
Web: www.transco.ae
 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Project Quality Plan Example

STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRIC WORKS

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
( SPECIFICATION )

PROJECT QUALITY PLAN

(EXAMPLE)

TRANSCO STANDARD : TR-PROJECT QUALITY PLAN (REV.0-2007)

TR-Project Quality Plan (Rev.0-2007) Page 1 of 8

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Project Quality Plan Example

Project Quality Plan Index

Appendix A-1
(Typical Example) Cont’d.

1.0 Control of Project Quality Plan

1.1 Revision Status

1.2 Controlled Copy Distribution List
1.3 Preparation, Approval, Issue and Revision of the Project Quality Plan

2.0 General Contract Information

2.1 Corporate & Contract Specific Quality System Documentation

2.2 Scope of Work
2.3 Sub-Contractors' Quality Systems and Monitoring
2.4 Activities to be controlled by the Contract Quality Plan, including Sub contractors

3.0 Quality Assurance Objectives

3.1 Contract Documentation with Quality Requirements

3.2 Control of Documentation with Quality Requirements

4.0 Organizational Structure

4.1 Contract Organization Chart and Mobilization Dates

4.2 Corporate Organization Chart and Relationship with Contract Organization
4.3 Job Descriptions, Authority Levels and Reporting Relationships
4.4 Curriculum Vitae of Quality Assurance personnel, including Sub-Contractors
4.5 Training Schedule

5.0 Project Quality Plans

5.1 Preparation, Approval, Issue and Revision of the Project Quality Plans

6.0 Procedures, Work Instructions & Checklists (Corporate & Contract Specific)

6.1 Contract Management

6.2 Design
6.3 Procurement
6.4 Civil Works
6.5 Mechanical Works
6.6 Electrical Works
6.7 Instrumentation and Control Works
6.8 Commissioning, Handover, As Built, Operation & Maintenance Manuals

TR-Project Quality Plan (Rev.0-2007) Page 2 of 8

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Project Quality Plan Example

7.0 Quality Control Plans (Inspection &Test Plans)

7.1 Contract Management

7.2 Design
7.3 Survey
7.4 Installation Works
7.5 Commissioning, Handover, As Built, Operation & Maintenance Manuals

8.0 Quality Control Records

8.1 Identification of Quality Control Records

8.2 Quality Records & Test Pack Formats

9.0 Audit Schedule

9.1 Internal & External Audit Schedule

9.2 Audit Team Members
9.3 Distribution Matrix for Audit Notification and Audit Reports

10.0 Other Measures

10.1 To be identified by Supplier

TR-Project Quality Plan (Rev.0-2007) Page 3 of 8

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Project Quality Plan Example

Control of Project Quality Plan Appendix A-2

Revision Status
Rev Prepared Approved Approved by
Date Description
No. By By TRANSCO/Engineer
Quality
Project.
0 12.6.04 Tender Issue Assurance
Engineer
Manager
Quality
Project.
1 29.5.05 Contract Issue Assurance
Engineer
Manager
Contractor to define who
Review by TRANSCO/Engineer
prepares and approves the
is for overall format, not
PQP. This is only an
detailed checking.
example.

Controlled Copy Distribution List

Copy
Copy Holder Name Position Location Tel. No.
No.

1 Contract Manager Head Office

2 Contractor Representative Head Office

3 Contractor Site Representative Site

4 Quality Assurance Manager Head Office

5 Quality Assurance Engineer Site

TRANSCO Company
6 TRANSCO
Representative

TRANSCO Company Site

7 Site
Representative
TRANSCO Quality Assurance
8 /Quality Control TRANSCO

Contractor to decide on internal distribution.

TR-Project Quality Plan (Rev.0-2007) Page 4 of 8

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Project Quality Plan Example

2. General Contract Information Appendix A-3

Corporate & Contract Specific Quality System Documentation
The Quality System should be based on the following documentation:

Corporate
Quality Manual

Project
Quality Plan

Key Document

Corporate Can be combined

&
Contract Provides overview
specific
Procedures Assists auditing

Work Instructions

Quality Control Records

Inspection & Test Plans

Audit Checklists

TR-Project Quality Plan (Rev.0-2007) Page 5 of 8

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Project Quality Plan Example

Procedures, Work Instructions and Checklists Appendix A-4

The following Procedures / Work Instructions shall be used on the Contract:

(Note: The following listing is purely for example purposes and is not intended to be a definitive
list of Procedures for a particular type of Contract).

Title Rev. Date

Contract Management

Contract Review
Project Quality Plan
Planning & Scheduling
Document Control
Labor, Materials & Plant Resourcing
Provisional Acceptance Certificate
Training
Quality Auditing
Technical Queries
Tend Notice & Variations
Control of Non-Conforming Product
Corrective Action
Third Party Certification (if required in Scope of Work)

Design

Design control
Drawing control
Design Verification & Technical Reviews
Control of Specifications, TRANSCO Standard Specification, Codes & Standards
Preparation of Requisitions
Materials Tracking & Reporting
Reviewing Vendor Documentation
As Built Information
Operation & Maintenance Manuals

Procurement

Approved Contractors & Vendors List

Requisitions, Purchasing Data & Purchase Orders
Materials Tracking & Expediting
Inspection & Testing (in process & Final)
Control of Customer Supplied Product
Handling, Storage, Packing & Transportation
Goods Inward Inspection

TR-Project Quality Plan (Rev.0-2007) Page 6 of 8

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Project Quality Plan Example

Civil Works Appendix A-4

Cont’d.
Surveying & Setting Out
Earthworks, Trenching, Excavation & Backfilling
Concrete Work
Structural Steelwork
Brickwork & Blockwork
General Building & Architectural Work
Building Services (Plumbing, Electrical, A/C)
Roads & Paving

Mechanical Works

On Plot Piping
Off Plot Piping
Welding
Installation of Static Equipment
Installation of Rotating Equipment
Painting & Coating
Non-Destructive Examination NDE

Electrical Works

Protection & Isolation

Installation of Electrical Equipment
Installation of Underground Cables
Installation of Overhead Lines
HV & LV Switch gear
Cathodic Protection

Instrumentation & Control Works

Safeguarding
Installing Instrumentation
Instrument Air Supply
System Cabling
DCS Systems
SCADA
Factory & Site Acceptance Testing
Installation of Telecommunication Equipment

Commissioning, Handover, As Builts, Operation & Maintenance Manuals

Pre-commissioning
Commissioning
As Built Documentation
Operation & Maintenance Manuals
Spare Parts for Initial Running & Operation

TR-Project Quality Plan (Rev.0-2007) Page 7 of 8

 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Project Quality Plan Example

APPENDIX B

DATA SHEET FOR REQUIREMENTS OF WITNESS TESTING AT WORKS BY TRANSCO/ENGINEER

AND INSPECTIONS BY TPIA

Project Supply & Installation of Latest State-of-the-Art Electricity Meters

Tender No.: D – 4668

S. No. Description of Equipment Tests required Number of visits Third Party Remarks
to be witnessed by TRANSCO/ Inspections
by TRANSCO/ ENGINEER’s required
ENGINEER’s Representatives
Representatives
(Yes/No) (Yes/No)
1. 3ph Electricity Meters Y 1 No
Direct Connected

2. 3ph Electricity Meters Y 1 No

CT Connected

3.

Notes:

(1) Details of equipment requiring witness testing by TRANSCO/ENGINEER’s representatives, number of visits and/or
Third Party Inspections shall be filled by TRANSCO considering the requirements of each project.

(2) Cost of witnessing the tests by TRANSCO representatives shall be borne by TRANSCO.

(3) Cost of services by TPI Agency shall be borne by TRANSCO.

TR-Project Quality Plan (Rev.0-2007) Page 8 of 8

 STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRIC WORKS

OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES

( SPECIFICATION )

AIRCRAFT WARNING SYSTEMS

TRANSCO STANDARD : S-TR-OHL-AIR (REV.0-2014)

S-TR-OHL-AIR (Rev.0-2014) Page 1 of 6

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES

Aircraft Warning Systems

CONTENTS

1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................... 3
1.1 Drawings .................................................................................................................................. 3
1.2 Equipment Identification and Color Codes ............................................................................. 3
2 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ...................................................................................... 3
2.1 General ..................................................................................................................................... 3
2.2 Red/White Painting .................................................................................................................. 3
2.3 Aircraft Warning Spheres ........................................................................................................ 4
2.4 Obstruction Light Equipment for Towers................................................................................ 4
2.5 Obstruction Light Equipment for Conductors (Optional) ....................................................... 5
2.6 Installation and Maintenance ................................................................................................... 6
2.7 Testing ...................................................................................................................................... 6

S-TR-OHL-AIR (Rev.0-2014) Page 2 of 6

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Aircraft Warning Systems

AIRCRAFT WARNING SYSTEMS

1 GENERAL
This part of the specification covers design, manufacture, testing, erection and commissioning of
overhead line aircraft warning systems.
For applicable technical standards, tests and general requirements please refer to:
 S-TR-OHL-GEN - General Requirements (Applicable Technical Standards, Tests,
etc.)

1.1 Drawings
Typical Drawing for Obstruction Light for Conductors provided in the Drawings Section is as
follows:
Drawing No. Title
DWG TR OHL 07 01 Obstruction Light for Conductors

1.2 Equipment Identification and Color Codes

Concerning Aircraft Warning Systems Identification, reference shall be made to Standard
Technical Specification, Part:
 S-TR-GEN-ID - Components Marking

2 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

2.1 General
Line sections located in height restricted areas, or otherwise defined by TRANSCO shall be
provided with visual aids for denoting obstacles, conforming to the Chapter 6, Annex 14, to the
Convention on International Civil Aviation. The aids may comprise one, two or all three
measures detailed hereunder.
If actually required, corresponding provisions are made in Scope of Work/Scope of Supply and
Bills of Quantities.

2.2 Red/White Painting

Where specified towers shall be painted in red/white bands/boxes. For technical details reference
is made to the Standard Technical Specification, Part:
 S-TR-CORR - Corrosion Protection

S-TR-OHL-AIR (Rev.0-2014) Page 3 of 6

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Aircraft Warning Systems

2.3 Aircraft Warning Spheres

Where specified Air traffic warning spheres shall be provided on the earth wire(s)/OPGW(s).
The system shall comprise white (RAL 9010) spheres, alternating with red (RAL 3000) ones.
The distance of the first sphere to the tower shall be max. 15 m.
The warning spheres shall be located on the earth wire in equal spacing. White spheres shall be
alternated with red spheres, providing maximum contrast. In case of 2 earth wires, the spheres
shall be alternately applied, on both wires.
One Stockbridge damper shall be installed on both side of sphere.
The maximum installation distance between individual spheres shall be governed by the sphere
diameter:
Diameter (in cm) Spacing (in m)
60 30
80 35
130 40

The warning spheres shall be of Fiber Reinforced Polyester with a diameter of at least 600 mm.
Spheres shall consist of two individual halves for easy installation. The fixing clamps of the
spheres shall match the preformed armour rods to be supplied for each sphere, to be mounted
between sphere and earth wire/OPGW. Aircraft warning spheres shall be with drain holes.
Bolts/Nuts for fixing aircraft warning spheres shall have safe-lock-nuts.
In the preparation of the sag and tension tables, and for the tower calculation, the additional
weight and wind load shall be taken into consideration, regardless if warning spheres have to be
provided under this Contract, or in future only.

2.4 Obstruction Light Equipment for Towers

Specific towers may have to be provided with warning lights.
Depending on individual requirements, these shall comprise of Low intensity (Type A) lights, in
the line with ICAO document “AERODROMES” Annex 14, Chapter 6.3.
The light system(s) shall be designed as stand-alone solar-fed units comprising of photovoltaic
module(s), maintenance-free battery (ies), system controller/charge regulator, and the light
source in form of a LED-cluster emitting genuine red light.
The system(s) offered shall be comprehensive and complete in every respect, with all
components being of highest quality and durability.
The system vendor shall prove the durability of the offered system(s) by a track record of min. 5
years of successful operation in similar environmental conditions.
The system should not create Electromagnetic interface and Radio frequency interface.

S-TR-OHL-AIR (Rev.0-2014) Page 4 of 6

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Aircraft Warning Systems

All systems shall be covered by a min. 5 years unconditional guarantee of a maintenance free
system performance. “System performance” shall be understood as the reliable automatic
illumination during all periods of darkness, with a visible minimum light intensity a stipulated by
the a.m. ICAO document.
For the system dimension, Bidder/Contractor’s attention is drawn to the fact that measurements
performed in the past on photovoltaic modules installed at 450 inclination (best compromise
between winter load and module self-cleaning) have revealed a drop in module output of 50-60%
due to dust accumulation within two months of installation. Module self-cleaning by rain cannot
be considered in the system dimensioning. Although the daily sunshine hours in Abu Dhabi
Emirate are generally high, there may be extended periods of overcast conditions. It has proven
advisable to design systems with not less than 5 days redundancy in terms of battery capacity.
Batteries and system controller/charge regulator shall be housed in suitable enclosure, protecting
these components from environmental affects like temperature peaks due to direct solar
radiation, dust, condensation, etc. For additional protection from direct sunlight, the enclosure
shall be placed in the shade of the photovoltaic module(s). The upper edge of the photovoltaic
module(s) and lamp shall be fitted with stainless steel needle strips, effectively preventing birds
from sitting in this location. All components shall be corrosion proof in a marine environment. If
stainless steel is used, only Grade A4 will be acceptable. Proposed LED lights are required to
bear the approval of Abu Dhabi Government’s Department of Civil Aviation. To minimise
degradation of luminous flow due to dust accumulation, the outer glass protection of the LED
cluster shall have a smooth surface.
Contractor need to specify in their Notice of Intent to Civil Aviation Department, if there is any
existing Over head line which is running parallel already equipped with Aircraft Warning
Spheres and Aircraft Warning Lights. Contractor should also ask about the type of light (such as
low and medium intensity) required in the Notice of intent.
For Road crossing towers including adjacent span and towers, Aircraft Warning Spheres and
Aircraft Warning Lights shall be installed.

2.5 Obstruction Light Equipment for Conductors (Optional)

Where specified, overhead line conductors shall be provided with air traffic obstruction lights
working on the principle of capacitive coupling.
The system shall basically consist of the following:
 A lamp constituting the light source; and
 An auxiliary cable to convey the necessary electric energy.
The light shall be a discharge light in a low-pressure neon gas atmosphere directly producing red
light without colour filter. The light shall guarantee maximum performance over its lifetime. The
principle of energy derivation involves an electric source with low current and high tension. The
light shall consist of a long small-diameter glass tube with helicoidally winding and two cold
electrodes. The unit shall be housed in a protective sleeve of Pyrex glass type. The ends of the
protecting tube shall be hermetically sealed with metallic stoppers, so that the internal space can
be filled with a special liquid to eliminate radio parasitic emissions. The lamp itself shall be hung
on flexible mountings on one side of the active overhead line, on the other side to the auxiliary

S-TR-OHL-AIR (Rev.0-2014) Page 5 of 6

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Aircraft Warning Systems

tube; thus the light is not subject to the vibrations transmitted by the cable, thereby eliminating
risk of deterioration.
The auxiliary conductor shall consist of metallic material insulated from the overhead line
conductor to produce by capacitive effect the electrical energy necessary to operate the lamp.
The geometry of the auxiliary conductor shall depend on the overhead line and it’s operating
voltage. The auxiliary conductor shall consist of long tubes of high-grade aluminium; the
number and configuration shall be determined by the conditions of operation. The length of the
auxiliary tube is inversely proportional to the voltage of the overhead line. The system shall be
suspended by composite type silicone long rod insulators. Fittings shall be such as to avoid any
problem of electric coupling with the overhead line conductors and shall fit exactly the diameter
of the overhead line conductors.

2.6 Installation and Maintenance

All components to be used/installed shall be compacted type, small in sizes and light in weights,
without affecting the system quality.
All installations shall be done by a qualified person under the supervision of the equipment
supplier.
Maintenance/Inspection activities shall be conducted by the supplier twice within the 1st five
years of operation: one before FAC issuance and one before extended warranty period expire.
During the warranty period contractor shall conduct maintenance activities each six months.

2.7 Testing
Testing, sampling and the Site Acceptance Test (SAT) of the aircraft warning spheres,
obstruction light equipment and lighting the wires of high tension overhead line systems shall be
performed in accordance with the relevant Standards, and to be carried out after minimum one
month from erection.
Vendor/Contractor shall submit work method statements with the producers for TRANSCO
Review and Approval. And latest products catalogues including detailed specifications also to be
submitted.
SAT tests shall not be limited to the following tests/measurements (solar lamp glowing (day &
night), AWL output voltage, battery charger status).
If type test reports covering the offered equipment are available, repetition of these tests may be
waived, at TRANSCO’s discretion.

S-TR-OHL-AIR (Rev.0-2014) Page 6 of 6

 STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRIC WORKS

OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES

( SPECIFICATION )

CONDUCTORS / EARTHWIRES

TRANSCO STANDARD : S-TR-OHL-CON (REV.0-2023)

S-TR-OHL-CON (Rev.0-2023) Page 1 of 10

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Conductors / Earthwires

CONTENTS

1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................... 3
1.1 Equipment Identification and Color Codes ....................................................................... 3
1.2 Sag and Tension Calculations ........................................................................................... 3
2 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ...................................................................................... 3
2.1 Conductors ........................................................................................................................ 3
2.1.1 Standards ........................................................................................................................... 3
2.1.2 Surface Conditions ............................................................................................................ 3
2.1.3 Reels .................................................................................................................................. 4
2.1.4 Adjustment of Metal Prices ............................................................................................... 4
2.2 Earthwire ........................................................................................................................... 4
2.2.1 Standards ........................................................................................................................... 5
2.2.2 Surface Conditions ............................................................................................................ 5
2.2.3 Shipment............................................................................................................................ 5
2.3 Installation of Conductors, Earthwires/OPGW and Accessories ...................................... 5
2.3.1 Requirements ..................................................................................................................... 5
2.3.2 Clearances ......................................................................................................................... 5
2.3.3 Laying of Conductors and Earthwire ................................................................................ 6
2.3.4 Splices ............................................................................................................................... 8
2.3.5 Sagging .............................................................................................................................. 9
2.3.6 Dampers, Spacers ............................................................................................................ 10
2.3.7 Jumper Loops .................................................................................................................. 10

S-TR-OHL-CON (Rev.0-2023) Page 2 of 10

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Conductors / Earthwires

CONDUCTORS / EARTHWIRES

1 GENERAL
This part of the specification covers design, manufacture, testing, erection and commissioning of
overhead line conductors.
For applicable technical standards, tests and general requirements please refer to:
➢ S-TR-OHL-GEN - General Requirements (Applicable Technical Standards, Tests,
etc.)

1.1 Equipment Identification and Color Codes

Concerning Conductors Identification, reference shall be made to Standard Technical
Specification, Part:
➢ S-TR-GEN-ID - Components Marking

1.2 Sag and Tension Calculations

The phase conductor and earth wire tensions and sags for purpose of tower or pole design, shall
be calculated in accordance with design criteria stipulated in Standard Technical Specification,
Part: S-OHL-T Schedules C1, C3 and D for HV/MV Towers and S-OHL-POLE Schedules C1,
C3 and D for MV TUBULAR STEEL OR WOODEN POLES.

2 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

2.1 Conductors
The particulars of the conductors to be supplied shall be as indicated in Technical Data Sheets.

2.1.1 Standards
The conductors shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with Standards as indicated in
Technical Data Sheets.

2.1.2 Surface Conditions

All wires making up the conductor shall be free of points, sharp edges, abrasions or other
imperfections that would tend to increase radio interference and corona losses. The conductors
shall also be free of metal particles and dirt. The make-up and the laying of the conductor strands
shall be such as to produce a conductor free of a tendency to untwist or spring apart when cut.
The stranding shall be such, that when the conductor will be tensioned to 15% of ultimate
strength, there shall be no high wires but a real cylindrical form shall be maintained. The
outermost layer shall be right-hand stranded.

S-TR-OHL-CON (Rev.0-2023) Page 3 of 10

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Conductors / Earthwires

Conductors to be applied in bundles shall be stranded on the same stranding machine in order to
minimize settling differences. Designation and number of the stranding machine and date of
manufacturing shall be provided to TRANSCO and must be stated on the conductor drums.

2.1.3 Reels
The conductors shall be delivered to erection sites on reels conforming to DIN 46 391. They
should contain nearly equal lengths of conductor with a minimum length per reel as indicated in
Technical Data Sheets. Returnable steel drums are also acceptable.
Reels shall be plastic clad inside. The reels shall be sufficiently sturdy and of sufficiently large
drum diameter to provide protection against damage during shipping, storing in tropics, handling
and stringing operations.
The reels shall be protected by a hard wooden lagging on the drum circumference with a total
thickness of at least 50 mm. The lagging shall be provided in two layers, suitably staggered in
order to avoid ingress of any foreign matter during transport and storage at Site. The lagging
shall be applied only after conclusion of the material acceptance test, at manufacturer’s premises.
For the test, all drums shall be open and accessible, for visual inspection.
For marking of the reels, reference shall be made to the Standard Technical Specification, Part:
➢ S-TR-OHL-GEN - General Requirements (Applicable Technical Standards, Tests,
etc.)

Additionally the following information shall be provided on the reels:

• Type of conductor
• Length of conductor
• Designation / number of stranding machine
• Tension-torque value
• Serial number
• Reel / drum number
• Arrow indicating rolling direction.
The form and the largest possible size of the designation plate shall be submitted for approval
well in advance of the first material inspection.

2.1.4 Adjustment of Metal Prices

The Bidder/Contractor shall base the calculations of the stated prices on the metal quotations as
laid down in the Special Conditions.

2.2 Earthwire
The particulars of the earthwire to be supplied shall be as indicated in Technical Data Sheets.

S-TR-OHL-CON (Rev.0-2023) Page 4 of 10

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Conductors / Earthwires

2.2.1 Standards
The earthwire shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with IEC and ASTM standards as
applicable or such other standards as may be approved and with the requirements set out in the
Technical Data Sheets.

2.2.2 Surface Conditions

All wires making up the earthwire conductor shall be free of points, sharp edges, abrasions or
other imperfections. The conductor shall also be free of metal particles and dirt. The make-up
and laying of the conductor strands shall be such as to produce a conductor free of tendency to
untwist or spring apart when cut. The wire strands shall be in close contact. The outermost layer
shall be stranded in the right hand way.

2.2.3 Shipment
The same precautions as for the line conductors shall be taken for earth wires with regard to
packing and shipment.

2.3 Installation of Conductors, Earthwires/OPGW and Accessories

2.3.1 Requirements
The conductors and earthwires shall be installed by tension stringing methods, only. Under no
circumstances shall the conductors and earthwire be allowed to come into contact with the
ground or the sea (as applicable) or with guards, scaffolds, etc. used to facilitate crossings.
In case of conductor damage during installation TRANSCO reserves the right to reject the
complete drum, which shall then be replaced at the Bidder’s/Contractor’s expense.
The Bidder/Contractor shall sag the conductors and earthwire in accordance with the initial sag
and tension tables to be prepared by him, based on the final sag and tension data.

2.3.2 Clearances
Requirements for the minimum clearances between live conductors and other objects, which
correspond to the final maximum conductor sag conditions, are stated in Schedule D of Standard
Technical Specification, Part:
➢ S-TR-OHL-T - HV Towers of Lattice Steel Design

For other objects, not listed in this Schedule, the requirements for minimum clearances shall
comply with Standard DIN/VDE 0210. In certain cases, to be communicated to the
Bidder/Contractor during line routing and survey, special clearances, exceeding Schedule D of
Standard Technical Specification, Part:
➢ S-TR-OHL-T - HV Towers of Lattice Steel Design

and VDE 0210, may be stipulated by TRANSCO.

S-TR-OHL-CON (Rev.0-2023) Page 5 of 10

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Conductors / Earthwires

2.3.3 Laying of Conductors and Earthwire

2.3.3.1 Stringing Equipment

The Bidder/Contractor shall supply all necessary tools and tension stringing equipment, which
shall be to the approval of TRANSCO.
Already at tendering stage, Bidders/Contractors shall submit precise details of their tension
stringing techniques and equipment.
The tensioner/puller, of sufficient power, shall be operated hydraulically, providing continuos
and steady pull and tension. The tensioner shall be motorized, to allow winding back of
conductors. The bull wheels shall be lined with neoprene.
Drum stands shall be equipped with suitable brakes, to avoid over-run of conductors.
Whenever tension stringing is in progress, uninterrupted communication is to be ensured
between the operators of tensioner and puller and stringing supervisors stationed at critical
locations/following the running board. TRANSCO will support the Bidder/Contractor in
applying for wireless radio licenses. However, as success in obtaining of licenses cannot be
guaranteed, the Bidder/Contractor shall be prepared to install a suitable wire-telephone system.
Appropriate stringing sheaves shall be used, which will not damage the conductor/earthwire, and
run with very low friction. Stringing sheaves shall have a minimum diameter, measured at the
bottom of the groove, of 20 times conductor/earthwire diameter. In case the conductor’s angle of
approach exceeds 30° to the horizontal, the minimum diameter of the sheaves shall be 30 times
the conductor/earthwire diameter. Sheave surfaces in contact with conductor/earthwire shall be
lined with neoprene or rubber. The Bidder/Contractor shall prove that the surfaces are cleaned
from any other material, to avoid damage to the conductor/earthwire. Sheaves that have been
employed previously for copper conductor stringing shall not be used, under any circumstances.
Stringing sheaves may be hung on the insulator strings, or from hangers of suitable length, and
designed to properly distribute loads to the crossarm. They shall be installed at such height as to
support the conductor/earthwire at its permanent elevation when clipped in.
The compression of dead end clamps shall be performed on bridges/buckets hanged by cranes.
Lowering and laying of conductors on the ground for this purpose shall not be allowed.
The conductors, joints and clamps shall be assembled using the approved tools and shall be
erected in such a manner that no bird-caging, over tensioning of individual wires or layers, over
tensioning or stressing or other deformation or damage to the conductors shall occur. During
stringing of conductor, to avoid any damage to mid span joints, the Bidder/Contractor shall use a
suitable protector with mid span compression joints in case joints are to be passed over stringing
sheaves. The size of the groove of the sheave shall be such that the joint along with protection
can be passed over it smoothly.

2.3.3.2 Stringing Operation

At least two months prior to the commencement of stringing activities, the Bidder/Contractor
shall submit for approval a stringing method statement as well as his stringing schedule
identifying sections, locations of tensioner and puller, the proposed position of the mid span
joints, drum identification numbers, sagging spans and, where appropriate, check sagging span.
In addition details of temporary staying of supports, point of control and other relevant
information including all safety precautions shall be provided.

S-TR-OHL-CON (Rev.0-2023) Page 6 of 10

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Conductors / Earthwires

The stringing equipment and operation shall be such as to avoid over-stressing tower structures
or foundations. Any damage to towers or foundations occurring in such an operation shall be
made good at the expense of the Bidder/Contractor.
Conductors and earth wire shall be strung carefully to avoid loosening of strands, scraping, nicks
or other damage. Bends of less than the minimum bending radius of 20 times the
conductor/earthwire diameter will not be permitted.
After opening of the protective lagging, all conductor drums shall be carefully inspected, for
protruding nails or other potentially damaging items. During paying-out conductors and
earthwire/OPGW, they shall be inspected continuously for any damage, by running through
cotton waste rags, operated by staff designated specifically to this task. Any damage detected, as
well as any damage caused during stringing, shall immediately be reported to TRANSCO, who
will decide on the method of repair or replacement.
The stringing operation shall be executed with due regard to the safety of the OHL, of personnel
and the public. While conductors are being run out, and when being tensioned and finally clipped
in, all conductors shall be earthed by the Bidder/Contractor at points approved by TRANSCO.
For safety of airborne traffic, operating in height restricted areas, the earthwire shall be strung
prior to the conductor and the aircraft warning spheres shall be installed the same day the
earthwire is strung.
Crossing of Public Services :
When the Bidder/Contractor is about to carry out erection of the conductors along or across
power lines or telecommunication circuits or public roads, he shall be responsible for obtaining
consent from TRANSCO of the respective service for his intended work. The Bidder/Contractor
shall give adequate prior notice to the appropriate authorities of the date and time at which he
proposes to carry out the work.
The Bidder/Contractor shall supply and install all guard structures required for crossings over
electric supply and communication lines, roads, highways, obstructions, and for the protection of
the conductor. All guard structures shall be of adequate strength to withstand the stresses to
which they may be subjected. The erection and removal of guard structures is subject to the
approval of TRANSCO. Approved gantries for height restrictions at road crossings during
stringing shall be installed as advised by TRANSCO, without any extra costs.
In addition, the Bidder/Contractor shall supply and install a steel pole-mounted sign boards 250
meters ahead of the points of which OHL crossing a public road (in a way not to be removed by
public). Boards shall face all traffic directions defining the maximum allowable vehicle height.
Boards shall be long lasting as OHL life and according to the specifications of the drawing
number (DWG TR CIV 15).
The use of mid span compression joints for the purpose of pulling out conductors during erection
and the use of insulators and line materials in general for erection purposes will not be allowed.
Auxiliary erection clamps, or hauling devices shall be of approved design, and shall under
erection conditions, allow no relative movement of strands or layers of the conductors. If
required by TRANSCO this property shall be demonstrated by actual test.
Cutting of layers of conductors shall be carried out with tools designed not to damage underlying
strands. Cropping or shearing of complete conductors shall not be permitted. The cut ends of the

S-TR-OHL-CON (Rev.0-2023) Page 7 of 10

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Conductors / Earthwires

conductors and the joints, clamps and fittings attached to the conductors themselves, shall be
treated in an approved manner to prevent ingress of moisture.
Conductors for multi conductor bundles shall be pulled out together and treated in a similar
manner to ensure that the behaviour of each sub conductor remains compatible.
The sequence of running out shall be from the top downwards i.e. the earthwires shall be run out
first, followed by the conductors in succession.
The transmission lines may run parallel to and in fairly close proximity to other transmission
lines, which are energised. In such conditions dangerous voltage build up can occur in the line
being erected. The Bidder/Contractor shall provide suitable earthing procedures and safe
working practices to protect his workmen and others during construction of the line. Such
procedures shall form part of the HSE Plan and the Method Statement on construction to be
provided by the Bidder/Contractor and shall be to the approval of TRANSCO.

2.3.4 Splices
Distribution of conductor lengths available shall be optimized, to arrive at a minimum total
number of joints.
All joints on the conductor and earthwire shall be of compression type, in accordance with the
recommendations of the manufacturer for which all the necessary tools and equipment, such as
compressors, dies etc shall be arranged by the Bidder/Contractor. Each part of the joint shall be
cleaned by wire brush to make it free of rust or dirt etc. and properly greased with anti-corrosive
compound, if required, and as recommended by the manufacturer before the final compression is
done with the compressors.
In case a conductor is damaged, in one point only, to an extent not exceeding 1/6th of the strands
of the outermost layer, either broken or nicked deeper than one third of its diameter, a repair
sleeve shall be installed. Where this limit is exceeded, respectively the damage is not punctiform,
the damaged section of the conductor shall be cut and spliced with a strain compression joint.
The number and location of tension joints for conductor and earth wire shall be approved vy
TRANSCO/ENGINEER.
Tension joints (mid span joints) shall not be located at less than 15 m for the nearest conductor
clamp.
There shall be no more than one joint per conductor in any one span.
No joint shall be located in single span sections.
No splices shall be located in any span crossing main roads, major rivers, navigable canals,
major communication or power lines and in same conductors less than three spans apart.
The Bidder/Contractor shall keep a record of each joint, giving the location of the fitting, the
date of installation, proof of gauge application and the resistance measurement (ductor reading),
along with signature of responsible jointer and witnessing TRANSCO’s inspector.
A similar record shall be provided for all dead-end and jumper clamps.

S-TR-OHL-CON (Rev.0-2023) Page 8 of 10

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Conductors / Earthwires

2.3.5 Sagging
The “equivalent span” method shall be used for the line conductors and earthwire, according to
which the tension in any line section, i.e. between two tension towers, is that which would apply
to a single span equal to the square root of the figure arrived at by dividing the sum of the cubes
of the individual span lengths, in the section considered, by their sum.
Well ahead of the start of stringing works, the Bidder/Contractor shall submit to TRANSCO, for
approval, separate tables for initial and final sags and tensions of the conductor/earthwire. The
tables shall cover all individual line spans. Sags and tensions shall be computed for the
temperature range +5°C to +55°C for the initial, and +5°C to +80°C, for the final table, at 5°
increments. The loading conditions and sag and tension limitations shall be fully in accordance
with the approved sag and tension calculation submitted for the tower design purpose. The initial
sag-table shall include appropriate creep allowances and indicate insulator clipping offsets for all
suspension towers. The initial tensions and sags shall be calculated assuming that the creep
elongation is equal to the elongation produced by a specified temperature rise. The
Bidder/Contractor shall provide a long-term creep calculation for conductor/earthwire based on
ELECTRA publication No 75 by Working Group 22.05 of Study Committee No. 22 (Overhead
Lines).
The length of conductors or earthwires sagged in one operation shall be limited to the length that
can be sagged satisfactorily.
In order to dissipate the initial tension of conductors or earthwire, they shall be left in the
sheaves for at least 48 hours after stringing. Clipping-in shall be done latest 36 hours after
sagging.
Before sagging, the choice of control spans and the target setting calculations shall be submitted
for approval. The tension prescribed in the sag and tension tables shall not be exceeded by more
than 5% at any time during stringing and sagging operations.
Conductor temperature at the moment of sagging shall be checked by an accurate thermometer.
The core shall be pulled from a one meter length of conductor, the thermometer inserted into the
space vacated by the core, and the length of conductor shall be hung fully exposed to the sun at
average conductor height. The temperature reading after reaching a stable value shall be used as
the sagging temperature.
The sag shall be measured with a theodolite. Subject to the approval of TRANSCO, the
Bidder/Contractor may employ other methods of checking sag.
At sharp vertical angles, the sags and tensions shall be checked on both sides of the angle, the
conductor and earthwire shall be checked on the stringing sheaves for equality of tension on both
sides. The suspension insulator assemblies will normally assume vertical positions when
conductor is clamped.
The sag of the component conductors of any one phase bundle shall not differ by more than
25mm.
After clipping-in, sag control measurements shall be performed and recorded by the
Bidder/Contractor, under TRANSCO’s supervision, for a host of spans selected by TRANSCO,
at his discretion. This shall cover, but will not be limited to, at least two spans per line section.

S-TR-OHL-CON (Rev.0-2023) Page 9 of 10

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Conductors / Earthwires

Wherever sags are found outside the permitted tolerances, the entire section shall be put back
into running blocks and re-sagged properly.
Prior to line handing-over, the Bidder/Contractor shall measure and tabulate ground- and
obstacle clearances for all qualified crossing spans, and all other spans selected by TRANSCO.
The table shall comprise all relevant data, as distance of clearance point to the nearest tower,
ambient temperature at the time of measurement, extrapolated clearance at this point, for
maximum conductor temperature, etc., to TRANSCO’s satisfaction. After TRANSCO’s
approval, these data shall be inserted in the profile plans, at the appropriate locations.

2.3.6 Dampers, Spacers

Stockbridge dampers, spacer dampers shall be installed in quantities and positions, as determined
by the approved damping study.
Stockbridge dampers shall hang plumb and in the same vertical line for each circuit after
installation, with drain holes facing downwards. The drain holes shall be checked for cleanliness
prior to installation.
Spacers and spacer dampers shall be installed in every span, in the same relative positions to
each other, on all phases.

2.3.7 Jumper Loops

Jumper loops shall connect all tension strings, between terminal fittings and shall be formed into
a parabolic shape, as will afford the minimum clearances specified on the tower outline
drawings. To maintain minimum clearances under loop swing, the Bidder/Contractor may utilize
jumper loop suspension insulators (dolly sets), however, with no extra cost to TRANSCO. Pipe-
type jumper loops may be proposed, subject to TRANSCO’s approval.
When setting compression jumper terminals special care has to be taken to prevent any
“basketting” of the conductor. After completion, the jumper loops shall present a smooth and
uniform appearance without sharp bends.
At one terminal tower bottom crossarm jumper loops shall be transposed, to facilitate correct
phase sequencing in the substations. This transposition shall be achieved with one normal and
one extra large size jumper loop maintaining required minimum inter-phase clearance under all
operating conditions.
Following the installation of all joints including bolted jumpers, the electrical resistance of all
joints shall be measured by means of approved micro-ohm meter equipment. The maximum
permissible electrical resistance of each joint shall not be more than 75% of that of an equivalent
length of conductor. The values of resistance measured shall be recorded on a schedule that shall
be submitted to TRANSCO for his approval and the same shall form part of the final records.

S-TR-OHL-CON (Rev.0-2023) Page 10 of 10

 STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRIC WORKS

OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
(Applicable Technical Standards, Tests, etc.)

TRANSCO STANDARD : S-TR-OHL-GEN (REV.0-2009)

S-TR-OHL-GEN (Rev.0-2009) Page 1 of 10

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
General Requirements
(Applicable Technical Standards, Tests, etc.)

CONTENTS

1 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES ....................................................................... 3

1.1 General .............................................................................................................................. 3
1.2 Associated Specifications.................................................................................................. 4
1.3 Fundamental Design Data ................................................................................................. 4
1.4 Drawings ........................................................................................................................... 4
1.5 Site Conditions .................................................................................................................. 4
2 APPLICABLE CODES & STANDARDS..................................................................... 5
2.1 Overhead Lines ................................................................................................................. 5
2.1.1 General .............................................................................................................................. 5
2.1.2 Overhead Lines of Lattice Steel Tower Design ................................................................ 5
2.2 OPGW ............................................................................................................................... 8
2.3 Alternative Codes and Standards ...................................................................................... 9
2.4 Precedence of Codes and Standards .................................................................................. 9
3 APPLICABLE TESTS.................................................................................................. 10
4 APPROVAL DATA AND DRAWINGS ..................................................................... 10

S-TR-OHL-GEN (Rev.0-2009) Page 2 of 10

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
General Requirements
(Applicable Technical Standards, Tests, etc.)

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
(Applicable Technical Standards, Tests, etc.)

1 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES

1.1 General
This part of the Specification shall cover:
¾ Design
¾ Manufacturing
¾ Factory Testing
¾ Marking and Packing
¾ Shipping
¾ Transportation to Site
¾ Installation
¾ Site Testing and Commissioning

of Overhead Transmission/Distribution Lines specified in the following specifications:

¾ S-TR-OHL-SURV - Surveying Works
¾ S-TR-OHL-T - HV/MV Towers of Lattice Steel Design
¾ S-TR-OHL-CON - Conductors / Earthwires
¾ S-TR-OHL-INS - Insulators
¾ S-TR-OHL-OPGW - Optical Ground Wires
¾ S-TR-OHL-HW - Hardware and Fittings
¾ S-TR-OHL-AIR - Aircraft Warning Systems

Standard designs and models from the Bidder's/Contractor’s manufacturing program are
preferred, provided they meet the requirements of this Specification, and serve the intended
purpose.
It is not the intent to specify completely herein all the details of design and manufacturing of the
above Overhead Transmission/Distribution Line Components. It may be noted that norms
specified are the bare minimum that are required. All Overhead Transmission/Distribution Line
Components shall conform in all respects to high standards of engineering design and
workmanship and should be capable of performing continuous commercial operation within the
parameters guaranteed by the Bidder/Contractor in a manner acceptable to TRANSCO, who will

S-TR-OHL-GEN (Rev.0-2009) Page 3 of 10

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
General Requirements
(Applicable Technical Standards, Tests, etc.)

interpret the meanings of drawings and specifications and shall have power to reject any material
which in his judgement is not in accordance with the specifications and the guaranteed
parameters.
If a substantial improvement of any of the specified technical requirements, which is seen by the
Bidder/Contractor to provide economical advantages to TRANSCO, it is desired to be presented
in the Bid, this improvement may be proposed in addition to that, which conforms to the
specified design, as an alternative. However, it is not mandatory that the alternative design is to
be accepted, but shall be subject to the decision of TRANSCO upon evaluation of the same. The
difference in price shall be clearly stated in percentage/unit.
All material and equipment to be supplied under these Specifications shall be new and unused.

1.2 Associated Specifications

Details of equipment associated with the a.m. specifications are specified in the following parts
of the Standard Technical Specification:
¾ S-TR-CORR - Corrosion Protection and Painting Color Codes
¾ S-TR-EARTH-GROUND - Earthing/Grounding Systems

1.3 Fundamental Design Data

The fundamental design data are specified in the following part of the Standard Technical
Specification.
¾ S-TR-GEN-GDF - General Conditions
¾ S-TR-GEN-STC - Special Technical Requirements
¾ S-TR-GEN-SFL - System Characteristics
¾ S-TR-GEN-EDF - Electrical Design Fundamentals
¾ S-TR-GEN-CDF - Civil Design Fundamentals
¾ S-TR-GEN-ID - Components Marking
¾ S-TR-GEN-SQA - Safety and Quality

1.4 Drawings
Typical Drawings of the concerned Overhead Transmission/Distribution Lines Specifications are
attached to the respective Technical Standard Specification.

1.5 Site Conditions

For site requirements, reference shall be made to the Standard Technical Specification Part:

S-TR-OHL-GEN (Rev.0-2009) Page 4 of 10

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
General Requirements
(Applicable Technical Standards, Tests, etc.)

¾ S-TR-GEN-GDF - General Conditions

2 APPLICABLE CODES & STANDARDS

The equipment provided under this Specification shall be manufactured under quality assurance
system conforming to latest ISO standards or its Equivalent National Standard.
Reference shall be made to:
¾ S-TR-GEN-GDF - General Requirements - General Conditions

The latest Revision or Edition of the following Standards shall be applicable:

2.1 Overhead Lines

2.1.1 General

IEC 60826 - Loading and Strength of Overhead Transmission Lines

EN 50341-1 - Overhead Electrical Lines exceeding AC 45 kV, Part 1: general
Requirements – Common Specifications
ESI 43-8 - Overhead line clearances
ISO 2859-1 - Sampling procedures for inspection by attributes. Part 1:
Sampling plans indexed by acceptable quality level (AQL) for
lot-by-lot inspection.
AASHTO - Standard Specification for Structural Supports of High Signs,
Luminaries and Traffic Signals" issued by "Subcommittee of
Bridges and Structures

2.1.2 Overhead Lines of Lattice Steel Tower Design

2.1.2.1 Tower Design

DIN VDE 0210 - Planning and Design of OHTL with Rated Voltages above 1 kV

2.1.2.2 Towers Materials

EN 10025 - Steels for General Structural Purpose (Quality Standard)
BS 4360 - Specification for Weldable Structural Steel
ASTM A-123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings

S-TR-OHL-GEN (Rev.0-2009) Page 5 of 10

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
General Requirements
(Applicable Technical Standards, Tests, etc.)

on Iron and Steel Products

ANSI/ASCE 10-97 - Design of Latticed Steel Transmission Towers
ASCE Manual - Guide for Design of Steel Transmission Towers
No. 52
DIN 126 - Bolts and Nuts Hexagonal Type
DIN 127 - Spring Lockable Washers with Square Ends or Triangle Ends
DIN 267 - Fasteners; Technical specifications; general requirements
DIN 57105 - Operation of Power Installations
DIN 48088 - Earth Clamping Bolts
IEC 60652 - Loading test on overhead line towers
DIN/VDE 0141 - VDE-specification for earthing in installations of rated voltages
above 1 kV a.c.
DIN 7990 - Steel Hexagon Head Bolts for Structural Steel

2.1.2.3 Conductors
IEC 60104 - Aluminium-magnesium-silicon alloy wire for OHTL
IEC 60888 - Zinc-coated steel wires for stranded conductors
IEC 60889 - Hard-drawn aluminium wire for OHTL conductor
IEC 61089 - Round wire concentric lay overhead electrical stranded
conductor
IEC 61232 - Aluminium-clad steel wires for electrical purposes
DIN 46391 - Delivery Drums for Conductors
ASTM B-549 - Standard Specification for Concentric Lay Stranded Conductors
ACSR/AW
ASTM B- 415 - Hard-drawn aluminium-clad steel wires
ASTM B-416 - Standard Specification for Concentric Lay Stranded Aluminium
Clad Steel Conductors

2.1.2.4 Insulators
IEC 61109 - Composite insulators for ac overhead lines with nominal
voltage greater than 1000 V
IEC 61211 - Insulators of ceramic material or glass for OHTLs with a
nominal voltage greater than 1 kV

S-TR-OHL-GEN (Rev.0-2009) Page 6 of 10

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
General Requirements
(Applicable Technical Standards, Tests, etc.)

IEC 61466 - Composite string insulator units for overhead lines with a
nominal voltage greater than 1 000 V, parts 1 and 2.
IEC 60383 - Insulators for overhead lines with nominal voltage above 1000 V
IEC 60587 - Test method for evaluating resistance to tracking and erosion of
electrical insulating materials under severe ambient conditions
IEC 60815 - Guide for the selection of insulators in respect of polluted
conditions
IEC 60471 - Dimensions of clevis and tongue couplings of string insulator
units

2.1.2.5 Insulator Strings

IEC 60060-1 - High voltage test techniques
IEC 60383 - Insulators for overhead lines with nominal voltage above 1000
V (Part 2)
IEC 60437 - Radio interference test on high-voltage insulators
IEC 60471 - Dimensions of Clevis and Tongue Couplings of String Insulator
Units
IEC 60815 Guide for the selection of insulators in respect of polluted
conditions
IEC 61109 - Composite insulators for ac overhead lines with nominal
voltage greater than 1000 V
IEC 61466 - Composite string insulator units for overhead lines with a
nominal voltage greater than 1 000 V
IEC 62217 - Fluorescent UV irradiation tests

2.1.2.6 Insulator Fittings, Hardware and Accessories

DIN/VDE 0212 - Fittings for overhead lines and switchgear, Part 50 to 53
IEC 60383 - Insulators for overhead lines with nominal voltage above 1000
V
IEC 61284 - Overhead lines, Requirements and tests for fittings
IEC 61854 - Requirements and Tests for Spacers
IEC 61897 - Overhead Lines: Requirements and Tests for stockbridge type
aeolian vibration dampers
IEEE Report - Standardisation of conductor vibration measurements
PAS-85

S-TR-OHL-GEN (Rev.0-2009) Page 7 of 10

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
General Requirements
(Applicable Technical Standards, Tests, etc.)

1996
DIN 48062-2 - Overhead Lines, clevis caps for insulators
DIN 48066-2 - Hinges, supporting hinges (for overhead power lines)
DIN 48068 - Protective fitting attachment; for overhead lines, connection
dimensions
DIN 48069-1 - Double eyes; without protective fitting attachment; for
overhead power lines
DIN 48069-2 - Double eyes, with protective fitting, for overhead power lines
DIN 48070-1 - Triangular yokes for overhead power lines (only form ‘AS’ to
be employed)
DIN 48073 - Connecting bolts for overhead power lines (only form ‘S’ to be
used)
DIN 48074 - Eyes and clevisses; connecting dimensions
DIN 48075 - Parallel groove clamps for aluminium stranded conductors and
for aluminium conductors steel-reinforced for overhead power
lines
DIN 48078-1 - Clevis straps for overhead lines; for coupling to connecting
bolts on the strap side (only forms ‘AS’, ‘BS’ to be used)
DIN 48083 - Press Dies for Compression Connections
DIN 48088/2 - Earth Clamping Bolts
DIN 48215 - Clamps and Connectors for Overhead Power Lines
DIN 48334 - Turnbuckles for overhead power lines

2.1.2.7 Aircraft Warning System

ICAO - International Standards and Recommended Practices
AERODROMES Annex 14 to the Convention of International
Civil Aviation, Volume 1, Aerodrome Design and Operations,
Chapter 6, Visual Aids For Denoting Obstacles.
+Aerodrome design manual paragraph 14.7, Obstacle lighting
high-tension overhead wires

2.2 OPGW
ITU-T G. 650 - Definition and test methods for the relative parameters of single
mode fibres

S-TR-OHL-GEN (Rev.0-2009) Page 8 of 10

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
General Requirements
(Applicable Technical Standards, Tests, etc.)

ITU-T G. 652 - Characteristics of single mode optical fibre cable

ASTM 399-82 - Concentric lay stranded aluminium alloy 6201 – 781
ASTM 399- 90 - Standard specifications for aluminium alloy 6201 – T81 wire
for electrical purposes
ASTM B415-81 - Hard drawn aluminium clad steel wire

ASTM B415-92 - Standard specification for hard drawn aluminium clad steel
wire
ASTM B416-81 - Concentric lay stranded aluminium clad steel wire

ASTM B498-83 - Zinc coated (galvanised) steel core wire or aluminium

conductors steel reinforced (ACSR)
IEC 60304 - Colour coding of fibres
IEC 60104 - Aluminium – magnesium- silicon alloy wire
IEC 60793-1 - Optical fibre: generic specification - measuring methods of
dimensions
IEC 60794-1 - Optical fibre cables, generic specification
IEC 1232 - Aluminium – Clad steel Wires for Electrical Purposes
IEC 61284 - OHL requirements and tests for fittings
IEEE 1138 - Standard construction of composite fibre optic overhead ground
wire (OPGW) for use on electric utility power lines
IEEE 4 - Standard Techniques for High Voltage Testing
EIA/TIA 455-81 - Compound flow (drip) test for filled fibre optic cables
EIA/TIA 455-31B - Fibre tensile proof test method

2.3 Alternative Codes and Standards

The Bidder/Contractor may propose alternative Codes and Standards provided it is proven that it
gives an equivalent degree of quality as the referenced Codes and Standards. Acceptability of
any alternative Codes or Standard is at the discretion of TRANSCO.

2.4 Precedence of Codes and Standards

In case of discrepancy between these Specifications and any of the applicable Codes and
Standards, the following order of precedence shall apply:

S-TR-OHL-GEN (Rev.0-2009) Page 9 of 10

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
General Requirements
(Applicable Technical Standards, Tests, etc.)

i. These specifications.
ii. Applicable Codes and Standards.
iii. Acceptable Alternative Codes and Standards.
The Bidder/Contractor shall note that compliance of the manufacturer with the provision of these
specifications does not relieve him from his responsibility to supply the equipment and
accessories of proper design, electrically and mechanically suited to meet the operating
guarantees at the specified service conditions.

3 APPLICABLE TESTS
Details of Tests are specified in Standard Technical Specification, Part:
S-TR-GEN-GDF - General Requirements – General Conditions

4 APPROVAL DATA AND DRAWINGS

At the times, and in the quantities agreed upon, the following information and data must be
submitted to TRANSCO for approval prior to manufacturing of the equipment:
• Vendor(s) details / reference list
• Completely filled in data sheets
• Testing schedule
• Documentation formats and quantities.

S-TR-OHL-GEN (Rev.0-2009) Page 10 of 10

 STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRIC WORKS

OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES

( SPECIFICATION )

HARDWARE AND FITTINGS

TRANSCO STANDARD : S-TR-OHL-HW (REV.0-2018)

S-TR-OHL-HW (Rev.0-2018) Page 1 of 11

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Hardware and Fittings

CONTENTS

1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................... 3
1.1 Drawings ........................................................................................................................... 3
1.2 Equipment Identification and Color Codes ....................................................................... 3
2 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ...................................................................................... 3
2.1 General .............................................................................................................................. 3
2.2 Insulator String Hardware ................................................................................................. 5
2.2.1 General .............................................................................................................................. 5
2.2.2 Arcing Rings...................................................................................................................... 5
2.2.3 Yoke Assembly ................................................................................................................. 6
2.3 Conductor and Earthwire Accessories............................................................................... 7
2.3.1 Compression Mid-Span Joints........................................................................................... 7
2.3.2 Repair Sleeves ................................................................................................................... 7
2.3.3 Suspension Clamps............................................................................................................ 7
2.3.4 Tension Clamps ................................................................................................................. 8
2.3.5 Damping/Spacing Devices ................................................................................................ 8
2.3.6 Jumper Loop Spacer ........................................................................................................ 11

S-TR-OHL-HW (Rev.0-2018) Page 2 of 11

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Hardware and Fittings

HARDWARE AND FITTINGS

1 GENERAL
This part of the specification covers design, manufacture, testing, erection and commissioning of
overhead line hardware and fittings.
For applicable technical standards, tests and general requirements please refer to:
 S-TR-OHL-GEN - General Requirements (Applicable Technical Standards, Tests,
etc.)

1.1 Drawings
Typical Drawings for Conductor Clamps and OPGW & Earthwire Assembly provided in the
Drawings Section are as follows:
Drawing No. Title
DWG TR OHL 06 01 Conductor Clamps
DWG TR OHL 06 02 OPGW & Earthwire Suspension Assembly for all Voltage Levels

1.2 Equipment Identification and Color Codes

Concerning Hardware and Fittings Identification reference shall be made to Standard Technical
Specification, Part:
 S-TR-GEN-ID - Components Marking

2 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

2.1 General
All hardware and accessories shall comply with the requirements of this Specification and shall
be manufactured and tested in accordance with IEC or DIN/VDE Standards. Other authoritative
national or international standards may be acceptable, subject to approval by TRANSCO, if the
requirements are equal to or exceed applicable IEC or VDE Standards. All hardware/accessories
shall conform to one single standard.
All parts shall be marked durably (embossing, for ferrous parts before galvanizing) with
mechanical and electrical rating.
All ferrous metal and iron parts of insulator- and line hardware shall be hot-dip galvanized. If
not otherwise specified, the zinc coating shall be at least 610 g/m² and it shall be tested in
accordance with the relevant standards.
Bolts shall be made of steel having a minimum tensile strength of grade 8.8 according to DIN
ISO898 Part 1. All bolts shall be locked with hot-dip galvanized nuts, which are to be secured in

S-TR-OHL-HW (Rev.0-2018) Page 3 of 11

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Hardware and Fittings

a form-locking manner (form “S”, DIN 48073). Bolts secured by split pins and flat washers only
are not permitted. Split pins for securing nuts of fittings shall be of tinned copper or stainless
steel, washers shall be of stainless steel.
Clamps which are in direct contact with the conductor shall match the conductor material.
Elastomers or other non-metallic materials shall have good resistance to ageing and be capable
of withstanding temperatures between -40°C and +100°C, without change of essential properties.
The materials shall have adequate resistance to the effects of ozone, ultraviolet radiation and air
pollution over the entire temperature range. Further, these materials shall be non-conductive.
Also, these materials shall be bonded by vulcanization to the metal surfaces in order to avoid
crevice corrosion. To avoid potential separation and tracking paths on the elastomer surface
between elastomer and metallic parts, metallic flexible bridges are to be installed.
Design of hardware and accessories consisting of part assemblies like spacer dampers, dampers,
suspension clamps, etc. shall cater for captive interconnection of as many parts as possible to
ensure simple and safe mounting. This applies in particular to bolts, screws, washers and safety
sheets.
The hardware fittings offered shall be suitable for the employment of hot line maintenance
techniques so that usual hot line operations can be carried out with ease, speed and safety. The
technique adopted for hot line maintenance shall be generally bare hand method and hot stick
method. The Bidder/Contractor should clearly establish in the tender, the suitability of his
fittings for hot line maintenance.
Line side yoke plates shall have a notch and a working hole of suitable size to facilitate hot line
working. The design of the arcing rings shall be such that they can be easily replaced by
employing hot line maintenance techniques.
The design of all conductor/insulator hardware and accessories shall avoid sharp corners or
projections which would produce high electrical stress in normal working conditions. The
design of adjacent metal parts and mating surfaces shall be such as to prevent corrosion of the
contact surfaces and to maintain good electrical contact under service conditions.
Particular care shall be taken during manufacture of conductors and fittings and during
subsequent handling to ensure smooth surfaces.
Hardware and accessories shall conform to the standards stated below, if this Specification does
not stipulate otherwise:
 Fittings for OHTL and Switchgear IEC/DIN/VDE0212
- static mechanical behaviour part 50
- dynamic mechanical behaviour of anti-vibration fittings part 51
- electrical contact behaviour of current carrying fittings part 52
under normal operating conditions
- partial discharge characteristics, tests part 53
 Clevis caps for insulators

S-TR-OHL-HW (Rev.0-2018) Page 4 of 11

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Hardware and Fittings

 Hinges (only form “S” to be utilized) DIN 48066

 Connecting dimensions for protective fittings
 Eye links
 Yokes (only form “S” to be utilized) DIN 48070/1
 Connecting bolts (only form “S” to be utilized) DIN 48073
 Connecting dimensions for eyes and clevisses
 P.G. Clamps
 Clevis straps (only form “S” to be utilized)
 Compression dies
 Earth clamping bolts
 Clamps & joints IEC/DIN 48215
 Turnbuckles DIN 48334

2.2 Insulator String Hardware

2.2.1 General
All insulator strings shall be equipped with appropriate protective devices, such as arcing rings.
The design of these protective devices shall support loading during the installation of insulator
strings and stringing of conductors and to reduce, as far as possible, damage to the conductors,
clamps, insulator strings and arcing rings under all flashover conditions.

2.2.2 Arcing Rings

Arcing accessories used in insulator strings shall, in principle, meet two requirements:
i. Protection of the insulant against intensive thermal radiation of the arc plasma.
ii. Improvement, respectively homogenizing of the electric field around the live end of the
insulator string.
Both requirements are met by the following design characteristics:
To cater for instant transfer of the arc root of a pollution flashover from the insulator to the
protective fitting, the arcing accessory shall ring the insulator between the metallic cap and the
last shed.
To facilitate the fast transfer of the arc root from the ring to the final burning point, the short
circuit current supply shall be unidirectional, at any point of the accessory. The final burning
point shall be designed in a way that the reflection to the insulant is kept at a low level (shielding
effect). The inevitable consumption at the final burning point must not impair appreciably the
performance of the accessory (final burning point designed as sphere). The shortest possible
distance between final burning point and insulant with respect to current intensity and duration

S-TR-OHL-HW (Rev.0-2018) Page 5 of 11

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Hardware and Fittings

of radiation shall be determined thus that no thermal damage to the insulant may occur. At the
final burning point, the plasma jet shall emerge about vertically to the insulator axis and burn
down stable without pendulum motions. The arcing accessory shall be provided with one final
burning point only.
The arcing accessory shall be made from solid material of small diameter (about 16 to 30 mm
diameter). It shall be avoided that the arc root will be supplied over a larger area (high moving
speed of arc root).
Electrodes shall be made from steel (low consumption, poor thermal conductivity). Aluminium
or aluminium alloys are not admissible (high consumption related with considerable pollution of
insulant).
The maximum admissible temperature of the electrode at the final burning point, with respect to
the zinc coating and loss of tensile strength of the electrode material must not exceed 400°C.
This requirement is met at a short circuit current density of not more than 70 A/mm², for a max.
duration of 1 second.
The attachment of the arcing accessory to the respective string element shall be designed thus
that a contact force of at least 40 kN can be applied, and that no welding will be produced during
short-circuit, which may impair the performance.
The live ring shall be corona free at highest system voltage.
The dimensions of arcing accessories shall be adapted to the insulator types employed, the
thermal and dynamic stresses and to the highest system voltage (insulation co-ordination).
The manufacturer shall be bound to prove the thermal and electrical performance of arcing
accessories, either by supply of acceptable type test reports, or by conducting of type tests in
presence of TRANSCO.

2.2.3 Yoke Assembly

Double insulator strings, where applicable, shall be fixed at two points on the crossarms. The
yoke assembly located between the insulator strings and the conductor/conductor bundle shall
provide single-point load transfer. It shall be capable to transfer the static tensile load, acting on
the string, uniformly to both legs of the double string, as well as to the connected conductors.
The shock during rupture of one insulator in the string, from the initial state up to the quiescent
state, shall be dissipated thus that no consequential insulator breakage will occur, on the
remaining healthy double string leg. The yoke assembly shall be capable of reducing the
dynamic forces of a load transposition below the level harmful to the remaining insulators.
Displacement of tension clamps after load transposition shall be kept at the minimum.
The yoke assemblies shall be capable of coping with the anticipated static and dynamic stresses.

S-TR-OHL-HW (Rev.0-2018) Page 6 of 11

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Hardware and Fittings

2.3 Conductor and Earthwire Accessories

2.3.1 Compression Mid-Span Joints

Compression splices for the conductors shall be of two parts in case of composite conductors,
with steel and aluminium sleeves, with appropriate no-oxide filler compound.
Earthwire compression joints shall consist of high strength rust-proof sleeves with filler
compound, suitable for the earthwire chosen.
Tension joints shall be tested by the Bidder/Contractor to ensure that they will stand at least 95%
of the rated ultimate strength of the conductor/earthwire.
The maximum permissible resistance of each joint shall not be more than 75% of that of an
equivalent length of conductor/earthwire.
To facilitate control of compressions made at site, the fittings manufacturer shall supply free of
charge, for each type of joint 3 sets of dimensional gauges (go/no go) to TRANSCO. The gauges
shall be manufactured of grade A4 stainless steel. Each gauge shall be engraved with
manufacturer’s name, conductor designation, die size, and actual gauge width.
Die compression areas shall be clearly marked on each joint assembly. Direction of compression
shall be marked by arrows. The letters, number and other markings on the finished joint shall be
distinct, durable (embossing/engraving) and legible.

2.3.2 Repair Sleeves

Repair sleeves either of the compression type or of preformed armor rod type, best suited for the
conductor material, shall be applied to reinforce a conductor having some of the strands
damaged. Every repair procedure is subject to prior approval by TRANSCO.
Repair sleeves shall be used to make good a conductor of which not more than one sixth of the
strands in the outermost layers have been severed or damaged. A maximum of two repair sleeves
per section will be allowed.
No repair sleeves shall be placed on qualified crossing spans (traffic ways, power/telecom lines,
pipelines). In case of conductor damage in such spans, the conductor has to be exchanged
beyond the adjacent towers.

2.3.3 Suspension Clamps

Suspension clamps for attachment of conductors to insulator strings, and for earthwires to
suspension assemblies at suspension towers shall be of the Armor Grip Suspension type.
For AAC, AAAC, ACSR, AACSR and ACSR/AS conductors the clamp bodies shall be of
forged aluminium alloy. The rod material must be drawn aluminium alloy with a copper content
of not more than 0.02%. Bolts and other details shall be made of forged steel, hot-dip galvanized,
or stainless steel and shall conform to the drawings.

S-TR-OHL-HW (Rev.0-2018) Page 7 of 11

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Hardware and Fittings

In consideration of the arising mechanical forces, design and mass of clamp shall be determined
such, that the mass moment of inertia of clamp related to the rotational axis is kept to a
minimum. The rotational axis of the clamp shall level with the longitudinal axis of the conductor.
It must be ensured that the tappet of the clamp body does not slip, but roll in the strap-hole under
longitudinal movement of the conductor.
The clamp manufacturer shall demonstrate to TRANSCO that the resonance of the system
“suspension clamp plus conductor” is far above of the highest relevant frequency of aeolian
vibrations.
The clamp shall be capable of withstanding a conductor tension equivalent to 50% of the
admissible maximum conductor tension without any conductor slippage. However, maximum
tower load shall not be exceeded, whichever is lower.
The clamping force, i.e. the size of the bolts shall be chosen such, that a contact force is
produced which satisfies the electrical and mechanical requirements. The body of the clamp
with it’s suspension devices must be capable to withstand the admissible thermal conductor
stress without any damage, in the event of a short-circuit. conductor wires in the vicinity of the
clamp shall not be damaged.

2.3.4 Tension Clamps

Tension clamps shall be of the compression type. Clamps for composite conductors shall consist
of two parts, with steel and aluminium sleeves, with appropriate no-oxide filler compound.
Clamps for the earthwire shall consist of high strength rust-proof sleeves with filler compound,
suitable for the earthwire chosen.
Tension clamps shall be tested by the Bidder/Contractor to ensure that they will withstand at
least 95% of the rated ultimate strength of the conductor/earthwire.
The electrical conductivity and current carrying capacity of the clamp/cable lug assembly shall
not be less than 135% of that of a piece of conductor/earthwire of same length.
The assembly shall comprise also the appropriate compression jumper cable lug.
Contact planes between clamps and lugs shall be protected against oxidation and mechanical
damage with strippable plastic covers. It shall be ensured that no degradation of conductivity is
introduced by those covers.
To minimize the jumper pull at the welded portion of the jumper lug, the same shall be mounted
at 60 degrees inclined with respect to the axis of the main conductor.
For each type of clamp, 3 sets of compression gauges shall be supplied.

2.3.5 Damping/Spacing Devices

The Bidders/Contractors are requested to quote a system of fittings which ensures:
i. Proper horizontal bundle spacing of 400 mm or 450 mm (depending upon conductor size
and spacing) under all service conditions.

S-TR-OHL-HW (Rev.0-2018) Page 8 of 11

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Hardware and Fittings

ii. Proper bundle spacing after short-circuit faults with the maximum allowable short-circuit
current. The Bidder/Contractor has to prove, either by test or calculation, that this
requirement is fulfilled.
iii. Suppression of aeolian vibrations and sub-span oscillations, to a level of alternate bending
strain of the conductor below 150 x 10-6 m per m over the relevant frequency range, at
suspension/tension and other fixing points, e.g. damper clamp or spacer clamp.
The Bidder/Contractor shall submit a full and complete specification of the system offered, with
drawings, calculations and a vibration study, showing the vibration intensity of the line with and
without the proposed system and giving also quantity per span and exact positions of devices
required.
Special attention shall be paid to spans with concentrated masses as e.g. warning spheres. The
vibration study must be based on measured values of the conductor’s mechanical self-damping
and on the dampers measured non-linear complex impedance. If no independently witnessed test
reports are available, to TRANSCO’s satisfaction, the tests shall be performed by the
Bidder/Contractor, in presence of TRANSCO.
The Bidder/Contractor shall also prove that the dampers and other fittings (e.g. spheres) are not
dynamically overloaded under service conditions, to avoid breakages of messenger cables,
clamps.
The Bidder/Contractor shall submit the final vibration study, based on the actual spans of the
OHTL.
The validity of the study shall be verified by actual vibration measurements, to be carried out by
the Bidder/Contractor using an approved third party other than the manufacturer on the
completed line, in a method satisfactory to TRANSCO.
The damping system proposed shall be only a combination of spacer dampers and stockbridge
dampers.
Approval of the vibration dampers proposed will be subject to satisfaction of the following test:
1. Dynamic characteristic test, giving power consumption and non-linear complex impedance
curves as function of the frequency for vibration velocities in the range from 0.025/m/s to
0.2 m/s.
The damper shall be vertically mounted on a shaker table and driven with constant table
velocities in the range from 0.025 m/s to 0.2 m/s over the frequency range of 150/D to
1500/D, where D is the conductor diameter in mm.
The frequency shall be continuously varied with 0.2 decades/minute over the frequency
range.
The reaction force and the phase between the reaction force and the velocity shall be
measured and power and impedance shall be plotted against the frequency over the given
frequency range for different vibration velocities as indicated above.
2. Fatigue test, showing the dynamic endurance of the damper.

S-TR-OHL-HW (Rev.0-2018) Page 9 of 11

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Hardware and Fittings

The damper shall be driven for 10 exp. +8 cycles over a frequency range selected from the
vibrations study. Afterwards, the dynamic characteristic test shall be repeated. There shall
be no significant difference in the dynamic characteristic curves taken before and after the
fatigue test.
For more and detailed information see DIN VDE 0212 Part 51 (issue July 1986).
Approval of spacer dampers proposed will be subject to the following tests:
1. Fatigue test, showing the dynamic endurance of the spacer dampers and their impact on the
conductors.
Spacer dampers shall be mounted in a test span with the appropriate conductor bundle.
The bundle shall be driven for 10 exp. +8 cycles at a free span vibration angle of 0.0058
rad (bending angle of 20 minutes). There shall be no significant damage at the spacer
damper and on the conductors at the spacer clamps after the termination of the fatigue test.
The following tests shall be carried out for both, vibration dampers and spacer dampers:
1. Corona test, to be carried out in a virtually dark laboratory. Only one set up of
dampers/spacer dampers may be tested. The dampers shall be installed on the conductor
bundle.
The sample shall be subjected to 50 Hz voltage, to determine the corona extinction voltage
level. The corona extinction voltage is the voltage at which the dampers/spacer dampers
are free from visible and audible corona discharges.
The corona extinction voltage level shall not be less than the corona extinction voltage of
the bundle itself. For more and detailed information see DIN VDE 0212, Part 53 (issue
April 1985).
2. Accelerated Ageing test, demonstrating the long-term suitability of used Elastomers under
heat/ultraviolet cycles. The test procedure shall be proposed by the Bidder/Contractor,
subject to TRANSCO’s approval.
Additional requirements for Damping Devices:
1. Material
For material, reference is made to Clause 2.1 of this Chapter. In case of vibration dampers, the
messenger cable shall be made of stainless steel grade A4.
All material used shall withstand the exposure conditions encountered with a minimum operating
life of 30 years.
2. Design
Elastomers used shall be protected from direct ultraviolet radiation. Welding of parts will not be
accepted. When using screw-type clamps for the fixing, the average specific surface pressure
between conductor and channel of the clamp must not be less than 5 N/mm² and not more than
20 N/mm².

S-TR-OHL-HW (Rev.0-2018) Page 10 of 11

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Hardware and Fittings

To maintain the manufacturers’ recommended torque and to avoid human errors; only colour
coded breakaway type bolts shall be provided on both rigid spacers and spacer dampers. The
required torque to break the head shall be marked on the drawings and also embossed on the
clamp body.
If one of the conductors forming a bundle should break, the spacer damper shall be able to
absorb any forces thereby produced. However, deformations leading to functional losses of the
damper are tolerable.
Performance of spacer dampers shall be free of noise.
In case of stockbridge dampers, the weight shall not be cast on the messenger cable. Further, the
weight shall be designed in a way that excludes any collection of water. The mass of damper
clamps shall not exceed 10% of the total damper weight.
3. Marking
Each vibration damper shall be durably marked with:
 Origin, such as manufacturer’s name or trade mark
 Manufacturer’s catalogue- or drawing number
 Applicable conductor diameter range
 Year of manufacture
 Quality reference, on the bolts.
4. Installation
Damping devices shall be suitable for installation/removal by use of hotline techniques.

2.3.6 Jumper Loop Spacer

All jumper loops made of line conductor shall be equipped with rigid spacers to prevent
conductor clashing under short circuit. A minimum of one spacer every 2.0 m shall be used.
These spacers shall be designed to serve also as loop stability weights.

S-TR-OHL-HW (Rev.0-2018) Page 11 of 11

 STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRIC WORKS

OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES

( SPECIFICATION )

INSULATORS

TRANSCO STANDARD : S-TR-OHL-INS (REV.0-2018)

S-TR-OHL-INS (Rev.0-2018) Page 1 of 10

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Insulators

CONTENTS

1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................... 3
1.1 Drawings ........................................................................................................................... 3
1.2 Equipment Identification and Color Codes ....................................................................... 3
2 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ...................................................................................... 4
2.1 Insulators ........................................................................................................................... 4
2.1.1 Insulator Strings ................................................................................................................ 4
2.1.2 Insulator Units ................................................................................................................... 4
2.2 Installation of Insulator Strings ......................................................................................... 8
2.3 Marking ............................................................................................................................. 9
2.4 Packing ............................................................................................................................ 10

S-TR-OHL-INS (Rev.0-2018) Page 2 of 10

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Insulators

HV INSULATORS

1 GENERAL
This part of the specification covers design, manufacture, testing, erection and commissioning of
HV overhead line insulators.
For applicable technical standards, tests and general requirements please refer to:
 S-TR-OHL-GEN - General Requirements (Applicable Technical Standards, Tests,
etc.)

1.1 Drawings
Typical Drawings for OHL Insulators provided in the Drawings Section are as follows:
Drawing No. Title
DWG TR OHL 04 01 Single Suspension String 400 kV OHL
DWG TR OHL 04 02 Double Suspension String 400 kV OHL
DWG TR OHL 04 03 Single Tension String 400 kV OHL
DWG TR OHL 04 04 Double Tension String 400 kV OHL
DWG TR OHL 04 05 Single Suspension String 220/132 kV OHL
DWG TR OHL 04 06 Double Suspension String 220/132 kV OHL
DWG TR OHL 04 07 Single Tension String 220/132 kV OHL
DWG TR OHL 04 08 Double Tension String 220/132 kV OHL

1.2 Equipment Identification and Color Codes

Concerning Insulators Identification reference shall be made to Standard Technical
Specification, Part:
 S-TR-GEN-ID - Components Marking

S-TR-OHL-INS (Rev.0-2018) Page 3 of 10

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Insulators

2 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

2.1 Insulators

2.1.1 Insulator Strings

The complete suspension and tension strings with all clamps, fittings, and arcing rings shall have
the mechanical and electrical characteristics as stated in Technical Data Sheets. They shall
comply with IEC 60383-2 and it’s normative references.
The insulator strings shall also be capable of withstanding the mechanical loads applied by the
required conductor working tensions, wind spans and weight spans and in addition the wind on
the insulator string and the weight of the insulator string itself and the weight of two linesmen
with tackles, when multiplied with the factors of safety specified in the Schedule C1 of Standard
Technical Specification, Part:
 S-TR-OHL-T - HV/MV Towers of Lattice Steel Design

All insulator strings shall be type-tested in line with IEC 60383-2 (clause 12.3 applicable) and
IEC 60437 (RIV to comply with grade II, BS 137-2). Judgement of visible corona shall follow
VDE 0212 part 53.

The compatibility of all insulators fittings/accessories with the proposed insulator is required to
be confirmed by the manufacturer of that insulator in writing.

2.1.2 Insulator Units

2.1.2.1 Composite Long-Rod Type

Composite insulators shall be of the long-rod type, featuring a glass-fibre reinforced epoxy rod
core with high temperature vulcanized silicone rubber housing and clevis caps.

2.1.2.1.1 Requirements on Insulator Manufacturer

The manufacturer shall be certified in accordance with DIN ISO 9001. He shall maintain a
development and engineering department to provide technical- cum after sales service and
information related to the insulators.
The manufacturer shall have an adequate industrial scale experience of at least 20 years in the
production of insulators for use at the specified system voltages. As proof, the manufacturer shall
submit a supply-list, indicating type of insulator, quantity supplied, name and address of client,
system voltage and year of delivery. Composite insulators shall be considered, for which a
minimum 5 years manufacturing and successful service experience is available, without change
of design and material. Preference shall be given to longer experience. The qualified
manufacturer shall have designed, manufactured, tested and supplied at least 3.000 units of
similar insulators.

S-TR-OHL-INS (Rev.0-2018) Page 4 of 10

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Insulators

2.1.2.1.2 Design of Insulators and Materials

The insulators shall be of sufficient length to provide the required electrical performance in one
single unit. In-line coupling of two or more units is not acceptable. Parallel coupling of two units
is acceptable only for tension insulators, and to provide the mandatory redundancy at qualified
line crossings.
The minimum creepage path shall not be less than 45 mm/kV rated voltage.

a) Core
The core shall consist of a high strength ECR (Electrical grade, Corrosion-Resistant)-glass-fibre
reinforced epoxy resin rod. The glass fibers shall be resistant against acid attacks in order to
prevent stress corrosion of the FRP rod.
The FRP rod shall be resistant against hydrolysis under service conditions.
b) Housing and Sheds
Core-housing and weathersheds shall be made of high temperature vulcanized (HTV) silicone
rubber, with a shore A hardness of not less than 60. The material shall be of blue/grey color and
be resistant against the ultra-violet radiation being present in the solar spectrum at ground level.
The track resistance of the material shall be min. class 1A 3.5 according to IEC 60587.
The core-housing shall have a minimum thickness of 3 mm.
The weathersheds shall provide an open aerodynamic profile without any under ribs. The
insulator profile shall follow strictly all provisions laid down in IEC 60815.
c) Assembly Methods
Two methods of assembly are acceptable:
1. Housing including sheds are applied onto the core in one single step. Any seams/burrs
protruding axially along the insulator, resulting from this process shall be removed
completely. Injection- or compression moulding is acceptable only in case the housing is
moulded in one single shot. Moulding in multiple steps may cause flaws and residual
stress in the joining seams and, therefore, shall not be applied.
2. A sheath is extruded seamlessly onto the core. The housing is completed by assembly of
moulded weathersheds onto the sheath. All parts of the insulating body, i.e. FRP rod,
sheath and sheds, are bonded together by vulcanization.
In case a Bidder prefers to offer an insulator design assembled in another way, he shall submit
his proposal with complete supporting documentation. Eventual acceptance is left entirely at
TRANSCO’s discretion.
d) Metal Fittings
The insulator shall be equipped with clevis caps confirming to IEC 60471, at either end. Caps
shall be of forged steel, hot-dip-galvanised to minimum thickness of 120m, other aspects for
galvanising shall be as described, in the Standard Technical Specification, Part:

S-TR-OHL-INS (Rev.0-2018) Page 5 of 10

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Insulators

 S-TR-CORR - Corrosion Protection

The thickness of the zinc coat of the clevis caps shall exceed the normal standard. Whilst fully
maintaining adhesion, it shall not be less than 120  in any spot of the cap.
e) Interface Between Clevis Cap and FRP Core

The gap between fitting and core housing shall be sealed permanently against the ingress of
moisture. Sealing by compression only is not regarded to be permanently waterproof. Covering
the cap, even partly, with housing material is unacceptable due to electrical reasons. Sealing of
the interface by application of an elastomer with permanent elasticity is considered an acceptable
solution. The material shall adhere to the surface of the metal cap, as well as to the housing.

f) Maximum Electrical Field Stresses

The following maximum electrical field stresses shall be considered in order to avoid any
premature ageing effects due to dry and water induced corona:

 The E -field on the insulator sheath should not be permitted to exceed 0.42kV/mm
for more than 10 mm along the insulator surface.

 The E-field should not exceed 0.35kV/mm on end -fitting seal.

 The E-field should not exceed 1.8 kV/mm at any metal point (end fitting &
grading ring)

The electrical field stresses of the complete insulator set/string including grading rings
shall be calculated by means of finite element modelling (FEM) / boundary element
modelling (BEM) software.

2.1.2.1.3 Tests
Tests shall be performed in full, in accordance with IEC Standard 61109.
Amendments/clarifications to this standard are outlined below.
If design and type test reports covering the offered insulator are available, repetition of these
tests may be waived, at TRANSCO’s discretion.
a) Design Tests
The tracking and erosion test, Para 5.3.3, IEC 61109, shall be executed in line with
annex “C”.
b) Type Tests
Tolerances specified under Para 6 of IEC 61109 shall be amended, as follows:
 Positive tolerances to the creepage path are not limited
 Max. permissible distortion of clevis caps against each other is 2°

S-TR-OHL-INS (Rev.0-2018) Page 6 of 10

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Insulators

In addition to the type test according to IEC 61109, the resistance of the FRP core against
brittle fracture shall be proven by the:
Test on resistance of the fiber glass reinforced polymeric (FRP) core against stress
corrosion
This test shall be performed at ambient temperature to confirm the mechanical resistance
against stress corrosion of the FRP core.
Test Specimen
One insulator from the production line or one specimen is used. The specimen shall have a
length between the end-fittings of at least 10 times the core diameter. The end-fittings
shall be identical to those used in the production.
The housing of the insulator shall be removed in the middle part of the insulator on a
length of at least 150 mm. The visible core surface has to be smoothened by means of a
fine abrasive cloth (grain size 180). Remaining parts of the housing have to be removed
thoroughly.
An acid container made of polyethylene shall be arranged, surrounding the visible core
surface in such a way that the liquid can simply be poured into the container and no acid
comes into contact with the fittings. The size of the acid container shall be adapted in such
a way that the FRP core is surrounded by a liquid thickness of not less than 1 cm and a
liquid level of not less than 4 cm. The container shall be covered to limit evaporation of
the liquid to max. 5% of its volume during the test period.
Performance of Test
The insulator is subjected to a tensile load applied between the metal fittings. The tensile
load shall be increased rapidly but smoothly, from zero up to 67% of the specified
mechanical load (S.M.L.) and then be maintained at this value for 96 hours. Immediately
after applying the load, a nitric acid of a concentration of 1 n (1n = 63 g HNO3 added to
937 g water) shall be poured into the acid container. The acid must not come into contact
with the end-fittings.
Evaluation of the Test
The test is passed if no fracture of the core occurs during the 96 hours test.
c) Sampling Tests
Tolerances specified under Para 6. of IEC 61109 shall be amended, as outlined under the type
tests.
d) Routine Tests
 Routine tests shall be performed on every insulator.
 The following amendments are applicable to Para 8.2, IEC 61109:
 Scaly crumblings are allowed at the edges of a shed only. However, the total amount of
crumblings shall not exceed a volume of approx. 100 mm3 per 1000 mm of insulator length
and an individual crumbling shall not exceed 50 mm3.

S-TR-OHL-INS (Rev.0-2018) Page 7 of 10

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Insulators

 Individual protrusions up to 2 mm at the rim of the sheds are permissible, protrusion at the
shank is not permitted.
 Moulding seams and burrs running in direction of the insulators axis shall be removed
completely.
2.1.2.2 Porcelain Long-Rod Type
Porcelain insulators shall be of long rod type with aerodynamic shape with alternating
large/small diameter sheds and with good self-cleaning properties suitable for desert and marine
contamination. The design must ensure that the shape of the insulator should mostly exclude a
critical reduction of the creepage distance as a result of accumulation of dust and sand.
Therefore, the surface must be smooth and underribs are not accepted. The ratio between shed
distance and-overhang shall be optimised for the application at the severe local ambient
conditions. Inclination of sheds shall be approximately 10 to 12 degrees on the upper and
approximately 2 degrees on the undershed.
The minimum creepage path shall not be less than 50 mm/kV rated voltage.
Porcelain shall be of high strength alumina type equivalent to KER 110.2 DIN 40685, brown
glazed equivalent to surface DIN 40686.
The insulator shall be equipped with clevis caps, conforming to IEC 60471, at either end. Caps
shall be of malleable or cast ductile iron according to IEC 60383 and be hot dip galvanized as
described in the Standard Technical Specification, Part:
 S-TR-CORR - Corrosion Protection

The thickness of the zinc coat of the clevis caps shall exceed the normal standard. Whilst fully
maintaining adhesion, it shall not be less than 120  in any spot of the cap.

2.2 Installation of Insulator Strings

For composite insulators, the provisions of CIGRE publication 184 ‘COMPOSITE
INSULATOR HANDLING GUIDE’ shall be followed.
Before installation of any insulator string on a tower, the Bidder/Contractor shall assemble, at his
main camp site, one specimen each, for every type of insulator string utilized. These strings will
be inspected by TRANSCO, and, if necessary, corrected. At this opportunity, orientation of split
pins will be decided, too. All specimen strings shall remain exhibited until the conclusion of
stringing works.
Insulators shall be shipped in boxes or crates, wrapped in polythene or other suitable cover. It
shall be ensured that the insulators shall be clean when hung. Wool and clean rags shall be used
to remove any foreign matter. Porcelain surfaces shall be wiped to a bright finish and metal
surfaces shall be free from any noticeable contamination.
Prior to energizing of the overhead line, the Bidder/Contractor shall ascertain that the surfaces of
the insulators are in a clean condition. TRANSCO may request the Bidder/Contractor to carry
out cleaning work, if found necessary. The composite long rod type insulators shall be suitably
protected after erection to avoid damages due to bird bites.

S-TR-OHL-INS (Rev.0-2018) Page 8 of 10

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Insulators

If TRANSCO is not satisfied with the standard of cleanliness, he may direct the
Bidder/Contractor to clean the insulators with an approved chemical solution.
The bending or straining of insulator strings, which may occur when insulator strings are picked
up by a rope sling placed near the center of the string, must be avoided. The rope sling shall
always be attached near the top unit of the insulator string.
Workmen shall not climb upon insulator strings. Access to the conductor clamping points shall
be provided only by use of suitable ladders/work platforms.
Hardware and accessories shall be handled carefully, to prevent contact with the ground. All
items shall be clean and inspected before installation for missing parts or visual defects. All
connections shall be made in accordance with the approved drawings and as recommended by
the manufacturer. Bolts shall be tightened to their specified torque, split pins inserted where
required and opened correctly, all in a good workmanlike manner, according to the best practice
of transmission line construction.
All split pins and lock nuts in each insulator string shall be carefully checked to ensure that they
are properly seated to avoid accidental uncoupling of insulator units. All split pins and lock nuts
shall be faced towards the step-bolt-legs of the tower to facilitate inspection.
Imperfectly or poorly galvanized hardware as determined by TRANSCO shall not be used. Such
pieces shall be replaced with new hardware.

2.3 Marking
Each insulator shall be marked legible and indelible, on it’s top shed or end fitting with the
following data:
i. Name or trade mark of the manufacturer
ii. Specified Mechanical Load (SML)
iii. Routine test load (RTL)
iv. Serial number
v. Year of manufacture
vi. Country of manufacturing
The marking performance shall be proven by the following tets:
 Salt fog spraying test (minimum 60 cycles)
 Fluorescent UV irradiation test (5,000hrs)
 High temperature exposure test (100 degC – 32hrs)
 Acid rain test ( 3 times spraying of PH-1 solution)
 Scratch test
 Sand blasting exposure test

S-TR-OHL-INS (Rev.0-2018) Page 9 of 10

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Insulators

2.4 Packing
Insulators shall be packed in crates, to safely prevent transport damage. Each crate shall contain
only insulator units of the same type. Crates shall be of hexagonal or rectangular cross-section.
Crates shall be wooden and should be close-boarded. They shall be manufactured from sound
seasoned softwoods and suitable for prolonged storage on site under the climatic conditions
present. They shall be steel-banded for additional strength at not less than three positions along
their length.
Crates shall be designed with internal struts or partitions to support insulators and prevent
insulator movement.
Insulators shall be fitted with retaining clips.
The guaranteed electro-mechanical strength and the type of the units in each crate shall be
clearly marked on each crate in a waterproof medium.

S-TR-OHL-INS (Rev.0-2018) Page 10 of 10

 STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRIC WORKS

OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES

( SPECIFICATION )

OPTICAL GROUND WIRES

(32/72)

TRANSCO STANDARD : S-TR-OHL-OPGW (REV.0-2018)

S-TR-OHL-OPGW (Rev.0-2018) Page 1 of 12

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Optical Ground Wires

CONTENTS

1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................... 3
1.1 Drawings ........................................................................................................................... 3
1.2 Equipment Identification and Color Codes ....................................................................... 3
2 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ...................................................................................... 4
2.1 General .............................................................................................................................. 4
2.2 OPGW Metallic Unit ......................................................................................................... 4
2.3 Optical Units/Fibres .......................................................................................................... 5
2.3.1 Fibres ................................................................................................................................. 5
2.4 Identification of Fibre Color.............................................................................................. 6
2.5 OPGW Accessories ........................................................................................................... 6
2.5.1 General .............................................................................................................................. 6
2.5.2 Tension Set ........................................................................................................................ 7
2.5.3 Suspension Set................................................................................................................... 7
2.5.4 Dampers ............................................................................................................................ 7
2.6 OPGW Joint/Termination Boxes and Splices ................................................................... 7
2.7 OPGW Delivery Lengths .................................................................................................. 8
2.8 OPGW Reels ..................................................................................................................... 9
2.9 OPGW Installation ............................................................................................................ 9
2.10 OPGW Splicing and Termination ................................................................................... 10
2.11 Testing and Inspection of OPGW and related Accessories/Joint Boxes ......................... 10

S-TR-OHL-OPGW (Rev.0-2018) Page 2 of 12

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Optical Ground Wires

OPTICAL GROUND WIRES

1 GENERAL
This part of the specification covers design, manufacture, testing, installation and commissioning
of optical ground wire.
If a substantial improvement of any or all of the specified technical requirements, expressed or
implied herein, which is seen by the Bidder/Contractor to provide economical advantages to the
end user, is desired to be presented in the Bid, this may be given in addition to that, which
conforms to the specified design, as an alternative. However, it is not mandatory that the
alternative design is to be accepted, but shall be subject to the decision of TRANSCO upon
evaluation of the same. The difference in price shall be clearly stated in percentage/unit.
For applicable technical standards, tests and general requirements please refer to:
 S-TR-OHL-GEN - General Requirements (Applicable Technical Standards, Tests,
etc.)

The Contractor shall confirm compliance with extended warranty for the proposed OPGW of ten
(10) years starting from the date of Provisional Acceptance Certificate (PAC) or from the date of
energising of the OHL whichever comes later. During extended warranty contractor shall
perform periodically end to end test every ‘12’ months.

1.1 Drawings
Typical Drawings for OPGW Tension Set / Suspension Set and Communication System using
OPGW provided in the Drawings Section are as follows:
Drawing No. Title
DWG TR OHL 05 02 OPGW Tension Set for Non-Jointing Towers
DWG TR OHL 05 03 Suspension Set for OPGW
DWG TR OHL 05 04 Simplified Drawing of the Communication System using OPGW and
u/g FOC (132 kV & 220 kV)
DWG TR OHL 05 05 Simplified Drawing of the Communication System using OPGW and
u/g FOC (400 kV)
DWG TR OHL 05 06 OPGW & Earthwire Tension Assembly for all Voltage Levels

1.2 Equipment Identification and Color Codes

Concerning Optical Ground Wires Identification reference shall be made to Standard Technical
Specification, Part:
 S-TR-GEN-ID - Components Marking

S-TR-OHL-OPGW (Rev.0-2018) Page 3 of 12

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Optical Ground Wires

2 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

2.1 General
The OPGW shall be designed to withstand the specified short circuit current, which is based on
the System Characteristics and Fault Levels, reference shall be made to Standard Technical
Specifications, Part:
 S-TR-GEN-GDF - General Conditions

and all relevant Technical Data Sheets, without resulting in fibre de-coloration/de-gradation in
optical attenuation or mechanical damage to any of the OPGW components. It shall be able to
safely withstand the lightning strokes (it shall have Arc-proof characteristics) without damaging
the conductor or affecting the fibre optic unit/fibre characteristics. The minimum short circuit
current to withstand shall not be less 10 kA, for 1 sec [capacity (Is²x t) is approx. 100 kAsq. Sec]
in the case of double circuit 400 kV OHTL with two OPGWs and not less than 12 kA [capacity
(Is²x t) is approx. 150 kAsq. sec) in the case of double circuit 220 kV OHTL with single OPGW.
The OPGW must have mechanical and electrical features so as to be strung on HV & EHV over
head transmission lines towers with long spans (typical span length on 220 kV systems is 450 m
& on 400 kV systems is 500 m). This includes the bending and pulling forces during installation,
the tension during normal operation, the wind load and aeolian vibrations.
The OPGW shall be greased and can withstand heavy corrosion and chemical evaporation.
The total OPGW length shall be determined by the Bidder/Contractor taking into account sag,
splices, drops at the joint locations etc.
The OPGW associated with the OHTL circuits shall be such as one (no.) OPGW, in the case of
220 kV double circuit OHTL, whereas two (nos.) OPGWs to be installed on the double circuit
400 kV OHTL (one with each circuit OHL), if not otherwise specified.
In any offered OPGW design, the reserve length of fibre against the linear length of OPGW shall
be in such away that when the OPGW is subjected to 100% UTS and reaches the break point,
fiber should not break.

2.2 OPGW Metallic Unit

The conductor part of the OPGW shall compose of two layers of stranded wires (made of
Aluminium Clad steel and Aluminium Alloy) and a stainless steel aluminium extruded tube
housing the fibre unit(s).
The basic construction shall be a concentric lay strand consisting of bare metallic wires. The
wires of the outer layer shall have a right-hand (Z) lay. The outermost layer must consist of wires
of uniform and well conducting material (i.e. ACS wires are not accepted). The wires of the two
strands shall be free of points, sharp edges, abrasions or other imperfections. The conductor shall
also be free of metal particles and dirt. The make-up and lay of the conductor strands shall be
such as to produce a conductor free of tendency to untwist or spring apart during stringing or
when cut.

S-TR-OHL-OPGW (Rev.0-2018) Page 4 of 12

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Optical Ground Wires

The wire strands shall be in close contact. The wires forming the outer strands of the OPGW
shall be designed to prevent bird-caging, strand popping and unravelling during normal handling
and installation.
The rated breaking strength of the completed OPGW shall be taken as sum of the rated breaking
strengths of the individual wires, calculated from their nominal diameter and the appropriate
specified minimum tensile strength. When determining the tensile strength, a safety factor of 2,5
shall be applied.
The same precautions as for the line conductors shall be taken for OPGW with regard to packing
and shipment as well as for adjustment of metal prices.
The OPGW shall be earthed to the tower steel work at each tower (at joint location tower both
sections of the OPGW shall be earthed). Approved clamps and bonding leads shall be used for
earth connections.
Approved end seals (waterproof & heat resistant) shall be fixed on the OPGW ends of each
drum, immediately after manufacturing and reeling the respective OPGW length. These end
seals shall not be removed until immediately prior to testing before installation/splicing at site.
No mid-span joints shall be allowed in the OPGW. All joints shall be performed at tower joint
box located above anti-climbing devices.

2.3 Optical Units/Fibres

The Optical Unit shall compose of the fibres laid loose inside the stainless steel aluminium
extruded tube filled with a jelly compound for water blocking. Jelly shall be injected at highest
permissible temperature to avoid fibre drift due to high ambient temperature.

2.3.1 Fibres
The Cabled Fibre Core shall be of the Single Mode (SM) made of high grade ultra pure fused
slica glass coated over the cladding with UV-cured acrylate, (D-652 or D-655 to be defined in
the SoW). The fibre shall be suitable to operate safely and within the specifications under the
prevailing environmental conditions, e.g it shall be able to withstand the following temperatures:
 Storage temperature range 0C to +55C
 Installation temperature range 0C to +65C.
Operating Temperature (OPGW shall withstand a temperature range of 0C to +65C, however if
calculation for the solar effect on the metal surface proves higher range, the same shall be
considered in the design).
Temperature resulting from the rated fault current:
(for 1 sec) or during lightning up to +200C
The cabled SM fibres shall be designed to operate at 1310 & 1550 nm. Wavelengths with a low
light dispersion value ( 18 ps/nm.km) over the entire possible bandwidths above the specified
cut-off wavelength, which shall not be more than 1270 nm.

S-TR-OHL-OPGW (Rev.0-2018) Page 5 of 12

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Optical Ground Wires

The fibre design shall be generally as per recommendations and standards made by International
Committees/Organisations as given above and all updated versions of the same at the time of
awarding the Contract.
No changes are to occur in the optical characteristics of the fibres up to 0,4% cable elongation.
The total number of fibres per each OPGW shall be as specified in the scope of supply (32/72).
Fibres shall be color coded in accordance with the relevant standards.
For the geometrical and optical details of the required fibre core, reference shall be made to the
respective Technical Data Sheets of these specifications.
The fibre optic unit and the outer stranded metallic wires shall serve together as an integral unit
to protect the optical fibres from degradation due to vibration and galloping, wind and ice loads,
wide temperature variations, lightning, chemical evaporation and fault current.
No changes are to occur in the optical characteristics of the fibres due to the OPGW elongation.
In order to protect the optical fibres from stresses due to the thermal coefficients of expansion
being different between it and the enclosure, or due to elongation of the enclosure under tensile
load to the cable, the excess length of optical fibre within the cable shall be chosen such that
there is no mechanical stress on them under neither the specified prevailing temperature (storage,
installation or operation) combined with the maximum tensile stress on the cable.

2.4 Identification of Fibre Color

The fibres shall be colour coded as per the IEC standards or any other equivalent standards.

2.5 OPGW Accessories

2.5.1 General
The OPGW shall be supplied with all fittings, mounting hardware/accessories and joint boxes,
required for a complete operational OPGW.
All fittings must be designed in such a way that no degradation of the optical transmission in the
fibres of the cable is encountered, under all service conditions. And it shall be able to withstand
UAE’s harsh environment as well as chemical evaporation.
The compatibility of all OPGW fittings with the proposed OPGW is required to be confirmed by
the manufacturer of that OPGW, in writing. Preference shall be given to the accessories from
the same manufacturer as that of the OPGW, which is also subjected to successful completion of
prequalification process.
The required hardware/accessories/fittings shall include, but not be limited to, tension set for
jointing tower, tension set for non jointing tower, tension set for terminal tower, vibration
dampers, ground wire bracket, turn buckle, parallel groove clamp, fastening clamp, suspension
set, armour grip suspension clamp, angle tower hardware, dead-end tower hardware, earth
bonding leads, clamps for vertically mounting OPGW on tower steel work and the respective
joint boxes as detailed below.

S-TR-OHL-OPGW (Rev.0-2018) Page 6 of 12

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Optical Ground Wires

 The OPGW shall be clamped at approx. one meter spacing on the tower and substation
gantry structures
 All hardware and accessories of the OPGW shall comply with the requirements of these
Specifications and shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with all relevant IEC or
VDE Standards. All hardware/accessories shall conform to one single standard.

2.5.2 Tension Set

The tension set shall consist of a pre-formed line guard and a pre-formed dead-end, placed above
the line guard. The line guard shall be laid in the opposite direction to the outer layer of the
cable. The dead-end shall be laid in the opposite direction to the line guard.
The length of the line guard shall be chosen such, that dampers can be installed on the line guard
and that the cable is protected against concentrated radial forces in the region of contact between
the dead-end and the cable.
All helical rods of the tension set shall be made of aluminium-clad steel. The thimbles shall
consist of malleable cast iron and shall be hot-dip galvanised.
The tension set must withstand at least 95% of the cables rated ultimate strength.
The tensile force-depending twisting moment of the tension set must not result in a torsion of the
cable of more than 90° during a tensile test at 50% of the cable’s rated ultimate strength.
During the tensile test, determining the holding force of the tension set and the force-dependent
torsion of the cable, the opposite termination of the set-up must allow for free rotation of the
cable.

2.5.3 Suspension Set

At suspension points, only armour grip suspensions shall be used. For further details refer to the
respective clause under Conductor accessories.

2.5.4 Dampers
All spans must be furnished by vibration dampers.
All dampers are to be mounted on armour rods. The damper clamp must be carefully adjusted to
the diameter of the cable with armour rods.
For vibration study/measurement, self-damping of OPGW and other technical- and testing
requirements refer to the respective clause under Conductor accessories.

2.6 OPGW Joint/Termination Boxes and Splices

The required joint box shall be as per the following:
Type A

S-TR-OHL-OPGW (Rev.0-2018) Page 7 of 12

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Optical Ground Wires

To be used for OPGW-OPGW connection and shall be installed in the lower portion of the tower
or portal structure along the tower body, however above anti-climbing device. An extra stripped
off length of approx. 1.5 m of the fibres shall be left inside for repeat splices.
Type B
Joint box for connection of OPGW to the under ground optical fibre cable (OPGW-OFC). These
shall be in general similar to type A, except for the cable entry and shall be installed at the gantry
tower about 1m above the tower foundation surface.
Type C
To be used for OPGW-OPGW-OPGW connection when three OPGWs are required to be
interconnected, and shall be installed in the lower portion of the tower or portal structure along
their body, however above anti-climbing device. An extra stripped off length of approx. 1.5 m of
the fibres shall be left inside for repeat splices.
The junction box shall be insect-proof and water-tight with protection degree of IP55W (weather
proof), made of cast aluminium or stainless steel (min. grade ANSI 316) and shall be designed
such as to form an extremely rigid structure. A name plate shall be fixed on the front of the box
door and shall have the following information:
Type of J/B
Owner :
Consultant :
Manufacturer name :
Year of manufacture :
No. of fibres : .........S.M
Contract No. :
Cable length and direction :
Junction box technology shall ensure only bottom cable entry, quick removal of box cover giving
access to fibre splices, repair of fibre splicing at least three times during transmission line’s
working life, accordingly sufficient fibre length should be left loose inside the box. All jointing
materials, sufficient for all splices (equal to 1.2 times the number of fibres), including the
splicing sleeves, heat shrinking protective tubes, splice holder and cable holder should be
provided inside the box.

2.7 OPGW Delivery Lengths

The OPGW shall be delivered in agreed lengths, which shall not generally be less than 5000 m
depending on the stringing plan. Accordingly, the continuous OPGW length between two
successive joint boxes (unjointed length) shall not be less than 4500m horizontally along the line
length except for certain sections where the stringing plan does not allow.

S-TR-OHL-OPGW (Rev.0-2018) Page 8 of 12

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Optical Ground Wires

A thermal pad shall be placed on the outer spirals and thermal protection shall be at least
equivalent to that obtained with an aluminium sheet covered by 10 mm cellular polyethylene.
The inner end of the OPGW shall be fitted with a suitable cap to ensure water tightness. The
outer end shall be fitted with a watertight head compatible with cable pulling.
The contractor should take into account the extra loop of ’15’ meters at the joint box locations,
there loops shall be horizontal instead of vertical.

2.8 OPGW Reels

The OPGW shall be delivered to erection sites on reels conforming to DIN 46 391. They should
contain lengths in accordance with the stringing schedule.
For further details on refer to the respective specification for the OHL conductor Reels.
During the FAT visual inspection all drums shall be open and accessible.
For marking of the reels reference is made to the Chapter:
 S-TR-OHL-GEN - General Requirements (Applicable Technical Standards, Tests, etc.)

of the Standard Technical Specification.

Additionally the following information shall be provided on the reels:
 Length of OPGW
 Designation / number of stranding machine
 Tension-torque value
 Serial number
 Reel/drum number
 Arrow indicating rolling direction.
The form and the largest possible size of the designation plate shall be submitted for approval
well in advance of the first material inspection.
The same precautions as for the line conductors shall be taken for the OPGW with regard to
reels, packing and shipment, as well as for adjustment of metal prices (if any).

2.9 OPGW Installation

Although the installation method of OPGW is similar to that of normal overhead ground wires
except jointing, particular care should be given while carrying out the installation such as not to
apply excessive bending or tension which could cause either damage to the OPGW/Optical fibres
or change fibres characteristics. In case damage occurs during the installation, which possess
extra joint, Bidder/Contractor is obliged to replace the damaged drum by a new. The stringing
blocks or sheaves used for OPGW should be lined and larger than for conventional earth wire.
The pulling rope should have the lay direction as the OPGW to help prevent twisting during

S-TR-OHL-OPGW (Rev.0-2018) Page 9 of 12

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Optical Ground Wires

stringing. OPGW down-leads shall be long enough to enable a lowering the joint box to the
ground level for maintenance purpose.

2.10 OPGW Splicing and Termination

The splicing of the Optical fibres should be carried out in all joint boxes and terminal boxes by
well-trained technicians from manufacturer’s staff, and it shall be in dust free and clear
environment. Bidder/Contractor shall provide all required splicing Equipment and tools for the
execution of splicing and termination works. Splice loss shall be measured and shall not be more
than 0.05 dB (refer to technical data sheets for exact splice loss values at. Proper numbering shall
be provided on each fibre core to facilitate identification.

2.11 Testing and Inspection of OPGW and related Accessories/Joint Boxes

In connection with the performance of tests, general reference is made to the Special Conditions
of Contract.
Further, all testing shall be performed in line with the requirements of this specification and this
Article.
Tests on OPGW/optical fibres shall be performed in accordance with the above mentioned
standards and related latest publications of the same at the time of awarding the contract as
applicable and with the requirements of these specifications, as far as applicable, or, if approved
by TRANSCO, to the standards of the country of manufacture. Special tests, if any, shall be
agreed upon between the manufacturer and TRANSCO during the approval stage and
TRANSCO reserve the right to perform checks during manufacturing process at any time.
Acceptance by TRANSCO's representative of any equipment shall not relieve the manufacturer
from any of his performance guarantees, or from any of his other obligations resulting from the
contract.
Tests on the finally approved OPGW shall comprise, but not limited to the following tests:
a) Type Tests
Test Item Test Passing Criteria

1. Mechanical and electrical characteristics

- Geometrical and optical To be checked against specifications Technical Data
parameters of the OPGW Sheets and approved documents
- Ultimate tensile strength (cyclic Acc. IEC 61089, no fibre break (up to 100% UTS)
up to 95% UTS)
- Stress-strain/Fibre Strain No more than 0.2 dB/km increase in the attenuation. No
strain in fibre more than 0.05%
- Strain margin tests No more than 1.0 dB/km increase in attenuation.

S-TR-OHL-OPGW (Rev.0-2018) Page 10 of 12

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Optical Ground Wires

- Twist characteristics 0.1 dB increase in the attenuation

- Bend response 0.1 dB increase in the attenuation
- Crushing force response 0.1 dB increase in the attenuation
- Impact force response No change in the attenuation
- Short circuit test 1 dB/km increase in the attenuation
- Lightning test (as per the tatest - No fibre degradation on the sample under test more
version of IEC 794-4-1) with at than 0.1dB.
least 3 shots the third of which - Number of cuts in the outer strands shall be in
not less than 200 C charge. accordance with applicable IEC standard. No cut shall
occur in the inner strands layer or in the aluminium
tube.
- The cable tensile strength shall not be lower than 80%
of the UTS after the lightning test.
- DC resistance measurement To be checked against Technical data sheets
- Compression response No damage of fibres and 0.1 dB/km increase in attenuation
- Heat cycle test 0.1 dB/km increase in the attenuation
- Waterproof test No water penetration inside the buffer tube
- Seepage of flooding components No dripping
(if applicable)
2. Transmission and optical characteristics
- Attenuation versus wave length To be checked against Technical data sheets
- Refractive index profile Manufacturer’s data
- Chromatic dispersion versus To be checked against Technical data sheets
wave lengths 1270 to 1560
- Cut-off wave length To be checked against Technical data sheets

b) Sample Tests
Test Item Test Passing Criteria
Construction To be checked against Technical data sheets

c) Routine Tests
Test Item Test Passing Criteria

1. Visual inspection

S-TR-OHL-OPGW (Rev.0-2018) Page 11 of 12

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Optical Ground Wires

- Lay ratio
- Lay direction

2. Transmission and optical characteristics

- Attenuation versus wave length To be checked against Technical data sheets
at 1260, 1270, 1300, 1310, 1500,
1550, 1600 and 1610 nm
- Back scatter measurement No abnormal change in the attenuation

d) Site Tests
Test Item Test Passing Criteria
Attenuation measurement: To be checked against Technical data sheets
- At both wavelengths 1310nm and
1550 nm.
- It shall be performed before
installation (on reels)
- And after installation from both
line ends (from splice box to
splice box at both gantries or
repeaters, as applicable.
Back scatter measurement from both no abnormalities along the cable and or at the joints or
directions connectors
Splice loss To be checked against Technical data sheets

Tests for the joint box and splice/splice protective sleeve

Test Item Test Passing Criteria
Construction/appearance To be checked against Technical data sheets
Weather/water tightness (type test) no water ingress
Vibration proof no sign of damage

e) Compatibility tests of the approved OPGW fittings and hardware with the approved
OPGW:
Since the OPGW manufacturer will be held responsible for the compatibility of the required
fittings for his OPGW, the compatibility tests shall be proposed by the OPGW manufacturer and
be performed at his premises, subject to approval by TRANSCO. TRANSCO have the right to
ask for performing additional compatibility tests if found necessary.

S-TR-OHL-OPGW (Rev.0-2018) Page 12 of 12

 STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRIC WORKS

OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES

( SPECIFICATION )

SURVEYING WORKS

TRANSCO STANDARD : S-TR-OHL-SURV (REV.0-2018)

S-TR-OHL-SURV (Rev.0-2018) Page 1 of 6

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Surveying Works

CONTENTS

1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................... 3
1.1 Drawings ........................................................................................................................... 3
1.2 Equipment Identification and Color Codes ....................................................................... 3
2 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ...................................................................................... 3
2.1 General .............................................................................................................................. 3
2.2 Line Routing ...................................................................................................................... 3
2.3 Line Profile Survey ........................................................................................................... 4
2.4 Tower Site Survey ............................................................................................................. 5
2.5 Clearing of Right-of-Way ................................................................................................. 6

S-TR-OHL-SURV (Rev.0-2018) Page 2 of 6

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Surveying Works

SURVEYING WORKS

1 GENERAL
This part of the specification covers overhead line routing, line profile survey, tower site survey,
clearing of right-of-way and access.
For applicable technical standards, tests and general requirements please refer to:
 S-TR-OHL-GEN - General Requirements (Applicable Technical Standards, Tests,
etc.)

1.1 Drawings
Typical Drawing for Conceptual Clearances of OHL provided in the Drawings Section is as
follows:
Drawing No. Title
DWG TR OHL 01 01 Conceptual Clearance of OHL

1.2 Equipment Identification and Color Codes

Concerning Surveying Works Identification reference shall be made to Standard Technical
Specification, Part:
 S-TR-GEN-ID - Components Marking

2 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

2.1 General
The Bidder/Contractor shall keep damage within the right-of-way to a minimum, consistent with
the successful execution of the erection work. The Bidder/Contractor shall exercise all
precautions to avoid damage to crops and other property. The Bidder/Contractor shall comply
with all national and local regulations regarding barricades, detour arrangements, and warning
signs. Damage to roads, footpaths, bridges, ditches, etc., caused by the Bidder/Contractor shall
be repaired at his expense.

2.2 Line Routing

The Bidder/Contractor shall carry out the line routing, in close co-operation with TRANSCO, by
instrument survey, based on the route drawing(s). Owing to the large scale factor of these
drawings, they are of rather general nature and need to be superseded by more detailed maps, to
be prepared by the Bidder/Contractor, in an approved scale. They shall contain comprehensive
information on the route area, noting true coordinates of angle points, and all relevant particulars
on crossed/approximated trees, structures, over- and underground services, etc. Coordinates shall

S-TR-OHL-SURV (Rev.0-2018) Page 3 of 6

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Surveying Works

be determined precisely by differential GPS and submitted in formats as required by the different
government agencies. For Town Planning Dept., coordinates shall be prepared in UTM system
(datum Narwahn UAE), for the General Civil Aviation Authority WGS-84 geographical
coordinates are to be submitted. Other formats may be required additionally. The detailed route
maps shall be prepared by the Bidder/Contractor in the required quantity and are to be submitted
for TRANSCO’s approval, who will forward them to the department of Town Planning and other
relevant authorities, for their approval.
Approval of the maps by the Town Planning Department and other relevant authorities is a pre-
requisite to perform profile survey and tower spotting.
In mountainous areas, aerial survey using LIDAR technology shall be acceptable in order to
improve the quality and the accuracy of the survey, and expedite the line design process.
The Bidder/Contractor shall be prepared to amend the route, according to detailed requirements
of the authorities, until final approval is obtained. No additional costs will be considered for such
minor work. Amendments required after receipt of route approval by the authorities shall be
remunerated as per the relevant contractual rate for survey works.
Before the construction stage, route maps shall be amended for display of line access provisions
(refer to Technical Standard Specification, Part: S-CIVIL-OHL-Item 2.4).

2.3 Line Profile Survey

The topographical line survey shall be carried out along the approved line route.
The theodolites used and measuring techniques applied shall be state of the art, employing digital
recording technique, to TRANSCO’s satisfaction. The survey shall be carried out to a minimum
accuracy of 1 in 2.000 for distance- and 1 minute for angular measurements.
The Bidder/Contractor shall prepare longitudinal profile drawings of the transmission line, in
scales of:
 1 : 2000 for the horizontal and
 1 : 200 for the vertical axis.
The profile plans shall contain the longitudinal ground profile along the OHL centreline, plus
side profiles right and left under the outermost conductors, shown in different broken lines. They
shall display the bottom conductor catenary (at spans adjacent to angle towers for the longest
conductor), at 80°C, together with the ground- or special clearance curves, as well as the
minimum temperature catenary. Tower nos., tower types, weight spans, wind spans, equivalent
spans, section length, continuos chainage, elevations, level differences, UTM coordinates, etc.
shall be shown. Along the bottom of the profile plan, a strip plan of the line route, extending 20
m for HV and 10 m for MV lines beyond the corridor limits, to either side of the centreline, shall
be shown. The strip plan shall detail all relevant information regarding obstructions, services,
vegetation, terrain type, land use, etc.. Horizontal and vertical coordinates of all features
affecting the line construction shall be indicated on the profile plan. Crossings of existing
overhead lines shall be documented with measured elevations and locations of their top and
bottom conductors, at centerline and side profile limits, together with the air temperature at the

S-TR-OHL-SURV (Rev.0-2018) Page 4 of 6

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Surveying Works

time of measurement. All qualified crossings and approximations shall be covered by individual
clearance calculations, to be shown on the profile plan. Tower centre coordinates and all
elevations shall be reduced to UTM (Universal Transverse Mercator) Narwhan UAE datum, and
indicated on the profile plans.
The Bidder/Contractor shall locate and indicate bench marks and reference points already
existing in the project area for differential GPS positions. TRANSCO will render assistance to
the Bidder/Contractor in providing information about locations of the reference points. Where
these do not exist, the Bidder/Contractor shall provide such reference points in consultation with
e.g. the Town Planning Department, Public Works Department, etc.
The line route shall be marked in the field by timber survey pegs of sufficient length, with a
cross section of min. 50x50 mm, to be driven flush into the ground. The accurate centreline shall
be shown on the pegs by a single nail, to be driven into the peg’s top. Terminal and angle pegs
shall be secured by a concrete foundation, to TRANSCO’s approval. Straight line pegs shall be
driven along the OHL centerline, at a minimum of 4 per km, and to either side of every line
crossing. After approval of the tower distribution on the profile plans, tower centre pegs shall be
driven at site. After final approval of tower locations, which will be given by TRANSCO, after
detailed site inspection, insurance pegs shall be driven approx. 50 m to either side of each tower
centre peg, in line direction. Different kinds of pegs shall be distinguishable by a paint marking
system, to be submitted for TRANSCO’s approval.
All pegs or other marks shall be preserved until their removal is authorized by TRANSCO.
For the purpose of profile/tower location inspection by TRANSCO, all terminal-, angle-, and
other relevant line points shall be marked by red flags with a minimum size of 1.5 x 1.5 m, to be
mounted on min. 5 m high steel bases for HV lines and 1 x 1 m on 2 m high bases for MV lines.
The Bidder/Contractor shall minimize the number of tower locations between line angle points,
without exceeding the tower/conductor design limits. The tower distribution shall be performed
by means of a recognized computerized optimization program, to TRANSCO’s approval.
To facilitate approval of profile plans, the Bidder/Contractor shall provide TRANSCO with two
licensed copies of a/m program inclusive of all relevant survey- and other data in digital form,
and with three complete sets of transparent sag templates in perspex or similar material, 4 to 5
mm thick, based on the range of equivalent spans required, staggered at 50 m for HV lines and
20 m for MV lines, and for the conductor types and scales to be used. The templates shall be cut
precisely along the conductor catenary in still air, at maximum temperature (hot curve at 80°C).
The sag curve in still air, at minimum temperature (cold curve at 5°C), the span grid, the ground
clearance line, and all relevant details like design loading conditions, particulars of conductors,
equivalent span applicable, scales, etc. shall be engraved.

2.4 Tower Site Survey

After approval of profile plans with tower distribution for steel lattice towers, the
Bidder/Contractor shall prepare diagonal cross sections of all tower locations, to determine
leg/hillside extensions/reductions, foundation platform/protection requirements, and foundation

S-TR-OHL-SURV (Rev.0-2018) Page 5 of 6

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Surveying Works

setting levels. It shall be ensured that the foundation concrete caps will have a minimum height
of 0,75 m above final ground level.
Relocation of a tower exceeding the longitudinal deviation limit will be allowed only if approved
by TRANSCO and for purposes of improving soil conditions for foundation work. Such
relocation shall in any case not exceed more than 10 m in either direction and will be allowed,
provided ground clearance is not impaired and specific loading of the particular tower is not
exceeded.
Towers in tangent positions shall be oriented with the transverse faces at right angles to the
transmission line centre line, and towers in angle positions shall be oriented with the transverse
face at right angles to the bisector of the deviation angle. Towers with asymmetrical crossarms
shall be offset from the theoretical centreline, so far as to even out the distance between
conductors of either tower side to the theoretical centreline.
As soon as the final tower locations are agreed and approved by TRANSCO, the
Bidder/Contractor shall submit a line schedule. The line schedule shall indicate route
designation, voltage, conductor type, number and size, tower numbers, tower types, body and leg
extensions, angles of deviation, insulator types, insulator string types, spans, equivalent spans,
section lengths, accumulated chainage, a “remarks” column in which details of crossings, etc.
can be entered. After the completion of various parts of the works further data, for instance the
foundation types for each tower, locations of mid span joints and repair sleeves, details of
counterpoise or special earthing requirements, and any other information deemed necessary by
TRANSCO shall be added to the line schedule.

2.5 Clearing of Right-of-Way

“Noble” trees shall not be felled/trimmed, under any circumstances. Reference is made to
circular No. 48, 1991, WED/101/2803. Cutting of other trees shall be avoided, as far as possible.
It shall be clearly understood that the relevant authorities will prosecute any unauthorised cutting
of any plant. Prior to cutting any plant, a written permission from TRANSCO or from the
relevant Authority or Department must be obtained by the Bidder/Contractor.
The Bidder/Contractor shall make the necessary arrangements with property owners, so as to
permit cutting or trimming of trees located both, inside and outside the right-of-way, where such
cutting or trimming is unavoidable. TRANSCO may extend assistance to the extent possible.
In addition, where trees outside the cleared area have such a height that they could fall within 2
meters of the conductors, they shall be cut or trimmed to such a height to avoid such a
possibility.
If trees are found at tower locations, the Bidder/Contractor shall apply for removal by the
relevant Authorities or TRANSCO, for replanting at another place, by the Bidder/Contractor.
Any cost arising from any handling of vegetation is deemed to be included in the Contract price,
it will not be remunerated separately.

S-TR-OHL-SURV (Rev.0-2018) Page 6 of 6

 STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRIC WORKS

OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES

( SPECIFICATION )

HV TOWERS OF LATTICE STEEL DESIGN

TRANSCO STANDARD : S-TR-OHL-TOWER (REV.0-2011)

S-TR-OHL-TOWERS (Rev.0-2011) Page 1 of 32

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
HV Towers of Lattice Steel Design

CONTENTS

1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................... 3
1.1 Drawings ........................................................................................................................... 3
1.2 Equipment Identification and Color Codes ....................................................................... 3
2 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ...................................................................................... 4
2.1 Towers............................................................................................................................... 4
2.1.1 General .............................................................................................................................. 4
2.1.2 Proven Tower Designs ...................................................................................................... 4
2.1.3 Material ............................................................................................................................. 4
2.1.4 Design................................................................................................................................ 4
2.1.5 Construction ...................................................................................................................... 6
2.1.6 Nuts and Bolts ................................................................................................................... 6
2.1.7 Anti-Climbing Devices, Step Bolts and Bird Guards........................................................ 7
2.1.8 Conductor and Earthwire Attachments ............................................................................. 8
2.1.9 Tower Grounding and Earth-Clamping Bolts ................................................................... 8
2.1.10 Solar Powered Aviation Hazard Lighting ......................................................................... 8
2.1.11 Workmanship .................................................................................................................... 9
2.1.12 Identification Plates......................................................................................................... 10
2.1.13 Tower Maintenance Safety Systems ............................................................................... 11
2.1.14 Marking, Packing and Handling...................................................................................... 11
2.1.15 Tower Locations.............................................................................................................. 12
2.1.16 Design Spans ................................................................................................................... 12
2.1.17 Design Loads................................................................................................................... 13
2.1.18 Full Scale Tower Load Test ............................................................................................ 15
2.1.19 Gantry and Gantry area ................................................................................................... 17
2.2 Erection of Towers .......................................................................................................... 18
2.2.1 General ............................................................................................................................ 18
2.2.2 Handling and Storage ...................................................................................................... 18
2.2.3 Erection ........................................................................................................................... 19
3 SCHEDULES OF OVER HEAD LINES .................................................................... 21
3.1 Schedule A ...................................................................................................................... 21
3.2 Schedule B1..................................................................................................................... 21
3.3 Schedule B2..................................................................................................................... 23
3.4 Schedule C1..................................................................................................................... 24
3.5 Schedule C2..................................................................................................................... 26
3.6 Schedule C3..................................................................................................................... 27
3.7 Schedule D ...................................................................................................................... 29
3.8 Schedule E ....................................................................................................................... 32

S-TR-OHL-TOWERS (Rev.0-2011) Page 2 of 32

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
HV Towers of Lattice Steel Design

HV / MV TOWERS OF LATTICE STEEL DESIGN

1 GENERAL
This part of the specification covers design, manufacture, testing, erection and commissioning of
HV overhead line towers of steel lattice design.
For applicable technical standards, tests and general requirements please refer to:
¾ S-TR-OHL-GEN - General Requirements (Applicable Technical Standards, Tests,
etc.)

1.1 Drawings
Typical Drawings for HV/MV Towers of Lattice Steel Design provided in the Drawings Section
are as follows:
Drawing No. Title
DWG TR OHL 02 01 Outline of 400 kV Suspension Tower (Type S±0)
DWG TR OHL 02 02 Outline of 400 kV Tension Tower (Type ±0)
DWG TR OHL 02 03 Outline of 220 kV Suspension Tower (Type S±0)
DWG TR OHL 02 04 Outline of 220 kV Tension Tower (Type ±0)
DWG TR OHL 02 05 Outline of 132 kV Suspension Tower (Type S±0)
DWG TR OHL 02 06 Outline of 132 kV Tension Tower (Type ±0)
DWG TR OHL 02 10-1 Tower Plates (400,000 V)
DWG TR OHL 02 10-2 Tower Plates (220,000 V)
DWG TR OHL 02 10-3 Tower Plates (132,000 V)
DWG TR OHL 02 11 Outline of 400 kV Suspension Tower (Type ±0) Alternative
DWG TR OHL 02 12 Outline of 400 kV Tension Tower (Type ±0) Alternative
DWG TR OHL 02 15 Airborne Observation Plate

1.2 Equipment Identification and Color Codes

Concerning HV/MV Towers of Lattice Steel Design Identification reference shall be made to
Standard Technical Specification, Part:
¾ S-TR-GEN-ID - Components Marking

S-TR-OHL-TOWERS (Rev.0-2011) Page 3 of 32

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
HV Towers of Lattice Steel Design

2 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

2.1 Towers

2.1.1 General
Double circuit tower structures shall be of the self-supporting lattice type steel frame. The
general outlines of the towers, shall be as shown on the Drawing(s).
The members of the latticed structures shall be of hot rolled steel angle sections. All tower
material shall be factory made and entirely galvanized by the hot-dip process. The main data for
the overhead line is given in Schedule A. Basic tower types shall be as indicated in Schedule B.

2.1.2 Proven Tower Designs

In order to save time for design and testing, the Bidder/Contractor may propose an existing
proven tower design, if it is equal to, or exceeds the design loading and clearances required by
this Specification. The Bidder/Contractor must submit the tower test report in accordance with
the clause 2.1.18.2 ‘Acceptance of Already Existing Test Reports’.

2.1.3 Material
Material for the steel towers shall be of the type and grade most suitable for the application
intended and shall conform to the latest applicable standard, specifications and recommended
practices of the industry. Cold-formed steel angles, flat bars and rods shall not be used for tower
members.
Mild steel and/or high strength steel shall be used for the fabrication of towers. The quality of
steel to be used shall correspond to S275 J0 (for mild steel) and S355 J0 (for High Tensile Steel)
according to BS EN 10025 (latest Version). Reference is also made to Schedule B2.
For tower bolts reference shall be made to the relevant Article hereinafter.
All material shall be tested at the steel mill in accordance with the applicable specification and
standards under which they are manufactured. The Bidder/Contractor shall attach all the mill test
certificates with the report. Tests shall be conducted in accordance with approved quality plan.
The tests to be conducted shall include, but are not limited to, uniformity of galvanizing coating,
mechanical and chemical properties of all steel.

2.1.4 Design
This clause describes the basic requirements of the design procedure and its documentation. The
design shall be performed in accordance with VDE 0210 ‘Planning and Design of Overhead
Power Lines with Rated Voltages above 1 kV’ or ASCE 10-97 ‘Design of Latticed Steel
Transmission Structures’.
The design document of each type of tower shall include the following:

S-TR-OHL-TOWERS (Rev.0-2011) Page 4 of 32

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
HV Towers of Lattice Steel Design

• Design criteria with grade of steel and minimum size for tower members and connections
and with maximum allowable slenderness ratio for tower members
• Calculation of the maximum wind pressure on the overhead line components
• Brief description of the software used for the structural analysis including explanation of
the computer model and load assumptions and combinations
• Sag and tension calculation for the required range of spans along with data sheets of
conductors and ground-wire, including all installed accessories and fittings. Tensions shall
be calculated using change-of-state equation with governing (starting) loading conditions
and tension limitations as specified in Schedules . Loading condition with quartering wind
shall be included in calculation as well. Sags shall be calculated using catenary formula
• Loading tables and loading trees prepared for the maximum external forces and for the
maximum tension in conductor and earthwire as per sag and tension calculation
• Calculation of the maximum swing angle of insulator strings, jumper loops, jumper strings
and complete conductor catenary span
• Calculation of the conductor clearance at mid-span in still air conditions
• Calculation of the member-wise wind load and self-weight of tower, including redundant
members
• Member design tables including member with size, length, gross area and radius of
gyration, compression and tension member forces, compression curve number, number and
size of bolts, bearing and shear stress, safety factors, including equations for calculation of
slenderness ratio as per relevant standard etc.
• Design of redundant members including buckling and bending criteria
• Foundation loads in global direction for each leg extension
• Design of stubs as per ASCE 10-97. Stub angles shall be at least 2 mm thicker than
attached steel leg angle and shall be fitted with cleats. The stub angle shall be completely
galvanised and shear connectors shall be designed to transfer entire axial and shear force.
Cleat connections shall be checked for shear and moment forces
• Design of anchor bolts as per ASCE 10-97. The design shall be supported with proper
figures
• Outline drawing and clearance diagram with member and bolt sizes and steel grade used.
The outline drawing shall include the redundant members. Tower height including
maximum sag, ground clearance and insulator length shall be indicated as well
• Copy of the computer input for the software used in the structural analysis and design of
tower.
The unit stresses in members and connections for the structural design calculation, based on the
design loading and design unbalanced loading (broken wire conditions) multiplied by safety
factor, indicated in Schedule C1, shall not exceed the yield stresses given in VDE 0210 or
ASCE-Standard 10-97. Connections shall be designed for the same member forces and according

S-TR-OHL-TOWERS (Rev.0-2011) Page 5 of 32

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
HV Towers of Lattice Steel Design

to the above mentioned standards. The towers shall be designed with an overload capacity (factor
of safety) of f1 times the unbalanced design loading stipulated in the Specification. No damage
or permanent distortion of any members, bolts, connections of fittings or elongation of bolt holes
shall be permitted for these design conditions.
The slenderness ratios (L/r) of member given in the following table shall not be exceeded, where,
“L” is the buckling length of member as per the line diagram of the tower, and “r” is the
corresponding radius of gyration of the members.
• Tower legs, main compression members in l/r<150
cross arms and earth wire peak
• Other compression members carrying l/r<200
calculated stresses
• Redundant members l/r<250

The slenderness ratio of tension members shall be in accordance with the relevant standard used.
Other approved calculation methods may be applied according to the Standards specified or
otherwise approved by TRANSCO. In this case the calculated buckling resistance may not
exceed the VDE 0210 or ASCE-level.

2.1.5 Construction
The towers shall be of standard construction and shall be designed to reduce the number of
different parts to a minimum, thus facilitating transport and erection. No member shall be of
angles with dimensions less than 45 x 45 x 5 mm. The minimum thickness for legs and
compression members in cross arms and in earthwire peaks shall be 6 mm. Gusset plates shall
not be less than 6 mm thick.
The diameter of bolt holes for all types of towers shall not be more than 1.5 mm larger than the
nominal diameter of the bolt. All members of the towers shall be connected by bolts.
Connections of members shall be designed to avoid eccentricity as much as possible.
All members, except redundant members, carrying computed stress shall be connected with at
least two bolts.

2.1.6 Nuts and Bolts

Bolts shall have hexagonal heads and nuts, with metric thread (coarse) and shall conform with
DIN 267 and DIN 555.
In general, bolts for the connection of tower members shall not be less than 16 mm in diameter.
The minimum grade for all bolts shall be 5.6 according to DIN 267, unless noted otherwise.
All nuts shall be secured by use of helical spring lock washers conforming to DIN 127 in
connection with flat washers conforming to DIN 126.

S-TR-OHL-TOWERS (Rev.0-2011) Page 6 of 32

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
HV Towers of Lattice Steel Design

All nuts and bolts shall be hot dip galvanized. Threads before galvanizing shall be coarse
threads. There shall be no excess of galvanizing at the root of the thread and nuts shall turn easily
on the completed bolts without excessive looseness. Nut threads shall be tapped after galvanizing
so as to produce a finger-free fit on the galvanizing. Bolts will be rejected if they are considered
by TRANSCO to have an excessively loose or tight fit.
The length of bolts and the length of thread shall be such that bearing is upon the shank and not
upon the threads. When in position all bolts or screwed rods shall project through the
corresponding nut, but such projection shall not exceed 8 mm nor less than 3 threads.

2.1.7 Anti-Climbing Devices, Step Bolts and Bird Guards

Typical Drawings for Anti-Climbing Devices provided in the Drawings Section is as follows:
Drawing No. Title
DWG TR OHL 02 13 Anti-Climbing Device and Step Bolts

Each tower shall be fitted with an anti-climbing device to prevent unauthorized persons from
climbing the tower. The anti- climbing device shall be of either a spike type or a barbed wire
type of stainless steel and shall be fixed at a height of approx. 3 meters above the foundation. It
shall provide suitable gates adjacent to the step bolt legs to be locked with padlocks to
TRANSCO’s approval. Spikes shall be of solid design, have a sharp end, a minimum length of
250 mm and shall be pointed downwards. The maximum distance between spikes shall not be
more than 100 mm. The maximum distance between the strings of barbed wire shall be not more
than 200 mm. The horizontal separation of the strings of barbed wire shall be maintained by the
provision of spacers at a maximum distance of not more than 2 m.
For double circuit type towers step bolts shall be provided on two diagonally opposite tower
legs. They shall begin directly above the foundation and continue to the tower top. They shall be
spaced at a distance of 333 mm from center to center, distributed strictly alternating on the outer
sides of the leg angles. The spacing distance of all step bolts shall be equal on the entire tower.
Spacing tolerances according to VDE 0210/12.85 shall be accepted. Only the step bolts above
the anti climbing device shall be installed permanently on the tower. Bolts below the anti
climbing device shall either be installed, or be delivered to ENDUSER’s store.
All step bolts shall be at least 24 mm in diameter, with a free tread width of 20 cm. For
protection against slipping a lateral limit of min. 20 mm above top of step shall be provided. The
tread side of the step bolts shall be uniform for all towers. The fastening side may accommodate
different sizes, to take advantage of holes provided for structural bolts. Step bolts shall be rated
at least for a concentrated load of 1.5 kN, acting vertically at the most unfavourable position. If
applied in place of a structural bolt, it’s loading has to be considered, too.
Towers above 60 meters height shall be equipped from the appropriate level with inclined step
ladders, at the transversal tower faces or inside the tower shaft. Safe changeover routing from
step bolts to step ladders is to be provided. The ladders shall be fitted with safety cages and
provide passing platforms every 20 meters.

S-TR-OHL-TOWERS (Rev.0-2011) Page 7 of 32

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
HV Towers of Lattice Steel Design

Tower members positioned above insulator strings/solar panels (if applicable) shall be fitted with
stainless steel needle strips, effectively preventing birds from sitting in these locations. The strips
shall extend sufficiently, horizontally beyond the protected location and be applied to all surfaces
a bird can sit on. Where needles are projecting from the crossarm contour towards live parts, the
tower clearance diagram shall consider the height of the needles.

2.1.8 Conductor and Earthwire Attachments

Typical Drawings for Earthwire Attachment provided in the Drawings Section is as follows:
Drawing No. Title
DWG TR OHL 02 14 Earthwire Accessories

Conductor and earth wire attachments shall be considered as part of the respective basic towers
and shall be supplied as integral parts of them.
All conductor suspension points shall provide 3 brackets for installation of suspension hinges
suitable for the attachment of double and single insulator strings associated with suspension
conductor support assemblies. Both, individual hinges and suspension point assemblies shall be
orientated in line direction, allowing the insulator strings to swing in crossarm direction.
Tension towers shall have brackets suitable for the attachment of tension hinges for double
insulator strings associated with dead-end conductor assemblies. These attachments shall be
provided in a way to maintain all distances between phases/OPGW/EW as on suspension towers
across the whole deflection range of the respective tower type.
The shieldwire shall be connected to the suspension tower peak by one hinge orientated in line
direction, allowing the suspension assembly to swing in crossarm direction. Connection to
tension towers shall be provided by tension assemblies, to be fixed to the tower peak.
For direct connection of overhead shield wire shunts to the towers, 2 sets of two holes, each,
shall be provided on every earth wire peak.

2.1.9 Tower Grounding and Earth-Clamping Bolts

Concerning Tower Grounding and Earth-Clamping Bolts, reference shall be made to Standard
Technical Specification, Part:
¾ S-TR-EARTH-GROUND - Earthing / Grounding Systems

2.1.10 Solar Powered Aviation Hazard Lighting

Each tower shall be equipped with suitable means for possible installation of solar powered
aviation hazard lights.
Fixing holes shall be provided, on both top crossarms, permitting installation of two solar panels
with a total area of min. 3 m2, at an inclination of 45° to the horizontal, facing due south. The
fixing points shall be versatile; to account for different tower orientations and be designed to
safely transfer the full windload acting on the panels.

S-TR-OHL-TOWERS (Rev.0-2011) Page 8 of 32

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
HV Towers of Lattice Steel Design

In the tower shaft, at top crossarm level, a steel grating work platform of min. 6 m² shall be
provided, suitable for installation of a battery/control unit enclosure with dimensions of min.
BxDxH of 130 cm x 130 cm x 100 cm, and a weight of min. 250 kg. Besides the box, the
platform shall be able to carry, simultaneously, the weight of 3 linesmen with tackle.
At the earthwire peak, two holes shall be provided, for vertical attachment of a warning light
assembly. In case of an earthwire crossarm, a pole shall be provided allowing installation of the
light above the system elevation.
Above facilities are considered integral tower part and shall be provided, regardless whether the
scope of work actually requires supply of warning lights or not.
Towers exceeding 45 m in height shall consider in the design the permanent and installation
loads of two intensity light systems installed a diagonally opposite tower legs, at half tower
height. These shall compromise for each system a photovoltaic module surface of min. 1.2m x
1.2m installed at a inclination of 450, a system enclosure of min. 100 kg with a platform of min
2m x 2m, and three linesmen with tackle.
For such lights, actual installation provision shall be procured only in case of actual requirement,
to be intimated by TRANSCO. These shall be designed in a way allowing installation on the step
bolt legs of the tower without need of drilling additional holes in the tower steel work.

2.1.11 Workmanship
All work shall be equal to the best modern practice in the manufacture and fabrication of
materials covered by this Specification.
The Bidder/Contractor shall be responsible for the correct fitting of all parts. He shall replace,
free of cost, any defective material discovered during erection, and pay all costs of field
corrections for such replacement.
All parts of the structure shall be neatly finished and free from kinks, twists or bends. The
fabrication shall be in strict accordance with the shop drawings prepared by the
Bidder/Contractor and approved by TRANSCO.
Structural material shall be straight and cleaned of all rust and dirt before laid out or worked in
any manner. Shearing and cutting shall be performed carefully. Manually guided cutting torches
shall not be used.
All bolt holes in steel members shall be punched, sub-punched, reamed or drilled before
galvanizing. Holes shall not be punched but only drilled, if the thickness of the metal exceeds the
diameter of the hole, in mild steel sections of > 19 mm thickness, high yield steel sections > 14
mm, and in all crossarm members exposed to permanent tension. All holes shall be cylindrical
and perpendicular to the member, clean cut with sharp tools and without torn or ragged edges.
All members shall be cut to jig and all holes shall be punched or drilled to jig. All parts shall be
carefully cut and holes accurately located so that when the members are in position the holes will
be truly opposite each other before being bolted up. Drifting of holes will not be allowed.

S-TR-OHL-TOWERS (Rev.0-2011) Page 9 of 32

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
HV Towers of Lattice Steel Design

2.1.12 Identification Plates

Typical Drawings for Identification Plates are provided in the Drawings Section as follows:
Drawing No. Title
DWG TR OHL 02 10-11 Tower Plates
DWG TR OHL 02 151 Airborne Observation Plate

The plates required for each tower are:

• Danger signs 2 Nos.
• Tower number plate 1 No.
• Circuit name plates 1 No. per electric circuit
• Phase plates 1 set of 3 Nos. per electric circuit.

Danger plates shall feature red symbols on a white background. They shall comprise a skull with
crossed bones, as well as lightning arrows conforming to DIN 40006. The text “DANGER” shall
be boldly written in both, Arabic and English languages. The line voltage shall be shown, as
well.
Tower number plates shall show the tower number in black letters, on a white background. The
height of the letters shall not be less than 150 mm. letters in all ID plates should fit each plate
width identified, in bold fonts.
Circuit number plates shall show the circuit abbreviation and number in black letters, on a white
background. Termination gantries shall be equipped with circuit plates showing the circuit names
in full length.
Phase plates shall show the English letters “R”, “Y”, and “B”, in black color, on red, yellow &
blue backgrounds. The plate’s arrangement shall be in line with the phase’s configuration.
The tower number plate shall be installed on the tower base at height ≥2 m. The number plate
shall face the normal tower access. Fitting positions for all towers shall be submitted for
TRANSCO’s approval.
The circuit designation & the danger sign, as well as the phase identification plates shall be
installed under each circuit and shall be placed on the step bolt legs side (not on the leg itself),
directly above the anti climbing device. They shall be positioned to reflect the phase allocation
on the tower and to be easily identifiable from ground level.
Furthermore, on each tension and every tenth suspension tower an airborne observation number
plate shall be provided. The tower number shall be cut from the sheet metal, with a letter height
of min. 700 mm. The plate background shall be black. The plates shall be installed, either on the
top crossarm or on the earthwire peak, in a position that is easily recognizable from the air. It
shall be ensured that legibility of the cut-out number is not impaired by tower steelworks, placed
behind the plate. Orientation of all plates on the line shall be uniform, to TRANSCO’s approval.

S-TR-OHL-TOWERS (Rev.0-2011) Page 10 of 32

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
HV Towers of Lattice Steel Design

All plates shall be of corrosion resistant aluminium with embossed letters and painted, with
thickness ≥3 mm.
On all plates, the colors shall be free from fading. Lettering and size of the plates shall be to
TRANSCO’s approval.

2.1.13 Tower Maintenance Safety Systems

The Bidder/Contractor shall be responsible for the complete supply and installation of a system
to facilitate operator safety during line maintenance. The system should be designed so that it
provides clear indication by means of flags of which circuit has been made safe to work-on and
which is live, and constant reminder to operators by means of a wristlet in circuit identification
colors, of which circuit they should be working on. The system will generally comprise the
following:
• Circuit color plates – 7 per tower for each circuit Approximate 145mm x 100mm with 18
mm hole, marked with colored stripes for circuit identification. Coding will be advised to
the Bidder/Contractor
• Interlocking flag brackets – as required by the system offered by the Bidder/Contractor.
There should be a flag point on each circuit side of every tower at low level and a further
flag point on each circuit side of every tower at each crossarm level. Method of
interlocking to be agreed with the Bidder/Contractor
• Wristlets – 40 to be supplied for each circuit
• Flags – 15 nos. in red to be supplied for each circuit
• Flags – 15 nos. in green to be supplied for each circuit.
Circuit identification system will be advised to the Bidder/Contractor.

2.1.14 Marking, Packing and Handling

Before galvanizing all tower members shall be hard stamped in approved position with
distinguishing numbers and/or letters corresponding to distinguishing numbers and/or letters on
approved drawings or material lists submitted by the Bidder/Contractor. Members that are used
for more than one tower type shall be marked with the designations of all the applicable types.
The erection marks shall be stamped with marking dies of 16 mm size and shall be clearly
legible after galvanizing. Care shall be taken to distinguish between various grades of steel,
wherever applicable. Bidder’s/Contractor’s Code (to be assigned to the Bidder/Contractor by
TRANSCO) and tower type nomenclature shall precede the member serial number.
These marks shall be embossed into the steel before galvanizing in such manner as to be plainly
visible after galvanizing.
The marking shall be in the same relative location on all members, using different marks for
different members, and the same marks for identical parts. Where high strength steel is used for
any tower member, all of these members shall have distinguishing marks stamped on them
adjacent to the identification number before galvanizing.

S-TR-OHL-TOWERS (Rev.0-2011) Page 11 of 32

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
HV Towers of Lattice Steel Design

Tower members shall be assembled for shipment in bundles of the same size and weight
containing pieces of the same or similar identifications mark and length. All bolts, nuts, washers,
step bolts and minor fittings shall be shipped in wooden cases of suitable size and weight, with
pieces properly separated according to size and type.
To ensure uninterrupted erection, the Bidder/Contractor shall supply a five (5) percent excess of
bolts, nuts, washers, step bolts, and minor fittings.
It is the Bidder’s/Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that the packing and handling is made in
such a way that neither the steel nor the galvanizing shall be damaged in transit. Transporting
vehicles shall be clean and free from foreign material, which could in any way injure the steel or
zinc coating.

2.1.15 Tower Locations

The Bidder/Contractor shall perform all detail survey work, determine the tower locations in the
map and longitudinal profiles and prepare tower lists with main data for each tower including
wind span and weight span.
The Bidder/Contractor shall consider any condition of uplift on towers as result of conductor and
earth wire loading and shall provide the appropriate measures in his design and supply to handle
the effect thereof. Hangers, where required, shall be flexible in the direction of the line and rigid
transverse to the line.
To increase the vertical loads on suspension towers, hold down weights (counter weights) can be
used where necessary, subject to the approval of TRANSCO and availability of space in the
tower window. The Bidder/Contractor shall submit a detailed design and calculation of hold
down weights.
At tower locations with additional loading due to span lengths exceeding the stipulated
maximum spans for conductor and earth wire weight loading and in case of uplift which cannot
be handled with counter weights, angle tension towers shall be used.
The Bidder/Contractor shall investigate and prove that the type of angle tension tower proposed
for such locations can withstand such increased loading.

2.1.16 Design Spans

The different tower types as per schedule B1 shall be designed for the basic-, wind-and weight-
spans as indicated in Schedule C2.
The term “basic span” shall mean the horizontal distance between centers of adjacent supports
on level ground from which the height of standard supports is derived with the specified
conductor clearances to ground in still air at maximum temperature.
The term “wind span” shall mean half the sum of adjacent horizontal span length supported on
any one tower.
The term “weight span” shall mean the length of conductor, the weight of which is supported at
any tower at minimum temperature in still air. The weight spans given in Schedule C2 are

S-TR-OHL-TOWERS (Rev.0-2011) Page 12 of 32

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
HV Towers of Lattice Steel Design

“maximum weight spans”. All Angle tower types have to be designed for “minimum weight
spans” equivalent to half of the maximum span given in schedule C2. At suspension position, the
minimum weight of conductor supported shall not be less than 25 % of the total weight of
conductor in the two adjacent spans.

2.1.17 Design Loads

Wind loads and temperatures for the design of the towers are indicated in Schedule C3.
The coefficient of dynamic wind pressure shall be considered for all towers according to DIN-
VDE 0210/12.85, Table 6 (Factor cf = 2.8 for the surface exposed to the wind).
The design shall be based on the following considerations:

2.1.17.1 Normal Conditions

Max. and Min. Vertical loads (V) consisting of :
• Weight produced by the effective portion of the adjacent conductors and earth wire spans
including weights of spacer dampers and warning spheres . The minimum weight of each
warning sphere must be taken as 7.2 Kg, if not envisaged in the line. Otherwise, exact
weight of warning sphere should be used
• Weight of insulator strings and other fittings
• Weight of solar aircraft warning light system. The minimum weight of each solar aircraft
warning light system must be taken as 10 Kg on each tower, if not envisaged in the line.
Otherwise, exact weight of solar aircraft warning light should be used in the design
• Weight of tower.
Transverse loads (T) consisting of :
a) Wind Loads:
• Due to the effective portion of the adjacent conductor and earth wire spans including
wind loads of aircraft warning spheres . The minimum diameter of warning sphere
for wind load calculation should be taken as 600 mm. Otherwise, exact diameter
should be used
• Due to the insulator strings and other fittings
• Due to the solar aircraft warning light system. The minimum exposed projected area
of solar aircraft warning light system for wind load calculation should be taken as
800 cm2. Otherwise, exact exposed projected area should be used
• Due to tower structure.
Two wind directions shall be considered:
• Perpendicular to the line direction
• Quartering wind according to VDE 0210.
b) Maximum angle pulls corresponding to type of tower

S-TR-OHL-TOWERS (Rev.0-2011) Page 13 of 32

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
HV Towers of Lattice Steel Design

Longitudinal loads (L) consisting of:

• The resultant forces produced by the maximum tension of conductors or earth wire in
the direction perpendicular to crossarms
• The design of the dead end tower shall consider conductor- and earth wires tension
without any offset for slack-span connections
• Wind loads on tower for Quartering wind.
General :
In case of conductor uplift, the cross arm of tension towers shall be designed accordingly and
proven by calculations. Counterweights may be permitted on suspension towers.

2.1.17.2 Broken wire conditions

Suspension tower :
For Single & twin Conductor bundle circuits - Any two phase bundles and one earthwire broken.
For quadruple Conductor bundle circuits - Any one phase bundle and one earthwire broken.
Angle tension tower and terminal tower :
Any three phase bundles or combination of two phase bundles and one earthwire broken.
Vertical loads (V) consisting of:
• 75% of weight produced by the effective portion of the adjacent conductor and earthwire
spans
• Weight of insulator strings and other fittings.
Transverse loads (T) consisting of:
• 75% of normal condition for wind loads
• 50% of normal condition for maximum angle pulls.
Longitudinal loads (L) consisting of:
• 70 % of maximum working tension of one phase bundle, 100 % of max. tension of
earthwire for suspension towers
• 100 % of maximum working tension of conductors or earth-wire for angle tension and
terminal towers.
The decrease in the vertical and transverse loads above refers only to phases where conductor is
broken.
Towers shall be designed so that all members will withstand normal and broken wire conditions
with safety factors as specified in Schedule C1.
The total loading for the tower shall include the dead weight of the tower plus transverse wind
load on tower plus the simultaneous application of loading as specified above for each tower
type. Wind loads on tower leg extension shall be taken into consideration.

S-TR-OHL-TOWERS (Rev.0-2011) Page 14 of 32

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
HV Towers of Lattice Steel Design

Terminal towers shall be designed to face the direction of the incoming line, and shall withstand
the load of all conductors and earth wire.

2.1.17.3 Erection and maintenance loads

For all members which can be climbed and are inclined with an angle less than 30° to horizontal
an erection and maintenance load of 1.5 kN acting vertically in the middle of a member shall be
assumed, however, unfactored and without any other loads. The resulting bending stresses have
to be calculated by considering double bending in respect to the main axis of the angle cross
section.

2.1.18 Full Scale Tower Load Test

2.1.18.1 Execution
Full scale tower load tests of assembled galvanized towers shall be carried out in accordance
with Standards IEC Publication No. 60652 (latest version).
The following requirements shall be fulfilled in the load tests of the tower:
i. The members in a test tower shall be of the same grade and quality of fabrication as those
to be supplied for the towers under these Tender Documents. The Bidder/Contractor shall
furnish certified test reports of the heats from which the material was rolled and a record
showing the heat from which each member was obtained. In order to differentiate the test
tower material from other tower material, the test tower material must be indented with a
different identification number.
ii. Test towers shall not be specially fitted other than with such fittings as are required on
similar towers to be erected in the field.
iii. Test towers shall be erected on a foundation structure, which shall be of adequate strength
and stiffness to safely withstand the tower reactions under test loading, without noticeable
distortion or displacement. The tower legs shall be connected to the anchorage in the same
manner as to the normal stub angle at site.
iv. While preparing for the tests, the Bidder/Contractor shall supply TRANSCO with a test
program, together with diagrams indicating the proposed methods of applying the various
loads and measurement of deflections. All instruments to be used in the tests such as
dynamometers, gauges and load cells shall be calibrated before the test.
v. The test loads shall be those obtained from the design loads multiplied by the specified
safety factor. Any combination of the test loads shall be applied to prove the capability of
the structure to withstand all required loading. The dead load of the tower will not be
factored.
vi. Each tower shall withstand the test loads for a duration as specified in IEC 60652, without
failure or permanent distortion of any member, fitting, bolt or part and without elongation
of bolt holes. The duration of test load shall start after the all indicators show that the loads
are not less than 100% of the test loads. There shall be no adjustment of loads during the

S-TR-OHL-TOWERS (Rev.0-2011) Page 15 of 32

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
HV Towers of Lattice Steel Design

duration, as specified in IEC 60652. Should it become necessary to adjust the loading, the
duration, as specified in IEC 60652, shall restart after the adjustment is completed.
vii. All test loads shall be removed completely before the loads for the next test are applied.
Test loads corresponding to conductor and earthwire loading shall be applied to the
attachments provided for these loads while test loads equivalent to wind load on the tower
shall be applied in locations approved by TRANSCO. Friction losses in rigging shall be
taken into account in the application of the test loads.
viii. Any conspicuous yielding or any failure, under any of the test loading, shall be considered
as a defect, in which case the Bidder/Contractor shall modify the design and shall repeat
the test case in which a defect developed, at his own expense. Any delays in execution of
contract due to such failures or repetition of test, shall be the sole responsibility of the
Bidder/Contractor.
ix. One tower structure of each type (with maximum height extension) shall be tested. The
tower must be dismantled carefully after it has withstood all the test loads successfully.
The tested tower shall be transported to the project site for erection. The tower shall be
located in line route in such a way that it remains under-utilised compared to the design
loads. The location must be decided with TRANSCO’s approval.
x. TRANSCO reserves the right to modify the requirements for performing any or all tests
and the Bidder/Contractor will not be entitled to any compensation by reason of such
modification.
xi. Test samples for mechanical characteristics shall be cut from member of the prototype
tower and standard tensile tests shall be performed at Bidder’s(Contractor’s expense. The
results of the tests on these samples shall be considered satisfactory, if:
a. average yield value is equal or smaller than guaranteed minimum value time 1.25 for
steel members having a minimum guaranteed yield point lower or equal to 300 Mpa
b. average yield value of equal or smaller guaranteed minimum value times 1.17 for steel
members having a minimum guaranteed yield point greater than 300 Mpa
c. average ultimate strength value of equal or smaller than guaranteed minimum value
times 1.20.
The average are obtained from eight test specimens taken from different most heavily
loaded members of the tower for each grade of steel.
xii. The Bidder/Contractor shall submit full reports of all tower physical load tests including
clear photograph of the test set-ups and nature of all failures, certified calibration reports,
detailed diagrams showing the manner in which test loads were applied, deflection records,
mill certificate of tower material and material test report.
xiii. Each tower structure shall be assembled with all step bolts/ladders in place. TRANSCO’s
representative will test all climbing provisions for strict adherence to the specification and
suitability, by climbing every tower completely. Any modifications found advisable during
this test shall be incorporated into the tower design, without any extra cost.
Notwithstanding prior approval given for tower drawings, design and location of all

S-TR-OHL-TOWERS (Rev.0-2011) Page 16 of 32

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
HV Towers of Lattice Steel Design

climbing provisions will be considered accepted only after TRANSCO’s confirmation, in

writing, of their suitability, after successfully climbing the test towers.
xiv. The prices tendered for tower tests shall include only the cost of erecting, testing and
dismantling of towers, together with all rigging, accessories, dynamometers, gauges, load
cells and personnel necessary for the execution of the tests. All tower test prices shall be
quoted under the C+F price column only. The tower itself shall be paid as per contractual
unit rates.

2.1.18.2 Acceptance of Already Existing Test Reports

In lieu of the above testing, certified results of a previous test may be acceptable, provided that
the test results were adequately documented and test parameters were equal to or more
demanding than the tests specified herein and that the towers tested were of the types tendered
and specified for testing.

2.1.18.3 TRANSCO’s Attendance

Tower tests shall be generally attended by TRANSCO. The costs shall not be contained in the
quoted prices for tower tests and shall be paid under “Inspection Services” as detailed in the
respective clause in the Special Conditions of Contract and as per the unit rates quoted against
the same.

2.1.19 Gantry and Gantry area

For the connection of the line with substations, gantries with horizontal configuration of
conductors shall be provided. The phase distances at the gantry shall take into account the
installation of proposed line traps, if applicable, on any adjacent phases. Gantry clearances shall
satisfy IEC 60071 towards the substation and VDE 0210 towards the line.
The gantry will be located at a distance of about 50 to 120 m from the terminal tower. Around
the gantry and the apparatus, a fence of galvanized or plastic coated steel of an approved type,
with additional galvanized or stainless steel barbed wire, shall be constructed, as protection
against entrance of unauthorized persons. The gantry fence shall have a minimum height of 3.0
m, with reinforced concrete- or plastic coated steel posts. The design shall be to the satisfaction
of TRANSCO. Proper earthing of the fence shall be provided.
For the mechanical design, grounding and painting of the gantry, and for the design of its
foundation the same stipulations are valid as for towers and foundations. The statistical system,
which is assumed for calculating the member forces, must correspond to the real construction.
An earthing grid up to outside of the fence has to be provided with stranded tinned copper
conductor of at least 95 mm² and conforming to the requirements of VDE 0141.
All areas of the gantry shall receive topping with gravel and shall be excavated to a depth of not
less than 150 mm referring to finished ground level. The bottom of the excavated area shall be
plain, topped and levelled with coarse gravel of 38 - 75 mm in size and of a thickness of not less
than 150 mm.

S-TR-OHL-TOWERS (Rev.0-2011) Page 17 of 32

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
HV Towers of Lattice Steel Design

2.2 Erection of Towers

2.2.1 General
The Bidder/Contractor shall ascertain that all concrete foundations or rock anchor grouting are
cured and that all back-filled material is compacted to its approved level before placing or
erecting tower steel on the foundations. Concrete in tower foundations shall be allowed to set a
minimum of 7 days before erection of the tower and a minimum of 28 days before conductor and
earth wire installation on the tower.
The Bidder/Contractor shall erect the types of towers specified at the locations indicated on the
Contract Drawings.
Towers shall be assembled in accordance with the approved drawings and erected by a suitable
method, which will not overstrain structural members or their foundations, subject to
TRANSCO’s approval.

2.2.2 Handling and Storage

Steel shall be stored on wooden supports of sufficient height, to avoid any ground contact or
other contamination. Storage conditions shall be well ventilated, preventing the formation of wet
storage stain from accumulation of humidity and sand. It shall be clearly understood, that white
rust formation will lead to rejection of the affected material.
All necessary measures shall be taken to prevent structural injury to members, or damage to
galvanized coatings. Members shall not be dragged on the ground, nor will the practice of
throwing tower steel into piles on conveyances, or from conveyances onto the ground, and of
skidding steel members over each other, be permitted. Lifting of tower steel shall not be done
with steel slings, being in direct contact with galvanized surfaces. Instead, fabric belts, or other
suitable protection shall be applied.
Tower material damaged shall be replaced by the Bidder/Contractor at no cost to TRANSCO.
Small accidental damages to galvanized surfaces may be repaired by application of an approved
repair paint in accordance with the Chapter of the Standard Technical Specifications, Part:
¾ S-TR-CORR - Corrosion Protection

Larger damages to, or systematic defects of the galvanizing shall be repaired by hot-dip
galvanizing, only.
The attempt to repair shall not bind TRANSCO to accept the repaired part when this is re-offered
for inspection.
Acceptance by TRANSCO of any repaired galvanized steel does not absolve the
Bidder/Contractor from his responsibility of supplying galvanized steel to give satisfactory
service in the prevailing corrosive atmosphere. TRANSCO reserve the right to reject any
galvanized steel found rusty, damaged, bent or other-wise defective, before final acceptance.

S-TR-OHL-TOWERS (Rev.0-2011) Page 18 of 32

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
HV Towers of Lattice Steel Design

The Bidder/Contractor shall note that galvanizing facilities are existing in the U.A.E. and may be
used for re-galvanizing of seriously damaged parts, on the advise of TRANSCO.

2.2.3 Erection
Prior to the commencement of any tower erection activity the Bidder/Contractor shall submit for
approval a Method Statement detailing the proposed erection methods and safety precautions to
be taken during the erection.
The Bidder/Contractor shall erect towers for the transmission line in accordance with the
erection diagrams, construction lists and other drawings and instructions.
The method of assembling and erecting a tower shall be such that during erection no member
shall be subjected to any stress in excess of that for which it was designed.
Misalignment or misfit of adjacent sections or members attributable to the adopted method of
erection shall be corrected by changing erection methods as necessary to eliminate trouble.
Straining of members shall not be permitted for bringing them into position. It may, however, be
necessary to match hole positions at joints and to facilitate this, tommy bars not more than
450mm long may be used.
For ease of checking bolts and nuts shall be generally fitted in such a way that the nuts are placed
outside for horizontal bolts and downside for vertical bolts.
Before starting erection of an upper section, the lower section shall be completely braced and all
bolts provided tightened adequately in accordance with approved drawings to prevent any
mishap during erection.
All plan diagonals relevant to a section of tower shall be placed in position before assembly of
upper section is taken up.
All members shall have their joints cleaned when bolted up.
If erected by assembling in sections, the initial tightening of bolts shall be adequate for dead
load, live load and direction stresses, but shall not be so strong as to prevent aligning and fitting
adjacent sections or members. The assembled sections shall be adequately supported during
erection.
All blank holes, if any left, after complete erection of the tower, are to be filled up by bolts and
nuts of the correct size.
During the erection, no tools shall be taken up to the towers, except structure wrenches and drift
pins. Only such wrenches will be allowed, which do neither deform nor injure the galvanized
coating of the bolts/nuts. Use of drift pins is limited to guiding the different tower members into
position, without enlarging holes or distorting tower members.
Each bolt shall be securely tightened with adequate but non-excessive torque. Proper tightness
shall be spot checked by the Bidder/Contractor, to TRANSCO’s satisfaction, with an accurately
calibrated torque wrench. The Bidder/Contractor shall indicate the torque that shall be applied
for each bolt size. All tower bolts shall be completely tightened, immediately after a tower is

S-TR-OHL-TOWERS (Rev.0-2011) Page 19 of 32

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
HV Towers of Lattice Steel Design

erected. After erection, towers shall be left in workmanlike condition, complete and safe in every
respect.
In order to prevent pilfering, all bolts and nuts below a minimum height of 3 m above the
foundation cap shall be secured by suitable means, to be proposed by the Bidder/Contractor, for
TRANSCO’s approval.
During assembly punching, reaming or drilling for correction of mismatched holes shall not be
permitted without the authorisation of TRANSCO in writing.
If any shop errors are discovered in the steel, the Bidder/Contractor shall notify TRANSCO who
will decide on site whether the error shall be corrected on site or the members shall be replaced.
All exposed steel surfaces around the holes or on cuts on which corrective work is permitted
shall be given sufficient coats of an authorised zinc rich paint to provide sufficient protection to
the steel and shall be to the approval of TRANSCO.
Earth clamping bolts and tower sign plates shall be installed according to Article 2.1.9.
Towers must be completely erected with all members in place and bolts securely tightened
before any stringing of conductors or earth wires may be started. All towers shall be inspected by
TRANSCO accompanied by the Bidder/Contractor before the stringing operation. Prior to the
erection of towers or parts of towers, which had completely been assembled on ground, the
approval of TRANSCO is required.
In aviation-marking areas, immediately after erection above foundation level, the towers shall be
illuminated, either by the permanent lighting system or by a temporary lighting system, to be
approved by the Department of Civil Aviation.

S-TR-OHL-TOWERS (Rev.0-2011) Page 20 of 32

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
HV Towers of Lattice Steel Design

3 SCHEDULES OF OVER HEAD LINES

3.1 Schedule A
LINE DATA (400 KV)
Item Description Details
1 Number of Circuits 2
2 Number of conductors per phase 4
3 Number of OPGW/earthwires 2

LINE DATA (220 KV)

Item Description Details
1 Number of Circuits 2
2 Number of conductors per phase 2 or 4
3 Number of OPGW/earthwires 1

LINE DATA (132 KV)

Item Description Details
1 Number of Circuits 2
2 Number of conductors per phase 1 or 2
3 Number of OPGW/earthwires 1

3.2 Schedule B1
TOWER TYPES (400/220/132 KV)
Item Tower Position where Used Angle of Deviation Type of
Types up to (Degrees) Insulator String
1 S Straight line 0..2 Suspension
2 AT Angle tension 0..30 Tension
3 BAT Big Angle tension 30..60 Tension

S-TR-OHL-TOWERS (Rev.0-2011) Page 21 of 32

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
HV Towers of Lattice Steel Design

4 BAT90/DE* Big Angle tension & 60..90/0..45 Tension

dead-end (terminal)
5 G* Double circuit gantry 0..45 low duty
at stations tension

If the Bidder/Contractor deems a combination of different tower types into a single type (still
according to the specification requirements) as economical solution, he is invited to propose so.
Notes:
* DE tower and Gantries shall be designed to face the direction of the incoming line and shall
withstand the load of the conductors and OPGW/earthwire. Both shall be designed to accept at
least 45 degree in the slack span. The gantry width shall be provided as per actual requirements.
Erection Holes to be provided at crossarm tip of all towers. All BAT/DE towers shall have
provision for three earth wires to be connected to substation. All Gantries in substations shall
have provision (holes) on end columns for future extension.
The design of the towers shall cater for leg extensions from +6m to -6m in steps of 1m. The
estimated quantity of leg extensions as per the Bills of Quantities is the cumulated quantity for
all numbers of leg extensions per tower type.

If the Bidder/Contractor deems a combination of different tower types into a single type (still
according to the specification requirements) as economical solution, he is invited to propose so.

S-TR-OHL-TOWERS (Rev.0-2011) Page 22 of 32

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
HV Towers of Lattice Steel Design

Notes:
* BAT Tower shall have same body with different cross-arms for the deviation ranges up to
60/90 degree. Extended or rectangular shape cross-arms may be provided.
** DE (terminal) tower shall face the direction of the incoming line and shall withstand the
load of the conductors and earthwire. The cross arm arrangement and cross arm lengths
shall be designed for down leads to the sealing ends and surge arresters installed on the
provided tower platforms.
The design of the towers shall cater for leg extensions from +6m to –6m in steps of 1m.
The estimated quantity of leg extensions as per the Bills of Quantities is the cumulated
quantity for all numbers of leg extensions per tower type.

3.3 Schedule B2
TOWER STEEL PARTICULARS
Item Description Minimum Values
1 Structural Steel (S275)
1.1 Tensile strength N/mm2 410
1.2 Yield point N/mm2 275

2 High Strength Steel (S355)

2.1 Tensile strength N/mm2 510
2.2 Yield point N/mm2 355

3 High Strength Steel Bolts (5.6)

3.1 Tensile strength N/mm2 500
3.2 Yield point N/mm2 300

S-TR-OHL-TOWERS (Rev.0-2011) Page 23 of 32

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
HV Towers of Lattice Steel Design

3.4 Schedule C1
FACTORS OF SAFETY
Item Description Minimum Factor of Safety
1 Conductors
1.1 Conductors at final maximum working tension
based on:
- ultimate strength 2.50
1.2 Conductors at still air everyday temperatures
final tension based on:
- ultimate strength 5.55
1.3 Dead end compression clamps and compression
splices based on:
- conductor ultimate strength 0.95

2 Towers and Foundation

2.1 All Suspension towers and Gantries (excluding 2.00
self Weight) under normal working loads
2.2 All other types of towers (excluding self 2.50
Weight) under normal working loads
2.3 All types of towers and Gantries (excluding self 1.50
Weight) under broken wire loads
2.4 All towers & Gantries- Self Weight 1.20
2.5 Pile design (concrete section) DIN 1045 or BS8110
2.6 Stub angles, under all loading conditions 2.50

S-TR-OHL-TOWERS (Rev.0-2011) Page 24 of 32

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
HV Towers of Lattice Steel Design

Schedule C1 (continued)

Item Description Minimum Factor of Safety

3 Insulator Strings
3.1 Insulators at maximum working load based
on:
- E + M rating 3.30
3.2 String accessories
The safety for the fittings with reference to
their ultimate strength has to be at least:
3.2.1 For fittings of steel 3.30
3.2.2 For fittings of malleable cast iron and cast 4.00
steel
3.2.3 For fittings of different materials:
3.2.3.1 - of casting alloys 5.00
3.2.3.2 - of wrought alloys 3.30

4 OPGW/Earthwires
4.1 OPGW/Earthwire at final maximum
working tension based on:
- ultimate strength 2.50
4.2 OPGW/Earthwire at still air everyday
temperature final tension based on:
- ultimate strength 5.55

S-TR-OHL-TOWERS (Rev.0-2011) Page 25 of 32

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
HV Towers of Lattice Steel Design

Schedule C1 (continued)

4.3 OPGW/Earthwire Fittings

4.3.1 Tension Fittings based on:
- OPGW/Earthwire ultimate strength 0.95
- maximum working load 2.50
4.3.2 Suspension Fittings based on:
- maximum working load 2.50

3.5 Schedule C2
DESIGN SPANS (400 KV)
Abbr. Tower Type Basic- Wind Max. Weight- Min. Weight-
span Span Span Span
S Suspension 500 550 600 150
AT Angle tension 500 550 600 -
BAT Big angle tension 500 550 600 -
DE Dead-end tension 350 400 550 -
G Substation gantry 120 120 120 -

DESIGN SPANS (220 KV)

Abbr. Tower Type Basic- Wind Max. Weight- Min. Weight-

span Span Span Span
S Suspension 450 500 600 150
AT Angle tension 450 500 600 -
BAT Big angle tension 450 500 600 -
DE Dead-end tension 350 400 550 -
G Substation gantry 120 120 120 -

S-TR-OHL-TOWERS (Rev.0-2011) Page 26 of 32

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
HV Towers of Lattice Steel Design

Schedule C2 (continued)

DESIGN SPANS (132 KV)

Abbr. Tower Type Basic- Wind Max. Weight- Min. Weight-
span m Span m Span m Span
S Suspension 350 400 500 125
AT Angle tension 350 400 500 -
BAT Big angle tension 350 400 500 -
DE Dead-end tension 250 300 450 -
G Substation gantry 120 120 120 -

3.6 Schedule C3

DESIGN DATA
Item Description Data
1 Temperatures
1.1 Maximum temperature of °C 80
conductor
1.2 Everyday temperature of °C 35
conductor
1.3 Minimum temperature of °C 5
conductor
1.4 Maximum temperature of °C 60
OPGW
1.5 Everyday temperature of °C 35
OPGW
1.6 Minimum temperature of °C 5
OPGW

2. Wind Loads
Wind Pressure on Tower and its According to VDE 0210.
attachments shall be calculated for a wind The dynamic wind pressure
speed of 160Kmph combined with the in Table 5 is based on a

S-TR-OHL-TOWERS (Rev.0-2011) Page 27 of 32

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
HV Towers of Lattice Steel Design

temperature of 5oC. The wind speed is a wind speed of 120 Kmph.

gust wind of 3 seconds duration at a height Dynamic Pressure must be
of 10 m and a return period of 50 years. increased by a factor of
(160/120)2 .

Further reference is made to Fundamentals of the Design of the Standard Technical

Specification.

S-TR-OHL-TOWERS (Rev.0-2011) Page 28 of 32

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
HV Towers of Lattice Steel Design

3.7 Schedule D
Electrical minimum clearances shall be according to International Standards and shall
correspond to those clearances specified in the Standard Technical Specification, Part: Electrical
Design Fundamentals (S-GEN-EDF).
The following are the minimum clearances between live conductors and other objects, to
correspond with the maximum conductor sag conditions.
MINIMUM CLEARANCES FOR 400 KV OHL
Item Description Minimum clearances
in meters
1. Normal ground for pedestrians only 9

2. Residential areas 9

3. Roads and streets 11

4. Highways 12

5. Over pipelines - from top of pipe 11

6. To metal clad or roofed buildings or buildings or

structures upon which a man may stand 7

7. Power lines (above or below) 5

8. Telecommunication lines 5

9. Areas of moving sand shall have clearances to be

decided by TRANSCO at site

S-TR-OHL-TOWERS (Rev.0-2011) Page 29 of 32

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
HV Towers of Lattice Steel Design

Schedule D (continued)

MINIMUM CLEARANCES FOR 220 KV OHL

Item Description Minimum clearances
in meters
1. Normal ground for pedestrians only 8

2. Residential areas 8

3. Roads and streets 9

4. Highways 10

5. Over pipelines - from top of pipe 9

6. To metal clad or roofed buildings or buildings or

structures upon which a man may stand 6

7. Power lines (above or below) 5

8. Telecommunication lines 5

9. Areas of moving sand shall have clearances to be

decided by TRANSCO at site

S-TR-OHL-TOWERS (Rev.0-2011) Page 30 of 32

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
HV Towers of Lattice Steel Design

Schedule D (continued)

MINIMUM CLEARANCES FOR 132 KV OHL

The following are the minimum clearances between live conductors and other objects, to
correspond with the maximum conductor sag conditions.

Item Description Minimum clearances

in meters
1. Normal ground for pedestrians only 7.5

2. Residential areas 7.5

3. Roads and streets 9

4. Highways 10

5. Over pipelines - from top of pipe 9

6. To metal clad or roofed buildings or buildings or

structures upon which a man may stand 5

7. Power lines (above or below) 4.5

8. Telecommunication lines 4.5

9. Areas of moving sand shall have clearances to be

decided by TRANSCO at site

S-TR-OHL-TOWERS (Rev.0-2011) Page 31 of 32

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
HV Towers of Lattice Steel Design

Schedule D (continued)

For other objects not listed in the Schedule the requirements for minimum clearances shall
comply with DIN VDE 0210.
Minimum clearances to objects shall be kept after final settling of conductors, i.e. including 20
years creep.
Minimum clearances between live metal and earth steelwork shall be calculated in accordance
with DIN VDE 0210. These clearances shall be checked on the assumption that the conductor
may attain a position at any angle between 5° above and 20° below the horizontal for all types of
tower.
Conductor sag shall conform to EDS at 35°C ≤ 18% UTS.
Earth wire sag shall not be larger then the conductor sag under any circumstances.

3.8 Schedule E

MATERIAL FOR TOWER GROUNDING

Item Description

1 Ground rods

1.1 Sectionalized copperweld ground rods

2 Ground strip

2.1 Stranded copper conductor (tinned) of a minimum size of 95 mm2, however,

due to very aggressive soil conditions the Bidder/Contractor shall propose a
suitable size

3 Connection of ground electrode with stub angle

3.1 For connection of ground rods to copper conductor:

Welded connections

3.2 For connection of copper conductor to tower:

Compression clamp, tinned

Schedules shall be submitted to TRANSCO for his approval and the same shall form part of the
final records.

S-TR-OHL-TOWERS (Rev.0-2011) Page 32 of 32

 STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRIC WORKS

CORROSION PROTECTION
( SPECIFICATION )

TRANSCO STANDARD : S-TR-CORR (REV.0-2021)

S-TR-CORR (Rev.0-2021) Page 1 of 18

 CORROSION PROTECTION

CONTENTS

STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRIC WORKS ........................... 1

1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................... 3
1.1 Site Conditions .................................................................................................................. 3
1.2 Applicable Standards......................................................................................................... 4
2 RESPONSIBILITIES AND GUARANTEES ............................................................... 5
3 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ............................................................................................. 5
4 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................... 6
5 GALVANISED STEEL SURFACES ............................................................................ 7
6 PAINTING AT MANUFACTURER‘S PREMISES .................................................... 8
7 REPAIR PROCEDURES ............................................................................................... 9
7.1 Immersion Conditions ....................................................................................................... 9
7.2 Exposure Conditions ......................................................................................................... 9
8 PERFORMANCE AND APPLICATION OF PAINTS ............................................. 10
8.1 General Requirements ..................................................................................................... 10
8.2 Inspection During Guarantee ........................................................................................... 11
9 SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINTING ......................................................... 11
9.1 Cleaning and Surface Preparation of Ferrous and Non Ferrous Surfaces ....................... 11
9.2 Application - Brush or Roller .......................................................................................... 12
9.3 Application Airless Spray ............................................................................................... 12
9.4 Painting on Metal Surfaces (other than galvanized) ........................................................ 12
9.4.1 General ............................................................................................................................ 12
9.4.2 Paint System .................................................................................................................... 13
9.5 Painting of Transformer and Reactor Tanks, other Tanks, etc. ...................................... 14
9.5.1 External Surfaces of Transformer/Reactor Tank, Covers, OLTC Head, Control Cabinets,
Cooling Equipment, Access Ladders, etc.) ..................................................................... 14
9.5.2 Internal Surfaces of Transformer/Reactor Tank, Cover, Core Steel Plates, etc.) ............ 15
9.6 Painting of Oil Chamber of Oil Separators ..................................................................... 15
9.7 Painting of Dry-Type Distribution Transformers and their Housings, Pre-Fabricated
MV Switchgear Housing, Cubicles, Panel, etc................................................................ 15
9.7.1 Outside Surface ............................................................................................................... 16
9.7.2 Inner Surface ................................................................................................................... 17
9.8 Painting on Galvanized Steel Surfaces ............................................................................ 17
9.9 Painting of Galvanized Towers and Galvanized Outdoor Steel Structures ..................... 18
9.10 Painting of Stub Angles and Pile Caps ............................................................................ 18

S-TR-CORR (Rev.0-2021) Page 2 of 18

 CORROSION PROTECTION

CORROSION PROTECTION

1 GENERAL
This specification generally covers surface protections against corrosion and defines the
minimum requirements for surface preparation/treatment, protective coatings and painting for
structural steel, iron works, metal and other non-metallic surfaces.
The following shall be applicable and shall be considered:
a) All metallic parts (except stainless steel parts) used inside closed rooms shall be painted or
galvanised.
b) All metallic parts used outdoor shall be galvanized and painted.
c) Zink and paints and related protection material shall be in accordance with the latest
international standards as a minimum requirement, and shall comply with the requirements of
proper health, safety, and environmental conditions.
d) Equipment to be used for performing the required galvanizing or painting, should be
equivalent to the equipment recommended by the paint manufacturer and should be suitable
to apply the coating as specified.
e) Painting materials shall be delivered to locations where painting is to be carried out, in
unopened original containers, which shall bear a legible product designation, batch number,
date of manufacture and expiry date. The date of manufacture must not be before the date of
paint system approval.
f) Only complete paint kits shall be mixed. No partial kits will be accepted. Surplus Paint in
Pots of expired mixed material must not be used after the expiry date of these materials.
g) The painting material shall be handled and stored in accordance with the paint
manufacturer’s latest published instructions and shall be protected against damage, moisture,
direct sunlight and temperatures.
h) Storage temperature of paint shall range between 5oC and 35oC.
i) Compressed air used for cleaning, surface preparation (abrasive blasting) and application
shall be free of oil and moisture.
j) Blasting material shall be clean and free from oil or contaminants. The particle size shall be
capable of achieving specified surface profile.

1.1 Site Conditions

For site requirements, reference shall be made to the Standard Technical Specification, Part:
➢ S-TR-GEN-GDF - General Conditions

S-TR-CORR (Rev.0-2021) Page 3 of 18

 CORROSION PROTECTION

1.2 Applicable Standards

The corrosion protection components to be provided under this Specification shall, in general, be
manufactured under quality assurance system conforming to the latest issues of ISO or its
equivalent National Standard.
The latest Revisions or Editions of the following Standards as well as their direct and subsequent
‘Normative References shall be applicable.
Reference shall be made to:
➢ S-TR-GEN-GDF - General Requirements - General Conditions
The latest Revision or Edition of the following Standards shall also be applicable:
ASTM 123 Zinc (hot-dip galvanised) coating on Iron & steel products
ASTM A165 Specifications for Electrodeposited Coatings of Cadmium on Steel
ASTM A386 Specifications for Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Assembled Steel Products
ASTM A525 Specifications for General Requirements, Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated
(Galvanised) by the Hot Dip process
ASTM 8633 Specifications for Electrodeposited coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel
ISO 4578 Adhesives – Determination of peel resistance of high strength adhesive
bonds >Floating-Roller method<
ISO 4624 Paints and varnishes >Pull-Off test for adhesion<
ISO 4628-1 Paints and varnishes – Evaluation of degradation of coatings – Designation
of quantity and size of defects, and of intensity of uniform changes in
appearance >Part 1: General introduction and designation system<
ISO 4628-2 Paints and varnishes – Evaluation of degradation of coatings – Designation
of quantity and size of defects, and of intensity of uniform changes in
appearance >Part 2: Assessment of degree of blistering<
DIN 55928 Protective painting of steel structures – instructions
DIN 55945 Painting materials
DIN 18363 Paint work – buildings
DIN 18364 Surface protection work for steel
DIN 53210 Determination of rust degree
DIN 55151 Determination of adhesion
SIS 05 5900 Surface cleaning
BS EN 1461
IEC 61936-1 Power installation exceeding 1 kVac – Common Rules

S-TR-CORR (Rev.0-2021) Page 4 of 18

 CORROSION PROTECTION

2 RESPONSIBILITIES AND GUARANTEES

TRANSCO shall have the right to access at all times for inspection of the work and all pertinent
materials during preparation and progress of the work. Should any work or material be found to
be defective or not in compliance with the Specification, replacements by the Bidder/Contractor
at his own cost must be carried out.
Inspection of coatings by TRANSCO shall neither relieve the paint manufacturer from his
responsibility of providing good quality products nor the Bidder/Contractor from his
responsibility of acquiring the specified quality of material or the correct performance of the
work. This is also applicable to shop-primed structural steel or other components.
All materials shall be protected against corrosion and damage due to the influence of the
prevailing climatic conditions including the incidence of dust, sandstorms and seawater spray.
The Bidder/Contractor shall bear the responsibility for all losses and damages, which may, occur
through inadequate measures against such influences and shall replace the damaged parts at his
cost.
The Bidder/Contractor shall bear the full responsibility for galvanizing and paint applied by him
or by others.
The complete painting and corrosion protection system is guaranteed for a period of not less than
10 years after the Final Acceptance Certificate.
The Bidder/Contractor shall provide a Guarantee Performance Bond to assure the performance of
extended guarantee obligations for corrosion protection. The Bidder/Contractor (after FAC) shall
carry out during the extended guarantee period any repair or replacement on the corrosion
protection executed under this specification at no additional cost after being intimated by
TRANSCO.
If the repairs are not carried out to the satisfaction of TRANSCO, these repairs shall be
performed by others, who will be assigned by TRANSCO, and the costs thereof shall be borne
by activating the Performance Bond valid for the extended guarantee obligations.

3 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
All painting and corrosion protection works shall be performed under strict safety conditions,
primarily adequate ventilation and protection from open flames, spark and excessive heat.
The Bidder/Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect personnel and property
from hazards due to falls, injuries, toxic fumes, fires, explosions or other dangers.
All paint and thinners shall be stored in areas, which are well ventilated and protected. The
Bidder/Contractor shall consider air-conditioned storage facilities due to the limited store-ability
of the paints required.
Temporary constructions, ladders scaffolding, runways, etc. required for safe execution of the
painting work shall be rigidly built so as to safely support four times the weight of all materials,
apparatus, equipment and workers thereon.

S-TR-CORR (Rev.0-2021) Page 5 of 18

 CORROSION PROTECTION

Test Instruments
The surface preparations for steel iron works shall be compared with the relevant pictures of SIS
05 5900. The surface profile shall be measured by using a Profilometer, i.e. Tester Tape.
If required by TRANSCO/ENGINEER copper sulfate test shall be carried out to check for
residual mill scales.
The dry film thickness or galvanization thickness on steel shall be measured by means of a
magnetic or electrical thickness gauge such as "Microtester" or "Elcometer", and recorded in a
tabulated form, indicating each layer of coat and the total dry film thickness.
In case of fluid retaining structures, pinhole detection shall be carried out by means of low-
voltage, non-destructive flow detector, whereas, in the case of rubber lining or wrapping,
damages shall be checked by means of a spark tester.
During application of paint the wet film thickness shall be checked continuously by means of an
approved wet film thickness gauge. Also, the dew point has to be monitored continuously by
through an approved instrument and methods of measurements/ recording.
A pull-off adhesion test must be used in case of paint on concrete and steel surfaces.
An approved type of multi-cross cutter for adhesion tests depending on the thickness of the
coating is also required.
For the above mentioned tests which shall be performed in the presence of TRANSCO, all
respective instruments shall be provided by the Bidder/Contractor, and shall be kept in good
working condition and valid/certified calibration.

4 MATERIALS
The materials of successive coats shall be from the same manufacturer and subject to
TRANSCO’s approval before relevant orders are placed.
Materials shall be used from a manufacturer who has good experience with his products with
regard to corrosion protection in such special areas. Further reference for supply of samples is
made hereafter.
Materials, which are to be supplied and used for the surface protection work (e.g. paints, filling
cements, metallic coating etc.,) must comply with quality regulations and standards, as well as
with the following provisions and any special permit conditions and official regulations. Should
a certain material, stipulated in the Specification, not possible to get during the design/execution
of the paint system, it shall be possible subject to an approval by TRANSCO, to use an
alternative material that can be proven to be at least equal in quality and suitability.
The Bidder/Contractor shall obtain the paint manufacturer's specific recommendations,
directions and specific provisions for application. These recommendations and directions shall
be strictly adhered to. The use of any amount of thinners is restricted to the permission of
TRANSCO and paint manufacturer.

S-TR-CORR (Rev.0-2021) Page 6 of 18

 CORROSION PROTECTION

All paints shall be delivered in their original undamaged sealed containers and shall remain
unopened until required for use. Paint, which has gelled or otherwise deteriorated over the
storage period, shall not be used.
The quality of the paints should be such that they do not form solid sediment but, at most, a
slight skin in unopened original containers over a period of not less than six months calculated
from the manufactures delivery date. A paint which has formed a solid sediment or more than
just a slight skin in the unopened original containers by the time of use or which cannot be
processed satisfactorily shall not be used. A sediment shall be regarded as solid if it cannot be
dispelled again quickly and completely by stirring with an adequate electric driven mixer
(maximum speed 350 to 400 rpm).
Paint that does not have to be prepared by mixing several constituents should be delivered to the
site, just prior to use, in such a state of readiness that they need only be adjusted to brushing or
spraying consistency. This is to meet the relevant working conditions, such as temperature, by
adding the particular thinners as per the manufacturer instructions, which shall be subject to
TRANSCO approval.
In the case of paints, which are only prepared for use immediately before application by mixing
several constituents (e.g. multi-constituent types), the various constituents should be of such a
kind that mixing at site is restricted to the necessary extent.
Paints and filling cements selected for the protection of steel or aluminium alloys against
corrosion, for which no regulations, permit conditions or technical conditions of delivery exist,
may be used if proven suitable, by the Bidder/Contractor, for the necessary degree of protection
against corrosion, and after approval of TRANSCO.

5 GALVANISED STEEL SURFACES

This article defines the minimum requirements for galvanizing as well as for surface cleaning
and preparation of galvanized steel surfaces prior to application of protective coating.
All galvanizing is to be done by the hot-dip process with spelter, not less then 98% of which
must be pure Zinc. No alternative process to be used without the approval of TRANSCO. No
components are to be galvanized which are likely to come into subsequent contact with oil. Bolts
are to be completely hot-dip galvanized including the threads.
The zinc coating is to be uniform, clean, smooth and as free from sponge as possible. All
galvanized items are to be protected from injury to the Zinc coating due to abrasion damage
during periods of transit, storage and erection. Damaged areas at the coating are to be repaired
with the Zinc rich paint or hot Zinc-spray or other approved flake metallic compounds according
to relevant Standards.
The galvanizing procedure shall be started only after having finished all chipping, trimming,
fitting and bending. Also, all drilling, punching, cutting and welding shall have been completed
and all burns removed.
All steel, including bolts, nuts and washers, shall be galvanized at the manufacturer’s premises by means
of hot dipping in accordance with internationally recognized standards such as ASTM A 239, or
equivalent. For steel products except fasteners the minimum Zinc coat applied shall be 900 gram per

S-TR-CORR (Rev.0-2021) Page 7 of 18

 CORROSION PROTECTION

square meter and corresponding average thickness of Zink coating shall not be less than 128 Micron
and the individual coating shall not be less than 125 Micron. For all fasteners the minimum Zinc coat
applied shall be 381 gram per square meter and corresponding average thickness of Zink coating
shall not be less than 54 Micron. The individual coating shall not be less than 43 Micron.

The Zinc coating shall confirm to ASTM A123/A 123M for all steel products and ASTM A 153/A
153M for all fasteners except the required Zinc coating thickness given in above clause for all steel
including bolts, nuts and washers.

Adhesion tests outlined in Article 7.4.2, ASTM A 123-84, shall be performed, at the discretion
of TRANSCO.
Where members are of such length that they cannot be dipped in one operation, great care shall
be exercised to prevent wrapping. All holes in material shall be free of excess spelter after
galvanizing. All material shall be safeguarded against embrittlement during galvanizing. The
Zinc coating shall be uniform in thickness and so applied that it will adhere to the surface of the
steel.
Major damage to galvanizing shall be cause for rejection. Material on which galvanizing has
been damaged shall be re-dipped unless the damage is minor and local then it can be repaired by,
simply, applying galvanizing repair paint or hot zinc spray to the satisfaction of TRANSCO.
For protection during transport and erection, all galvanized steel members shall be coated with a
suitable pre-primer with minimum thickness of 40 micron and matching the primer to be applied
after erection. The primer shall be subject to TRANSCO’s approval.
If not otherwise specified, galvanized steel surfaces shall be chromated with approximately 4-
micron thickness and shall be removed by suitable means prior to painting.
Single items such as cable trays, fences, etc. shall be galvanized, and PVC covered if so
approved by TRANSCO.

6 PAINTING AT MANUFACTURER‘S PREMISES

The painting at works is for the purpose of applying priming coat systems under favorable
conditions and with rational methods and to protect the surface against corrosion with suitable
painting protective coating system.
Painting Systems are chosen according to the required resistance to aggressive agents and are
applicable to all surfaces under the prevailing conditions. Exceptions determined by
technological conditions or by the specifications of the manufacturers of equipment shall be
subject to TRANSCO's approval.
All metal surfaces such as for switch-gear, cubicles and panels, structures and supports, casings,
enclosures, frames and sub-frames, etc. i.e. all equipment or parts thereof incorporated in the
work, shall be chemically pre-treated and shall be free from Zinc-Oxide. This suggests the
following treatment to be carried out:
• Steel treated by : Zinc-Phosphate
• Aluminium treated by : Chromating

S-TR-CORR (Rev.0-2021) Page 8 of 18

 CORROSION PROTECTION

• Other materials treated adequately : Treated

which shall be followed by a coating system (preferably powder coating) with good resistance to
impact/abrasion and adhesion to the substrate.
The applied dry film shall be of an approved quality of corrosion paint.
Extra amounts of paint sufficient for all repairs shall be made available and shall be applied to all
surfaces after erection and before commissioning of equipment, if so required.
The final coat shall preferably comply with code RAL 7032 "Grey" or as directed or otherwise
approved by TRANSCO.
In any case, at an early stage the Bidder/Contractor shall explain, in great detail, all corrosion
protection measures he intends to take, indicate the relevant standards for testing the applied
measures, and apply for TRANSCO's approval of the above mentioned steps.
The workshop priming coats are to be tested and faults repaired according to the specifications
before applying further coats of paint.
Steel parts, which are to be welded at site, shall be free from workshop coats along the welding
seams, the width of the free strip being approximately 5 cm.
Workshop priming coats applied shall be of rust preventing material, which depends on the
intended use and on the length of time until the final protection is applied. Should the protection
coat show signs of damage, repairs should be made in good time. Shop primers applied for
transportation/storage purposes shall be removed at site by shot blasting and the full coating
system shall then be applied.

7 REPAIR PROCEDURES

7.1 Immersion Conditions

The necessary touch-up shall be performed by sand blasting (Vacuum blasting preferable) the
defective area to SA2.5 of SIS 05 5900. The edge of the paint sound shall be feathered by
grinding, or use of emery paper, and allowance for overlapping shall be taken in consideration.
Painting will then proceed in accordance with the original paint specified.

7.2 Exposure Conditions

Depending on the extent of damage, either blasting or grinding or brushing the defective area
may be allowed. Feather down the sound paint allowing for overlapping and then proceed in
accordance with the original paints specified.

S-TR-CORR (Rev.0-2021) Page 9 of 18

 CORROSION PROTECTION

8 PERFORMANCE AND APPLICATION OF PAINTS

8.1 General Requirements

For better adhesion and corrosion protection, priming coats shall be applied by brush or by
airless spray only. The other coats of paint are to be applied in accordance with the paint
manufacturers' recommendations.
All surfaces to be painted must be moisture-free and painting shall not take place when:
• The surface temperature is above 50oC
• The relative humidity is above 85 % or the surface temperature is closer than 3oC or below
the dew point
• It is raining
• Sandstorms occur to such extend that the wet paint might be affected.
If during the painting work, low temperatures, excessive humidity, mist or rain occur, the paint
shall first be allowed to dry, and areas, which have been damaged due to the above conditions
must then be removed and renewed.
Great care must be taken to ensure that paint is applied to all surfaces including unused bolt
holes and back-to-back members (where possible). This includes surfaces at joints, plates, etc.
Application shall be performed only by use of approved "strike-brushes" or as directed by
TRANSCO or by the manufacturer's recommendation.
Paints shall only be applied on clean dry surfaces after the approval of TRANSCO and shall
commence within four hours after cleaning, if not otherwise approved. All material shall be
evenly applied so as to be free from runs, sags, laps, skips, tears, blisters or other defects. All
finishes shall be clean and in good sound condition. Each coat shall completely and uniformly
cover the coat underneath it.
Excessive coat thickness shall not exceed the maximum specified by the paint manufacturer.
There must be no delay between the application of successive coats but each coat must be
thoroughly dry or as directed in the paint instructions before the next coat is applied.
Before additional coats are applied to painted surfaces, the existing paint shall be cleaned from
all foreign matters and then suitably sanded, if necessary, according to directions given by the
paint manufacturer and subject to approval of TRANSCO.
The individual layers of paint are to be shaded down in such a way that it can easily be seen if
the underlaying surface is completely covered with paint and which paint layer of the whole
system is involved. If coats of paint are interrupted, (e.g. for welding, test marks, etc.) a margin
of approximately 5 cm is to be left untouched in order to obtain a satisfactory sequence and
overlapping of layers.
Before every coat of paint the surface is to be cleaned and damages in previously applied coats
are to be corrected in accordance with the relevant paint specifications.

S-TR-CORR (Rev.0-2021) Page 10 of 18

 CORROSION PROTECTION

Every coat of paint shall have a thickness as even as possible. It must not be, in any place, lower
than the specified minimum thickness. Too big thickness is not recommended, and adherence to
the manufacturers maximum coat thickness shall be observed.
All finishes shall be in clean, good and sound condition and kept clean and dry until the paint has
reached a hard setting. Completed surfaces, which do not meet the levels, as set forth in these
Specifications, shall be re-coated at the cost of the Bidder/Contractor.
To ensure the suitability of paints the Bidder/Contractor shall execute sample tests at site. Such
panels must be approved and shall be used as reference for quality control.
These tests shall be carried out at a very early stage of the contract period and no paint shall be
ordered beforehand. Final selection of the paint is subject to the approval of TRANSCO,
depending on the results of the above mentioned site tests.

8.2 Inspection During Guarantee

The entire work of painting and corrosion protection is to be inspected by TRANSCO at the
following periods:
• Before the Final Acceptance Certificate is issued
• The second Inspection two years later
• The third Inspection four years after the date of Final Acceptance Certificate
• The forth inspection eight years after the date of Final Acceptance Certificate
• The final inspection at the end of the ten years guarantee period.
Limits of Failure
During guarantee all coatings on surfaces in direct contact with fluids shall be free from defects
such as pinholes, blisters, loss of adhesion, peeling, etc. They shall have during the guarantee
period a degree of rust within the range R-O to R-1 according to DIN 53 210 or its equivalent.
Surfaces under atmospheric corrosion shall be repaired and /or painted if their rust degree falls
within the range R-2 and R-3 according to DIN 53 210 or its equivalent.

9 SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINTING

9.1 Cleaning and Surface Preparation of Ferrous and Non Ferrous Surfaces
Surfaces shall be cleaned and prepared for painting in accordance with the following regulations
and specifications:
• Chemical cleaning and surface preparation/etching
• Mechanical hand cleaning according to SIS 05 5900
• Blast cleaning of steel surfaces with abrasive as approved by TRANSCO and according to
SIS 05 5900 SA2.5 or SA3 or equivalent.

S-TR-CORR (Rev.0-2021) Page 11 of 18

 CORROSION PROTECTION

Aluminum and other light metals shall have their surfaces cleaned and degreased by a detergent
such as trichloroethylene prior to painting. A one coat of a wash-primer shall be applied before
proceeding with the specified coating system. Wash-primer shall be applied in a very thin film (5
- 10 microns) direct on pre-treated surfaces.

9.2 Application - Brush or Roller

Round or oval brushes are the most suitable for irregular surfaces as well as for rough steel. In
gaps or areas difficult to reach, smaller and specially shaped brushes or spraying shall be used.
The paint shall be applied with an even thickness. All kinds of brush trace, runs, and other
defects are to be avoided and if necessary reconditioned.
Rollers are suitable for large surfaces. The applied film must be as smooth as possible and of a
uniform dry film thickness. Sprinkling of the paint and subsequent spreading out by means of the
roller is prohibited.

9.3 Application Airless Spray

The equipment for this system must enable a satisfactory application of paint material. With the
airless system it must be taken into consideration that the equipment is laid out in such a way as
to obtain the required spraying pressure, that the nozzle size corresponds to the recommendation
of the paint manufacturer, and that the spray angle is adjusted to the requirements of the surfaces
to be painted.
The paint must be continuously mixed, and sprayed on evenly cross process (in two directions at
90° angle) whereby the individual layers shall overlap. The spray gun shall always be held
perpendicular to the surface to be sprayed, at such a distance that the paint reaches the surface
when still moist.

9.4 Painting on Metal Surfaces (other than galvanized)

9.4.1 General
This article covers, besides the painting of work fabricated at site, also repair painting of
damaged surfaces originally corrosion protected at the manufacturer's premises.
For general performance and application under local climate conditions, reference is made to
Standard Technical Specification, Part:
➢ S-TR-GEN-GDF - General Conditions

All surfaces shall be carefully dried and cleaned prior to painting; in particular, removal of all
foreign matters such as salt, grease, dust, sand, dirt, and rust (if applicable) is of utmost
importance. Sand blasting to SA2.5.

S-TR-CORR (Rev.0-2021) Page 12 of 18

 CORROSION PROTECTION

9.4.2 Paint System

9.4.2.1 Steel Surfaces (inside buildings) Subject to Approval of TRANSCO

Zinc rich epoxy primer m 40 - 60
Epoxy intermediate (MIO) m 80 - 100
Epoxy final m 40 - 60
Total m 160 - 220

9.4.2.2 Externally located away from Coast Line

Zinc rich epoxy primer m 40 - 60
Epoxy intermediate (MIO) m 60 - 100
Final aliphatic polyurethane or acrylic epoxy m 40 - 60
Total m 140 - 220

9.4.2.3 Externally Located Near Coast Line

Zinc rich primer with 92% or more Zn content in m 60 - 80
the dry film
Epoxy intermediate (MIO) m 60 - 80
Final aliphatic polyurethane m 60 - 80
Total m 180 - 240

9.4.2.4 Aluminium Surfaces

If anodized Aluminium, care must be taken not to damage the anodized layer and a suitable pre-
treatment must be used.
For unanodized Aluminium, one of the two below mentioned methods are acceptable prior to the
paint application:
1. Method
Using of t-wash or wash primer.
2. Method
Sweep blasting using a chloride free abrasive material.
Abrade for:
Polyamide Epoxy primer m 50 - 60
Aliphatic Polyurethane m 40 - 60
Total m 90 - 120

S-TR-CORR (Rev.0-2021) Page 13 of 18

 CORROSION PROTECTION

9.5 Painting of Transformer and Reactor Tanks, other Tanks, etc.

9.5.1 External Surfaces of Transformer/Reactor Tank, Covers, OLTC Head, Control

Cabinets, Cooling Equipment, Access Ladders, etc.)

All steel surfaces of solid type transformer tanks, conservators, cable boxes, etc. shall be
sand-blasted in accordance with DIN 55928, Part 4 (equivalent to SIS 055900), and all surfaces of
radiators and corrugated tank walls shall be thoroughly cleaned of rust, scale, grease and dirt and
other foreign matter and all imperfections shall be removed by means of approved methods.

Then the following painting systems shall be applied complying with the requirements as specified
below.

Solid type transformer tanks, conservators, cable boxes etc.:

External surface Painting

For both outdoor and indoor Minimum requirements for corrosion

equipment, galvanised and protection system shall be as per BS EN
ungalvanized surfaces ISO 12944, corrosion category C4-
Durability High
Internal surfaces Paintings
Marshalling kiosks and apparatus boxes Suitable painting shall be as per BS EN
for outdoor use ISO 12944, corrosion category C4-
Durability High

Corrugated sheet steel tanks, radiators:

One (1) primer coat

Two-component epoxy zinc-phosphate or
Two-component epoxy zinc-flake m 80
One (1) intermediate coat
Two-component epoxy micaceous iron oxide m 100
One (1) top coat
Two-component polyurethane m 40
Minimum total coating thickness (dry-film, incl. tolerances) m 220

S-TR-CORR (Rev.0-2021) Page 14 of 18

 CORROSION PROTECTION

If any hot-dip galvanised steel parts will be provided, e.g. for access ladders etc., the same
painting methods as above shall be applied. However, instead of a primer coat as specified above
one adhesive base coat shall be applied. In this case, the minimum thickness of galvanising shall
be 55 m. However, a two-component epoxy zinc-dust coat instead of hot dip galvanising is
preferred.

In case of any kind of aluminium and/or ordinary stainless steel (Cr-Ni alloyed only) the primer
coat as above may be omitted, and the minimum thickness of the “intermediate” coat and of the
top coat as specified above shall be at least 50 m each (total min.100 m).

The final coat of painting shall be non-porous and of homogeneous quality and shall be of a
uniform shade of colour code RAL 7032 (pebble-grey). For OLTC equipment and sub-supplier’s
accessories only, the colour code as per manufacturer’s standard may also be accepted, on condition
that a two-component epoxy based undercoat (minimum thickness 80 m) and a two-component
polyurethane based top coat (minimum thickness 80 m) will be applied. The total dry-film
thickness shall not be less than 160 m.

Mechanical damage of painting shall be repaired at site with the same original type of painting as
above.

9.5.2 Internal Surfaces of Transformer/Reactor Tank, Cover, Core Steel Plates, etc.)
Inside the transformer and rector vessel, sand-blasting shall be performed in accordance with
DIN 55928 Part 4 (equivalent to SIS 055900). After that, an oil and gas resistant insulating
coating shall be applied to all steel surfaces in contact with oil or gas (e.g. tank, cover, core steel
plates, etc.).
The minimum dry-film thickness shall be 35 m. The applicable colour code shall be RAL 9010
(white) or equivalent.

9.6 Painting of Oil Chamber of Oil Separators

Primer Coat – Phenolic resin base coating (brushing or spraying) dry-film thickness 80 micron.
Final Coat - Phenolic resin base coating (brushing or spraying) dry-film thickness 40 micron.
A chemical resistant system based on Phenolic resin or Amine adduct hardener. (Excellent
resistance to oil and solvent) - color: white.

9.7 Painting of Dry-Type Distribution Transformers and their Housings, Pre-

Fabricated MV Switchgear Housing, Cubicles, Panel, etc.
Upon making the surfaces chemically passive, by Iron Phosphate, electrostatic coating of paint
shall be applied as follows:
External paint thickness: 70 m +/- 10 m

S-TR-CORR (Rev.0-2021) Page 15 of 18

 CORROSION PROTECTION

Interior paint thickness: 40 m +/- 10 m

The painting of the outer housings for dry type distribution transformers shall be of colour code
RAL 7032 (pebble-grey), and that for the windings dry type transformers and their structure may
be in accordance with the manufacturer’s standard. The colour codes for other housings, panels,
etc. shall be in accordance with the relevant Articles below.
Painting of Fuel Tank for Diesel Generator
The coatings specified below shall be applied for the fuel oil tanks.

9.7.1 Outside Surface

Carbon steel surfaces, not insulated, indoors, such as structural steel, cranes, air ducts, pipes,
condensers, tanks and vessels' exterior surfaces, valves and fittings, where temperatures may
reach up to 100°C.
At Works
Surface preparation : Blasting according to SIS 055900
Grade : SA 2 1/2
Primer-optional : Depending on production flow, a single-pack inorganic Ethyl, Zinc
Silicate shop-primer, which shall be possible to weld, may be used
Dry film thickness : 15-25 m
Solids by volume : min. 37%
Prime coat : Inorganic ethyl Zinc Silicate. Dry film thickness 75 microns. Solids
by volume min. 65%.
At Site
Pre-treatment : Thorough cleaning to remove oil, grease, dirt and any other
contaminants. De-rusting of all mechanical damages according to
SIS 055900
Grade : ST3
Touch-up : with 2-pack self priming aluminium containing high build epoxy
with solids by volume content of not less than 85%
Dry film thickness : 75-100 m
Finish coat : 2-pack epoxy polyamide. Dry film thickness 100 microns. Solids
by vol. min. 70%.
Minimum Total System
Dry film thickness : 175 m
Note:
When airless spray application is not possible, 2 coats of 2-pack epoxy Polyamide cured finish
may be applied by roller or brush to achieve specified thickness.

S-TR-CORR (Rev.0-2021) Page 16 of 18

 CORROSION PROTECTION

9.7.2 Inner Surface

Surface Blast-cleaning with suitable blasting-material up to SA 2 1/2 in accordance with

preparation the SVENSK STANDARD SIS 05 59 00 or DIN 55928, part 4.
Dry film
Treatment Color Compound thickness
micron
Primer binder: epoxide-/Polyamide resin
pigments: Zinc Phosphate, filler 100 *
min. Vol. Solid: 70%
Intermediate Redbrown binder: epoxide-/Polyamide Resin
Coat pigments: Zinc Phosphate, filler 100 *
min. Vol. Solid: 70%
Finish Coat Grey binder: epoxide-/Polyamide resin
pigments: Zinc Phosphate, filler 100 *
min. Vol. Solid: 70%
Total: 300
Remark: * airless application

9.8 Painting on Galvanized Steel Surfaces

Surface preparation of galvanized Steel surfaces shall be carried out in the following manner.
Prior to chemical treatment/surface preparation, the galvanized surfaces shall be carefully
cleaned by brushing with fresh water to remove all foreign matters such as salt, white rust, Zinc
Oxide and Zinc corrosion products, dust, sand and dirt. The following surface preparations shall
be performed.
Hot-dipped galvanized Steel surfaces shall be very lightly sand swept, taking in consideration
not to drastically reduce the galvanization - or chemical treatment, subject to the approval of
TRANSCO/ and the location of them within the plant.
Electrolytically Zinc coated Steel surfaces shall be either mechanically roughened or chemically
etched by T-wash, wash primer, etc, subject to approval of TRANSCO.
Prior to painting, the galvanized surfaces shall be carefully checked for damages, defects and
impurities. In case of stubborn white rust, and corrosion products it is necessary to remove these
by sweep-blasting or mechanical brushes. However, tarnishing of surfaces must be avoided.
Furthermore, in case of rusted areas, and welded seams, such areas shall be blasted to SA 2.5 and
painted with Zinc rich primer or hot Zinc spray. In specific cases where damages are severe re-
galvanizing shall be required.
Such prepared surfaces must be approved by TRANSCO prior to paint application.

S-TR-CORR (Rev.0-2021) Page 17 of 18

 CORROSION PROTECTION

9.9 Painting of Galvanized Towers and Galvanized Outdoor Steel Structures

Galvanised tower member parts inbetween bolted connections shall not be painted. The paint
might resist the short circuit current flowing from the earth wire through the tower steel structure
to the ground connection.
The following steps shall be followed after tower erection/stringing has been completed:
Degreasing and washing with fresh water
Light abrasive uniform sweep blasting or (T-wash) by phosphoric acid based primer
1 coat Epoxy (MIO) m 75
1 coat alphatic Polyurethane m 50
1 coat alphatic Polyurethane m 50
Total m 175

Inaccessible surface e.g. back to back members shall be painted prior to site erection.
In highly restricted areas, all towers and structures above specified height, application of the red
and white bands shall be in accordance with Annex 14, Aerodromes, Chapter 6, paragraph 6.2.5
of the International Standards and Recommended Practices issued by the International Civil
Aviation Organization, and shall be subject to TRANSCO's approval.
Galvanized structures, such as towers, supporting structures and gantries located 70 km away
from the coastal line need not to be painted unless else specified.

9.10 Painting of Stub Angles and Pile Caps

The stub angles shall be galvanized. Prior to galvanizing, all stub angles shall be sandblasted in
accordance with SA 3 (SIS 055900).
Painting should be applied in the zone 20 cm above and 50 cm below concrete level.
• 1 coat of primer to be applied
• 3 coats of 125 m, each to be applied, 2 pack coal tar epoxy paint
• 2 coats of 2-pack coal tar epoxy paint 125 m each covering approximately 10 cm above
the concrete level and coating the foundation cap in total (including approximately 50 cm
of the vertical surfaces of the foundation) shall be applied
• After erection the intermediate and final coat as for the galvanized steel painting shall be
applied as described above up to the joint of the stub angle.
Surfaces of Steel piling caps:
• The Steel piling cases shall be sand-blasted (SA2) and treated by coal tar epoxy or any
suitable coating, etc. down to 50 cm below ground level
• The Bidder/Contractor may propose other measures to protect the stub angles from
corrosion, e.g. proposing special type of steel.

S-TR-CORR (Rev.0-2021) Page 18 of 18

 STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRIC WORKS

EARTHING / LIGHTNING

( SPECIFICATION )

EARTHING/GROUNDING SYSTEMS

TRANSCO STANDARD : S-TR-EARTH-GROUND (REV.0-2009)

S-TR-EARTH-GROUND (Rev.0-2009) Page 1 of 22

 EARTHING / LIGHTNING
Earthing/Grounding Systems

CONTENTS

1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................... 4
1.1 Drawings ........................................................................................................................... 4
1.2 Equipment Identification and Color Codes ....................................................................... 5
2 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ...................................................................................... 5
2.1 General .............................................................................................................................. 5
2.2 Earthing/Grounding System Planning and Design............................................................ 7
2.2.1 General .............................................................................................................................. 7
2.2.2 Design Requirements ........................................................................................................ 8
2.2.3 Applicable Apparent Soil Resistance Measurement Method ............................................ 9
2.2.4 Calculation of Step and Touch Voltages ......................................................................... 10
2.3 Potential Equalizing ........................................................................................................ 10
2.4 Equipment and Materials Requirements ......................................................................... 11
2.4.1 Mobile Earthing/Grounding Equipment.......................................................................... 11
2.4.2 Earthing/Grounding Terminal Lugs ................................................................................ 11
2.4.3 Earthing/Grounding Flexible Copper Braids................................................................... 11
2.4.4 Earthing/Grounding Cables............................................................................................. 11
2.4.5 Risers............................................................................................................................... 11
2.4.6 Grounding Rods .............................................................................................................. 11
2.4.7 Grounding Electrodes...................................................................................................... 11
2.4.8 Low Resistance Shield Conductors ................................................................................. 12
2.4.9 Ground Continuity Conductors ....................................................................................... 12
2.5 Earthing/Grounding Connections.................................................................................... 12
2.6 Earthing Conductor Connections .................................................................................... 13
2.6.1 General ............................................................................................................................ 13
2.6.2 Exothermic Welding Materials (if Exothermic Process is Required) ............................. 13
2.7 Deep Bore Grounding ..................................................................................................... 14
2.8 Earthing /Grounding Applications .................................................................................. 14
2.8.1 Overhead Tower .............................................................................................................. 14
2.8.2 Power Transformer and Reactor...................................................................................... 15
2.8.3 Power Cables................................................................................................................... 16
2.8.4 GIS .................................................................................................................................. 18
2.8.5 Fixed Earthing/Grounding Switches, etc......................................................................... 19
2.8.6 Lightning Arrestors ......................................................................................................... 19
2.8.7 Light Poles....................................................................................................................... 19
2.8.8 Panels, Cubicles .............................................................................................................. 19
2.8.9 DC Distribution Equipment............................................................................................. 19
2.8.10 AC Distribution Equipment............................................................................................. 19
2.8.11 Steel Structure ................................................................................................................. 19
2.8.12 Operating Areas............................................................................................................... 20
2.8.13 Operating Handles and Switch Shafts ............................................................................. 20
2.8.14 Fences and Service Areas outside of Fences ................................................................... 20
2.8.15 Others .............................................................................................................................. 20
3 TESTING AND INSPECTION.................................................................................... 20
3.1 General ............................................................................................................................ 20

S-TR-EARTH-GROUND (Rev.0-2009) Page 2 of 22

 EARTHING / LIGHTNING
Earthing/Grounding Systems

3.2 Factory Tests ................................................................................................................... 21

3.2.1 Type Tests ....................................................................................................................... 21
3.2.2 Sample Tests ................................................................................................................... 21
3.2.3 Routine Tests................................................................................................................... 22
3.3 Site Test........................................................................................................................... 22

S-TR-EARTH-GROUND (Rev.0-2009) Page 3 of 22

 EARTHING / LIGHTNING
Earthing/Grounding Systems

EARTHING/GROUNDING SYSTEMS

1 GENERAL

This Specification shall cover:

¾ Design
¾ Manufacturing
¾ Factory Testing (as far as applicable)
¾ Marking and Packing
¾ Shipping
¾ Transportation to Site
¾ Installation
¾ Site Testing and Commissioning
of Earthing/Grounding System Equipment for HV, EHV Substations and any combination of
them.
Further details and specific data are contained in the technical data sheets, drawings, and other
documents that form part of this Specification.
The Earthing/Grounding Systems to be offered shall be complete in all respects necessary for its
effective and trouble free operation.
For applicable technical standards, tests, reference shall be made to:
¾ S-TR-EARTH-LIGHTNING-GEN - General Requirements
(Applicable Technical Standards, Tests, etc.)

1.1 Drawings
Typical Drawings for Earthing/Grounding System are provided in the Drawings Section as
follows:
Drawing No. Title
DWG TR EARTH 01 01 Earthing/Grounding System-1 (Sample 1)
DWG TR EARTH 01 02 Earthing/Grounding System-1 (Sample 2)
DWG TR EARTH 01 03 Detail of Earthing/Grounding System
DWG TR EARTH 01 04 Standard Copper Wire Junctions for Earthing/Grounding
Systems
DWG TR EARTH 01 05 Potential Equalising Grid in Concrete Floor

S-TR-EARTH-GROUND (Rev.0-2009) Page 4 of 22

 EARTHING / LIGHTNING
Earthing/Grounding Systems

DWG TR EARTH 01 06 Typical Earthing Arrangement for Power Transformers /

Reactors
DWG TR EARTH 01 07 Detail of Crossing of an Expansion Joint
DWG TR EARTH 01 08-1 Grounding Pits and Covers (Type 1)
DWG TR EARTH 01 08-2 Grounding Pits and Covers (Type 2)
DWG TR EARTH 01 09 Earthing Method of Panels Installed on Raised Floors
DWG TR EARTH 01 10 Earthing Principle for Raised Floor System
DWG TR EARTH 01 11 Earthing Principle for Cable Trays
DWG TR EARTH 01 14 Details of Steel Pole Earthing
DWG TR EARTH 01 15 Details of Metallic Tower Earthing
DWG TR EARTH 01 16 Earthing Clamping Bolt M16 & S-Bolt
DWG TR EARTH 01 21 Measuring Technique for Apparent Specific Soil Resistance
(Wenner Method)
DWG TR EARTH 01 22 Measuring Technique for Specific Soil Resistance Calculation
DWG TR EARTH 01 23 Earthing Methods of Cable Metallic Sheaths, Screens and
Armouring

1.2 Equipment Identification and Color Codes

Concerning Earthing/Grounding System identification, reference shall be made to Standard
Technical Specification, Part:
¾ S-TR-GEN-ID - Components Marking

2 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

2.1 General
This specification covers the technical requirements for Earthing/Grounding Systems in
substations and/or switchyards, to protect people, equipment and to allow safe service and
maintenance of the electrical installations.
The Earthing/Grounding System, even when designed with a very low resistance, cannot be
considered as an equal-voltage surface. Substantial system voltage differences may occur and
may directly influence through a number of factors such as system resistance, system geometry
and distribution of ground currents, ground resistivity, and frequency of the transient.
The Earthing/Grounding System shall include earthing grid, raisers, grounding rods and all
required earthing/grounding connections.

S-TR-EARTH-GROUND (Rev.0-2009) Page 5 of 22

 EARTHING / LIGHTNING
Earthing/Grounding Systems

The Bidder/Contractor shall design and install a high quality Earthing/Grounding System by
application of materials that meet the requirements of this specification.
The Bidder/Contractor shall bear full responsibility for the Earthing/Grounding System materials
by ensuring that the proposed Earthing/Grounding Systems are designed, manufactured and
installed in line with all internationally recognised codes and standards.
Earthing/Grounding Systems shall perform satisfactorily for the whole life time (50 years) of the
substation and/or switching yard without deterioration due to corrosion. It should continually
maintain a low resistance to the ground, satisfy thermal stability, and be capable of carrying
maximum anticipated full fault currents without deterioration.
The Earthing/Grounding System conductor size shall be designed to satisfy the flow of full fault
currents as specified in the Technical Data Sheets.
The Bidder/Contractor shall carry out ground resistivity and aggressiveness of soil measurements
of the whole Substation plot. If a plot will be filled with a soil layer > 1 m to rise the level, two
soil resistivity measurements – one before and one after the filling – shall be carried out. Based
on the results of these measurements and taking into account the system parameters, the
appropriate calculation and design shall then be worked out. The calculation shall indicate areas
where impermissible touch and step voltage exists. This shall include any place within the
substation premises and the area surrounding around the substation and/or switchyard
boundary/fence (approximately 3 m outside the boundary), where people/vehicles are likely to
pass by.
Prior to any Earthing/Grounding System calculation, the Bidder/Contractor shall agree with
TRANSCO what type of computer programme shall be applied for the Earthing/Grounding
System calculation.
If the finally agreed calculation programme is already available with TRANSCO it should be
updated (if it is not the latest version) otherwise the applied software shall be supplied to
TRANSCO and a software training shall be included in the Contract price.
The calculation results and the Earthing/Grounding System design shall be submitted for
TRANSCO approval.
The Earthing/Grounding System installation shall be closely co-ordinated with the relevant parts
of the civil works and have to be checked with the detailed civil engineering drawings related to
all structures, incl. foundations.
The design of Earthing/Grounding System, the methods of earthing/grounding, and the shielding
of control circuits shall not affect the control equipment.
Upon approving the calculation and respectively the Earthing/Grounding design the
Bidder/Contractor shall commence the implementation of the Earthing/Grounding System
accordingly.
The Bidder/Contractor shall carry out verification checks (by experienced personnel) during and
after installation to ensure that the applied Earthing/Grounding System is in accordance with the
design and that permissible step and touch voltage will/has not been exceeded.

S-TR-EARTH-GROUND (Rev.0-2009) Page 6 of 22

 EARTHING / LIGHTNING
Earthing/Grounding Systems

All documents including limitations and justifications shall be forwarded to TRANSCO for
approval.
Earthing/grounding and shielding methods shall be as follows:
a) Number of earthing/grounding rods shall be defined according to earthing/grounding
calculation.
b) In electrical rooms like GIS, LVAC/DC rooms, basements, etc galvanised iron potential
equalising meshes as specified in the Technical Data Sheets shall be provided. It shall be
connected to the earthing grid via potential equalization bars at four locations. The
potential equalisation bars shall meet requirements as specified in the Technical Data
Sheets and shall be approved by TRANSCO. The potential equalisation bars shall be
protected by a stainless steel cover.
c) Steel fences within and around substation and/or switchyard areas shall be connected to the
Earthing/Grounding System at different intervals. Touch and step potentials on both sides
of the fences must be within the specified limits.
d) At least, one potential control ring as specified in the Technical Data Sheets shall be
installed around each building inside of the substation and/or switchyard.
e) An earthing mesh as specified in the Technical Data Sheets shall be installed underneath of
each power transformer.
f) When a Substation is located adjacent to either another substation or to a power station, the
existing Earthing/Grounding Systems and (the new one) of the subject project shall be
inter-connected as specified in the Technical Data Sheets.
g) Minimum one earthing/grounding rod shall be installed, one at each corner of a building
and of a substation and/or switchyard plot.
h) Secondary of current transformer shall be connected to ground at only one point.
Earthing/Grounding System shall compose of copper-claded steel electrodes, tinned stranded
copper conductors/copper tapes, PVC covered stranded copper conductors, etc.

2.2 Earthing/Grounding System Planning and Design

2.2.1 General
The function of an Earthing/Grounding System for an electrical installation shall be threefold:
i. To maintain the potential of any part of the installation at a definite value with respect to
the ground.
ii. To allow current to flow in the event of a fault to ground, so that the protective equipment
will operate and the faulty circuit thus become isolated.
iii. To ensure that in the event of a fault, equipment normally ‘dead’ (un-energised) does not
attain a dangerous potential above or below ground.

S-TR-EARTH-GROUND (Rev.0-2009) Page 7 of 22

 EARTHING / LIGHTNING
Earthing/Grounding Systems

Measurement of:
a) Soil resistivity
b) Aggressiveness of the soil (such as redex potential, moisture content, pH value, presence of
dissolved salts/organic acids, etc.)
for sizing of the Earthing/Grounding Grid shall be executed.
For the effect of corrosion, an allowance, which should not be less than 10% of the calculated
Earthing/Grounding grid size can be considered.
Calculations as above specified shall be made to establish an Earthing/Grounding System by
assuming ideal conditions. However, it is important to make allowances for possible variations.
Likewise, when measuring the ground resistance variations should be kept in mind considering
the accuracy of the measurement required.
It is normally the best policy to plan an Earthing/Grounding System with information gained
from a resistivity survey, plus using system design formula. The true soil resistance is likely to
be nearer the design value, if environmental and ground conditions changes have been taken into
account. The measured value tends to be lower than the true value with techniques used today.
The conductivity of the ground has a considerable influence on the effectiveness of an
Earthing/Grounding System. It shall be one of the factors governing a grounding electrode’s
resistance.
The resistivity of the soil shall be taken as:
ρ = Ω x m2 / m = Ω x m
which represents the resistance between opposite faces of a metre cube of ground.
Various conditions of the ground causes different resistivities and the differences found between
them are quite considerable, as the table above illustrates.
The amount of water held in the soil is governed by the weather conditions, time of the year,
nature of the soil, etc. To a certain degree the temperature of the soil has an effect upon
resistivity, lower temperatures causing higher resistivities, therefore, climatic changes have a
bearing on the planning of Earthing/Grounding Systems.

2.2.2 Design Requirements

Design calculations shall be carried out according to IEEE Std.80, latest Version.
For details of design calculation requirements refer to Standard Technical Specification, Part:
¾ ANNEX 1-11 - Earthing Design Calculation Samples
The ruling criteria in the design of the earthing/grounding system shall be the safety of personnel
and the proper operation of the electrical equipment during normal operation and during transient
disturbances such as short circuits in the electric power system and during lightning discharges.

S-TR-EARTH-GROUND (Rev.0-2009) Page 8 of 22

 EARTHING / LIGHTNING
Earthing/Grounding Systems

The design of the earthing/grounding system shall be such that the maximum permissible step
and touch voltages are not exceeded, (refer to Guide IEEE Std. 80, latest Version).
For turnkey projects, if the actually measured resistance of the installed ground system is higher
than specified, the Bidder/Contractor shall install, at no extra cost, additional earthing/grounding
rods, mats, etc., until the field-measured resistance is equal to or less than the specified value.
The ground system shall be composed of a system of tinned copper conductors buried
approximately 60 cm. beneath the surface of the ground, excluding crushed rock surfacing. The
grid system shall cover the entire fenced substation area and shall extend one meter outside of
the substation fence.
In case of smaller plot areas or substations housed in buildings, the grounding mesh shall be
installed below the basement floor. At each corner a ground rod shall be provided.
Driven ground rods shall be installed at regular intervals and connected to the earthing/grounding
conductor at grid nodes. Four of the ground rods, at least, must be installed (one at each corner of
the ground grid). The Bidder/Contractor shall determine the spacing of ground grid conductors
and the total number and location of ground rods and their lengths (single or two or more
coupled sections).

2.2.3 Applicable Apparent Soil Resistance Measurement Method

Typical Drawings for Apparent Soil Resistance Measurement provided in the Drawings Section
are as follows:
Drawing No. Title
DWG TR EARTH 01 21 Measuring Technique for Apparent Specific Soil Resistance
Calculation (Wenner Method)

The measuring technique to be followed for apparent soil resistance measurement shall be the
one developed Dr. F. Wenner of the US Bureau of Standards, which is described in a paper:
report No. 255 Bulletin of Bureau Standards, volume 12 No. 3, 11th October 1915, and titled ‘A
Method of Measuring Earth Resistivity’. The basis of this principle is given below:
The method is sometimes known as the ‘four electrodes method’ because four electrodes (spikes)
are inserted into the ground and connected to the terminals of the earth tester.
The four spikes are equally spaced in a straight line and driven into the ground such that the
depth of insertion is <1/3 of the distance “a” between the spikes.
The spikes are connected to the earth resistance tester by multi-core cables.
Current is passed through the ground via the two outer spikes, which are connected to the current
terminals of the tester. The voltage appearing between the inner spikes connected to the potential
terminals of the tester as a result of the current flowing is measured.
The formula for calculating the specific apparent soil resistance at a certain depth of b is:

S-TR-EARTH-GROUND (Rev.0-2009) Page 9 of 22

 EARTHING / LIGHTNING
Earthing/Grounding Systems

4⋅π⋅a⋅RM
ρ :=
1 + ⎡⎢ ⎤−
(2⋅a) a
2 ⎥
⎣ ( a ) + ⎡⎣4⋅(b )⎤⎦ ⎦ ( a ) + (b )
2 2 2

where RM = the measured soil resistanc in Ω

a = the distance between the spikes in m
b = the depth of spikes
ρ = the apparent soil resistivity at a depth of ‘b’ in Ω x m.
If measured soil resistance values are very high and leading to difficulties in designing the earth
system within the specified limits, ground (soil resistivity) improvement materials shall be
applied. Prior to application of the ground improvement materials, TRANSCO’s approval has to
be obtained.
If the specific apparent soil resistance (obtained by calculations) is decreasing with increasing
earth depth, the installation of a deep earthing system is required and if the soil impedance is low
at a small earth depth an earthing net can be considered.

2.2.4 Calculation of Step and Touch Voltages

Step and touch voltages measurements have to be performed according to IEEE Std 80-2000
recommendation for 50 kg body weight criterion. For the calculation full fault currents as
specified and future extensions and modifications of the substation layout shall be considered.
Reductions of specified fault levels shall not be considered.
For crushed rock covered areas a maximum specific electric resistance as specified in the
Technical Data Sheets or the actual measured resistance of the used material and size shall be
considered.

2.3 Potential Equalizing

For potential equalizing of the building an Earthing/Grounding System a galvanised iron mesh
shall be cast into the surface concrete of all building floors as specified in the Technical Data
Sheets.
At the potential equalisation busbars connections to the main earthing/grounding system and
reinforcement shall be provided.
The locations of the potential equivalation busbars shall be proposed to TRANSCO for approval.

S-TR-EARTH-GROUND (Rev.0-2009) Page 10 of 22

 EARTHING / LIGHTNING
Earthing/Grounding Systems

2.4 Equipment and Materials Requirements

2.4.1 Mobile Earthing/Grounding Equipment

To meet the safety regulations before any maintenance or repair works are started on the
EHV/HV equipment, the disconnected "live" parts of the equipment shall be grounded by means
of permanent earthing/grounding switches and/or portable or mobile grounding sets.
The portable or mobile earthing/grounding sets (Substation Earthing/Grounding Sets) shall be
supplied by the Bidder/Contractor. The current-carrying components of the earthing/grounding
set shall have a fault current rating (magnitude and duration) as specified in the respective
technical data sheets.

2.4.2 Earthing/Grounding Terminal Lugs

Terminal lugs shall be of one hole, socket type, rounded edge lug, cast of high strength corrosion
Resistance copper alloy.
Machine screws, nuts, and washers used with the lugs shall be of Bronze.

2.4.3 Earthing/Grounding Flexible Copper Braids

All flexible copper braids shall be made of flat, extra-flexible copper braid. Both ends shall be
encased in a seamless copper ferrule drilled in accordance with NEMA Standard or equivalent.
Ferrules shall be formed under high pressure ensuring dependable contact.

2.4.4 Earthing/Grounding Cables

Earthing/Grounding conductors shall be of tinned copper or bare copper (where applicable) soft
drawn concentric strands manufactured in accordance with the latest revision of ASTM B3 and
ASTM Specification B8 (class B).

2.4.5 Risers
Risers shall meet requirements as specified in the Technical Data Sheets.

2.4.6 Grounding Rods

The earthing/grounding rods are required to be installed at a required depth in ground in order to
overcome change in resistivity due to seasonable variations. These rods are required in sufficient
numbers based upon calculation.
Grounding Rods shall meet the requirements as specified in Technical Data Sheets.

2.4.7 Grounding Electrodes

Earthing/Grounding System usually takes the form of an electrode (metal rod, pipe, plate or
mesh) or electrodes embedded in the ground and connected to the electrical equipment or

S-TR-EARTH-GROUND (Rev.0-2009) Page 11 of 22

 EARTHING / LIGHTNING
Earthing/Grounding Systems

network. The resistance of a grounding electrode is not constant but varies with the amount of
moisture in the ground. As weather conditions change throughout the year, grounding electrode
resistance will change. It is therefore required that the Bidder/Contractor shall carry out
verification checks on the resistance to ground of all grounding electrodes.
Overhead Ground Wire/Optical Ground Wire (OPGW)
For the technical details of the Overhead Ground Wires and OPGW reference shall be made to
Standard Technical Specification, Part:
¾ S-TR-OHL-OPGW - Optical Ground Wires

2.4.8 Low Resistance Shield Conductors

Since it is impractical to completely eliminate system voltage differences, their effect must be
neutralised. Neutralisation shall be accomplished by a low resistance shield conductor parallel to,
and in proximity of the affected control circuit. Such a conductor may be the shielded control
cable, unused conductors of an unshielded control cable, or a separate shield conductor.
In trench systems, shield conductors, connected to the substation Earthing/Grounding System,
shall be attached to the sides tops of the trench. This results in placing the shield conductors
between the transient source and the control cables. These shield conductors should have
sufficient conductivity to carry fault currents without damage.

2.4.9 Ground Continuity Conductors

According to IEEE Std 575, single-point bonded HV and EHV cable installation shall be
provided with a parallel insulated ground continuity conductor that is grounded at both end of the
route.
2.5 Earthing/Grounding Connections
For all EHV, HV fault current carrying components, two conductors each sized for the full fault
current as specified in the Technical Data Sheets shall be provided.
Overhead transmission line earth wires and substation Earthing/Grounding Systems shall be
electrically connected.
Each metallic device within the substation boundary must be equipped with an
earthing/grounding bolt/screw of sufficient diameter to connect the Earthing/Grounding System.
All metallic construction parts and auxiliaries, especially gantries, auxiliary structures, supports,
apparatus, fences (all posts), control/protection cubicles shall be connected to the
Earthing/Grounding System.
For fences with plastic covered screen wires and with plastic covered posts, earthing/grounding
is not required. The gates of the fence shall be earthed and a gateway area potential control has to
be considered.
The Earthing/Grounding System of buildings shall be connected:

S-TR-EARTH-GROUND (Rev.0-2009) Page 12 of 22

 EARTHING / LIGHTNING
Earthing/Grounding Systems

• with the outside of the building installed earthing-potential-control-ring as specified in the

Technical Data Sheets
• or to an existing Earthing/Grounding System of the substation. If an existing
Earthing/Grounding System is ending at the front of a substation building, the
Earthing/Grounding network shall be extended.

2.6 Earthing Conductor Connections

2.6.1 General
For copper bar to copper bar connections the following connection methods are applicable:

a) Brazing, using zinc-free brazing material with a melting point of at least 6000 C
b) Bolting (min. two 8 mm bolts each with two washers , one spring washers and a nut)
c) Exothermic welding (according to ANSI/UL 467)
d) Cold pressure welding

Bolted connections might be used only at locations inside the buildings.

Bolted connections to the Earthing/Grounding System shall be electrically tested (voltage drop
test) at locations to be agreed with TRANSCO.

2.6.2 Exothermic Welding Materials (if Exothermic Process is Required)

The Bidder/Contractor shall supply exothermic welding materials for wire-to-wire, copper
conductor-to-ground rod and copper conductor-to-steel structure earthing/grounding
connections. These materials shall be cad-weld, or approved equal and shall meet ANSI/UL 467
recommendations. If the Bidder/Contractor proposes to supply an exothermic process other than
cad-weld, detailed information describing the proposed process shall be included with his
proposal.
The exothermic welding materials shall include removable clamp type moulds, handle flint gun,
exothermic powder cartridges, metal discs and other devices required to complete the
earthing/grounding connection.
The exothermic powder cartridges shall be designed to provide an installed connection having a
current capacity equal to conductor being welded. The ignition powder shall be packed in the
bottom of the cartridge to permit the ignition powder to fall on top of the welding powder when
dumped into the old. The powder cartridges shall be complemented with metal discs.
The moulds shall be designed to withstand the high temperature associated with the welding
operation and shall provide a minimum of 50 acceptable connections without maintenance or
replacement.

S-TR-EARTH-GROUND (Rev.0-2009) Page 13 of 22

 EARTHING / LIGHTNING
Earthing/Grounding Systems

2.7 Deep Bore Grounding

At locations with high surface resistance, the Bidder/Contractor shall install deep bore
grounding.
A hole shall be drilled into the ground, to a depth reaching permanently moist soil layers. The
depth required shall be determined by TRANSCO on the basis of the soil investigation results.
The grounding electrode shall be lowered into the hole and must safely reach its bottom.
Connection to the tower steel is outlined above.
Deep bore earthing/grounding shall be installed only after approval of by TRANSCO, and shall
be remunerated against the respective price item in the Price Tabulation Sheet.

2.8 Earthing /Grounding Applications

2.8.1 Overhead Tower

2.8.1.1 General
For Overhead Tower Earthing/Grounding Details, reference shall be made to Standard Technical
Specification, Part
¾ S-TR-OHL-T - HV/MV Towers of Lattice Steel Design

and Drawings:
Drawing No. Title
DWG TR EARTH 01 15 Details of Metallic Tower Earthing

The connection of ground conductor/electrodes to the Stub-angle shall be made with

compression lugs, fixed to the Stub-angles by 2 bolts of the size M16. To accommodate
additional grounding, every Stub-angle shall have a pair of holes for establishing the required
earthing/grounding connection.
Inside the foundation concrete, the grounding electrodes of the basic system shall be embedded
in suitable plastic hoses. Any additional ground electrodes shall be routed 0.5 m underground to
the respective foundation. They shall be brought up along the foundation cap, through a
protective pipe, to be suitable fixed to the cap facing the tower centre.
All contact surfaces on the tower stubs, connectors, rods, strips, wire leads etc. shall be
thoroughly cleaned prior to assembly. Finished connections shall be protected with a liberal
coating of an appropriate compound, e.g. “Denso”. Great care shall be taken for protecting the
earthing/grounding against corrosion from aggressive soil.
All wire leads shall be properly fixed to the connectors and all bolts shall be firmly tightened to
ensure that a good electrical connection is achieved.

S-TR-EARTH-GROUND (Rev.0-2009) Page 14 of 22

 EARTHING / LIGHTNING
Earthing/Grounding Systems

All wires and strips shall be handled and installed in the best possible manner, free of kinks and
damage of any kind. Backfill for strip trenches shall be sieved material and thoroughly
compacted in layers.
After installation of the basic Earthing/Grounding System, the Bidder/Contractor shall measure
the earth resistance at each tower structure and submit the results to TRANSCO, for approval.
All supporting structures having a resistance to earth, exceeding 20 Ohms for towers and/or 10
Ohms for poles, shall be furnished with deep bore earthing/grounding at tower locations, as will
be defined by TRANSCO, also deep bore earthing/grounding and/or earth grading rings shall be
installed as far as needed. After application of additional grounding, the Bidder/Contractor shall
repeat the resistance measurement in all concerned locations. The stringing of the earth wire may
commence only after final approval of the resistance values by TRANSCO.

2.8.1.2 Basic System

The Bidder/Contractor shall provide furnish each tower with a basic Earthing/Grounding
System, on two diagonally opposite legs.
For pile foundations, the basic Earthing/Grounding System shall consist of coiled ground
conductor, placed under the bottom of the pile.
The earthing/grounding rods shall be driven into undisturbed earth at the outermost corner at the
bottom of the foundation.

2.8.1.3 Grading Rings

At tower locations subject to special requirements of safety of public, a closed
earthing/grounding ring has to be buried around the tower leg at a depth of 30 to 60 cm and at a
distance of 1 m to the tower steelworks.
The ring is to be connected to counterpoise tower legs. If deemed necessary, a second grading
ring shall be installed at a depth of 80 cm distant by 1 m from the first grading ring.
For all tower locations, where the Bidder/Contractor is advised by TRANSCO to install such an
earthing/grounding ring, calculations shall be performed to prove the safety limits of step and
touch voltages. These calculations shall be carried out in accordance with approved standards
and shall be subject to approval by TRANSCO.
Connection to the tower steel is as outlined above.
Grading rings shall be installed only after approval of TRANSCO, and shall be remunerated
against the respective price item in the Price Tabulation Sheet.

2.8.2 Power Transformer and Reactor

Typical Drawing for power transformer/reactor earthing/grounding arrangement provided in the
Drawings Section are as follows:
Drawing No. Title

S-TR-EARTH-GROUND (Rev.0-2009) Page 15 of 22

 EARTHING / LIGHTNING
Earthing/Grounding Systems

DWG TR EARTH 01 06 Typical Earthing Arrangement for Power Transformers/Reactors

The transformer and shunt reactor tank shall be connected to the Earthing/Grounding System
following the same principles as for steel structures.
Directly grounded power transformer/reactor neutrals shall be connected by two copper
conductors (isolated from the transformer tank) to two separate grounding rods. The grounding
rods shall be connected to the Earthing/Grounding System.
The copper conductors shall be properly clamped to a supporting steel structure.

2.8.3 Power Cables

2.8.3.1 General
Fundamentally the screen of a power cable can be treated in the following way:
• Sheath bonded at one side only
• Sheath bonded at both sides
• Application of cross-bonding systems
The practical implications of the choice of a specific earthing system are manifold and must be
taken into account when a power cable system is designed. The following aspects are influenced
when the earthing concept of a power cable system:
• Current rating of a power cable circuit
• Overvoltage in the power cable screen
• Magnitude of the zero and positive sequence impedance
• Appearance of stray current in the earth
• Earthing impedance of (remote) substations.

2.8.3.2 Both sides Bonding

If the screen of a power cable is bonded at both sides, the following effects will appear:
• Due to the magnetic field of the main power cable and the closed loop of the power cable
screen, a circulating current is flowing in the screen. This circulating current is causing
additional losses. The losses are increasing strongly with increasing spacing between
power cables.
• The ampacity of the power cable system is changed due to these extra losses in the
screen. The best ampacities are reached with a touching trefoil formation as this
arrangements gives the lowest losses in the power cable screen
• Ther is no induced voltage appearing in the power cable screen (as it is compensated by
the circulating current) nevertheless of the length of the section (as section, the power
cable circuit between two earthing points is understood).

S-TR-EARTH-GROUND (Rev.0-2009) Page 16 of 22

 EARTHING / LIGHTNING
Earthing/Grounding Systems

• The earthing impedance of (remote) substations can be improved by the screen of the
cable.
• The zero-sequence impedance has normally lower value than with one side bonding and
can be calculated more accurately.

2.8.3.3 One side Bonding

If the power cable screen is bonded at one side only, the following effects are appearing:
• As the screen is open, there are no circulating currents, but there is an induced voltage
appearing at the open power cable screen, where sheath voltage limiters must be installed
in order to protect the power cable outer sheath against transient overvoltages.
• The ampacity is higher compared with both side bonding, as there are practically no
losses in the screen.
• The length of one section is limited as the magnitude of the induced voltage is increasing
with length.
• The zero-sequence impedance is bigger than for both sides bonding. This is due to the
fact, that the mean return distance of the current in earth, which depends on the
conductivity of the ground, is normally in the range 1000Ωm, which gives high value for
the inductivity of the zero-sequence impedance. Practical measurements showed, that the
effective zero-sequence impedance differs a lot from theoretical value, as the ground is
normally disturbed by additional conductors like water and drainage pipes, gas pipelines
etc. Hence if single side bonding is used, the zero-sequence impedance needs to be
measured for each cable system in order to have accurate values.
• Stray currents in the ground from earth faults can cause disturbances to neighbouring low
voltage and data/signal cables.
In order to improve zero-sequence impedance and the general earthing situation it is
recommendable to install a parallel conductor along the power cable route. The losses in this
additional can be prevented by transposing if along the power cable route.

2.8.3.4 Cross-Bonding
In a cross-bonding system the whole cable circuit should be divided in three sections with the
same length. After every section the screen of the power cable is cross-bonded to a different
phase. This is preferable done in positions, where joints (with screen interruption) are placed.
Like this the connected screen will see the same amount of induced voltage from every phase,
hence the induced voltage is becoming zero. If the power cables are laid in plain, the cables itself
need to be transposed at every joint bay, as the screen impedance is different for the inner cable
and the outer cables. In order the sum of the induced voltage is really becoming zero, the
connected screen must run always on the same position of the power cable circuit.
A cross-bonding system can be considered as combining the advantages of single- and one side
bonding, which are the follows:

S-TR-EARTH-GROUND (Rev.0-2009) Page 17 of 22

 EARTHING / LIGHTNING
Earthing/Grounding Systems

• In a cross-bonding system the power cable screen can be earthed on both sides without
having circulating currents and additional losses (as long as every section has the same
length).
• Earthing impedances and zero sequence impedances are improved due to both side
bonding.
However the disadvantage of the induced voltage appearing on every cross-bonding point –
similar to one side bonding – is still remaining. Hence the length of one section is limited.

2.8.3.5 Recommendations
Earthing concept in or near a substation, where an earthing grid is in the ground
• Single side bonding in order to reduce the losses in the power cable screen.
Earthing concept outside of a substation
• For short cable length, where less than three sections of power cables are needed, single-
side bonding together with an additional earth conductor to improve the zero-sequence
and the earthing impedance.
• For long power cable lengths, consisting at least of three cable sections, implementing a
cross-bonding system as it increases the ampacity and improves the zero-sequence
impedance.
• For power cable circuits, where the number of cable sections is unequal to three or
unequal to multiple of three, both above described methods can be adopted.
If for any reason both side bonding (without cross-bonding) is applicable, the spacing between
the power cables shall be minimised and trefoil formation shall be chosen in order to reduce the
losses in the screen and to maximise the ampacity of the power cable.

2.8.4 GIS
GIS Earthing/Grounding shall meet requirements as specified in IEEE Std 80-2000.
For high-frequency earthing, CIGRE (Group 23.10, Publ. Earthing of GIS – An application
Guide) shall be considered.
The GIS manufacturer shall evaluate:
a) Induced enclosure currents
b) Metal to metal touch voltage during internal and external GIS faults
c) Justify that specified touch voltage criteria are met and submission of special precautions for
TRANSCO’s approval.

S-TR-EARTH-GROUND (Rev.0-2009) Page 18 of 22

 EARTHING / LIGHTNING
Earthing/Grounding Systems

2.8.5 Fixed Earthing/Grounding Switches, etc.

Connections between any type of earthing/grounding device, e.g. earthing/grounding switch, and
risers from the Earthing/Grounding System shall be arranged through two 300 mm2 copper
conductors connected between the ground contact of the earthing/grounding device and a riser.
These conductors shall be properly clamped to the steel structure.

2.8.6 Lightning Arrestors

Lightning arrestor grounding terminal shall be connected by two 300 mm2 copper conductors to
separate grounding rods. Arrester ground connections shall meet requirements as specified in
IEEE Std 80-2000. The copper conductors shall be properly clamped to the lightning arrester
supporting steel structure. The grounding rods shall be connected to the Earthing/Grounding
System.

2.8.7 Light Poles

Poles for lighting within the substation area, shall be connected to the Earthing/Grounding
System via 50 mm2 copper cables, one connection for each pole.

2.8.8 Panels, Cubicles

Control/Protection Panels, Marshalling Cubicles, Transformer Control Panels shall be connected
to the Earthing/Grounding System via two 50 mm2 wires, irrespective of whether the cubicles are
mounted on an earthed steel structure or not.

2.8.9 DC Distribution Equipment

Battery Chargers and DC Distribution Panels shall be connected to the Earthing/Grounding
System via two 95 mm2 wires, irrespective of whether the equipment are mounted on an earthed
steel structure or not.

2.8.10 AC Distribution Equipment

AC Distribution Panels shall be connected to the Earthing/Grounding System via two 240 mm2
wires, irrespective of whether the equipment are mounted on an earthed steel structure or not.

2.8.11 Steel Structure

Each steel structure that carries electrical apparatuses shall be connected to the
Earthing/Grounding System. To ensure a contact even if a connection fails or a cable is cut off,
each structure must be connected via two different risers to two different locations of the
Earthing/Grounding System.
Steel structures underneath conductors shall be properly connected to the Earthing/Grounding
System to sustain the full fault current.

S-TR-EARTH-GROUND (Rev.0-2009) Page 19 of 22

 EARTHING / LIGHTNING
Earthing/Grounding Systems

Steel structures constructed as one unit (all parts are welded) can be utilised for
earthing/grounding of electrical parts installed on it, if the steel structures are earthed according
to DIN VDE 0141, i.e. as follows:
• For gantries, Earthing/Grounding System shall be connected at two points
• Sufficient conductive cross-sections of the gantry supporting structure
• Electrical conductive connections at the gantry structure shall be bolted or welded.

2.8.12 Operating Areas

For outdoor operated equipment an earthing/grounding mat shall be installed beneath the
operator's standing place for the protection of the operators. This mat should consist of 50 mm2
tinned copper wire arranged in a spiral of about 1 m diameter with maximum 0.2 m distance
between spiral wires, and with one end connected to the operating mechanism. The mat shall be
above the normal earthing/grounding system and shall be connected to the main earthing grid.

2.8.13 Operating Handles and Switch Shafts

Operating handles and Switch Shaft groundings shall meet requirements as specified in IEEE Std
80-2000.

2.8.14 Fences and Service Areas outside of Fences

Fences and Service Areas outside of Fences groundings shall meet requirements as specified in
IEEE Std 80-2000.

2.8.15 Others
Communication Circuits, Control Cable Sheaths, Rails, LV Neutral Wires, Portable Equipment
and Tools supplied from Substation, Piping, Auxiliary Buildings shall be connected to the
Earthing/Grounding System as specified in IEEE Std 80-2000.

3 TESTING AND INSPECTION

3.1 General
All Earthing/Grounding elements/devices shall be tested in the Manufacturer’s work as far as
applicable. The Bidder/Contractor may be required to carry out any one or all of the tests stated
in this Specification under witness of TRANSCO or his representatives.
Testing of the Earthing/Grounding Systems shall be performed in line with this specification and
in accordance with the relevant IEC Standards (as minimum requirement) and other Standards as
may be approved by TRANSCO.
Acceptance by TRANSCO’s representative of any equipment shall not relieve the manufacturer
from any of his performance guarantees or from any other obligations.

S-TR-EARTH-GROUND (Rev.0-2009) Page 20 of 22

 EARTHING / LIGHTNING
Earthing/Grounding Systems

TRANSCO reserves the right to perform checks during manufacturing process at any time or all
the times. It shall be at the discretion of TRANSCO to witness tests on 100%, or any percentage
quantity of each lot for routine tests, apart from the type tests, wherever called for.
Tests of Earthing/Grounding Systems shall comprise factory and site tests.

3.2 Factory Tests

3.2.1 Type Tests
Cables, hardware and materials shall be subjected to the type tests in accordance with the
applicable ASTM or equivalent IEC standards.
Evidence shall be given that the proposed Earthing/Grounding Systems under this Specification
have been subject to all type tests at an internationally recognised testing station, like KEMA or
equivalent. If deemed necessary, TRANSCO will decide whether additional tests are necessary
to be performed by the Bidder/Contractor.
An internationally recognised laboratory shall certify the type test reports.
The Bidder/Contractor shall submit certified copies of type test certificates covering the
proposed earthing/grounding components.
Type tests certificates/reports shall be considered acceptable if they are in compliance with the
relevant Standards and the following:
1. Type Tests conducted at an internationally recognised laboratory acceptable to
TRANSCO.
2. Type Tests conducted at the manufacturer’s laboratory and witnessed by representatives
from an internationally recognised laboratory acceptable to TRANSCO.
If the presented type test reports are not in accordance with the above requirements, TRANSCO
may decide to ask for the type tests to be carried out in the manufacturer’s premises or other
places subject to the approval of TRANSCO and at no additional cost. These tests shall be
performed in the presence of an internationally recognised laboratory, which should issue the
relevant type test certificates upon successful test.

3.2.2 Sample Tests

The sample tests shall be performed in accordance with ASTM B153 and the manufacturer
standard.
Sample Tests shall be performed, by selecting the samples from each lot of earthing/grounding
components/material. Sampling shall be as per the ISO.
The tests shall comprise as a minimum the following tests:
• Visual checks and measurements of dimensions
• Earthing/Grounding components labeling as per this specification.

S-TR-EARTH-GROUND (Rev.0-2009) Page 21 of 22

 EARTHING / LIGHTNING
Earthing/Grounding Systems

3.2.3 Routine Tests

Earthing/Grounding Systems shall be subjected to routine tests as per the relevant IEC
recommendations or other recommendations might be approved by TRANSCO such as ASTM.
Routine test certificates shall be submitted for TRANSCO’s review and approval before
shipment of the earthing/grounding components.
The visual inspection of the Earthing/Grounding Systems, in order to ensure that all components
are mechanically assembled and fixed properly and that there are no imperfections shall be
performed.
The tests on Earthing/Grounding Cables shall be performed in accordance with ASTM B3 and
ASTM B8 and B153 and shall include, but not limited to the following:
General inspection:
a) Tensile strength tests
b) Elongation tests
c) Conductor resistivity tests
d) Dimension measurement
e) Surface finish inspection
f) Weight of conductor
i) General inspection
j) Measurement of dimensions.

3.3 Site Test

Details of Site Acceptance Tests are specified in Standard Technical Specification, Part 21 (Site
Tests after Installation (SATs))
11-SAT Earthing-Lightning

S-TR-EARTH-GROUND (Rev.0-2009) Page 22 of 22

 STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRIC WORKS

CIVIL WORKS

( SPECIFICATION )

CONCRETE AND REINFORCED CONCRETE

TRANSCO STANDARD : S-TR-CIVIL-CONCRETE (REV.0-2018)

S-TR-CIVIL-CONCRETE (Rev.0-2018) Page 1 of 16

 CIVIL WORKS
Concrete and Reinforced Concrete

CONTENTS

1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................... 3
2 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ...................................................................................... 3
2.1 General .............................................................................................................................. 3
2.2 Concrete ............................................................................................................................ 3
2.3 Form-Work ........................................................................................................................ 5
2.3.1 General .............................................................................................................................. 5
2.3.2 Form-Work Classes ........................................................................................................... 5
2.3.3 Form-Work Removal ........................................................................................................ 6
2.4 Reinforcement ................................................................................................................... 6
2.4.1 Material ............................................................................................................................. 7
2.4.2 Fabrication ......................................................................................................................... 7
2.4.3 Site Installation and Handling ........................................................................................... 8
2.5 Cement .............................................................................................................................. 9
2.6 Aggregates ......................................................................................................................... 9
2.7 Admixtures ...................................................................................................................... 10
2.8 Tests and Properties......................................................................................................... 10
2.8.1 Testing ............................................................................................................................. 10
2.8.2 Concrete Quality Requirements ...................................................................................... 12
2.8.3 Particular Requirements .................................................................................................. 13
2.8.4 Construction and Expansion Joints ................................................................................. 13
2.8.5 Construction Joints .......................................................................................................... 13
2.8.6 Expansion Joints .............................................................................................................. 14
2.8.7 Joint Filler Board ............................................................................................................. 14
2.9 Special Requirements for Safety against Cracking ......................................................... 14
3 GENERAL FOR PRE-CAST CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION .............................. 14

S-TR-CIVIL-CONCRETE (Rev.0-2018) Page 2 of 16

 CIVIL WORKS
Concrete and Reinforced Concrete

CONCRETE AND REINFORCED CONCRETE

1 GENERAL
This part of the Specification shall cover all items related to concrete and reinforced concrete
works for the Project. Works shall include all items required for the tendered Project, as well as
all auxiliary works as/and where required.
All works shall further be carried out in full compliance with all local rules and regulations and
the Specification shall further be read if applicable for the Project.
For applicable technical standards, tests, reference shall be made to:
 S-TR-CIVIL-GEN - General Requirements
(Applicable Technical Standards, Tests, etc.)
 S-GEN-CDF - Civil Design Fundamentals

2 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

2.1 General
This article shall apply to all concrete and reinforced concrete works within this Project. All
works shall be designed and executed in accordance with the structural analysis and the approved
design. All work shall be performed according to the working drawings designed by the
Bidder/Contractor and approved by TRANSCO.
Concrete and reinforced concrete shall be placed either in-situ or by prefabricated units.
This Article also covers the reinforcement steel, as well as the form-work required for the
particular structural member.

2.2 Concrete
Before executing any load bearing structural members, the Bidder/Contractor shall furnish
TRANSCO with a concrete mix design and a detailed concreting programme, which shall be
subject for approval.
Only ready-mix concrete shall to be used and one trial mix has at least to be carried out
successfully for every mix. The batching plant has to be approved by TRANSCO. If a known
mix, which was successfully used before, is proposed, trial mixing can be waived The
composition of one batch concrete, its aggregates, the cement and water content and the
additives, if any, in kg or litre per m3 of compacted concrete shall be displayed legibly at the
batching plant.
Concrete shall be placed and compacted in its final position within 90 minutes of the water being
added to the mix. If the Bidder/Contractor proposes the use of pumps for the transporting and
placing of concrete, he shall submit a detailed method statement. Bidder/Contractor shall ensure

S-TR-CIVIL-CONCRETE (Rev.0-2018) Page 3 of 16

 CIVIL WORKS
Concrete and Reinforced Concrete

that pumping shocks shall not be transferred from the pipeline to the form-work, previously laid
concrete or the structure. The initial discharge of any pumped concrete shall be discarded
completely.
Concrete shall be placed and compacted/vibrated in horizontal layers of not more than 300 mm
thickness each. For large areas to be cast proven technique (e.g. staggered layers) may be
proposed for approval at Site. The rate of delivery of concrete during concreting operations shall
be such that the interval between batches shall be minimised to avoid cold joints, if cold joints
cannot be avoided, a stop-end vertical surface joint shall be provided.
For slabs thicker than 900 mm, thermocouples shall be provided to control and record the
temperature of the concrete during curing. Allowable differential temperature should not exceed
200C.
For concreting in hot weather, ACI Standard 305R "Hot Weather Concreting" and the "CIRIA
and Concrete Society’s “Guide to the construction of reinforced concrete in the Arabian
Peninsular”. and its recommendations shall be followed and various means may be employed to
lower the temperature of concrete such as:
 Cooling coarse aggregate with water by sprinkling and shading
 Using chilled water
 Using crushed ice
 Avoiding the use of the hot cement
 Shading mixer drums, facilities and material by use of permanent wet burlap coverings
 Adequately watering of sub-grade, form-work and reinforcement
 Insulating water supply lines and tanks and/or painting exposed portions white
 Working only at cooler daytime
 Covering freshly poured concrete with polythene sheets
 Intensive moist-curing with potable water of the concrete placed
 Curing the concrete continuously with water at least for 7 days and as detailed in CIRIA
and Concrete Society’s –“Guide to the construction of reinforced concrete in the Arabian
Peninsular”. Attention to curing requirements is important at all times; it is especially in
hot, dry weather because of greater danger of cracking. The use of ice to lower the
temperature of fresh concrete must be carefully controlled. If flaked ice is used in the mix,
it must be of such a size that it will melt completely in the mix and that no ice remains
once the batching is complete. The temperature of fresh concrete must in no case exceed
+ 30°C. When discharged in the form-work, particular care shall be given for thick section
(>900mm) where insulation boards shall be used to reduce temperature gradient.

S-TR-CIVIL-CONCRETE (Rev.0-2018) Page 4 of 16

 CIVIL WORKS
Concrete and Reinforced Concrete

2.3 Form-Work

2.3.1 General
The stability of the form-work, false work and scaffolding shall be proven by static analysis.
Form-work and its supporting structures shall be constructed in accordance with the static
analysis and shall safely resist all occurring forces, including the effect of the concreting rate and
the method of compaction. For columns and walls, the strength of form-work shall be adjusted to
the rate of placing the concrete. Scaffolding along with Form-Work (shuttering) system shall be
supplied by specialized supplier. The work shall be executed by the certified scaffolders holding
valid specialized third party certification. The entire scaffolding system shall be inspected at site
prior to its usage (concreting, external scaffolding, etc.) by approved specialized third party
scaffolding supplier to ensure the compliance with latest safety & technical code of practice. All
timber for form-work shall have selected quality, brand new and shall have a flexural stress
"Sigma b" minimum 10 N/mm2. Formwork drawings/calculations shall be submitted for
information.
All form-work and moulds shall be of such tight construction that slurry cannot flow out at the
joints during pouring and compaction. If required, joints shall be sealed with foam rubber strips.

2.3.2 Form-Work Classes

The class of form-work shall be indicated on the working drawings. All permanent concrete
edges shall be chamfered by means of neatly planned 25/25 mm triangular fillets. The visible
faces shall have a uniform appearance.
 Class F1 (sawn)
This finish shall be used for surfaces against which backfill, further concrete, or grout will be
placed. Form-work of this class shall consist of sawn timber, metal, or other suitable and
approved material.
Applicable for all types of foundations.
 Class F2 (wrought)
This finish shall be used for structural surfaces permanently exposed to view. Form-work of this
class shall be faced with wrought boards, with square edges, uniformly arranged, and with nail
and knotholes filled flush with putty or another approved substance.
Applicable for all sub-structural work, considering that the surface finish is good enough to
received the water proofing membrane.
 Class F3 (precast quality)
This finish shall be used for permanent or important architectural features, or for precast concrete
units. It shall be free from board-marks or surface pitting and the form-work shall be faced with
"marine plywood” or equivalent material in large sheets arranged in an approved uniform
pattern. Joints in the facing shall coincide with architectural features or changes in direction of
the surface and shall be either vertical or horizontal unless otherwise directed by TRANSCO.

S-TR-CIVIL-CONCRETE (Rev.0-2018) Page 5 of 16

 CIVIL WORKS
Concrete and Reinforced Concrete

Applicable for super-structural work with exposed surfaces.

 Class F4 (rigid accurate)
This finish shall be used for formed concrete surfaces where accurate alignment and evenness of
surface are essential for prevention of the destructive effects of water action. The form-work
shall be strong and held rigidly and accurately to the prescribed alignment. Any form-work
material that will produce the required surface may be used.
Applicable for: exposed fire walls, projected columns, frames and beams on elevations.
 Class F5 (rough-faced)
This finish shall be used for structural surfaces where plaster or stucco is to be applied.
Rough-faced form boards shall be used.
Aluminium lining for form-work will not be permitted.
Applicable for super-structural work where plaster is to be applied or if a rough surfaces is
required.

2.3.3 Form-Work Removal

Removal of form-work shall be approved by TRANSCO at Site, and shall be effected in such a
manner as will ensure that no damage to the freshly cast concrete occurs. No form-work shall be
removed before the concrete has attained sufficient strength to carry the stress induced in the
concrete by such removal. If required, the Bidder/Contractor shall provide evidence of the same,
which is satisfactory to TRANSCO.
The Bidder/Contractor shall delay the removal of the forms if in the opinion of TRANSCO the
concrete has not gained sufficient strength. The cost of rectifying damage arising from the
premature removal of forms shall be at the Bidder’s/Contractor’s risk.
Unless BS provides more stringent requirements, following minimum removal periods are to be
observed:
Beams, walls, columns, beams (vertical faces) 24 hours
Soffits to slabs 7 days
Props to slabs, etc. 14 days
Soffits to beams, frames, etc. 14 days
Props under beams, frames, etc. 21 days

2.4 Reinforcement
For Reinforcement, reference shall be made to the below listed drawings, which are provided in
the Drawings Section.
Drawing No. Title

S-TR-CIVIL-CONCRETE (Rev.0-2018) Page 6 of 16

 CIVIL WORKS
Concrete and Reinforced Concrete

DWG TR CIV 06 01 Typical Stair Reinforcement

DWG TR CIV 06 02 Temperature Reinforcement
DWG TR CIV 06 03-1 Column Reinforcement (Sheet 1)
DWG TR CIV 06 03-2 Column Reinforcement (Sheet 2)
DWG TR CIV 06 04 Wall Reinforcement
DWG TR CIV 06 05 Typical Slab Reinforcement
DWG TR CIV 06 06 Reinforcement Arrangement Flat Slab Without Drop Panel
DWG TR CIV 06 07-1 Reinforcement of Continuous Beams, Elevation (Alternative 1)
DWG TR CIV 06 07-2 Reinforcement of Continuous Beams, Elevation (Alternative 2)
DWG TR CIV 06 08 Openings & Sleeves in Slab
DWG TR CIV 06 09 Slab on Grade

2.4.1 Material
Reinforcement is to be hot-rolled deformed high yield steel in accordance with DIN 488 DIN EN
ISO 15360 or BS 4449 – Grade 460, or higher. Before use, any matter liable to impair the bond
shall be removed from the steel, e.g., dirt, grease, organic matter, and rust. Particular care shall
be taken to ensure that the reinforcing bars are given the shape (including diameter of curvature),
length and position conforming to the reinforcement drawings.
Any reinforcement shall be so far cold deformable that it will stand the cold bending test, where
the space between the two limbs of the piece bent through 180° must be equal to twice the
diameter of the rod under test. No cracks shall occur on the tensioned side.
Reinforcing steels of group IIIa shall be weldable by the flash welding process to produce
welded joints, which pass the cold bending test.
Steel fabrics of group IVb shall be of steel whose elastic limit and tensile strength are guaranteed
by special cold working, however, steel fabrics shall not be welded or heat-treated in any other
way.
Fabric reinforcement shall be bent accurately to the required shapes before the fabric is laid in
position – all bending and cutting shall be done cold and no heating or welding is allowed. All
the fabric shall be lapped and tied together on both the longitudinal and transverse wires and all
lapping shall be sufficient for the steel to develop its full strength.
Pre-stressing reinforcement shall comply with BS 5896-1980 or DIN 10138 and DIN EN
ISO 15630.

2.4.2 Fabrication
All reinforcements shall be bent cold unless otherwise permitted by TRANSCO. Bar cutting and
bending equipment for coated reinforcement shall have padded supports and contact areas and

S-TR-CIVIL-CONCRETE (Rev.0-2018) Page 7 of 16

 CIVIL WORKS
Concrete and Reinforced Concrete

shall be fitted with nylon or plastic mandrels supplied by, or approved by, the coating factory
representative.

2.4.3 Site Installation and Handling

Reinforcement of all types shall be stored on Site in protected racks above ground in an
approved manner so as to avoid damage to the coating. Direct metal to coating contact should be
avoided wherever possible.
The number, size, form and positioning of bars shall be strictly in accordance with the drawings
and bending schedules or as directed by TRANSCO. Reinforcement shall be inspected/checked
after being fixed and no concrete shall be placed around the reinforcement until such
checking/inspection has taken place and concrete permission has been signed by TRANSCO.
Equipment for handling epoxy coated bars shall have padded contact areas. Bundles shall be
lifted with a strong-back or have multiple supports to prevent bar-to-bar abrasion from sags in
the bundle. Bars or bundles shall not be dragged or dropped. Any coating damage due to
handling, shipment and placing shall be repaired as described below.
All chairs, tie-wires or other devices used to connect, support, secure or fasten epoxy coated
reinforcement shall be made of, or coated with, a dielectric material such as nylon, epoxy or
plastic. All bundles shall be identified at the factory with durable tags to allow checking of
coating quality control at site. Reinforcement shall not be straightened or re-bent in a manner,
which may cause injury to the material. Bars with shapes not shown on the drawings shall not be
used.
All reinforcing bars shall be bent in accordance with the relevant standard. In particular, no
reinforcement shall be heated. All reinforcement shall be rigidly fixed in position to the concrete
cover specified by an approved means.
The Bidder/Contractor shall provide adequate scaffold boards or similar to ensure that the
coating is not damaged during fixing and the reinforcement is not displaced by being walked
upon during the placing of the concrete or other operations.
Prior to continuing the concreting at working joints, the Bidder/Contractor shall ensure that the
reinforcement is cleaned of all concrete from previous pours and any damage to the coating is
repaired. To avoid coating damage, coated reinforcement shall be cleaned immediately after
casting and before setting of concrete.
The reinforcement shall be fixed in a way that vibrators can be inserted at all necessary points.
The compressive and the tensile reinforcement (main reinforcement) shall be secured to the
transverse and distribution bars or stirrups by means of binding wire. If the structural loading is
predominantly static in character, welding may be used in lieu of these tied connections, in so far
as welding of the reinforcement is permitted.
The reinforcing bars shall be interconnected to form a rigid cage and shall be so secured in their
specified position by means of spacers which do not impair corrosion protection that they are not
displaced during the placing and compaction of the concrete.

S-TR-CIVIL-CONCRETE (Rev.0-2018) Page 8 of 16

 CIVIL WORKS
Concrete and Reinforced Concrete

The top reinforcement shall be secured against being pushed down by using steel chairs/supports
positioned between top and bottom layers of reinforcement. Steel supports shall be made of new
steel of similar type and quality of the main reinforcement.
Reinforcement bars shall normally not be connected to the earthing system. Separate earthing
mesh shall be provided instead. Earthing to be routed through piles must be isolated from the pile
reinforcement. The reinforcement for piles shall be without fusion bonded epoxy coating.
To receive good bonding and to avoid corrosion, plastic spacers shall be fixed between form-
work and reinforcement minimum four per m2. The Bar Bending Schedule shall be submitted
along with detailed shop drawings for information.

2.5 Cement
The type of cement to be used shall depend on the constructional circumstances and on the
prevailing local conditions. Portland cement, Type I, may be used at places not exposed to
chemical aggressiveness, whereas Portland cement, Type V, shall in general be used for all
concrete work in foundations and plinths and in concrete structures covered by soil.
Moderate sulphate resistant cement as per ASTM C 150, type 2, may be used only after
TRANSCO's explicit written approval to replace the type V cement.
Cement shall be of recent manufacture and shall be used within a period of 3 months from
production.
Total cementitious contents in the mix shall be limited to avoid excessive risk of thermal and
shrinkage cracking. It shall always be in the range of 350 – 400 kg/m3 unless otherwise approved
by TRANSCO. The proportioning of mixes for durability will be primarily controlled through
the specified limits on free W/C ratio. The W/C ratio shall always lie in the range of 0.36-0.45.
Appropriate use shall be made of approved admixtures to simultaneously meet the requirements
for W/C ratio and workability.
Before supplying cement to Site or receiving ready-mixed concrete, the Bidder/Contractor shall
submit to TRANSCO, the manufacturer’s statement of Specification and test certificate together
with date of manufacture of any cement to be used. TRANSCO reserves the right to take samples
and order any additional / re-tests in accordance with BS EN 196-7 : 1992, BS EN 196-6, BS
4450 and ASTMC 186.
In mix designs with an emphasis on durability, ground granulated blast furnace slag as per BS
6699 or EN 197 or microsilica may be incorporated in the mix. Proportions of slag shall
normally not exceed 60 %, those of microsilica shall not exceed 8%, for items thicker than 1.2m,
these proportions shall not exceed 10%.

2.6 Aggregates
Aggregates shall be crushed rock type and conform to the relevant applicable standard BS
882:1992. The combined aggregate shall be as coarse-grained and dense-graded as possible and
shall be according to the guidelines of BS 882. The maximum particle size shall be so chosen as
to be compatible with mixing, handling, placing and workability of the concrete.

S-TR-CIVIL-CONCRETE (Rev.0-2018) Page 9 of 16

 CIVIL WORKS
Concrete and Reinforced Concrete

For underwater concrete, proof shall be given that the mix is adequately cohesive and maintains
this property during placing by using under-water admixtures.
Aggregates shall - for all groups except the dune sand - be a product of crushed rock, with the
source and type being subject to TRANSCO´s approval. Only for exceptional cases and upon
TRANSCO´s specific written approval, aggregates of other origin may be used for certain parts
of the work.
Size of aggregate used in concrete: maximum aggregate size shall be 20mm, except for thick
elements (>900mm) where particular heat of hydration control is required. There, aggregate of
28mm max size may be used. For the required concrete of Grade 40 (C28 = 40 N/mm2), at least
one particle size fraction shall be in the 0-4 mm range.

2.7 Admixtures
No admixtures shall be used without approval of TRANSCO and unless the suitability of
admixtures must be proven in trial mixes in presence of TRANSCO.
Admixture containing chlorides shall not be used under any circumstance.
Manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions concerning overdosing of additives shall be
strictly observed.

2.8 Tests and Properties

2.8.1 Testing
Throughout the construction period the quality of concrete mixed at and/or delivered to Site has
to be controlled. Tests shall be carried out in the presence of TRANSCO or under the supervision
of an approved office for testing of such kind of works. The following minimum numbers of
tests shall be carried out:
a) Aggregates
Sampling of Aggregate: Sampling and testing of Aggregate shall be carried out in accordance
with BS 812 and BS 882. However, the Client reserves the right to call for additional tests
whenever felt necessary.
b) Cement
b1) For site mixed concrete if applicable and or approved by TRANSCO
 One setting test to vicat per car-load
 One boiling test per car-load.
b2) For ready mixed concrete
 Mill certificates of the cement used in the plant
 Chemical composition in line with DIN 1164 or BS 12.

S-TR-CIVIL-CONCRETE (Rev.0-2018) Page 10 of 16

 CIVIL WORKS
Concrete and Reinforced Concrete

c) Water
One chemical water analysis every 3 months of construction. First analysis before start of
foundation works.
d) Admixtures and Additives
Three (3) samples of each kind of admixture and additive before start of casting of the first load
bearing structural member.
e) Concrete delivered to Site
 One set of at least six (6) test cubes for every 100 m3 or every daily pour of concrete or as
directed by TRANSCO.
The compression strength tests shall be carried out after seven (7) days for the first two
cubes of each set, and after 28 days for the second two cubes of the set, and - if requested –
the last two cubes of each set may be tested in case of failure of a cube.
 Slump tests are to be executed for every truck load supplied during concreting and as per
TRANSCO's instructions, provided concreting is proceeding.
 Concrete temperature is to be recorded at the arrival of concrete at Site.
 Bimonthly or for every 750 m3 of concrete cast, the Bidder/Contractor shall prepare the
following for durability testing, which - after approval of TRANSCO – may be carried out
through the concrete supplier:
- Rapid test for chlorides
- Rapid test for sulphates
- A Trial panel, from which at 28 days 3 Nos. Cores, 75mm diameter and 75 mm long,
shall be taken for water absorption testing (to BS 1881)
- 3 Nos. blocks, 200 x 200 x 120 mm thick, for water penetration testing (to DIN
1048)
- 4 Nos. cubes, 150 mm, for rapid chloride permeability testing (to AASHTO T-277)
curing of samples shall be as close to the current Site practice as possible.
f) Reinforcement
The Bidder/Contractor shall provide copies of the manufacturer’s test certificates with each
consignment of reinforcement brought to Site. In addition and before the execution of works, and
for every 100 T in each shipment, two (2) samples of each bar size shall be tested as follows:
 Chemical composition to be tested to BS 4449
 Mechanical properties test including tensile properties, elongation, bend test and re-bent
test
 Cross sectional area and mass test
 For detailed curves, diagrams and tables, reference is made to DIN 1045 or the relevant
BS, both latest editions.

S-TR-CIVIL-CONCRETE (Rev.0-2018) Page 11 of 16

 CIVIL WORKS
Concrete and Reinforced Concrete

In case of failure of tests, retesting for steel shall be carried out as BS4449.

2.8.2 Concrete Quality Requirements

The following are the test requirements shall be met to prove the durability of the concrete:
 Slump: Piling concrete to be self levelling with a slump above 175 mm, all other concrete
generally not to exceed 100 mm:
Applicable Standard Concrete in Areas Classified According to
Test CIRIA Section 5, Table 5.1
a to c d & f* e **
Water permeability as per DIN 1048 25 mm 15 mm 10 mm
Water absorption as per BS 1881 < 2.5%
Chloride permeability AASHTO T-277 - 2500 C 1000 C
Rapid chloride to AASHTO T-277: Curing of samples shall be as close to the
permeability current site practice as possible

Notes:

* Water retaining structures and Basements in areas with high water table

** Marine structures and structures in areas with highly aggressive soil conditions, classified
as class 4 & 5 as per the BRE Digest 363.

 Aggregates/ Concrete contamination limits shall be as follows:

Chlorides Sulphates Reference
Coarse Aggregates < 0.03% < 0.4% CIRIA (% by
weight)
Fine Aggregates < 0.06% < 0.4% CIRIA (% by
weight)
RC with SRC < 0.20% < 4.0% CIRIA (% by
weight of Cement)
RC with OPC and ASTM type I < 0.30% < 4.0% CIRIA (% by
and II usually contain more than weight of Cement)
4% C3A.
Not Reinforced Concrete < 0.60% < 4.0% CIRIA (% by
weight of Cement)

S-TR-CIVIL-CONCRETE (Rev.0-2018) Page 12 of 16

 CIVIL WORKS
Concrete and Reinforced Concrete

2.8.3 Particular Requirements

This chapter covers all works and services, which shall be performed in connection with the
construction of concrete and reinforced concrete structures.
Special attention and care shall be taken to prevent buoyancy for any underground structures,
which might occur due to the ground water table.

2.8.4 Construction and Expansion Joints

For Construction and Expansion Joints, reference shall be made to the below listed drawings,
which are provided in the Drawings Section.
Drawing No. Title
DWG TR CIV 06 09 Slab on Grade

2.8.5 Construction Joints

The positions and treatment of construction joints shall either be shown on the drawings or be
agreed with TRANSCO in line with the applicable standards before concreting. Joints shall be
made across planes of minimum shear and away from planes of maximum bending moments.
Vertical construction joints shall be made against properly constructed stop boards firmly fixed
and holed where necessary to pass reinforcement.
The Bidder/Contractor shall take all necessary steps to ensure that the lines produced on the
exposed face of the work due to horizontal or vertical joints are perfectly straight and regular.
Slabs shall - wherever possible - be concreted at the same time as the beams of which they form
a part. If this is not possible, the junction shall be treated as a horizontal construction joint.
To ensure bond between old and new concrete at construction joints, surfaces of the cast (old)
concrete shall be cleaned of all defective concrete, latency, oil, grease, dirt, loose concrete, etc.
and shall properly be roughened by chipping, hammering or other techniques to expose the
aggregates and provide sufficient key for the two layers. Before casting the new concrete, the old
concrete surfaces shall be thoroughly wetted and saturated with water, commencing at least 12
hours prior to casting the new concrete.
Cast (old) concrete surfaces may further – after explicit approval of material and method of
application by TRANSCO - be treated with a bonding agent, applied as recommended by the
manufacturer.
Shear key joints shall be provided in vertical construction joints, the reinforcement of such key
joints shall be subject to approval by TRANSCO.
All construction joints in culverts, trenches, basements, etc., shall contain a PVC water bar as
specified and the reinforcement shall be arranged accordingly.

S-TR-CIVIL-CONCRETE (Rev.0-2018) Page 13 of 16

 CIVIL WORKS
Concrete and Reinforced Concrete

2.8.6 Expansion Joints

Expansion joints shall be located as determined during the structural design and marked in the
relevant drawings as per in CIRIA and Concrete Society’s –“Guide to the construction of
reinforced concrete in the Arabian Peninsular”. Suitable water stoppers must be installed and all
expansion joints shall be sealed with a durable sealing compound, and materials to achieve water
tight expansion joints shall be approved by TRANSCO.
After sealing the expansion joints, joints shall be protected by durable heavy duty covers (e.g.
powder coated metal covers, aluminium strips, etc.), approved by TRANSCO. Covers shall be
applied at external elevations, internal floor joints, walls, etc and colour to match with respective
approved finish. The width of expansion joint shall be as per recommendation of equipment
manufacturer to be in-housed in that structure and shall be determined during the structural
design.

2.8.7 Joint Filler Board

For joints designed to operate as a separation and expansion/settlement joint in concrete or block
structures, fibre-boards, manufactured from high-grade fibres which are bitumen impregnated
and compounded into compressible non-extruding boards, shall be used. The physical properties
of the board shall conform with the requirements of US Federal Specification HH-F, 341a Type
I, and Class A, thickness of board: min. 25 mm.

2.9 Special Requirements for Safety against Cracking

Because of the purpose for which reinforced concrete components are used, the crack width has
to be limited as specified in BS 8110 and BS 8007. In this context, it shall be necessary to
consider restraint stresses, e.g., due to uniform and non-uniform temperature variations and
shrinkage. Additionally, the depth of the underground water table must be considered as well.
Crack width design shall be considered if the depth of the Highest Ground Water table
(Considering Seasonal Fluctuation) below the foundation level is 2.5 m or less. In case
underground water doesn’t exist, no need to design for crack width.
The design assumptions, with respect to temperature variations and shrinkage, adopted in
calculating the restraint stresses, shall correspond to the actual construction procedures, these and
the assumptions shall be inter-adjusted. Pre-stressing shall be considered in critical cases where
the reduction of cracking cannot be ensured by more economical means.
To prevent / reduce shrinkage cracking the Bidder/Contractor may propose the use of
polypropylene fibres to substitute / supplement the reinforcement for TRANSCO’s approval.

3 GENERAL FOR PRE-CAST CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION

In addition to the previously given guidelines for concrete and reinforced concrete works, the
Bidder/Contractor shall furnish and install all pre-cast concrete units in accordance with this
clause, where shown on the drawings or directed by TRANSCO.
The maximum size of the coarse aggregates for pre-cast concrete units shall be 20 mm.

S-TR-CIVIL-CONCRETE (Rev.0-2018) Page 14 of 16

 CIVIL WORKS
Concrete and Reinforced Concrete

Pre-cast concrete units shall be cast in individual forms and may be cured in the pre-cast yard by
steam curing for at least four (4) days or continuous water curing for at least 7 days, followed by
application of an approved curing membrane or other approved methods.
For pre-cast concrete elements and units where the use of immersion type vibrators is not
applicable, the Bidder/Contractor shall consolidate such units on vibrating tables or by any other
method approved by TRANSCO.
Pre-cast concrete units shall not be branded or marked in any position, which can be seen, in the
finished work or against which any concrete is to be placed.
Pre-cast concrete units may be supplied by a Manufacturer or may be manufactured by the
Bidder/Contractor at a location as approved by TRANSCO.
During transportation and storage, pre-cast panels shall be supported as in their final positions.
Other methods of support will not be permitted. The pre-cast members shall be adequately
braced and supported during erection to ensure proper alignment and safety. Such bracing or
support shall be maintained until adequate permanent connections have been made.
The dimensions of the finished pre-cast units shall be within the following limits at the time of
placement in the structure:
Overall dimensions of member 3.0 mm
Cross-sectional dimensions:
 Sections less than 75 mm 1.5 mm
 Sections over 75 mm and less than 300 mm 3.0 mm
 Sections over 300 mm 5.0 mm
 Deviation from straight line in long sections less than 5 mm per 6 m
 Deviation from camber 1.5 mm per 3 m of span

 Maximum difference in level between adjacent span/1000 or 10mm,

units in erected position which ever is minimum

No pre-cast units shall be considered for diaphragm action horizontal pre-cast elements. Normal
weight concrete topping is to be used for such behaviour.
Bond/Anchorage test must be performed in the Factory on at least 2 samples of each thickness of
Hollow Core Slabs.
Full scale load tests shall be carried out on each panel of typical design in accordance with ACI
318M-08/318RM-08. The purpose of such load tests is to determine the behaviour of the slabs
under working conditions. Acceptance criteria shall be as follows:
Applied test load T shall be equal to 0.85 (1.4 D + 1.7 L). (D = dead load, L = live load under
consideration of reductions permitted in the general design). Loads shall be applied in at least
four (4) increments and the final load shall be kept for at least 24 hours.

S-TR-CIVIL-CONCRETE (Rev.0-2018) Page 15 of 16

 CIVIL WORKS
Concrete and Reinforced Concrete

The test load shall be removed immediately after reading of the initial deflection and the final
reading shall be taken 24 hours after removal of the test load.
If visual evidence of failure, e.g. cracking, spaling, excessive deflection, etc., appears, the tested
member shall be considered to have failed the test. If no visual indications of failure occur,
following shall be the limiting criteria to define acceptable behaviour:
 Maximum deflection of beams, floor or roof shall be less than l2 / 20,000 h. (l = clear span
and h = thickness)
 If the above is exceeded, the deflection recovery within 24 hours after removal of the test
load shall be at least 75% of the maximum deflection for non-pre-stressed concrete or 80%
for pre-stressed concrete
 For cantilevers, l shall taken as twice the distance from cantilever support to end.
Deflection shall be adjusted for support movements.
Retesting:
If nonprestressed concrete fails to show the required 75% recovery of deflection, may be re-
tested not earlier than 72 hours after first test load removal. The re-tested portion of the structure
may be considered satisfactory if it shows no visible sign of failure, and the deflection recovery
caused by the second test load is at least 80% of the maximum deflection in the second test.
Pre-stressed concrete construction shall not be re-tested.

S-TR-CIVIL-CONCRETE (Rev.0-2018) Page 16 of 16

 STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRIC WORKS

CIVIL WORKS

( SPECIFICATION )

SECURITY FENCING

TRANSCO STANDARD : S-TR-CIVIL-FENCE (REV.0-2009)

S-TR-CIVIL-FENCE (Rev.0-2009) Page 1 of 5

 CIVIL WORKS
Security Fencing

CONTENTS

1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................... 3
2 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ...................................................................................... 3
2.1 General Guideline.............................................................................................................. 3
2.2 Steel Fencing Posts............................................................................................................ 3
2.3 Wire-Mesh......................................................................................................................... 4
2.4 Barbed Wire ...................................................................................................................... 4
2.5 Gates.................................................................................................................................. 4

S-TR-CIVIL-FENCE (Rev.0-2009) Page 2 of 5

 CIVIL WORKS
Security Fencing

SECURITY FENCING

1 GENERAL
This part of the Specification shall cover all items related to security and other fence installation
works for the Project. Works shall include all items required for the tendered Project, as well as
all auxiliary works.
All works shall further be carried out in full compliance with all local rules and regulations and
the Specification shall further be read, if applicable for the Project.
For applicable technical standards, tests, reference shall be made to:
¾ S-TR-CIVIL-GEN - General Requirements
(Applicable Technical Standards, Tests, etc.)

2 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
For Chain Link Fence Details, reference shall be made to the below listed drawings, which are
provided in the Civil Drawings Section.
Drawing No. Title
DWG TR CIV 13 01 Chain Link Fence Details

2.1 General Guideline

All fence posts and struts shall be anchored in rigid concrete foundations (concrete grade C 40),
and reaching at least 80 cm below and 10 cm above ground level. The depth of foundations shall
be statically computed by the Bidder/Contractor and shall be approved by TRANSCO. In the
vicinity of gates, adequate provisions to fix the fences shall be provided. Gate foundations shall
also be of reinforced concrete.
Fencing mesh of external perimeter and security fences shall have at least 20 cm encasement into
a continuous, reinforced concrete ground beam of a minimum width of 20 cm.
If required fencing, gates, doors, etc., have to be properly connected to an earthing/ grounding
system.
The Bidder/Contractor shall supply references for the plastic coating to be used on the
galvanised wire demonstrating suitability and longevity in the U.A.E.’s harsh climatic
environment. In addition, the Bidder/Contractor shall furnish a guarantee bond on all fencing
materials, covering a period of ten years.

2.2 Steel Fencing Posts

The posts for fencing shall be of high grade steel of tubular or conical triangular hollow sections
of the required size and shape. The posts shall be hot dip galvanised internally and externally.

S-TR-CIVIL-FENCE (Rev.0-2009) Page 3 of 5

 CIVIL WORKS
Security Fencing

Before hot-dip galvanising of the posts, strong T-shaped flanges to receive fixing brackets shall
be welded.
Corner posts shall be equipped with corner turnbuckles for bracing wires and joint clamps for
horizontal bracing rails and reverse bracing. All components shall be plastic-coated to increase
the corrosion protection properties.
Application : Fences for gantry areas and outdoor capacitor banks.
Height of internal fence shall be 2.60m.

2.3 Wire-Mesh
Chain link wire-mesh shall be of minimum 4 mm diameter wires, opening size of not more than
50 x 50 mm. Mesh shall be hot-dip galvanised and provided with plastic coating, color to the
discretion of TRANSCO.
The wire mesh shall be new and unused, and in single length between the posts. The plastic
coating shall be thick and elastic, durable and should be able to withstand a temperature up to
+ 90°C.
Alternative fence systems utilising welded mesh may be proposed for approval.

2.4 Barbed Wire

The barbed wire shall be of stainless steel with two strands twisted and four pinned barbs. The
strands of the barbed wire shall be of required gauge three. Four rows shall be provided above
the wire-mesh or as instructed by TRANSCO.
In case of flat tape, the tape shall be of stainless steel with a minimum thickness of 0.6 mm and
with a bond length of not less than 20 mm.

2.5 Gates
For Main Gate Details, reference shall be made to the below listed drawings, which are provided
in the Civil Drawings Section.
Drawing No. Title
DWG TR CIV 13 02 01 Main Gate Details Sheet 1/4
DWG TR CIV 13 02 02 Main Gate Details Sheet 2/4
DWG TR CIV 13 02 03 Main Gate Details Sheet 3/4
DWG TR CIV 13 02 04 Main Gate Details Sheet 4/4

Entrance Gates (hinged) shall be provided as outlined under Section “Metal Works”.
Gates for areas fenced with chain link fence shall be made of frames from trapezoidal or triangle
hollow steel sections according to the fence design may be proposed. These gates shall be fitted

S-TR-CIVIL-FENCE (Rev.0-2009) Page 4 of 5

 CIVIL WORKS
Security Fencing

with adjustable hinges and bronze bushes with greasing points. The in-fill of such gates may be
of chain link wire mesh or welded mesh as used for the fence.
Gates shall be lockable and the drop-bolts of inactive leafs shall be locked in the closed position
by the active gate to prevent opening.
The corrosion protection shall be provided by hot dip galvanising and subsequent plastic coating
of the gates.

S-TR-CIVIL-FENCE (Rev.0-2009) Page 5 of 5

 CIVIL WORKS
General Requirements
(Applicable Technical Standards, Tests etc.)

STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRIC WORKS

CIVIL WORKS

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
(Applicable Technical Standards, Tests etc.)

TRANSCO STANDARD : S-TR-CIVIL-GEN (REV.0-2009)

S-TR-CIVIL-GEN (Rev.0-2009) Page 1 of 9

 CIVIL WORKS
General Requirements
(Applicable Technical Standards, Tests etc.)

CONTENTS

1 CIVIL WORKS ............................................................................................................... 3

1.1 General .............................................................................................................................. 3
1.2 Associated Specifications.................................................................................................. 5
1.3 Fundamental Design Data ................................................................................................. 5
2 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS ............................................................... 6
2.1 Standards for Soil Investigations....................................................................................... 6
2.2 Standards for Earthworks .................................................................................................. 6
2.3 Standards for Piling Works .............................................................................................. 6
2.4 Standards for Reinforced Concrete Works........................................................................ 7
2.5 Standards for Structural Steel Works ................................................................................ 7
2.6 Standards for Metal Works................................................................................................ 8
2.7 Standards for Ceramic Tiling Works................................................................................. 8
2.8 Standards for Masonry Works........................................................................................... 8
2.9 Alternative Codes and Standards ...................................................................................... 9
2.10 Precedence of Codes and Standards .................................................................................. 9
3 APPLICABLE TESTS.................................................................................................... 9

S-TR-CIVIL-GEN (Rev.0-2009) Page 2 of 9

 CIVIL WORKS
General Requirements
(Applicable Technical Standards, Tests etc.)

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
(Applicable Technical Standards, Tests, etc.)

1 CIVIL WORKS

1.1 General
This part of the specification shall cover
¾ Design
¾ Construction
¾ Testing and
¾ Commissioning

of all Civil Works related to the tendered Project.

For installations and supply items related to Civil Works, such as
¾ Lighting System

This part of the specification shall cover in addition:

¾ Manufacturing
¾ Factory Testing
¾ Marking and Packing
¾ Shipping
¾ Transportation to Site
¾ Installation
¾ Site Testing and Commissioning

Civil Works and Equipment specified in the following Specifications:

• CIVIL WORKS
¾ DWG TR CIV 00 01 - General Notes
¾ S-TR-CIVIL-SITE - Site Installation
¾ S-TR-CIVIL-SOIL - Soil Investigation
¾ S-TR-CIVIL-WORK - Civil Construction Works
¾ S-TR-CIVIL-BUILD - Substation and Buildings

S-TR-CIVIL-GEN (Rev.0-2009) Page 3 of 9

 CIVIL WORKS
General Requirements
(Applicable Technical Standards, Tests etc.)

¾ S-TR-CIVIL-MAS - Masonry
¾ S-TR-CIVIL-CONCRETE - Concrete and Reinforced Concrete
¾ S-TR-CIVIL-STEEL - Structural Steel Work
¾ S-TR-CIVIL-METAL - Metal Work
¾ S-TR-CIVIL-DRAIN - Drainage Work
¾ S-TR-CIVIL-SAN - Plumbing and Sanitary Installation
¾ S-TR-CIVIL-SURF - Surface Protection
¾ S-TR-CIVIL-ROAD - Roads and Pavements
¾ S-TR-CIVIL-FENCE - Security Fencing
¾ S-TR-CIVIL-FINISH - Finishing Schedule
¾ S-TR-CIVIL-LIGHT - Lighting and other Electrical Installations in Substations
¾ S-TR-CIVIL-CAB - Civil Works for Underground Cables
¾ S-TR-CIVIL-OHL - Civil Works for Overhead Transmission/ Distribution
Lines
• EARTHING / GROUNDING SYSTEMS
¾ S-TR-EARTH- - General Requirements (Applicable Technical Standards,
LIGHTNING-GEN Tests etc.)
¾ S-TR-EARTH-GROUND - Earthing / Grounding Systems
¾ S-TR-LIGHTNING - Lightning Protection System
• FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEMS
¾ S-TR-FIF - Fire Protection System
• ELECTROMECHANICAL SERVICES
¾ S-TR-ELMS-GEN - General Requirements (Applicable Technical Standards,
Tests etc.)
¾ S-TR-ELMS-LIFT - Lifts (Elevators)
¾ S-TR-ELMS-CRANE - Gantry Crane
¾ S-TR-ELMS- - Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems
HVAC+VENT

Above specifications shall cover all civil works required to form a completely safe and reliably
designed system as tendered and in accordance with the technical description of the project.

S-TR-CIVIL-GEN (Rev.0-2009) Page 4 of 9

 CIVIL WORKS
General Requirements
(Applicable Technical Standards, Tests etc.)

For supply items standard designs and models from a manufacturing program of one supplier are
preferred, provided they meet the requirements of this Specification, and serve the intended
purpose.
If substantial improvements of any of the specified technical requirements, which are seen by the
Bidder/Contractor to provide technical or economical advantages to TRANSCO, are desired to
be presented in the Bid, the improvement may be proposed as an alternative in addition to the
specified design. However, it is not mandatory that the alternative design is to be accepted, but
shall be subject to the decision of TRANSCO upon evaluation of the same. The difference in
price shall be clearly stated in amount/percentage/unit.
It is not the intent to specify completely herein all the details of design and manufacturing of the
substation lighting system. It may be noted that norms specified are the bare minimum that is
required. The substation lighting system shall conform in all respects to high standards of
engineering design and workmanship and should be capable of performing continuous
commercial operation within the parameters guaranteed by the Bidder/Contractor in a manner
acceptable to TRANSCO, who will interpret the meanings of drawings and specifications and
shall have power to reject any material, which in his judgement is not in accordance with the
specifications and the guaranteed parameters.

All material and equipment to be used and/or supplied under these Specifications shall be new
and of the latest proven “state-of-the art” technology. Prototype equipment shall not be accepted.

1.2 Associated Specifications

Details of equipment associated with the a.m. specifications are specified in the following parts
of the Standard Technical Specification:
¾ S-TR-FIF - Fire Protection System
¾ S-TR-CORR - Corrosion Protection

1.3 Fundamental Design Data

The fundamental design data are specified in the following part of the Standard Technical
Specification.
¾ S-TR-GEN-GDF - General Conditions
¾ S-TR-GEN-STC - Special Technical Requirements
¾ S-TR-GEN-SFL - System Characteristics
¾ S-TR-GEN-EDF - Electrical Design Fundamentals
¾ S-TR-GEN-CDF - Civil Design Fundamentals
¾ S-TR-GEN-ID - Components Marking
¾ S-TR-GEN-SQA - Safety and Quality

S-TR-CIVIL-GEN (Rev.0-2009) Page 5 of 9

 CIVIL WORKS
General Requirements
(Applicable Technical Standards, Tests etc.)

2 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS

The equipment to be provided under this Specification shall be manufactured under quality
assurance system conforming to the latest revision of ISO standards or equivalent National
Standard.
Reference shall be made to:
¾ S-TR-GEN-GDF - General Requirements - General Conditions

The latest Revision or Edition of the following Standards shall be applicable

2.1 Standards for Soil Investigations

DIN 4020 - Geotechnical Investigations
DIN 4021 - Soil
DIN 4023 - Borehole Logging
DIN 4094 - Soil, Exploration by Penetration
BS 5930 - Code Of Practice For Site Investigations
BS 1377 - Test Methods for Soils for Civil Eng. purposes
IEEE Std 441-1981 - Guide for Soil Thermal Resistivity Measurements

2.2 Standards for Earthworks

DIN 18300 - General Technical Specifications for Building Works, Earth
Works
DIN 1054 - Subsoil; Permissible Loading of Subsoil
DIN 1055 - Design Loads for Buildings
DIN 4017 - Subsoil, Shear Failure Calculations
DIN 4018 - Subsoil, Bearing Pressure Calculations
DIN 4019 - Subsoil, Analysis of Settlements
DIN 4084 - Subsoil, Calculation of Terrain Rupture and Slope Rupture

2.3 Standards for Piling Works

DIN EN 1536 - Bored Piles
DIN 4026 - Driven Piles
DIN EN 1054 - Subsoil, Permissible Loading of Su

S-TR-CIVIL-GEN (Rev.0-2009) Page 6 of 9

 CIVIL WORKS
General Requirements
(Applicable Technical Standards, Tests etc.)

DIN 1055 - Design Loads for Buildings

BS 8004 - Code of Practice For Foundations
BS 8110 - Structural Use of Concrete
SIA 192.10 - Bored Piles

2.4 Standards for Reinforced Concrete Works

DIN 1045 - Concrete
DIN 488 - Reinforcing Steel
DIN EN 15630 - Reinforcement, Test Methods
ISO
DIN 1048 - Testing of Concrete
DIN 4102 - Fire Rating of Building Materials
DIN 4226 - Aggregates for Concrete
BS 8110 - Structural Use of Concrete
BS 4449 - Specification For Carbon Steel Bars For The Reinforcement
For Concrete
CIRIA Guide to the construction of reinforced concrete in the Arabian Peninsular
DIN 1164 - Cement
DIN EN 196 - Methods of Testing Cement
BS 882 - Specification for aggregates from natural sources for concrete
ASTM C 150 - Specification for Portland Cement
ASTM A775/775M - Epoxy Coated Reinforcement
BS 5896 - Pre-stressing reinforcement

2.5 Standards for Structural Steel Works

EUROCODE 3 - Design of Steel Structures”
(DIN V ENV 1993-1-1, and 1993-1-2)
EUROCODE 4 - Design of Composite Steel and Concrete Structures”
(DIN V ENV 1994-1-1 and 1994-1-2.)
DIN 18800 - Structural Steel Work, Design and Construction
DIN 18806 - Composite Steel and Concrete Structures
DIN 18807 - Trapezoidal Sheeting in Buildings

S-TR-CIVIL-GEN (Rev.0-2009) Page 7 of 9

 CIVIL WORKS
General Requirements
(Applicable Technical Standards, Tests etc.)

DIN 18808 - Steel Structures (made from hollow sections)

DIN EN 10027-1 - Designation System For Steels
DIN EN 10025 - Hot Rolled Unalloyed Structural Steel Products

2.6 Standards for Metal Works

DIN 17440 - Stainless Steel
DIN 18251 - Locks, Mortice Locks
DIN 18255 - Building Hardware, Doors, Handles, Plates, Roses, etc.
DIN EN 1303 - Cylinder for Locks
DIN EN 10088 - Stainless Steel
DIN EN 10020 - Definition and Classification of Grades of Steel
BS 1400 - Specification For Copper Alloy Ingots And Copper Alloy And
High Conductivity Copper Castings
BS 1473 - Specification For Wrought Aluminium And Aluminium
ALLOYS For General Engineering Purposes

2.7 Standards for Ceramic Tiling Works

DIN EN 176 - Dust Pressed Ceramic (vitrified) Tiles
DIN EN 159 - Dust Pressed Ceramic (Earthenware) Tiles

2.8 Standards for Masonry Works

DIN 1053 - Masonry –Design and Construction
BS 405 - Specification for uncoated expanded metal carbon steel sheets
for general purposes
BS 743 - Specification for materials for damp proof courses
BS 1243 - Specification for metal ties for cavity wall construction
BS 4254 - Specification for two-part polysuphide-based sealants
BS 4551 - Methods of testing Mortars, Screeds and Plasters
BS 5628 - Method of Code of Practice for use of masonry
BS 6073 - Precast concrete masonry units
BS 882 - Specification for aggregates from natural sources for concrete

S-TR-CIVIL-GEN (Rev.0-2009) Page 8 of 9

 CIVIL WORKS
General Requirements
(Applicable Technical Standards, Tests etc.)

2.9 Alternative Codes and Standards

The Bidder/Contractor may propose alternative Codes and Standards provided he is able to prove
that this will give equivalent or better results as the referenced Codes and Standards.
Acceptability of alternative Codes or Standard is at the discretion of TRANSCO.

2.10 Precedence of Codes and Standards

The following order of precedence shall be applied in case of discrepancies between these
Specifications, any of the applicable or alternative Codes and Standards:
• These Specifications
• Applicable Codes and Standards
• Acceptable Alternative Codes and Standards.
However, at least the minimum requirement of the most stringent demands shall always be met.
The Bidder/Contractor shall note that compliance of the manufacturer with the provision of these
specifications does not relieve him from his responsibility to provide equipment and accessories
of proper design, and suited to meet the operating guarantees at the specified service conditions.

3 APPLICABLE TESTS
Details of Tests are specified in Standard Technical Specification, Part:
APPROVAL OF DATA AND DRAWINGS
The following information and data must be submitted to TRANSCO for approval prior to
manufacturing of the equipment:
• Vendor(s) details / reference list
• Completely filled in data sheets
• Testing schedule
• Documentation formats and quantities.
documents must be submitted to TRANSCO:
• Bill of equipment showing complete re-ordering information for all replaceable parts
• Installation, operation and maintenance instructions including hardware / software.

S-TR-CIVIL-GEN (Rev.0-2009) Page 9 of 9

 STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRIC WORKS

CIVIL WORKS
( SPECIFICATION )

CIVIL WORKS FOR OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION/ DISTRIBUTION LINES

TRANSCO STANDARD : S-TR-CIVIL-OHL (REV.0-2018)

S-TR-CIVIL-OHL (Rev.0-2018) Page 1 of 33

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Works for Overhead Transmission /Distribution Lines

CONTENTS

1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................... 3
2 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ...................................................................................... 3
2.1 Soil Investigation............................................................................................................... 3
2.1.1 Execution of Borings and In-Situ Tests (SPT) .................................................................. 4
2.1.2 Bore Logs .......................................................................................................................... 6
2.1.3 Laboratory Tests ................................................................................................................ 6
2.1.4 Reports .............................................................................................................................. 7
2.1.5 Change of Investigation Program ...................................................................................... 8
2.2 Foundations ....................................................................................................................... 8
2.2.1 General .............................................................................................................................. 8
2.2.2 Foundation Types .............................................................................................................. 9
2.2.3 Soil Characteristics .......................................................................................................... 10
2.2.4 Protection of Tower Foundations .................................................................................... 10
2.2.5 Caps ................................................................................................................................. 12
2.3 Gantries ........................................................................................................................... 13
2.4 Access.............................................................................................................................. 13
2.5 Design of Foundations..................................................................................................... 16
2.5.1 Pile Foundation................................................................................................................ 16
2.5.2 Pad and Chimney Foundation ......................................................................................... 17
2.5.3 Rock Anchor Foundation: ............................................................................................... 18
2.6 Erection of Foundations .................................................................................................. 19
2.6.1 General ............................................................................................................................ 19
2.6.2 Earth and Rockwork ........................................................................................................ 20
2.6.3 Concrete Work ................................................................................................................ 21
2.6.4 Bored Pile Foundations ................................................................................................... 28
2.6.5 Foundation Load Tests .................................................................................................... 29
2.6.6 Additional Civil Work ..................................................................................................... 32
2.6.7 Sign Boards for Road Crossings...................................................................................... 32
2.7 Factors of Safety.............................................................................................................. 33

S-TR-CIVIL-OHL (Rev.0-2018) Page 2 of 33

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Works for Overhead Transmission /Distribution Lines

CIVIL WORKS FOR OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION / DISTRIBUTION LINES

1 GENERAL
This part of the Specification shall cover all items related to civil works within overhead and
overhead transmission line projects.
Works shall include, but not be limited to the following: geo-technical investigations, soil
resistivity measurements, selecting, design, setting out, installation and testing of all required
types of tower foundations for the different types tower types and location conditions. Provision
of tower platforms and/or stabilising of tower locations, access roads and provision of revetment
protection as/and where required.
For applicable technical standards, tests, reference shall be made to:
 S-TR-CIVIL-GEN - General Requirements
(Applicable Technical Standards, Tests, etc.)

2 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

2.1 Soil Investigation

The soil conditions at site shall be investigated by the Bidder/Contractor prior to determining the
type of foundations for the transmission line. Soil investigations are to be performed in
accordance with DIN 4020, DIN 4021 or BS-5930 and BS-1377. Application of alternative
standards shall be subject to TRANSCO’s approval prior to the performance of the site and
laboratory tests.
Soil investigations shall be carried out at an early stage of the project to determine the ground
conditions at the different tower locations. Based on these findings, the Bidder/Contractor shall
propose his assumptions for the foundation design for each location selected to TRANSCO for
approval.
For lines above 33 kV at all locations of transmission line towers (including gantries) and for
lines of 33 kV at every second suspension tower location and at every tension tower location the
following shall be carried out:
 Bore holes down to an average of 20 m
 Test pits at selected locations
 Plate load tests (at selected locations if applicable)
 Cone Penetration Tests (at selected locations and if requested/approved by TRANSCO)
 Compaction tests after filling, backfilling and compaction
 Soil resistivity measurements

S-TR-CIVIL-OHL (Rev.0-2018) Page 3 of 33

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Works for Overhead Transmission /Distribution Lines

 If the initial groundwater level is recorded higher than 4 m below surface, weekly readings
of the groundwater table up to the casting of foundations to monitor fluctuations of
groundwater.

For pole lines of 33 kV and below, initially only dead-end towers, angle towers and tension
towers and at every third suspension tower location shall be investigated, provided that the
resulting spacing between boreholes does not exceed 200 m. At locations where boreholes are
not being carried out, results of adjacent boreholes may be interpolated. If severe variations of
the ground conditions between boreholes are recorded, additional interim locations shall be
investigated.

2.1.1 Execution of Borings and In-Situ Tests (SPT)

2.1.1.1 Borings
The methods of boring shall enable undisturbed sampling as well as rotary coring. The minimum
borehole diameter for undisturbed sampling shall be 100mm. The equipment shall allow the
execution of Standard Penetration Tests and undisturbed sampling, for instance by using piston
sampler.
For the drilling works in cohesive and/or hard soils, a double tube core barrel of at least 3"
(7.5 cm) inside diameter shall be used exclusively, provided that this kind of boring can be
continued to the final bottom of the borehole in question. A 95 % core recovery is required.
Beyond this, the Bidder/Contractor may choose for his own convenience the type of equipment
and accessories to be used at each individual borehole and depth, provided that in TRANSCO's
opinion, the equipment chosen is suitable for the drilling. The Bidder/Contractor may also
choose the initial and intermediate diameters of each borehole for his own convenience, provided
that he will secure the aforementioned minimum acceptable size of core.
Adequate casing has to be used to ensure the stability of the borehole. The Bidder/Contractor
will not be entitled to any compensation or additional payment for casing.
The method of drilling, casing and flushing shall be described in the offer. Bentonite shall be
added to the drilling fluid only after the explicit permission of TRANSCO.
It is to be emphasised that the Bidder/Contractor shall supply an equipment to take undisturbed
samples from cohesive and non-cohesive soils for laboratory tests, according to international
standards. The samples shall be treated in an adequate manner to avoid disturbances and drying
out.
All boreholes shall after completion of the investigation be refilled with sand and not left open.

2.1.1.2 Sampling
All soils sampled by SPT, undisturbed sampling or core barrel have to be properly stored. Non-
cohesive soils have to be kept in water-tight boxes or bags. Borehole number and depth of
sample shall be written on the cover of the bags and boxes, and the cores must be placed in the
order as taken. The corresponding depth of the material shall continuously be written on the

S-TR-CIVIL-OHL (Rev.0-2018) Page 4 of 33

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Works for Overhead Transmission /Distribution Lines

partition walls of the boxes. Undisturbed samples shall be of 100mm dia and 450mm length.
Samples shall be collected in such a manner that the structure of the soil and its moisture content
are not changed.
The borders between different strata, and the sections of core boxes shall be fixed with thin
boards, and marked with the depth. Core boxes shall be designed for approximately 7 metre of
continuous soil samples. Before shifting the soil samples to the laboratory, the boxes shall be
stored accessible at any time for TRANSCO.
Ground-water and disturbed soil samples taken for the chemical analysis shall be kept in
watertight, durable plastic jars.
Color print photographs shall be taken of all cores packed in the core boxes, suitably labelled.
Negatives and six sets of postcard size prints shall be provided.

2.1.1.3 In Situ Testing

2.1.1.3.1 Standard Penetration Tests
In non-cohesive soils, Standard Penetration Tests (SPT’s) shall be performed from the cleaned
bottom of the boreholes down to 45 cm below. Standard penetration tests shall be carried at 1.0
m intervals and at every change in strata. The number of blows required to drive the sound each
15 cm into the soil has to be counted and kept in the bore log. Standard Penetration Test shall be
as described in BS 1377 Test 19.
The relative strength of cemented materials shall be tested with the Standard Penetration or
Dynamic Cone Tool, where core recovery is poor (less than 10%) or as directed by the Owner's
representative. The number of blows for each 75 millimetre penetration to a total penetration of
450 millimetres penetration shall be recorded or the test stopped at a total of 80 blows and the
penetration recorded.

2.1.1.3.2 Test Pits

The Bidder/Contractor shall excavate trial pits as and where directed by TRANSCO of an area of
approximately 5 m2 and a depth not exceeding 4 m. The Bidder/Contractor shall carry out plate
bearing tests in accordance with BS 5930 and BS 1377, using plate bearing pressures of 100,
150, 200 and 300 kN/m2. Full records of load, settlement and time shall be kept. The
Bidder/Contractor may further be requested to carry out sand replacement tests to BS 1377.
All protection of the pits shall be provided by the Bidder/Contractor to prevent accidents. After
the completion of the investigations, the Bidder/Contractor shall refill the pits by suitable
material (concrete or gravel) as directed by TRANSCO.

2.1.1.3.3 Cone Penetration Tests (CPT)

The Bidder/Contractor shall supply all required equipment for the "Dutch Static Cone
Penetration Test" for the separate determination of cone resistance and friction. The type of
equipment quoted for shall be described in the offer.
The cone shall have a diameter of 3.6 cm (= 10 cm2) and a peak angle of 60° and the maximum
load to be applied either by anchors or by dead weight shall be limited to approximately 15 tons.

S-TR-CIVIL-OHL (Rev.0-2018) Page 5 of 33

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Works for Overhead Transmission /Distribution Lines

In case cemented layers occur into which the cone cannot penetrate, the Bidder/Contractor shall
pre-bore through the hard soil before the cone test is continued. However, this procedure shall
only be performed after explicit instruction of TRANSCO at site.
The Bidder/Contractor shall deliver copies of the original sounding records as well as the
elaborated cone test diagrams to TRANSCO.
In areas where access roads are not available and which are not accessible for the Dutch Cone
Machine another type of cone penetration tests may be performed after TRANSCO’s approval.
The equipment shall be light, transportable with four-wheel drive vehicle or by hand. The cone
shall be driven by a hammer, in accordance with one of the International Standards.

2.1.2 Bore Logs

Detailed bore logs/field books must be kept for all borings. They shall include all pertinent data
and results and all observations, measurements or tests as directed by TRANSCO. The bore
logs/field books have to be submitted within 3 days after completion of each borehole.
Colored photographs shall be taken from all box samples and included in the final report.

2.1.3 Laboratory Tests

The Bidder/Contractor shall order Laboratory Tests to determine the necessary soil mechanic
parameters for the foundation design of towers and masts. The kind and number of tests to be
proposed by the Bidder/Contractor depending on the encountered soils and in view of his
foundation design TRANSCO and the results of the borings. The laboratory programme shall be
provided at least 3 days before testing, clearly stating time and location for the testing.

2.1.3.1 Classification Tests

 Particle size distribution by sieve and/or hydrometer analysis
 Specific gravity of soil grains
 Bulk density and dry density determination
 Relative density determination for granular soils
 Water content determination
 Atterberg limit tests.

2.1.3.2 Chemical Test

 Determination of chloride content in soil
 PH value in soil
 Total and water soluble sulphate content in soil
 Carbonate content in soil
 Organic matter in soil

S-TR-CIVIL-OHL (Rev.0-2018) Page 6 of 33

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Works for Overhead Transmission /Distribution Lines

 Sulphate content of ground water

 Chloride content of ground
 PH value of ground water.

2.1.3.3 Triaxial Tests on Soil

 Unconsolidated undrained tests
 Consolidated un-drained tests with pore pressure measurement
 Multi-state consolidated un-drained tests with pore pressure measurement
 Consolidated drained tests.

2.1.3.4 Direct Shear Tests on Soil

 Consolidated drained tests
 Consolidated constant volume shear tests.

2.1.3.5 Strength tests on rock or cemented material cores

 Point load tests
 Unconfined compression tests.

2.1.3.6 Compressibility (Consolidation) Tests

The tests are to be carried out in conformity with international standards ASTM, BS and/or DIN
by a well experienced Institute to be named by the Bidder/Contractor and approved by
TRANSCO. Other standards are subject to TRANSCO’s approval prior to the performance of
the laboratory tests.
Aggressiveness of soil and/or groundwater in view of sulphates and chlorides shall be evaluated
according to the BRE-Digest 363 and the CIRIA Guide for Concrete Construction in the Gulf.

2.1.4 Reports
Field reports have to be handed over to TRANSCO at site including bore-logs with all pertinent
data, SPT results, ground water levels, cone penetration diagrams, test pit logs, as well as
readings of groundwater levels within three days after completion of the corresponding work.
Weekly Progress Reports on approved forms shall be submitted to TRANSCO at site.
On completion of all field and laboratory work, the Bidder/Contractor shall submit to
TRANSCO a Geotechnical Investigation Report, containing the procedure used during the
investigation, field test results, laboratory observations and test results both in tabular and
graphical form. Practical and theoretical considerations for the interpretation of the test results,
supporting calculations for the conclusions drawn etc., shall be included. The report shall contain
theoretical as well as practical considerations for the design and construction of the different
types foundations and any proposals which the Bidder/Contractor may consider necessary to be

S-TR-CIVIL-OHL (Rev.0-2018) Page 7 of 33

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Works for Overhead Transmission /Distribution Lines

made with regard to the parameters and dimensions of the standard foundations, as well as clear
recommendations for the need for special designs.
The Bidder’s/Contractor’s qualified geotechnical engineer shall visit TRANSCO’s office for a
detailed discussion on the draft report. During the discussions TRANSCO and the
Bidder/Contractor shall decide on the amendments that need to be made in the draft report.
Thereafter, the Bidder/Contractor shall incorporate in the report the agreed modifications, and
after TRANSCO approves the report, the Bidder/Contractor shall submit six (6) copies of the
final report along with a reproducible set of all tables, graphs etc. At least two original copies
with colored photographs shall be submitted to TRANSCO.
The Bidder/Contractor shall prepare a schedule for construction purposes, which clearly
indicates the type of foundation to be installed at each site and records the soil investigation data
on which the choice has been made. The Schedule will be subject to the approval of TRANSCO
prior to commencement of foundation construction.

2.1.5 Change of Investigation Program

It is understood and expressly agreed that the above given investigation program in no way
defines or limits the method, the sequence of the work, the characteristics of the various working
phases, as will be actually required in TRANSCO’s opinion in order to obtain the best results of
the exploratory work.
The above program is purely indicative and subject to any alteration, which will deem desirable
on the basis of intermediate information obtained in the course of work.
Where, in the opinion of TRANSCO, after examination of the Bidder’s/Contractor’s soil
investigation data, the nature of the ground warrants special investigation and tests, the
Bidder/Contractor shall carry out further investigations according to the instructions of
TRANSCO, until satisfactory information is obtained on the ground bearing properties and
foundation type.
The Bidder/Contractor shall conform with any directions issued by TRANSCO concerning the
amendment of the above program, no matter how extensive this amendment may be, and he shall
perform this work as continuously directed by TRANSCO. Allowance made for relevant
provisions of the general program, shall not base any claim for compensation or additional
payment on a discrepancy between initially programmed work and actually performed work.

2.2 Foundations

2.2.1 General
a) Tower foundations shall normally be single leg foundations of reinforced concrete each
tower foundation selected has to be proposed and justified by the Bidder/Contractor and
shall be approved by TRANSCO.
b) The Bidder/Contractor shall stake out the tower locations and submit to TRANSCO the
foundation conditions including permissible bearing pressure assumed at each tower,

S-TR-CIVIL-OHL (Rev.0-2018) Page 8 of 33

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Works for Overhead Transmission /Distribution Lines

together with the type of foundation considered applicable. TRANSCO may require the
Bidder/Contractor to make additional soil investigations at tower sites to verify the
foundation conditions at no additional cost.
c) For his final foundation design the Bidder/Contractor has to perform the required soil
investigations and has to base his design calculations on the detailed information obtained.
The Bidder/Contractor is requested to quote firm unit rates for the different types of
foundations and towers as set out in the Bills of Quantities. These unit rates will be
considered as flat rates covering all foundation costs for any type of soil encountered along
the line and no adjustment of the rates will be permitted.
d) The number of towers set out in the Bills of Quantities against each type may change, as
well as the numbers of specific types of foundations. Their numbers will be adjusted and
remunerated according to the quoted unit rates. This will, however, not entitle the
Bidder/Contractor to a change of the quoted unit rates or to any other additional claim.

2.2.2 Foundation Types

2.2.2.1 For Transmission Lines of 33 kV Level and Higher

For the basic proposal the Bidder/Contractor shall consider foundations executed as cast in-situ
pile foundations. Offers for this type of foundations are considered mandatory.

2.2.2.2 Foundations for Different Ground Conditions

The foundations proposed by the Bidder/Contractor shall cover the following ground conditions:
a) Normal Ground Conditions
Foundations to be suitable for soft soil, sand or loose gravel, soft or hard rock, as per the soil
investigations to be carried out.
b) Subhka Areas and Weak/Aggressive Soil / Environmental Conditions, classified as class
4&5 as per the BRE Digest-363
Foundations with permanent casings
c) Sand dune areas
Where special ground conditions exist, which do not allow any of the above types in original or
modified form, special types of foundation have to be considered and proposed, and after
TRANSCO’s approval have to be applied.
Prior to the selection of foundation types the Bidder/Contractor shall submit all relevant
drawings and data for approval. The decision of TRANSCO as to which type of foundation shall
be employed at a given location shall then be final.

S-TR-CIVIL-OHL (Rev.0-2018) Page 9 of 33

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Works for Overhead Transmission /Distribution Lines

2.2.3 Soil Characteristics

The Bidder/Contractor shall ascertain the soil conditions and characteristics as detailed in
Section “Soil Investigation” of this Specification. After determining the specific soil
characteristics, the applicable type of foundation shall be defined.
The pile design shall be based on the worst case of the following two assumptions:
 According to their allowable skin friction and tip bearing capacity, and
 According to their resistance to uplift loads, where the concrete foundation shall be
assumed to mobilise the frustum of an inverted earth cone having an angle of not more
than 30° with the vertical from the foundation base (i.e. piles or pad and chimney type
foundations). The net weight of the soil shall be taken from the soil investigation report.
Angle of the inverted cone for the design can be suitably modified after TRANSCO
approval.

2.2.4 Protection of Tower Foundations

2.2.4.1 Stabilising Layer

At all locations where earth moving (e.g. land slides, erosion/dune shifting, etc.) is likely to
occur, tower foundations and leg structures shall be protected by means of an approved
stabilising material/soil to prevent erosion.
The protected area should reach at least 5.0 m beyond the edge of the foundations.
Tower locations where such protection is needed shall be decided upon by TRANSCO at site.
Bidder/Contractor may propose appropriate alternative solutions.
Fill for such stabilisation of tower locations will be remunerated according to the respective item
in the Pricing Schedule.

2.2.4.2 Foundation Platforms

In low lying, Wadi areas, Subkha areas, etc., the filling of foundation platforms may become
necessary to raise foundations sufficiently above the existing ground.
The sides of such platforms have to be protected against erosion by stone pitching of suitable
size, laid on a concrete bed, or by other approved methods. Platforms shall at least extend 5.0 m
beyond the foundation edges.
Fill used for such platforms, as well as the stone pitching, shall be paid according to the
respective item in the Pricing Schedule.

2.2.4.3 Material for Fill and Backfill

Material to be used for stabilising layers, platforms and access road, etc. shall be well graded
granular material. It shall be free from contamination and shall not be taken from areas falling
into Class 5 of the BRE Digest 363 and shall have a grading curve close to the following:

S-TR-CIVIL-OHL (Rev.0-2018) Page 10 of 33

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Works for Overhead Transmission /Distribution Lines

Table-1
SIEVE % PASSING
25.4 mm 100
19.05 mm 70 – 100
9.53 mm 50 – 80
No. 4 35 – 65
No. 10 25 – 50
No. 40 15 –30
No. 200 5 –15
Note: the maximum allowable L.L. and P.I are 35
and 10 respectively
CBR = above 20%

2.2.4.4 Slope Protection Works on Mountain Slope at Tower Location in Hilly Terrain
Area
a. Preliminary survey:
It is the responsibility of the Bidder to visit the site and acquire the required information
for the proposed work and obtain necessary approval from the concerned authorities.
Bidder to Conduct geological survey for surrounding of the Tower location & submit
report to O/E for approval stating stability of Rock layers. Also Bidder needs to conduct
Hydrological Survey in order to design proper drainage works around the Tower
Location.

b. Supply and Application of Shotcrete ready-mix to the mountain area for

stabilizing the rocks including Rock Nail Anchors & Rockfall Barriers:

This Provision addresses supply and application of rock anchors and bolts, steel wire
mesh and net, rockfall barriers around Tower legs and supply 50–200mm maximum
thickness ready-mix shotcrete using the highest quality materials, equipment and
workmanship.
Scope includes, Supply and installation of steel wire mesh fence over and side of the
mountain slope to hold the rocks. The loose rock pocket area needs to be strengthen by
Rock Anchors & bolts. This rock anchors and bolts consisting of grouted steel bars,
anchor plates, nuts and if applicable, bearing plates and washers. Use neat cement grout
for anchors and bolts. Galvanize bars, plates, nuts and washers shall be in accordance
with recommendation by Anchor Manufacturer. Provide support ropes to suspend wire
mesh or nets from rock anchors. At the bidders option and when noted in the plans,
suspend wire mesh or nets from grouted cable anchors instead of rock anchors and
connect cable anchors to support ropes with shackles.

S-TR-CIVIL-OHL (Rev.0-2018) Page 11 of 33

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Works for Overhead Transmission /Distribution Lines

The bidder has to submit the detailed layout with length and width of the area for the
approval prior to commencement of work. Drilling and fixing of anchor bolts not less
than 8mm dia on rocks to the depth of 85 to 100mm into the rocks. Supply wet mix
concrete as per approved concrete mix design. Bidder has to submit and obtain approval
for concrete mix design. Concrete mix design shall be as per TRANSO specification.

Scope also includes preparation of surface by applying necessary water (pre wetting
substrate) on the rock surface to ensure that all the pores and pits are adequately wet and
prevent suction and necessary formwork to withstand the load, while applying spray
concrete. Concrete mixing procedure and application of concrete over mountain rock
surface shall be approved by the Engineer/Transco. Concrete surface Finishing and
curing shall be as per Transco specification. Store materials on blocking at least 12"
above the ground and protect it at all times from damage; and when placing in the work
make sure it is free from dirt, dust, loose mill scale, loose rust, paint, oil or other foreign
materials. Load, transport, unload and store rock slope materials are kept clean and free
of damage. Bent, damaged or defective materials will be rejected.

Bidder/ Contractor to provide proper drainage around the Tower Leg platform in order to
avoid landing or failure due to scouring of rain runoff water. Rockfall barriers needs to be
provided around Predominant tower leg only in order to protect steel OHL Tower from
direct impact of sliding/ rolling off rocks/ boulders.

The successful bidder has to submit a detailed method statement prior to commencement of work
and get approval from the Engineer/ Transco.

2.2.5 Caps
In locations not liable to flooding of bearing surface water, all steelworks, whether part of the
tower or part of the stub-angle foundation shall be completely encased in concrete to ensure a
concrete cover of 100 mm for any part of the stub leg/tower steel in the ground. This shall apply
from a point 450 mm above ground down to the toe of the stub angle. Cleats fitted to the stub-
angles shall be considered.
All concrete foundations shall be at least 75 cm above the final ground of the tower location.
Free-standing length of pile foundations shall be limited to 2.0 m above Finished/ Natural
Ground Level. Foundations shall be of dense concrete, adequately sloped off around the steel leg
/ stub angle section and smoothly finished to ensure drainage of water away from the steel work.
No capping shall be commenced in any portion of the work until the designed portion has been
approved by TRANSCO.
Final (future) finished ground level/elevation at the tower location shall be obtained from the
concerned local authorities during route approval, i.e. to consider future filling and development
works. In areas adjacent to roads (within 200 meters centreline to centreline), the tower location
level shall not be lower than the road level.

S-TR-CIVIL-OHL (Rev.0-2018) Page 12 of 33

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Works for Overhead Transmission /Distribution Lines

All tower foundation concrete above ground is to be protected equivalent to the concrete below
ground.

2.3 Gantries
The gantry will be located at a distance of about 50 to 120 m from the terminal tower. As
protection against entrance of unauthorised persons, a fence of galvanised and plastic coated
steel mesh of an approved type and with a minimum height of the mesh of 3.0 m with galvanised
plastic coated steel posts and gates, shall be provided around the gantry. Unless a gantry is
located within a Sub or Power Station area, inclined holders with 4 strands of galvanised or
stainless steel barbed wire shall additionally be installed at the top of the perimeter fence. Proper
earthing of the fence shall be provided if required.
Foundation design, grounding and painting of the gantry, and for the design of its foundation the
same stipulations are valid as for towers and foundations.
An earthing grid up to outside of the fence has to be provided with stranded tinned copper
conductor of at least 95 mm² and conforming to the requirements of VDE 0141.
All areas of the gantry shall receive topping with gravel and shall be excavated to a depth of not
less than 150 mm referring to finished ground level. The bottom of the excavated area shall be
plain, topped and levelled with coarse gravel of 25-51 mm in size and of a thickness of not less
than 150 mm. Alternative solutions may be proposed by the Bidder/Contractor for TRANSCO’s
approval.
Fencing, earthing and gravelling of the gantry areas according to Gantry layout is deemed to be
included in the items “gantry” and “foundation for gantry” of the Price Tabulation Sheet.

2.4 Access
The Bidder/Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of access to the transmission line
routes and the tower locations as required for complete constructions works.
Access for later maintenance of the transmission line (if required) shall be instructed by
TRANSCO and paid according to the respective BOQ item in stages as mentioned In Table-2.
Such access may be used by the Bidder/Contractor for construction purposes by laying only
initial layers, later; shall be completed as per the specifications requirements and maintained up
to FAC. All access provisions shall be submitted for TRANSCO’s approval prior to construction.
Access provisions over and above access instructed by TRANSCO for future maintenance of the
transmission line shall be at the Bidder’s/Contractor's responsibility and at their own cost.
Maintenance roads along the line route instructed by TRANSCO shall be routed at a minimum
distance between the edge of the road and the longest crossarm plus 5m. The crossing of the line
centreline by such maintenance road shall if possible be avoided.
Maintenance roads shall have a clear width as specified in Table-2 at the top and with side slopes
at a gradient not steeper than 1:1. They shall be constructed from and approved gatch material
and compacted by roller to a minimum final thickness So, the final surface level above the
existing ground level shall be as in Table-2.

S-TR-CIVIL-OHL (Rev.0-2018) Page 13 of 33

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Works for Overhead Transmission /Distribution Lines

No separate payment shall be made to the Bidder/Contractor on account of slight changes on the
line routings such as they may be required in shifting the transmission line route due to the
requirements of local Authorities and TRANSCO. Further reference is made to the Special
Conditions. Notice has to be given that the line routes contained in this Tender Document are of
tentative and preliminary purpose.

Table-2

Road Thickness
Road Width
Type of Terrain (meters)
(meters)
Below Ground Above Ground Total
Plain terrain (with hard - - - -
surface and no moving sand)
Subkha area (swampy / water 4 0.3 0.7 1.0
logged areas / area which
may get water on surface
during rain or during high
tide
Sand dune area with less 4 0.2 0.3 0.5
moving sand
Sand dune area with high 7 0.2 0.3 0.5
and frequent moving sand
Hilly terrain road (benched 4 - - -
levelled, filled & compacted)
Dam Road (for back water / as per Scope of as per Scope of as per Scope of as per Scope of
water logged area) with slope work & Tender work & Tender work & Tender work & Tender
protection specific drawing specific drawing specific drawing specific
drawing

Material to be used for the construction of maintenance road shall fulfil the requirements listed in
article 2.2.4.3(material for fill and backfill).

S-TR-CIVIL-OHL (Rev.0-2018) Page 14 of 33

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Works for Overhead Transmission /Distribution Lines

For sand dune area, in order to avoid moving sand covering the road, access road route shall be
carefully selected and also where required during construction sand shall be cleared both side at
least 4 meters either side of the maintenance access road.

Benching Work For Hilly Terrain:

Benching, grading, leveling and compaction with relevant gradient for vehicle / T&P movement
including filling in the slope portion of the hilly terrain to the structures located in hill portion.

For foundations in hilly areas where rock/hard soil cutting, grading etc. is required (especially
when unequal leg extensions are necessary).

(1) Extended Chimney:

Chimney could be extended up to 2m (Raised Chimney) to reduce the centre peg (CP)
lowering (benching). CP lowering required due to level difference between the legs more
than 6m, by raising the chimney the CP lowering could be minimised by 2m. The stub to
be extended and embedded in the slab is mandatory. Foundation design is to be submitted
for the extended chimney considering the site condition, for TRANSCO / Engineer
Approval.

(2) Working Area around the pits:

As the pits could be approached from two sides, which are sufficient for fixing the prop
and concreting, the moving area on the other two sides shall be kept as i.e
mountain/elevated side 0.5 m from the sides of excavation line. Provide step cutting
starting from 0.5m from the pit edge tread 30cm and riser 1.5m to stop rolling down of the
stones from top.

(3) Exposing of Chimney in down legs:

If the ground terrain near the down legs is not steep (corner), portion of foundation can be
exposed considering the fact that the excavated soil from the upper side will be backfilled
to get suitable platform. The foundation design shall be rechecked considering the unit
weight of backfilled soil in this outer portion as 50% of unit weight of soil. OR consider
frustum of cone from virgin ground, if possible. If backfilled top soil is considered in
stability calculation then it should be compacted in layers as specified to 97% MDD and
make necessary provisions in order to avoid scouring of backfilled material.

(4) Individual Foundation design:

S-TR-CIVIL-OHL (Rev.0-2018) Page 15 of 33

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Works for Overhead Transmission /Distribution Lines

The foundation shall be designed for the respective forces of the tower type and extension
and the actual angle acting on the tower.

(5) Access Road:

The access road length shall be extended up to the centre of tower and the individual
access to the pits to be made from the centre. Access around the pits will not be
acceptable.

(6) Cutting in the Middle of tower (CP lowering):

CP lowering benching acceptable only in the pit area, any additional cutting required in
the middle of the tower will not be payable. During CP lowering the benching volume to
be calculated in the pit and as minimum required in the middle of the tower case to case
basis.

For Typical Section of Gatch Road details, reference shall be made to the below listed drawings,
which are provided in the Drawing Section:
Drawing No. Title
DWG TR CIV 11 04 Typical Section of Gatch Road

2.5 Design of Foundations

This section details the design parameters of foundation for towers and gantries for overhead
transmission line. The foundation should resist all the uplift and shear forces and transmit them
to the soil in a satisfactory manner without affecting the performance of the structure. The
Bidder/Contractor shall provide the uplift, compression and shear forces in the global direction
and along foundation (pile or chimney) slope.
For Tower Foundation details, reference shall be made to the below listed drawings, which are
provided in the Drawing Section:
Drawing No. Title
DWG TR CIV 03 03 Conceptual Foundations

2.5.1 Pile Foundation

The pile foundation design shall be based on soil parameters and structural design of the pile
section in accordance with DIN 1045, DIN EN 1536, BS8004, BS8110. The following
parameters shall also be incorporated in the pile design:
a) Maximum Ultimate Uplift and Shear forces shall be selected for the design of piles.
b) Platform shall be assumed to provide lateral restraint but no skin friction shall be assumed.

S-TR-CIVIL-OHL (Rev.0-2018) Page 16 of 33

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Works for Overhead Transmission /Distribution Lines

c) It shall be assumed that soil doesn’t offer any skin resistance up to a depth of 2m from the
Natural Ground Level.
d) For design purposes, it shall be assumed that Ground water Table is 2m above the
measured level. Accordingly, the unit weights of soil and concrete shall be adjusted in the
calculations.
e) Angle of Friction shall be assumed as follows:
SPT Values Friction Angle
Less than or equal to 10 0
More than 10 but less than 25 30
More than or equal to 25 but less than 35 32
More than or equal to 35 34

f) Value of Ks= 0.62.

g) Minimum length pile shall be considered as 6.0m below Natural Ground Level.
h) For Pile Weight calculation, actual length of pile shall be calculated including platform
height and free standing length for all calculations including inverted cone-Frustum Angle
Method.
i) Skin friction in rock shall be assumed to be 10% of the minimum UCT value in the rock
layers as mentioned in soil investigation report.
j) Pile length shall be rechecked based on inverted cone-Frustum Angle Method as described
in the specification.
k) While deciding the pile length, the ratio of ultimate uplift capacity against ultimate uplift
forces shall not be less than 1.2.
l) Design of Reinforcement for the piles shall take into account additional moments due to
out of plumb, out of position and shear force. Bidder/Contractor shall provide the charts for
interaction diagram for calculation of reinforcement.
m) The nominal cover to reinforcement shall be 75mm. The center to center spacing of the
main reinforcement shall not be less than 100mm.

2.5.2 Pad and Chimney Foundation

The Pad and Chimney foundation design shall be based on soil parameters and structural design
in accordance with DIN 1045, BS8004, BS8110. In general, pad and chimney foundation shall
not provided in a moving sand areas. The following parameters shall also incorporated in the pad
and chimney foundation design:
a) Maximum Ultimate Uplift and Shear forces shall be selected for the design of Pad and
Chimney foundation.
b) Platform shall be assumed to provide lateral restraint.

S-TR-CIVIL-OHL (Rev.0-2018) Page 17 of 33

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Works for Overhead Transmission /Distribution Lines

c) For design purposes, it shall be assumed that Ground water Table is 2m above the
measured level. Accordingly, the unit weights of soil and concrete shall be adjusted in the
calculations.
d) The depth of pad and chimney foundation shall be based on inverted cone-Frustum Angle
Method as described in the specification.
e) While deciding the depth of foundation, the ratio of ultimate uplift capacity against
ultimate uplift forces shall not be less than 1.2.
f) The nominal cover to reinforcement shall be 75mm.

2.5.3 Rock Anchor Foundation:

This type of footing is recommended for homogenous hard rock occurring less than 1 m below
ground level. The anchors are normally fixed in a reinforced concrete cap.
Anchor foundations may be used where the rock mass is sound, homogenous, free from fissures
and where the long term stability of the rock can be ensured.
The foundation shall comprise of a reinforced concrete pad below ground level in conjunction
with suitably designed anchor grouted into holes previously drilled into the rock.
Where the arrangement of the anchorage is such that the horizontal shear loads are not designed
to be wholly or partially taken by the anchor acting in tension, such horizontal loads, or any
balance thereof shall be catered for in the design of the concrete pad.
In order to obtain the required uplift resistance, the deformed reinforcing bars shall be grouted
into holes drilled in rock, embedded with an expanding grout for a minimum depth of 2.0 m from
the bottom of the cap. The reinforcing bars shall be tied together within the foundation cap which
shall be minimum 900 mm depth.
The stub leg shall set into the bottom of the cap. Sufficient cleats and bolts shall be fitted to the
stub to transfer 100% of the leg load. The upper part of the stubs shall be encased in concrete to a
height of 750mm above ground level.
The actual depth of anchorage in rock shall be computed according to relevant standard
requirements.
Type testing of the anchor and anchorage system is required in each ground type and proof
testing shall be carried out on one anchor at each tower leg.

2.5.4 Foundation Selection for Hilly Terrain:

The Contractor shall complete the design of the typical foundations for all soils type in
accordance to the soil investigation report. The foundation type for each tower site shall be
selected from the considered typical foundation to suit its particular site conditions.

S-TR-CIVIL-OHL (Rev.0-2018) Page 18 of 33

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Works for Overhead Transmission /Distribution Lines

The following foundation types shall be considered (but not limited to):
 Pad and chimney with or without undercut (concrete block foundation);
 Rock anchor foundations;
 Pile foundations (single or group of piles per leg);

The following categories of soils shall be considered:

a) Hard rock of homogenous solid rock is encountered within one meter of ground surface;
b) Soft rock - homogeneous fractured limestone or weathered, stratified rock occurring for
complete depth of foundation (100% soft rock) or for 50% of the foundation depth (50%
soft rock);
c) Normal soil - soil reasonably compact or stiff;
d) Poor soil - silty sand, silty clay of weak strength with or without layers of gravel,
unconsolidated sands,;
e) Special soil conditions - like in wadis (watercourse beds) subject to occasional flooding,
subkha, sand dunes areas etc.

Recommended Selection of the Foundation Type

Anchor rock foundation.
a) Hard rock:
Anchor rock, Pad and chimney foundation.
b) Soft rock:
Pad and chimney foundations, Pile foundation
c) Normal soil:
Pile foundations.
d) Poor soil:
Pile foundation with permanent casing
e) Special soil condition:

2.6 Erection of Foundations

2.6.1 General
Tower foundation installation shall include tower site preparation, excavation, any measures
required to ensure slope stability or free drainage dewatering, foundation placement
measurements, assembly and placement of the approved foundation, foundation protection, as
well as backfill and clean-up.
The Bidder/Contractor shall employ templates for stub setting for each tower and gantries. In
general, all four stubs shall be set simultaneously using templates. However, in case of

S-TR-CIVIL-OHL (Rev.0-2018) Page 19 of 33

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Works for Overhead Transmission /Distribution Lines

undulating terrain or due any other specific problem, each stub may be set separately using
templates.
The Bidder/Contractor shall remove all vegetation and other debris from the tower site, which
will interfere with his operation. Vegetation and debris removed from the tower site shall be
disposed off outside the right of way as directed by TRANSCO and/or in accordance with local
regulations.
The ground levels existing before the installation of foundations have to be considered in
determining tower platform heights.
The Bidder/Contractor shall dispose of material and regulate the movement of equipment so that
grades shall not be exposed, and slopes necessary to develop required loading characteristics
shall be maintained, especially in side-hill locations.
The depth of pile foundations shall always be related to the lowest ground (not platform/fill
elevation in the area occupied by the foundation.

2.6.2 Earth and Rockwork

2.6.2.1 General
There will be no classification of excavated materials, and the term “Excavation” shall include
all materials to be excavated or to be removed within the Project, regardless of the type,
character, composition, or conditions of the material excavated and shall further include all
debris, junk, broken concrete, bricks, logs, stumps, roots, and all other material encountered
within the specified excavation limits.
The Bidder/Contractor is responsible for all necessary safety measures. He is liable for any
damage and accidents occurring while earth work is being carried out. Proper standing, including
any necessary re-arrangement protection of slopes or cribbing, preparation of design
calculations, etc. shall be deemed included in the prices.
In the event of soil slides occurring during earth and rock work, all damage will be to the
Bidder’s/Contractor’s debit. This also implies that no payment will be made for the additional
moving of soil resulting from such damage.

2.6.2.2 Clearing and Grading

The sites of all tower base work shall be cleared and levelled so that on completion of the work
the finished reinstated ground level shall normally at least be the same as prior to
commencement of the work.

2.6.2.3 Backfilling
Refilling around the pile head pits shall be carried out only after all works within the excavations
have been inspected and approved by TRANSCO.
Unless otherwise directed all filling shall be approved selected material, and shall be deposited
and compacted using approved material in layers not exceeding 150 mm thick for hand
compaction and 250 mm for mechanical compaction, loose depth.

S-TR-CIVIL-OHL (Rev.0-2018) Page 20 of 33

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Works for Overhead Transmission /Distribution Lines

During the placing of backfill the hole shall be kept free from water. All temporary timbering
and all decomposable material shall be removed from the excavations prior to backfilling.

2.6.2.4 Settlement
The Bidder/Contractor shall be responsible for making good all settlements of filling due to any
cause whatever which may occur up to the end of the period of maintenance.

2.6.2.5 Surplus Material

All material surplus to the requirement of fill, and all debris and rubbish shall be removed and
deposited as directed by TRANSCO.

2.6.3 Concrete Work

All concrete work shall be carried out in accordance with BS 8004 and 8110, or DIN 1045, latest
issue, under consideration of the particular requirements of the CIRIA Publication C577, 2002,
“Guide to the Construction of Reinforced Concrete in the Arabian Peninsular”, and Digest 363 of
Building Research Establishment Digest.
No concreting shall be commenced in any portion of the work until the preparations and the
concrete mix design have been approved, and permission been granted by TRANSCO.

2.6.3.1 Concrete Mix Design

The minimum characteristic strength of concrete used for construction @ 28 days to be
40 N/mm2 as per BS8110. The mix design of the concrete has to be approved, and its suitability
shall be proven in a trial mix at site. In case of use of ready mixed concrete, trial mixes shall only
be waived, if an earlier proven mix design is used.

2.6.3.2 Aggregates
Aggregates shall be crushed rock type and conform to the relevant applicable standard BS
882:1992. The combined aggregate shall be as coarse-grained and dense-graded as possible and
shall be according to the guidelines of BS 882. The maximum particle size shall be so chosen as
to be compatible with mixing, handling, placing and workability of the concrete.
For underwater concrete, proof shall be given that the mix is adequately cohesive and maintains
this property during placing by using under-water admixtures.
Aggregates shall - for all groups except the dune sand - be a product of crushed rock, with the
source and type being subject to TRANSCO´s approval. Only for exceptional cases and upon
TRANSCO´s specific written approval, aggregates of other origin may be used for certain parts
of the work.
Size of aggregate used in concrete: maximum aggregate size shall be 20mm, except for thick
elements (>900mm) where particular heat of hydration control is required. There, aggregate of
28mm max size may be used. For the required concrete of Grade 40 (C28 = 40 N/mm2), at least
one particle size fraction shall be in the 0-4 mm range.
Aggregates shall be of limestone source and shall be subject to TRANSCO´s approval.

S-TR-CIVIL-OHL (Rev.0-2018) Page 21 of 33

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Works for Overhead Transmission /Distribution Lines

2.6.3.3 Cement
a) Type of Cement
The type of cement to be used shall depend on the constructional circumstances and on the
prevailing local conditions. Portland cement, Type I, may be used at places not exposed to
chemical aggressiveness, whereas Portland cement, Type V, shall in general be used for all
concrete work in foundations and plinths and in concrete structures covered by soil.
Moderate sulphate resistant cement as per ASTM C 150, type 2, may be used only after
TRANSCO's explicit written approval to replace the type V cement.
Cement shall be of recent manufacture and shall be used within a period of 3 months from
production.
Total cementitious contents in the mix shall be limited to avoid excessive risk of thermal and
shrinkage cracking. It shall always be in the range of 350 – 400 kg/m3, unless otherwise
approved by TRANSCO. The proportioning of mixes for durability will be primarily controlled
through the specified limits on free W/C ratio. The W/C ratio shall always lie in the range of
0.36-0.45. Appropriate use shall be made of approved admixtures to simultaneously meet the
requirements for W/C ratio and workability.
Before supplying cement to Site or receiving ready-mixed concrete, the Bidder/Contractor shall
submit to TRANSCO, the manufacturer’s statement of Specification and test certificate together
with date of manufacture of any cement to be used. TRANSCO reserves the right to take samples
and order any additional / re-tests in accordance with BS EN 196-7 : 1992, BS EN 196-6, BS
4450 and ASTMC 186.
In mix designs with an emphasis on durability, ground granulated blast furnace slag as per BS
6699 or EN 197 or microsilica may be incorporated in the mix. Proportions of slag shall
normally not exceed 60 %, those of microsilica shall not exceed 8%, for items thicker than 1.2m,
these proportions shall not exceed 10%.
The cement shall be selected according to the recommendations of BRE-Digest 363 of 1991 and
as summarised here:
SO4 IN SOIL OR FILL SO4 IN CEMENT TYPE
GROUNDWATER
Soil Class by 2:1 water/soil extract – g/l
g/l
1 and 2 ≤ 2.3 ≤ 1.4 OPC
3 2.3 ≤ 3.7 1.4 ≤ 3.0 SRC / MSRC
4 and 5 ≥ 3.7 ≥ 3.0 SRC

b) Delivery and Storage

All accepted cement shall be properly protected, delivered and stored in dry weather-proof sheds
or covers. Cement shall be delivered in quantities sufficient to ensure continuity of the work, and

S-TR-CIVIL-OHL (Rev.0-2018) Page 22 of 33

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Works for Overhead Transmission /Distribution Lines

to enable all the necessary tests to be carried out before it is used, but should not be stored for
more than 6 weeks.
TRANSCO may reject any cement as a result of any tests thereof, notwithstanding the
manufacturer’s certificate. He may also reject cement, which has deteriorated owing to
inadequate protection or other causes or in any other case where the cement is not to his
satisfaction. The Bidder/Contractor must remove all rejected cement from the site without delay
and expenses for TRANSCO.

2.6.3.4 Water For Concrete

Potable water shall be used, complying with the relevant standards for concreting. Water must be
free of detrimental substances (salt, oil, alkali, etc.).

2.6.3.5 Reinforcement
a) Epoxy Coated Reinforcement
Reinforcement is to be hot-rolled deformed high yield steel in accordance with DIN 488,
DIN EN ISO 15630 or BS 4449 – Grade 460 or higher. Only epoxy coated reinforcement shall
be used for foundations of transmission line towers.
The reinforcement steel shall be protected against corrosion with a fusion-bonded epoxy coating.
The coating shall be applied in accordance with ASTM A775/775M-01, and shall be supplied
from an approved coating factory using approved epoxy resins.
All handling and bending procedures shall be to the coating factory’s recommendations and
instructions, and as agreed with TRANSCO. A coating factory representative shall ensure his
product is used fully in accordance with his recommendations.
The Bidder/Contractor shall furnish to TRANSCO a certificate of compliance for each shipment
of coated bars.
b) Repair of Damaged Epoxy Coating
When the epoxy coating is damaged, (cut ends, accidental damage etc.) the coating shall be
repaired with parching material conforming to ASTM A775/A775M-01 and shall be carried out
in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
The repair to the damaged area shall be carried out as soon as possible, and before oxidation of
the surface occurs. In no case shall the repair be delayed more than 8 hours. Any trace or rust or
oxidation must be removed by grinder or wire brush prior to touch-up.
c) Fabrication
All reinforcements shall be bent cold unless otherwise permitted by TRANSCO. Bar cutting
equipment shall have padded supports and contact areas. Bar bending equipment shall have
padded supports and contact areas and shall be fitted with nylon or plastic mandrels supplied by,
or approved by, the coating factory representative.
d) Site Installation and Handling

S-TR-CIVIL-OHL (Rev.0-2018) Page 23 of 33

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Works for Overhead Transmission /Distribution Lines

Reinforcement of all types shall be stored on Site in protected racks above ground in an
approved manner so as to avoid damage to the coating. Direct metal to coating contact should be
avoided wherever possible.
The number, size, form and disposition of bars shall be strictly in accordance with the drawings
and bending schedules or as directed by TRANSCO. Reinforcement shall be checked after being
fixed and no concrete shall be placed around the reinforcement until such checking has taken
place.
Equipment for handling epoxy coated bars shall have padded contact areas. Bundles shall be
lifted with a strong-back or have multiple supports to prevent bar-to-bar abrasion from sags in
the bundle. Bars or bundles shall not be dragged or dropped. Any coating damage due to
handling, shipment and placing shall be repaired as described above.
All tie-wires or other devices used to connect, support, secure or fasten epoxy coated
reinforcement shall be made of, or coated with, a dielectric material such as nylon, epoxy or
plastic. All bundles shall be identified at the factory with durable tags to allow checking of
coating quality control at site. Reinforcement shall not be straightened or re-bent in a manner,
which may cause injury to the material. Bars with shapes not shown on the drawings shall not be
used.
All reinforcing bars shall be bent in accordance with the relevant standard. In particular, no
reinforcement shall be heated. All reinforcement shall be rigidly fixed in position to the concrete
cover specified by an approved means.
Prior to concreting the Bidder/Contractor shall ensure that the reinforcement is cleaned of all
concrete from previous pours and any damage to the coating is repaired.

2.6.3.6 Concreting
Concreting for pile foundation shall be done through tremie-pipes or equivalent devices to
prevent segregation. Alternatively pumping methods may be proposed by the Bidder/Contractor.
For concreting in hot weather, ACI Standard 305R "Hot Weather Concreting" and the "CIRIA –
“Guide to the construction of reinforced concrete in the Arabian Peninsular”. and its
recommendations shall be followed and various means may be employed to lower the
temperature of concrete such as:
 Cooling coarse aggregate with water by sprinkling and shading
 Using chilled water
 Using crushed ice
 Avoiding the use of the hot cement
 Shading mixer drums, facilities and material by use of permanent wet burlap coverings
 Adequately watering of sub-grade, form-work and reinforcement
 Insulating water supply lines and tanks and/or painting exposed portions white
 Working only at cooler daytime

S-TR-CIVIL-OHL (Rev.0-2018) Page 24 of 33

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Works for Overhead Transmission /Distribution Lines

 Covering freshly poured concrete with polythene sheets

 Intensive moist-curing with potable water of the concrete placed.
 Curing the concrete continuously with water at least for 7 days and as detailed in CIRIA’s
“Guide to the construction of reinforced concrete in the Arabian Peninsular”. Attention to
curing requirements is important at all times; it is especially in hot, dry weather because of
greater danger of cracking. The use of ice to lower the temperature of fresh concrete must
be carefully controlled. If flaked ice is used in the mix, it must be of such a size that it will
melt completely in the mix and that no ice remains once the batching is complete. The
temperature of fresh concrete must in no case exceed + 30°C. When discharged in the
form-work, particular care shall be given for thick section (>900mm) where insulation
boards shall be used to reduce temperature gradient.

2.6.3.7 Testing
Throughout the construction period the quality of concrete mixed at and/or delivered to Site has
to be controlled. Tests shall be carried out in the presence of TRANSCO or under the supervision
of an approved office for testing of such kind of works. The following minimum numbers of
tests shall be carried out:
a) Water
One chemical water analysis every 3 months of construction. First analysis before start of
foundation works.
b) Cement
b1) For site mixed concrete if applicable and or approved by TRANSCO
 One setting test to vicat per car-load
 One boiling test per car-load.
b2) For ready mixed concrete
 Mill certificates of the cement used in the plant
 Chemical composition in line with DIN 1164 or BS 12.
c) Admixtures and Additives
Three (3) samples of each kind of admixture and additive before start of casting of the first load
bearing structural member.
d) Concrete delivered to Site
 One set of at least six (6) test cubes for every 100 m3 or every daily pour of concrete or as
directed by TRANSCO. The compression strength tests shall be carried out after seven (7)
days for the first two cubes of each set, and after 28 days for the second two cubes of the
set, and - if requested – the last two cubes of each set may be tested in case of failure of a
cube.

S-TR-CIVIL-OHL (Rev.0-2018) Page 25 of 33

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Works for Overhead Transmission /Distribution Lines

 Slump tests are to be executed for every truck load supplied during concreting and as per
TRANSCO's instructions, provided concreting is proceeding.
 Concrete temperature is to be recorded at the arrival of concrete at Site.
 Bimonthly or for every 750 m3 of concrete cast, the Bidder/Contractor shall prepare the
following for durability testing, which - after approval of TRANSCO – may be carried out
through the concrete supplier:
- Rapid test for chlorides
- Rapid test for sulphates
- A Trial panel, from which at 28 days 3 Nos. Cores, 75mm diameter and 75 mm long,
shall be taken for water absorption testing (to BS 1881).
- 3 Nos. blocks, 200 x 200 x 120 mm thick, for water penetration testing (to DIN
1048).
- 4 Nos. cubes, 150 mm, for rapid chloride permeability testing (to AASHTO T-277)
curing of samples shall be as close to the current Site practice as possible.
e) Reinforcement
The Bidder/Contractor shall provide copies of the manufacturer’s test certificates with each
consignment of reinforcement brought to Site. In addition and before the execution of works, and
for every 100 T in each shipment, two (2) samples of each bar size shall be tested as follows:
 Chemical composition to be tested to BS 4449
 Mechanical properties test including tensile properties, elongation, bend test and re-bent
test
 Cross sectional area and mass test
 For detailed curves, diagrams and tables, reference is made to DIN 1045 or the relevant
BS, both latest editions.
In case of failure of tests of reinforcement, retesting shall be carried out as BS4449.
For epoxy coated reinforcement, following additional tests shall be carried out in line with the
guidelines of A775/775M-01:
 Coating thickness
 Holidays on the coating
 Adhesion of the coating.

S-TR-CIVIL-OHL (Rev.0-2018) Page 26 of 33

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Works for Overhead Transmission /Distribution Lines

2.6.3.8 Concrete Quality Requirements

The following are the test requirements shall be met to prove the durability of the concrete:
 Slump: Piling concrete to be self levelling with a slump above 175 mm, all other concrete
generally not to exceed 100 mm:
Applicable Standard Concrete in Areas Classified According to
Test CIRIA Section 5, Table 5.1
a to c d & f* e **
Water permeability as per DIN 1048 25 mm 15 mm 10 mm
Water absorption as per BS 1881 < 2.5%
Chloride permeability AASHTO T-277 - 2500 C 1000 C
Rapid chloride to AASHTO T-277: Curing of samples shall be as close to the
permeability current site practice as possible

Notes:

* Water retaining structures and Basements in areas with high water table

** Marine structures and structures in areas with highly aggressive soil conditions, classified
as class 4 & 5 as per the BRE Digest 363
 Aggregates contamination limits shall be as follows:
Chlorides Sulphates Reference
Coarse Aggregates < 0.03% < 0.4% CIRIA
Fine Aggregates < 0.06% < 0.4% CIRIA
RC with SRC < 0.20% < 4.0% CIRIA
RC with OPC < 0.30% < 4.0% CIRIA
Not Reinforced Concrete < 0.60% < 4.0% CIRIA

2.6.3.9 Compaction, Curing and Protection

During pouring the concrete of the pile heads or caps, etc. shall be thoroughly compacted, by an
approved type of mechanical vibrator, to a maximum subsidence without segregation and
thoroughly worked around reinforcement or other embedded features, into the correct shape and
form. Experienced personnel only shall operate vibrators. Care shall be taken to ensure that
inserts, fixtures, reinforcement and form-work are not displaced and disturbed during vibration
of the concrete. Over vibration or vibration of very wet mixes is harmful and should be avoided.
Thorough compaction is essential to ensure that concrete is in immediate contact throughout with
the ground, form-work and embedded fixtures and anchor stubs; therefore the Bidder/Contractor

S-TR-CIVIL-OHL (Rev.0-2018) Page 27 of 33

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Works for Overhead Transmission /Distribution Lines

shall submit for approval a Method Statement detailing the method to be used to ensure the
satisfactory placing, compaction, curing and protection of concrete.
The compaction is not to be confined to the upper surface of the layer deposited, but the whole
mass of concrete must be thoroughly punnedand/or vibrated. Concrete has to be brought up in
layers to become consolidated, with the mass assuming a jelly-like consistency and the water just
appearing on the surface. Reinforcement or form-work must not be moved by placing and
compacting the concrete.
Adequate curing and protection of the fresh concrete to TRANSCO’s satisfaction is mandatory.
Unless otherwise approved, there shall be no joints in concrete foundations. Where the
construction of the foundation is such that joints are unavoidable, adequate bonding between the
old and new concrete shall be ensured by exposing the larger aggregate particles near the surface
by scaling hammer and leaving a clean surface free from loose particles. Immediately before
placing the new concrete, this cleaned surface shall be primed with a bonding agent to
TRANSCO’s approval.
Not less than 10 cm of blinding concrete shall be placed as a base for all concrete to be placed
below ground. The surface of the blinding and the vertical surfaces of all structures in contact
with the ground or filling shall have a dense, continuous and water-proof membrane of approved
thickness and material applied.
In the case of piles penetrating into caps or beams, etc., i.e. not for single pile foundations, water-
tight connections of pile shell and the protective membrane have to be guaranteed.
Parts of the line(s) pass through areas with extraordinarily aggressive soils. Special precautions
to protect the concrete shall be proposed by the Bidder/Contractor, and will be subject to the
approval of TRANSCO.

2.6.4 Bored Pile Foundations

As standard solution, cast in situ bored piles as per DIN EN 1536, DIN 4014, DIN 1054 or BS
2004 and BS 8004 shall be proposed for execution. Piles shall be a minimum of 6 m below
natural ground level. Immediately after drilling, reinforcement has to be placed, ensuring a
minimum concrete cover of 75 mm by using concrete spacers made from the same concrete mix
design, and the pile has to be cast.
Either a temporary or a permanent casing, as per design, shall be provided. This shell shall
remain partly or as a whole in the ground to:
 Protect the fresh (“green”) concrete
 Prevent loosening of soil in vicinity of the pile
 Avoid contamination of the concrete
 Prevent penetration of aggressive components into parts of the concrete structure.

S-TR-CIVIL-OHL (Rev.0-2018) Page 28 of 33

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Works for Overhead Transmission /Distribution Lines

Subjected to TRANSCO approval; Bentonite SLURRY could be used instead of Temporary steel
casing to prevent erosion during the drilling due to difficulties to remove the temporary casing
after concreting.

2.6.4.1 Foundations with Permanent Casings

Permanent casings of at least eight (8) mm thickness shall be provided from the top of the pile
down to at least 2.0m below natural ground level. Should the ground water table be at 2.5 m
below natural ground level, casing will be extended to become 3.0 m below finished ground
surface. This procedure shall be applicable for areas not affected by tidal effects. For such areas,
casings shall project 0.5 m below the lowest water level anticipated. Permanent casings shall be
provided for foundations in
 Wadi areas
 Subkha areas
 Areas of highly aggressive soil classified as class 4&5 as per the BRE Digest-363
(according to the soil investigation)
 Areas defined by TRANSCO.
Exposed parts of the casings and down to at least 50 cm below ground have to be adequately
corrosion protected by an approved coal tar epoxy coating of at least 250 µ thickness.

2.6.4.2 Drilling Operation

A full string of casing up to the bearing strata is a must, except in rock, rock type, or safely
standing soils. Where required, casing pipes shall penetrate ahead of the removal of soil, likewise
during drilling above the ground-water table.
In the vicinity of underground water, additional water has to be filled up during the drilling. The
hydrostatic head pressure shall be at least 1.0 m above the ground water table when filled boring
tools are extracted.
Casing pipes shall not be deepened by means of jetting.
The following types of tests are to be considered for piled foundations:

2.6.5 Foundation Load Tests

2.6.5.1 Foundation Type Load Tests

The Bidder/Contractor shall carry out successful foundation load tests in order to prove the
suitability of the foundation selected with particular type of soil. The results of the tests shall be
submitted in a format as advised by TRANSCO.
Prior to commencement of piling the Bidder/Contractor shall install one test piles of each type
proposed. The piles shall be test loaded by tension, compression and horizontal forces applied in
the direction of the resultant of the vertical and horizontal forces on the pile.

S-TR-CIVIL-OHL (Rev.0-2018) Page 29 of 33

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Works for Overhead Transmission /Distribution Lines

Tested piles shall be considered as acceptable in case the obtained load-settlement/heave-

diagrams do not indicate movements beyond permissible limits as per the approved design or
relevant and approved Standards.
Working piles shall not be installed until the load tests have been conducted and evaluated and
unless authorised by TRANSCO.
Unless otherwise directed by TRANSCO, the following guidelines shall be applied for pile tests:
3 pile configuration with the reaction piles of the same length as the test piles is to be used with
the middle pile being tested for tension and the reaction piles being used to evaluate compression
to a minimum of 1.25 times working load.
The pile test loads shall be as mentioned in Schedules ‘Factor of Safety’. The test load shall be a
product of maximum ultimate uplift load, i.e. 1.5 times maximum uplift load under broken wire
or 2.5 times the maximum uplift load under normal conditions, and the factor of safety. The pile
testing procedure and method of statement including loading cycle shall be submitted to
TRANSCO for approval.
If the pile test results are not to the satisfaction of TRANSCO, the Bidder/Contractor shall
change the pile type and choose an other type of pile approved by TRANSCO for which test
piles will be constructed and the load test performed until the Bidder/Contractor gets successful
results without extra cost or extension of time.

2.6.5.2 Foundation Routine Load Test

The Bidder/Contractor shall perform routine uplift tests at working foundations in order to
guarantee the design requirements given in this Specification. Test shall be carried out at 3% of
the piles, at least, however, at one pile of each type of foundation.
Load has to be applied in direction of the stub. The pile test loads shall be as mentioned in
Schedules ‘Factor of Safety’. The test load shall be a product of maximum working uplift load
(i.e. during Normal or Broken Wire Condition) and the factor of safety. The pile testing
procedure and method of statement including loading cycle shall be submitted to TRANSCO for
approval.

2.6.5.3 Procedures for Testing and Recording

The following load cycles shall be applied:
LOAD (%) TIME SETTLEMENT CONDITION
0 1 hr S≤0.25 mm
25 1 hr S≤0.25 mm
50 1 hr S≤0.25 mm
75 1 hr S≤0.25 mm
100 1 hr S≤0.25 mm
50 15 min OFFLOADING

S-TR-CIVIL-OHL (Rev.0-2018) Page 30 of 33

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Works for Overhead Transmission /Distribution Lines

0 15 min OFFLOADING
100 1 hr S≤0.25 mm
125 1 hr S≤0.25 mm
150 1 hr S≤0.25 mm
175 1 hr S≤0.25 mm
200 1 hr S≤0.25 mm
225 1 hr S≤0.25 mm
250 24 hrs S≤0.25 mm
200 15 min S≤0.25 mm
150 15 min OFFLOADING
100 15 min OFFLOADING
50 15 min OFFLOADING
0 1 hr OFFLOADING

On every increment, settlements shall be recorded after 30”, 2’, 4’, 8’, 15’, 30’, 1h. Movement of
the pile head shall be less than 0.25 mm within that hour , or until 2 hours have elapsed,
whichever occurs first, before the application of the new load increment.
For working piles, the load cycles will be terminated at a maximum of 150 %.
For arrangement of Pile Load Tests details, reference shall be made to the below listed drawings,
which are provided in the Drawings Section:
Drawing No. Title
DWG TR CIV 03 04 Arrangement of Pile Load Test

2.6.5.4 Integrity Testing

Integrity testing shall be carried out on all working piles. Test procedure and test locations shall
be subject to approval. All piles, which, in the opinion of TRANSCO are defective shall be
rejected and replaced by the Bidder/Contractor without claiming extra cost or time extension.

2.6.5.5 Test Reports

Reports on pile testing shall be submitted to TRANSCO and shall contain, among others, the
following information:
 Layout of test equipment and description
 Pile identification, diameter and length
 Sketch of soil conditions and ground water location

S-TR-CIVIL-OHL (Rev.0-2018) Page 31 of 33

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Works for Overhead Transmission /Distribution Lines

 Complete records of level, load cell and dial gauge readings against date and time
throughout the test in a tabulation
 Graphs of load and settlement/heave versus time
 Graphs of settlement/heave versus load
 Remarks concerning any unusual occurrences during the loading of the pile.
TRANSCO will decide on completion of tests and evaluations whether the test piles shall be left
in place or shall be extracted. No extra payment will be made for the extraction of test piles.

2.6.6 Additional Civil Work

According to the project requirements, TRANSCO may instruct the Bidder/Contractor to
perform additional work such as:
 Removal of sand dunes
 Additional concrete work
 Masonry work
 Steel reinforcements
 Extra pile length per meter.
The Bidder/Contractor shall indicate the rates for the above work in quantities as specified in the
Bills of Quantities.

2.6.7 Sign Boards for Road Crossings

At every road crossing of the line on both sides of the road, at a distance of approximately 250 m
away from the road crossing, a caution board, as per the requirements of the Works Department
and at least 200 cm wide and 100 cm high, with the wording, “DANGER, HV (specify voltage)
OVERHEAD LINE CROSSING 250 m AHEAD”, both in the Arabic and English languages,
shall be installed on both sides of the carriageway. The board shall be painted with luminous
letters.
The caution board shall be supplemented by the traffic warning sign for height restrictions.
For Sign Board and Road Crossing details, reference shall be made to the below listed drawings,
which are provided in the Drawings Section:
Drawing No. Title
DWG TR CIV 15 OHL Warning Sign (Road Crossing)

The design for the signboard has to be submitted for the approval of TRANSCO and other
authorities concerned.

S-TR-CIVIL-OHL (Rev.0-2018) Page 32 of 33

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Works for Overhead Transmission /Distribution Lines

2.7 Factors of Safety

SCHEDULE C1 FACTORS OF SAFETY
ITEM DESCRIPTION FACTOR OF SAFETY
2 Tower Foundation
2.1 Pile Pad Chimney & Rock Anchor Type Tests 1.2
(Maximum Ultimate Uplift Load)
2.2 Pile Pad Chimney & Rock Anchor Routine Test 1.2
(Maximum Working Uplift Load)

S-TR-CIVIL-OHL (Rev.0-2018) Page 33 of 33

 STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRIC WORKS

CIVIL WORKS

( SPECIFICATION )

SITE INSTALLATION

TRANSCO STANDARD : S-TR-CIVIL-SITE (REV.0-2014)

S-TR-CIVIL-SITE (Rev.0-2014) Page 1 of 7

 CIVIL WORKS
Site Installation

CONTENTS

1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................... 3
2 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ...................................................................................... 3
2.1 General .............................................................................................................................. 3
2.2 Installation ......................................................................................................................... 3
2.2.1 Removal ............................................................................................................................ 4
2.3 Material ............................................................................................................................. 4
2.4 Auxiliary Work.................................................................................................................. 4
2.5 Facilities at Site ................................................................................................................. 4
2.6 Regular Cleaning of the Construction Site ........................................................................ 6
2.7 Relocation / Protection of the Existing Services ............................................................... 6
2.8 Fencing and Signboard ...................................................................................................... 7

S-TR-CIVIL-SITE (Rev.0-2014) Page 2 of 7

 CIVIL WORKS
Site Installation

SITE INSTALLATION

1 GENERAL
This part of the Specification shall cover all items related to site installation works for the
Project. Works shall include all items required for the tendered Project, as well as all auxiliary
works.
All works shall further be carried out in full compliance with all local rules and regulations and
the Specification shall further be read, if applicable for the Project.
For applicable technical standards, tests, reference shall be made to:
 S-TR-CIVIL-GEN - General Requirements
(Applicable Technical Standards, Tests, etc.)

2 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

2.1 General
All relevant site installation required for performance of the entire project shall be provided by
the Bidder/Contractor, who shall prior to commencement of works issue a "Notice of Intent" in
line with the local regulations.

2.2 Installation
The site installation shall include supply, furnishing, transport, erection, maintenance and
supplementing, if required, and removal of all plant, machinery, vehicles, scaffolding, all
construction equipment, auxiliary equipment, materials, personnel and work instruments, all
temporary and permanent installations, (permanent in the sense that according to the contract,
they are to remain for the use of TRANSCO after completion of the work), workshops, office
buildings, laboratories, stores, housing canteen, first aid and all other facilities if so required for
or in connection with the construction of the work and for the fulfilment of the
Bidder’s/Contractor's obligations.
Also included in Site installation shall be such general and/or temporary work as access roads,
vehicle parking areas, storage areas, buildings, and structures, electrical supply, medical
facilities, construction of workers' and supervisors' housing and community facilities,
laboratories, and similar work unless included under other cost items, when such work is called
for by the Contract documents or are required for the safe and efficient execution of the work.
Access roads, car park area, storage area, power supply, water supply, first aid station, site
laboratory, housing accommodation for Bidder’s/Contractor's employees shall be part of the
scope of supply and as specified hereafter. Prior to commencement of any installation work a
drawing showing the proposed site installation shall be submitted to TRANSCO for approval.

S-TR-CIVIL-SITE (Rev.0-2014) Page 3 of 7

 CIVIL WORKS
Site Installation

2.2.1 Removal
As soon as the Work is completed and before the Bidder’s/Contractor's final liquidation, the
Bidder/Contractor shall remove from TRANSCO's property all temporary buildings, installations
and temporary facilities erected above ground. The Bidder/Contractor shall fill with earth all
basements and underground areas, leaving the terrain completely clean, free from temporary
under-ground installations and with a good appearance.
The Bidder/Contractor shall also treat the excavations executed for his own convenience, such as
temporary roads, in a way acceptable to TRANSCO.
If the Bidder/Contractor refuses to remove the temporary construction installations or if the
operation is not completed within 2 months from completion of the work, the materials and
installations may be removed by TRANSCO, and the costs shall be deducted from the
Bidder’s/Contractor's final payment.

2.3 Material
All equipment, machinery, materials and tools required for execution of the works shall be
workable and kept in good working conditions throughout the construction period, and shall be
listed in a schedule, which shall be subject to TRANSCO’s approval.

2.4 Auxiliary Work

Auxiliary work comprises but is not necessarily limited to:
 Cleaning and levelling of the area for site installation, including removal of any waste, etc.
 Surface drainage, soakage pits, sanitary installation, septic tank and its cleaning, removal
of foul water as directed
 Stabilised or adequately stabilised storage areas, temporary shelters for working spaces,
etc., as required
 Moveable fire fighting equipment
 Making good after removal of site installation.

2.5 Facilities at Site

The Bidder/Contractor shall provide offices as required by TRANSCO's supervisory staff during
the continuance of the Contract. The offices shall be located at a location agreed upon with
TRANSCO prior to the start of works. No permanent work shall be commenced without suitable
office(s) being ready for occupation and use as indicated. The Bidder/Contractor shall at least
provide a temporary pitched road with hard surface to the site office.
The Bidder/Contractor shall provide 2 fully furnished, air-conditioned (split type), sound- and
weather-proof site office blocks, connected by an additional conference room block, complete

S-TR-CIVIL-SITE (Rev.0-2014) Page 4 of 7

 CIVIL WORKS
Site Installation

with all electrical wiring and light fittings, plumbing and sanitary systems to the approval of
TRANSCO.
The tentative layout of these offices can be seen from the below listed drawing, which is
provided in the Drawings Section.
Drawing No. Title
DWG TR CIV 01 02 Site Office Arrangement

The office blocks shall be located in the project area and as directed or approved by TRANSCO.
Each office block shall consist of a "two room office", each office room with a floor area of not
less than 20 m2. The floor area of the conference room shall be at least 20 m2. A toilet and
kitchen shall be attached to each office block as well.
Toilet and washroom facilities shall include western style WC's and washbasins with hot and
cold water, extraction fans and shall discharge into a septic tank unless connected to a public
sewer system.
The following equipment and furniture shall be supplied for each office block:
 2 Station telephone/Mobile
 2 PC’s with associated printers and Email.
 4 Writing desks
 4 Swivel arm chairs
 6 Guest chairs
 2 Drawing hanger stands
 2 Bookshelves
 2 Pin boards
 2 Storage lockers
 2 Split-type Air-Conditioners
 1 Fire extinguisher
 1 white writing board
 Stationary as required.
 Window curtains for all windows.
The following equipments shall be general for both office blocks:
 1 Photo copier
 1 Fax machine
 1 Drawing tables
 1 Hot plate
 1 Refrigerator
 1 Water cooler

S-TR-CIVIL-SITE (Rev.0-2014) Page 5 of 7

 CIVIL WORKS
Site Installation

 1 Microwave
 1 Firs aid kit
 1 Stationary as required.
The conference room block shall be sized to accommodate at least 12 persons and equipped with a
 1 Conference room table ( 1.5 * 3.5 M )
 12 Chairs
 1 White board
 2 Pin boards
 1 Side Board.
 1 AC “split unit “of minimum 2 tons capacity.
Whenever required during the execution of the work, particular survey and testing equipment for
supervision of the work and testing of materials shall be made available by the Bidder/Contractor
for the sole use by TRANSCO's supervisory staff. Survey and testing equipment shall be kept in
good working order throughout the contract period and shall be replaced if reported damaged or
being inaccurate.
The types of instruments and equipment as will be required for the survey of the work and
testing of the materials will be intimated to the Bidder/Contractor prior to the start of the work,
e.g. at the first site co-ordination meeting.
For all site services specified, the investment cost for the full contract period shall be quoted in
the Bill of Quantities. Against issuance of the Final Acceptance Certificate, all provisions will be
returned to the Bidder/Contractor, unless specified to the contrary.

2.6 Regular Cleaning of the Construction Site

During the construction period until issuance of PAC and fulfilment of all outstanding items
thereof, the Bidder/Contractor shall provide a daily refuse collection and disposal service to be
loaded, transported and dumped at areas where prior permission has been obtained from
responsible authorities in order to keep the total construction site(s) properly clean and in safe
condition.
Neglecting of cleaning by the Bidder/Contractor may lead to waste removal by others and the
removal costs shall be deducted from the Bidder’s/Contractor's due payments.

2.7 Relocation / Protection of the Existing Services

Trial excavation trenches shall be carefully carried out (manually) to a depth of at least 1.5 m
around the entire plot/site area and diagonally (as necessary) across the plot/site area and shall be
done within two weeks after Contract signature. This is to find out and identify all cables and
other services crossing or bordering the plot/site before any damage may take place.

S-TR-CIVIL-SITE (Rev.0-2014) Page 6 of 7

 CIVIL WORKS
Site Installation

Any damage occurring to services located within the plot shall be the Bidder’s/Contractor’s full
responsibility. Compliance with the “Notice of Intent” requirement shall not relieve the
Bidder/Contractor from his responsibility.
For existing HV cables suitable culverts shall then be prepared in order to cover and protect all
these cables during the construction works.
Other services shall be treated according to the requirements of their respective Owner’s.
For the protection of underground services reference shall be made to the below listed drawing,
which is provided in the Drawings Section:
Drawing No. Title
DWG TR CIV 02 Protection of Underground Services

2.8 Fencing and Signboard

The Bidder/Contractor shall in relation to his work provide and maintain at his own cost all light
guards, temporary fencing and watching, complying in all respects to concerned authorities (e.g.
Abu Dhabi Municipality) regulations/rules, or when and where necessary or required by
TRANSCO for the protection of the work and for the safety and convenience of the public.
At the entrance to each site, a signboard shall be provided and erected by the Bidder/Contractor.
The signboard shall comply with the regulations of the concerned authorities, e.g. Abu Dhabi
Municipality, and TRANSCO.
For typical details of the sign board, reference shall be made to the below listed drawing
provided in the Drawings Section:
Drawing No. Title
DWG TR CIV 01 01 Project Sign Board

S-TR-CIVIL-SITE (Rev.0-2014) Page 7 of 7

 Proposed substation gate board for substation Revision : 0

TRANSCO substation gate board

Bidder/contractor to provide a gate board with at least dimension of (125cm X 80cm) made of AL plate with a minimum thickness of
6mm. Board to be attached with a suitable hanger to insure fixity of the board .Color codes for ADWEA and TRANSCO logos are
shown below. Also the dimension between texts and logos as shown below

S-TR-CIVIL-SITE (Rev.0-2014) Page 8 of 8

 STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRIC WORKS

CIVIL WORKS

( SPECIFICATION )

SOIL INVESTIGATION

TRANSCO STANDARD : S-TR-CIVIL-SOIL (REV.0-2014)

S-TR-CIVIL-SOIL (Rev.0-2014) Page 1 of 8

 CIVIL WORKS
Soil Investigation

CONTENTS

1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................... 3
2 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ...................................................................................... 3
2.1 Soil Investigation............................................................................................................... 3
2.1.1 Execution of Borings and In-Situ Tests (SPT) .................................................................. 4
2.1.2 Bore Logs .......................................................................................................................... 6
2.1.3 Laboratory Tests ................................................................................................................ 6
2.2 Geophysical Survey ....................................................................................................... ...8
2.3 Reports .............................................................................................................................. 9

S-TR-CIVIL-SOIL (Rev.0-2014) Page 2 of 8

 CIVIL WORKS
Soil Investigation

SOIL INVESTIGATION

1 GENERAL
This part of the Specification shall cover all items related to soil investigation works for the
Project. Works shall include all items required for the tendered Project, as well as all auxiliary
works.
All works shall further be carried out in full compliance with all local rules and regulations and
the Specification shall further be read, if applicable for the Project. Subsurface exploration shall
be performed under the constant supervision of at least one qualified soil and foundation
Engineer or Engineering Geologist, who is fully cognizant of the Geological and Engineering
considerations involved.
For applicable technical standards, tests, reference shall be made to:
 S-TR-CIVIL-GEN - General Requirements
(Applicable Technical Standards, Tests, etc.)

2 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

2.1 Soil Investigation

Soil investigations are to be performed in accordance with DIN 4020, DIN 4021 or BS-5930 and
BS-1377. Application of alternative standards shall be subject to TRANSCO’s approval prior to
the performance of the site and laboratory tests.
Soil investigations shall be carried out at an early stage of the project to determine the type of
foundations and the structural design of the buildings. Based on these findings, the
Bidder/Contractor shall propose his design assumptions to TRANSCO for approval.
Investigations shall be executed with the following minimum requirements at each site, with the
exact scope to the discretion and approval of TRANSCO:
 Boreholes down to 20 m (average), not exceeding 25 m. (Unless specified differently, at
least 3 bore holes shall be carried out for each main building.)
 Standard penetration tests at 1.00 m intervals and at every change of strata in all boreholes
 Plate (and other approved) load bearing tests under shallow foundations.
 Laboratory tests on the samples of each borehole.
 Soil resistivity measurements.
 Cone penetration tests (CPT’s).
 Evaluation of existing ground level with reference to the Survey Datum Level.

S-TR-CIVIL-SOIL (Rev.0-2014) Page 3 of 8

 CIVIL WORKS
Soil Investigation

2.1.1 Execution of Borings and In-Situ Tests (SPT)

2.1.1.1 Borings
The methods of boring shall enable undisturbed sampling as well as rotary coring. The minimum
borehole diameter for undisturbed sampling shall be 100mm. The equipment shall allow the
execution of Standard Penetration Tests and undisturbed sampling, for instance by using piston
sampler.
For the drilling works in cohesive and/or hard soils, a double tube core barrel of at least 3"
(7.5 cm) inside diameter shall be used exclusively, provided that this kind of boring can be
continued to the final bottom of the borehole in question. A 95% core recovery is required.
Beyond this, the Bidder/Contractor may choose for his own convenience the type of equipment
and accessories to be used at each individual borehole and depth, provided that in TRANSCO's
opinion, the equipment chosen is suitable for the drilling. The Bidder/Contractor may also
choose the initial and intermediate diameters of each borehole for his own convenience, provided
that he will secure the aforementioned minimum acceptable size of core.
Adequate casing has to be used to ensure the stability of the borehole. The Bidder/Contractor
will not be entitled to any compensation or additional payment for casing.
The method of drilling, casing and flushing shall be described in the offer. Bentonite shall be
added to the drilling fluid only after the explicit permission of TRANSCO.
It is to be emphasised that the Bidder/Contractor shall supply an equipment to take undisturbed
samples from cohesive and non-cohesive soils for laboratory tests, according to international
standards. The samples shall be treated in an adequate manner to avoid disturbances and drying
out.
All boreholes shall after completion of the investigation be refilled with sand and not left open.

2.1.1.2 Sampling
All soils sampled by SPT, undisturbed sampling or core barrel have to be properly stored. Non-
cohesive soils have to be kept in water-tight boxes or bags. Borehole number and depth of
sample shall be written on the cover of the bags and boxes, and the cores must be placed in the
order as taken. The corresponding depth of the material shall continuously be written on the
partition walls of the boxes. Undisturbed samples shall be of 100mm dia and 450mm length.
Samples shall be collected in such a manner that the structure of the soil and its moisture content
are not changed.
The borders between different strata and the sections of core boxes shall be fixed with thin
boards, and marked with the depth. Core boxes shall be designed for approximately 7 metre of
continuous soil samples. Before shifting the soil samples to the laboratory, the boxes shall be
stored accessible at any time for TRANSCO.
Ground-water and disturbed soil samples taken for the chemical analysis shall be kept in
watertight, durable plastic jars.

S-TR-CIVIL-SOIL (Rev.0-2014) Page 4 of 8

 CIVIL WORKS
Soil Investigation

Color print photographs shall be taken of all cores packed in the core boxes, suitably labelled.
Negatives and six sets of postcard size prints shall be provided.

2.1.1.3 In Situ Testing

2.1.1.3.1 Standard Penetration Tests
In non cohesive soils, Standard Penetration Tests (SPT’s) shall be performed from the cleaned
bottom of the boreholes down to 45 cm below. Standard penetration tests shall be carried at 1.0
m intervals and at every change in strata. The number of blows required to drive the sound each
15 cm into the soil has to be counted and kept in the bore log. Standard Penetration Test shall be
as described in BS 1377 Test 19.
The relative strength of cemented materials shall be tested with the Standard Penetration or
Dynamic Cone Tool, where core recovery is poor (less than 10%) or as directed by the Owner's
representative. The number of blows for each 75 millimetre penetration to a total penetration of
450 millimetres penetration shall be recorded or the test stopped at a total of 80 blows and the
penetration recorded.

2.1.1.3.2 Test Pits

The Bidder/Contractor shall excavate trial pits as and where directed by the Owner, of an area of
approximately 5 m2 and a depth not exceeding 2.5 m. The pit and carry out The
Bidder/Contractor shall carry out plate bearing tests in accordance with BS 5930 and BS 1377,
using plate bearing pressures of 100, 150, 200 and 300 kN/m2. Full records of load, settlement
and time shall be kept. The Bidder/Contractor may further be requested to carry out sand
replacement tests to BS 1377.
All protection of the pits shall be provided by the Bidder/Contractor to prevent accidents. After
the completion of the investigations, the Bidder/Contractor shall refill the pits by suitable
material (concrete or gravel) as directed by TRANSCO.

2.1.1.3.3 Cone Penetration Tests (CPT)

The Bidder/Contractor shall supply all required equipment for the "Dutch Static Cone
Penetration Test" for the separate determination of cone resistance and friction. The type of
equipment quoted for shall be described in the offer.
The cone shall have a diameter of 3.6 cm (= 10 cm2) and a peak angle of 60° and the maximum
load to be applied either by anchors or by dead weight shall be limited to approximately 15 tons.
In case cemented layers occur into which the cone cannot penetrate the Bidder/Contractor shall
pre-bore through the hard soil before the cone test is continued. However, this procedure shall
only be performed after explicit instruction of TRANSCO at site.
The Bidder/Contractor shall deliver copies of the original sounding records as well as the
elaborated cone test diagrams to TRANSCO.
In areas where access roads are not available and which are not accessible for the Dutch Cone
Machine another type of cone penetration tests may be performed after TRANSCO’s approval.

S-TR-CIVIL-SOIL (Rev.0-2014) Page 5 of 8

 CIVIL WORKS
Soil Investigation

The equipment shall be light, transportable with four-wheel drive vehicle or by hand. The cone
shall be driven by a hammer, in accordance with one of the International Standards.

2.1.2 Bore Logs

Detailed bore logs/field books must be kept for all borings. They shall include all pertinent data
and results and all observations, measurements or tests as directed by TRANSCO. The bore
logs/field books have to be submitted within 3 days after completion of each borehole.
Colored photographs shall be taken from all box samples and included in the final report.

2.1.3 Laboratory Tests

The Bidder/Contractor shall order Laboratory Tests to determine the necessary soil mechanic
parameters for the foundation design of towers and masts. The kind and number of tests to be
proposed by the Bidder/Contractor depending on the encountered soils and in view of his
foundation design TRANSCO and the results of the borings. The laboratory programme shall be
provided at least 3 days before testing, clearly stating time and location for the testing.

2.1.3.1 Classification Tests

 Particle size distribution by sieve and/or hydrometer analysis
 Specific gravity of soil grains
 Bulk density and dry density determination
 Relative density determination for granular soils
 Water content determination
 Atterberg limit tests.

2.1.3.2 Chemical Test

 Determination of chloride content in soil
 PH value in soil
 Total and water soluble sulphate content in soil
 Carbonate content in soil
 Organic matter in soil
 Sulphate content of ground water
 Chloride content of ground
 PH value of ground water.

2.1.3.3 Triaxial Tests on Soil

 Unconsolidated undrained tests

S-TR-CIVIL-SOIL (Rev.0-2014) Page 6 of 8

 CIVIL WORKS
Soil Investigation

 Consolidated un-drained tests with pore pressure measurement

 Multi-state consolidated un-drained tests with pore pressure measurement
 Consolidated drained tests.

2.1.3.4 Direct Shear Tests on Soil

 Consolidated drained tests
 Consolidated constant volume shear tests.

2.1.3.5 Strength tests on rock or cemented material cores

 Point load tests
 Unconfined compression tests.

2.1.3.6 Compressibility (Consolidation) Tests

The tests are to be carried out in conformity with international standards ASTM, BS and/or DIN
by a well experienced Institute to be named by the Bidder/Contractor and approved by
TRANSCO. Other standards are subject to TRANSCO’s approval prior to the performance of
the laboratory tests.
Aggressiveness of soil and/or groundwater in view of sulphates and chlorides shall be evaluated
according to the BRE-Digest 363 and the CIRIA Guide for Concrete Construction in the Gulf.

2.1.3.7 Ground Water Monitoring

Standpipe Piezometers (minimum 3 Nos) shall be installed & monitored during construction
period to record fluctuations in ground water level. Dismantling of standpipe piezometer shall be
as per owner engineer approval.

2.2 Geophysical Survey

The Bidder/Contractor shall carry out geophysical survey of the designated substation plot with
the aim of determining the ability of the underlying geology to support the proposed structures of
the substation safely and economically for the duration of the whole service life.
The study should cover the plot area and an additional extension of 30 meters on all sides of the
plot. It should be carried out using one of the recognized technologies prescribed in the
international standards which are most appropriate for the soil conditions at that location. The
study should be carried out on parallel lines across the full length of the plot including the
extension. Spacing between lines should be limited to 5 meters. The extent of the strata analysis
should be for 30 meters deep.
The survey should be augmented with calibration boreholes to confirm the findings of the
instruments. Number and location of these calibration boreholes to be decided and agreed with
owner/engineer. Contractor should give recommendations based on findings made in soil &
geophysical reports.
The geophysical survey report should include the following information as a minimum:

S-TR-CIVIL-SOIL (Rev.0-2014) Page 7 of 8

 CIVIL WORKS
Soil Investigation

1. Procedure of the survey and method adopted with the relevant backup documents like
plan of the plot and brochure of the method used for the survey.
2. General Description of the geological strata underlying the site plot.
3. Detrminination of presence of cavities and the extent of these cavities both horizontally
and vertically and/or determination of the likelihood of these cavities forming in the
future if not already formed.
4. Detrminination of presence of fractured rocks or anomalies of the kind, the extent of
these anomalies both horizontally and vertically and the consequences of the presence of
these anomalies on the structural integrity of the geological strata.
5. Recommendations regarding remedies for the cavities and/or anomalies in the plot site to
restore the geotechnical structural integrity of the plot.
6. Recommendation of the allowable bearing capacities in the plot based on the findings of
the survey and after implementing the remedies.
7. The expected short and long term settlement under the recommended allowable bearing
capacities.
8. The report should recommend the feasible and safe type of foundation system to support
the substation facilities with acceptable limits of settlements as per the recognized
geotechnical standards.

2.3 Reports
Field reports have to be handed over to TRANSCO at site including bore-logs with all pertinent
data, SPT results, ground water levels, cone penetration diagrams, test pit logs, as well as
readings of groundwater levels within three days after completion of the corresponding work.
Weekly Progress Reports on approved forms shall be submitted to TRANSCO at site.
On completion of all field and laboratory work, the Bidder/Contractor shall submit to
TRANSCO a Geotechnical Investigation Report, containing the procedure used during the
investigation, field test results, laboratory observations and test results both in tabular and
graphical form. Practical and theoretical considerations for the interpretation of the test results,
supporting calculations for the conclusions drawn etc., shall be included. The report shall contain
theoretical as well as practical considerations for the design and construction of the different
type’s foundations and any proposals which the Bidder/Contractor may consider necessary to be
made with regard to the parameters and dimensions of the standard foundations, as well as clear
recommendations for the need for special designs. The report should also contain field Bore Log
sheets too.
The Bidder’s/Contractor’s qualified geotechnical engineer shall visit TRANSCO’s office for a
detailed discussion on the draft report. During the discussions TRANSCO and the
Bidder/Contractor shall decide on the amendments that need to be made in the draft report.
Thereafter, the Bidder/Contractor shall incorporate in the report the agreed modifications, and
after TRANSCO approves the report, the Bidder/Contractor shall submit six (6) copies of the
final report (hard and soft copies, signed and stamped) along with a reproducible set of all tables,
graphs etc. At least two original copies with colored photographs shall be submitted to
TRANSCO.

S-TR-CIVIL-SOIL (Rev.0-2014) Page 8 of 8

 STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRIC WORKS

CIVIL WORKS

( SPECIFICATION )

SURFACE PROTECTION

TRANSCO STANDARD : S-TR-CIVIL-SURF (REV.0-2009)

S-TR-CIVIL-SURF (Rev.0-2009) Page 1 of 8

 CIVIL WORKS
Surface Protection

CONTENTS

1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................... 3
2 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ...................................................................................... 3
2.1 Concrete Flooring of Switchgear Rooms .......................................................................... 3
2.1.1 Surface Preparation ........................................................................................................... 3
2.1.2 Application of Primer........................................................................................................ 3
2.2 Floor Epoxy Coating of Normally Loaded Areas ............................................................. 4
2.2.1 Application of Primer........................................................................................................ 4
2.2.2 Application of Final Coats ................................................................................................ 4
2.3 Repair of Existing Concrete Floors ................................................................................... 4
2.4 Floor Hardeners................................................................................................................. 5
2.5 Dust Sealer ........................................................................................................................ 5
2.6 Concrete Walls, Plastered Walls and Ceilings .................................................................. 5
2.6.1 Preparation of New Surfaces ............................................................................................. 5
2.6.2 Preparation of Surfaces Previously Painted ...................................................................... 5
2.6.3 Coating Application and Systems ..................................................................................... 6
2.7 Painting of Woodwork ...................................................................................................... 7
2.7.1 Surface Preparation ........................................................................................................... 7
2.7.2 Painting of Wooden Surfaces ............................................................................................ 7
2.8 General for Painting and Coating ...................................................................................... 7
2.9 Ceramic Finishes ............................................................................................................... 7
2.9.1 Ceramic Floor Tiles........................................................................................................... 7
2.9.2 Ceramic Wall Tiles............................................................................................................ 8
2.9.3 Chemical Resistant Tiling ................................................................................................. 8

S-TR-CIVIL-SURF (Rev.0-2009) Page 2 of 8

 CIVIL WORKS
Surface Protection

SURFACE PROTECTION

1 GENERAL
This part of the Specification shall cover all items related to surface protection in civil works for
floors, walls, etc. within the Project. Works shall include all items required for the tendered
Project, as well as all auxiliary works.
All works shall further be carried out in full compliance with all local rules and regulations and
the Specification shall further be read, if applicable for the Project.
For applicable technical standards, tests, reference shall be made to:
¾ S-TR-CIVIL-GEN - General Requirements
(Applicable Technical Standards, Tests, etc.)

2 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

2.1 Concrete Flooring of Switchgear Rooms

This part covers epoxy floor screed with high compressive strengths, high abrasive resistance
and good chemical resistance for switchgear rooms.

2.1.1 Surface Preparation

After concreting, the floor surfaces to be coated or treated shall be thoroughly prepared
mechanically by removing concrete latency, grout and fine mortar coats to free the core concrete,
which is capable of carrying the coating.
When applying the first part of the coating system (primer), the moisture of concrete must not be
more than 4% .
When applying the coats, the surface to be coated must further be dry and dust-free. Sand being
used for cleaning has to be thoroughly removed (also from trays and deepening), oil stains (on
machines) have to be removed. In case compressed air is used for blowing off, it must be free of
oil and water.
Coating works shall in general be carried out as recommended by the manufacturer.

2.1.2 Application of Primer

The surfaces to be coated shall be dry, dust and oil-free. The primer shall be of a non-pigmented,
solvent-free two-component material), based on modified epoxy resins and subject to
TRANSCO’s approval. It shall be applied by spraying (air or airless) or by roller as well as by
brush.

S-TR-CIVIL-SURF (Rev.0-2009) Page 3 of 8

 CIVIL WORKS
Surface Protection

Maximum air and / or surface temperature for application should not exceed + 40oC, and the
relative humidity should in no case exceed 85%. Approx. 400 g/m2 pure material shall be
applied, depending on the absorptive capacity of the substrate.
If required, holes, broken-out parts, unevenness etc., shall be repaired with a solvent-free and
pigmented epoxy mortar. This mortar shall be mixed according to the film thickness required.

2.2 Floor Epoxy Coating of Normally Loaded Areas

Floors of normally loaded areas shall be coated by an epoxy painting system as follows:

2.2.1 Application of Primer

Two-pack epoxy resin primer, with minimum solids 30%. Application with brush or roller, or
airless spraying. After complete drying apply top coats.

2.2.2 Application of Final Coats

Two-pack epoxy resin top coats with minimum solids 60%, color according to TRANSCO’s
approval at site. Application shall be in two coats of the same color, without using thinner, by
brush, roller or airless-spraying. The first top coat shall be completely dry before applying
second.

2.3 Repair of Existing Concrete Floors

Where required, existing floors shall be repaired as follows:
• Protect all surrounding mechanical and electrical equipment dust-proof
• Remove weak and any loose parts of the screed with wire brush plus spatula, or by means
of light sand-blasting (if so decided by TRANSCO)
• Sweep off all loose material, utilise vacuum cleaner
• Apply two-pack epoxy floor paint, containing solvents (first colorless epoxy primer,
second two times epoxy top coat, both polyamide cured)
• For crates and holes larger than 0.3 mm, on the other hand, use a two-pack solvent free
epoxy resin, color-less, usage approx. 400 g/m2, depending on the absorptive capacity of
the concrete
• After approximately 10-15 minutes work ‘wet-on-wet’ to fill cracks and holes with a
two-pack solvent-free epoxy resin mortar 1:1 by volume with silica sand 0 - 0.3 mm
• Where the reinforced concrete structure is damaged to such an extent that the
reinforcement is already attacked by corrosion, reinforcement shall be exposed and the
concrete as well as the steel shall be repaired by methods suggested at an early Contract
stage and subject to approval by TRANSCO.

S-TR-CIVIL-SURF (Rev.0-2009) Page 4 of 8

 CIVIL WORKS
Surface Protection

2.4 Floor Hardeners

For normally loaded areas and where specified, the top surfaces of fresh concrete floors shall be
hardened by application of an approved hardening compound. The method and rate of
application shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations.

2.5 Dust Sealer

Where specified, and for areas below the false floors, the surfaces of concrete floors shall further
be treated with an approved dust binding coating compound. The method and rate of application
shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations.

2.6 Concrete Walls, Plastered Walls and Ceilings

This part covers surface protection for foundations, walls, beams, ceilings, etc. to provide
surfaces with high compressive strengths, high abrasive resistance and good chemical resistance.

2.6.1 Preparation of New Surfaces

The surfaces shall be free from dust, sand, oil, grease and other contaminants before pre-
treatment are provided.
Latency and the loose surface powder formed on new concrete shall be removed. The alkalinity
and porosity shall also be considered when painting concrete, masonry or plaster.
The surface treatment shall consist of sweep blasting. The surface must be dry and free of sand,
dust, oil or grease.

2.6.2 Preparation of Surfaces Previously Painted

On surfaces that have previously been painted with emulsion, a dry bristle shall be used to
remove contaminants, wet detergent cleaning shall only be used on those areas of heavy dirt or
grease contamination.
Surfaces that have previously been painted with gloss, eggshell or flat paint shall be thoroughly
washed with detergent solution, rinsed with clean water and allowed to dry.
Soft distemper or unbound water based paint shall be removed by water washing. Limewash
shall be wire-brushed and completely removed. Cracks shall be cut out and made good with a
fine sand/cement mix, plaster or proprietary filler. All loose and impoverished coatings shall be
removed back to a firm edge and substrate, and the surface shall be clean and dry. If after
preparation, the surface remains porous or friable a sealer and plaster primer or a weather-guard
masonry primer shall be applied.
Where the surfaces have been previously painted with high performance coatings, i.e. epoxies
and chlorinated rubbers, specialised surface preparation techniques shall be provided.

S-TR-CIVIL-SURF (Rev.0-2009) Page 5 of 8

 CIVIL WORKS
Surface Protection

2.6.3 Coating Application and Systems

Each coat shall be tinted, the color to be decided by TRANSCO. Prior to painting, samples shall
be provided by the Bidder/Contractor for approval by TRANSCO. In case of external
application, coatings shall be UV-resistant.
Surface preparation and application details shall follow the recommendations of the supplier
manufacturer of the paint and/or coating system. For further details see Standard Technical
Specifications, Part:
¾ S-TR-CORR - Corrosion Protection

Systems to be utilised shall be:

a) Sand-lime Brick Walls
- To be impregnated with two heavy coats of an UV-resistant silicate paint, odour less
and normally colorless.
b) Concrete walls and ceilings with outside exposure
- Coating system of an acrylic co-polymer based washable emulsion paint, highly
weather-resistant. Where specified. The paint system shall be as follows:
c) Internal concrete walls, plastered walls or ceilings
- Epoxy paint system, where specified. The paint system shall be as follows:
1. Primer and sealer coats.
2. Putty coats.
3. Two top coats.
- Coating system of an acrylic co-polymer based washable emulsion paint. Where
specified, the paint system shall be as follows:
1. Primer coat.
2. Putty coats ( 2 coats)
3. Two top coats.
d) Concrete walls, plastered walls and ceilings exposed to oil, mechanical and/or chemical
attack
- Chemically resistant epoxy coating system. The paint system shall be as follows:
1. Primer and sealer coats.
2. Putty coats.
3. Two top coats.
e) Steel Surfaces

S-TR-CIVIL-SURF (Rev.0-2009) Page 6 of 8

 CIVIL WORKS
Surface Protection

All steel surfaces, doors, supports, angles and other members shall be hot dip galvanized
and coated by an approved epoxy painting system. In case of UV exposure, top coats shall
be UV resistance.

2.7 Painting of Woodwork

2.7.1 Surface Preparation

Previously unpainted surfaces shall be smoothed down with sand paper, all knots shall be treated
with two coats of patent knotting, open grained and cracked hardwood shall be treated with
varnish reduced 50% with thinner. When dry the grain and cracks shall be filled with filler or
hard stopper, after preparation one coat of a suitable wood primer shall be applied. All wooden
surfaces in contact with concrete/blocks shall be treated with a wood preservative.
Previously painted surfaces shall be burnt off where necessary and any old and impoverished
coatings shall be removed; old defective putties shall be cut out, after removal of the old and
impoverished coatings, the surface shall be treated as defined under "previously unpainted
surface".

2.7.2 Painting of Wooden Surfaces

Wooden surfaces, doors, etc. shall be prepared as mentioned above and receive the following
painting system:
1. One wood primer coat.
2. Two coats of high glossy polyurethane lacquer paint.

2.8 General for Painting and Coating

1. The bidder/ contractor shall prepare sample panels as necessary to demonstrate to
TRANSCO’s satisfaction the pigmentation and surface texture that will be achieved during
subsequent application. Accepted sample panels will be used for comparative checking
purposes during the execution of the work.
2. Tests and material testing shall be carried out by an approved specialist/independent lab.
3. Coating system for any surface shall be from the same manufacturer.

2.9 Ceramic Finishes

2.9.1 Ceramic Floor Tiles

Floor tiles shall be either vitrified tiles (DIN EN 176 BI) or earthenware tiles (DIN EN 159 B III)
with a proven anti-slip performance class R 11 or better. Application, bedding, grouting and
surface preparation shall be as per tile manufacturer’s recommendations.
Size of the floor tiles shall be at least 15 x 15 cm, with a minimum thickness of 8 mm. For
skirting, special high quality tiles equivalent to those for flooring shall be provided.

S-TR-CIVIL-SURF (Rev.0-2009) Page 7 of 8

 CIVIL WORKS
Surface Protection

If no specific requirements are given, following guidelines shall apply:

• Floor tiling shall be bedded in a cement/sand mix ( 1 : 4 ) absolutely even and/or in
adequate fall to the floor gully according to the approved drawings
• Before laying tiles, floor surface shall be adequately cleaned and moistened and treated
with high a quality cement based water resistant tile adhesive
• Joint thickness not exceeding 3 mm shall preferably be filled with high quality cement
based, water resistant grouting
• At completion of the work, the walls shall be scrubbed with a brush using soap and water.
No acids or metallic scrapers shall be used in cleaning.

2.9.2 Ceramic Wall Tiles

Tiles, matching the floor tiles in size, and material shall be used. Thickness shall be at least
6.5 mm. Installation preparation, specification, bedding and jointing shall be done as for the floor
tiles.

2.9.3 Chemical Resistant Tiling

For rooms where high chemical attack can be expected, e.g. battery rooms, laboratories, etc.,
tiles as specified above and with high resistance to chemicals shall be installed. Testing shall be
done in accordance with EN ISO 10545.

S-TR-CIVIL-SURF (Rev.0-2009) Page 8 of 8

 STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRIC WORKS

CIVIL WORKS

( SPECIFICATION )

CIVIL CONSTRUCTION WORKS

TRANSCO STANDARD : S-TR-CIVIL-WORK (REV.0-2015)

S-TR-CIVIL-WORK (Rev.0-2015) Page 1 of 24

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Construction Works

CONTENTS

1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................... 3
2 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ...................................................................................... 3
2.1 Safety Precautions During Construction ........................................................................... 3
2.2 Material ............................................................................................................................. 3
2.3 Auxiliary Work.................................................................................................................. 4
2.4 Surveying Work ................................................................................................................ 4
2.4.1 General .............................................................................................................................. 4
2.4.2 Instruments ........................................................................................................................ 4
2.4.3 Auxiliary Work.................................................................................................................. 4
2.4.4 Site Survey ........................................................................................................................ 5
2.4.5 Setting Out of Works ......................................................................................................... 5
2.5 Dewatering During Construction ...................................................................................... 6
2.5.1 General .............................................................................................................................. 6
2.5.2 Execution ........................................................................................................................... 7
2.5.3 Method of Dewatering....................................................................................................... 7
2.5.4 Discharging of Water ........................................................................................................ 7
2.6 Earth and Rock Work ........................................................................................................ 7
2.6.1 General .............................................................................................................................. 7
2.6.2 Material ............................................................................................................................. 8
2.6.3 Execution ........................................................................................................................... 8
2.6.4 Auxiliary Work.................................................................................................................. 8
2.6.5 Tests and Properties........................................................................................................... 9
2.6.6 Open-Cut Excavation ...................................................................................................... 10
2.6.7 Stockpiles and Disposal................................................................................................... 10
2.6.8 Excavation and Manual Excavation ................................................................................ 11
2.6.9 Backfilling ....................................................................................................................... 11
2.6.10 Filling .............................................................................................................................. 11
2.6.11 Material for Structural Fill and Backfill .......................................................................... 12
2.6.12 Material for Non-Structural Fill and Backfill .................................................................. 12
2.6.13 Topping with Gravel “under foundation/ structural” ...................................................... 13
2.7 Piling Work ..................................................................................................................... 13
2.7.1 General ............................................................................................................................ 13
2.7.2 Materials .......................................................................................................................... 13
2.7.3 Reinforcement ................................................................................................................. 13
2.7.4 Execution of Work .......................................................................................................... 13
2.7.5 Basics for Test Piles ........................................................................................................ 15
2.7.6 Details for Pile Tests ....................................................................................................... 16
2.7.7 Driving of Piles (if applicable) ........................................................................................ 18
2.7.8 Foundation Work............................................................................................................. 21
2.7.9 Joints................................................................................................................................ 22
2.8 Cable and Pipe Trenches/Channels ................................................................................. 22
2.9 Grout under Base Plates .................................................................................................. 23

S-TR-CIVIL-WORK (Rev.0-2015) Page 2 of 24

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Construction Works

CIVIL CONSTRUCTION WORKS

1 GENERAL
This part of the Specification shall cover all items related to civil construction works of the
Project, including survey works, dewatering, earth and rockwork, piling work, foundation works
and auxiliary works. Works shall include all items required for the tendered Project, as well as
all auxiliary works.
All works shall further be carried out in full compliance with all local rules and regulations and
the Specification shall be read, if applicable for the Project.
For applicable technical standards, tests, reference shall be made to:
 S-TR-CIVIL-GEN - General Requirements
(Applicable Technical Standards, Tests, etc.)
 S-GEN-CDF - Civil Design Fundamentals

2 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

2.1 Safety Precautions During Construction

The Bidder/Contractor shall comply with all local regulations in respect of safety measures
during construction at Site. Reference is made to the HSE Plan.
During his works, the Bidder/Contractor shall take all necessary safety measures as defined in
"Safety and Engineering Practices" published by the Associated General Contractor’s of
America.
All local regulations shall also be adhered to. Proper strutting, sheeting and bracing, including
rearrangement of the installations when necessary, protection of slopes, methods of excavation to
reduce risk of slides, etc., shall be Bidder’s/Contractor's responsibility to meet the for design and
construction requirements.
Excavation shall not be carried out below or adjacent to existing building foundations until
under-pinning and shoring have been completed by the Bidder/Contractor.
Existing structures, foundations, and services shall be adequately protected or re-routed by the
Bidder/Contractor.
If existing cabling and piping are exposed during construction, suitable modification in layout
shall be considered or adequate protection or relocation of the service must be ensured.

2.2 Material
All equipment, machinery, materials and tools required for execution of the works shall be
workable and kept in good working conditions throughout the construction period, and shall be
listed in a schedule, which shall be subject to TRANSCO’s approval.

S-TR-CIVIL-WORK (Rev.0-2015) Page 3 of 24

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Construction Works

For all materials to be used and to be installed, the Bidder/Contractor shall give special attention
to manufacturer's written instructions and follow them carefully.

2.3 Auxiliary Work

All and any kind of work, materials, services, safety measures, etc., as well as all tests and
samples required for the completion of and for the verification of the executed works including
provision of the measuring equipment, gauges, marking-out pegs, etc., maintenance of the
gauges and marking out pegs during construction, and provision of labour required shall be
Bidder’s/Contractor’s responsibility.

2.4 Surveying Work

2.4.1 General
Surveying works shall include the survey and setting out of survey points as particularly
described hereafter, as well as the determination of UTM Co-ordinates (Nahrawhan Datum) to
the satisfaction of Town Planning Department. The results of all surveying works carried out
shall be submitted to TRANSCO and shall be adjusted, if required.

2.4.2 Instruments
Only instruments, recently calibrated by the concerned gauging office, and acceptable to
TRANSCO, shall be used. The certificate of the gauging office, latest issue, shall be submitted
prior to the start of works and whenever required.

2.4.3 Auxiliary Work

Taking all necessary safety precautions, shifting machinery and structures out of the required
sight-lines, stopping machinery, drilling, blasting, driving and other works causing vibrations,
removing all obstructive accumulation of water.
Refraining from hindering clear view or from causing refraction etc. restricting or stopping
traffic or persons and vehicles near instruments or in sight-lines during instrument observations.
Providing adequate lighting and duly considering all obstacles, which may interfere with setting
out of survey, and providing adequate ventilation to ensure the necessary view and to enable
personnel to stay in tunnels and shafts.
Furnishing any marking as requested by TRANSCO in connection with control survey, and
providing survey points in lieu of and/or in addition to the Bidder’s/Contractor's marks, in
accordance with TRANSCO's instructions.
Provision of adequate number of unskilled labourers and materials, as deemed suitable by
TRANSCO for the control and auxiliary surveys; provision and maintenance of survey
instruments and accessories, supply of all materials required for survey and associated purposes,
protection of all survey points, etc.

S-TR-CIVIL-WORK (Rev.0-2015) Page 4 of 24

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Construction Works

2.4.4 Site Survey

A topographical survey of the Site shall be carried out by a specialised surveyor to prepare the
following data:
1. Site Co-ordinates and levels.
2. Contour line drawings scale (1 : 500), with the contour intervals of 0.50 m or less.
3. Provision of a location map (Site Plan) indicating the site and foreseen access road. Scale
of these plans shall be determined according to the size of area to be investigated and
agreed upon during execution of works.
4. Cross Section Details in two perpendicular Directions.
Site Survey shall be carried out within two (2) weeks after Site Handing Over, and preliminary
results (in AUTOCAD format) shall be submitted not later than four (4) weeks after
commencement of works. Site Grading Drawing needs to be submitted for approval including
cross sectional details indicating natural ground terrain & finished substation platform levels.

2.4.5 Setting Out of Works

The Bidder/Contractor shall be responsible for the true and proper setting-out of the work and for
the correctness of the positions, levels, dimensions and alignment of all parts of the work and for
the position of all necessary instruments, appliances and services in connection therewith. If at
any time during the progress of the works, any error shall appear or arise in any part of the work,
the Bidder/Contractor shall at his own price rectify checking of any setting-out or of any level by
TRANSCO or his representative shall not in any way relieve the Bidder/Contractor from his
responsibility for the correctness thereof. The Bidder/Contractor shall carefully protect and
preserve the benchmark, pegs, etc., used in setting out the work.

2.4.6 Hydrological Survey

Hydrological survey involves the mapping of natural drainage channels, wadis and other water
courses in the catchment area to allow the preparation of flood risk assessment, occurrence,
distribution and movement of water. The measurable hydrological parameters for this
investigation include annual total flow volumes (or runoff), peak discharges and low discharges.
The survey shall comprise walkover surveys, review of existing aerial photography and review
of flood mapping data.
The objectives adopted for the hydrological survey include the followings:
1- Assess and map the spatial extent and degree of flood hazard and risk in the substation plot.
2- Review and analysis of historic flood information.
3- Identification of suitable calibration and verification of flood events.
4- Data summary of the channel drainage area, channel dimensions, measured discharges and
the bedding materials.

S-TR-CIVIL-WORK (Rev.0-2015) Page 5 of 24

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Construction Works

5- Average annual rainfall, Maximum annual rainfall, Maximum daily (24 h) rainfall &
Maximum hourly rainfall in the catchment area.
Hydrological investigation shall be executed with the following minimum requirements and
subject to the discretion of Transco/ Engineer:
a) Data gathered at site shall include
 Manual stream flow measurements.
 A site survey to obtain a channel cross-section, as well as channel
gradient, bed and bank material size characterizations.
 Qualitative observations of channel debris potential.
 Photographs of the site.
b) Annual and Seasonal Total Flow Volume
c) Peak Discharges
d) Drought Discharges
Based on the findings, the Contractor shall propose the design assumptions to Transco/
Engineer for approval.

2.5 Dewatering During Construction

2.5.1 General
Before the method of ground water lowering is selected, adequate knowledge of the ground and
water conditions has to be obtained from the results of a soil investigation and/or information,
which may be available from TRANSCO.
For the method and technique to be chosen by the Bidder/Contractor, the British Standard CP
2004 shall apply.
Where necessary, cofferdams, sheet piles, pump sumps, channels, troughs, inlet gutters, pipes
and any other required works to control and discharge water found in the work site to keep the
different work fronts free of any water during construction shall be part of the scope. The
dewatering system shall be designed and installed in such a way that alteration and extensions
can be made any time throughout the operating time, if necessary. Reserve unit shall be kept
ready for service when failure of any of the installed unit occurs. Hydraulic Calculation should
be submitted for approval.
The Bidder/Contractor has to consider the possibility of a temporary failure of the electric power
service and shall install emergency power units with sufficient capacity to feed the necessary
power to the installed unit at the moment of failure.
The Bidder/Contractor shall submit to TRANSCO, the detailed planning of the chosen
dewatering method and technique and the stand-by reserve units. The Bidder/Contractor has to
adjust the system if required by TRANSCO.
The Bidder/Contractor must ensure that drainage works will be eliminated without causing any
interference to his own work and that of other Bidder’s/Contractor’s operating elsewhere on the
construction site and to structures already erected or still in progress. Any damage occurring

S-TR-CIVIL-WORK (Rev.0-2015) Page 6 of 24

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Construction Works

during the above mentioned period shall then be made good by the Bidder/Contractor at his own
expense.

2.5.2 Execution
The Bidder/Contractor has to record all revealed data, which might occur during continuous
operation. The records have to be submitted to TRANSCO for information and checking by 9
a.m.
The Bidder/Contractor has to ensure the control of operation by manpower experienced in this
field round the clock, full operation of the dewatering systems during curing time of concrete
structures, removal of cofferdam, sheet piling, suction pipes, well points, channels, troughs, inlet
gutters, pipes, etc, after completion of dewatering.
In case of dewatering by means of the casing method the shells have to be extracted or filled up
with lean concrete.
Temporary buildings, structures and hard-standings and any other works required for installation
and operation of the dewatering systems, have to be removed after completion of the works.

2.5.3 Method of Dewatering

The Bidder/Contractor shall propose the method most suitable for dewatering of his excavations,
but shall proceed only after approval by TRANSCO. Approval of TRANSCO does not relieve
the Bidder/Contractor from any of his responsibilities.
The Bidder/Contractor shall take care to avoid undermining any part of the works or any
adjacent property by pumping. Should undermining occur, he shall immediately make good the
same to the satisfaction of TRANSCO.

2.5.4 Discharging of Water

The local laws and regulations shall be strictly adhered to: No water shall be discharged into any
watercourse or sewer without the permission of the Local Authority and of TRANSCO.
If the Local Authorities or TRANSCO ask for any pre-treatment of the water before discharging,
the Bidder/Contractor shall do so and he will not be entitled to any extra payment.

2.6 Earth and Rock Work

2.6.1 General
This Article applies to all earth and rock-work required within the Project for establishing of the
buildings, structures and underground services.
Generally, all buildings and structures shall be founded on bearing strata and all excavation work
for foundations have to be carried out in accordance with the approved design and drawings.

S-TR-CIVIL-WORK (Rev.0-2015) Page 7 of 24

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Construction Works

2.6.2 Material
The characteristics of various types of ground and allowable bearing pressure are defined in
DIN, BS, or the equivalent EN (Euronorm). Values applicable during design shall be verified
through the Soil Investigation.

2.6.3 Execution
The Bidder/Contractor shall carry out all kind of earth and rock- works, either by manpower or
by use of fuel driven machinery and tools acceptable to TRANSCO for the following:
 Clearing and grubbing
 Excavation of top soil
 Mining
 Demolition of existing structures
 Grading
 Open cut excavation
 Obstacles and archaeological findings
 Replacement of material
 Trench excavation for services
 Backfilling
 Safety precaution during earthwork.
If excavated material is rich in organic matter, it shall be stockpiled and after completion of all
civil and appertaining works, the green/agricultural area of the project area shall be reinstated by
placing the top soil layers as directed by TRANSCO. No additional payment shall be allowed for
such works.
Burning and blowing off of any material and use of explosives is generally not permitted except
where written order has been issued by TRANSCO and has been confirmed by the concerned
local authorities.

2.6.4 Auxiliary Work

All and any kind of work, materials, services, safety measures, etc., as well as all tests and
samples required for the completion of the work shall be included in the offer. The auxiliary
works comprise but are not necessarily limited to:
 Removing and storing of boundary stones, bench marks, etc., protection of surveying
points and designations
 Alternative excavation methods, where excavation has to be carried out in layers, i.e. close
to existing services

S-TR-CIVIL-WORK (Rev.0-2015) Page 8 of 24

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Construction Works

 Reducing the under-ground water level, difficult work caused by water, etc
 Removal of any groynes, buried pipes, wattle-work, fascines and the like that might
interfere with excavation profiles, irrespective of whether or not such structures are
specified in the Tender
 Excavation /removal of concrete plates, beams, floors, boulders, rocks, large stones or
foundations
 Eliminating unsuitable material from fills, and, if necessary, mixing of different soil
materials, spreading and compacting of filling materials in layers not exceeding 250 mm,
compaction tests every second layer all to maintain in the fills complying with the related
standard
 Transport of excavated material to fill or deposit, placing and spreading in layers according
to conditions and drawings, and careful compaction
 Grading of intermediate and top fill surfaces and slopes to fines and levels required
 Sorting of excavated material which, if necessary, is to be used for special purposes
 Providing, maintaining and later removal of driveways, maintaining existing ways and
roads; providing, placing, maintaining and later removing, conveying and dumping
equipment
 Protection/support to existing adjacent building or structures during excavation or draw
down the under ground water table.

2.6.5 Tests and Properties

The Bidder/Contractor shall prepare sheets for the necessary analysis of the field and laboratory
tests, and shall submit the sheets to TRANSCO for approval.
Controlling will consist of field and laboratory tests, such as compaction and density tests, grain-
size distribution, and shear tests. The following minimum tests have to be carried out:
 Tests analysing and ingredients of the existing ground water. Samples shall be taken from
different spots or as directed by TRANSCO
 Tests analysing the ingredients of the water used for performance of the work. First test is
Required before any works commence, further tests in monthly intervals or as requested by
TRANSCO.
- tests for specific gravity of soil as per ASTM D 854-58 latest issue
- tests for bearing capacity of soil for static load as per ASTM D 1194-57
- if "Replacement of Material" is required, grain size analysis as per ASTM D 422-63
- tests for density of soil in place of sand cone method for each second layer of
"Backfilling and/or replacement of material and/or roadwork" as per ASTM D
1556-64. Rate of testing shall be 1 test every 300 m2.

S-TR-CIVIL-WORK (Rev.0-2015) Page 9 of 24

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Construction Works

All tests have to be recorded in forms acceptable to TRANSCO. If not otherwise specified, the
minimum required degree of the compaction of the modified proctor density shall be:
 Under blinding concrete for shallow foundations and slabs on grade 97%
 Under pavements, under embankments. 95%
 Roads. 98%
 Under blinding concrete for pile caps and suspended grounds slabs 90%

2.6.6 Open-Cut Excavation

The Bidder/Contractor shall carry out all earthwork required for the execution of the structures in
accordance with the dimensions, levels, lines and profiles of the working drawings or as may be
directed by TRANSCO.
Open-cut excavation shall cover excavation in any type of soil found at the project site.
Excavation pits shall be de-watered as necessary. Material of open-cut excavation required for
backfilling shall be stockpiled on places selected by the Bidder/Contractor outside the Site.
Heavy equipment shall not be used for excavation within 20 cm of the final lines of the
excavation bottom.
The exposed bottom shall be properly cleaned from loosened rock, soft soils and water or mud
prior to commencement of concreting or filling work. The dewatering plant shall remain in
operation continuously to keep the ground water level sufficiently below the respective filling
level.
If excavations are executed beyond the established lines, the Bidder/Contractor shall backfill
with lean concrete at his own cost.

2.6.7 Stockpiles and Disposal

Excavated material accepted by TRANSCO to be used for backfill or for construction of other
permanent works shall be placed, if possible, in its final position, or otherwise may be stockpiled
or deposited on site at locations approved by TRANSCO. Disposal of excavated materials shall
be subject to TRANSCO's approval.
Soil not accepted for re-use and excess excavation shall be removed and disposed off to areas
allowed by the municipality of the Government or other responsible authorities. The
Bidder/Contractor shall trim and form the edges of soil to profiles and levels as directed by
TRANSCO. He shall also maintain without interruption the flow of water courses affected by the
disposal of soil material.
The Bidder/Contractor shall observe any agreements concerning the site, which may exist
between TRANSCO and other persons or authorities concerned.
The placing of materials within waste areas shall be made in layers not exceeding 50 cm
thickness in order to obtain an appreciable degree of compaction by means of the transportation

S-TR-CIVIL-WORK (Rev.0-2015) Page 10 of 24

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Construction Works

equipment. All traffic towards or from the waste areas shall be continuously directed and
changed for the total covering of the surface of such areas in order to take advantage of the
weight of vehicles for compaction.
The Bidder/Contractor shall not have the right either to additional payment or to claim due to
work required for stockpiling materials or to take to waste areas.
The cost of the transportation of materials from the excavations to their final destination
including any necessary temporary stockpiling and the additional loading and transporting
operations shall be included in the total bid.

2.6.8 Excavation and Manual Excavation

Any kind of soil at Site shall be excavated according to relevant drawings and shall be loaded,
transported and dumped at areas where prior permission from the relevant authority has been
obtained. Backfill material may be stockpiled nearby. On any excavation work, dewatering down
to the bottom of the pit must also be considered.
If obstacles below ground are encountered during excavation works, TRANSCO has to be
informed immediately and any demolishing, removal or relocation of such obstacles shall
commence only after receipt of instructions from TRANSCO.
Only manual excavation of soil for foundation work in vicinity of any services shall be
permitted. It shall be executed by means of spade or graft, etc. This shall be necessary for the
protection of any underground services in the vicinity of the construction to prevent damage to
live cables, pipes, pipelines, etc.

2.6.9 Backfilling
For backfilling of structures and areas, only selected imported material or approved well graded
granular material from the open-cut excavation shall be used. Use of any kind of waste or
building material or rock pieces for this scope shall not be permitted.
Dumped soil material touching the faces of the structures shall be of soft material. The material
shall be placed in horizontal layers of not more than 25 cm in compacted thickness. The fill
moisture content shall be adjusted to achieve a maximum of compaction.
The material shall be compacted by vibrator plates and/or mechanical tampers. The minimum
required degree of compaction shall be as defined before under Tests and Properties above.

2.6.10 Filling
Filling shall be approved well graded and selected material from excavations of predominantly
granular materials and free from slurry, mud, organic and other unsuitable matter, capable of
compaction by ordinary means.
Filling shall be placed in 25 cm layers and compacted at optimum moisture content by
mechanical means, where possible. Alternatively, where allowed by TRANSCO, fill shall be

S-TR-CIVIL-WORK (Rev.0-2015) Page 11 of 24

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Construction Works

placed in layers and saturated with sufficient water or otherwise compacted to produce maximum
compaction.
Filling around pipes and cables shall be of fine material to cover the pipe or cable by at least
15cm before the normal in-filling is placed.
All filled areas shall be left neat, smooth and well compacted, the top surface consisting of the
normal site surface soil, unless otherwise directed.
The Bidder/Contractor shall be responsible for the reinstatement of any surfaces of structures,
which may move or otherwise be affected by settlement of backfill.

2.6.11 Material for Structural Fill and Backfill

Material to be used as fill or backfill shall be well graded granular material. It shall be free from
contamination and shall not be taken from areas falling into Class 5 of the BRE Digest 363 and
shall have a grading curve close to the following:
SIEVE % PASSING
75 mm 100
37.5 mm 85 – 100
10 mm 40 – 70
5 mm 25 – 45
600 µm 8 – 22
75 µm 0 –10
Note: The material shall have a P.I. < 6

2.6.12 Material for Non-Structural Fill and Backfill

Material to be used as non-structural fill and backfill shall have a grading close to the following:

SIEVE % PASSING
25.4 mm 100
19.05 mm 70 – 100
9.53 mm 50 – 80
No. 4 35 – 65
No. 10 25 – 50
No. 40 15 –30
No. 200 5 –15
Note: the maximum allowable L.L. and P.I are 35
and 10 respectively

S-TR-CIVIL-WORK (Rev.0-2015) Page 12 of 24

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Construction Works

2.6.13 Topping with Gravel “under foundation/ structural”

The areas to receive topping with gravel shall be excavated to a depth not less than 125 mm
referring finish ground level. The bottom of the excavated area shall be plain, compacted, topped
and levelled with coarse gravel of 25 to 50 mm in size and of thickness not less than 100 mm.
Openings for oil collecting pits in transformer areas as well as gratings covering transformer
bays intended to be utilised as collection space shall be covered with at least 200 mm thick
gravel crushed rock of size 40 to 63 mm, unless specified differently during transformer and
transformer foundation design. Alternative systems may be proposed to TRANSCO for approval.

2.7 Piling Work

2.7.1 General
This Article applies to the foundation design/static analysis in view of necessary piling works.
Piling works shall be based on the findings of the soil investigations and/or information given in
writing by TRANSCO. Piles shall be designed for the required design loading (uplift,
compression and horizontal loads) in line with the approved foundation design.
Earthwork as well as all concrete and reinforced concrete work shall be as specified under the
relevant items. All site installations, auxiliary works, materials, services, safety measures, and -
as requested by TRANSCO - all tests and samples required for the completion of the piling
works are to be included.
The static analysis/pile design shall normally be in accordance with DIN EN 1536, DIN 1045,
1054, 1055, 4014 and 4026, or BS-8004, BS-8110 and other applicable DIN or British Standard.

2.7.2 Materials
All materials to be used for the piling works shall meet the requirements as specified below.
Cement to be used for concrete piles shall be selected according to the recommendations of the
soil investigations report. Sulphate resistant Type Cement (SRC), or under certain conditions,
‘Moderately Sulphate Resistant Cement’ (MSRC-type II to ASTM-C150) based on the
recommendations of the Geotechnical Engineer and approved by TRANSCO, shall be used. All
cements are to be in accordance with either DIN 1164, DIN EN 196, BS or the American
Standards ACI, ASTM C150.

2.7.3 Reinforcement

Epoxy coated steel is not required, deformed high tensile steel shall be applied.

2.7.4 Execution of Work

Generally, cast-in-situ (bored) piles with temporary casing method as per DIN EN 1536,
DIN 4014, DIN 1054, BS 2004 and BS 8004 will be permitted for execution. Immediately after

S-TR-CIVIL-WORK (Rev.0-2015) Page 13 of 24

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Construction Works

drilling, the reinforcement has to be placed, ensuring a minimum concrete cover of 75 mm, and
the pile has to be cast.
Spacers to be used shall be of the concrete type only. Other materials shall only be used upon
explicit approval of TRANSCO.

2.7.4.1 Drilling Operation

Where required, temporary casing pipes shall penetrate ahead of the removal of soil, likewise
during drilling above the ground-water table.
In the vicinity of underground water, additional water has to be filled up during the drilling. The
hydro-static head pressure shall be at least 1.0 m above the ground water table when filled boring
tools are extracted.
Casing shall extend to a sufficient depth below the stiff/solid strata to adequately seal off the
unstable soil material.
Casing pipes shall not be deepened by means of jetting.
Immediately after the drilling, the reinforcement has to be placed, providing a concrete cover of
75 mm, and the pile has to be cast.
Temporary casing shall be removed by rotation method. Other methods of casing removal shall
not be permitted, except in some cases/piles, where casing removal by rotating machine will
affect the existing services/buildings. In such cases, TRANSCO may approve the vibration
method for casing removal.
Concreting is to be done through tremie-pipes or equivalent devices to prevent segregation.
Concreting of each pile shall be a continuous operation and no (cold) joints shall be permitted.
The continuous flow of concrete shall be ensured by using pumps or other suitable means to be
approved by TRANSCO.
Each pile shall be installed to the correct lengths as shown on the drawings or when the pile
reaches the socket in the recommended bearing strata. Piles shall be installed accurately in their
required locations. In vertical direction, piles shall not vary more than one (1) percent from the
perpendicular. In plan, pile shall not deviate more than 75mm in any direction at piling platform
level.
The Bidder/Contractor shall submit to TRANSCO before start of piling works, a detailed
description of the equipment, materials and procedures that will be used for the piling work.
The description shall include equipment specifications, including catalogue data, manufacturer's
published specifications, loading capacities, protective devices, and test apparatus, detailed
installation procedures test procedures, as well as references concerning previously completed
piling work.
Installation procedures shall be such that adjacent piles shall not heave or move laterally. All
installation procedures shall be subject to TRANSCO's approval. Permanently installed shells
shall be cut off at the pile cut-off level.

S-TR-CIVIL-WORK (Rev.0-2015) Page 14 of 24

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Construction Works

Daily records of each pile shall be produced by the Bidder/Contractor. The records shall give
detailed information on the type, diameter, length, location, penetration into bearing strata, piling
platform level related to zero level, date driven, date of casting, volume of concrete consumed,
depth from piling plat form level to toe, cut off level, top concrete level, length of temporary
casing, length of permanent casing and details of any obstructions encountered. Records shall be
submitted in duplicate to TRANSCO every following working day by 09 00 HRS.
Each cast-in-situ pile shall be filled with quality concrete up to at least 60 cm above the cut-off
level of the pile to allow for complete removal of slush and other foreign matters etc. from the
main pile and thus obtain sound and uniform concrete. Pouring concrete into the pile shall be
carried out using the tremie pipe method as well as the concrete pump. Pouring concrete into pile
shall only be stopped once complete removal of slush and other foreign matter has been ensured,
or as directed by TRANSCO.
The heads of concrete piles shall be incorporated with in-situ concrete pile caps, etc., and the
concrete in the head of the pile shall be carefully broken away from the reinforcement which
shall then be cleaned and straighten as shown on the Drawings or as directed. The pile shall be
cut off at the specified level and the concrete surface must be horizontal, plane and free from all
loose aggregate.
The top portion of the pile reinforcement shall be protected with PVC pipes, polythene sheet
wrapping or equivalent means to prevent damages to the reinforcement when trimming the pile
heads.

2.7.4.2 Permanent Casings

For soils in areas classified as category 4 & 5 according to BRE Digest 363, permanent casings
shall be provided. The permanent casing length shall be 2.0 m below ground surface. Should the
ground water table be at 2.5 m below ground level, casing will be extended to become 3.0 m
below finished ground surface. This procedure shall be applicable for areas not affected by tidal
effects. For areas affected by tidal effects, casings shall project 0.5 m below the lowest water
level anticipated.

2.7.5 Basics for Test Piles

For Test Piles, reference shall be made to the below listed drawings, which are provided in the
Drawings Section:
Drawing No. Title
DWG TR CIV 03 01 Pile Loading Test Compression (Proposal 1)
DWG TR CIV 03 02 Pile Loading Test Compression (Proposal 2)
DWG TR CIV 03 04 Arrangement of Pile Load Test

The Bidder/Contractor shall carry out successful foundation load tests in order to prove the
suitability of the pile foundation selected. The results of the tests shall be submitted in a format
for approval by TRANSCO.

S-TR-CIVIL-WORK (Rev.0-2015) Page 15 of 24

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Construction Works

The following types of tests are to be considered:

a) Piling Type Tests (Preliminary Pile Test)
Prior to piling commencement the Bidder/Contractor shall install one test piles of each type of
pile proposed.
The piles shall be considered as acceptable in case the obtained load-settlement/heave-diagrams
do not indicate movements beyond permissible limits as per Tender Documents or the relevant
Standards.
Other (working) piles shall not be installed until the load tests have been conducted and the
results evaluated.
Type test piles shall not be utilised within the works and shall be treated in such a way that they
do not obstruct the further works.
b) Piling Foundation Routine Test (Working Pile Test)
The Bidder/Contractor shall perform routine tests on at least 2 % of the working piles, with a
minimum of 2 tests for each pile type.
c) Integrity Tests
The integrity of the piles shall be checked successfully after installation by means of sonic pile
testing equipment, at 100% of piles.

2.7.6 Details for Pile Tests

2.7.6.1 Loading
The Bidder/Contractor shall execute the test piles using the same equipment, which he intends to
use for execution of all the piles. The test piles should be of the same length and same type as the
piles proposed for the project. Loads shall be applied in the direction of the resultant force acting
on the pile.
The loading tests of piles shall be in accordance with the procedure outlined in DIN 1054,
DIN 4014 and DIN 4026 as well as ISSMFE recommendation on "Axial pile loading tests", Part
1, static loading.
Type tests (preliminary pile tests) are to be loaded to either 250% of the anticipated design load,
or to the ultimate bearing load. At least two load cycles have to be made during type testing, the
first reaching from 0% to 100% and the second - after off-loading - to 250% of the design load.
Load steps shall normally not exceed 25% of the design load.
For routine tests (working pile tests) a loading to 150% of the design load is required. At least
two load cycles have to be carried out, the first reaching from 0% to 100%, and the second - after
off-loading to 150% of the design load. Load steps shall be worked out in line with the latest
edition of the “Building Regulations and Guidelines” of Abu Dhabi Municipality, whereby
following load steps/cycles shall normally be applied:

S-TR-CIVIL-WORK (Rev.0-2015) Page 16 of 24

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Construction Works

LOAD (%) TIME SETTLEMENT CONDITION

0
25 1 hr S≤0.25 mm
50 1 hr S≤0.25 mm
75 1 hr S≤0.25 mm
100 1 hr S≤0.25 mm
50 15 min OFFLOADING
0 15 min OFFLOADING
0 - -
100 1 hr S≤0.25 mm
125 1 hr S≤0.25 mm
150 1 hr S≤0.25 mm
175 1 hr S≤0.25 mm
200 1 hr S≤0.25 mm
225 1 hr S≤0.25 mm
250 24 hrs S≤0.25 mm
200 15 min S≤0.25 mm
150 15 min OFFLOADING
100 15 min OFFLOADING
50 15 min OFFLOADING
0 1 hr OFFLOADING

Vertical movements have to be measured by means of at least four dial gauges; horizontal
movements have to be measured by two dial gauges only, with a precision of 1/100 mm. On
every increment, settlements shall be recorded after 30”, 2’, 4’, 8’, 15’, 30’, 1h. Movement of the
pile head shall be less than 0.25 mm within that hour, or until 2 hours have elapsed, whichever
occurs first, before the application of the new load increment.

2.7.6.2 Test Reports

Reports on pile testing shall be submitted to TRANSCO and shall contain, among others, the
following information:
 Layout of test equipment and description
 Pile identification, diameter and length
 Sketch of soil conditions and ground water location

S-TR-CIVIL-WORK (Rev.0-2015) Page 17 of 24

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Construction Works

 Complete records of level, load cell and dial gauge readings against date and time
throughout the test, preferably in a tabulation
 Graphs of load and settlement/heave versus time
 Graphs of settlement/heave versus load
 Remarks concerning any unusual occurrences during the loading of the pile
 Test reports on integrity testing of piles shall include clear sample diagrams of acceptable
signals for comparison purpose, as well as sample graphs indicating defects or doubts on
the integrity of the pile.

2.7.6.3 Evaluation/Conclusion
A safe design pile capacity shall be the least value determined in accordance with the
Municipality Regulations and this specification.

2.7.6.3.1 Preliminary Piles

The settlement of preliminary piles shall not exceed 1/10th of the pile diameter after final test
load is applied. In case, the pile shows higher settlement, the Bidder/Contractor must investigate
the matter and accordingly, pile must be redesigned.
Alternatively, the Bidder/Contractor may scale down the safe design load, and the pile layout
shall be revised with the modified pile capacity.

2.7.6.3.2 Working Piles

The settlement of Working Pile shall satisfy the following two conditions:
 Total settlement shall not exceed 12mm, and
 Residual settlement shall not exceed 6mm after final test load had been applied.
In case, the pile shows higher settlement, the Bidder/Contractor must revise the pile layout at that
location and in addition, two more piles shall be selected and tested near the failed location. In
case, the additional tests also do not show satisfactory results, safe design load shall be scaled
down and accordingly, pile layout of the concerned area/ building shall be revised.

2.7.6.3.3 Integrity Tests

All piles must pass their integrity test. A pile not meeting the quality requirements shall be rejected and
Pile layout must be revised at the failed location.

2.7.7 Driving of Piles (if applicable)

2.7.7.1 Pre-Cast Driven Piles

Driven piles shall be executed as per DIN 4026. Pile driving will not be allowed before
TRANSCO receives from the Bidder/Contractor the following reports and calculations for
approval:
 Calculation of refusal

S-TR-CIVIL-WORK (Rev.0-2015) Page 18 of 24

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Construction Works

 Proposal for the minimum penetrated depth of the piles through the ground
 Complete information about the driving and the hammers to be used.
Piles shall not be driven until the excavation has been completed to the grade required for
footings or pile caps. Piles shall be driven in the exact locations shown on the drawings to be
submitted by the Bidder/Contractor and approved by TRANSCO or as may be directed by
TRANSCO.
The Bidder/Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of location of each pile and the
grade of the off-cut. Driving shall be done with fixed leads, which will hold the pile firmly in
position and in axial alignment with the hammer. Driving tolerances shall not be more than one
per cent out of plump and not more than 5 cm out of place. Driving of each pile shall be
continuous without intermission until the pile has been driven to refusal or to total penetration
for the last ten blows not exceeding the design penetration unless otherwise approved by
TRANSCO. Any piles that are split, warped, buckled, damaged or imperfect in any way shall be
removed and discarded. If any driven pile shall have been raised by the subsequent driving of
any adjacent pile or by any cause, the raised pile shall be re-driven to its original penetration and
resistance. The refusal shall be with HILEY formula or any other dynamic formula subject to the
approval of TRANSCO.
Debris from pile cut-offs and damaged piles shall not be buried in required fill under slabs at
grade or in required embankments, but shall be disposed by the Bidder/Contractor off the Site of
the work.
A record of the driving of all piles shall be kept by the Bidder/Contractor, and a signed copy
submitted to TRANSCO daily. The records shall show the pile type, length, location, penetration
for driving stages and the results of any tests.
After driving, the concrete heads of the piles are to be stripped off, to the elevation required, the
binders removed, and the main reinforcement bent to form an anchorage into the concrete of the
pile cap. Care must be taken in breaking out concrete that no damage is done to the lower section
of the piles.

2.7.7.2 Driven Cast-In-Situ Piles

2.7.7.2.1 General
Driven Cast-In –Situ Piles are created by driving a temporary tubular steel casing, closed by a
removable steel shoe at its bottom end, to the required depth into the ground. The soil is thus
both displaced and compacted and the void for the pile created. Reinforcing and concreting for
the pile shall be done in line with the guidelines for cast in situ bored piles and the casing shall
eventually be withdrawn.

2.7.7.2.2 Material Details

Casings shall be free from distortion and shall be strong enough to be driven without damage.
Shoes to be used (and later remaining in the ground) shall be made from sufficiently strong and
durable material. The shoe shall provide a watertight joint with the casing during driving.

S-TR-CIVIL-WORK (Rev.0-2015) Page 19 of 24

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Construction Works

2.7.7.2.3 Driving of Casings

Casings shall be driven at adequate spacing to prevent damages to piles, which have recently
been cast and thus still contain un-set concrete. The length of driven piles shall be at least as per
the design schedule. Any change in pile lengths shall immediately be brought to TRANSCO’s
attention.
Driving of each casing shall be a continuous, not interrupted operation. After unavoidable
interruptions during driving, it has to be ensured that the casing is finally driven to the specified
design depth and driving resistance. Sufficient information shall be provided on the efficiency
and energy of the driving equipment. Dynamic evaluation and analysis shall be provided where
requested by TRANSCO.
Weight and fall of the hammer/ram and the number of blows for each 25 mm of penetration shall
be recorded, as well as the “Set”.
Hammer blows shall only be applied along the line of the pile axis and the impact surface shall
be perpendicular to the pile axis.

2.7.7.2.4 Set
Set limits shall be defined based on the working load, factor of safety soil condition and driving
equipment. During measurement of the “set”, exposed parts of the casing shall not be damaged
or deformed and the dolly, helmet, etc., shall be in good condition. Set, i.e. the achieved
penetration during driving and the temporary compression after completion of driving shall be
measured and recorded for each pile. The set shall be recorded either as the number of blows
resulting in a penetration of 25 mm or the penetration in millimetres achieved by imposing 10
blows.

2.7.7.2.5 Driving sequence and risen piles

The sequence of pile driving shall minimise any possible detrimental effect on other piles in the
vicinity. The permissible uplift of any pile due to the driving of other piles shall be limited to
3 mm.
Regular measurements (at least in weekly intervals) shall ensure that no adjacent piles have been
effected detrimentally during piling work.
If any pile has been displaced or indicates a higher than permissible uplift, load tests have to
prove the design capacity of such piles. If the design capacity cannot be reached, the
Bidder/Contractor shall propose remedial actions or design adjustments accordingly.

2.7.7.2.6 Reinforcement
Once the casing has been driven to the design depth, the reinforcement cage shall be installed.
Reinforcement details shall be as for bored cast in situ piles.

2.7.7.2.7 Concreting

S-TR-CIVIL-WORK (Rev.0-2015) Page 20 of 24

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Construction Works

Concreting shall be facilitated by pump, flexible hose, tremie-pipe or by bucket, as per the
approved method statement. Concrete quality and consistency shall be provided in line with
guidelines for cast in situ piles.

2.7.7.2.8 Extraction of casing

Temporary casings shall be extracted while the concrete within them remains sufficiently
workable to ensure that the concrete is not lifted. Rotating casing extractors must only be used if
their application has been accepted in the method statement.
When the casing is being extracted, a sufficient quantity of concrete shall be maintained within
the casing to ensure that pressure from external water or soil is exceeded and that the pile is
neither reduced in section nor contaminated.
Concrete shall be topped up as necessary while the casing is extracted until the required head of
concrete to complete the pile in a sound and proper manner has been provided. No concrete is to
be placed once the bottom of the casing has been lifted above the top of the concrete.

2.7.8 Foundation Work

All buildings and structures shall be founded on ground prepared as defined in "open-cut
excavation”. One layer of blinding concrete (thickness at least 7.5 cm) shall normally be cast
prior to constructing any foundation. Further minimum requirements are:
Concrete for blinding Concrete Grade 20 (i.e. C28 = 20 N/mm2)
Flooring screed in case of no tiling Grade 35 (i.e. C28 =35 N/ mm2)
Concrete for piling Concrete Grade 40 (i.e. C28 = 40 N/mm2)
Concrete for foundations and pile caps Concrete Grade 40 (i.e. C28 = 40 N/mm2)
Protection/sloping cement screed Concrete Grade 20 (i.e. C28 = 20 N/mm2)
Concrete cover nominal
- Piles 75 mm
- Foundations 75 mm
- Concrete in touch with soil (walls, beams, etc.) 75 mm
Reinforcement (*) - High Yield Steel Bars as per BS 8110 & BS 4449
- DIN 1045 & DIN 488/
DIN EN ISO 15630-1
Yield Strength * - Minimum value 460 N / mm2
Tensile Strength * - Minimum value 483 N / mm2
Strands for Pre-Stressing - DIN EN ISO 15630 and
DIN 10138 / BS 896- 1980

S-TR-CIVIL-WORK (Rev.0-2015) Page 21 of 24

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Construction Works

Water - Potable water

* Minimum value to be considered for routine testing only, for further testing, BS 4449 is to be
observed

Foundations shall be externally protected as indicated in the substructure water proofing system
of the technical specification.

2.7.9 Joints
All joints in concrete below ground shall be sealed by means of water bars.
Details of all waterbars, joint fillers, sealants and cover shall be fully described on all relevant
drawings and shall be approved by TRANSCO prior to materials being ordered.
Further reference is made to the below listed sample drawing, which is provided in the Drawings
Section.
Drawing No. Title
DWG TR CIV 03 03 Details of Expansion Joints

2.8 Cable and Pipe Trenches/Channels/ Micro-Tunnel/ Cable Tunnel

All Station cable entries shall proceed by PVC pipes, embedded in concrete, both ends extending
not less than 1.0 m beyond the boundary walls.
Entries and pipes shall be provided for the final extension stage in adequate numbers:
 For HV cables (diameter has to be approved)
 For MV cables (min. inner diameter 150 mm).
For applicable technical standards, tests, reference shall be made to:
 S-ELMS-HVAC+VENT - Air-Conditioning and Ventilation Systems
 S-FIF - Fire Protection System
All cable and pipe trenches/channels shall be constructed in reinforced concrete. The quality of
concrete shall conform to foundation works. Inside the channels, galvanised anchor rails for
supporting cables and pipes shall be embedded in the walls in intervals not exceeding 1.5 m. The
bearing capacity of the anchor rails according to load shall be designed/proven by the
Bidder/Contractor.
The channels shall be executed in sections not exceeding 12 meters. Water tight expansion joints
shall be provided between each section and sealed by use of permanent elastic filler. In pipe
trenches, the joints shall be filled by approved oil-proofed sealing compound. In case of long
concrete cable trenches adequate ventilation shaft to be provided with proper design and
approved TRANSCO/ENGINEER.

S-TR-CIVIL-WORK (Rev.0-2015) Page 22 of 24

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Construction Works

Cable and pipe channels at surface elevations shall be covered by prefabricated concrete covers,
designed for a traffic load SLW 60 according to DIN 1072. The length of each plate shall
normally not exceed 2.0 m. Provisions shall be made for lifting the cover plate by crane.
The edges of the recesses in walls and the edges of plates, pit recesses, lids, slabs, trenches,
trench covers, etc., shall have edge-protection of rolled steel sections, minimum size
45/45/4 mm. The steel sections shall be hot dip galvanised and –if required – in addition suitably
corrosion protected and finished as specified. The surface of the plates shall be plain trowelled to
receive dust proof hardener to be applied during concreting.
Concrete trenches, base and walls shall be protected externally as detailed for sub structural
concrete, and shall also be protected and sealed internally by the application of approved
pigmented sealant. Pre-cast concrete trench covers shall be protected on all sides by application
of two coats of approved clear sealer or approved dust proof hardener. Any cable and pipe
trenches/ channels deeper than 1.0 m shall be provided with permanent access ladder or rungs.

2.9 Grout under Base Plates

Only non-shrink, non-gaseous grouts, which shall be either cementitious or epoxy grouts, may be
used. Grouts deriving their non-shrink properties from metal oxidising (i.e. an increase in
volume due to oxidation) shall not be allowed. Minimum compressive and flexural strengths of
the non-shrink grouts shall be as follows:
Type of grout Consistency Compressive strength Flexural strength N/mm2
N/mm2
7 days 28 days 7 days 28 days
Cementitious Flowable 45 65 8 10
Epoxy High flow 80 >80 25 >25

Compressive strength shall be in accordance with BS 1881, Part116 and BS 6319, Part 3
(epoxies), the cubes size shall be 100 mm, and the flexural strength shall be tested in accordance
with BS 4551.
Surfaces of the concrete base, which shall receive grouts shall be cleared of all defective
concrete, latency, oil, grease, other chemicals and dirt, and shall be roughened by chipping,
hammering or other techniques. The surfaces of all equipment bases or base-plates to be in
contact with the grout shall also be thoroughly cleaned of harmful matter, i.e. oil, grease, rust,
etc.
Before grouting, concrete surfaces shall be thoroughly wetted, if possible saturated with water.
When a dry grout is used, surfaces shall be pre-treated with cement slurry.
All shuttering, if any, shall be of adequate strength and securely fixed to withstand the pressure
of the grout and shall be sufficiently tight to prevent leakage.

S-TR-CIVIL-WORK (Rev.0-2015) Page 23 of 24

 CIVIL WORKS
Civil Construction Works

Care shall be taken to ensure that the grout completely fills all voids to be grouted and is
thoroughly compacted and free of air pockets. Any areas or pockets, which are not to receive
grout, shall be properly sealed with an approved material.
The Bidder/Contractor shall take care that after the completion of grouting operations, all surplus
grout has to be removed and after a period of not more than 10 hours, the work shall neatly be
pointed and trowel led off and left in a workmanlike condition. Exposed edges of the grout shall
be adequately protected against damage and the effects of the environment during the airing
period

S-TR-CIVIL-WORK (Rev.0-2015) Page 24 of 24

 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
HV Towers of Lattice Steel Design (220 kV)

Sl. No. REQUIRED TENDERED

The Bidder/Contractor hereby states that in accordance with the design conditions
set forth in the present documents, the estimated net weight of the steel towers
will be as follows :

1.00 220 KV

1.01 Type of tower (net weight in kg)

1.01.1 S+0m Basic tower kg

1.01.2 S-6m kg

1.01.3 S+6m kg

1.01.4 AT + 0 m Basic tower kg

1.01.5 AT - 6 m kg

1.01.6 AT + 6 m kg

1.01.7 BAT + 0 m Basic tower kg

1.01.8 BAT - 6 m kg

1.01.9 BAT +6 m kg

1.01.10 BAT90/DE + 0 m Basic tower kg

1.01.11 BAT90/ DE - 6 m kg

1.01.12 BAT90/DE + 6 m kg

1.01.13 GANTRY (double circuit) kg

1.01.14 Tranposition tower (TR+0) Basic tower kg

1.01.15 Tranposition tower (TR+6) kg

1.01.16 Tranposition tower (TR-6) kg

2.00 SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS

2.01 Whether all type test reports enclosed yes

2.02 Whether technical literature enclosed yes

2.03 Whether relevant drawings enclosed yes

TENDERER`s STAMP SIGNATURE

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-OHL-T-220 (Rev.0-2009) Page 3 of 3
 Standard Technical Specifications for Electrical Works

OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES

( Data Sheets )

HV Towers of Lattice Steel Design (400 kV)

TRANSCO STANDARD : D-OHL-T-400 (Rev.0-2009)

________________________________________________________________________________________
D-OHL-T-400 (Rev.0-2009) Page 1 of 3
 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
HV Towers of Lattice Steel Design (400 kV)

Table of Content

Page

1.00 400 KV 3

2.00 SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS 3

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-OHL-T-400 (Rev.0-2009) Page 2 of 3
 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
HV Towers of Lattice Steel Design (400 kV)

Sl. No. REQUIRED TENDERED

The Bidder/Contractor hereby states that in accordance with the design conditions
set forth in the present documents, the estimated net weight of the steel towers
will be as follows :

1.00 400 KV

1.01 Type of tower (net weight in kg)

1.01.1 S+0m Basic tower kg

1.01.2 S-6m kg

1.01.3 S+6m kg

1.01.4 AT + 0 m Basic tower kg

1.01.5 AT - 6 m kg

1.01.6 AT + 6 m kg

1.01.7 BAT + 0 m Basic tower kg

1.01.8 BAT - 6 m kg

1.01.9 BAT +6 m kg

1.01.10 BAT90/DE + 0 m Basic tower kg

1.01.11 BAT90/ DE -6m kg

1.01.12 BAT90/DE + 6 m kg

1.01.13 GANTRY (double circuit) kg

1.01.14 Tranposition tower (TR+0) Basic tower kg

1.01.15 Tranposition tower (TR+6) kg

1.01.16 Tranposition tower (TR-6) kg

yes

2.00 SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS yes

yes

2.01 Whether all type test reports enclosed

2.02 Whether technical literature enclosed
2.03 Whether relevant drawings enclosed

TENDERER`s STAMP SIGNATURE

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-OHL-T-400 (Rev.0-2009) Page 3 of 3
 Standard Technical Specifications for Electrical Works

OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES

( Data Sheets )

Conductors
(400 kV, ACSR/AW)
CARDINAL

TRANSCO STND : D-TR-OHL-CON-T-400-ACSR-AW Cardinal (Rev.0-2015)

________________________________________________________________________________________
D-OHL-CON-T-400 ACSR-AW Cardinal (Rev 0-2015) Page 1 of 4
 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Conductors (400 kV, ACSR/AW)CARDINAL

Table of Content

Page

1.00 ALUMINIUM/ ALU-CLAD STEEL CONDUCTOR (Cardinal) 3

2.00 SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS 4

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-OHL-CON-T-400 ACSR-AW Cardinal (Rev 0-2015) Page 2 of 4
 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Conductors (400 kV, ACSR/AW)CARDINAL

Sl. No. REQUIRED TENDERED

1.00 ALUMINIUM/ ALU-CLAD STEEL CONDUCTOR Cardinal

(ACSR/AW)( 400 kV)

1.01 Manufacturer
1.02 Applicable standards IEC
VDE
DIN
ASTM

1.03 Cross section total mm² 547.33

1.04 Cross section aluminium mm² 484.53

1.05 Cross section alumoweld mm² 62.81

1.06 Stranded overall diameter of conductor mm 30.42

1.07 Number of aluminium strands No. 54

1.08 Diameter of aluminium strands mm 3.38

1.09 Number of alu-clad steel strands No. 7

1.10 Diameter of alu-clad steel strands mm 3.38

1.11 Ultimate strength kN 145

1.12 Modules of elasticity (final) kg/mm²

1.13 Coefficient of linear expansion 1/ °C

1.14 Standard mass of conductor per km kg 1,759

1.15 Nominal weight of aluminium kg/km

1.16 Minimum weight of aluminium kg/km

1.17 DC resistance at 20 °C mΩ/km 57.1

1.18 Standard unjointed length on reel (minimum) m 3000

1.19 Overall reel dimensions

1.19.1 diameter cm

1.19.2 width cm

1.20 Direction of outer layer right hand

TENDERER`s STAMP SIGNATURE

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-OHL-CON-T-400 ACSR-AW Cardinal (Rev 0-2015) Page 3 of 4
 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Conductors (400 kV, ACSR/AW)CARDINAL

Sl. No. REQUIRED TENDERED

2.00 SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS

2.01 All type test reports enclosed yes

2.02 Technical literature enclosed yes

2.03 Relevant drawings enclosed yes

TENDERER`s STAMP SIGNATURE

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-OHL-CON-T-400 ACSR-AW Cardinal (Rev 0-2015) Page 4 of 4
 Standard Technical Specifications for Electrical Works

OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES

( Data Sheets )

Conductors
(400 kV, ACSS/AW)
DOVE (14 EHSA)

TRANSCO STND : D-TR-OHL-CON-T-400-ACSS-AW Dove (Rev.0-2023)

________________________________________________________________________________________
D-OHL-CON-T-400 ACSS-AW Dove (Rev 0-2023) Page 1 of 4
 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
ACSS/AW Dove (14 EHSA)( 400 kV)

Table of Content

Page

1.00 ACSS/AW Dove (14 EHSA)( 400 kV) CONDUCTOR 3

2.00 SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS 4

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-OHL-CON-T-400 ACSS-AW Dove (Rev 0-2023) Page 2 of 4
 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
ACSS/AW Dove (14 EHSA)( 400 kV)

Sl. No. REQUIRED TENDERED

1.00 ALUMINIUM/ ALU-CLAD STEEL CONDUCTOR

ACSS/AW Dove (14 EHSA)( 400 kV)

1.01 Manufacturer
1.02 Applicable standards IEC
EN
VDE
DIN
ASTM

1.03 Cross section total mm² 328.52

1.04 Cross section aluminium mm² 282.6

1.05 Cross section alu-clad core mm² 45.9

1.06 Stranded overall diameter of conductor mm 23.55

1.07 Number of aluminium strands No. 26

1.08 Diameter of aluminium strands mm 3.72

1.09 Number of alu-clad steel strands No. 7

1.10 Diameter of alu-clad steel strands mm 2.89

1.11 Ultimate strength kN 98.3

1.12 Modules of elasticity (final) kg/mm²

1.13 Coefficient of linear expansion 1/ °C

1.14 Standard mass of conductor per km kg 1,119

1.15 Nominal weight of aluminium kg/km

1.16 Minimum weight of aluminium kg/km

1.17 DC resistance at 20 °C mΩ/km 95.7

1.18 Standard unjointed length on reel (minimum) m 3000

1.19 Overall reel dimensions

1.19.1 diameter cm

1.19.2 width cm

1.20 Direction of outer layer right hand

TENDERER`s STAMP SIGNATURE

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-OHL-CON-T-400 ACSS-AW Dove (Rev 0-2023) Page 3 of 4
 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
ACSS/AW Dove (14 EHSA)( 400 kV)

Sl. No. REQUIRED TENDERED

TENDERER`s STAMP SIGNATURE

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-OHL-CON-T-400 ACSS-AW Dove (Rev 0-2023) Page 4 of 4
 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
ACSS/AW Dove (14 EHSA)( 400 kV)

Sl. No. REQUIRED TENDERED

2.00 SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS

2.01 All type test reports enclosed yes

2.02 Technical literature enclosed yes

2.03 Relevant drawings enclosed yes

TENDERER`s STAMP SIGNATURE

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-OHL-CON-T-400 ACSS-AW Dove (Rev 0-2023) Page 5 of 4
 Standard Technical Specifications for Electrical Works

OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES

( Data Sheets )

Conductors
(400, 220 & 132 kV ACSR) Dove

TRANSCO STANDARD : D-OHL-CON-T-400-220-132-ACSR Dove (Rev.0-2015)

________________________________________________________________________________________
D-OHL-CON-T-400-220-132-ACSR Dove (Rev.0-2015) Page 1 of 4
 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Conductors (400, 220 & 132 kV ACSR) Dove

Table of Content

Page

1.00 ALUMINIUM/ ALU-CLAD STEEL CONDUCTOR 3

(ACSR) DOVE ( 400, 220 & 132 kV)

2.00 SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS 4

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-OHL-CON-T-400-220-132-ACSR Dove (Rev.0-2015) Page 2 of 4
 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Conductors (400, 220 & 132 kV ACSR) Dove

Sl. No. REQUIRED TENDERED

1.00 ALUMINIUM/ ALU-CLAD STEEL CONDUCTOR

(ACSR) DOVE ( 400, 220 & 132 kV)

1.01 Manufacturer
1.02 Applicable standards IEC
VDE
DIN
ASTM

1.03 Cross section total mm² 328.52

1.04 Cross section aluminium mm² 282.6

1.05 Cross section alumoweld mm² 45.9

1.06 Stranded overall diameter of conductor mm 23.55

1.07 Number of aluminium strands No. 26

1.08 Diameter of aluminium strands mm 3.72

1.09 Number of alu-clad steel strands No. 7

1.10 Diameter of alu-clad steel strands mm 2.89

1.11 Ultimate strength kN 98

1.12 Modules of elasticity (final) kg/mm²

1.13 Coefficient of linear expansion 1/ °C

1.14 Standard mass of conductor per km kg 1,085

1.15 Nominal weight of aluminium kg/km

1.16 Minimum weight of aluminium kg/km

1.17 DC resistance at 20 °C mΩ/km 97.45

1.18 Standard unjointed length on reel (minimum) m 3000

1.19 Overall reel dimensions

1.19.1 diameter cm

1.19.2 width cm

1.20 Direction of outer layer right hand

TENDERER`s STAMP SIGNATURE

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-OHL-CON-T-400-220-132-ACSR Dove (Rev.0-2015) Page 3 of 4
 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Conductors (400, 220 & 132 kV ACSR) Dove

Sl. No. REQUIRED TENDERED

2.00 SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS

2.01 All type test reports enclosed yes

2.02 Technical literature enclosed yes

2.03 Relevant drawings enclosed yes

TENDERER`s STAMP SIGNATURE

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-OHL-CON-T-400-220-132-ACSR Dove (Rev.0-2015) Page 4 of 4
 Standard Technical Specifications for Electrical Works

OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES

( Data Sheets )

Insulators (220 kV Composite)

TRANSCO STANDARD : D-OHL-INS-220-COMP (Rev.0-2009)

________________________________________________________________________________________
D-OHL-INS-220-COMP - Dove Conductor (Rev.0-2009) -40mm per kV Page 1 of 5
 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Insulators (220 kV Composite)

Table of Content

Page

1.00 220 kV INSULATOR UNITS (COMPOSITE TYPE) 3

2.00 INSULATOR STRINGS 4

2.01 Mechanical Values 4
2.02 Electrical Values 5

3.00 SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS 5

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-OHL-INS-220-COMP - Dove Conductor (Rev.0-2009) -40mm per kV Page 2 of 5
 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Insulators (220 kV Composite)

Sl. No. REQUIRED TENDERED

1.00 220 kV INSULATOR UNITS (COMPOSITE TYPE)

1.01 Type long-rod

1.02 Material HTV silicone rubber

1.03 Manufacturer
1.03.1 name
1.03.2 country of manufacturing
1.04 Applicable standards IEC
VDE
DIN

1.05 Type test

1.05.1 carried out yes

1.05.2 in the year year

1.05.3 testing station

1.05.3.1 name
1.05.3.2 country
1.06 Minimum creepage distance mm 9,800

1.07 Maximum working load kN 45

1.08 Minimum specified mechanical load kN 225

1.09 Minimum routine test load kN 128

1.10 Core diameter

1.10.1 material
1.10.2 diameter mm

1.11 Sheds
1.11.1 material
1.11.2 number No.

1.11.3 diameter mm

1.11.4 spacing mm

1.11.5 inclination
1.11.5.1 upside °C

1.11.5.2 downside °C

TENDERER`s STAMP SIGNATURE

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-OHL-INS-220-COMP - Dove Conductor (Rev.0-2009) -40mm per kV Page 3 of 5
 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Insulators (220 kV Composite)

Sl. No. REQUIRED TENDERED

1.12 Caps
1.12.1 material forged steel

1.12.2 type of connection clevis-cap

1.13 Length of insulator mm

1.14 Mass kg

2.00 INSULATOR STRINGS

2.01 Mechanical Values

2.01.1 Single suspension string
2.01.1.1 number of insulators 1

2.01.1.2 total string length mm

2.01.1.3 arcing distance mm

2.01.1.4 mass of complete string kg

2.01.1.5 maximum working load kN

2.01.2 Double suspension string

2.01.2.1 number of insulators 2

2.01.2.2 spacing of Insulators mm

2.01.2.3 total string length mm

2.01.2.4 arcing distance mm

2.01.2.5 mass of complete string kg

2.01.2.6 maximum working load kN

2.01.3 Single tension string

2.01.3.1 number of insulators 1

2.01.3.2 total string length mm

2.01.3.3 arcing distance mm

2.01.3.4 mass of complete string kg

2.01.3.5 maximum working load kN

TENDERER`s STAMP SIGNATURE

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-OHL-INS-220-COMP - Dove Conductor (Rev.0-2009) -40mm per kV Page 4 of 5
 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Insulators (220 kV Composite)

Sl. No. REQUIRED TENDERED

2.01.4 Double tension string

2.01.4.1 number of insulators 2

2.01.4.2 total string length mm

2.01.4.3 spacing of insulators mm

2.01.4.4 arcing distance mm

2.01.4.5 mass of complete string kg

2.01.4.6 maximum working load kN

2.01.5 Vee-string
2.01.5.1 number of insulators 2

2.01.5.2 angle of Vee °C

2.01.5.3 total string length mm

2.01.5.4 arcing distance mm

2.01.5.5 mass of complete string kg

2.01.5.6 maximum working load kN

2.02 Electrical Values

2.02.1 Lightning impulse withstand voltage (dry) kV 1,050

2.02.2 Switching impulse withstand voltage (wet) kV N/A

2.02.3 Power frequency withstand voltage (wet) kV 460

2.02.4 Maximum RIV above 1µ volt across 300 ohm db 40

at 1MHz and 150 kV
2.02.5 Minimum corona extinction voltage kV 185

3.00 SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS

3.01 Whether all type test reports enclosed yes

3.02 Whether technical literature enclosed yes

3.03 Whether relevant drawings enclosed yes

TENDERER`s STAMP SIGNATURE

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-OHL-INS-220-COMP - Dove Conductor (Rev.0-2009) -40mm per kV Page 5 of 5
 Standard Technical Specifications for Electrical Works

OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES

( Data Sheets )

Insulators (220 kV Composite)

TRANSCO STANDARD : D-OHL-INS-400-COMP (Rev.0-2009)

________________________________________________________________________________________
D-OHL-INS-400-COMP - Dove Conductor (Rev.0-2023) -40mm per kV Page 1 of 5
 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Insulators 400 kV Composite)

Table of Content

Page

1.00 400 kV INSULATOR UNITS (COMPOSITE TYPE) 3

2.00 INSULATOR STRINGS 4

2.01 Mechanical Values 4
2.02 Electrical Values 5

3.00 SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS 5

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-OHL-INS-400-COMP - Dove Conductor (Rev.0-2023) -40mm per kV Page 2 of 5
 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Insulators (400 kV Composite)

Sl. No. REQUIRED TENDERED

1.00 400 kV INSULATOR UNITS (COMPOSITE TYPE)

1.01 Type long-rod

1.02 Material HTV silicone rubber

1.03 Manufacturer
1.03.1 name
1.03.2 country of manufacturing
1.04 Applicable standards IEC
VDE
DIN

1.05 Type test

1.05.1 carried out yes

1.05.2 in the year year

1.05.3 testing station

1.05.3.1 name
1.05.3.2 country
1.06 Minimum creepage distance mm 16,800

1.07 Maximum working load kN

1.08 Minimum specified mechanical load kN 310

1.09 Minimum routine test load kN 176

1.10 Core diameter

1.10.1 material
1.10.2 diameter mm

1.11 Sheds
1.11.1 material
1.11.2 number No.

1.11.3 diameter mm

1.11.4 spacing mm

1.11.5 inclination
1.11.5.1 upside °C

1.11.5.2 downside °C

TENDERER`s STAMP SIGNATURE

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-OHL-INS-400-COMP - Dove Conductor (Rev.0-2023) -40mm per kV Page 3 of 5
1.12 Caps
1.12.1 material forged steel

1.12.2 type of connection clevis-cap

1.13 Length of insulator mm

1.14 Mass kg

2.00 INSULATOR STRINGS

2.01 Mechanical Values

2.01.1 Single suspension string
2.01.1.1 number of insulators 1

2.01.1.2 total string length mm

2.01.1.3 arcing distance mm

2.01.1.4 mass of complete string kg

2.01.1.5 maximum working load kN

2.01.2 Double suspension string

2.01.2.1 number of insulators 2

2.01.2.2 spacing of Insulators mm

2.01.2.3 total string length mm

2.01.2.4 arcing distance mm

2.01.2.5 mass of complete string kg

2.01.2.6 maximum working load kN

2.01.3 Single tension string

2.01.3.1 number of insulators 1

2.01.3.2 total string length mm

2.01.3.3 arcing distance mm

2.01.3.4 mass of complete string kg

2.01.3.5 maximum working load kN

2.01.4 Double tension string

2.01.4.1 number of insulators 2

2.01.4.2 total string length mm

2.01.4.3 spacing of insulators mm

2.01.4.4 arcing distance mm

2.01.4.5 mass of complete string kg

2.01.4.6 maximum working load kN

2.01.5 Vee-string
TENDERER`s STAMP SIGNATURE

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-OHL-INS-400-COMP - Dove Conductor (Rev.0-2023) -40mm per kV Page 4 of 5
2.01.5.1 number of insulators 2

2.01.5.2 angle of Vee °C

2.01.5.3 total string length mm

2.01.5.4 arcing distance mm

2.01.5.5 mass of complete string kg

2.01.5.6 maximum working load kN

2.02 Electrical Values

2.02.1 Lightning impulse withstand voltage (dry) kV 1,425

2.02.2 Switching impulse withstand voltage (wet) kV 1,050

2.02.3 Power frequency withstand voltage (wet) kV 630

2.02.4 Maximum RIV above 1µ volt across 300 ohm db 46

at 1MHz and 320 kV
2.02.5 Minimum corona extinction voltage kV 260

2.2.6 Maximum Operating Temperature withstandabilty °C

3.00 SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS

3.01 Whether all type test reports enclosed yes

3.02 Whether technical literature enclosed yes

3.03 Whether relevant drawings enclosed yes

TENDERER`s STAMP SIGNATURE

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-OHL-INS-400-COMP - Dove Conductor (Rev.0-2023) -40mm per kV Page 5 of 5
 Standard Technical Specifications for Electrical Works

OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES

( Data Sheets )

Insulators (220 kV Composite)

TRANSCO STANDARD : D-OHL-INS-400-COMP (Rev.0-2009)

________________________________________________________________________________________
D-OHL-INS-400-COMP - Dove Conductor (Rev.0-2023) -45mm per kV Page 1 of 5
 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Insulators 400 kV Composite)

Table of Content

Page

1.00 400 kV INSULATOR UNITS (COMPOSITE TYPE) 3

2.00 INSULATOR STRINGS 4

2.01 Mechanical Values 4
2.02 Electrical Values 5

3.00 SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS 5

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-OHL-INS-400-COMP - Dove Conductor (Rev.0-2023) -45mm per kV Page 2 of 5
 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Insulators (400 kV Composite)

Sl. No. REQUIRED TENDERED

1.00 400 kV INSULATOR UNITS (COMPOSITE TYPE)

1.01 Type long-rod

1.02 Material HTV silicone rubber

1.03 Manufacturer
1.03.1 name
1.03.2 country of manufacturing
1.04 Applicable standards IEC
VDE
DIN

1.05 Type test

1.05.1 carried out yes

1.05.2 in the year year

1.05.3 testing station

1.05.3.1 name
1.05.3.2 country
1.06 Minimum creepage distance mm 18,900

1.07 Maximum working load kN

1.08 Minimum specified mechanical load kN 310

1.09 Minimum routine test load kN 176

1.10 Core diameter

1.10.1 material
1.10.2 diameter mm

1.11 Sheds
1.11.1 material
1.11.2 number No.

1.11.3 diameter mm

1.11.4 spacing mm

1.11.5 inclination
1.11.5.1 upside °C

1.11.5.2 downside °C

TENDERER`s STAMP SIGNATURE

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-OHL-INS-400-COMP - Dove Conductor (Rev.0-2023) -45mm per kV Page 3 of 5
 1.12 Caps
1.12.1 material forged steel

1.12.2 type of connection clevis-cap

1.13 Length of insulator mm

1.14 Mass kg

2.00 INSULATOR STRINGS

2.01 Mechanical Values

2.01.1 Single suspension string
2.01.1.1 number of insulators 1

2.01.1.2 total string length mm

2.01.1.3 arcing distance mm

2.01.1.4 mass of complete string kg

2.01.1.5 maximum working load kN

2.01.2 Double suspension string

2.01.2.1 number of insulators 2

2.01.2.2 spacing of Insulators mm

2.01.2.3 total string length mm

2.01.2.4 arcing distance mm

2.01.2.5 mass of complete string kg

2.01.2.6 maximum working load kN

2.01.3 Single tension string

2.01.3.1 number of insulators 1

2.01.3.2 total string length mm

2.01.3.3 arcing distance mm

2.01.3.4 mass of complete string kg

2.01.3.5 maximum working load kN

2.01.4 Double tension string

2.01.4.1 number of insulators 2

2.01.4.2 total string length mm

2.01.4.3 spacing of insulators mm

2.01.4.4 arcing distance mm

2.01.4.5 mass of complete string kg

2.01.4.6 maximum working load kN

2.01.5 Vee-string

TENDERER`s STAMP SIGNATURE

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-OHL-INS-400-COMP - Dove Conductor (Rev.0-2023) -45mm per kV Page 4 of 5
 2.01.5.1 number of insulators 2

2.01.5.2 angle of Vee °C

2.01.5.3 total string length mm

2.01.5.4 arcing distance mm

2.01.5.5 mass of complete string kg

2.01.5.6 maximum working load kN

2.02 Electrical Values

2.02.1 Lightning impulse withstand voltage (dry) kV 1,425

2.02.2 Switching impulse withstand voltage (wet) kV 1,050

2.02.3 Power frequency withstand voltage (wet) kV 630

2.02.4 Maximum RIV above 1µ volt across 300 ohm db 46

at 1MHz and 320 kV
2.02.5 Minimum corona extinction voltage kV 260

2.2.6 Maximum Operating Temperature withstandabilty °C

3.00 SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS

3.01 Whether all type test reports enclosed yes

3.02 Whether technical literature enclosed yes

3.03 Whether relevant drawings enclosed yes

TENDERER`s STAMP SIGNATURE

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-OHL-INS-400-COMP - Dove Conductor (Rev.0-2023) -45mm per kV Page 5 of 5
 Standard Technical Specifications for Electrical Works

OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES

( Data Sheets )

Insulators (400 kV Composite)

TRANSCO STANDARD : D-OHL-INS-400-COMP (Rev.0-2015)

________________________________________________________________________________________
D-OHL-INS-400-Post -COMP - Dove Conductor (Rev.0-2023)-45mm per kV Page 1 of 5
 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Insulators (400 kV Composite)

Table of Content

Page

1.00 400 kV INSULATOR UNITS (COMPOSITE TYPE) 3

2.00 INSULATOR STRINGS 4

2.01 Mechanical Values 4
2.02 Electrical Values 5

3.00 SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS 5

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-OHL-INS-400-Post -COMP - Dove Conductor (Rev.0-2023)-45mm per kV Page 2 of 5
 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Insulators (400 kV Composite)

Sl. No. REQUIRED TENDERED

1.00 400 kV INSULATOR UNITS (COMPOSITE TYPE)

1.01 Type long-rod

1.02 Material HTV silicone rubber

1.03 Manufacturer
1.03.1 name
1.03.2 country of manufacturing
1.04 Applicable standards IEC
VDE
DIN

1.05 Type test

1.05.1 carried out yes

1.05.2 in the year year

1.05.3 testing station

1.05.3.1 name
1.05.3.2 country
1.06 Nominal creepage distance mm 18,900

1.07 Specified Cantilver Load (SCL) kN >5.0

1.08 Max Design Cantilver Load (MDCL) kN >2.5

1.09

1.10 Core diameter

1.10.1 material
1.10.2 diameter mm

1.11 Sheds
1.11.1 material
1.11.2 number No.

1.11.3 diameter mm

1.11.4 spacing mm

1.11.5 inclination
1.11.5.1 upside °C

1.11.5.2 downside °C

TENDERER`s STAMP SIGNATURE

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-OHL-INS-400-Post -COMP - Dove Conductor (Rev.0-2023)-45mm per kV Page 3 of 5
 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Insulators (400 kV Composite)

Sl. No. REQUIRED TENDERED

1.12 Caps
1.12.1 material forged steel

1.12.2 type of connection clevis-cap

1.13 Length of insulator mm

1.14 Mass kg

2.00 INSULATOR STRINGS

2.01 Mechanical Values

2.01.1 Single suspension string
2.01.1.1 number of insulators 1

2.01.1.2 total string length mm

2.01.1.3 arcing distance mm

2.01.1.4 mass of complete string kg

2.01.1.5 maximum working load kN

2.01.2 Double suspension string

2.01.2.1 number of insulators 2

2.01.2.2 spacing of Insulators mm

2.01.2.3 total string length mm

2.01.2.4 arcing distance mm

2.01.2.5 mass of complete string kg

2.01.2.6 maximum working load kN

2.01.3 Single tension string

2.01.3.1 number of insulators 1

2.01.3.2 total string length mm

2.01.3.3 arcing distance mm

2.01.3.4 mass of complete string kg

2.01.3.5 maximum working load kN

2.01.4 Double tension string

2.01.4.1 number of insulators 2

2.01.4.2 total string length mm

TENDERER`s STAMP SIGNATURE

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-OHL-INS-400-Post -COMP - Dove Conductor (Rev.0-2023)-45mm per kV Page 4 of 5
 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Insulators (400 kV Composite)

Sl. No. REQUIRED TENDERED

2.01.4.3 spacing of insulators mm

2.01.4.4 arcing distance mm

2.01.4.5 mass of complete string kg

2.01.4.6 maximum working load kN

2.01.5 Vee-string
2.01.5.1 number of insulators 2

2.01.5.2 angle of Vee °C

2.01.5.3 total string length mm

2.01.5.4 arcing distance mm

2.01.5.5 mass of complete string kg

2.01.5.6 maximum working load kN

2.02 Electrical Values

2.02.1 Lightning impulse withstand voltage (dry) kV 1,425

2.02.2 Switching impulse withstand voltage (wet) kV 1,050

2.02.3 Power frequency withstand voltage (wet) kV 630

2.02.4 Maximum RIV above 1µ volt across 300 ohm dB 46

at 1MHz and 260kV
2.02.5 Minimum corona extinction voltage kV 320

3.00 SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS

3.01 Whether all type test reports enclosed yes

3.02 Whether technical literature enclosed yes

3.03 Whether relevant drawings enclosed yes

TENDERER`s STAMP SIGNATURE

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-OHL-INS-400-Post -COMP - Dove Conductor (Rev.0-2023)-45mm per kV Page 5 of 5
 Standard Technical Specifications for Electrical Works

OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES

( Data Sheets )

Insulators (400 kV Composite)

SUSPENSION INSULATORS

TRANSCO STANDARD : D-TR-OHL-INS-400-COMP (Rev.0-2011)

________________________________________________________________________________________
D-TR-OHL-INS-400-COMP-SUSP for all (Rev.1-2023) - 45mm per kV Page 1 of 5
 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Insulators (400 kV Composite)SUSPENSION INSULATORS

Table of Content

Page

1.00 400 kV INSULATOR UNITS (COMPOSITE TYPE) 3

2.00 INSULATOR STRINGS 4

2.01 Mechanical Values 4
2.02 Electrical Values 5

3.00 SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS 5

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-TR-OHL-INS-400-COMP-SUSP for all (Rev.1-2023) - 45mm per kV Page 2 of 5
 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Insulators (400 kV Composite)SUSPENSION INSULATORS

Sl. No. REQUIRED TENDERED

1.00 400 kV INSULATOR UNITS (COMPOSITE TYPE)

1.01 Type long-rod

1.02 Material HTV silicone rubber

1.03 Manufacturer
1.03.1 name
1.03.2 country of manufacturing
1.04 Applicable standards IEC
VDE
DIN

1.05 Type test

1.05.1 carried out yes

1.05.2 in the year year

1.05.3 testing station

1.05.3.1 name
1.05.3.2 country
1.06 Nominal creepage distance mm 18,900

1.07 Maximum working load kN 68

1.08 Minimum specified mechanical load kN 310

1.09 Minimum routine test load kN 176

1.10 Core diameter

1.10.1 material
1.10.2 diameter mm

1.11 Sheds
1.11.1 material
1.11.2 number No.

1.11.3 diameter mm

1.11.4 spacing mm

1.11.5 inclination
1.11.5.1 upside °C

1.11.5.2 downside °C

TENDERER`s STAMP SIGNATURE

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-TR-OHL-INS-400-COMP-SUSP for all (Rev.1-2023) - 45mm per kV Page 3 of 5
 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Insulators (400 kV Composite)SUSPENSION INSULATORS

Sl. No. REQUIRED TENDERED

1.12 Caps
1.12.1 material forged steel

1.12.2 type of connection clevis-cap

1.13 Length of insulator mm

1.14 Mass kg

2.00 INSULATOR STRINGS

2.01 Mechanical Values

2.01.1 Single suspension string
2.01.1.1 number of insulators 1

2.01.1.2 total string length mm

2.01.1.3 arcing distance mm

2.01.1.4 mass of complete string kg

2.01.1.5 maximum working load kN

2.01.1.6 minimum breaking load kN 310

2.01.2 Double suspension string

2.01.2.1 number of insulators 2

2.01.2.2 spacing of Insulators mm

2.01.2.3 total string length mm

2.01.2.4 arcing distance mm

2.01.2.5 mass of complete string kg

2.01.2.6 maximum working load kN

2.01.2.7 minimum breaking load kN 2x310

2.01.3 Vee-string
2.01.3.1 number of insulators 2

2.01.3.2 angle of Vee °C

2.01.3.3 total string length mm

2.01.3.4 arcing distance mm

2.01.3.5 mass of complete string kg

TENDERER`s STAMP SIGNATURE

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-TR-OHL-INS-400-COMP-SUSP for all (Rev.1-2023) - 45mm per kV Page 4 of 5
 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Insulators (400 kV Composite)SUSPENSION INSULATORS

Sl. No. REQUIRED TENDERED

2.01.3.6 maximum working load kN

2.01.3.7 minimum breaking load kN 2x310

2.02 Electrical Values

2.02.1 Lightning impulse withstand voltage (dry) kV 1,425

2.02.2 Switching impulse withstand voltage (wet) kV 1,050

2.02.3 Power frequency withstand voltage (wet) kV 630

2.02.4 Maximum RIV above 1µ volt across 300 ohm db 46

at 1MHz and 260 kV
2.02.5 Minimum corona extinction voltage kV 320

3.00 SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS

3.01 Whether all type test reports enclosed yes

3.02 Whether technical literature enclosed yes

3.03 Whether relevant drawings enclosed yes

TENDERER`s STAMP SIGNATURE

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-TR-OHL-INS-400-COMP-SUSP for all (Rev.1-2023) - 45mm per kV Page 5 of 5
 Standard Technical Specifications for Electrical Works

OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES

( Data Sheets )

Insulators (400 kV Composite)

TENSION INSULATORS

TRANSCO STANDARD : D-TR-OHL-INS-400-COMP (Rev.0-2011)

________________________________________________________________________________________
D-TR-OHL-INS-400-COMP-TENS-380KN -Cardinal (Rev.1-2023) - 45mm per kV Page 1 of 5
 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Insulators (400 kV Composite)TENSION INSULATORS

Table of Content

Page

1.00 400 kV INSULATOR UNITS (COMPOSITE TYPE) 3

2.00 INSULATOR STRINGS 4

2.01 Mechanical Values 4
2.02 Electrical Values 5

3.00 SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS 5

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-TR-OHL-INS-400-COMP-TENS-380KN -Cardinal (Rev.1-2023) - 45mm per kV Page 2 of 5
 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Insulators (400 kV Composite)TENSION INSULATORS

Sl. No. REQUIRED TENDERED

1.00 400 kV INSULATOR UNITS (COMPOSITE TYPE)

1.01 Type long-rod

1.02 Material HTV silicone rubber

1.03 Manufacturer
1.03.1 name
1.03.2 country of manufacturing
1.04 Applicable standards IEC
VDE
DIN

1.05 Type test

1.05.1 carried out yes

1.05.2 in the year year

1.05.3 testing station

1.05.3.1 name
1.05.3.2 country
1.06 Nominal creepage distance mm 18,900

1.07 Maximum working load kN 95

1.08 Minimum specified mechanical load kN 380

1.09 Minimum routine test load kN 216

1.10 Core diameter

1.10.1 material
1.10.2 diameter mm

1.11 Sheds
1.11.1 material
1.11.2 number No.

1.11.3 diameter mm

1.11.4 spacing mm

1.11.5 inclination
1.11.5.1 upside °C

1.11.5.2 downside °C

TENDERER`s STAMP SIGNATURE

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-TR-OHL-INS-400-COMP-TENS-380KN -Cardinal (Rev.1-2023) - 45mm per kV Page 3 of 5
 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Insulators (400 kV Composite)TENSION INSULATORS

Sl. No. REQUIRED TENDERED

1.12 Caps
1.12.1 material forged steel

1.12.2 type of connection clevis-cap

1.13 Length of insulator mm

1.14 Mass kg

2.00 INSULATOR STRINGS

2.01 Mechanical Values

2.01.1 Single tension string
2.01.1.1 number of insulators 1

2.01.1.2 total string length mm

2.01.1.3 arcing distance mm

2.01.1.4 mass of complete string kg

2.01.1.5 maximum working load kN

2.01.1.6 minimum breaking load kN 380

2.01.2 Double tension string

2.01.2.1 number of insulators 2

2.01.2.2 total string length mm

2.01.2.3 spacing of insulators mm

2.01.2.4 arcing distance mm

2.01.2.5 mass of complete string kg

2.01.2.6 maximum working load kN

2.01.2.7 minimum breaking load kN 2x380

2.02 Electrical Values

2.02.1 Lightning impulse withstand voltage (dry) kV 1,425

2.02.2 Switching impulse withstand voltage (wet) kV 1,050

2.02.3 Power frequency withstand voltage (wet) kV 630

2.02.4 Maximum RIV above 1µ volt across 300 ohm db 46

at 1MHz and 260 kV

TENDERER`s STAMP SIGNATURE

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-TR-OHL-INS-400-COMP-TENS-380KN -Cardinal (Rev.1-2023) - 45mm per kV Page 4 of 5
 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Insulators (400 kV Composite)TENSION INSULATORS

Sl. No. REQUIRED TENDERED

2.02.5 Minimum corona extinction voltage kV 320

3.00 SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS

3.01 Whether all type test reports enclosed yes

3.02 Whether technical literature enclosed yes

3.03 Whether relevant drawings enclosed yes

TENDERER`s STAMP SIGNATURE

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-TR-OHL-INS-400-COMP-TENS-380KN -Cardinal (Rev.1-2023) - 45mm per kV Page 5 of 5
 Standard Technical Specifications for Electrical Works

OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES

( Data Sheets )

Optical Ground Wires (OPGW)

TRANSCO STANDARD : D-TR-OHL-OPGW (Rev.0-2017)

________________________________________________________________________________________
D-TR-OHL-OPGW (Rev.0-2017) Page 1 of 9
 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Optical Ground Wires (OPGW)

Table of Content

Page

1.00 OPGW - GENERAL 1

2.00 OPGW REEL 2

3.00 OPGW - METALLIC UNIT 3

4.00 FIBRE UNIT / FIBRES 4

5.00 SPLICES & CONNECTORS 5

6.00 JOINT BOX TYPE A 6

7.00 JOINT BOX TYPE B 7

8.00 JOINT BOX TYPE C 8

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-TR-OHL-OPGW (Rev.0-2017) Page 2 of 9
 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Optical Ground Wires (OPGW)

Sl. No. REQUIRED TENDERED

1.00 OPGW - GENERAL

1.01 Manufacturer
1.01.1 name
1.01.2 country of manufacturer
1.01.3 Factory address
1.02 Appointed Local Agent
1.02.1 name
1.02.2 address
1.02.3 Certificate of agency attached Yes

1.03 Manufacturer quality system

1.03.1 applicable standards
1.03.1.1 certified by (Company Name)
1.03.1.2 validity till (year)
1.04 Applicable standard(s) for the OPGW IEC IEC 60794-4-10
ITU-T IEC 60104
IEEE IEC 61232
VDE ITU-T G.652
DIN
ASTM

1.05 Type test

1.05.1 carried out yes/no

1.05.2 in the year year

1.05.3 testing station

1.05.3.1 name
1.05.3.2 country
1.06 First commercial operation of the
offered cable type
1.06.1 in the year
1.06.2 reference list/sheet attached yes

1.07 Type of OPGW construction

1.07.1 stainless steel tube housing the fibers, with aluminum extruded yes
tube
1.08 Ultimate strength kN or kgf Min. 95% UTS

1.09 Every day stress kN or kgf

1.10 Ambient temperature range °C 0 to +60

1.11 Overall diameter of OPGW mm

1.12 OPGW greased? yes

1.13 Mass of OPGW per km (without grease) kg

1.13.1 Mass of aluminum per km kg

1.14 Mass of OPGW per km (with grease if applicable) kg

1.15 Overall diameter of OPGW mm

1.16 Standard unjointed length on reel m min. 5000

TENDERER`s STAMP SIGNATURE

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-TR-OHL-OPGW (Rev.0-2017) 3
 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Optical Ground Wires (OPGW)

Sl. No. REQUIRED TENDERED

1.17 Maximum tensile strength

1.17.1 long term kN

1.17.2 short term kN

1.17.3 Safety factor of 2.5 applied yes/no YES

1.18 Maximum crush force

1.18.1 long term kg/mm

1.18.2 short term kg/mm

1.19 Maximum allowable stringing tension kN 15.2

1.20 Minimum bending radius

1.2.1 under normal conditions mm 400

1.2..2 under nominal tensile strength mm

1.21 Fault current capability for 1 sec, yes
(initial temperature is 55 °C and maximum
temperature is 200 °C)
1.21.1 for 220 kV OHL (minimum) kA 12

1.2.1.1 for 400 kV OHL (minimum) kA 10

1.2.1.2 Lightning withstand as per IEC 60794-4-1 yes

1.22 Maximum electrical resistance mΩ/km
of OPGW at 20°C

2.00 OPGW REEL

2.01 Manufacture
2.02 Reel material
2.02.1 wooden yes/no

2.02.2 steel with screwed laging wood (returnable) yes/no

2.03 Overall reel dimensions

2.03.1 diameter cm

2.03.2 width cm

2.03.3 weight kg

2.04 Reel spindle hole diameter mm

3.00 OPGW - METALLIC UNIT

3.01 Hollow stainless steel extruded/welded and aluminium extrued tube ST & AE

3.01.1 hollow stainless steel tube diameter mm

3.01.2 Minimum Thickness of the hollow mm

stainless steel tube wall

3.01.3 Minimum Thickness of aluminium extrusion mm 1.15
3.01.4 Hollow aluminium extrued tube diameter mm

3.01.5 number of fibers per OPGW No.

3.01.6 number of buffers inside the hollow tube: (IF APPLICABLE) No.
3.01.7 the ST & AE tube is filled with water blocking and yes/no

TENDERER`s STAMP SIGNATURE

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-TR-OHL-OPGW (Rev.0-2017) 4
 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Optical Ground Wires (OPGW)

Sl. No. REQUIRED TENDERED

hydrogen absorbent gel

3.02 Armour yes

3.02.1 armour comprises two layers (minimum) yes

3.02.2 1st layer (inner) of armour is made of
aluminium clad steel yes

3.02.2.1 number of strands in the 1st layer No.

3.02.2.2 cross section of the strand in 1st layer mm²

3.02.3 2nd layer (outer) of armour is made of aluminium yes

3.02.3.1 number of strands in the 2nd layer No.

3.02.3.2 cross section of the strand in the 2nd layer mm²

3.02.3.3 lay direction of outer layer right hand

3.02.4 cross section of OPGW metallic Unit mm²

3.03 Modulus of elasticity (final) kN/mm² or
kgf/mm²

3.04 Coefficient of linear expansion per 1°C

3.05 Drop point temperature of grease, (if any) at least °C 100

4.00 FIBRE UNIT / FIBRES

4.01 Manufacturer
4.02 Applicable standards all relevant ITU-T,
IEC, IEEE standards
4.03 Buffer tube is made of polybuthylen yes/no yes
therephthalate (IF APPLICABLE)
4.04 Buffer tubes are in hollow stainless steel / aluminium
extruded tube (IF APPLICABLE)
4.05 Minimum thickness of buffer tube wall (IF APPLICABLE) mm 0.25

4.06 Buffer tubes are color coded (IF APPLICABLE) yes

4.07 Buffer tubes are filled with water blocking jelly (IF APPLICABLE) yes

4.08 Gel dripping temperature higher than 85 120 degC or more yes

4.09 Total number of optical fibres No. refer to Scope of Supply

4.10 Number of fibres per buffer tube (IF APPLICABLE) No.

4.11 Type/mode Latest version of G.652/G.655 single mode

4.12 Fibre material as per these specifications yes

4.13 Operation wave length nm 1310 & 1550

4.14 Cut off wave length nm < 1260

4.15 Mode field diameter μm

4.16 Cladding diameter μm

4.17 Fibre mode field concentrisity error μm <1

4.18 Fibre cladding non-circularity % <2

4.19 Coating diameter μm

4.20 Proof test % >1

4.21 Fibre refractive index at

TENDERER`s STAMP SIGNATURE

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-TR-OHL-OPGW (Rev.0-2017) 5
 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Optical Ground Wires (OPGW)

Sl. No. REQUIRED TENDERED

4.21.1 1310 nm
4.21.2 1550 nm
4.22 Attenuation at 1310 nm
4.22.1 on reel at factory or dB/km max. 0.35
at site before installation
4.22.2 after installation, including splicing dB/km max. 0.40

4.23 Attenuation at 1550 nm

4.23.1 on reel at factory and dB/km max. 0.25
at site before installation
4.23.2 after installation, including splicing dB/km max. 0.30
4.24 Optical loss variation over the temperature range dB/km max. 0.05
during short-circuit test
4.25 Chromatic dispersion at 1300 nm (max.) ps/nm.km 3.5

4.26 Chromatic dispersion at 1550 nm (max.) ps/nm.km 18

4.27 Continuos operation temperature °C 60

4.28 Difference in attenuation coefficient dB < +/- 0.05
(when measured from both ends)
4.29 Maximum temperature withstand under short °C 200
circuit current (1 sec) without optical
or mechanical degradation
4.30 No change will occur due to maximum cable elongation at
yes/no YES
maximum operating temperature
5.00 SPLICES & CONNECTORS

5.01 Splices
5.02 Manufacturer
5.03 Applicable standards
5.04 Maximum average splice loss of any
any individual splice (mean value of the splice
loss measured from both sides) at
5.04.1 1310 nm dB 0.05

5.04.2 1550 nm dB 0.05

5.05 Maximum splice loss in one direction dB 0.15
not to exceed
5.06 Connectors
5.06.1 manufacturer

TENDERER`s STAMP SIGNATURE

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-TR-OHL-OPGW (Rev.0-2017) 6
 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Optical Ground Wires (OPGW)

Sl. No. REQUIRED TENDERED

5.06.2 applicable standards

5.06.3 Maximum loss of connector dB < 0.3
(connector and coupler)

6.00 JOINT BOX TYPE A

6.01 Manufacturer
6.02 Material cast aluminium
or stainless steel
min. grade ANSI317

6.03 Protection degree IP65

6.04 OPGW - OPGW splicing yes

6.05 No. of splices (minimum) (As applicable) 40 / 90

6.06 Cable entry from bottom yes

6.07 Dimensions
6.07.1 height mm

6.07.2 width mm

6.07.3 depth mm

7.00 JOINT BOX TYPE B

7.01 Manufacturer
7.02 Material cast aluminium
or stainless steel
min. grade ANSI317

7.03 Protection degree IP65

7.04 OPGW - OFC splicing yes

7.05 No. of splices (minimum) (As applicable) 40 / 90

7.06 Cable entry from bottom yes

7.07 Dimensions
7.07.1 height mm

7.07.2 width mm

7.07.3 depth mm

TENDERER`s STAMP SIGNATURE

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-TR-OHL-OPGW (Rev.0-2017) 7
 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Optical Ground Wires (OPGW)

Sl. No. REQUIRED TENDERED

8.00 JOINT BOX TYPE C

8.01 Manufacturer
8.02 Material cast aluminium
or stainless steel
min. grade ANSI 316
8.03 Protection degree IP65W
8.04 OPGW - OPGW - OPGW 3 Way splicing yes
8.05 No. of splices (minimum) (As applicable) 60 / 120
8.06 Cable entry from bottom yes
8.07 Dimensions
8.07.1 height mm
8.07.2 width mm
8.07.3 depth mm

TENDERER`s STAMP SIGNATURE

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-TR-OHL-OPGW (Rev.0-2017) 8
 Standard Technical Specifications for Electrical Works

OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES

( Data Sheets )

Photovoltaic Obstruction Light Equipment

TRANSCO STANDARD : D-TR-OHL-POL (Rev.0-2014)

________________________________________________________________________________________
D-TR-OHL-POL (Rev.0-2014) Page 1 of 5
 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Photovoltaic Obstruction Light Equipment

Table of Content

Page

1.00 PHOTOVOLTAIC OBSTRUCTION LIGHT EQUIPMENT 3

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-TR-OHL-POL (Rev.0-2014) Page 2 of 5
 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Photovoltaic Obstruction Light Equipment

Sl. No. REQUIRED TENDERED

1.00 PHOTOVOLTAIC OBSTRUCTION LIGHT EQUIPMENT

A. Low Intensity

1.00 System Data

1.01 Vendors Experience years min. 5

1.02 Rated voltage V

1.03 Temperature range °C 0 to 55

1.04 Humidity % 100

1.05 Obstruction lights type LED clustered

1.05.1 ICAO annex 14 low intensity (Type 'A') Cd >10

1.05.2 rated power W

2.00 Life time of Lamp hrs >100,000
2.01 Manufacturer Name / Country of Origin

3.00 Photovoltaic modules

3.01 type
3.02 rated voltage V
3.03 rated peak output W
3.04 bird protection yes

3.05 length mm
3.06 width mm
3.07 depth mm
3.08 weight kg
3.09 no. of modules per system
3.10 Life time hrs
3.11 Manufacturer Name / Country of Origin
4.00 Batteries
4.01 type sealed
maintenance-free

4.02 rated voltage V 12/24

4.03 capacity (100hrs) Ah

TENDERER`s STAMP SIGNATURE

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-TR-OHL-POL (Rev.0-2014) Page 3 of 5
 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Photovoltaic Obstruction Light Equipment

Sl. No. REQUIRED TENDERED

4.04 length mm
4.05 width mm
4.06 depth mm
4.07 weight kg
4.08 no. of batteries per system

5.00 Battery charge regulator to suit optimally

battery characteristics

6.00 System enclosure to protect all

components from
atmospheric degradation
7.00 Manufacturer Name / Country of Origin
8.00 Life Time of Battery hrs

B Medium Intensity

1.00 System Data

1.01 Vendors Experience years min. 5

1.02 Rated voltage V

1.03 Temperature range °C 0 to 55

1.04 Humidity % 100

1.05 Obstruction lights type LED clustered

1.05.1 ICAO annex 14 low intensity (Type 'B') Cd 2000 +/-25%

1.05.2 rated power W

2.00 Life time of Lamp hr >100,000
2.01 Manufacturer Name / Country of Origin

3.00 Photovoltaic modules

3.01 type
3.02 rated voltage V
3.03 rated peak output W
3.04 bird protection yes

3.05 length mm
3.06 width mm

TENDERER`s STAMP SIGNATURE

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-TR-OHL-POL (Rev.0-2014) Page 4 of 5
 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
Photovoltaic Obstruction Light Equipment

Sl. No. REQUIRED TENDERED

3.07 depth mm
3.08 weight kg
3.09 no. of modules per system
3.10 Life time hrs
3.11 Manufacturer Name / Country of Origin
4.00 Batteries
4.01 type sealed
maintenance-free

4.02 rated voltage V

4.03 capacity (100hrs) Ah
4.04 length mm
4.05 width mm
4.06 depth mm
4.07 weight kg
4.08 no. of batteries per system

5.00 Battery charge regulator to suit optimally

5.01 battery characteristics

6.00 System enclosure to protect all

components from
atmospheric degradation

7.00 Manufacturer Name / Country of Origin

8.00 Life Time of Battery hrs

TENDERER`s STAMP SIGNATURE

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-TR-OHL-POL (Rev.0-2014) Page 5 of 5
 STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRIC WORKS

SITE ACCEPTANCE TESTS (SAT) AFTER INSTALLATION

COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

TRANSCO STANDARD : SAT-TR-COM-(REV.0-2009)

SAT-TR-COM (REV. 0-2009) Page 1 of 3

 SITE ACCEPTANCE TESTS AFTER INSTALLATION
COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

Communication Systems

1. Physical Site Inspection (for all systems)

1.1 Checking of the cabinet interior shall be made to verify clearances between live
electrical parts, isolation of phase and neutral buses from cabinet, tightness of all
mechanical connections and space for future extensions.

1.2 Checking of telephone sets and other telecommunication equipment as installed by

the Contractor.

2. Site Tests

2.1 PLC Equipment / System

2.1.1 Testing of power supply

2.1.2 Testing of alarm monitoring
2.1.2 Testing of channel allocation (filters)
2.1.2 Testing of transmitter speachband and databand levels
2.1.3 Testing of receiver speachband and databand levels

2.2 Fibre Optic Equipment / System

2.2.1 Testing of power supply

2.2.2 Testing of alarm monitoring
2.2.3 Testing of whole link continuity
2.2.4 Testing of attenuation including splices
2.2.5 Testing of voice and data interfaces

2.3 Microwave Radio Equipment / System

2.3.1 Testing of power supply

2.3.2 Testing of alarm monitoring
2.3.3 Testing of installation
2.3.4 Testing of multiplexer

SAT-TR-COM (REV. 0-2009) Page 2 of 3

 SITE ACCEPTANCE TESTS AFTER INSTALLATION
COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

2.4 Trunked Radio Equipment / System

2.4.1 Testing of power supply

2.4.2 Testing of alarm monitoring

2.5 Telecommunication Managing Equipment / System

2.5.1 Testing of power supply

2.5.2 Testing of alarm monitoring
2.5.3 Testing of actual links with display and relevant data lists

SAT-TR-COM (REV. 0-2009) Page 3 of 3

 STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRIC WORKS

SITE ACCEPTANCE TESTS (SAT) AFTER INSTALLATION

OHTL

TRANSCO STANDARD : SAT-TR-OHTL (REV.0-2009)

SAT-TR-OHTL (REV. 0-2009) Page 1 of 3

 SITE ACCEPTANCE TESTS AFTER INSTALLATION
OHTL

OHTL

Tests during Erection

During the erection the following tests shall be carried out by the Bidder/Contractor in the presence of
TRANSCO.

Item Description
1. Tower footing resistance
Support footing resistance
The resistance to earth of the complete foundation of individual structures
shall be measured in an approved manner before the earth conductors are
erected. The placing of the test electrodes shall normally be along the center
line of the route in such direction as to ensure the lowest resistance to earth
is recorded, and a note shall be made of the direction in the test log. The
schedule used for recording earth resistance test shall contain in addition to
the measured ohmic values, details of the surface soils and general ground
conditions at the time of test.
Additional tower footing tests
If, in the opinion of TRANSCO, it is necessary to reduce the tower footing
resistance by approved means, the Bidder/Contractor shall make further tests
after the additional measures have been carried out and before the earthwires
are erected. Any further re-testing shall be carried out as necessary without
extra charge.
2. Measurement of galvanising and paint thickness
The Bidder/Contractor shall have available on site for TRANSCO’s use an
instrument suitable for the accurate checking of painted coats and galvanising
thickness. The gauge shall be available from the time of arrival of the first
consignment of steel work until the issue of the final acceptance certificate. The
cost of the gauge and other operating expenses are deemed to be included in
the contract price and the gauge will remain the property of the
Bidder/Contractor.
3. Measurement of resistance of clamps and joints
4. Sagging reports, sagging control measurements
5. Clearance measurements at qualified crossing spans or other spans defined by
TRANSCO to ground and/or obstacles

SAT-TR-OHTL (REV. 0-2009) Page 2 of 3

 SITE ACCEPTANCE TESTS AFTER INSTALLATION
OHTL

6. Checking of tightness of bolts prior to stringing and clamping

7. Checking of insulator plumb status

Tests on Commissioning

1. Prior to the energizing, the Bidder/Contractor shall provide TRANSCO with a

written statement that all personnel and all temporary erection earthing points
are withdrawn and the line is ready for energizing.
2. The Bidder/Contractor shall make all checks and measurements deemed
necessary by TRANSCO having a connection with the completion of the work.
The following electrical measurements shall be made, if specified in the scope of
work:
line resistance measurement, DC
line resistance measurement, AC
line reactance measurements (positive and zero sequence)
phase sequence test
3. The Bidder/Contractor shall be responsible for satisfying TRANSCO when the
lines are ready to be tested and shall conduct the tests in the presence of and as
instructed by TRANSCO. If any failure is detected, the Bidder/Contractor shall
locate and determine the cause of the failure and shall make any replacement or
repair necessary or correct any errors in the installation to the satisfaction of
TRANSCO and at no extra cost to TRANSCO.
4. The line shall be energized at full working voltage before handing over and the
arrangement for this, and such other tests as TRANSCO shall desire to make on
the complete line according to the standards of practice of TRANSCO, shall be
assisted by the Bidder/Contractor who shall provide such labour, transport and
other assistance as required without extra charge. Apparatus for special tests
will be provided by TRANSCO.
5. The line shall be tested for insulation by the continuous application for 24 hours
of the rated line voltage between the phases.

SAT-TR-OHTL (REV. 0-2009) Page 3 of 3

 STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRIC WORKS

SITE ACCEPTANCE TESTS (SAT) AFTER INSTALLATION

OHTL
ACCESSORIES

TRANSCO STANDARD : SAT-TR-OHTL-ACCESSORIES-(REV.0-2009)

SAT-TR-OHTL-ACCESSORIES (REV. 0-2009) Page 1 of 3

 SITE ACCEPTANCE TESTS AFTER INSTALLATION
OHTL
Accessories

OHTL Accessories

A. Busbar Conductors

1. Physical Site Inspection

1.1 Checking of proper sag and tension of installed bus conductors

1.2 Checking of tightness of connections

1.3 Checking of proper grounding / earthing (if any)

1.4 Checking the physical integrity of the installation

1.5 Checking of all welded points

1.6 Checking of phasing

2. Site Tests

2.1 Measurement of contact resistance of connectors

2.2 Measurement of insulation resistance

2.3 Measurement by infra-red camera of energised surface temperature. The thermal

capacity of all buses and fittings shall not exceed the temperature rise of 30 °C over
a 40 °C ambient temperature for rated continuous current.

2.4 Measurement of noise levels. The following noise levels shall not be exceeded at
the substation fence and / or 25 meters from the busbar, whichever is closer.
Measurement shall be made at 2 points on each side of the substation.
For 500 kV:

- Audible noise: 55 dB(A) (wet weather)

- RI Noise: 40 dB above a V/m (fair weather)

SAT-TR-OHTL-ACCESSORIES (REV. 0-2009) Page 2 of 3

 SITE ACCEPTANCE TESTS AFTER INSTALLATION
OHTL
Accessories

2.5 Measurement of electric field. Measurement shall be made at two points in each bay
and at the two points around the substation fence. The following values should not
be exceeded:

- Under bus: 10 kV/m

- Substation fence: 4 kV/m

B. Station Insulators (post insulators, housing insulator, insulator strings, etc.)

It is not permitted to use only one insulator string to separate two systems. Two insulator strings
have to be applied and the fittings between the two insulators strings have to be earthed.

1. Physical Site Inspection

1.1 Checking of level and alignment of installed station insulators and accessories

1.2 Checking of connections tightness

1.3 Checking of proper grounding of steel structure support for station post insulators

1.4 Checking of physical integrity of the installation

1.5 Visual inspection for any signs of cracking or chipping

1.6 Checking of all fittings

1.7 Checking of cleanliness of all insulators, hardware and supports

SAT-TR-OHTL-ACCESSORIES (REV. 0-2009) Page 3 of 3

 PROJECTS DIRECTORATE
POWER ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT (PED)

COMMISSIONING CHECKLIST
CONTRACT
PROJECT TITLE CONTRACTOR CONSULTANT
NO.

NXXXX

Commissioning Checklist-Power Rev 1.1 Date of Issue: 13/05/2022, SAS

 AMMENDMENTS
EFFECTIVE
REV. NO. Chapter# Section # DESCRIPTION OF AMMENDMENT APPROVED BY DATE:
Adding Chapter D under title
1 Chapter D NA A.M 22/11/2012
“General”
1.1 Chapter A Section-4 SCMS checklist updated A.M 29/01/2014
1.1 Chapter C Section-1 Civil checklist (FF part removed) A.M 29/01/2014
1.1 Chapter B Section-1 MEP Fire Fighting checklist updated A.M 29/01/2014
General requirement updated for
2 Chapter D Section-1 I&C documentation completed A.M 05/05/2014
confirmation
New section added I&C
1 Chapter D Section-2 A.M 05/05/2014
documentation requirement
SCMS checklist updated adding
1.2 Chapter A Section-4 A.M 02/06/2014
SCMS handing over
Remote end section updated to add
1.1 Chapter A Section-13 A.M 02/06/2014
SCMS handing over
Inclusion of Item 28 to 34, Cable
2 Chapter C Section-1 Entries with Fire/Water tight Sealing, A.M 06/12/2015
Water Tanks filling till PAC
3 Chapter D Section-1 Inclusion of overload data to APD A.M 06/12/2015
1.1 Chapter A Section-5 Data cleansing prior to energization A.M 06/12/2015
Inclusion of the sheath testing prior
1.1 Chapter A Section-11 A.M 06/12/2015
energization
Inclusion of Handing over stage 1 to
4 Chapter D Section-1 A.M 30/08/2017
operation & planning LDC
Inclusion of Handing over of tech
4 Chapter D Section-1 A.M 30/08/2017
database forms to E&C

2 Chapter A Section 1 Switchgear Checklist Updated MS/RP 13.05.2022

Transformer Protection
2 Chapter A Section 3.1 MS/RP 13.05.2022
Checklist Updated
2 Chapter A Section 3.2 Cable Protection Checklist Updated MS/RP 13.05.2022
2 Chapter A Section 3.3 OHL Protection Checklist Updated MS/RP 13.05.2022
2 Chapter A Section 3.4 Busbar Protection Checklist Updated MS/RP 13.05.2022
Bus coupler Protection Checklist
2 Chapter A Section 3.5 MS/RP 13.05.2022
Updated
Bus section Protection Checklist
2 Chapter A Section 3.6 MS/RP 13.05.2022
Updated
Breaker failure Protection Checklist
2 Chapter A Section 3.7 MS/RP 13.05.2022
Updated
2 Chapter A Section 4 SCMS Checklist Updated MS/RP 13.05.2022
1.2 Chapter A Section 5 FMS Checklist Updated MS/RP 13.05.2022
This document is the property of TRANSCO and shall not be used by or given to any outside party without prior authorization.
Page 1 of 2
 EFFECTIVE
REV. NO. Chapter# Section # DESCRIPTION OF AMMENDMENT APPROVED BY DATE:
2 Chapter A Section 8.1 LVAC Checklist Updated MS/RP 13.05.2022
Remote end works Checklist
2 Chapter A Section 13 MS/RP 13.05.2022
Updated
Checklist Updated, LDC name changed
2 Chapter A Section 14 as SO (System Operator).
MS/RP 10.05.2022

2 Chapter A Section 16 Metering Checklist Updated MS/RP 13.05.2022

5 Chapter D Section 01 General Checklist Updated MS/RP 13.05.2022

Note: (Below details Updated in Overall Commissioning Check list)

1. Power Engineering & Commissioning Department (PEnC) name changed as Power Engineering Department (PED) wherever
applicable in Commissioning Check list and Setting/Data Forms
2. Document Revision number updated wherever applicable in Commissioning Check list and Setting/Data Forms
3. LDC name changed as SO (System Operator-EWEC).
4. AISD name changed as AID in Setting/Data Forms.

This document is the property of TRANSCO and shall not be used by or given to any outside party without prior authorization.
Page 2 of 2
 Table of Contents
Preface..................................................................................................................................................................................... I
Record of Checklists ............................................................................................................................................................ II
Chapter A: Commissioning Checklist (Electrical) ............................................................................................................. 1
Section 1:Switchgear........................................................................................................................................................... 2
Section 2:Power Transformers .......................................................................................................................................... 10
Section 3:Protection System ............................................................................................................................................. 21
Section 3.1: Transformer Protection System ................................................................................................................ 22
Section 3.2: Cable Protection System ........................................................................................................................... 25
Section 3.3: OHL Protection System ............................................................................................................................ 28
Section 3.4: Busbar Protection System ......................................................................................................................... 31
Section 3.5: Bus-coupler Protection System ................................................................................................................. 35
Section 3.6: Bus-section Protection System ................................................................................................................. 38
Section 3.7: Circuit Breaker Failure Protection System ............................................................................................... 41
Section 4:SCMS ................................................................................................................................................................ 43
Section 5:FMS................................................................................................................................................................... 48
Section 6:Telecommunication System .............................................................................................................................. 52
Section 7:FOC System ...................................................................................................................................................... 54
Section 8:AC Distribution System .................................................................................................................................... 56
Section 8.1: LVAC.......................................................................................................................................................... 3
Section 8.2: Auxiliary Transformer ................................................................................................................................ 3
Section 8.3: Small Lighting System................................................................................................................................ 3
Section 9: DC Distribution System ................................................................................................................................... 61
Section 9.1: 110V Battery System .................................................................................................................................. 3
Section 9.2: 48V Battery System .................................................................................................................................... 3
Section 10:UPS System .................................................................................................................................................... 64
Section 11:Power Cable .................................................................................................................................................... 66
Section 12:Overhead Line (OHL) ..................................................................................................................................... 69
Section 13:Remote Ends Works........................................................................................................................................ 73
Section 14:SO Integration ................................................................................................................................................. 78
Section 15:Earthing System .............................................................................................................................................. 81
Section 16:Metering System (EWEC) .............................................................................................................................. 83
Section 17:Shunt Reactor .................................................................................................................................................. 86

Commissioning Checklist-Rev 1.1 Date of Issue: 13/05/2022

 Table of Contents
Chapter B: Commissioning Checklist (Mechanical) ........................................................................................................ 94
Section 1:Fire Protection System ...................................................................................................................................... 95
Section 2:HVAC System ................................................................................................................................................ 108
Section 3:Crane System .................................................................................................................................................. 120
Chapter C: Commissioning Checklist (Civil) ................................................................................................................. 123
Section 1:Building Services ............................................................................................................................................ 124
Chapter D: General .......................................................................................................................................................... 125
Section 1: General Requirements ................................................................................................................................... 127
Section 2:Connection and Interface Documentation…………………………………………………………………………………………………129

Commissioning Checklist-Rev 1.1 Date of Issue: 13/05/2022

 PREFACE

TRANSCO Power Engineering Department has developed The Commissioning Checklist for different
equipments. This Commissioning Checklist is developed to fulfill regulatory requirements. Moreover, the aim
of this checklist is to standardize TRANSCO procedures and to make sure that proper commissioning is
conducted under the highest levels of quality, reliability and durability for all equipments in various projects
under TRANSCO execution.

All Consultants and Contractors are required to use The Commissioning Checklist in all projects. No
“Clearance To Energize” will be signed and accepted without submitting proper Commissioning Checklist. The
Commissioning Checklist should fulfill the following:

❖ All equipments should be verified through Commissioning Check List.

❖ All tests should be signed by the witnessed/concerned person from Contractor, Consultant and
TRANSCO side.
❖ Each equipments/sections should be signed by Contractor and Consultant and certified by TRANSCO
Commissioning Engineer that all tests have been successfully completed and accepted.
❖ Each Contractor should include all equipments, mentioned in the Commissioning Checklist, indicating
whether it is Included, Not Included, or Not Applicable.
❖ The attached Checklist shall be used as the minimum requirement.
❖ During commissioning, the contractor with the consent of the Commissioning Engineer can add any
additionally sheets or lists if found necessary.

Any Consultant/Contractor can obtain softcopy by contacting the following TRANSCO Engineers:
➢ Sherif Allam [email protected] 02/4164428
➢ Sami F. Salahat [email protected] 02/4164429
➢ Abdulrhman Ahli [email protected] 02/4164446

Commissioning Checklist-Rev 1.1 Date: 21/01/2022,SAS Page I

POWER ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT (PED)

Section 1
GENERAL
 "Consultant Logo" "Contractor Logo"

Power Engineering Department (PED)

Contract: N-XXX Contract Title
Contractor: Consultant: Substation:
Subject: General Requirements

COMMISSIONING CHECKLIST
"Contractor" "Consultant" TRANSCO Engineer Remarks
No. Description Date
Engineer Engineer Name Signature

1 Completion of Substation Handing Over

Stage 1of 3 to O&M (PED- form 30)
Completion of Cable Circuit “Circuit
2 Name XXX” Handing Over Stage 1of 2 to
O&M (PED-form 33)
Completion of OHL Circuit “Circuit
3 Name XXX” Handing Over Stage 1of 2 to
O&M (PED-form 35)
Preparation for Substation Handing Over
4
Stage 2 of 3 to O&M (PED-form 31)
Preparation of Cable Circuit “Circuit Name
5 XXX” Handing Over Stage 2 of 2 to O&M
(PED-form 34)
Preparation of OHL Circuit “Circuit Name
6 XXX” Handing Over Stage 2 of 2 to O&M
(PED-form 36)

"CONTRACTOR XXX" "CONSULTANT XXX" TRANSCO PED Engineer

Signature: Signature: Signature:
Name: Name: Name:
Date: Date: Date:
Commissioning Checklist- Chapter D, Section 1- General Rev 5 Date of Issue: 13/05/2022, SAS Page 2 of 8
 "Consultant Logo" "Contractor Logo"

Power Engineering Department (PED)

Contract: N-XXX Contract Title
Contractor: Consultant: Substation:
Subject: General Requirements

COMMISSIONING CHECKLIST
"Contractor" "Consultant" TRANSCO Engineer Remarks
No. Description Date
Engineer Engineer Name Signature

Preparation of Substation Handing Over

7
stage 1 of 1 to AID (PED-form 38)
Preparation of Cable Handing Over stage 1
8
of 1 to AID (PED-form 39)
Preparation of OHL Handing Over stage 1
9
of 1 to AID (PED-form 40)
Preparation of Substation Handing Over
10
stage 1 of 1 to APD (PED-form 41)
Preparation of Cable Handing Over stage 1
11
of 1 to APD (PED-form 42)
Preparation of OHL Handing Over stage 1
12
of 1 to APD (PED-form 43)
Preparation of Substation Handing Over
13
stage 1 to PD (PED-form 86)

"CONTRACTOR XXX" "CONSULTANT XXX" TRANSCO PED Engineer

Signature: Signature: Signature:
Name: Name: Name:
Date: Date: Date:
Commissioning Checklist- Chapter D, Section 1- General Rev 5 Date of Issue: 13/05/2022, SAS Page 3 of 8
 "Consultant Logo" "Contractor Logo"

Power Engineering Department (PED)

Contract: N-XXX Contract Title
Contractor: Consultant: Substation:
Subject: General Requirements

COMMISSIONING CHECKLIST
"Contractor" "Consultant" TRANSCO Engineer Remarks
No. Description Date
Engineer Engineer Name Signature

Preparation of Substation Handing Over

14
stage 1 of 1 to PNDD (PED-form 44)
Preparation of Cable Handing Over stage 1
15
of 1 to PNDD (PED-form 45)
Preparation of OHL Handing Over stage 1
16
of 1 to PNDD (PED-form 46)
Preparation of Telecom-Substation
17 Handing Over stage 1 to Telecom Dept.
(PED-form 52)
Preparation of FOC-Cable Handing Over
18
stage 1 to Telecom Dept. (PED-form 51)
Preparation of FOC-OHL Handing Over
19
stage 1 to Telecom Dept. (PED-form 51)

"CONTRACTOR XXX" "CONSULTANT XXX" TRANSCO PED Engineer

Signature: Signature: Signature:
Name: Name: Name:
Date: Date: Date:
Commissioning Checklist- Chapter D, Section 1- General Rev 5 Date of Issue: 13/05/2022, SAS Page 4 of 8
 "Consultant Logo" "Contractor Logo"

Power Engineering Department (PED)

Contract: N-XXX Contract Title
Contractor: Consultant: Substation:
Subject: General Requirements

COMMISSIONING CHECKLIST
"Contractor" "Consultant" TRANSCO Engineer Remarks
No. Description Date
Engineer Engineer Name Signature

I&C Documentations as per Chapter D,

20 Section (2) completed and handed over to
AID
Emergency Overloading calculation of
21 Cable Circuits considering the de-rated
Value handed over and received by APD
Emergency Overloading calculation of OHL
22 Circuits considering the de-rated Value
handed over received by APD
Emergency Overloading calculation of
23 Transformers handed over received by
APD
GIS switchgear current carrying capacity
24 for all typical bays handed over received by
APD

"CONTRACTOR XXX" "CONSULTANT XXX" TRANSCO PED Engineer

Signature: Signature: Signature:
Name: Name: Name:
Date: Date: Date:
Commissioning Checklist- Chapter D, Section 1- General Rev 5 Date of Issue: 13/05/2022, SAS Page 5 of 8
 "Consultant Logo" "Contractor Logo"

Power Engineering Department (PED)

Contract: N-XXX Contract Title
Contractor: Consultant: Substation:
Subject: General Requirements

COMMISSIONING CHECKLIST
"Contractor" "Consultant" TRANSCO Engineer Remarks
No. Description Date
Engineer Engineer Name Signature

EMS data related to Cable feeders

25
submitted to SO(EWEC)
EMS data related to OHL feeders
26
submitted to SO(EWEC)
EMS data related to Transformers
27
submitted to SO(EWEC)
EMS data related to GIS submitted to
28
SO(EWEC)
Completion of Substation Handing Over
29 Stage 1 to SO(EWEC) Operational Planning
(PED-form 80)
Completion of Cable feeder Handing Over
30 Stage 1 to SO(EWEC) Operational Planning
(PED-form 78)

"CONTRACTOR XXX" "CONSULTANT XXX" TRANSCO PED Engineer

Signature: Signature: Signature:
Name: Name: Name:
Date: Date: Date:
Commissioning Checklist- Chapter D, Section 1- General Rev 5 Date of Issue: 13/05/2022, SAS Page 6 of 8
 "Consultant Logo" "Contractor Logo"

Power Engineering Department (PED)

Contract: N-XXX Contract Title
Contractor: Consultant: Substation:
Subject: General Requirements

COMMISSIONING CHECKLIST
"Contractor" "Consultant" TRANSCO Engineer Remarks
No. Description Date
Engineer Engineer Name Signature

Completion of OHL feeder Handing Over

31 Stage 1 of 2 to SO(EWEC) Operational
Planning (PED-form 79)
Completion of Substation Power
Operations Handing Over Stage 1 to
32
SO(EWEC) Operational Planning (PED-form
87)
Completion of Cable Power Operations
33 Handing Over Stage 1 to SO(EWEC)
Operational Planning (PED-form 88)
Completion of OHL Power Operations
34 Handing Over Stage 1 to SO(EWEC)
Operational Planning (PED-form 89)

"CONTRACTOR XXX" "CONSULTANT XXX" TRANSCO PED Engineer

Signature: Signature: Signature:
Name: Name: Name:
Date: Date: Date:
Commissioning Checklist- Chapter D, Section 1- General Rev 5 Date of Issue: 13/05/2022, SAS Page 7 of 8
 "Consultant Logo" "Contractor Logo"

Power Engineering Department (PED)

Contract: N-XXX Contract Title
Contractor: Consultant: Substation:
Subject: General Requirements

COMMISSIONING CHECKLIST
"Contractor" "Consultant" TRANSCO Engineer Remarks
No. Description Date
Engineer Engineer Name Signature

Preparation of SO(EWEC) Planning,

35 substation Handing Over stage 1 of 2
(PED-form 62)
Preparation of SO(EWEC) Planning Cable
36
Handing Over stage 1 of 2 (PED-form 61)
Preparation of SO(EWEC) Planning OHL
37
Handing Over stage 1 of 2 (PED-form 60)
Preparation of TARIFF Meter-Substation
38 Handing Over stage 1 to Metering Engineer
SO_EWEC (PED-form 49)
Approved Project technical data as per
Form (PED-form 81_Project_tech-
39
_database) provided to PED office in PDF
format and Excel format.

"CONTRACTOR XXX" "CONSULTANT XXX" TRANSCO PED Engineer

Signature: Signature: Signature:
Name: Name: Name:
Date: Date: Date:
Commissioning Checklist- Chapter D, Section 1- General Rev 5 Date of Issue: 13/05/2022, SAS Page 8 of 8
POWER ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT (PED)

Section 2
INTERFACE AND
CONNECTION
DOCUMENTATION
 "Consultant Logo" "Contractor Logo"

Power Engineering Department (PED)

Contract: N-XXX Contract Title
Contractor: Consultant: Substation:
Subject: I&C Documentation

COMMISSIONING CHECKLIST

"Contractor" "Consultant" TRANSCO Engineer

No. Description Date Remarks
Engineer Engineer Name Signature

1 MDEC Registration done and confirmed

by MDEC engineer.

Substation Power System Single Line

2 Diagrams for all interconnected voltage
levels received by I&C Engineer

Equipment layout with all Equipment,

3 panel’s legends (As built or red mark
diagram.

Final approved settings as applied at the

4 interface point as per the Transco formats
(PEnC-047-Settings for CnI-AISD)
received by I&C Engineer.

Tariff meter serial numbers and SAT date

5 as per the Transco formats (PEnC-048-
Settings for CnI-Meters -AISD) received
by I&C Engineer.

"CONTRACTOR XXX" "CONSULTANT XXX" TRANSCO PED Engineer

Signature: Signature: Signature:
Name: Name: Name:
Date: Date: Date:

Commissioning Checklist- Chapter D, Section 2- I&C Docs_Rev 1.1 Date of Issue: 21/01/2022, SAS Page 2 of 3
 "Consultant Logo" "Contractor Logo"

Power Engineering Department (PED)

Contract: N-XXX Contract Title
Contractor: Consultant: Substation:
Subject: I&C Documentation

COMMISSIONING CHECKLIST

"Contractor" "Consultant" TRANSCO Engineer

No. Description Date Remarks
Engineer Engineer Name Signature

Rules & Remarks:

• Point 1 to be signed by MDEC Engineer

• Point 2 to 5 to be signed by I&C Engineer
• This Form is owned by Power Engineering Department (PED)
• The original copy to be signed and return back to Power Engineering Department (PED)
• All items must be in softcopy as specified above.
• All items to be on uploaded in the folder A of respective project in collaboration portal and link to be sent to the respective department along with the form.
• Files & folders names must be short as much as possible.
• All PDF files shall be book-marked and shall include hyperlinks from the list of contents to open respective sections.
• All drawing files shall have meaningful names instead of drawing numbers whenever possible.
• Folders containing many drawing files block diagrams, or files with short names, shall also contain a list of content file having properly named hyperlinks to open the
correct file by a single click on the hyperlink.

"CONTRACTOR XXX" "CONSULTANT XXX" TRANSCO PED Engineer

Signature: Signature: Signature:
Name: Name: Name:
Date: Date: Date:

Commissioning Checklist- Chapter D, Section 2- I&C Docs_Rev 1.1 Date of Issue: 21/01/2022, SAS Page 3 of 3
 POWER ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT (PED)

CHAPTER D
COMMISSIONING CHECKLIST
(GENERAL)

Chapter D: Commissioning Checklist-General Rev 2.1 Date of Issue: 21/01/2022, SAS

 RECORD OF CHECKLISTS
Included
NO. COMMISSIONING CHECKLIST
YES NO NA Remarks

A ELECTRICAL
1 Switchgear
2 Power Transformer
3 Protection System
Power Transformer Protection System
Power Cable Protection System
OHL Protection System
Busbar Protection System
Bus Coupler Protection System
Bus-Section Protection System
Circuit Breaker Failure Protection System
4 Substation Control and Monitoring System (SCMS)
5 Fault Monitoring System (FMS)
6 Telecommunication System
7 Fiber Optic Cable (FOC)
8 AC Supply System
LVAC
Auxiliary Transformer
Small Lighting
9 DC Supply System
110V DC Battery System
48V DC Battery System
10 Un-Interrupted Power Supply (UPS)
11 XLPE Power Cable
12 Overhead Lines (OHL)
13 Remote Ends Works
14 SO (EWEC) Integration
15 Earthing System
16 Metering System (EWEC)

17 Shunt Reactor

Commissioning Checklist-Rev 1.1 Date of Issue: 21/01/2022, SAS Page II

 RECORD OF CHECKLISTS
Included
NO. COMMISSIONING CHECKLIST
YES NO NA Remarks

B MECHANICAL
1 Fire Fighting System
2 Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioner (HVAC)
3 Crane
C CIVIL
1 Building Services
D General
1 General requirements
2 Connection and Interface documentation

Commissioning Checklist-Rev 1.1 Date of Issue: 21/01/2022, SAS Page II

 POWER ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT (PED)

Section 12
OVERHEAD LINES (OHL)

Chapter A: Section 12-OHL Rev 1.1 Date of Issue: 21/01/2022, SAS

 "Consultant Logo" "Contractor Logo"

Power Engineering Department (PED)

Contract: N-XXX Contract Title
Contractor: Consultant: Substation:
Equipment: XXX kV OHL Feeder XXX

COMMISSIONING CHECKLIST
"Contractor" "Consultant" TRANSCO Engineer Remarks
No. Test Description Date
Engineer Engineer Name Signature

Checking of Access road, platforms,

1
backfilling and civil traffic protection
Checking of Foundations, Pile head
2 painting, sealing, earth wire connections,
backfilling and site clearing
Checking of Towers members,
3 Galvanizing painting, bolts &nuts
size and Aerial warning
Checking of Tower accessories, ACWL
4
and spheres (locations & efficiency)
Checking of Conductors profile, sag,
5
clearance, accessories, cond. fittings
Checking of Phase sequences at terminal
6 points, transposition and gantry
connections
Checking of OPGW, fittings, connection
7 to the towers, down leads, Vibration
dampers, joint boxes inspection

"CONTRACTOR XXX" "CONSULTANT XXX" TRANSCO PED Engineer

Signature: Signature: Signature:
Name: Name: Name:
Date: Date: Date:
Chapter A, Section 12- OHL Rev 1.1 Date of Issue: 21/01/2022, SAS Page 1 of 2
 "Consultant Logo" "Contractor Logo"

Power Engineering Department (PED)

Contract: N-XXX Contract Title
Contractor: Consultant: Substation:
Equipment: XXX kV OHL Feeder XXX

COMMISSIONING CHECKLIST
"Contractor" "Consultant" TRANSCO Engineer Remarks
No. Test Description Date
Engineer Engineer Name Signature

Checking of Insulator sets (insulators

8 &its fittings), vertical position of the
insulators
Checking of Results of earthing
9
measurements
Checking of Vertical clearances at the
10 crossing points of the roads, power lines,
telecom lines, and pipe lines.
Checking of Horizontal clearances
11
towards parallel power and pipe lines

12 Checking of road crossing sign boards

"CONTRACTOR XXX" "CONSULTANT XXX" TRANSCO PED Engineer

Signature: Signature: Signature:
Name: Name: Name:
Date: Date: Date:
Chapter A, Section 12- OHL Rev 1.1 Date of Issue: 21/01/2022, SAS Page 2 of 2
 POWER ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT (PED)

CHAPTER A
COMMISSIONING CHECKLIST
(ELECTRICAL)

Chapter A: Commissioning Checklist-ELECTRICAL Rev 2 Date of Issue: 13/05/2022, SAS